817151
983
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/992
Pagina verder
C-Class Saloon
Owner's Manual +
F206 0119 02
Front passenger airbag warning
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
driver airbag during an accident.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
F206 0119 02
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before your rst drive, please read this Owner's
Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your
vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service
life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disre-
garding them may lead to damage to the vehicle
or injury to people.
The standard equipment and product description
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol-
lowing factors:
RModel
ROrder
RNational version
RAvailability
Your vehicle may therefore dier from that shown
in the descriptions and illustrations in individual
cases.
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a
le-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehi-
cles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls dif-
fers accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi-
cles further.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The following documents are components of the
vehicle:
RDigital Owner's Manual
RPrinted Owner's Manual
RService Booklet
RSupplementary manuals relating to specic
equipment
RSupplementary documents
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times.
Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or
passed on in the event of sale or rental.
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner's Man-
ual describes all models as well as all the stand-
ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Coun-
try-specic dierences in the language variants
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
tted with all features described. This is also the
case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's
Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle
model years. The online version is the current
valid Owner's Manual version. Possible variations
to your vehicle may not be taken into account as
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles
and equipment to the state of the art and introdu-
ces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any
supplementary documents and the digital Own-
er's Manual in the vehicle.
F206 0119 02
Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics,
are subject to Copyright and other laws for the
protection of intellectual property. They may not
be copied for commercial purposes or for trans-
mission, nor changed and used on other websites.
F206 0119 02
Symbols .......................................................... 6
Quick start and Tips ........................................ 7
Seats .............................................................. 7
Children in the vehicle ..................................... 8
DIGITAL LIGHT ................................................ 9
Touch-sensitive controls ................................ 10
Radio ............................................................ 11
Wi-Fi hotspot ................................................. 12
Connecting a mobile phone ........................... 12
MBUX Voice Assistant ................................... 13
ENERGIZING Packages .................................. 13
Driving Assistance package ........................... 14
Parking Package ............................................ 14
High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2
or 3) ............................................................. 15
High-voltage battery direct current charg-
ing (mode 4) ................................................. 15
Destination entry navigation .......................... 15
New multimedia system features ................... 16
At the lling station ....................................... 24
Preparing for a holiday .................................. 35
Luggage and loading ..................................... 40
Ice and snow ................................................. 50
Help in the event of a breakdown .................. 57
Expert tips .................................................... 66
At a glance .................................................... 72
Cockpit ......................................................... 72
Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) ................................. 74
Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 76
Overhead control panel ................................. 78
Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 80
Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 82
Digital Owner's Manual ................................. 84
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 84
General notes ............................................... 85
Protection of the environment ....................... 85
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... 85
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ 86
Touch-sensitive control elements ................... 87
Mercedes me App ......................................... 87
Operating safety ............................................ 88
Fitting the licence plate onto the front
licence plate bracket ..................................... 91
Declarations of conformity and notes on
driving in dierent countries .......................... 92
Diagnostics connection ................................. 96
Qualied specialist workshop ........................ 97
Vehicle registration ....................................... 97
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 98
REACH regulation .......................................... 98
Notes for persons with electronic medical
aids .............................................................. 98
Implied warranty ........................................... 99
QR code for rescue card ............................... 99
Data storage ................................................. 99
Copyright .................................................... 103
Occupant safety .......................................... 104
Brief overview of most important points ....... 104
Information on the automatic functions of
the restraint system .................................... 111
Purpose and function of the restraint sys-
tem ............................................................. 115
Seat belts ................................................... 120
Airbags ....................................................... 121
Contents 3
F206 0119 02
Children in the vehicle ................................. 122
Brief overview of most important points ....... 122
Important safety notes ................................ 123
Suitable child restraint systems for the
transport of children ................................... 129
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint
systems ...................................................... 134
Securing the child restraint system .............. 139
Child safety locks ........................................ 144
Occupant presence reminder ...................... 146
Opening and closing .................................... 148
Key ............................................................. 148
Doors ......................................................... 152
Boot ............................................................ 157
Side windows .............................................. 163
Sliding sunroof ............................................ 166
Roller sunblinds ........................................... 170
Anti-the protection .................................... 171
Seats and stowing ....................................... 174
Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 174
Notes on grab handles ................................ 174
Seats .......................................................... 175
Steering wheel ............................................ 189
Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 192
Memory function ......................................... 194
Stowage areas ............................................ 196
Cup holders ................................................ 209
Ashtray and cigarette lighter ........................ 214
Sockets ....................................................... 215
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
and connection with the exterior aerial ........ 216
Fitting/removing the oor mats ................... 219
Light and sight ............................................ 220
Exterior lighting ........................................... 220
Interior lighting ............................................ 232
Windscreen wipers and windscreen
washer system ............................................ 234
Mirrors ........................................................ 238
Climate control ........................................... 241
Overview of climate control systems ............ 241
Operating the climate control system .......... 244
Driving and parking ..................................... 258
Driving ........................................................ 258
DYNAMIC SELECT ....................................... 282
Automatic transmission ............................... 289
Function of 4MATIC ..................................... 298
Refuelling .................................................... 298
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in
hybrid) ........................................................ 305
Parking ....................................................... 326
Driving and driving safety systems ............... 338
Trailer hitch ................................................. 426
Bicycle rack function ................................... 432
Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 434
Driver's display ........................................... 435
Notes on the driver display .......................... 435
Operating the driver display ......................... 435
Driver display menus ................................... 436
Head-up display .......................................... 449
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
system ........................................................ 451
Function of the power meter ........................ 451
Overview of status indicators on the driver
display ........................................................ 451
4Contents
F206 0119 02
Overview of status indicators on the driver
display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 452
MBUX Voice Assistant ................................. 455
Notes on operating safety ........................... 455
Operation .................................................... 455
Using MBUX Voice Assistant eectively ....... 457
Essential voice commands .......................... 458
MBUX multimedia system ............................ 463
Overview and operation ............................... 463
System settings .......................................... 486
AMG TRACK PACE ....................................... 494
Plug-in hybrid settings ................................. 499
O-road menu ............................................. 502
Fit & Healthy ............................................... 502
Navigation and trac .................................. 507
Telephone ................................................... 551
Online and Internet functions ...................... 588
Media ......................................................... 596
Radio .......................................................... 604
Sound ......................................................... 608
Maintenance and care ................................. 612
ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 612
Maintenance Management .......................... 613
Telediagnostics ........................................... 613
Engine compartment ................................... 614
Cleaning and care ....................................... 622
Breakdown assistance ................................. 632
Emergency .................................................. 632
Flat tyre ...................................................... 634
Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 640
Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 648
Electrical fuses ............................................ 653
Wheels and tyres ......................................... 658
Notes on noise or unusual handling char-
acteristics ................................................... 658
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tyres ........................................................... 658
Notes on snow chains ................................. 658
Tyre pressure .............................................. 659
Wheel change ............................................. 662
Emergency spare wheel ............................... 673
Technical data ............................................. 676
Notes on technical data .............................. 676
On-board electronics ................................... 676
Regulatory radio information ....................... 678
Vehicle identication plate, VIN and
engine number overview .............................. 797
Operating uids ........................................... 799
Vehicle data ................................................ 810
Trailer hitch ................................................. 816
Display messages and warning/indicator
lamps .......................................................... 821
Display messages ........................................ 821
Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 916
Index .......................................................... 938
Contents 5
F206 0119 02
In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following
symbols:
&WARNING Danger due to not observing
the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
#Observe the warning notices.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe environ-
mental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behaviour or envi-
ronmentally responsible disposal.
#Observe environmental notes.
*NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks
which may lead to your vehicle being dam-
aged.
#Observe notes on material damage.
%These symbols indicate useful instructions or
further information that could be helpful to
you.
#Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic
Display Display in the central display
4Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
5Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system
* Indicates a cause
6Symbols
F206 0119 02
Seats
Adjusting the seats
Vehicles without the Seat Comfort Package
1Seat fore-and-a position
2Seat height
3Seat backrest inclination
#To adjust the seat fore-and-a position: li
lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged.
#To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2
until the desired position has been reached.
#To set the seat backrest inclination: rotate
handwheel 3 forwards or backwards until
the required position has been reached.
Vehicles with the Seat Comfort Package
1Seat backrest inclination
2Seat height
3Seat cushion inclination
4Seat cushion length
5Seat fore-and-a position
Quick start and Tips 7
F206 0119 02
#To adjust the seat fore-and-a position: li
lever 5 and slide the seat into the desired
position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Vehicles with electric seats
1Head restraint height
2Seat cushion inclination
3Seat cushion length
4Seat fore-and-a position
5Seat height
6Seat backrest inclination
#Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 195).
Children in the vehicle
Safe transportation of children in the vehicle
#Always observe when children are travelling in
the vehicle (/ page 123)
#Important warning notices (/ page 124)
#Recommended child restraint systems
(/ page 131)
#Suitable seats in the vehicle for tting a child
restraint system (/ page 122)
#Approval categories for child restraint systems
(/ page 129)
#Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child
restraint systems (/ page 134)
RFitting the ISOFIX child restraint system on
the rear seat (/ page 140)
#Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child
restraint systems (/ page 136).
R(/ page 140) Fitting the i-Size child
restraint system on the rear seat
#Fastening a Top Tether belt (/ page 142)
#Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems (/ page 136)
RNotes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger airbag shuto (/ page 129)
RNotes on rearward-facing and forward-
facing child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat (/ page 127)
RSecuring the child restraint system with
the seat belt (/ page 143)
#Automatic front passenger airbag shuto
(/ page 127)
#Child safety locks for the rear side windows
(/ page 145)
#Child safety locks for the rear doors
(/ page 144)
8Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
DIGITAL LIGHT
Adaptive functions of DIGITAL LIGHT
With this system, the headlamps adapt to the
weather and the situation on the road. It also pro-
vides enhanced functions for improved illumina-
tion of the road.
The system comprises the following adaptive
functions:
RActive headlamps (/ page 223)
RCornering light (/ page 224)
RMotorway mode (/ page 224)
REnhanced fog light function (/ page 224)
RBad weather light (/ page 225)
RCity lighting (/ page 225)
RTopographical compensation (/ page 225)
#To activate or deactivate Digital Light:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RSelect Settings.
RSelect Lights.
RSelect DIGITAL LIGHT.
RActivate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
#To activate or deactivate enhanced assistance
functions:
RSelect Supporting projections.
RActivate or deactivate the desired projec-
tion.
The availability of the assistance functions is
country-dependent.
Quick start and Tips 9
F206 0119 02
Touch-sensitive controls
Overview of touch-sensitive controls
10 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
1Control panel:
w Switches the seat heating on/o
s Switches the seat ventilation on/o
V Operates the memory function
2Control panel:
Driver's display
I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and
variable limiter
3Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem
4Control panel:
c Switches the front interior lighting
on/o
u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/o
; me button
D Opens/closes the panorama sliding
sunroof rear roller sunblind
| Switches automatic interior lighting
control on/o
53 Opens/closes the panorama sliding
sunroof
3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding
sunroof front roller sunblind
6Control panel:
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT
c Active Parking Assist
& Switches the stationary heater on/o
\ Quick vehicle access
ú Fingerprint sensor
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
on/o
a Switches sound on/o
ø Adjusts the volume
7Í Operates the outside mirrors
#Observe the notes on the touch-sensitive con-
trols (/ page 87).
Radio
Operating radio
#To switch to radio:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Þ.
#To set the frequency band:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Þ.
RSelect a frequency band or a favourite.
#To set a radio station:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Þ.
RSwipe to the le or right on the control
element or select a radio station.
#To call up the radio station list:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Þ.
RSelect 4.
#To search for radio stations using station
names or frequency entry:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Þ.
Quick start and Tips 11
F206 0119 02
RSelect è.
REnter a station name or frequency.
RSelect a station.
#To store radio stations:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Þ.
RSelect f.
#To set the trac information service volume
increase:
RBriey press © on the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RTap on Z.
RSelect System.
RSelect Audio.
RSelect Navigation & traffic announce-
ments.
RSet a value for Traffic announc. vol.
increase.
Wi-Fi hotspot
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Generally, two types of Wi-Fi connection are avail-
able:
RUsing the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot-
spot
The multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hot-
spot for mobile communication devices such
as a smartphone or tablet PC.
The data volume of the vehicle or an already
connected tethering device is used for the
data connection.
Data volumes must be purchased via the
Mercedes me Portal.
The use of the vehicle data tari by external
devices is not available in all countries.
RUsing a mobile communication device as a Wi-
Fi hotspot (tethering)
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the
Internet connection of the multimedia system.
The data tari of the mobile communication
device via Acquired package is used for the
data connection.
Options for setting up a connection:
RQR code
The connection is set up by scanning the QR
code shown on the multimedia system.
RSecurity key
The connection is established by entering the
security key displayed on the multimedia sys-
tem.
Connecting a mobile phone
Connecting a mobile phone
#Activating Bluetooth®:
RMake sure that the mobile phone Blue-
tooth® is switched on.
RTap on © on the central display or
media display.
RSelect Settings.
RSelect System.
12 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
RSelect Internet and Bluetooth.
RActivate Bluetooth®.
#Searching for a mobile phone:
RTap on © on the central display or
media display.
RSelect Phone.
RSelect Z.
RSelect Devices.
RSelect Devices.
RSelect Connect new device.
#Authorising a mobile phone:
RSelect a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
#If the codes match, conrm the code on the
mobile phone.
MBUX Voice Assistant
Operating the MBUX Voice Assistant
You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to operate
the following functions depending on the vehicle
equipment:
RTelephone
RText message and e-mail
RNavigation
RRadio and media
RVehicle functions
ROnline functions
Examples of possible voice commands:
RTo operate the phone: Call my father.
RTo manage e-mails: Show me my new e-mails.
RTo operate the navigation: Search for an
Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South
London.
RTo operate the radio: Which station am I cur-
rently listening to?
RTo operate media: Play a similar track.
RTo operate climate control: My feet are cold.
RTo operate vehicle functions: Open the win-
dow.
RTo call up the weather: Will it be sunny tomor-
row?
RTo ask a general knowledge question: Who
painted the picture "The Scream"?
ENERGIZING Packages
Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT
#To start an ENERGIZING programme:
RBriey press © in the multimedia sys-
tem display.
RSelect Comfort.
RSelect ENERGIZING COMFORT.
RSelect a programme and start with ;.
#To congure an ENERGIZING programme:
RSelect a programme.
RSelect Settings.
RSwitch the functions included in the pro-
gramme on or o.
Quick start and Tips 13
F206 0119 02
#To start Power Nap:
RSelect Power Nap.
RSelect ; for the desired seat.
#To start a training programme:
RSelect Training.
RSelect a programme and start with ;.
RTo activate fragrancing for training, select
Air freshener.
#To start Tips:
RSelect Tips.
RSelect an area of the body and start
with ;.
Driving Assistance package
Functions of the Driving Assistance Package
The Driving Assistance Package contains various
functions that assist you when driving. For this
purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and radar
sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or
next to the vehicle.
The following functions are included in the Driving
Assistance Package, depending on country-spe-
cic availability:
#Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 354)
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
#Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 360)
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
#Route-based speed adaptation (country-
dependent) (/ page 361)
#Active Brake Assist (/ page 370)
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
#Active Steering Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 363)
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
#Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-
dependent) (/ page 366)
#Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend-
ent) (/ page 367)
#Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend-
ent) (/ page 363)
#Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
(/ page 384)
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
#Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 388)
Parking Package
Functions of the Parking Package
Depending on country-specic availability, your
vehicle may be equipped with various functions to
assist you with parking and manoeuvring. For this
purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and ultra-
sonic sensors to monitor the vehicle surround-
ings.
14 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Depending on the equipment version, the follow-
ing systems and functions are part of your Parking
Package:
#Reversing camera: monitors the area to the
rear of the vehicle and displays this in the
driver display (/ page 396).
#360° camera: a system comprising four cam-
eras which cover the immediate vehicle sur-
roundings and display this in the driver display
(/ page 400).
#Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: an electronic
parking assistance system which monitors the
area surrounding your vehicle and the dis-
tance to obstacles in the vicinity using ultra-
sound (/ page 406).
#Active Parking Assist: an electronic parking
assistance system which assists you when
parking or exiting a parking space by changing
gear, accelerating, braking and steering the
vehicle (/ page 410).
#Memory Parking Assist: can park your vehicle
in and leave a previously recorded and stored
parking space (/ page 420).
#Trailer Manoeuvring Assist: Trailer Manoeu-
vring Assist assists you when reversing with a
trailer. The reversing camera monitors the
articulation angle between the vehicle and the
trailer and adjusts it to a specied value.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your
speed (/ page 424).
High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
Starting and ending the charging process
#More notes on charging the high-voltage bat-
tery (/ page 305)
#Overview of the charging cable control panel
(/ page 312)
High-voltage battery direct current charging
(mode 4)
DC charging (mode 4)
Starting and ending the charging process
#Further notes on charging the high-voltage
battery (/ page 305)
#Overview of the charging cable control panel
(/ page 312)
Destination entry navigation
Entering a navigation destination
#Briey press © in the multimedia system
display.
The zero layer is shown.
The zero layer is your own personalised user
interface with the digital map in the fore-
ground and the applications that you use the
most. You can switch between the zero layer
and the home screen with a classic menu.
#Select ª.
Select the following options for destination entry:
REnter a POI, an address or a three-word
address in the input line.
Online search results for POIs (if available)
may contain additional information, for exam-
Quick start and Tips 15
F206 0119 02
ple opening times and prices. The information
is provided by an online map service.
You can nd further information about 3-word
addresses at: http://+what3words.com
RSelect a destination suggestion.
Requirements:
The Navigation option is switched on in the
user settings for Suggestions.
The multimedia system has gathered sucient
data in order to show destination suggestions.
RSelect Previous destinations.
Select a previous destination.
You can save the destination as a favourite .
RSelect POIs.
Select a POI category, e.g. j or enter a POI
name or POI category in the input line.
If search results are displayed, limit them with
Filter, for example by search position or the
desired travel time.
RSelect Contacts.
Requirements:
A mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system and contacts have been downloa-
ded.
The contact contains a navigable address.
REnter the geocoordinates as latitude and longi-
tude in the input line.
Example 1: 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees,
minutes, seconds and compass direction)
Example 2: 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal
degrees)
RSelect a destination on the map.
RSelect Favourites.
Requirements:
The destinations have been saved as favour-
ites.
RSelect Received destinations.
Requirements:
There is an Internet connection for receiving
external destinations.
The destinations have been sent to the vehi-
cle.
New multimedia system features
Information about the telephone menu
1Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
(two phone mode)
3Signal strength of the mobile phone network
16 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
4Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5Options
6Messages
7Calls up my devices
8Numerical pad
9Starts contact search
Telephone menu overview
Via the telephone menu you can use the functions
in connection with your mobile phone.
The following functions can be used:
RCall lists
RContacts
RMessages
RDevice manager
Using call lists
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue-
tooth® prole, the call lists from the mobile phone
are displayed in the multimedia system.
The following functions are available:
RMaking calls from the call list
ROpening contacts on the call list
Messages
In the message menu you can receive text mes-
sages and create and send them with the help of
the MBUX voice assistant. In addition, you can
conveniently use the read-aloud function during
the journey.
Device manager
In the device manager, you can connect your
mobile phone with the multimedia system.
You have the option of using your mobile phone
alone in single telephone mode or together with
another mobile phone in two phone mode.
Using contacts
If you permit the multimedia system to access the
contacts in your mobile phone, you can use these
in the vehicle. You can store up to 8,000 con-
tacts.
The following options are available to you via the
contacts menu:
RMaking telephone calls (calling a contact)
RNavigation
RComposing messages with the help of the
MBUX voice assistant
RAdditional options
The contacts from your mobile phone can be
downloaded automatically or manually.
Conducting a call
When conducting a call, additional functions are
available apart from making, accepting or reject-
ing a call. For example, you can switch between
calls, conduct a call with several participants or
conference calls.
It is also possible to accept or reject waiting calls.
If you receive a call while already in a call, a mes-
sage is displayed.
During a call you can activate the following func-
tions:
RMicrophone o
RFade in the numerical pad to send DTMF tones
RAdd a call
RHands-free mode to transfer the call to the
front or rear passenger compartment
Quick start and Tips 17
F206 0119 02
RPrivacy mode to transfer the call to the tele-
phone or headphones
Information about navigation
Zero layer with digital map
1Navigation module (reduced view)
Route guidance active:
The navigation module shows the information
relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view,
e.g. the destination or a trac delay
£ Ends the current route guidance
Tapping opens the navigation module in the
expanded view with the route overview
2Enters a destination
3Searches for a parking space
4Sets map orientation Ä and map type
5Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or
arrow)
6Display area with entertainment sources,
phone, active applications and suggestions
7Navigation window shows the next manoeuvre
(zoomed out view) or the route monitor
(zoomed in view)
Route guidance active: route monitor shows,
e.g. route sections, upcoming driving
manoeuvres with lane recommendations, des-
tination, trac delays, 3D images at motor-
way exits, online content
. Switches o navigation announcements
Ì Switches on navigation announcements
When you switch on the multimedia system or
aer selecting ©, the digital map is shown in
the zero layer.
%The zero layer is your own personalised user
interface with the digital map in the fore-
ground and the applications that you use the
most. You can switch between the zero layer
and the home screen with a classic menu.
The navigation system oers many options for
destination entry, route planning and route guid-
ance. The trac situation is taken into account
during route guidance. When using route guidance
with augmented reality, additional information can
be shown in a camera image before a turning
manoeuvre. Services and apps help you reach the
destination quickly, safely and in comfort.
Start entering the destination via 2 ª on the
digital map. You can enter the POI, address or
contact as the destination on-board or search
online using a map service. Or you select a previ-
ous destination. The destination can be stored
here as a favourite or be saved as an address for
home and work. When the Allow destination sug-
gestions option is switched on, the vehicle makes
suggestions based on your visited navigation des-
18 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
tinations. If external destinations and routes are
received from apps or services, these are also
available.
The following options are available for route plan-
ning, for example:
RRoute options:
e.g. avoid or use toll roads, tunnels, unpaved
roads or areas
RIntermediate destinations
RAlternative routes
RCommuter route
RAutomatic lling station and service station
search
You can record and save routes then select or
share them with a USB device.
Lane recommendations are shown during route
guidance on multi-lane roads. When driving on a
motorway, service facilities on the route ahead
can be shown and used for route guidance.
The Live Trac Information service takes the cur-
rent trac situation into account. The map can
show the current trac ow, trac incidents or
warning messages, e.g. before the end of trac
jams that pose a risk.
Hazardous situations on public roads are detected
automatically by the vehicle via Car-to-X-Commu-
nication or these can be reported by the driver.
The early warning makes it possible to adapt your
driving characteristics in good time. Accidents,
broken-down vehicles, weather hazards or a vehi-
cle with activated hazard warning lights are shown
on the map.
For route guidance with augmented reality, infor-
mation objects such as arrows indicating a turn,
street names and house numbers are shown in a
video image during the driving manoeuvre or at
trac lights.
The map shows map data from the database or
from an online map service. In small map scales,
buildings are shown as realistic images. The
online map update service makes possible the
updating of the map data.
Weather information and data from other services
can be shown on the map. Multi-storey car parks
with the corresponding equipment, deliver data
about the current occupancy and about parking
charges, for example.
The options oered vary depending on the coun-
try, vehicle equipment and available services.
Navigation module (expanded view) with route
overview
Example: route guidance is active
1Trac incident on the route
Quick start and Tips 19
F206 0119 02
Distance from current vehicle position and
remaining driving time
2Destination
3Searches for a lling station
4Switches trac information display on or o
Information on radio
1Active frequency band
2Station name or set frequency
3Settings
4Additional options
5Switches on trac reports
6Station list
7Search
Using the radio menu you can play a multitude of
radio stations and use the Internet Radio TuneIn.
Search for your preferred stations and save these
as favourites or in station lists.
%The function of TuneIn Internet radio is coun-
try-dependent.
Radio text: this function shows you the station
name, the track and the artist for the song cur-
rently playing, for example.
DAB: with the DAB function, graphically formatted
extra information about a station can be shown,
e.g. logos, album covers, music tracks, pro-
grammes, news or also service information.
Trac announcements: Trac messages can be
displayed by pressing ..
20 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Information on media
1Album cover
2Active media source
3Track and artist
4Active data storage medium and current track
number/track in playback list
5Random playback
6Repeat
7Settings
8Additional options
9Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast
forward
AAdditional categories
BPlaylists and categories
CMedia search
DControls playback
ETimeline
Using the Media application, you can set and use
the audio and video functions of your multimedia
system. You can listen to music or look at videos,
for example.
USB: Using the USBmenu, you can play back your
own audio or video data from a data storage
medium connected by USB.
Bluetooth®: Using the Bluetooth menu, you can
connect Bluetooth® audio equipment with the
multimedia system and play back the available
tracks on the audio equipment. Connecting the
device can be conveniently handled in the device
manager, so you can complete all settings with
just a few clicks.
Online music: The Online music menu allows you
to access music streaming services.
Notes on comfort
The Comfort menu makes all the functions availa-
ble that contribute to your comfort when driving
or taking a break.
Seat Comfort
The Seat menu allows you to exibly adjust the
contours of the seats to your needs by adjusting
the side bolsters and lumbar support independ-
ently. You can save these settings in your
Mercedes me prole, so they can be called up
each time you drive. With the Seat kinetics func-
tion, you can start a programme that causes
slight modications of the seat position when you
are driving. These modications promote a
healthy back.
Massage
In the Massage menu you will nd the massage
programmes that are available for your vehicle. By
selecting the desired programme you start it
directly and it runs for a period of approximately
Quick start and Tips 21
F206 0119 02
ten minutes, depending on the programme selec-
ted. With the High intensity function you can
increase the eect of the massage programme.
Ambient light
In the Ambient light menu you can set the colour
and brightness for your ambient lighting. Using
the Link zones function, the ambience, accent
and impression zones can be regulated separately
so that you can set the lighting of your vehicle
individually.
Information about smartphone integration
Using the Smartphone Integration menu, various
applications are available that can bring the func-
tions of your mobile phone to the multimedia sys-
tem display. Operation can by carried out via the
touchscreen or voice control, for example.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec-
ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia
system. Also for use with two phone mode with
Smartphone Integration, only one additional
mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth®
with the multimedia system.
Use Android Auto for mobile phones with the
Android operating system and use Apple CarPlay®
with your iPhone®. The full functionality of
Android Auto and Apple CarPlay® is only possible
with an Internet connection.
Information on AMG Performance
Using the AMG Performance menu, you can call
up information about the performance of your
vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle the following menus are
available:
REnergy flow
Visualisation of the energy ow in the vehicle
RConsumption
Display of the current and average consump-
tion values of the vehicle
RVehicle
Display of vehicle data
REngine
Display of engine data such as current power
and torque
RDrive
Display of current data of various drive ele-
ments such as current, voltage and tempera-
ture
Information about vehicle info
You can have important vehicle information dis-
played in the Info menu. At a glance you will have
an overview of vehicle and engine data or current
consumption values, for example. In addition, you
can call up the Digital Owner's Manual via the
Owner's Manual menu item.
Vehicle data
The following data will be shown, for example:
RActivity of the acceleration and brake pedal
RActivity of the suspension strut
RWheel angle
RG-force display for the linear and lateral accel-
eration
22 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Engine data
The following data is shown:
RTransmission oil temperature
REngine/coolant temperature
RPerformance
RTorque
RBoost pressure
Consumption data
Depending on your driving style, this display
shows the current and average fuel consumption.
Together with the displays of vehicle and engine
data, you can adapt your driving style to be as
ecient and economical as possible.
Information about In-Car Oce
Using the In-Car Office menu you can connect
your online services with the multimedia system.
You then have multiple options available:
ROrganising your meetings and telephone con-
ferences.
RManaging your e-mails and appointments.
RHave navigation to the location for a meeting.
Information about Mercedes me Apps
Various services and online functions are available
via the Apps Mercedes me menu:
RManaging Mercedes me services
RUsing the dashcam
RUsing the web browser to surf the Internet
You require a user account, and have to connect
your vehicle with the user account, in order to be
able to use services.
%If the Mercedes me App is available on a
mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be
accomplished using the QR code shown.
Please not that the available features are country-
dependent.
Information on settings
In the Settings you can set the basic congura-
tion for your multimedia system and the vehicle.
You have access to all functions in this menu,
from switching the driver assistance systems on
and o to display and language settings.
The settings are structured in the following
menus:
RAssistance
RVehicle
RLights
RSystem
Assistance menu
With the Assistance menu you have direct access
to the driver assistance systems which are instal-
led in your vehicle and can either switch these on
or o, or congure according to your wishes.
Vehicle menu
Here you can activate the following functions, for
example:
RAutomatic folding in of the outside mirrors
when parking the vehicle
RAutomatic adjustment of the seat and steering
wheel, for comfortable entry and exit from the
vehicle
Quick start and Tips 23
F206 0119 02
RAutomatic activation of the 360° camera
when selecting reverse gear
Light menu
All the light settings can be carried out in the
Lights menu. You can activate or deactivate the
Intelligent Light System here, set for how long
your vehicle should remain lit aer parking or
unlocking or switch the function o.
System menu
All important settings for the multimedia system
can be carried out in the System menu.
You can carry out the following settings, for exam-
ple:
RSetting the system language
RThe conguration of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
RSetting of time and date
At the lling station
Refuelling the vehicle
&WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly ammable.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Before refuelling, switch o the vehicle
and, if tted, the stationary heater and
keep switched o during lling.
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&WARNING Risk of re and explosion due
to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.
#Before you open the fuel ller cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic vehicle body.
24 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#To avoid creating another electrostatic
charge, do not get into the vehicle again
during the refuelling process.
&WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
While the vehicle is running, component parts
in the exhaust system may overheat without
warning.
#Never refuel using petrol.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a petrol engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Refuel only using unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms
to European EN 228, or an equivalent
specication.
Petrol can contain up to 25 %‑ of ethanol by
volume.
#See the information label in the fuel ller
ap for compatible fuels.
Further information about compatible fuels
can be obtained at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Throughout Europe, you can nd compatibility
markings on fuel pumps or pump nozzles suit-
able for your vehicle.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RDiesel
Rregular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
Rpetrol with more than 3 % methanol by
volume‑, e. g. M15, M30
Rpetrol with metallic additives
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel with sulphur-free diesel fuel.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, only refuel with low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content below 50
ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RPetrol
RMarine diesel
RHeating oil
RPure biodiesel or vegetable oil
Quick start and Tips 25
F206 0119 02
RPetroleum or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
with a petrol engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
RDo not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
*NOTE Do not refuel diesel-engined vehi-
cles with petrol
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
RDo not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
*NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to
overlling the fuel tank
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o.
If too much fuel has been added due, for
example, to a faulty lling pump:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RPlug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel tank
was bled before refuelling (/ page 302).
Observe the notes on service uids and fuel.
The recommended octane number for your vehi-
cle can be found on the information label in the
fuel ller ap.
26 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
1Fuel ller ap
2Bracket for the fuel ller cap
3Tyre pressure table
4QR code for rescue card
5Fuel type
%Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel ller
ap opens automatically aer the fuel tank
has been bled (/ page 302).
#Press in the centre on the back area of fuel
ller ap 1.
#Turn the fuel ller cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
#Insert fuel ller cap from above into bracket
2.
#Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel.
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches o.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: The tank ller
neck is designed for refuelling at diesel lling
pumps.
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being
lled, your vehicle is equipped with an incor-
rect fuelling protector. This function may be
deactivated in some countries due to local
conditions. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not run the
fuel tank empty.
When the fuel tank is completely empty, top
up with at least 5 l diesel before starting the
vehicle.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a ller neck
with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel
engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the ller neck cannot slide into the
tank.
#Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#Close fuel ller ap 1.
Relling AdBlue®
*NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®
being in the fuel
#AdBlue® must not be used to ll the fuel
tank.
#Only use AdBlue® to ll the AdBlue®
tank.
#Do not overll the AdBlue® tank.
Quick start and Tips 27
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte-
rior due to AdBlue® leakage
#Aer topping up, carefully close the
AdBlue® rell container.
#Avoid carrying AdBlue® rell containers
permanently in the vehicle.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
The following messages appear in order in the
driver display when the AdBlue® tank requires
relling:
RRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The
AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve
range. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
RTop up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue® level
will lead to limited performance aer the
remaining distance displayed has been driven.
Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
RTop up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance
from the speed displayed. Aer the remaining
distance displayed has been covered, it will no
longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up
at least the displayed quantity of AdBlue®.
RTop up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on, wait
60 sec. or engine start not possThe AdBlue®
tank is empty. You can no longer start the
vehicle. Top up at least the displayed quantity
of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait
approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the
driver display Service.
%The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly
on the driving style and operating conditions.
The actual range can therefore deviate from
the calculated range.
Opening the AdBlue® ller cap
#Press on the centre of the back area of fuel
ller ap 1.
#Turn AdBlue® ller cap 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
%You can also place the AdBlue® ller cap in
the ller cap holder in the hinge arm of the
fuel ller ap.
28 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Relling AdBlue®
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you top up
AdBlue® at a pump. If no AdBlue® pump is availa-
ble, you can also top up AdBlue® with a canister.
#Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® rell canis-
ter 4.
#Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening
of AdBlue® rell canister 4 until hand-tight.
#Screw disposable hose 3 onto the ller neck
of the vehicle until hand-tight.
#Li up and tip AdBlue® rell canister 4.
The lling process stops when the AdBlue®
container is completely full.
AdBlue® rell canister 4 can be removed
when it has been only partially emptied.
#Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and
AdBlue® rell canister 4 in reverse order.
#Replace the AdBlue ller cap® 2 and turn it
clockwise until it audibly engages.
#Close fuel ller ap 1.
#Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
%If it was no longer possible to start the vehicle
due to the empty AdBlue® tank, it takes up to
60 seconds for topping up to be detected.
#Start the vehicle.
%Avoid storing AdBlue® rell containers perma-
nently in the vehicle.
Topping up the windscreen washer system
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
Quick start and Tips 29
F206 0119 02
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
#Open cap 1 by the tab.
#Top up the washer uid.
30 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
windscreen wipers are switched on while
wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before changing the wiper
blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi-
tion
#Switch the vehicle on and then o again
immediately.
#Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the
î button on the combination switch for
approximately three seconds (/ page 234).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement
position.
%Depending on the time of production of the
vehicle, dierent variants of wiper blades may
be used.
Removing the wiper blades (variant 1)
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Press release knob 2.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
direction of arrow 3.
Removing the wiper blades (variant 2)
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
Quick start and Tips 31
F206 0119 02
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
the direction of arrow 4.
Fitting the wiper blades (variant 1)
#Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob
2 engages.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
Fitting the wiper blades (variant 2)
#Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
32 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
Maintenance display
There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly
mounted wiper blade.
#Remove protective lm 1 from the service
indicator.
When the colour of the service indicator changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
Checking the engine oil level using the driver's
display
Requirements
RThe engine has been warmed up.
RThe vehicle is parked on a level surface.
RThe engine is running at idle speed.
RThe bonnet is closed.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to
30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
longer with an active driving style.
Driver's display:
4Service
The engine oil level is shown.
One of the following messages will appear on the
driver's display:
REngine oil level Measuring now…: the engine
oil level cannot be determined yet.
#Repeat the request aer a maximum of
30 minutes' driving.
REngine oil level OK and the bar display for
indicating the engine oil level on the driver's
Quick start and Tips 33
F206 0119 02
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the engine oil level is correct.
REngine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar dis-
play for indicating the engine oil level on the
driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
#Add 1 l of engine oil.
REngine oil level Reduce and the bar display for
indicating the engine oil level on the driver's
display is yellow and is above "max":
#Drain o any excess engine oil that has been
added. To do so, consult a qualied specialist
workshop.
RFor engine oil level, switch on vehicle
#Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil
level.
REngine oil level System inoperative: The oil
level sensor is defective or not connected.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
REngine oil level System currently inoperative
#Close the bonnet.
Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
reduced braking power aer washing the
vehicle
Braking eciency is reduced aer washing the
vehicle.
#Aer the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the
trac conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
*NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is activated,
the vehicle will brake automatically in certain
situations:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RHOLD function
RActive Parking Assist
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate
these systems e.g. during towing or in the car
wash.
*NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
#Before driving into a car wash make sure
that the car wash is suitable for the vehi-
cle dimensions.
#Ensure there is sucient ground clear-
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sucient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car
wash, ensure the following beforehand:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
ted.
Rthe HOLD function is switched o.
Rthe 360° camera or the reversing camera is
switched o.
34 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are com-
pletely closed.
Rthe outside mirrors are folded in.
Rthe blower for the ventilation and heating is
switched o.
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
Rthe key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could
open unintentionally.
Rfor car washes with a conveyor system:
-neutral i is engaged.
-If you would like to leave the vehicle while
it is being washed, make sure the key is
located in the vehicle. The park position
j is otherwise automatically engaged.
%If, aer the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Preparing for a holiday
Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad
Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not nec-
essary to convert the headlamps. The legal
requirements are also met in countries in which
trac drives on the other side of the road.
Vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT: as a convenience
function, the headlamps will automatically adjust
when you cross the border into countries where
trac drives on the other side of the road. If nec-
essary, the headlamps can also be adjusted man-
ually in the Low beam menu (/ page 232).
The automatic light adjustment function is availa-
ble:
RIf automatic is selected on the Low beam
menu
RIf navigation and the navigation position are
available
In the following cases, check the headlamp set-
ting and change it manually if necessary:
RIf the Low beam setting (left/right-side traf-
fic) Manual adjustment only display message
is displayed.
RIf the Check low beam setting (left/right-
side traffic) display message is displayed.
Once the headlamps have been converted:
ROncoming trac will not be dazzled.
RThe edge of the road will not be illuminated as
far or as high.
RThe "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog
light" functions will not be available.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
&WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged
tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
Quick start and Tips 35
F206 0119 02
#Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres
immediately.
&WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insucient tyre tread
Insucient tyre tread will result in reduced
tyre grip.
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi-
cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
#Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the
tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for:
RSummer tyres: 3 mm
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
#For safety reasons, replace the tyres
before the legally-prescribed limit for the
minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu-
larly, at least once a month or as required, for
example, prior to a long journey or driving o-
road:
RCheck the tyre pressure (/ page 659).
RVisually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
RCheck the valve caps.
RVisual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Removing the safety vest
There is a high-visibility waistcoat compartment
on the door shelves of all doors for storing a high-
visibility waistcoat.
#To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop
2.
#Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the
safety vest.
#Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and
place it in the safety vest 1.
36 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the lower
edge of the armrest into the safety vest com-
partment. Ensure that the loop 2 hangs out
so that it is easy to reach.
%Remove the packaging lm before sliding it
into the safety vest compartment for a new
safety vest. Otherwise, it may cause uninten-
tional slipping or make removing dicult.
Observe the legal requirements in the individ-
ual countries.
1Maximum number of washes
2Maximum wash temperature
3Do not bleach
4Do not iron
5Do not tumble dry
6Do not dry clean
7Class 2 safety vest
The requirements dened by the legal standard
are only fullled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
RThe reective strips are damaged or dirty
RThe maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
RThe uorescence property decreases, e.g. due
to permanent exposure to sunlight.
Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally
friendly way:
RPlease contact your local waste disposal com-
pany.
Removing the warning triangle
#Push both sides of the warning triangle holder
1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.
#Remove the warning triangle 2.
The warning triangle is located in the boot lid.
First-aid kit (so-sided) overview
Quick start and Tips 37
F206 0119 02
The rst-aid kit (so-sided) 1 is located on the
le or right side of the boot, depending on the
vehicle version.
Map data update overview
As the content of a digital road map has a short
life, outdated data may have a negative eect on
all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navi-
gation experience, you should install all of the
map updates oered by Mercedes-Benz.
The following options are available for the update
of map data:
ROnline map update
RUpdates from the Mercedes me Portal
RUpdate at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
Additional costs can be incurred in this proc-
ess.
Online map update
Requirements:
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RThe Online Map Update service is available for
your region.
RThe service has been activated.
%The Online Map Update service is only availa-
ble in certain countries.
Installation takes place in the background as an
automatic map update.
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the
available map updates for the European regions in
which the vehicle is located or is moved.
The online map update is activated at the latest
aer the next time the vehicle is switched on.
Updates from the Mercedes me Portal
The map data for several regions can also be
updated manually. Log in with your Mercedes me
user account at: https://www.mercedes-
benz.de/
Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account
> My vehicles > Selection of car > Online Map
Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a
storage medium.
Aer the map data has been copied, connect the
storage medium with your vehicle. Select the noti-
cation with information about a new version of
the map data and start the installation. Aer the
MBUX multimedia system has been restarted, the
updated map data is used.
Entering a POI or address
Requirements:
RFor the online search:
-There is an Internet connection.
-Mercedes me connect is available.
-You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal.
38 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
-The vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the terms
of use.
-Further information can be found at:
https://www.mercedes.me
-The service is available and has been acti-
vated.
%If Online Search is not available, the search is
performed using the data of the digital map.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
Example: entering a POI or address
1Input line with current entry
2Search result
3Selects destination search, displays further
destination searches with double arrow
4Deletes an entry
5Adopts the search result in the input line and
continues the search
6Deletes the last character entered
7Hides the keypad
8Switches to handwriting recognition
(/ page 484)
9Starts the MBUX voice assistant
(/ page 455)
ASets the written language
BSwitches to digits and special characters
CSwitches to upper-case or lower-case letters
#Enter a destination. The entries can be made
in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
%Online search results for POIs may contain
additional information, for example opening
times and ratings. The information is provided
by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all
countries.
Quick start and Tips 39
F206 0119 02
The following entries can be made, for example in
1:
RTown, street, house number or street, town
RPostcode
RPOI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
RTown, POI name
RContact name
RGeo-coordinates (/ page 512)
RThree-word addresses from what3words
(/ page 513)
Entering three-word addresses is possible in
the online search .
#Hide the keyboard with a.
#Select the destination in the list.
The following menu shows the selected desti-
nation with the address information and a cor-
responding map section.
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
Searching for radio stations using station names
or frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select è.
#Enter a station name or frequency.
#Select a station.
Luggage and loading
Attaching a roof luggage rack
&WARNING Risk of accident due to exceed-
ing the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual
driving characteristics as well as the steering
and braking characteristics alter.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv-
ing characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired.
#Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will nd information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
*NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to
observe the maximum permissible clear-
ance height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum
permissible clearance height, the roof and
other vehicle parts may be damaged.
#Please observe the indicated maximum
clearance height.
#If the vehicle exceeds the permissible
clearance height, do not drive in.
#Take the modied vehicle height in the
case of roof superstructures or other
carrier systems into account.
*NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved
roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage
racks that have not been tested and approved
for Mercedes-Benz.
40 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Use only roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the sliding sunroof can be
fully raised when the roof luggage rack is
tted.
#Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the boot lid can be fully
opened when the roof luggage rack is t-
ted.
#Position the load on the roof luggage
rack in such a way that the vehicle will
not sustain damage even when it is in
motion.
*NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding
sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage
racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam-
aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to
open it when using a roof luggage rack not
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#When a roof luggage rack is tted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised
to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
*NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when
a roof luggage rack is tted
If the sliding sunroof is opened when a roof
luggage rack is tted, the sliding sunroof may
be damaged by the roof luggage rack.
#Do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof
luggage rack is tted.
The sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ven-
tilation of the vehicle interior.
*NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched
when being opened.
#Do not use metallic or hard objects.
#Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Quick start and Tips 41
F206 0119 02
#Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening
points beneath covers 1.
#Comply with the installation instructions of the
roof luggage rack manufacturer.
#Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself
or a vehicle occupant.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
&WARNING Risk of an accident because
the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
There is a risk of the following, in particular:
RThe vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
protect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RA child restraint system is no longer prop-
erly supported or properly positioned and
may no longer full its function as inten-
ded.
RThe seat backrest cannot restrain objects
or goods in the boot or load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
engaged, especially:
RAer the seat has been adjusted.
RAer the load compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards
Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri-
cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise,
the seat backrest is not locked.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
dren.
Requirements
RThe rear seat backrest head restraints are fully
inserted.
RThe rear armrest has been folded up.
Folding the rear outer seat backrests forward
You can fold the centre and right seat backrests
forwards separately.
The le seat backrest can be folded forwards only
together with the centre seat backrest.
If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat
backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back
into place.
#Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an
upright position and locked to the le seat
backrest (/ page 205).
42 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into
marked position 2.
#Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
#To fold the le seat backrest forward: briey
press le button 1.
The le seat backrest folds forward together
with the centre seat backrest.
If the le seat backrest is not locked with the
centre seat backrest, this will be shown on the
central display.
#To fold the right seat backrest forward: briey
press right button 1.
The right seat backrest will fold forwards.
%If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat
backrests forwards, fold the right seat back-
rest forwards.
Folding the centre rear seat backrest forwards
separately
If you no longer require the folded-down seat
backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back
into place.
Quick start and Tips 43
F206 0119 02
#Press release catch 3.
#Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself
or a vehicle occupant.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
&WARNING Risk of an accident because
the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
There is a risk of the following, in particular:
RThe vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
protect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RA child restraint system is no longer prop-
erly supported or properly positioned and
may no longer full its function as inten-
ded.
RThe seat backrest cannot restrain objects
or goods in the boot or load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
engaged, especially:
RAer the seat has been adjusted.
RAer the load compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards
Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri-
cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise,
the seat backrest is not locked.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
dren.
*NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt when folding back the seat back-
rest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
be damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
44 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat backrest.
#Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
#Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked
in place, red lock verication indicator 2 will
be visible.
Opening the stowage space under the boot oor
&WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
load trunk oor
If you drive when the trunk oor is open,
objects could be thrown around and strike
vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
abrupt changes in direction.
#Always close the trunk oor before a
journey.
*NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot
oor
If the boot oor has been attached to the drip
rail via the handle, damage may arise when
the boot lid is closed.
#Disconnect the handle before closing the
boot lid and close trunk oor.
#Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2.
Folding the ball neck out and in
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball
neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may
come loose.
Quick start and Tips 45
F206 0119 02
#Always engage the ball neck as descri-
bed.
&WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck
swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when
unlocking or when it has not been properly
engaged.
There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's
range of movement!
#Unlock the ball neck only when its range
of movement is unobstructed.
#Always be sure the ball neck is engaged
when folding inwards.
*NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
erty due to folded-out ball neck
#When the trailer is not coupled or the
bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
neck or, in the case of a fully electric
trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
rect use of the trailer hitch
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle,
the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be
damaged in the process.
#Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
trailer or attaching approved carrier sys-
tems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a xture for a towing
eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is
permitted.
#When towing or tow-starting with the
trailer hitch, observe the information in
the section "Fitting and removing the
towing eye."
Folding the ball neck out
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Keep the swivel range clear.
#Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
#Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold out from under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
46 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow
until it engages audibly in a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release
switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place,
the Trailer coupling Check lock message will
appear on the driver's display.
#Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean.
Check that it is either greased or dry (grease-
free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
Folding the ball neck in
#Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
#Push the ball neck in the direction of the
arrow until it engages audibly behind the
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message
on the driver display will disappear.
Observe the information about indicators on the
driver display:
RIndicator and warning lamps (/ page 916)
Quick start and Tips 47
F206 0119 02
RDisplay messages (/ page 821)
Overview of tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
1Tie-down eyes
%Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehi-
cles equipped with the through-loading fea-
ture in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK
Quickfold).
Overview of the front stowage compartments
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
1Stowage spaces in the doors
2Stowage compartment under the armrest with
multimedia and USB connections
48 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
3Stowage compartment in the front centre
console with cup holders, USB ports and
charging module for wireless charging of
mobile phones
4Glove compartment
%The rubber mat in the stowage compartment
in front centre console 3 can be removed
for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior
(/ page 629).
Locking/unlocking the glove compartment
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. #Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock-
wise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).
Quick start and Tips 49
F206 0119 02
Ice and snow
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
&WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged
tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
#Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres
immediately.
&WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insucient tyre tread
Insucient tyre tread will result in reduced
tyre grip.
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi-
cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
#Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the
tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for:
RSummer tyres: 3 mm
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
#For safety reasons, replace the tyres
before the legally-prescribed limit for the
minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu-
larly, at least once a month or as required, for
example, prior to a long journey or driving o-
road:
RCheck the tyre pressure (/ page 659).
RVisually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
RCheck the valve caps.
RVisual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Setting the speed limit for winter tyres
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
5Winter tyre limit
#Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
Setting a speed
#Select Winter tyre limit.
#Select a speed.
Notes on snow chains
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rectly tted snow chains
If you have tted snow chains to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components.
#Never t snow chains to the front
wheels.
#Only t snow chains on the rear wheels
in pairs.
50 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to components of the vehi-
cle body or chassis due to tted snow
chains
If you t snow chains to the front wheels of
4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo-
nents of the vehicle body or chassis.
#Only t snow chains to the rear wheels
of 4MATIC vehicles.
Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
RSnow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
RFor safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specically approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with
the same quality standard.
RComply with the installation instructions of the
snow chain manufacturer.
RIf snow chains are tted, the maximum per-
missible speed is 50 km/h.
RVehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use
Active Parking Assist when snow chains are
tted.
%You can permanently limit the speed for driv-
ing with winter tyres (/ page 353).
%You can deactivate ESP® to pull away
(/ page 345). This allows the wheels to spin,
achieving increased tractive power.
Notes on windscreen washer uid
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
*NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due
to unsuitable windscreen washer uid
Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may
damage the plastic surface of the exterior
lighting.
#Only use windscreen washer uids which
are also suitable for use on plastic surfa-
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
*NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windscreen washer uids
#Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win-
terFit with other windscreen washer u-
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other-
wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone-
ously.
Recommended windscreen washer uid:
Rabove freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
Rbelow freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Quick start and Tips 51
F206 0119 02
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa-
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all
year round.
Topping up the windscreen washer system
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
52 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
#Open cap 1 by the tab.
#Top up the washer uid.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
windscreen wipers are switched on while
wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before changing the wiper
blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi-
tion
#Switch the vehicle on and then o again
immediately.
#Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the
î button on the combination switch for
approximately three seconds (/ page 234).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement
position.
%Depending on the time of production of the
vehicle, dierent variants of wiper blades may
be used.
Removing the wiper blades (variant 1)
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Press release knob 2.
Quick start and Tips 53
F206 0119 02
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
direction of arrow 3.
Removing the wiper blades (variant 2)
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
the direction of arrow 4.
Fitting the wiper blades (variant 1)
#Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob
2 engages.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
54 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Fitting the wiper blades (variant 2)
#Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
Maintenance display
There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly
mounted wiper blade.
#Remove protective lm 1 from the service
indicator.
When the colour of the service indicator changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
Quick start and Tips 55
F206 0119 02
Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/o
via the operating unit
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison-
ous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sucient ventila-
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if
the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
#Always switch the stationary heater o in
enclosed spaces without an air extrac-
tion system, e.g. in garages.
#Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
vehicle or the auxiliary heating is run-
ning.
#Open a door or a roof hatch on the wind-
ward side of the vehicle to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of re due to hot station-
ary heater components and exhaust gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
#When the stationary heater is switched
on, make sure that:
Rhot vehicle parts do not come into
contact with ammable materials.
Rthe exhaust gas can ow out of the
stationary heater exhaust pipe unhin-
dered.
Rthe exhaust gas does not come into
contact with ammable materials.
*NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta-
tionary heater or stationary ventilation
operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery.
#Aer heating or ventilating the vehicle
twice, drive for a longer period of time.
Requirements
RThe vehicle has a stationary heater.
RThe outside temperature is below 15°C.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
%If the ll level of the fuel tank is too low, auxili-
ary heating mode may be restricted.
56 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#Set the temperature using the s and r
arrows on the climate bar on the central dis-
play.
#Press button 1.
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1
will light up or go out.
The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow-
ing meanings:
RBlue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
RRed: the stationary heater is switched on.
RYellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch o
automatically aer 50 minutes.
Help in the event of a breakdown
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
#Press button 1.
The hazard warning lights will switch on automati-
cally if:
Rthe airbag has been deployed.
Rthe vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a
speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning
light system will switch o automatically at
approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o
the hazard warning light system using the warning
lamp button.
Removing the re extinguisher
&WARNING Risk of accident due to an
incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the
driver's footwell
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or
block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and
injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
#Always store and secure the re extin-
guisher in the bracket.
Quick start and Tips 57
F206 0119 02
#Do not remove the re extinguisher while
driving.
#Pull the tab 1 upwards.
#Fold tab 1 down.
#Remove re extinguisher 2.
Removing the safety vest
There is a high-visibility waistcoat compartment
on the door shelves of all doors for storing a high-
visibility waistcoat.
#To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop
2.
#Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the
safety vest.
#Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and
place it in the safety vest 1.
#Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the lower
edge of the armrest into the safety vest com-
partment. Ensure that the loop 2 hangs out
so that it is easy to reach.
%Remove the packaging lm before sliding it
into the safety vest compartment for a new
safety vest. Otherwise, it may cause uninten-
tional slipping or make removing dicult.
Observe the legal requirements in the individ-
ual countries.
1Maximum number of washes
2Maximum wash temperature
3Do not bleach
4Do not iron
58 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
5Do not tumble dry
6Do not dry clean
7Class 2 safety vest
The requirements dened by the legal standard
are only fullled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
RThe reective strips are damaged or dirty
RThe maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
RThe uorescence property decreases, e.g. due
to permanent exposure to sunlight.
Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally
friendly way:
RPlease contact your local waste disposal com-
pany.
Removing the warning triangle
#Push both sides of the warning triangle holder
1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.
#Remove the warning triangle 2.
The warning triangle is located in the boot lid.
First-aid kit (so-sided) overview
The rst-aid kit (so-sided) 1 is located on the
le or right side of the boot, depending on the
vehicle version.
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on
the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of
an accident, rescue services can use the QR code
to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for
your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the
most important information about your vehicle
(e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact
form.
Quick start and Tips 59
F206 0119 02
Further information can be obtained at https://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code
Starting assistance and charging the 12‑V‑ bat-
tery
Preparing starting assistance/charging
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle.
#Shi the transmission to position j.
#Switch o the vehicle and all electrical con-
sumers.
#Open the bonnet.
Illustrations exemplary
#Open the cover 1 of the jump-starting con-
nection point.
#Open the cover 2 of the positive clamp 3
on the jump-starting connection point.
Starting assistance
#Connect positive clamp 3 on your vehicle to
the positive pole of the donor battery using
the jump lead. Always begin with positive
clamp 3 on your own vehicle rst.
60 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#On the assisting vehicle leave the engine run-
ning at idling speed.
#Connect negative terminal on the second bat-
tery and the earth point 4 on your vehicle to
the jump lead. Begin with the donor battery
rst.
#Start the engine of your own vehicle.
#Let the engines run for several minutes.
#Before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on
an electrical consumer in your own vehicle,
e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance process is complete:
#First, remove the jump lead from earth point
4 and negative pole of the donor battery,
then from positive clamp 3 and positive pole
of the donor battery. Begin each time with the
contacts on your own vehicle rst.
#Aer removing the jump lead, close cover 2
of positive clamp 3.
#Close the cover 1.
If your vehicle has been started with starting
assistance, it may not be possible to use the elec-
tric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Charging
#Connect the positive clamp 3 on the vehicle
and the positive pole of the charger with the
charging cable. Always begin with positive
clamp 3 on the vehicle rst.
#Connect the negative terminal of the charger
and the earth point 4 on the vehicle with the
charging cable. Start with the charger.
#Start the charging process.
When the charging process is complete:
#First remove the charging cable from the earth
point 4 and negative terminal of the charger,
then from the positive clamp 3 and positive
pole of the charger. Begin each time with the
contacts on the vehicle rst.
#Aer removing the charging cable, close cover
2 of positive clamp 3.
#Close the cover 1.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Notes on electrical fuses
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric line could be overloaded.
This could result in a re.
#Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
ed new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to
electrical components or systems or their
functions being considerably restricted.
Quick start and Tips 61
F206 0119 02
#Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-
Benz with the respective specied fuse
rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognise by the col-
our and the label. The fuse ratings and further
information to be observed can be found in the
fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the
boot (/ page 656).
*NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by
moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
#When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor-
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectied at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
RThe vehicle is secured against rolling away.
RAll electrical consumers are switched o.
RThe vehicle is switched o.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side (/ page 654)
RFuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(/ page 656)
RFuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 656)
RFuse box in the boot (/ page 656)
Notes on at tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident due to a at
tyre
A at tyre severely aects the driving charac-
teristics as well as steering and braking.
tyres that do not feature run-at characteris-
tics:
#Do not drive on with a at tyre.
#Change the at tyre immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Alternatively, consult a qualied special-
ist workshop.
Run-at tyres:
#Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-at
tyres).
In the event of a at tyre, the following options are
available depending on your vehicle's equipment:
RVehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible
to continue the journey for a short period of
62 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
time. Make sure you observe the notes on
MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres)
(/ page 635).
RVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the
tyre so that it is possible to continue the jour-
ney for a short period of time. To do this, use
the TIREFIT kit (/ page 636).
R(/ page 572)Vehicles with Mercedes me
connect: you can make a call for breakdown
assistance via the overhead control panel in
the case of a breakdown .
RAll vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 667).
%(/ page 673)The emergency spare wheel is
only available in certain countries.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
Other than some country-specic variants, vehi-
cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
Consult a qualied specialist workshop to nd out
which tyre-change tool kit is necessary and
approved for a wheel change on your vehicle.
You require the following tools, forexample, to
change a wheel:
RJack
RChock
RWheel wrench
RCentring pin
%The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
The maximum load capacity of the jack can
be found on the sticker axed to the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of
a malfunction, please contact a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag
1 in the boot.
%When stowing the tool bag, ensure that it is
adequately secured.
The tool bag contains:
RJack
RGloves
RWheel wrench
RCentring pin
RFolding chock
RRatchet for jack
Plug-in hybrid
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1
on the boot oor.
Quick start and Tips 63
F206 0119 02
TIREFIT kit storage location
Plug-in hybrid
The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the le-hand side
of the boot when delivered.
Not plug-in hybrid
The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the le-hand side
of the boot when delivered.
Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit
may be in a dierent position in the boot.
%Depending on the power category (LK), the
tyre ination compressor weighs as follows:
RLK1 – 12 V/10 A, 120 W, 0.8 kg
RLK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.9 kg
You can nd information on the power cate-
gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back
of the tyre ination compressor.
The tyre ination compressor is maintenance-
free. If there is a malfunction, please contact
a qualied specialist workshop.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
#Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods.
#Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is
discharged:
RThe vehicle cannot be started.
RThe electric parking brake cannot be released
or applied.
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission cannot be shied to position i
or j.
64 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
%Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the
transmission cannot be shied to position i
or if the display does not show anything,
transport the vehicle (/ page 651). A towing
vehicle with liing equipment is required for
vehicle transportation.
*NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis-
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing
at excessively high speeds or over long distan-
ces.
#A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be
exceeded.
#A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded.
&WARNING Risk of accident when towing a
vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away
is heavier than the permissible gross mass of
your vehicle, the following situations can
occur:
Rthe towing eye may become detached.
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or overturn.
#Before tow-starting or towing away,
check if the vehicle to be tow-started or
towed away exceeds the permissible
gross mass.
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away,
its permissible gross mass must not exceed the
permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
#Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi-
cation plate (/ page 797).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door; the transmission otherwise automati-
cally shis to position j.
#Fit the towing eye (/ page 652).
#Fasten the towing device.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec-
tion of the tow bar
#Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
#Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/ page 155).
#Do not activate the HOLD function.
#Deactivate tow-away protection
(/ page 172).
#Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 375).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi to
position i.
#Release the electric parking brake.
Quick start and Tips 65
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of accident due to limited
safety-related functions during the towing
process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon-
ger available in the following situations:
Rthe vehicle is switched o.
Rthe brake system or power steering system
is malfunctioning.
Rthe energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is towed away, signicantly
more eort may be required to steer and
brake than is normally required.
#Use a tow bar.
#Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle
away.
*NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
#Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Expert tips
Additional functions of buttons
Opening and closing the windows using the air-
recirculation button (convenience closing/open-
ing)
When the air-recirculation mode is activated, the
side windows can be closed automatically, e.g.
before entering a tunnel. When the air-recircula-
tion mode is deactivated, the side windows can
be moved back to their original position.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
paying attention during convenience clos-
ing
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof.
#When the convenience closing feature is
operating, monitor the entire closing
process and make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
paying attention during convenience clos-
ing
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side windows.
#When the convenience closing feature is
operating, monitor the entire closing
process and make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
66 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
#To close windows: press and hold the but-
ton g in the climate bar in the central dis-
play or the air conditioning control panel until
the windows move.
The windows close and air-recirculation mode
switches on.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment from the
convenience opening feature
During convenience opening parts of the body
could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side windows.
#If someone becomes trapped, immedi-
ately press the W button in the door
to open the side windows.
The side windows stop.
#To continue closing the side windows,
pull on the W button.
#To reopen closed windows: press and
hold g the button in the climate bar in the
central display or the air conditioning control
panel until the windows move.
The windows move back to their original posi-
tion and air-recirculation mode switches o.
Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof
closes or opens simultaneously.
If body parts become entrapped in the sliding
sunroof:
#To stop: press the 3 button.
#To open: pull the button 3 back.
Resetting the climate control settings
#Press and hold the Climate menu entry on the
climate bar of the multimedia system for four
seconds.
The climate control settings will be reset to
the basic settings.
Activating/deactivating trac announcements
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Z
#Select Radio announcements.
The trac information service is switched on
or o.
Useful vehicle functions
Storing the parking position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using the memory but-
ton
Requirements
RReverse gear has not been engaged.
Quick start and Tips 67
F206 0119 02
#Use button 2 to select the front-passenger
outside mirror.
#Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
#Press the V button.
#Conrm immediately using button 1 to store
the setting.
%No more than three seconds may pass
between the V button and button 1
being pressed. The mirror adjustment will be
cancelled aer three seconds.
Tips for on the move
Vehicle conditions for automatic engine stop or
start
Conditions for automatic engine stop:
RThe ECO start/stop function is switched on.
RThe brake system does not require a running
engine.
RThe atmospheric air pressure is within the
range that is suitable for the system.
RThe engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture.
REngine diagnostics are not active.
RThe transmission oil temperature is within the
range that is suitable for the system.
RThe temperature in the vehicle interior is
within the set range.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
RThe system detects that there is no moisture
on the windscreen when the air conditioning
system is switched on.
RThe system does not detect a steep gradient.
RThe bonnet is closed.
Conditions for automatic engine start:
RThe brake system requires a running engine.
RThe atmospheric air pressure has exceeded
the range that is suitable for the system.
REngine diagnostics require a running engine.
RThe transmission oil temperature has excee-
ded the range that is suitable for the system.
RThe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range.
RThe system detects moisture on the wind-
screen when the air conditioning system is
switched on.
68 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
Good to know
Deactivating the function of the key
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the
function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are
also deactivated. Access or drive authorization via
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that
key. Activate the function of the key so that all of
its functions are available once again.
You can also deactivate the key's function to
reduce the key's energy consumption if you do
not use the vehicle or a key for an extended
period of time.
#Press and hold the key button s.
#With the key button s pressed, immedi-
ately press key button Ü twice in quick
succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once
briey, and then again for longer.
%You have the following options to reactivate
the key:
RPress any button on the key.
RStart the vehicle with the key in the centre
console storage compart-
ment(/ page 263).
Overview of emergency call systems
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) can help to reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services at
the site of the accident. They help locate an acci-
dent site in places that are dicult to access.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emer-
gency call automatically (/ page 583) or man-
ually (/ page 583).
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in
the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Indicators in the displays
The following messages appear on the central dis-
play or the media display of both emergency call
systems:
RSOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched
on or the emergency call system is malfunc-
tioning. This does not necessarily indicate
complete failure of the emergency call system.
Emergency calls can still be transmitted.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does
not take account of the availability of mobile
phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre.
The functional readiness of the emergency call
system on the vehicle can be seen when the
SOS NOT READY display disappears once the
vehicle is switched on.
RG: the icon appears in the display during
an active emergency call.
%If there is a malfunction of the emergency call
system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag
or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.
You can recognise a fault in the emergency
call system by the following displays:
RA corresponding message will also appear
in the driver display.
RThe SOS button lights up red continuously.
Quick start and Tips 69
F206 0119 02
Emergency guide
In the event of an accident or breakdown, the
emergency guide shows safety notes on the cen-
tral display.
These include, for example:
RRecommended actions when leaving the vehi-
cle
RProcedure for safely removing seat belts in the
event of an accident whereby the vehicle
comes to rest on its roof
The emergency guide is activated in the following
situations:
ROccupant protection system has been trig-
gered
RAn emergency call is made
RCertain breakdown situations
%The availability as well as the scope of the
emergency guide can vary depending in the
country and vehicle equipment.
70 Quick start and Tips
F206 0119 02
F206 0119 02
Le-hand-drive vehicles
72 At a glance – Cockpit
F206 0119 02
1Steering wheel gearshi paddles 294
2Combination switch 222
3Driver's display 435
4DIRECT SELECT lever 289
5ü Start/stop button 262
è ECO start/stop function 273
6Central display 463
7Glove compartment 48
8Stowage compartment 48
9Switch panel for:
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 285
c Active Parking Assist 412
& Switches the stationary heater on/o 56
\ Quick vehicle access
ú Fingerprint sensor 472
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
on/o
463
a Switches sound on/o 481
ø Adjusts the volume 482
A£ Hazard warning light system 57
BControl panel for the MBUX multimedia system 470
CAdjusts the steering wheel 190
ý Switches the steering wheel heater
on/o
191
DControl panel:
Driver's display 435
Cruise control or variable limiter 352
I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 357
EDiagnostics connection 96
FOpens the bonnet 615
G! Electric parking brake 333
HLight switch 220
At a glance – Cockpit 73
F206 0119 02
Le-hand-drive vehicles
74 At a glance – Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)
F206 0119 02
1± Increases recuperation 276
2Driver's display:
õ Operational readiness 452
Power meter 451
Trip computer 438
ECO Assist 278
3q Reduces recuperation 276
4Central display:
Plug-in hybrid settings 499
Energy ow display 501
5Sets charging times 499
6÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 282
7° Haptic accelerator pedal 280
86 Depressurises the fuel tank 302
At a glance – Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) 75
F206 0119 02
Driver's display
76 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps
F206 0119 02
1#! Turn signal lights 222
2ï Trailer hitch 921
3ä Indicator lamp inoperative
4# Electrical fault 923
5Ù Power steering (red) 921
Ù Power steering (yellow) 921
Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) 921
66 Restraint system 918
7ü Seat belt 918
8L Distance warning 929
9! ABS 929
Ah Tyre pressure monitoring system 936
B; Engine diagnostics 923
Cå ESP® OFF 929
÷ ESP®929
D% Diesel engine: preglow
E_ Plug-in hybrid: reduced power 920
Fp Petrol engine: reduced power 923
Gÿ Coolant temperature 923
HCoolant temperature display 438
I! Electric parking brake (yellow) 927
J! Electric parking brake (red) 927
KJ Brakes (red) 927
J Brakes (yellow) 927
L8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location
indicator
923
MFuel level 438
NK High beam 222
L Low beam 220
T Standing lights 220
OR Rear fog light 221
PH Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 935
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 77
F206 0119 02
78 At a glance – Overhead control panel
F206 0119 02
1Sun visors (folding, available in extendable
design as an optional extra)
2c Switches the front interior lighting on/o 232
3u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o 232
4; me button 572
5| Switches automatic interior lighting con-
trol on/o
232
6G SOS button 572
7Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/o 232
83 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun-
roof
166
3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun-
roof roller sunblind
166
9PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 109
AInside rear-view mirror 239
BSwitches the le-hand reading lamp on/o 232
At a glance – Overhead control panel 79
F206 0119 02
80 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment
F206 0119 02
1ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle 153
2Opens the door 153
3Adjusts the seats electrically 179
4w Switches the seat heating on/o 187
5s Switches the seat ventilation on/o 188
6V Operates the memory function 195
7W Opens/closes the rear le side window 163
8W Opens/closes the le side window 163
9Í Operates the outside mirrors 238
Ap Opens/closes the boot lid 157
BW Opens/closes the right side window 163
CW Opens/closes the rear right side window 163
DD Rear-window roller sunblind 171
ES Child safety lock for the rear side win-
dows
145
FAdjusting the head restraints 182
GSeat adjustment using the multimedia system 186
HAdjusting the seat fore-and-a position 175
IAdjusting the 4-way lumbar support 182
JAdjusting the seat backrest inclination 177
KAdjusting the seat height 177
LAdjusts the seat cushion inclination 177
At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 81
F206 0119 02
82 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
F206 0119 02
1B-pillar with:
QR code for accessing the rescue card 59
2Safety vests 36
3; me button 572
G SOS button 572
4To check and top up operating uids 799
5Tow-starting or towing away 64
6Flat tyre 62
7Starting assistance 60
8£ Hazard warning light system 57
9Fire extinguisher 57
AFuel ller ap with:
information label on fuel type 24
information label on tyre pressure 660
QR code for accessing the rescue card 59
BTow-starting or towing away 64
CFirst-aid kit (so sided) 37
DTIREFIT kit 636
EWarning triangle 37
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 83
F206 0119 02
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Info
5Owner's Manual
5Open Digital Owner's Manual
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func-
tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi-
media system.
#Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Owner's Manual:
RQuick start: nd the rst steps towards
adjusting your seat (driver's side).
RTips: nd information that prepares you for
certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
RAnimations: watch animations of the vehicle
functions.
RMessages: receive additional information
about the messages in the driver's display.
RLanguage: select the language for the Digital
Owner's Manual.
You can search for keywords using the search
eld Search, in order to nd quick answers to
questions about the operation of the vehicle.
1Menu
2Search
3Back
4Contents section
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual,
suchas warning notes, can be expanded and col-
lapsed.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital Own-
er's Manual:
Driver's display: call up brief information as dis-
play messages in the driver's display
MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice con-
trol system
Global search: call up search results for contents
of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
deactivated while driving.
84 Digital Owner's Manual
F206 0119 02
Protection of the environment
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate the
vehicle.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally
responsible manner to help protect the envi-
ronment. Please observe the following recom-
mendations on operating conditions and per-
sonal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor-
rect.
#Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no lon-
ger need them).
#Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib-
ute to environmental protection.
#Always have maintenance work carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
#Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
#Do not warm up the vehicle while sta-
tionary.
#Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
#Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
#Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
#Switch o the vehicle in stationary traf-
c, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
#Drive in a fuel-ecient manner. Observe
the ECO display for an economical driv-
ing style.
Plug-in hybrid
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by irresponsible disposal
of the high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials
which are harmful to the environment.
#Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries
at a qualied specialist workshop.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU countries only:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-
Life Vehicles Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dis-
mantlers has been established for you to return
your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
points free of charge. This makes an important
contribution to closing the recycling circle and
conserving resources.
General notes 85
F206 0119 02
For further information about the recycling and
disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back
conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-
Benz website for your country.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components
Mercedes‑Benz AG oers recycled recondi-
tioned components and parts with the same
quality as new parts. The same entitlement
from the implied warranty is valid as for new
parts.
#Recycled reconditioned components and
parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG.
*NOTE Impairment of the operating e-
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as
control units and sensors for the restraint sys-
tems, may be installed in the following areas
of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
RSill
RSeats
RCockpit
RDriver's display
RCentre console
Rlateral roof frame
#Do not install accessory parts such as
audio systems in these areas.
#Do not carry out repairs or welding.
#Have accessories retrotted at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety that have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical
systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction.
Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of
equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and acces-
sory parts that have been specically approved
for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver-
sion parts and accessory parts that have been
specically approved for your vehicle model for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of
such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
they have been ocially approved or independ-
ently approved by a testing centre.
Certain parts are ocially approved for installa-
tion or modication only if they comply with legal
requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
86 General notes
F206 0119 02
meet the approval requirements. The use of non-
approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's gen-
eral operating permit.
This will be the case in the following situations:
RThe vehicle type is dierent from that for
which the vehicle's general operating permit
was granted.
ROther road users could be endangered.
RThe emissions or noise levels get worse.
Always specify the vehicle identication number
(VIN) (/ page 797) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz GenuineParts.
Touch-sensitive control elements
In addition to conventional switches and buttons,
your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive con-
trol elements.
These are located in the following areas of your
vehicle:
RRoof and door operating unit
RClimate control
RSteering wheel
RMBUX multimedia system
The control elements feature touch-sensitive user
interface surfaces. These surfaces are controlled
by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or trigger
functions, forexample.
When using touch-sensitive user interface surfa-
ces, observe the following points to avoid opera-
tional problems:
RDo not ax stickers orsimilar objects on the
surfaces
RDo not attach a smartphone‑ or other holders
to the surface of the central display.
RProtect the surfaces against moisture and wet
conditions.
RKeep the surfaces free of dust and dirt
(/ page 629).
In addition to a symbol, some touch-sensitive con-
trol elements also feature integrated indicator
lamps. Ensure that the symbol of the control ele-
ment is pressed during use.
Mercedes me App
Notes about the on-demand feature
You can also activate various functions (on-
demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me
aer purchasing your vehicle.
Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me
Requirements
RThe vehicle has a wireless connection.
RThe vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
account.
Ordering and activating on-demand feature
#Add the desired on-demand feature for the
vehicle to the shopping basket in the
Mercedes me Store.
#Complete the order.
The on-demand feature is activated when
operating the vehicle.
General notes 87
F206 0119 02
Speeding up activation
#Switch the vehicle o and lock it.
#Unlock the vehicle aer about two minutes
and switch on the vehicle.
The on-demand feature has been activated.
For some features, a notication also appears
in the vehicle's multimedia system.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the
process.
Operating safety
&WARNING Risk of accident due to mal-
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs car-
ried out, this could result in malfunctions or
system failures.
#Always have the prescribed service‑ and
maintenance work or any required
repairs carried out in a qualied work-
shop.
&WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
to improper modications to electronic
components
Modications to electronic components, their
soware or wiring can impair their functional-
ity and/or the functionality of other networked
components or safety-relevant systems.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating
safety.
#You must not tamper with wiring, elec-
tronic components, or their soware.
#Always have work on electrical and elec-
tronic devices carried out at a qualied
specialist workshop.
If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen-
eral operating permit is rendered invalid.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data".
&WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
material coming into contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system
If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or
twigs, come into contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system, they may ignite.
#When driving o-road or on unpaved sur-
faces, check the underside of the vehicle
at regular intervals.
#In particular, remove any trapped parts
of plants or other ammable material.
#If damage should occur, immediately
inform a qualied specialist workshop.
88 General notes
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv-
ing too fast and due to impacts to the
vehicle underbody or suspension compo-
nents
In the following situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high kerb or an unpaved road
Rthe vehicle is driven too fast over an obsta-
cle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the
body, underbody, suspension components,
wheels or tyres may not be visible. Compo-
nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly
fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon-
ger absorb the resulting force as intended.
If the underbody panelling is damaged, am-
mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs
can collect between the underbody and the
underbody panelling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot parts
of the exhaust system.
#Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualied specialist
workshop.
or
#If driving safety is impaired while con-
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
the vehicle immediately, while paying
attention to road and trac conditions,
and contact a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Plug-in hybrid
Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and at
least one electric motor. The energy supply for
operating the vehicle electrically is provided by
the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
&DANGER Risk of death and re due to
modied and/or damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical
system is under high voltage. If you modify
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage
on-board electrical system or touch damaged
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In
addition, modied and/or damaged compo-
nents may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the
underbody, components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system may be damaged
although the damage is not visible.
#Never make any modications to the
high-voltage on-board electrical system.
#Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its
high-voltage on-board electrical system
components have been modied or dam-
aged.
General notes 89
F206 0119 02
#Never touch damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
#Aer an accident, do not touch any com-
ponents of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system.
#Aer an accident, have the vehicle trans-
ported away.
#Have the components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system checked at a
qualied specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary.
The components of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system are marked with yellow warning
stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system are orange.
Example
High-voltage components which can become very
hot are marked with a separate warning sticker:
vehicles with hybrid systems generate signicantly
less noise than vehicles with combustion engines.
When driving in electric mode, the vehicle may
not be heard by other road users due to the signif-
icantly reduced noise generated.
It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped
with a sound generator, which serves as an acous-
tic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective
device is prescribed by law.
The exterior noise of the sound generator (AVAS)
is perceptible at low speeds in the vehicle interior
and is not a malfunction.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching
damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-
tem contain individual high-voltage compo-
nents. These high-voltage components are
under high voltage.
If you modify component parts of these high-
voltage components or touch damaged com-
ponent parts, you may be electrocuted.
90 General notes
F206 0119 02
High voltage components may be damaged in
an accident, although the damage may not be
visible.
#Never perform modications to compo-
nent parts of high-voltage components.
#Never touch damaged component parts
of high-voltage components.
#Never touch component parts of high-
voltage components aer an accident.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
contain high voltage components. These compo-
nents are marked with a high voltage label:
Example
All work on high voltage components must be car-
ried out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Fitting the licence plate onto the front licence
plate bracket
The information label can be found on the licence
plate bracket, either embossed or in sticker form.
*NOTE Malfunctions and system failures
due to incorrect assembly of the licence
plate on the front licence plate holder
If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on
the front licence plate holder, sensors, cam-
eras or driving and safety systems may mal-
function or fail.
General notes 91
F206 0119 02
Observe the following points when assembling
the licence plate on the front licence plate
holder:
#Assemble the licence plate directly on
the licence plate holder without advertis-
ing media or other holders.
#Assemble the licence plate so that it
does not protrude above or to the side of
the licence plate adapter.
Declarations of conformity and notes on driving
in dierent countries
Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle
components has been checked and certied
according to the currently valid version of Regula-
tion UN-R 10.
Country-specic information for regulatory radio
components
Notes when crossing national borders
You must observe the radio regulatory provisions
for the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the vehicle.
Wireless vehicle components
Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries
that recognize the EU manufacturer's declaration
of conformity:
The following information applies to all wireless
components of the vehicle and of the information
systems and communication devices integrated in
the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
ensure that all wireless components installed in
the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity
are available at the following web address:
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/
ece-row/baix/cars/certicates-of-conformity/
en_GB/index.html
You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Israel only:
It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-
installed radio component that could aect the
92 General notes
F206 0119 02
wireless specications of the device, including
soware changes, replacement of the original
antenna, or adding the option to connect the
device to an external antenna, without rst obtain-
ing approval from the Communica-tions Ministry,
because of concern about wireless interference.
For the United Kingdom only:
The following information applies to all wireless
components of the vehicle and of the information
systems and communication devices integrated in
the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the radio components
declare that all radio equipment installed in the
vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statu-
tory requirements. The full texts of the declara-
tions of conformity are available at the following
web address:
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/
ece-row/baix/cars/certicates-of-conformity/
en_GB/index.html
For Brazil only:
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
These systems are not protected against harmful
interference and must not cause interference in
properly approved systems.
For Jamaica only:
All wireless vehicle components have received
type approval from the SMA.
For Nigeria only:
Connection and use of the radio communications
equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the
Nigerian Communications Commission
General notes 93
F206 0119 02
For countries of the Eurasian Economic Union
only:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all
wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
ply with the technical regulations for two-way
radios. You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Ukraine only:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the
wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
ply with the technical regulations for two-way
radios. You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
TIREFIT kit
Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that
recognize the EU manufacturer's Declaration of
Conformity:
CE Declaration of Conformity
Method 1
Copy and translation of the original Declaration of
Conformity:
CE
EU Declaration of Conformity
We
Dunlop Tech GmbH
Oenbacher Landstr. 8
DE-63456 Hanau
Declare under our sole reponsibility that
Product Description: Electrical Air Pump
Serial Number: 000000001 to 999999999
Brand: Mercedes Benz
Model: DT 200146 (UW0851ve-IBK LK2), DT
200177 (UW0872-IBK-LK2P), 200156 (UW0867-
LK3)
Mercedes Benz Part Number: A 000 583 8205, A
000 583 8305, A 000 583 8405
is in conformity with all relevant provisions of the
directives:
Electromagnetic Compatibility 2014/30/EU
and complies with the following standards :
EN IEC 55014-1: 2021
EN IEC 55014-2: 2021
Including (Category I)
Dunlop Tech GmbH, Oenbacher Landstr. 8,
63456 Hanau, Germany authorized representative
for the complation of the technical documenta-
tion.
Factory name: UNIK WORLD IND. CO., LTD.
94 General notes
F206 0119 02
Address: NO. 110-2, Xiwei, Shanhua Dist., Tainan
City 74163, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Name Dunlop Tech GmbH
Authorized Representative: Bernd Schuchhardt
Adress: Oenbacher Landstraße 8, 63456 Hanau,
Germany
15-07-2022 [B. Schuchhardt]
Signature
Declaration place: Germany
Method 2
Copy and translation of the original Declaration of
Conformity:
EC Declaration of Conformity
In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC
We hereby declare that the product
Product designation: Daimler tyre ination com-
pressor
Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 -
IBK-LK2
MB part no.: A 000 583 8200
complies with the following relevant regulations:
2014/30/EU
Applied harmonised standards, in particular:
DIN EN 55014-1: 2012
DIN EN 55014-2: 2016
Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH
Address: Oenbacher Landstrasse 8, 63456
Hanau
Authorised representative: IMS dept.
Date: December, 2019
Signature: i.A. [Signa-
ture] i.A. [Signa-
ture]
IMS-AE IMS-AE-L
UKCA Declaration of Conformity
Copy and translation of the original Declaration of
Conformity:
Dunlop Tech GmbH
UKCA Declaration of Conformity
Product :
Product
Electrical Air pump
Model / Brand
DT 200146 (UW0851ve-IBK LK2), DT 200177
(UW0872), DT 200156 (UW0867-LK3)
Mercedes Benz Part Number:
A 000 583 8205, A 000 583 8305, A 000 583
8405
Authorized Representative (UK-GB):
Name:
Address:
Contact person:
This declaration is issued under the sole responsi-
bility of the mentioned Representative. The sub-
ject equipment under declaration is in conformity
with the UK-GB Regulation(s) below:
Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1091
The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations
2016
Below designated standards were taken confer-
ring a presumption of conformity with the relevant
UK-GB regulations:
General notes 95
F206 0119 02
BS EN IEC 55014-1: 2021
BS EN IEC 55014-2: 2021
Authorized Representative responsible for making
this declaration:
Name: Dunlop Tech GmbH
Authorized Representative: Bernd Schuchhardt
Address: Oenbacher Landstraße 8, 63456
Hanau, Germany
15-07-2022 [B. Schuchhardt]
(Date) Signature
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is a technical inter-
face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, in the
context of repair and maintenance work or for
reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop.
Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con-
nected in a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to con-
necting devices to the diagnostics con-
nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics con-
nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle
systems and operating safety may be
impaired.
#For safety reasons, we recommend that
you only use and connect products
approved by a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This will jeopardise the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Make sure that there is always sucient
clearance for the pedals.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
*NOTE Battery discharging from using devi-
ces connected to the diagnostics connec-
tion
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
#Check the charge level of the battery.
#If the charge level is low, charge the bat-
tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis-
tance.
Please also note the information about the 12 V
battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving
and Parking" chapter (/ page 268).
96 General notes
F206 0119 02
Connecting and using another device with the
diagnostics connection can have the following
eects:
RMalfunctions in the vehicle system
RPermanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions
for this matter.
Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos-
tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This may
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require-
ments of the next emissions inspection during the
main inspection.
Qualied specialist workshop
A qualied specialist workshop has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualications to correctly
carry out any necessary work on your vehicle.
This particularly applies to safety-critical work.
Always have the following work carried out on
your vehicle at a qualied specialist workshop:
RSafety-critical work
RService and maintenance work
RRepair work
RModications as well as installations and con-
versions
RWork on electronic components
RPlug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system
RVehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system:
work on the high-voltage component of the 48
V on-board electrical system
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service centre.
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi-
cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle
checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration
data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been
registered in your name in the following cases:
Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an author-
ised specialist dealer.
Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
General notes 97
F206 0119 02
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about
any change in address or vehicle ownership. You
can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre,
for example.
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehi-
cle-specic supplements and further supple-
mentary documents
Rtechnical data for the vehicle
RTrac rules and ‑regulations of the country
you are currently in
RMotor vehicle laws and safety standards of the
country you are currently in
RRadio regulatory requirements of the country
you are currently in
REACH regulation
For EU and EFTA countries only:
The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EC) No.
1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup-
ply information about substances of very high
concern (SVHCs).
Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowl-
edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used
and to enable customers to safely handle these
substances. According to supplier information and
internal product information, there are SVHCs
known to Mercedes‑Benz AG that are found in
individual components of this vehicle in quantities
of over 0.1 percent by weight.
Further information can be obtained at the follow-
ing addresses:
Rhttps://reach.mercedes-benz.com/de/
home/
Rhttps://reach.mercedes-benz.com/en/
home/
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully
developing vehicle systems, completely rule out
the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic
medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.
In addition, there are components installed in the
vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of
the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par
with permanent magnets. These elds can be
found, for example, in the area around the multi-
media and sound system or also in the area of the
seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.
For this reason, the following can occur in isolated
cases, depending on the aids used:
RMedical aids malfunctioning
RAdverse health eects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac-
turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the
device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there
is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil-
ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-
Benz AG recommends using only few electrical
98 General notes
F206 0119 02
vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance
from the components.
Plug-in hybrid
When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a
distance of at least an arm's length between the
medical aid and the following components:
Rthe power supply equipment
This includes charging stations in the form of a
wallbox or a public charging point, for exam-
ple.
Rvehicle components carrying live voltage
This includes the charging cable and the
charging control box, for example.
Only have repairs and maintenance work in the
area of the following components carried out at a
qualied specialist workshop:
Rvehicle components carrying live voltage
Rtransmission aerials
Rmultimedia system and sound system
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a
qualied specialist workshop.
Implied warranty
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from
violation of these operating instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation
of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#Follow the instructions in these operat-
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi-
cle damage.
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on
the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of
an accident, rescue services can use the QR code
to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for
your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the
most important information about your vehicle
(e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact
form.
Further information can be obtained at https://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code
Data storage
Data processing in the vehicle
Electronic control units
Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle.
Control units process data they receive, generate
themselves or exchange with each other, forexam-
ple from vehicle sensors. Some control units are
required for the safe operation of your vehicle. For
example, some assist you when driving, suchas
driver assistance systems, while others enable
convenience or infotainment functions.
The following section provides general information
about data processing in the vehicle. Additional
information regarding which vehicle data is collec-
ted, saved and transmitted to third parties and for
what purpose can be found in the information
directly related to the relevant functional charac-
teristics in the respective Owner's Manual. This
information is available online and digitally,
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
General notes 99
F206 0119 02
Personal data
A unique vehicle identication number identies
every vehicle. Depending on the country, this
vehicle identication number can also be used to
determine the identity of the vehicle keeper,
e.g.by the authorities. There are also other ways
of tracing data collected from the vehicle back to
the keeper or driver, suchas the license plate
number.
The data generated or processed by control units
may therefore be attributable to a person or, in
certain circumstance, become attributable to a
person. Depending on which vehicle data are
available, it may be possible to make inferences
about, forexample, your driving behaviour, loca-
tion, route or use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of
data
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are
generally obliged to provide the authorities with
data stored by the manufacturer upon request
and to the extent required. Forexample, this may
be the case during the investigation of a criminal
oence.
State authorities are themselves authorised to
read out data from the vehicle in individual cases
and within the applicable legal framework. In the
case of an accident, information that can help
with an investigation can be taken from the airbag
control unit, forexample.
Operational data in the vehicle
To operate the vehicle, control units process data.
This includes the following data, forexample:
RVehicle status information suchas the speed,
longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration,
number of wheel revolutions or the fastened
seat belts display
RAmbient conditions, suchas temperature, rain
sensor or distance sensor
Generally, this data is volatile and will not be
stored beyond the period of operation and will
only be processed within the vehicle itself. Con-
trol units, forexample, vehicle keys, oen contain
data memories. Their use permits the temporary
or permanent documentation of technical infor-
mation about the vehicle's operating state, com-
ponent loads, maintenance requirements and
technical events or faults.
Depending on the technical equipment, the fol-
lowing data are stored:
ROperating status of system components,
suchas ll levels, tyre pressure or battery sta-
tus
RMalfunctions or faults in important system
components, suchas lights or brakes
RSystem reactions in special driving situations,
suchas an airbag deployment or the interven-
tion of stability control systems
RInformation on events leading to vehicle dam-
age
In certain cases, storing data that would have oth-
erwise been temporary may be required. This may
be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunc-
tion, forexample.
If you make use of services, e.g.repair services,
maintenance work,– the stored operating data
can be read out and used together with the vehi-
cle identication number – if necessary. Service
network employees suchas workshops and manu-
100 General notes
F206 0119 02
facturers, and third parties suchas breakdown
services can read out the data. The same is true
in the event of warranty claims and quality assur-
ance measures.
In general, the readout is performed via the legally
prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in
the vehicle. The selected operating data docu-
ment the vehicle's or individual components'
technical conditions, help with fault diagnosis,
compliance with warranty obligations and quality
improvement. To that end, these data, particularly
information about component loads, technical
events, malfunctions and other faults, may be
transmitted to the manufacturer along with the
vehicle identication number. Furthermore, the
manufacturer is subject to product liability. For
this reason, the manufacturer also uses opera-
tional data from the vehicle, e.g. for recalls. This
data can also be used to review the customer's
warranty and guarantee claims.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
service outlet or at your request as part of repair
or maintenance work.
Convenience and infotainment functions
You can store the vehicle's convenience and indi-
vidual settings and change or reset them at any
time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
includes the following settings, forexample:
RSeat and steering wheel positions
RSuspension tuning and climate control set-
tings
RIndividual settings, suchas interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into vehicle infotainment functions
yourself.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
includes the following data, forexample:
RMultimedia data, suchas music, lms or pho-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
RAddress book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an integra-
ted navigation system
REntered navigation destinations
RData about the use of Internet services
This data for convenience and infotainment func-
tions may be saved locally in the vehicle or on a
device connected to the vehicle, suchas a smart-
phone, USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have
entered this data yourself, you can delete it at any
time.
This data is transmitted only from the vehicle to
third parties at your request. This applies in par-
ticular when you use online services per your
selected settings.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or
Apple CarPlay®)
If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to the vehicle. You can then control them
using the control elements integrated into the
vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone
can be output via the multimedia system. Certain
information is simultaneously transferred to your
smartphone. Depending on the type of integra-
tion, thisincludes position data, day/night mode
and other general vehicle statuses. For more
General notes 101
F206 0119 02
information, please consult the vehicle Owner's
Manual/infotainment system.
This integration allows the use of selected smart-
phone apps, suchas navigation or music player
apps. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle
data is not directly accessible. The type of addi-
tional data processing is determined by the pro-
vider of the app being used. The settings you can
make, if any, depend on the specic app and your
smartphone's operating system.
Online services
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection,
it enables data to be exchanged between your
vehicle and additional systems. The wireless net-
work connection is made possible by the vehicle's
own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end
device that you have brought into the vehicle,
forexample, a smartphone. Online functions can
be used via the wireless network connection. This
includes online services and applications/apps
provided to you by the manufacturer or by other
providers.
Manufacturer's services
Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the
individual functions are described by the manu-
facturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the
Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's web-
site, where the relevant data protection informa-
tion is also given. Personal data may be used for
the provision of online services. Data are
exchanged via a secure connection, suchas the
manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any per-
sonal data which are collected, processed and
used, other than for the provision of services, is
done so exclusively on the basis of legal permis-
sion. This is the case, forexample, for a legally
prescribed emergency call system, a contractual
agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of
which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva-
ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and
services, suchas an emergency call system.
Third party services
If you use online services from other providers
(third parties), these services are the responsibil-
ity of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms of
use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no
inuence on the content exchanged.
For this reason, when services are provided by
third parties, please ask the service provider in
question for information about the type, extent
and purpose of the collection and use of personal
data.
Data protection rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and
range of functions of your vehicle as well as the
services you use and the services on oer, you
are entitled to dierent data protection rights.
Further information on data protection and your
data protection rights can either be found on the
manufacturer's website or you will receive this
information as part of the various services and
service oers. There you will also nd the contact
102 General notes
F206 0119 02
information for the manufacturer and its data pro-
tection ocers.
At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a
specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have
data read out which is stored only locally in the
vehicle.
Copyright
Information on licences for free and open-source
soware used in your vehicle can be found on the
data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and
with updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
General notes 103
F206 0119 02
Brief overview of most important points
Basic information
Make sure that the following prerequisites in par-
ticular have been met so that the components of
the restraint system are able to provide the inten-
ded level of protection:
RSit correctly (/ page 105).
RFasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 106).
-Function of the ü seat belt warning
lamp (/ page 108).
-Function of the rear seat belt status dis-
play (/ page 108).
RThe 6 restraint system warning lamp has
gone out aer the self-test (/ page 107).
RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps dis-
play the correct status of the front passenger
airbag (/ page 109).
For clear understanding
The chapter "Occupant safety" includes informa-
tion on equipment, functions and behaviours that
contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.
The information is structured as follows:
RThe most important information in brief: in this
chapter, you are provided with an overview of
the relationship between the restraint system
and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occu-
pants.
RSpecic information: in further sections of the
chapter "Occupant safety", you can nd spe-
cic information on the equipment and func-
tions of the restraint system.
RKeyword directory: you can also nd certain
subjects in this Owner's Manual using the key-
word directory.
Information on the following subjects, among oth-
ers, are not provided in the chapter "Occupant
safety":
RChildren in the vehicle (/ page 122)
RDriving and driving safety systems
(/ page 338)
RStowage areas (/ page 196)
Dening generic terms clearly
In this Owner's Manual, the following generic
terms are used:
ROccupant safety: comprises the components
and system functions which help to minimise,
as much as possible, the stresses on and con-
sequences for vehicle occupants during an
accident.
RRestraint system: comprises those compo-
nents which, along with the vehicle structure,
help prevent vehicle occupants from poten-
tially coming into contact with parts of the
vehicle interior. The seat belts and airbags, for
example, are components of the restraint sys-
tem.
RChild restraint system: you can nd all infor-
mation on this subject in the chapter "Children
in the vehicle" (/ page 122).
Be diligent
For the components of the restraint system to
provide the intended level of protection, it is
essential that your posture is correct and that the
seat belt is correctly fastened.
104 Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points
F206 0119 02
Bear in mind that negligence when adjusting your
sitting position and fastening the seat belt may
have serious consequences. Be diligent and make
sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting cor-
rectly and have fastened their seat belts properly
before starting every journey (/ page 105).
Information on the correct seat position
The seat position must be correct in order for the
components of the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection.
The seat position inuences both the protection
provided by the seat belt and the additional pro-
tection provided by the airbag.
A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly
perfectly upright and a correctly fastened seat
belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it
is deployed.
Keep space considerations in mind when choos-
ing a seat. With the seat in the correct, nearly
upright position, your head should not touch the
roof.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot provide its intended protec-
tive function.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the
following.
#Put the seat in the correct position.
#Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to
ensure that the lap belt never lies across
the abdomen.
#Observe the following information.
In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, observe the following
information:
RBefore starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly (/ page 174).
When doing so, make sure you are able to fas-
ten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forward from the seat
belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.
RKeep your distance from the airbags, espe-
cially the front airbags. Set the driver's seat
and front passenger seat as far back as possi-
ble while making sure the seat belt is fastened
correctly.
RIf persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle
occupants should maintain an sucient dis-
tance to the parts of the vehicle interior in
front of them.
RMake sure there are no people, animals or
objects between the vehicle occupants and an
airbag.
RIf you are the driver, observe the following
information on the correct position of the driv-
er's seat (/ page 174).
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the driver's airbag to
fully deploy.
RAssume a nearly upright sitting posture, with
your buttocks positioned as far back as possi-
ble in the gap between the seat cushion and
the seat backrest.
Your back must lie as atly and as rmly as
possible against the seat backrest.
Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points 105
F206 0119 02
RWhile driving, do not lean forward and do not
lean against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags.
RSit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi-
ble. Your thighs are slightly supported by the
seat cushion
Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for exam-
ple. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy-
ment area of the airbag.
RFasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 106).
Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened correctly
and are sitting properly.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
seat belt correctly without a suitable addi-
tional restraint system.
#Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall
in a suitable restraint system.
Observe the following information on the correct
seat position and posture (/ page 105).
Each vehicle occupant must observe the following
notes in particular:
RThe seat belt must not be twisted.
RThe shoulder belt strap must be routed
forward from the seat belt outlet over the
centre of your shoulder.
RThe shoulder belt strap should neither touch
your neck nor be routed under your arm or
behind your back.
RThe lap belt must be routed as low down
across the hips as possible.
In addition, push the lap belt down as far as
possible across your hips and pull tight with
the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
RAer being tightened, the shoulder belt strap
and lap belt must t snugly against the body.
RAvoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
RNever route the seat belt across sharp, poin-
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
ROnly one person should use each seat belt at
any one time.
106 Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points
F206 0119 02
RNever secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the vehi-
cle's occupants.
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.
If you are driving with a child in the vehicle,
observe the information in the chapter "Children
in the vehicle" (/ page 122)
Observe the instructions for loading the vehicle
when securing objects, luggage or loads
(/ page 196).
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can-
not be pulled out any further.
#Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat
belt into seat belt buckle 2 of the corre-
sponding seat.
#To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3
on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt
outlet to the desired position.
#To engage the seat belt outlet: release button
3 and ensure that the seat belt outlet
engages.
*NOTE Deployment of components of the
restraint system when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is
buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied
and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is
engaged in the seat belt buckle, components
of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa-
rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat
belt tensioner.
#Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
Function of the restraint system warning lamp
When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per-
formed, during which the 6 restraint system
warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a
few seconds aer the vehicle is started. The com-
ponents of the restraint system are then func-
tional.
Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points 107
F206 0119 02
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys-
tem if:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does
not light up or is lit continuously when the
vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
If components of the restraint system have been
deployed, the 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be
activated unintentionally or not deploy as
intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid: if the restraint system is malfunc-
tioning, the automatic high voltage emergency
shuto may not function.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to mal-
functioning automatic high-voltage emer-
gency shuto
In the event of an accident, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system may not be deacti-
vated as intended.
You may receive an electric shock if you touch
the damaged components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system.
#Have the automatic high-voltage emer-
gency shuto checked and repaired
immediately at a qualied specialist
workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle
immediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualied specialist workshop.
Function of the seat belt warning lamp
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the driver dis-
play is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must
wear their seat belts correctly.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
When the driver and the front passenger fasten
their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
Function of the rear seat belt status display
The rear seat belt status display in the driver's dis-
play is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must
wear their seat belts correctly.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear
passenger compartment while the vehicle is
motion, the rear seat belt status display appears
again.
Display in the driver's display
Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear
seat belt status display informs you for a certain
amount of time which rear seat belt is not fas-
tened.
108 Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points
F206 0119 02
You can determine the status of the rear seat belt
by the colour of the seat symbol in the driver's
display as follows:
RGrey: the rear seat belt is not fastened.
RGreen: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt
is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the dis-
played seat.
RRed: the person in the rear seat has unfas-
tened their seatbelt.
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps (front passenger airbag)
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag
shuto have a special sticker axed to the side of
the cockpit on the front passenger side
(/ page 129).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display
the status of the front passenger airbag.
If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child
restraint system is tted on the front passenger
seat, you must make sure both before, and also
during the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the situation.
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator
lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds.
Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points 109
F206 0119 02
Aer the self-test, you can determine the status of
the front passenger airbag as follows:
RFront passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.
The front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in the event of an accident. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may
use the front passenger seat.
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is
tted on the front passenger seat,
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu-
ously.
RFront passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or
until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed
during an accident. If the front passenger air-
bag is in this status, no rearward-facing child
restraint system may be tted on the front
passenger seat.
%If you are driving with a child in the vehicle,
observe the information in the chapter "Chil-
dren in the vehicle" (/ page 122)
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a
disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is lit.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with the
vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit-
ting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always
ensure that:
Rthe classication of the person in the front
passenger seat is correct and the front
passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
accordance with the person in the front
passenger seat.
Rthe front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Rthe person is seated correctly.
#Both before and during the journey,
ensure that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
Malfunction of the automatic front passenger air-
bag shuto
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and
the 6 restraint system indicator lamp light up
simultaneously.
In this case, no one may use the front passenger
seat and no child restraint system may be tted
on the front passenger seat.
Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto
checked and repaired immediately at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Disabling or enabling the front passenger airbag
The automatic front passenger airbag shuto can
disable or enable the front passenger airbag
according to the situation.
110 Occupant safety – Brief overview of most important points
F206 0119 02
This happens automatically as a result of the clas-
sication of the person or child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
You cannot manually disable or enable the front
passenger airbag.
Information on the child restraint system
When tting a child restraint system, observe the
notes in "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 122).
Notes on the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
driver airbag during an accident.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Also pay particular attention to the notes on rear-
ward-facing or forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems on the front passenger seat (/ page 127).
Information on the automatic functions of the
restraint system
Function of the automatic front passenger airbag
shuto
A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
RSit correctly (/ page 105).
RFasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 106).
The automatic front passenger airbag shuto can
disable or enable the front passenger airbag
according to the situation.
Make sure you observe the following information:
RThe status of the front passenger airbag, see
"Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-
tor lamps"(/ page 109).
RWhen tting a child restraint system to the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe-
cic information (/ page 127).
Status of the front passenger airbag in relation to
the stature of the person:
RFront passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.
Occupant safety – Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system 111
F206 0119 02
The front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in the event of an accident. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may
use the front passenger seat.
RFront passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or
until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed
during an accident. Observe the following
information on the correct seat position
(/ page 105).
Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller
stature should use a rear seat.
System limits
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be dis-
abled by mistake, for example, in the following sit-
uation:
RThe front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
RThe front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the seat surface.
*NOTE Deployment of components of the
restraint system when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on
the front passenger side if:
RThere are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
RThe seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the front passenger seat and
the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
#Stow objects in a suitable place.
#Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the
window airbag on the front passenger side may
deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of
whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv-
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas-
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas-
ures independently of each other:
RTightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
RClosing the side windows.
RVehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the slid-
ing sunroof.
RVehicles with memory function: moving the
front passenger seat to a more favourable seat
position.
RVehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the
lateral support by inating the seat side bol-
sters of the seat backrest.
RPRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multime-
dia system is switched on, generating a brief
noise signal to stimulate the innate protective
mechanism of a person's hearing.
112 Occupant safety – Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat position
may result in damage to the seat and/or the
object.
#Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings yourself.
#If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest slightly backwards.
The seat belt pre-tensioning releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, par-
ticularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-
emptive measures to protect the vehicle occu-
pants. These measures cannot necessarily pre-
vent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following
measures independently of each other:
RTightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
RActivating the rear hazard warning lights at a
higher ashing frequency.
RIncreasing brake pressure when the vehicle is
stationary. This brake application is cancelled
automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits
The system will not initiate any action in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rwhen reversing
or
Rwhen the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
is a risk of a rear impact
The system will not initiate any brake application
in the following situations:
Rwhilst driving
or
Rwhen entering or exiting a parking space while
using Active Parking Assist
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-
SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards
the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly
inating an air cushion in the outer seat side bol-
ster of the seat backrest on the side on which the
impact is anticipated. This increases the distance
between the door and the vehicle occupant.
If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or
is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative
See Owner's Manual display message appears.
Occupant safety – Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system 113
F206 0119 02
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: aer you have fastened
the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself
against your body by pulling at the shoulder until
somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
This function is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia system
(/ page 114).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via
the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Occupant protection
#Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Overview of the automatic measures aer an acci-
dent
Depending on the type and severity of the acci-
dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment,
the following measures can be implemented, for
example:
Rautomatic braking (post-collision brake)
(/ page 114)
Ractivating the hazard warning lights
Rtriggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 69)
Rswitching o the engine
To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle
o and on once more (/ page 262). Depend-
ing on the type and severity of the accident,
you may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
Rswitching o the fuel supply
RPlug-in hybrid: switching o the hybrid system
and high-voltage on-board electrical system
Runlocking the vehicle doors
Rlowering the side windows
Rdisplaying the emergency guide in the central
display (/ page 70)
Rswitching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake aer an acci-
dent
Depending on the accident situation, the post-col-
lision brake can minimise the severity of a further
collision or even avoid it.
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake
can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle
has come to a standstill, the electric parking
brake is automatically applied.
The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking
the following actions:
Rbraking more strongly than automatic braking
Rfully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force
114 Occupant safety – Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system
F206 0119 02
Purpose and function of the restraint system
Overview of deployment situations (restraint sys-
tem)
In particular ensure the following conditions to
enable the components of the restraint system to
deploy their protective potential:
RSeat correctly (/ page 105).
RFasten seat belts correctly (/ page 106).
-Function of the seat belt warning lamp
(/ page 108).
-Function of the rear seat belt status dis-
play (/ page 108).
RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 does
not light up aer the self-check
(/ page 107).
RThe indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG dis-
play the correct status of the front passenger
airbag (/ page 109).
Depending on the detected deployment situation,
the components of the restraint system can be
activated or deployed independently of each
other:
RSeat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact, rollover
RDriver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal
impact
RKnee airbag: frontal impact
RSide airbag: side impact
RCentre airbag in the driver's seat backrest:
side impact
RWindow airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal
impact
RPRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the symbol AIRBAG (/ page 121).
Observe the information on how the restraint sys-
tem works (/ page 115).
Information on how the restraint system works
How the restraint system functions depends on
the severity of the impact detected and the appa-
rent type of accident.
For more information about types of accidents,
see "Overview of deployment situations"
(/ page 115).
The activation thresholds for the components of
the restraint system are determined based on the
evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari-
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the
components of the restraint system must take
place in good time at the start of the collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
aer a collision has occurred cannot play a deci-
sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro-
vide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed signicantly without
an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only
parts which are relatively easily deformed are
aected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is
not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed
even though the vehicle suers only minor defor-
Occupant safety – Purpose and function of the restraint system 115
F206 0119 02
mation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitu-
dinal members are hit, this may result in su-
ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
Depending on the apparent type of accident and
the detected deployment situation, seat belt ten-
sioners and/or airbags supplement the protection
oered by a correctly worn seat belt.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
Potential protection provided by each airbag:
RKnee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
RDriver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage
RWindow airbag: head
RSide airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat
occupants
RCentre airbag: head and ribcage
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and
airbag generally do not protect against objects
penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also
not possible to completely rule out the risk of
injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualied specialist workshop
aer an accident. Take this into account, particu-
larly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an air-
bag deployed.
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air-
bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
amount of powder may also be released:
RThe bang will not generally aect your hearing.
RIn general, the powder released is not hazard-
ous to health but may cause short-term
breathing diculties to persons suering from
asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing diculties.
Information on the limited protection provided by
the restraint system
Risk due to the incorrect behaviour of vehicle
occupants
Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the fol-
lowing in particular:
RThey observe the information on the correct
seat position (/ page 105).
RThere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
116 Occupant safety – Purpose and function of the restraint system
F206 0119 02
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
Risk due to objects in the vehicle interior
Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the fol-
lowing in particular:
RThey observe the information on the correct
seat position (/ page 105).
RThere are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
RThere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
RThere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
anchorage
Objects next to the front seat that block the
seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt
anchorage on the front seat impair the func-
tion of the seat belt tensioners.
#Before starting the journey, make sure
that there are no objects around the seat
belt buckle or between the front seat
and door.
&WARNING Risk of injury from objects in
the deployment area of an airbag
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag
can hinder or prevent the correct deployment
of the airbag.
The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled
manner and may even cause additional inju-
ries to the vehicle occupants by deploying.
This may be the case in particular if the airbag
is integrated into the seat.
#Always stow and secure objects cor-
rectly.
#Before commencing your journey, make
sure that no objects are stowed in the
deployment area of an airbag.
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the AIRBAG (/ page 121) symbol.
Observe the following information:
RNotes on loading the vehicle (/ page 196)
RInformation on the centre airbag in the driver's
seat backrest (/ page 121)
Risk due to tting accessories
Do not attach accessories such as mobile naviga-
tion devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within
the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the
side trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an airbag. Always comply with the acces-
sory manufacturer's installation instructions and,
Occupant safety – Purpose and function of the restraint system 117
F206 0119 02
in particular, the notes on suitable places for
installation.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
unsuitable protective covers
Due to unsuitable protective covers, the air-
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they
are designed to do.
#You should only use protective covers
that have been approved for the corre-
sponding seat by Mercedes-Benz.
In addition, the function of the automatic front
passenger airbag shuto could be restricted due
to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
correct status of the front passenger airbag
(/ page 109).
Risk due to pets in the vehicle interior
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to animals le unsecured or unattended in
the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended
or unsecured, they could press buttons or
switches, for instance.
An animal may:
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Rswitch systems on or o and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown about the
vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden
steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure
vehicle occupants.
#Never leave animals unattended in the
vehicle.
#Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car-
rier.
Risk due to modication, damage or wear to the
components of the restraint system
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
modications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected
as intended if alterations are made to the
restraint system.
#Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-
tem.
#Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-
tronic component parts or their so-
ware.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom-
modate a person with disabilities, contact a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving
aids which have been approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz.
118 Occupant safety – Purpose and function of the restraint system
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modied seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rthe seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rmodications have been made to the seat
belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat
belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modied or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modied seat belt tensioners could acciden-
tally trigger or fail to function as intended.
#Never modify the seat belt system, for
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage
and seat belt retractor.
#Make sure that the seat belts are undam-
aged, not worn and clean.
#Always have the seat belts checked
immediately aer an accident at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat
belts which have been approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz.
The seat is designed for the standard three-point
seat belt. If you t a dierent multipoint seat belt,
for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint
system cannot provide the intended level of pro-
tection.
Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be
openings in the seat backrest. These openings
have no function.
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due
to modied seat belt systems
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of an
accident.
#Only use the standard three-point seat
belt.
#Never modify the seat belt system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to modica-
tions to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or ax
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can
no longer function as intended.
#Never modify the cover of an airbag.
#Do not attach any objects to the cover.
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 121).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired
due to modications or incorrect work per-
formed on the doors or door trim, or if the
doors are damaged.
Occupant safety – Purpose and function of the restraint system 119
F206 0119 02
#Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
#Always have work on the doors or door
trim carried out at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Risk due to components of the restraint system
which have already been deployed
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualied specialist workshop
aer an accident.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag
components
The airbag parts are hot aer an airbag has
been deployed.
#Do not touch the airbag parts.
#Have a deployed airbag replaced at a
qualied specialist workshop as soon as
possible.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer oers any protec-
tion.
#Have the vehicle towed to a qualied
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
been deployed are no longer operational and
are unable to perform their intended protec-
tive function.
#Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
seat belt tensioners immediately
replaced at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Seat belts
Releasing the seat belts
#Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
*NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism.
#Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
120 Occupant safety
F206 0119 02
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1Knee airbag
2Driver's airbag
3Front passenger airbag
4Window airbag
5Side airbag
6Centre airbag1
1) Only for certain countries.
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the symbol AIRBAG. An additional arrow sym-
bol M indicates the installation location for cer-
tain airbags.
Observe the information in "Overview of deploy-
ment situations" (/ page 115).
Information on the centre airbag in the driver's
seat backrest
When triggered, the centre airbag deploys
between the front seats. Do not stow any objects
in the deployment area of the centre airbag.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
Occupant safety 121
F206 0119 02
Brief overview of most important points
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe the following when transporting
children:
RNever leave children unattended in the vehicle
(/ page 124).
RSecure children up to a height of 1.50 m on
the seat (see illustration above) properly with
a suitable and approved child restraint system
(/ page 129), and secure small children in a
rearward-facing child restraint system.
RObserve the child restraint system manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
Le/right rear seat (preferred seats)
Preferred securing system:
®LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
(/ page 134)
or
°i‑Size securing rings (/ page 136)
and
¯Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 142).
Alternative securing system:
7Vehicle seat belt (/ page 143)
¯Additionally attach Top Tether if recom-
mended by the manufacturer of the child
restraint system (/ page 142).
The following child restraint systems within the
Universal category are approved: U, UF, i-U, IUF.
Observe the other alternatives for use
(/ page 134).
Front passenger seat
Securing system:
7Vehicle seat belt (/ page 143)
Be sure to observe:
RIf the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure
that the status of the front passenger airbag is
correct for the current situation
(/ page 109).
The following child restraint systems within the
Universal category are approved: U(*), UF.
Observe the other alternatives for use
(/ page 136).
(*) rearward-facing child restraint systems only in
combination with automatic airbag shuto
122 Children in the vehicle
F206 0119 02
Centre rear seat
Securing system:
7Vehicle seat belt (/ page 143)
The following belt-secured child restraint systems
within the Universal category are approved: U, UF.
Observe the other alternatives for use
(/ page 143).
Important safety notes
Basic information
Be diligent
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a
child in the child restraint system may have seri-
ous consequences. Always be diligent in securing
a child carefully before every journey.
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting
on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
To improve protection for children younger than
twelve years old or under 1.50 m in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol-
lowing information:
RAlways secure the child in a child restraint sys-
tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
RThe child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of the child.
RThe vehicle seat must be suitable for the child
restraint system to be tted:
-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings:
(/ page 134)
-i‑Size securing rings: (/ page 136)
-Securing with the vehicle seat belt:
(/ page 136)
Accident statistics show that children secured on
the rear seats are generally safer than children
secured on the front seats. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a
child restraint system to a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system
The generic term child restraint system is used in
this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is,
for example:
Ra baby car seat
Ra rearward-facing child seat
Ra forward-facing child seat
Ra child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends using a child booster seat with a back-
rest and seat belt guide.
Observe laws and legal requirements
Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Make sure that the child restraint system is
approved in accordance with the valid test speci-
cations and guidelines. Further information can
be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Children in the vehicle – Important safety notes 123
F206 0119 02
Securing systems for child restraint systems in
the vehicle
Only use the following securing systems for child
restraint systems:
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or i-Size securing
rings
Rthe vehicle's seat belt system
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
Simply attaching to the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
securing rings or i‑Size securing rings on the vehi-
cle can reduce the risk of tting the child restraint
system incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat
belt of the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint
system, always comply with the permissible gross
weight for the child and child restraint system
(/ page 140).
Important warning notices
Always secure a child restraint system correctly
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect installation of the child restraint
system
The child can then not be protected or
restrained as intended.
#Be sure to comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
#Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
#Never place objects (e.g. cushions)
under or behind the child restraint sys-
tem.
#Use child restraint systems only with the
original cover designed for them.
#Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
RAlways observe the vehicle-specic informa-
tion.
-Fitting an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
system on the rear seat (/ page 140).
-Securing the child restraint system with
the seat belt (/ page 143).
RObserve the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted
or not secured, it can become detached.
The child cannot then be protected or
restrained as intended.
The unused child restraint system can be
become detached and strike vehicle occu-
pants.
#Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
124 Children in the vehicle – Important safety notes
F206 0119 02
#Always t child restraint systems cor-
rectly, even if they are transported
unused in the vehicle.
Do not modify the child restraint system
&WARNING Risk of injury due to modica-
tions to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer func-
tion properly. This poses an increased risk of
injury.
#Never modify a child restraint system.
#Only ax accessories which have been
specially approved for this child restraint
system by the child restraint system's
manufacturer.
Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
&WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint sys-
tems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys-
tems that have been subjected to stress in an
accident may not be able to perform their
intended protective function.
It may be the case that the child cannot be
properly restrained.
#Always immediately replace child
restraint systems that have been dam-
aged or involved in an accident.
#Have the securing systems for the child
restraint systems checked at a qualied
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
&WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suer burns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system.
#Always make sure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
#Protect the child restraint system with a
blanket, for example.
#If the child restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Children in the vehicle – Important safety notes 125
F206 0119 02
Observe when stopping or parking
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident– and injury
due to children le unattended in the vehi-
cle
When children are le unattended in the vehi-
cle, they can be expected in particular to
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming trac.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchanging the drive range.
Rstarting the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Overview of warning stickers in the vehicle
1Front passenger airbag warning (on the front
passenger sun visor) (/ page 127)
2Vehicles without automatic front passenger
airbag shuto warning (visible when the front
passenger door is open) (/ page 129)
126 Children in the vehicle – Important safety notes
F206 0119 02
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child
restraint systems on the front passenger seat
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem while the front passenger airbag is
enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is o, the front passenger airbag can
deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Always ensure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD.
Observe the specic instructions for the rear-
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems (/ page 139).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
always observe the additional notes.
Rthe notes on automatic front passenger airbag
shuto (/ page 110).
RWhen using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled.
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 109).
RThe front passenger airbag is enabled when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be
deployed during an accident. In that case, do
not use rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tems.
Information on the automatic front passenger air-
bag shuto
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta-
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
current situation.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could aect the function
of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto.
Children in the vehicle – Important safety notes 127
F206 0119 02
#Do not place any objects between the
seat surface and the child restraint sys-
tem.
#Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system is always resting
on the seat surface of the co-driver seat.
#The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible,
be resting on the seat backrest of the
co-driver seat.
#It is essential to comply with the child
restraint system manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions.
When tting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specic infor-
mation (/ page 127).
Rearward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is tted
on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up continu-
ously (/ page 109).
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem while the front passenger airbag is
enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is o, the front passenger airbag can
deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Always ensure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD.
%The front passenger airbag is enabled
depending on the child restraint system and
the stature of the child. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed
during an accident. If the front passenger air-
bag is in this status, no rearward-facing child
restraint system may be tted on the front
passenger seat.
Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat.
Forward-facing child restraint system on the front
passenger seat
If a forward-facing child restraint system is tted
on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled.
The status of the front passenger airbag depends
on the child restraint system and the stature of
the child.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
either lit continuously, or it is not lit
(/ page 109). Always observe the following infor-
mation.
128 Children in the vehicle – Important safety notes
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect positioning of the child restraint
system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the co-driver seat and you
position the co-driver seat too close to the
dashboard, in the event of an accident, the
child could:
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o
#Always move the co-driver seat as far
back as possible. In doing so, always
make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
correctly routed from the seat belt outlet
of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide
on the child restraint system. The shoul-
der belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet
and the co-driver seat accordingly.
#Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger airbag shuto
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag
shuto have a special sticker axed to the side of
the cockpit on the front passenger side
(/ page 126).
Make sure you observe the following information:
RNever t a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem to the front passenger seat
RAlways t a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem to a suitable rear seat
RNotes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front passenger
seat (/ page 127)
Suitable child restraint systems for the transport
of children
Information on the advantage of a rearward-facing
child restraint system
Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing
child restraint system only. It is also preferable to
transport a small child in a suitable rearward-
facing child restraint system. In this case, the
child sits in the opposite direction to the direction
of travel and faces backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer-
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a
rearward-facing child restraint system.
Approval categories for child restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet the follow-
ing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the
vehicle:
RUN-R44
RUN-R129
Children in the vehicle – Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 129
F206 0119 02
Identication on the child restraint system
The following information, e.g., is available on the
approval label on the child restraint system:
RApproval category
RChild weight group
RAuthorisation number
RChild restraint size class
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44
Example of an approval label
RUniversal: child restraint systems in the "Uni-
versal" category are approved for installation
in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance
with overviews of the suitability of seats for
securing child restraint systems, on seats
labelled U, UF or IUF.
The identication IUF refers to ISOFIX child
restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be
secured using Top Tether or support points.
RSemi-Universal: child restraint systems in the
"Semi-Universal" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
RVehicle-specic: child restraint systems in the
"vehicle-specic" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129
130 Children in the vehicle – Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children
F206 0119 02
Example of an approval label
Ri‑Sizechild restraint systems and booster seats
with backrest: suitable for attachment to i‑Size
mounting brackets. They can be used on the
seats marked i‑U.
Child restraint systems in this category can
also be attached to ISOFIX bars if approved by
the manufacturer of the child restraint system.
i‑Size booster seats with backrest can be used
on seats marked U if the seat is approved for
category B2/B3.
RBelted child restraint systems and belted
booster seats without backrest of the Univer-
salcategory: suitable for attachment to the
seats marked U.
RVehicle-specic child restraint systems (ISO-
FIX or belted attachment as well as child
booster seats with and without backrest): suit-
able for attachment to the seats marked i‑U or
U if this is approved by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer.
Observe the suitability of vehicle seats
RSuitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX
child restraint systems (/ page 134)
RSuitability of seats for securing i‑Size child
restraint systems (/ page 136).
RSuitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems (/ page 136)
Overview of recommended child restraint systems
%Further information on the correct child
restraint system can be obtained at a quali-
ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose.
Attachment with ISOFIX
Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to
approx. 15 months)
Type1BABY SAFE plus
(including base sta-
tion)
Size category E
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
Children in the vehicle – Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 131
F206 0119 02
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approx. 9
months to 4 years)
Type1DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
Attachment with i-Size (R129 child restraint sys-
tems)
Weight up to 13 kg, size 40 to 83 cm and age
from birth to approx. 15 months
Type1Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Size category R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060
*02
Order number A 000 970 68 02
Type1Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Order number
FlexBase iSense
A 000 970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Weight up to 18 kg, size 61 to 105 cm and age
from approx. 3 months to 4 years
Type1Dualx 3 i-Size
Size category F2X/R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060
*02
Order number A000 970 93 02
Order number
FlexBase iSense
A000 970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Weight 15 to 36 kg, size 100 to 150 cm and age
from approx. 3.5 to 12 years
Type1KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061
*02
Order number A 000 970 89 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Weight 15 to 36 kg, size 100 to 150 cm and age
from approx. 3.5 to 12 years
Type1AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061
*02
Order number A 000 970 91 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
132 Children in the vehicle – Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children
F206 0119 02
Attachment with the seat belt of the vehicle seat
Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approx. 6
months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and
approx. 15 months)
Type1BABY SAFE plus II
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
R129 child restraint systems (weight up to 13 kg,
size 40 to 83 cm and age from birth to approx.
15 months)
Type1Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Size category R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060
*02
Order number A 000 970 68 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approx. 9
months to 4 years)
Type1DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from
approx. 3 to 12 years)
Type1KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2A 000 970 49 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from
approx. 3 to 12 years)
Type1AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
R129 child restraint systems (weight from 15 to
36 kg, height from 100 to 150 cm, and aged 3.5
to 12 years)
Type1KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061
*02
Order number A 000 970 89 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Children in the vehicle – Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 133
F206 0119 02
R129 child restraint systems (weight from 15 to
36 kg, height from 100 to 150 cm, and aged 3.5
to 12 years)
Type1AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061
*02
Order number A 000 970 91 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint sys-
tems
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching
ISOFIX child restraint systems
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for spe-
cially designed child restraint systems.
®The symbol indicates seats suitable for
attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system
in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 129).
°ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be
installed on seats with i‑Size markings
(/ page 136).
Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that
are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per
the following ISOFIX tables.
Carry cot
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
F – ISO/L1 X
G – ISO/L2 X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX
child restraint system in this
weight category and/or size
class.
Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx.
6 months)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
E – ISO/R1 IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child
restraint systems according to
the table in "Overview of the
recommended child restraint
systems", or if the vehicle and
the seat are listed on the child
restraint system manufactur-
er's vehicle model list.
Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to
approx. 15 months)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right
rear seat
E – ISO/R1 IL
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
134 Children in the vehicle – Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
F206 0119 02
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right
rear seat
C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems
according to the table in "Overview of the
recommended child restraint systems", or if
the vehicle and the seat are listed on the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
(1) When using a child restraint system of
size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into
the highest position. Make sure that the seat
backrest of the front seat does not rest
against the child restraint system.
Weight category 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months
to 4 years)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right
rear seat
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
B – ISO/F2 IUF
B1 – ISO/F2X IUF
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right
rear seat
A – ISO/F3 IUF
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems
according to the table in "Overview of the rec-
ommended child restraint systems", or if the
vehicle and the seat are listed on the child
restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child
restraint systems of the "Universal" category
in this weight category.
(1) When using a child restraint system of
size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into
the highest position. Make sure that the seat
backrest of the front seat does not rest
against the child restraint system.
Children in the vehicle – Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 135
F206 0119 02
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching
i‑Size child restraint systems
i‑Size is a standardised securing system for spe-
cially designed child restraint systems.
°i‑Size child restraint systems can be
attached to a seat with the i‑Size marking
(/ page 129).
Child restraint systems that are approved
in accordance with the following i‑Size
table may be attached.
Le and right rear seat
i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1,
ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2,
ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
i‑U
i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size
child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
Front passenger seat
i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1,
ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2,
ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
X
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the
"Universal" category.
Overview of the suitability of seats for attaching
belt-secured child restraint systems
Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child
restraint systems
Rear seats
Weight category 0: to
10 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category 0+:
to 13 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category I: 9
to 18 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category II: 15
to 25 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category III:
22 to 36 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
UN-R129 child
restraint systems
136 Children in the vehicle – Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
F206 0119 02
Le/right rear seat U, L, B2, B3
Centre rear seat1U, L, B2, B3
1 Child restraint systems with a
supporting bracket are not suit-
able for this seat.
U Suitable for child restraint
systems of the "Universal" cate-
gory in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal
child restraint systems accord-
ing to the table in "Recommen-
ded child restraint systems", or
if the vehicle and the seat are
listed in the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
B2, B3 Suitable for the installa-
tion of child restraint systems
complying with ISO/B2 and
ISO/B3 child seat cushion test
equipment.
Notes on child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
RIf it is absolutely necessary for you to t a
child restraint system to the front passenger
seat, be sure to observe the information on
child restraint systems on the front passenger
seat (/ page 127).
RObserve the specic instructions for the rear-
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems. If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front passenger air-
bag is correct for the current situation
(/ page 109).
Front passenger seat
Weight category 0: to
10 kg
Front passenger air-
bag enabled1X
Front passenger air-
bag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category 0+:
to 13 kg
Front passenger air-
bag enabled1X
Front passenger air-
bag disabled1, 2 U, L
Children in the vehicle – Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 137
F206 0119 02
Weight category I: 9
to 18 kg
Front passenger air-
bag enabled1UF, L
Front passenger air-
bag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category II: 15
to 25 kg
Front passenger air-
bag enabled1UF, L
Front passenger air-
bag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category III:
22 to 36 kg
Front passenger air-
bag enabled1UF, L
Front passenger air-
bag disabled1, 2 U, L
UN-R129 child
restraint systems
Front passenger air-
bag enabled1UF, L, B2, B3
Front passenger air-
bag disabled1, 2 U, L, B2, B3
1 Adjust the seat cushion incli-
nation so that the front edge of
the seat cushion is in the high-
est position and the rear edge
of the seat cushion is in the low-
est position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with
automatic front passenger air-
bag shuto. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
must be lit.
X Not suitable for children in
this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint
systems of the "Universal" cate-
gory in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal
child restraint systems accord-
ing to the table in "Recommen-
ded child restraint systems", or
if the vehicle and the seat are
listed in the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing
child restraint systems of the
"Universal" category in this
weight category.
B2, B3 Suitable for the installa-
tion of child restraint systems
complying with ISO/B2 and
ISO/B3 child seat cushion test
equipment.
138 Children in the vehicle – Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
F206 0119 02
Securing the child restraint system
Adjusting the seat correctly
When tting a child restraint system on the le or
right rear seat, always observe the following:
#Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
If the head restraint of the child restraint system
cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maxi-
mum size setting for certain child restraint sys-
tems. Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's installation instructions.
%Contact with the roof when the head restraint
is fully extended and locked in place will not
result in any restrictions on use.
®° Also observe the following when tting
an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system:
#When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so
that it does not touch the child restraint sys-
tem.
#When using a forward-facing child restraint
system with integrated child seat belt: adjust
the head restraint of the respective seat so
that it does not push the child restraint system
forwards. If necessary, the respective head
restraint can be removed. In addition, the
backrest of the child restraint system must lie
as at as possible against the backrest of the
vehicle seat. Aer the child restraint system
has been removed, replace the vehicle head
restraint immediately and adjust it correctly.
#The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion angle accordingly.
#Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the
child restraint system is not put under strain
by the head restraint.
7 When tting a belt-secured child restraint
system, also observe the following:
#When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so
that it does not touch the child restraint sys-
tem.
#When using a forward-facing child restraint
system with integrated child seat belt: adjust
the head restraint of the respective seat so
that it does not push the child restraint system
forwards. If necessary, the respective head
restraint can be removed. In addition, the
backrest of the child restraint system must lie
as at as possible against the backrest of the
vehicle seat. Aer the child restraint system
has been removed, replace the vehicle head
restraint immediately and adjust it correctly.
#The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
#The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
Children in the vehicle – Securing the child restraint system 139
F206 0119 02
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion angle accordingly.
#Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the
child restraint system is not put under strain
by the head restraint.
#Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
7 Depending on the vehicle equipment,
always observe the following when tting a belt-
secured child restraint system on the front
passenger seat:
#Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front passenger seat (/ page 127).
#When using a forward-facing child restraint
system integrated child seat belt: remove the
head restraint from the front passenger seat,
if possible. Aer the child restraint system has
been removed, immediately replace the head
restraint and adjust it correctly.
#The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
#The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction.
#Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the
child restraint system is not put under strain
by the head restraint.
#Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
behind the child restraint system.
#Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest
position if possible. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoul-
der belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
wards from the seat belt outlet and, where
possible, downwards to the child restraint sys-
tem.
#Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust-
ment.
#Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the
front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest
position and the rear edge of the seat cushion
is in the lowest position.
#Set the seat backrest to the most vertical
position possible.
Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system
&WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion.
RAs a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot or load com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
140 Children in the vehicle – Securing the child restraint system
F206 0119 02
#Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
rear seat and the seat backrest are
engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verication indicator
will be visible.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
permissible gross mass of the child and
child restraint system together is excee-
ded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX
or i‑Size child restraint systems and the child
may not be restrained correctly in the event of
an accident, for example.
#If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-
Size child restraint system with integra-
ted seat belts, the total mass of the child
and child restraint system must not
exceed 33 kg.
Always observe the information on the mass of
the child restraint system:
Rin the installation and operating instructions of
the manufacturer of the child restraint system
Ron a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permitted total mass of
the child and child restraint system is still being
adhered to.
When tting a child restraint system, also always
observe the following:
OAlways observe the area of use and the suita-
bility of the seats for mounting a child
restraint system.
® ISOFIX mounting brackets
(/ page 134).
or
° i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 136)
1ISOFIX mounting bracket
2i‑Size mounting brackets
Always be sure to check before every journey that
the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i‑Size
child restraint system is correctly locked in place
in both on-board mounting brackets.
Children in the vehicle – Securing the child restraint system 141
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the
centre seat during installation of the child
restraint system
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped.
#Fold the covers 1 or 2 back.
#Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys-
tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
Fastening a Top Tether
&WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
rear seat backrests are not locked aer
Top Tether belts are tted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards
when you are driving.
As a result, child restraint systems will no lon-
ger be able to perform their intended protec-
tive function. This may also cause additional
injuries.
#Always lock rear seat backrests aer t-
ting Top Tether belts.
#Observe the lock verication indicator.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verication indicator
will be visible.
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with
a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether.
The Top Tether belt enables an additional connec-
tion between the child restraint system attached
with ISOFIX or i‑Size and the vehicle.
#If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
(/ page 184).
#Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
#Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system
with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions.
142 Children in the vehicle – Securing the child restraint system
F206 0119 02
#Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint
1 between the two head restraint bars.
#Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt
4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without
twisting.
#Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com-
ply with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions.
#Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage
3.
#If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down-
wards (/ page 184). Make sure that you do
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt 4.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat
belt
&WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion.
RAs a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot or load com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
#Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
rear seat and the seat backrest are
engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verication indicator
will be visible.
#For a child restraint system of the category
"Universal" or "Semi-Universal" ensure that
this is approved for the vehicle seat.
#Fit the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
seat.
#Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
wards from the seat belt outlet and, where
possible, downwards to the child restraint sys-
tem.
#When tting on the rear seat: also secure Top
Tether to the front passenger seat, if present.
#When tting on the front passenger seat: if
necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet as
appropriate.
Children in the vehicle – Securing the child restraint system 143
F206 0119 02
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for
the rear doors
&WARNING Risk of accident– and injury
due to children le unattended in the vehi-
cle
When children are le unattended in the vehi-
cle, they can be expected in particular to
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming trac.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchanging the drive range.
Rstarting the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to children le unattended in the vehicle
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they
could, in particular:
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming trac.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
#Always activate the installed child safety
locks if children are travelling in the vehi-
cle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the
important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi-
tional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and
the rear side windows.
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
each door separately. The doors can no longer be
opened from the inside.
144 Children in the vehicle
F206 0119 02
#Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2
(deactivate).
#Check the functionality of the child safety
lock.
Activating and deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear side windows
&WARNING Risk of accident– and injury
due to children le unattended in the vehi-
cle
When children are le unattended in the vehi-
cle, they can be expected in particular to
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming trac.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchanging the drive range.
Rstarting the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to children le unattended in the vehicle
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they
could, in particular:
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming trac.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
Children in the vehicle 145
F206 0119 02
#Always activate the installed child safety
locks if children are travelling in the vehi-
cle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the
important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi-
tional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and
the rear side windows.
#To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
The rear side window can be opened or closed
in the following cases:
RIndicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on
the driver's door
RIndicator lamp 1 is o: via the switch on
the corresponding rear door or driver's
door
Occupant presence reminder
Function of the occupant presence reminder
The occupant presence reminder can help to
remind you about a child who may have been for-
gotten in the rear compartment of the vehicle. It
activates and deactivates automatically when the
rear door is open for an extended period of time
and a child which the system presumes to be
present could enter or exit the vehicle.
When the vehicle is switched o, the Do not
leave persons or animals in the vehicle message
appears on the driver's display if the system was
already automatically activated.
You can permanently deactivate the function in
the multimedia system (/ page 147). When the
system is deactivated, the p indicator lamp in
the driver's display lights up.
146 Children in the vehicle
F206 0119 02
Activating or deactivating the occupant presence
reminder in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Occupant protection
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Children in the vehicle 147
F206 0119 02
Key
Overview of key functions
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
*NOTE Damage to the key caused by mag-
netic elds
#Keep the key away from strong magnetic
elds.
Vehicle key
1Indicator lamp
2Locking
3Unlocks (with embossed surface)
4Opens/closes the boot lid
%If indicator lamp 1 does not light up aer
pressing the Ü or s button, the battery
is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the
battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery (/ page 150).
The key locks and unlocks the following compo-
nents:
RDoors
RFuel ller ap
RSocket ap (plug-in hybrid)
RBoot lid
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds aer unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
the protection is primed again.
Do not keep the key together with electronic devi-
ces or metal objects. This can aect the key's
functionality.
148 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking veri-
cation signal
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close
#Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock.
%Please observe:
The selected setting for the acoustic locking
verication signal must comply with the rele-
vant national road and trac regulations. In
some countries, including Germany, using the
acoustic locking verication signal is forbid-
den by trac laws (in accordance with §16
Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German
national road trac regulations). The driver of
the vehicle must comply with these regula-
tions. In countries where the use of this func-
tion is forbidden, this function is not activated
in the vehicle and must not be activated.
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the key:
RCentral unlocking
RUnlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap
RPlug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and
fuel ller ap/socket ap
#To switch between settings: press the Ü
and s buttons simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds until the indicator lamp
ashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel ller ap has been selected:
RTo unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel
ller ap are unlocked.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel ller ap/socket ap has been
selected (plug-in-hybrid):
RTo unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel
ller ap/socket ap are unlocked.
Deactivating the function of the key
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the
function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are
also deactivated. Access or drive authorization via
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that
key. Activate the function of the key so that all of
its functions are available once again.
You can also deactivate the key's function to
reduce the key's energy consumption if you do
not use the vehicle or a key for an extended
period of time.
#Press and hold the key button s.
Opening and closing 149
F206 0119 02
#With the key button s pressed, immedi-
ately press key button Ü twice in quick
succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once
briey, and then again for longer.
%You have the following options to reactivate
the key:
RPress any button on the key.
RStart the vehicle with the key in the centre
console storage compart-
ment(/ page 263).
Removing/inserting the emergency key
Removing the emergency key
#Press the release button 1.
The emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
#Fully remove the emergency key 2.
Inserting the emergency key
#Insert the emergency key 2 at marking 3
until it engages.
%You can use the emergency key 2 to attach
the key to a key ring.
Replacing the key battery
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swal-
lowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise
150 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
enter the body, severe internal burns can
occur within two hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
#Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren.
#If the battery compartment cover and/or
lid do not close securely, stop using the
key and keep it away from children.
#If batteries are swallowed or otherwise
enter the body, seek immediate medical
attention.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal
to dispose of them with the household rub-
bish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualied
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
Requirements
RYou require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
#Remove the emergency key (/ page 150).
#Press emergency key 2 into the opening in
the key in the direction of the arrow until
cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold
cover 1 closed.
Opening and closing 151
F206 0119 02
#Insert emergency key 2 into the opening and
li up covering 3 and remove it.
#Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until
battery 4 falls out of the key.
#Insert the new battery with the positive pole
facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
#Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other impurities.
#Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the
housing and then press on both sides to close
it.
#Make sure that covering 3 is completely
closed.
#Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the
housing and then press until it is completely
closed.
#Insert the emergency key again
(/ page 150).
Problems with the key, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle
Possible causes:
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 148).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 150).
#Use the replacement key.
#Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 156).
#Have key checked at a qualied specialist
workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal
source
Possible causes if the function of the key is
impaired:
Rhigh voltage power lines
Rmobile phones
Relectronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
Rshielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic
barriers
#Make sure that there is sucient distance
between the key and the potential source of
interference.
You have lost a key
#Have the key deactivated at a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
#If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Doors
Notes on the additional door lock
The additional door lock is only available for vehi-
cles for the United Kingdom.
152 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside
the vehicle when the additional door lock
is activated
If the additional door lock is activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside.
#Never leave persons, in particular chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
#If there are persons in the vehicle, do not
activate the additional door lock.
The additional door lock is automatically activated
in the following situations:
RThe vehicle is locked using the key.
RThe vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me
connect, the additional door lock is not activated
(/ page 576).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
%Aer locking you can issue a signal with the
horn.
You can prevent the additional door lock from
being activated by deactivating interior protection
before locking the vehicle (/ page 173).
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
#United Kingdom only: observe the notes on
the additional door lock (/ page 152).
#Pull the door 1 handle.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from
the inside
#To unlock: Press 1 button.
#To lock: Press 2 button.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up
once the vehicle is locked.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap.
Opening and closing 153
F206 0119 02
Plug-in hybrid: The socket ap is also locked and
unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a
key is detected in the car.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
Rif you have locked the vehicle using the key
Rif you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO
Requirements
RThe key is outside the vehicle.
RThe distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
RThe driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the boot lid
Rwhen using an automatic car wash
Rwhen using a high pressure cleaner
#Deactivate the function of the key in
these situations.
or
#Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
Observe the information:
Ron washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 34)
Ron using a high-pressure cleaner
(/ page 624)
#To unlock the vehicle: touch the inside surface
of the door handle.
#To lock the vehicle: touch the sensor surface
1 or 2.
#Convenience closing: touch the recessed sen-
sor surface 2 for a prolonged period.
%Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 165).
154 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO
Possible causes:
RThe function of the key has been deactivated.
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
#Activate the function of the key (/ page 69).
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 148).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 150).
#Use the replacement key.
#Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 156).
#Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal
source
Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is
impaired:
Rhigh voltage power lines
Rmobile phones
Relectronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
Rshielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic
barriers
#Make sure that there is sucient distance
between the key and the potential source of
interference.
Activating/deactivating automatic locking in the
MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close
%The vehicle is locked automatically when the
vehicle is switched on and the wheels are
turning faster than walking pace.
#Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
RThe vehicle is being towed or pushed.
RIf the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer.
Opening and closing 155
F206 0119 02
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emer-
gency key
Unlocking a le-hand vehicle door with the emer-
gency key
%If you unlock and open the driver's door with
the emergency key, this triggers the anti-the
alarm system.
%If you unlock the driver's door with the emer-
gency key, the boot lid will not be unlocked.
%Information regarding starting the vehicle with
the key in the storage compartment (emer-
gency operation mode) (/ page 263).
#Remove the emergency key (/ page 150).
#Pull and hold the door handle 1.#Insert the emergency key 2 into the lock cyl-
inder as shown.
#Turn the emergency key 2 anti-clockwise to
position 1.
#Turn the emergency key 2 back to its start-
ing position.
#Remove the emergency key 2 and release
the door handle 1.
156 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Locking the doors
#Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency
key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
#To lock the le-hand side of the vehicle: turn
the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it
will go.
#To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn
the emergency key clockwise as far as it will
go.
If the locked door is closed, it can no longer be
opened from the outside.
Boot
Opening the boot lid
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot
lid is open when the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion.
#Always switch o the engine before
opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
*NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obstacles
above the vehicle
The boot lid swings upwards when it is
opened.
#Therefore, make sure that there is su-
cient clearance above the boot lid.
#Pull the boot lid handle.
#Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a
kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 160).
Opening and closing 157
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing
#Pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot
lid opens.
or
#Press and hold the H button on the key.
#If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate
position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as
it begins to open.
#With the boot lid opening limiter activated,
manually pull the stopped boot lid upwards.
If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the
automatic opening process, blockage detection
will stop the boot lid. The automatic blockage
detection function is only an aid and is not a sub-
stitute for your attentiveness.
Closing the boot lid
&WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured suciently, they could slip, tip
over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi-
cle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is
equipped with automatic key recognition.
Note that the boot lid will not be locked and will
pop back open if the following situation occurs:
RYou have locked the vehicle and closed the
boot lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is
inside the vehicle and is detected.
and
RA second key belonging to the vehicle is not
detected outside the vehicle.
Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not
a substitute for your attentiveness.
#Before locking, ensure that at least one key
belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
#To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid down-
wards using the handle recess and push it
closed.
158 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
%Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing: if
you lightly push the boot lid closed, the power
closing function will automatically pull the
boot lid into the lock.
Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the boot lid
Parts of the body could become trapped.
There may be people in the closing area.
#Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area.
#Use one of the following options to stop
the closing process:
RPress the H button on the key.
RPress or pull the remote operating
switch on the driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button
on the boot lid.
RPull the boot lid handle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also
possible to stop the closing process by making a
kicking movement below the rear bumper.
#Pull the boot lid handle. Release it as soon as
it begins to close.
#If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate
position, push it downwards.
The boot lid will continue to close.
#Push remote operating switch 1 until the
boot lid is fully closed.
#Press closing button 1 on the boot lid.
Opening and closing 159
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
#Press locking button 2 on the boot lid.
If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the
boot lid will close and the vehicle will be
locked.
#With the boot lid completely open, press and
hold the H button on the key. The key must
be in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
#With the boot lid completely open, make a
kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 160).
Boot lid automatic reversing function
The boot lid is equipped with automatic blockage
detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle
obstructs the boot lid during the automatic clos-
ing process, it will automatically open again. The
automatic reversing function is only an aid and is
not a substitute for your attentiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react:
Rto so, light and thin objects, e.g. ngers
Rtowards the end of the closing procedure
In these situations in particular, the reversing
function cannot prevent someone being trap-
ped.
#Ensure that no body parts are in the
closing area.
#If someone is trapped, use one of the fol-
lowing options:
RPress the H button on the key.
RPress the remote operating switch on
the driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button
on the boot lid.
RPull the boot lid handle.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
HANDS-FREE ACCESS allows you to open and
close the boot lid, or even stop the opening and
closing process at any point, by performing a kick-
ing motion under the bumper. The transmission
must be in position j.
The kicking motion triggers the opening or closing
process alternately.
RIf you stop the boot lid opening process with a
kicking motion, the boot lid is closed with the
next kicking motion
160 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
RIf you stop the boot lid closing process with a
kicking motion, the boot lid is opened with the
next kicking motion
In the following cases, the boot lid can only be
closed with HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
RIf the vehicle is switched on and the key's
unlock function has been set so that only the
driver's door is unlocked when activated
(/ page 149).
RIf the vehicle has been centrally locked from
the inside (/ page 153).
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 157)
and closing (/ page 158) the boot lid.
%A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is
opening or closing.
&WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system.
#Always ensure that you only make a kick-
ing movement within the detection range
of the sensors.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the boot lid
Rwhen using an automatic car wash
Rwhen using a high pressure cleaner
#Deactivate the function of the key in
these situations.
or
#Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
Ensure that you are standing rmly on the ground
when performing the kicking motion. You could
otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Observe the following notes:
RThe key is behind the vehicle.
If the key is not recognised:
-Take the key in your hand.
or
-Ensure that the function of the key is acti-
vated (/ page 69).
RStand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle
when performing the kicking motion.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
when performing the kicking motion.
RDo not carry out the kicking motion too slowly.
RThe kicking motion must be towards the vehi-
cle and back again.
RVehicles with trailer hitch: Perform the kicking
motion to the le or right of the ball head.
1Detection range of the sensors
Opening and closing 161
F206 0119 02
If several consecutive kicking motions are not
successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits
The system may be impaired or inoperative in the
following cases:
RThe sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
snow.
RThe kicking motion is made using a prosthetic
leg.
The boot lid could be opened or closed uninten-
tionally in the following situations:
RA person's arms or legs are moving in the sen-
sor detection range, e.g. when polishing the
vehicle or picking up objects.
RObjects are moved or placed behind the vehi-
cle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charg-
ing cable or luggage
RTension belts, tarps or other covers are pulled
over the bumper.
RA protective mat with a length reaching over
the loading sill down into the detection range
of the sensors is used.
RThe protective mat is not secured correctly.
RVehicles with trailer hitch: Work is being car-
ried out on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear
bicycle racks.
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 69) or
do not carry the key about your person in such
situations.
Switching separate boot locking on and o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Locking function
Switching separate boot locking on
#Select Block boot.
#Create a PIN.
#Conrm the PIN with OK.
#Enter the PIN again and conrm it.
The boot will remain locked if you unlock the
vehicle centrally.
%If an accident has been detected, the boot will
unlock even if separate locking is switched
on.
Switching separate boot locking o
#Select Block boot.
#Enter the PIN.
If the PIN is correct, separate boot locking will
be switched o and the PIN deleted.
Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening lim-
iter
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Other functions
#Activate or deactivate Opening height limiter.
This function prevents the boot lid from hitting a
low garage ceiling, for example.
162 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window.
#If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could
be trapped in the closing area in the process.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they operate
the side windows, particularly when unatten-
ded.
#Activate the child safety lock for the rear
side windows.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements
RThe power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.
1Closing
2Opening
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.
#To start automatic operation: press the W
button beyond the point of resistance or pull
and release it.
#To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull
the W button again.
Opening and closing 163
F206 0119 02
When the vehicle is switched o, you can con-
tinue to operate the side windows.
The function will also be available until the doors
are closed again.
Automatic reversing function of the side windows
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the
closing process, the side window will open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function is
only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-
tiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
Rto so, light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
Rduring resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
tions.
#During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing
area.
#If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window
again.
Automatic function of the side windows
In the following cases, the side windows will be
closed automatically when the vehicle is switched
o:
Rif it starts to rain
Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the
windscreen.
Rin extreme temperatures
Raer a certain time (depending on the on-
board electrical system voltage)
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The side windows will be closed as far as the ven-
tilation position.
Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side windows
will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is
open.
If the side windows are obstructed during auto-
matic closing, the side window concerned will
open again slightly. Aer another automatic clos-
ing process, the automatic function may be deac-
tivated. The automatic function will be active
again the next time the vehicle is started.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
before starting a journey)
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when open-
ing a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
164 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Requirements
RThe key is near the vehicle.
#Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RThe side windows are open.
RThe sunroof opens.
RThe panoramic sunroof opens.
RThe seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.
%If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding
sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is
opened rst.
#Interrupt convenience opening: Release the
key Ü.
#Continue convenience opening: Press key
Ü again and keep it pressed.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from out-
side)
&WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
paying attention during convenience clos-
ing
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof.
#When the convenience closing feature is
operating, monitor the entire closing
process and make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
Requirements
RThe key is near the vehicle.
#Press and hold the s button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
RThe vehicle is locked.
RThe side windows are closed.
RThe sliding sunroof is closed.
RThe panoramic sliding roof is closed.
#To interrupt convenience closing: release the
s button.
#To continue convenience closing: press and
hold the s button again.
%Convenience closing also functions with KEY-
LESS-GO (/ page 154).
Resolving problems with the side windows
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatally injured if reversing protection is not
activated
If you close a side window again immediately
aer it has been blocked, the side window will
close with increased or maximum force. The
reversing function is then not active and body
parts may become trapped.
#Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to
reopen the side window.
Opening and closing 165
F206 0119 02
A side window cannot be closed and you cannot
see the cause.
#Check to see whether any objects are in the
window guide.
#Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and
reopens again immediately:
#Immediately aer this, pull and hold the corre-
sponding button again until the side window
has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the
automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and
reopens again immediately:
#Immediately aer this, pull and hold the corre-
sponding button again until the side window
has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the
automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or closed
using the convenience opening feature.
Possible causes:
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 148).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 150).
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
the sliding sunroof is being opened and
closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range
of movement.
#During the opening and closing process,
make sure that no body parts are in the
sweep of the sliding sunroof.
#If someone is trapped, release the con-
trol panel immediately.
or
#Touch the control panel during automatic
operation.
The opening/closing process will be
stopped.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid-
ing sunroof is operated by children
Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
166 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
the roller sunblind is being opened and
closed
Body parts may become trapped between the
roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
#During the opening or closing process,
make sure that no body parts are in the
roller sunblind's range of movement.
#If someone is trapped, release the con-
trol panel immediately.
or
#Touch the control panel during automatic
operation.
The opening/closing process will be
stopped.
*NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to
malfunction.
#Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
*NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof
may damage the seals.
#Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
*NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when
a roof luggage rack is tted
If the sliding sunroof is opened when a roof
luggage rack is tted, the sliding sunroof may
be damaged by the roof luggage rack.
#Do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof
luggage rack is tted.
The sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ven-
tilation of the vehicle interior.
The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are
operated using control panel 1.
The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operated
only when the roller sunblind is open.
#To open: swipe backwards across control
panel 1 and hold it.
#To close: swipe forwards across control panel
1 and hold it.
Opening and closing 167
F206 0119 02
#To raise or lower: press control panel 1
briey.
#To start automatic operation: swipe forwards
or backwards across control panel 1.
#To cancel automatic operation: press control
panel 1 again.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun-
roof
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open
again automatically. The automatic reversing func-
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react:
Rto so, light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
Rtowards the end of the closing procedure.
Rduring resetting.
#During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing
area.
#If someone is trapped, release the con-
trol panel immediately.
or
#Touch the control panel during automatic
closing.
The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind
If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during
the closing process, the roller sunblind will open
again automatically. The automatic reversing func-
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move-
ment.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not
react to so, light and thin objects, e.g. n-
gers.
#When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range
of movement.
#If someone is trapped, release the con-
trol panel immediately.
or
#Touch the control panel during automatic
closing.
The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically
when the vehicle has been switched o in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rif it starts to rain
168 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-
screen.
Rin extreme temperatures
Raer a certain time (depending on the on-
board electrical system voltage)
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to
continue ventilating the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an auto-
matic closing procedure, it will be opened again
slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sun-
roof and the side windows will then be deactiva-
ted.
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it
starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will auto-
matically be lowered while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic lowering function
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the
sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will auto-
matically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At
low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by
automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof
will automatically be lowered slightly at the
rear.
#Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sliding sunroof's range of movement
while the vehicle is in motion.
#If someone becomes trapped, touch the
control panel.
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is
closed again
If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi-
ately aer it has been blocked or reset, the
sliding sunroof will close with increased or
maximum force.
There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of
fatal injuries!
#Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#If someone is trapped, release the con-
trol panel immediately.
or
#Touch the control panel during automatic
closing.
The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you can-
not see the cause.
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing
and reopens again slightly:
#Immediately aer automatic reversing, swipe
forwards across the control panel
(/ page 166) and hold it until the sliding sun-
roof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with
increased force.
Opening and closing 169
F206 0119 02
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and
opens again slightly:
#Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with
increased force.
Vehicles without a panoramic sliding sunroof: the
sliding sunroof is not operating smoothly.
#Reset the sliding sunroof.
Resetting the sliding sunroof
#Swipe forwards across the control panel
(/ page 166) and hold it repeatedly until the
sliding sunroof is completely open.
#Swipe across the control panel and hold it for
another second.
#Close the sliding sunroof.
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: the
sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operat-
ing smoothly.
#Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-
blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-
blind
#Swipe forwards across the control panel
(/ page 166) and hold it repeatedly until the
sliding sunroof is completely closed.
#Swipe across the control panel and hold it for
another second.
#Swipe across and hold the control panel until
the roller sunblind is completely closed.
#Swipe across the control panel and hold it for
another second.
#Use automatic operation to fully open and
then close the sliding sunroof.
Roller sunblinds
Extending the rear side window roller sunblinds
*NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it
snapping back
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may
be damaged.
#Always move the roller sun blind by
hand.
#Do not drive with the roller sun blind
hooked in and rear side windows opened
at the same time.
#Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook
it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window.
170 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sun-
blind
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
extending or retracting the roller sunblind
Body parts may become trapped in the roller
sunblind's range of movement.
#Ensure there are no body parts in the
range of movement.
#If someone becomes trapped, briey
press the button again.
The opening or closing process will
briey be stopped. The roller sunblind
will then return to its starting position.
*NOTE Damage caused by objects
Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal-
function.
#Do not place any objects on the rear
shelf.
#Ensure that the roller sunblind can move
freely.
#To extend or retract: press button 1.
Anti-the protection
Function of the immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being
started without the correct key.
The immobiliser is automatically activated when
the vehicle is switched o, and deactivated when
the vehicle is switched on.
ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
Function of the ATA system
If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
Rwhen a door is opened
Rwhen the boot lid is opened
Rwhen the bonnet is opened
Rwhen interior protection is triggered
(/ page 173)
Rwhen tow-away protection is triggered
(/ page 172)
The ATA system is primed automatically aer
approximately ten seconds in the following situa-
tions:
RAer locking the vehicle with the key
RAer locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Opening and closing 171
F206 0119 02
Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is
primed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the
following situations:
RAer unlocking the vehicle with the key
RAer unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
RAer pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the storage compartment
(/ page 263)
Deactivating the ATA
#Press the Ü, s or H button on the
key.
or
#Press the start/stop button with the key in the
storage compartment (/ page 263)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
#Grasp the outside door handle with the key
outside the vehicle.
Function of tow-away protection
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alter-
ation to your vehicle's angle of inclination is
detected while tow-away protection is primed.
Tow-away protection is automatically primed aer
about 60 seconds:
RAer locking the vehicle with the key
RAer locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol-
lowing components are closed:
RDoors
RBoot lid
Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated:
RAer pressing the Ü or H button on the
key
RAer pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the storage compartment
(/ page 263)
RAer unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
RWhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked
vehicle (/ page 336).
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Opening/closing 5Vehicle protection
#Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.
172 Opening and closing
F206 0119 02
Tow-away protection is primed again in the follow-
ing cases:
RThe vehicle is unlocked again.
RA door is opened.
RThe vehicle is locked again.
Function of interior protection
When interior protection is primed, a visual and
audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected
in the vehicle interior.
Interior protection is primed automatically aer
approximately ten seconds:
RAer locking the vehicle with the key
RAer locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Interior protection is only primed when the follow-
ing components are closed:
RDoors
RBoot lid
Interior protection is automatically deactivated:
RAer pressing the Ü or H button on the
key
RAer pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the storage compartment
(/ page 263)
RAer unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
RWhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false alarm:
RWhen there are moving objects suchas mas-
cots in the vehicle interior
RIf a side window is open
RIf the sliding sunroof is open
RIf the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Activating/deactivating interior protection
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Opening/closing 5Vehicle protection
#Activate or deactivate Interior protection.
Interior protection is activated again in the follow-
ing cases:
RThe vehicle is unlocked again.
RA door is opened.
RThe vehicle is locked again.
Opening and closing 173
F206 0119 02
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt. Ensure the following when adjusting steering
wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
RYou are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following points
into consideration:
RYou are sitting in an upright position
RYour thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
RYour legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
RThe back of your head is supported at eye
level by the centre of the head restraint
RYou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
RYou can move your legs freely
RYou can see all the indicators on the driver's
display clearly
RYou have a good overview of the trac condi-
tions
RObserve the notes on correctly fastening the
seat belt (/ page 106).
Notes on grab handles
&WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive
load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
be damaged or come loose from its anchor-
age. This may result in injuries.
174 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Use the grab handles only to stabilise
the seating position or to assist in get-
ting in and out of the seat.
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-
dren in the vehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly
while driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Seats and stowing 175
F206 0119 02
Children in particular could accidentally press
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive
load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
be damaged or come loose from its anchor-
age. This may result in injuries.
#Use the grab handles only to stabilise
the seating position or to assist in get-
ting in and out of the seat.
176 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to the seats when adjust-
ing
The seats may be damaged by objects when
adjusting the seats.
#When adjusting the seats, make sure
that there are no objects in the footwell,
under or behind the seats.
#To adjust the seat fore-and-a position: li
lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged.
#To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2
until the desired seat height has been
reached.
#To set the seat backrest inclination: rotate
handwheel 3 forwards or backwards until
the required position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat manually and electrically
(with Seat Comfort Package)
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is
switched o.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-
dren in the vehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly
while driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 177
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
178 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
*NOTE Damage to the seats when adjust-
ing
The seats may be damaged by objects when
adjusting the seats.
#When adjusting the seats, make sure
that there are no objects in the footwell,
under or behind the seats.
1Seat backrest inclination
2Seat height
3Seat cushion inclination
4Seat cushion length
5Seat fore-and-a position
#To adjust the seat fore-and-a position: li
lever 5 and slide the seat into the desired
position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is
switched o.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
Seats and stowing 179
F206 0119 02
#Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-
dren in the vehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
180 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
*NOTE Damage to the seats when adjust-
ing
The seats may be damaged by objects when
adjusting the seats.
#When adjusting the seats, make sure
that there are no objects in the footwell,
under or behind the seats.
The switches for adjusting the seats do not move.
You will therefore receive no direct feedback on
the switch while pressing it. Feedback is provided
only by the movement of the seat.
1Head restraint height
2Seat cushion inclination
3Seat cushion length
4Seat fore-and-a position
5Seat height
6Seat backrest inclination
#Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 195).
Seats and stowing 181
F206 0119 02
%The head restraint height will be adjusted
automatically when you adjust the seat height
or the seat fore-and-a position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1Higher
2Soer
3Lower
4Firmer
#Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of
the backrest.
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
mechanically (two-way head restraints)
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
182 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Take hold of the head restraint on both sides
and press release knob 1.
#To raise or lower: pull the head restraint
upwards or push it downwards.
#Let go of release knob 1.
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
mechanically (4-way head restraint)
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
Seats and stowing 183
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with manual and electric seat adjustment
#Take hold of the head restraint on both sides
and press release knob 1.
The head restraint will be unlocked in all direc-
tions of movement simultaneously.
#To raise or lower: pull the head restraint
upwards or push it downwards.
#To move forwards or backwards: pull the head
restraint forwards or push it backwards.
#Let go of release knob 1.
Vehicles with electric seat adjustment
#To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint
using the buttons on the door operating unit
(/ page 179).
#To move forwards or backwards: take hold of
the head restraint on both sides and press
release knob 1.
#Pull the headrest forwards or push it back-
wards.
#Let go of release knob 1.
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats
manually
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
184 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#To raise: push release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and pull the head restraint up
until it engages.
#To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down until it engages.
Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
Removing
You can remove the head restraints only in vehi-
cles with folding rear seat backrests.
#Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for-
wards slightly (/ page 42).
#Press release knob 2 and pull the head
restraint upwards as far as it will go.
Release knob 1 will extend.
#Push both release knobs 1 and 2 at the
same time in the direction of the arrow and
pull out the head restraint.
Seats and stowing 185
F206 0119 02
#Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Fitting
#Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for-
wards slightly (/ page 42).
#Insert the head restraint such that the notches
on the bar are on the le when viewed in the
direction of travel.
#Push the head restraint down until it engages.
#Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Conguring the seat settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
Adjusting the air cushions
#On the corresponding menu, adjust the air
cushions for Lumbar or Side bolsters.
Setting automatic seat adjustment
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the driver's seat aer
calling up a driver prole
Selecting a user prole may trigger an adjust-
ment of the driver's seat to the position saved
under the user prole. You or other vehicle
occupants could be injured in the process.
#Make sure that when the position of driv-
er's seat is being adjusted using the mul-
timedia system, no people or body parts
are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
ped, immediately stop the adjustment process
by:
#a) Pressing the warning message on the
central display.
or
#b) Pressing a position button of the
memory function or a seat adjustment
switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
5Position seat automatically
Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering
wheel position to body size
The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and
steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's
body size and sets this directly.
#To set the unit of measurement: select cm or
ft/in.
#Set the size using the scale.
#Select Start positioning.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position
is adjusted to the body size that has been set.
%You can also congure these settings via the
Mercedes me user account for your user pro-
le. By synchronising the proles in the vehi-
cle and the Mercedes me connect proles,
you can carry over these settings for your
vehicle. Further information about synchronis-
ing user proles (/ page 476).
186 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
%If the driver's seat and steering wheel position
calculated by the vehicle is not practical or
comfortable, it can be manually adapted at
any time via the control buttons.
The outside mirrors are not set via this func-
tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via
the operating switches.
Overview of massage programmes
RClassic massage Relaxing back massage
RMobilizing massage Mobilising massage with
upward-moving massage waves. Can promote
slower, deeper respiration. This can improve
the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
RActivating massage Activating massage with
upward-moving massage waves
RRelaxing massage Relaxing back massage
with ascending wave-like movements and then
soothing movements
RDepth waves Wave-like movements in the
cushion can promote blood ow and meta-
bolic processes in the lower back and legs
RDeep workout Wave-like movements in the
cushion are combined with wave-like move-
ments from the backrest and can stimulate
blood circulation and metabolism in the lower
back, buttocks and legs
%The Depth waves and Deep workout pro-
grammes are available only for the driver's
seat.
Selecting the massage programme for the front
seats
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort
#Select Massage.
#Select a massage programme (/ page 187).
#Start the programme for the desired
seat ;.
#To set the massage intensity: switch High
intensity on or o.
#To stop the massage: select É.
%The availability of this function is equipment-
dependent.
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
#Select Reset.
#Select ß for the desired seat.
The settings for the selected seat are reset.
Switching the seat heating on/o
&WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
ding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be aected or
they may even suer burn-like injuries.
#Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
Seats and stowing 187
F206 0119 02
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated aer it has been
switched on repeatedly.
*NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, over-
heating may occur due to objects or docu-
ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions
or child seats. This could cause damage to the
seat surface.
#Make sure that no objects or documents
are on the seats when the seat heater is
switched on.
Requirements
RThe power supply is switched on.
#Press button 1 for the respective seat
repeatedly until the desired heating level is
reached.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator
lamps are o, the seat heating is switched o.
%The seat heating will automatically switch
down from the three heating levels aer
around 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat
heating is switched o.
%If you switch the power supply o and on
again within 20 minutes, the previous setting
of the seat heating for the driver's seat will
remain active.
Switching the seat ventilation on/o
Requirements
RThe power supply is switched on.
188 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Press button 1 for the respective seat
repeatedly until the desired blower setting is
reached.
Depending on the blower setting, up to three
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator
lamps are o, the seat ventilation is switched
o.
%If you switch the power supply o and on
again within 20 minutes, the previous seat
ventilation setting for the driver's seat will
remain active.
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment for children
when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust
the steering wheel.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 189
F206 0119 02
Unlocking
#Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
#Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
Locking
#Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
#Check and make sure that the steering col-
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment for children
when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust
the steering wheel.
190 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
power supply is disconnected.
1To move up
2To move back
3To move down
4To move forward
#Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 195).
Switching the steering wheel heater on/o
Depending on the vehicle version, the steering
wheel heater can be switched on/o via a switch
on the steering wheel.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Seats and stowing 191
F206 0119 02
#To switch on: push the switch into position
1.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.
#To switch o: push the switch into position
2.
When you switch the vehicle o, the steering
wheel heater will switch o.
Decoupling the steering wheel heater from the
seat heating
Requirements
RThe power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.
RThe steering wheel heater and the seat heat-
ing are linked.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
5Heating settings
The function is active by default and the steering
wheel heater is automatically activated and deac-
tivated when the seat heating is switched on and
o.
#Tap on Additional steering wheel heater.
The steering wheel heater will be decoupled
from the seat heating.
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature
&WARNING Risk of accident when pulling
away during the adjustment process of
the easy entry and exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle.
#Always wait until the adjustment process
is complete before driving o.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants, particularly
children, may become trapped.
#Make sure that no one has any part of
their body within the range of movement
of the steering wheel and driver's seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
steering wheel:
#Move the steering wheel adjustment
lever.
The adjustment process is stopped.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
driver's seat:
#Press the switch for seat adjustment.
The adjustment process is stopped.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the
adjustment process by pressing one of the mem-
ory function position switches.
192 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
children activate the easy entry and exit
feature
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu-
larly when unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the
automatic seat adjustment function must have
been switched on (/ page 186).
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
steering wheel and driver's seat will move as fol-
lows:
RThe steering wheel will move upwards.
RThe driver's seat will move forward or back-
ward to a position suitable for getting in or out
of the vehicle.
This will occur in the following situations:
Ryou switch o the vehicle when the driver's
door is open.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
switched o.
%The steering wheel will then move upwards
only if it is not already as high as it will go.
The driver's seat will move forwards or back-
wards only if it is not already in the ideal posi-
tion for getting in or out of the vehicle.
The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move
back to the last driving position in the following
cases:
RYou switch the power supply or the vehicle on
when the driver's door is closed.
Ryou close the driver's door when the vehicle is
switched on.
The last drive position will be saved when:
RIf you switch o the vehicle.
RVehicles with memory function: you call up the
seat settings via the memory function.
RVehicles with memory function: you save the
seat settings via the memory function.
Vehicles with memory function: press one of the
memory function position switches to stop the
adjustment process.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Requirements
RThe automatic seat adjustment has been acti-
vated (/ page 186).
RThe power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Comfort
5Easy entry and exit feature
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
#Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering
wheel only or Off.
Seats and stowing 193
F206 0119 02
%If you are using a custom user prole, this
information will be used for the easy entry
and exit feature. This will cause the driver's
seat and steering wheel to move into the cor-
rect position automatically (/ page 474).
Memory function
Function of the memory function
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem-
ory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station-
ary.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when
adjusting the seat with the memory func-
tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped.
#During the adjusting process of the
memory function, ensure that no body
parts are in the area of movement of the
seat or the steering wheel.
#If someone becomes trapped, press a
preset position button or seat adjust-
ment switch immediately.
The adjustment process is stopped.
&WARNING Danger of entrapment when
memory function is activated by children
When children activate the memory function,
they can get trapped, especially if they are
unsupervised.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the vehi-
cle is switched o.
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
You can save the following settings for the front
seat:
RSeat, backrest, head restraint position and
contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar
region
RSeat heating: distribution of the heated sec-
tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest
RDriver's side: steering wheel position and posi-
tion of the outside mirrors on the driver's and
front passenger sides
RHead-up display
194 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
Operating the memory function
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem-
ory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station-
ary.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when
adjusting the seat with the memory func-
tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped.
#During the adjusting process of the
memory function, ensure that no body
parts are in the area of movement of the
seat or the steering wheel.
#If someone becomes trapped, press a
preset position button or seat adjust-
ment switch immediately.
The adjustment process is stopped.
&WARNING Danger of entrapment when
memory function is activated by children
When children activate the memory function,
they can get trapped, especially if they are
unsupervised.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the vehi-
cle is switched o.
Storing
#Set the front seat, the steering wheel, the
head-up display and the outside mirror to the
desired position.
#Press the V button and then release it.
Seats and stowing 195
F206 0119 02
#Press one of the preset position buttons 4,
T or U within three seconds.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
#To call up: press the preset position button
4, T or U.
The seat is moved to the stored position. Aer
releasing the button, the front seat, outside
mirror, head-up display and steering column
continue to move into the stored position
automatically.
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot
lid is open when the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion.
#Always switch o the engine before
opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may
prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.
(/ page 121) Observe the notes on airbags in
this regard.
&WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured suciently, they could slip, tip
over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi-
cle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
196 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's and front-passenger foot-
well
Objects in the driver's and front-passenger
footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating‑ and road
safety of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
or front-passenger footwell.
#Always ensure that the pedals have su-
cient free space.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag
shuto: Objects trapped under the front
passenger seat may interfere with the function of
the automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system. Therefore please observe the
notes on the function of automatic front
passenger airbag deactivation (/ page 110).
&WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe
and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself.
#Always be particularly careful around the
tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super-
vise children especially closely in this
area.
#Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
%Leather is a natural product. It has natural
surface properties, such as dierences in
structure, marks caused by growth and injury
or subtle colour dierences. These surface
characteristics are particular to leather, and
not material defects. Leather is also subject
to a natural ageing process which changes
the surface characteristics.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind
when loading the vehicle:
RNever allow the payload including occupants
to exceed the maximum permissible gross
mass or the permissible axle loads for the
vehicle.
Seats and stowing 197
F206 0119 02
These are shown on the vehicle's model iden-
tication plate (/ page 797).
RThe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RSecure the load using the tie-down eyelets
and distribute the tension evenly.
Notes on driving with roof load
RDistribute the roof load and vehicle load
evenly, and place heavy objects at the bottom.
Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
RDrive carefully, avoiding abrupt starting, brak-
ing and steering as well as fast cornering.
RWhen carrying a roof load or when the vehicle
is fully loaded or occupied, select drive pro-
gram ; or A. These are congured for
good stability (/ page 282).
%Further information on stowage compart-
ments and stowage facilities can be found in
the Digital Owner's Manual.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front stowage compartments
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
1Stowage spaces in the doors
2Stowage compartment under the armrest with
multimedia and USB connections
3Stowage compartment in the front centre
console with cup holders, USB ports and
charging module for wireless charging of
mobile phones
4Glove compartment
198 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
%The rubber mat in the stowage compartment
in front centre console 3 can be removed
for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior
(/ page 629).
Opening and closing the stowage compartment
in the front centre console
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
#To open: slide the cover of the stowage com-
partment in the front centre console all the
way forwards in the direction of the arrow
using handle 1.
#To close: briey push handle 1 of the open
cover of the stowage compartment in the front
centre console forwards.
The cover will automatically close the storage
compartment in the front centre console.
Opening and closing the storage compartment
in the front armrest
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
Seats and stowing 199
F206 0119 02
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
#To open: press release catch 1 downwards.
The covers of the storage compartment in
front armrest 2 will open automatically in the
direction of the arrow.
#To close: move the covers of the storage com-
partment in front armrest 2 inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
The storage compartment in the front armrest
is now closed.
Locking/unlocking the glove compartment
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
200 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock-
wise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).
Opening the electronics compartment in the
rear-compartment centre console
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
#Briey press cover 1.
The electronics compartment in the rear
centre console will open.
Seats and stowing 201
F206 0119 02
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat
(EASY-PACK Quickfold)
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself
or a vehicle occupant.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
&WARNING Risk of an accident because
the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
There is a risk of the following, in particular:
RThe vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
protect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RA child restraint system is no longer prop-
erly supported or properly positioned and
may no longer full its function as inten-
ded.
RThe seat backrest cannot restrain objects
or goods in the boot or load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
engaged, especially:
RAer the seat has been adjusted.
RAer the load compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards
Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri-
cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise,
the seat backrest is not locked.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
dren.
Requirements
RThe rear seat backrest head restraints are fully
inserted.
RThe rear armrest has been folded up.
Folding the rear outer seat backrests forward
You can fold the centre and right seat backrests
forwards separately.
The le seat backrest can be folded forwards only
together with the centre seat backrest.
If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat
backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back
into place.
#Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an
upright position and locked to the le seat
backrest (/ page 205).
202 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into
marked position 2.
#Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
#To fold the le seat backrest forward: briey
press le button 1.
The le seat backrest folds forward together
with the centre seat backrest.
If the le seat backrest is not locked with the
centre seat backrest, this will be shown on the
central display.
#To fold the right seat backrest forward: briey
press right button 1.
The right seat backrest will fold forwards.
%If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat
backrests forwards, fold the right seat back-
rest forwards.
Folding the centre rear seat backrest forwards
separately
If you no longer require the folded-down seat
backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back
into place.
Seats and stowing 203
F206 0119 02
#Press release catch 3.
#Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself
or a vehicle occupant.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
&WARNING Risk of an accident because
the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
There is a risk of the following, in particular:
RThe vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
protect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RA child restraint system is no longer prop-
erly supported or properly positioned and
may no longer full its function as inten-
ded.
RThe seat backrest cannot restrain objects
or goods in the boot or load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
engaged, especially:
RAer the seat has been adjusted.
RAer the load compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards
Make sure that the red marking of the lock veri-
cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise,
the seat backrest is not locked.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
dren.
*NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt when folding back the seat back-
rest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
be damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat backrest.
204 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
#Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked
in place, red lock verication indicator 2 will
be visible.
Locking and releasing the release catch of the
centre rear seat backrest
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself
or a vehicle occupant.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
&WARNING Risk of an accident because
the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
There is a risk of the following, in particular:
RThe vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
protect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RA child restraint system is no longer prop-
erly supported or properly positioned and
may no longer full its function as inten-
ded.
RThe seat backrest cannot restrain objects
or goods in the boot or load compartment.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
engaged, especially:
RAer the seat has been adjusted.
RAer the load compartment enlargement
has been folded forwards
If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked
in place, the red lock verication indicators will be
visible.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to chil-
dren.
You can lock the centre seat backrest release
catch if you want to secure the boot against unau-
thorised access. The centre seat backrest can
then be folded forwards only together with the le
seat backrest.
Seats and stowing 205
F206 0119 02
#To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or
downwards.
Overview of tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
1Tie-down eyes
%Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehi-
cles equipped with the through-loading fea-
ture in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK
Quickfold).
Overview of bag hooks
&WARNING Risk of injury when using bag
hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage.
Objects or items of luggage may be ung
around and hit vehicle occupants.
#Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks.
#Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg.
Do not use it to secure a load.
206 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
1Bag hook
Opening the stowage space under the boot oor
&WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
load trunk oor
If you drive when the trunk oor is open,
objects could be thrown around and strike
vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
abrupt changes in direction.
#Always close the trunk oor before a
journey.
*NOTE Damage to the handle in the boot
oor
If the boot oor has been attached to the drip
rail via the handle, damage may arise when
the boot lid is closed.
#Disconnect the handle before closing the
boot lid and close trunk oor.
#Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2.
Seats and stowing 207
F206 0119 02
Attaching a roof luggage rack
&WARNING Risk of accident due to exceed-
ing the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual
driving characteristics as well as the steering
and braking characteristics alter.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv-
ing characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired.
#Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will nd information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
*NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to
observe the maximum permissible clear-
ance height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum
permissible clearance height, the roof and
other vehicle parts may be damaged.
#Please observe the indicated maximum
clearance height.
#If the vehicle exceeds the permissible
clearance height, do not drive in.
#Take the modied vehicle height in the
case of roof superstructures or other
carrier systems into account.
*NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved
roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage
racks that have not been tested and approved
for Mercedes-Benz.
#Use only roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the sliding sunroof can be
fully raised when the roof luggage rack is
tted.
#Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the boot lid can be fully
opened when the roof luggage rack is t-
ted.
#Position the load on the roof luggage
rack in such a way that the vehicle will
not sustain damage even when it is in
motion.
*NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding
sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage
racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam-
aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to
open it when using a roof luggage rack not
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#When a roof luggage rack is tted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised
to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
208 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when
a roof luggage rack is tted
If the sliding sunroof is opened when a roof
luggage rack is tted, the sliding sunroof may
be damaged by the roof luggage rack.
#Do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof
luggage rack is tted.
The sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ven-
tilation of the vehicle interior.
*NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched
when being opened.
#Do not use metallic or hard objects.
#Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
#Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening
points beneath covers 1.
#Comply with the installation instructions of the
roof luggage rack manufacturer.
#Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
Cup holders
Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from the
centre console
&WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the vehi-
cle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
while the vehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion, the container may be ung around
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from trac conditions and
you may lose control of the vehicle.
Seats and stowing 209
F206 0119 02
#Only use the cup holder when the vehicle
is stationary.
#Only use the cup holder for containers of
the right size.
#Always close the container, particularly if
the liquid is hot.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
Removing the wing of the cup holder
The wing of the cup holder can be removed to
stow smaller items in the cup holder.
%The installation and removal as well as the
operation of the wing of the cup holder are
shown using the example of a cup holder with
double wing.
#Push snap-in brackets 1 of the wing inwards
in the direction of the arrow until they release.
#Pull the wing of the cup holder out of the stor-
age compartment upwards.
210 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
Fitting the wings of the cup holder
#If necessary, open the cover of the storage
compartment in the front centre console.
#Place the wings of the cup holder onto the bar
in the storage compartment as shown.
#Slide snap-in brackets 2 outwards until they
engage.
Operating the wings of the cup holder
#Press button 1 and/or 3.
Wings 4 of the cup holder will fold upwards.
The wings of the cup holder can be folded down
until the wings engage and remain in the folded
position. The cup holder's holding function will
then not be available.
%When you are using the cup holder for dier-
ent containers, the wings of the cup holder
automatically adjust to the diameter of the
container.
Fitting the cup holder housing
#Insert cup holder housing 1 into the stowage
compartment in the front centre console on a
slight angle.
Seats and stowing 211
F206 0119 02
#Engage hook 2 in the side opening in the
stowage compartment.
#Press the front part of housing 3 downwards
until it engages.
#Push catch 1 on the cup holder housing
backwards.
The cup holder housing is locked.
Removing the cup holder housing
#Push catch 1 on the cup holder housing for-
wards.
The cup holder housing is released.
#Pull the front part of housing 3 upwards with
a slight jerk.
#Disengage hook 2 from the side opening in
the stowage compartment of the front centre
console.
#Remove cup holder housing 1 from the stow-
age compartment of the front centre console
on a slight angle.
212 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
%The cup holder and the rubber mat under-
neath it can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
with clean, lukewarm water.
Opening the cup holder and mobile phone holder
in the rear armrest
&WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the vehi-
cle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
while the vehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion, the container may be ung around
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from trac conditions and
you may lose control of the vehicle.
#Only use the cup holder when the vehicle
is stationary.
#Only use the cup holder for containers of
the right size.
#Always close the container, particularly if
the liquid is hot.
*NOTE Damage to the cup holder
The cup holder can be damaged when folding
back the rear seat armrest. When open, the
cup holder can be damaged by body weight.
#The rear seat armrest can only be folded
back when the cup holder is closed.
#Do not sit or support yourself on the cup
holder when it is open.
Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest
#Press cover trim 1 twice.
The cup holder will open in the direction of the
arrow.
#Place a container in or remove a container
from the cup holder.
Closing the cup holder in the rear armrest
#Press cover trim 1.
Opening the mobile phone holder in the rear arm-
rest
#Press cover trim 1 once.
The mobile phone holder will open in the
direction of the arrow.
Seats and stowing 213
F206 0119 02
#Place the mobile phone in or remove it from
the holder.
Closing the mobile phone holder in the rear arm-
rest
#Press cover trim 1.
The mobile phone holder and the cup holder
will both open.
#Press cover trim 1 a second time.
The mobile phone holder will be closed.
%The mobile phone holder is designed for two
mobile phones or one tablet. You can also
charge the devices in the holder by inserting
the charging cable into the devices through
the opening on the underside of the holder.
%Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Using the ashtray
*NOTE Damage to the stowage compart-
ment under the ashtray due to intense
heat
The stowage compartment under the ashtray
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
you rest a lit cigarette on it.
#Make sure that the ashtray is fully
engaged.
#Place ashtray 2 in one of the cup holders in
the centre console or in the rear compart-
ment.
#Check that it is seated rmly.
#Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
#To open the ashtray: fold lid 1 upwards.
#To close the ashtray: press lid 1 down.
214 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
%You can remove the top part of the ashtray for
cleaning or emptying by twisting it. Clean the
ashtray, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water.
Using the rear ashtray
Ashtray in the rear door (example)
#Place the ashtray in one of the cup holders in
the rear compartment or in the holder in the
rear door.
#Check that it is seated rmly.
#Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196).
Opening the ashtray
#Fold cap 1 upwards.
If you are not using the ashtray, close it and place
it in the holder in the rear door or in the cup
holder in the rear compartment.
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket
Requirements
ROnly connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
has the following 12 V sockets:
RIn the front passenger footwell
RIn the electronics compartment in the centre
console of the rear passenger compartment
Example: 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell
#Fold up socket cap 1.
#Insert the plug of the device.
Seats and stowing 215
F206 0119 02
USB ports
Depending on its equipment, the vehicle has the
following USB ports:
RIn the stowage compartment in the front
centre console
RIn the stowage compartment under the front
armrest
RIn the electronics compartment in the centre
console of the rear passenger compartment
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
has either one or two USB ports in the stowage
compartment in the front centre console and
beneath the front armrest.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
has two USB connections in the rear centre con-
sole.
Example: USB ports in the electronics compart-
ment in the centre console of the rear
passenger compartment
When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a
USB device, such as a mobile phone, at USB ports
1 using a suitable charging cable. The USB
device can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A)
depending on the vehicle equipment.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and con-
nection with the exterior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone receptacles cannot always retain all
objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects so that they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
216 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of re from placing objects
in the mobile phone stowage compart-
ment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment could constitute a re
hazard.
#Apart from a mobile phone, do not place
any other objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, especially those
made of metal.
*NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac-
ing them in the mobile phone stowage
compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, these may be dam-
aged by electromagnetic elds.
#Do not place credit cards, storage
media, ski passes or other objects sensi-
tive to electromagnetic elds in the
mobile phone stowage compartment.
*NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow-
age compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage
compartment, the compartment may be dam-
aged.
#Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
Always observe the notes for persons with elec-
tronic medical aids (/ page 98).
RDepending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior aerial via the charging module.
RThe charging function and wireless connection
of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior
aerial are only available if the vehicle is
switched on.
RSmall mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile phone
stowage compartment.
RLarge mobile phones which do not rest at in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may
not be able to be charged or connected with
the vehicle's exterior aerial.
RThe mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This may also depend on
the applications (apps) currently open in the
background.
RTo ensure more ecient charging and connec-
tion with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove
the protective cover from the mobile phone.
Protective covers which are necessary for
wireless charging are an exception.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
Seats and stowing 217
F206 0119 02
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
Requirements
RThe mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging.
A list of compatible mobile phones can be
found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
mobile.com/
Wireless charging of a mobile phone in the front
stowage compartment
#With the display facing upwards, place the
mobile phone as centrally as possible on the
mat 1 in the front stowage compartment
next to the USB ports.
If the driver display shows the charging icon, the
mobile phone is being charged. Any malfunctions
when charging the mobile phone are also shown
in the central display.
%The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil
This device operates on a secondary basis, that is
to say it has no protection against harmful inter-
ference, not even from the same type of stations,
and must not cause interference with systems
operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the
procedure dened in Directive 242/2000 by the
Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and
meets the applicable technical requirements.
Further information is available on the ANATEL
website. https://www.anatel.gov.br
#For further information on the certicate of
conformity for onboard radio equipment, see
(/ page 92).
218 Seats and stowing
F206 0119 02
Fitting/removing the oor mats
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sucient room for the pedals.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
Fitting oor mats
#Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
lay the oor mat in the footwell.
#Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
#Adjust the corresponding seat.
Removing oor mats
#Slide the corresponding seat backwards.
#Pull the oor mat o holders 2.
#Remove the oor mat.
Inserting or removing oor mats on the second
row of seats
#To insert: push the corresponding seat on the
rst row of seats forwards and lay the oor
mat in the rear footwell such that it ts neatly.
#To remove: push the corresponding seat on
the rst row of seats forwards and remove the
oor mat from the rear footwell.
Seats and stowing 219
F206 0119 02
Exterior lighting
Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad
Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not nec-
essary to convert the headlamps. The legal
requirements are also met in countries in which
trac drives on the other side of the road.
Vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT: as a convenience
function, the headlamps will automatically adjust
when you cross the border into countries where
trac drives on the other side of the road. If nec-
essary, the headlamps can also be adjusted man-
ually in the Low beam menu (/ page 232).
The automatic light adjustment function is availa-
ble:
RIf automatic is selected on the Low beam
menu
RIf navigation and the navigation position are
available
In the following cases, check the headlamp set-
ting and change it manually if necessary:
RIf the Low beam setting (left/right-side traf-
fic) Manual adjustment only display message
is displayed.
RIf the Check low beam setting (left/right-
side traffic) display message is displayed.
Once the headlamps have been converted:
ROncoming trac will not be dazzled.
RThe edge of the road will not be illuminated as
far or as high.
RThe "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog
light" functions will not be available.
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with
the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal
requirements and trac situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1W Le-hand parking lights
2X Right-hand parking lights
3T Standing lights and licence plate light-
ing
220 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
4Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5L Low beam/high beam
6R Activates or deactivates the rear fog
light.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator
lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated
and replaced by the L low-beam indicator
lamp.
#Always park your vehicle safely using sucient
lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations.
*NOTE Battery discharging by operating the
standing lights
Do not have the standing lights switched on
over a period of several hours.
For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer
than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not per-
mitted in some countries. In this case, the stand-
ing lights are also switched on in the parking
lights position.
If the battery is insuciently charged, the stand-
ing lights or parking lights will be switched o
automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking
lights) will switch o automatically when the driv-
er's door is opened.
RObserve the notes on locator lighting
(/ page 232).
Switching on accident scene lighting
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Switch on the hazard warning lights
(/ page 57).
#Turn the light switch from the à position to
the L position.
The low beam will be switched on despite the
vehicle being switched o.
The accident scene lighting will be switched o if:
Ryou switch o the hazard warning lights.
Ryou turn the light switch back to Ã.
Rthe battery is insuciently charged.
Automatic driving lights function
When the vehicle is switched on, the standing
lights, low beam and daytime running lights will be
switched on automatically depending on the light
conditions.
&WARNING Risk of accident when the
dipped beam is switched o in poor visi-
bility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
dipped beam may not be switched on auto-
matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
of poor visibility such as spray.
#In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible for the vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog light on/o
Requirements
RThe light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion.
#Press button R.
Light and sight 221
F206 0119 02
Please observe the country-specic laws on the
use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the lights
1High beam
2Turn signal light, right
3Headlamp ashing
4Turn signal light, le
#Use the combination switch to select the
desired function.
Switching on high beam
#Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position.
#Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1.
When high beam is activated, the indicator
lamp for low beam L will be deactivated
and replaced by the indicator lamp for high
beam K.
Switching o high beam
#Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow
3.
Headlamp ashing
#Pull the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 3.
Turn signal light
#To indicate briey: push the combination
switch briey to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light will ash
three times.
#To indicate permanently: push the combina-
tion switch beyond the point of resistance in
the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:
RA turn signal indicator activated by the
driver may continue to operate for the
duration of the lane change.
RIf the driver indicated directly beforehand
but a lane change was not immediately
possible, the turn signal indicator may acti-
vate automatically.
222 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
#Press button 1.
The hazard warning lights will switch on automati-
cally if:
Rthe airbag has been deployed.
Rthe vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a
speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning
light system will switch o automatically at
approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o
the hazard warning light system using the warning
lamp button.
DIGITAL LIGHT adaptive functions
Function of dynamic low beam
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driv-
ing and weather situation. It also provides exten-
ded functions for improved illumination of the
road.
The system comprises the following functions:
RActive Headlamps (/ page 223)
RCornering Light (/ page 224)
RMotorway mode (/ page 224)
REnhanced fog light function (/ page 224)
RBad weather light (/ page 225)
RCity lighting (/ page 225)
RTopographical compensation (/ page 225)
The system will be active only when it is dark.
Active headlamps function
RThe headlamps will follow your steering move-
ments.
RRelevant areas will be better illuminated during
a journey.
The functions will be active when low beam is
switched on.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course
of the lane in which you are driving will also be
Light and sight 223
F206 0119 02
evaluated and the active headlamps function will
adjust the light in advance.
Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of
the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning
direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends,
for example. The cornering light will be activated
only when low beam is switched on.
The function will be active in the following cases:
RAt speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig-
nal light is switched on or the steering wheel
is turned
RAt speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h
and when the steering wheel is turned
Roundabout and junction function: the cornering
light will be activated on both sides based on an
evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation posi-
tion. It will remain active until aer the vehicle has
le the roundabout or junction.
Motorway mode function
Motorway mode increases the range and bright-
ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.
The function will be active if a motorway journey
is detected by means of:
Rthe vehicle's speed
Rthe multifunction camera
Rthe navigation system
The function will not be active in the following
cases:
Rat speeds below 80 km/h
Enhanced fog light function
The enhanced fog light function reduces self-daz-
zling and improves the illumination of the edge of
the carriageway.
224 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
The function will be activated automatically in the
following circumstances:
RAt speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear
fog light is switched on.
The function will be deactivated automatically in
the following circumstances:
RWhen speeds greater than 100 km/h are
reached.
RWhen the rear fog light is switched o.
Function of the bad weather light
The bad weather light reduces reections in rainy
conditions by dimming individual areas of the
headlamps. There will be less glare for the driver
and other road users as a result.
The city lighting function
City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides
in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.
The function will be active in the following cases:
RAt low speeds
RIn illuminated parts of urban areas
Function of the topographical compensation
Based on available map data, the lighting system
responds pre-emptively to dierent road heights.
This means that the headlamp range will remain
virtually constant when you are driving uphill or
downhill.
%Only vehicles with a multimedia system with
navigation have this function.
Assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT
DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver
assistance systems by projecting the assistant
displays in front of the vehicle while it is in
motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the
driver in critical situations.
%The availability of the functions is country-
dependent.
%The assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT
may be an on-demand feature (/ page 87).
The system will be active in the following cases:
RThe light switch is in the à position.
RHigh beam is switched on.
%Depending on the country in which you are
currently driving, certain functions may be
disabled due to dierent legal requirements,
even if they are enabled in the multimedia
system. When you cross a border, the vehicle
will automatically adapt to the applicable
requirements.
Spotlight
The spotlight function runs in the background and
ashes the headlamps in four short bursts at per-
sons detected within the lane markings. You will
also be made aware of the position of the person
by a projected symbol.
Light and sight 225
F206 0119 02
The function will be active in the following circum-
stances:
RYou are driving outside illuminated areas.
RThe system detects a lane marking.
Warnings
If Trac Sign Assist detects a corresponding sit-
uation, a triangle will be projected onto the road
in the following cases at speeds of at least
30 km/h:
RYou are driving in the opposite direction to the
permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a
motorway slip road.
RYou are driving towards a stop sign without
reducing your speed.
RYou are driving towards a red trac light with-
out reducing your speed.
Observe the system limitations of Trac Sign
Assist (/ page 379).
Notes
If Trac Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone,
the system will provide support as follows:
RA corresponding symbol will be projected onto
the road when you enter a roadworks zone.
RWhen you drive through a roadworks zone,
guide lines that roughly match the width of the
vehicle will be projected onto the road. The
guide lines will be switched o temporarily on
tight bends.
Observe the system limitations of Trac Sign
Assist (/ page 379).
226 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Collision warning
If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at
least 30 km/h, a collision warning symbol will be
projected onto the road.
Observe the system limitations of Active Brake
Assist (/ page 370).
Lane change warning
During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least
30 km/h, the course of the lane change as dis-
played will be brighter. This enables you to identify
possible dangers in the new lane at an early
stage.
Observe the system limitations of Active Lane
Change Assist (/ page 367).
Lane keeping and blind spot warning
At speeds of at least 30 km/h, a triangle that indi-
cates a lane correction and its direction will be
projected onto the road in the following cases:
RYou leave the lane unintentionally.
Observe the system limitations of Active Lane
Keeping Assist (/ page 388).
RYou switch on the turn signal light while an
object or obstacle is in your blind spot.
Observe the system limitations of Active Blind
Spot Assist (/ page 384).
Light and sight 227
F206 0119 02
Activating/deactivating dynamic low beam
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5DIGITAL LIGHT
#Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
Activating/deactivating enhanced assistance
functions
%The availability of the functions is country-
dependent.
%This function is an on-demand feature
(/ page 87).
%Depending on the country, the spotlight func-
tion can also be switched on or o directly on
the DIGITAL Light menu.
#Select Supporting projections.
#Activate or deactivate the desired projections.
#Switch Projection for greeting/farewell on or
o.
If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-o
delay time is activated, a high-resolution greet-
ing or farewell will be played back for a short
period of time when the vehicle is opened or
switched o. You can choose between the
Digital Rain and Star Wave sequences.
%More information on locator lighting
(/ page 232).
More information on the exterior switch-o
delay time (/ page 232).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
tive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
Rroad users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rroad users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognise other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognise them
too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the road and trac con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or trac conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
Rin poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
Rif there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
228 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and trac conditions.
%Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available on
demand (/ page 87).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches
between the following types of light:
RLow beam
RHigh beam
At speeds greater than 30 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, high beam
will switch on automatically.
High beam will switch o automatically in the fol-
lowing cases:
RAt speeds below 25 km/h
RIf other road users are detected
RIf street lighting is sucient
%The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near the overhead control
panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/o
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
tive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
Rroad users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rroad users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognise other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognise them
too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the road and trac con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
Switching on
#Turn the light switch to the à position.
#Switch on high beam using the combination
switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated,
the _ indicator lamp will light up on the
driver's display.
Light and sight 229
F206 0119 02
Switching o
#Switch o high beam using the combination
switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
tive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react
to:
Rroad users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rroad users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
users with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the road and trac con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into
account road, weather or trac conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
RIn poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
RIf there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and trac condi-
tions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically
switches between the following types of light:
RLow beam
RPartial high beam
RHigh beam
RULTRA RANGE Highbeam
230 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright-
ness of the cone of light close to the legally per-
mitted maximum.
Partial high beam does not include other road
users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle
them but enables full high-beam illumination for
the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly
reective signs are also illuminated with reduced
brightness.
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is su-
cient street lighting:
RPartial high beam and high beam will be
switched o automatically.
At speeds above 30 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, high beam
will be switched on automatically.
RIf other road users are detected, partial high
beam will be switched on automatically.
at speeds below 40 km/h:
RULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch o auto-
matically.
At speeds above 50 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, the road is
straight and it is not raining heavily, ULTRA
RANGE Highbeam will be switched on auto-
matically.
RIf other road users are detected, ULTRA
RANGE Highbeam will automatically switch o
and partial high beam will switch on.
RIf highly reective signs are detected, ULTRA
RANGE Highbeam will be switched o auto-
matically.
%The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near the overhead control
panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
on/o
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
tive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react
to:
Rroad users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rroad users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
users with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the road and trac con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
Light and sight 231
F206 0119 02
Switching on
#Turn the light switch to the à position.
#Switch on high beam using the combination
switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated,
the _ indicator lamp will light up on the
driver's display. When partial high beam or
high beam is active, the corresponding blue
indicator lamp will also light up.
Switching o
#Switch o high beam using the combination
switch.
Setting low beam
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5DIGITAL LIGHT 5Low beam
#Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or
Automatic.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5Interior/exterior lighting
5Exterior lighting display
#Set a switch-o delay time.
Aer parking and locking the vehicle, the exte-
rior lighting will be activated for the set time.
Activating/deactivating locator lighting
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5Interior/exterior lighting
#Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.
When the function is activated, the exterior light-
ing will light up for 40 seconds aer the vehicle is
unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the
vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start
the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched o and
automatic driving lights are activated.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
1 cSwitches the front interior lighting on/
o.
2 uSwitches the rear interior lighting on/
o.
3 |Switches automatic interior lighting
control on/o.
#To switch reading lamps on/o: hold your
hand under the respective reading lamp 4 or
5.
232 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Operating unit inside the grab handle (rear)
1 pRear reading lamp
#To switch on or o: press button 1.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Ambient light
Setting the colour
#Select Colour.
#Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.
#Set the desired colour or colour scheme.
Adjusting the brightness
#Select Brightness.
#Adjust the brightness.
%Depending on the ambient light conditions,
the ambient lighting will automatically switch
between day and night modes.
Activating the brightness for zones
#Select Brightness.
#Switch o Link zones .
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be
set separately.
Activating eects
&WARNING Risk of accident if ambient
lighting and active ambient lighting eects
are not switched on
The warning support eects are fully active
only if the respective driving or driving safety
systems are switched on on the driving assis-
tance menu.
#Ensure that the respective driving or
driving safety systems are switched on.
%Observe the notes on driving systems and
your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to
recognise dangers (/ page 338).
#Select Effects.
#Activate the desired eect.
%Dierent eects will be available depending
on the vehicle equipment.
Operating feedback eects
RClimate: If changes are made to the tempera-
ture setting in the vehicle, the colour of the
ambient lighting will change briey.
RGreeting: When you get into the vehicle, a
special colour animation will play.
Warning assistance eects
RWarning when exiting: If an object is detected
in the blind spot while you are getting out of
the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the aec-
ted door will ash red.
Light and sight 233
F206 0119 02
Further information on the exit warning
(/ page 384).
RSpeed Limit Assist: In vehicles with active
ambient lighting, the ambient lighting behind
the steering wheel will ash red when the per-
missible speed is exceeded.
Further information on Speed Limit Assist
(/ page 360).
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC: The information
from the parking sensors during parking
manoeuvres will be displayed in colour.
Further information on Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 406)
Multi-colour animation
RThe chosen colour combination will change at
predened intervals.
Switching the interior lighting switch-o delay
time on/o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5Interior/exterior lighting
5Interior lighting display
#Activate or deactivate Interior lighting display.
If this function is active, the interior lighting
will be switched on for a short time aer the
end of the journey.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer sys-
tem
Switching the windscreen wipers on/o
1g Windscreen wipers o
2Ä Automatic wiping, normal
3Å Automatic wiping, frequent
234 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
4° Continuous wiping, slow
5¯ Continuous wiping, fast
#Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position 1 - 5.
#í Single wipe: press button 1 as far as
the point of resistance.
#î Wiping with washer uid: press button
1 beyond the point of resistance.
%Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a
car wash (/ page 34).
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
windscreen wipers are switched on while
wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before changing the wiper
blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi-
tion
#Switch the vehicle on and then o again
immediately.
#Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the
î button on the combination switch for
approximately three seconds (/ page 234).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement
position.
%Depending on the time of production of the
vehicle, dierent variants of wiper blades may
be used.
Removing the wiper blades (variant 1)
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen. #Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Press release knob 2.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
direction of arrow 3.
Light and sight 235
F206 0119 02
Removing the wiper blades (variant 2)
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
the direction of arrow 4.
Fitting the wiper blades (variant 1)
#Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob
2 engages.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
236 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Fitting the wiper blades (variant 2)
#Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
Maintenance display
There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly
mounted wiper blade.
#Remove protective lm 1 from the service
indicator.
When the colour of the service indicator changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
Light and sight 237
F206 0119 02
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to mis-
judgement of distance when using the
outside mirror
The outside mirrors reect objects on a
smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear.
#Therefore, always look over your shoul-
der in order to ensure that you are aware
of the actual distance between you and
the road users driving behind you.
Adjusting the outside mirrors
#Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mir-
ror.
#Use button 1 to adjust the position of the
selected mirror.
238 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Folding the outside mirrors in/out (vehicles with
electrically folding outside mirrors)
#Briey press button 3.
%If the battery has been disconnected or has
discharged, the outside mirrors must be
moved briey using button 3. Only then will
the automatic mirror folding function work
properly.
Engaging the outside mirrors
If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged,
proceed as follows.
#Vehicles without electrically folding outside
mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into
the correct position until it audibly engages.
#Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir-
rors: press and hold button 3.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly
engage. The outside mirror will now be set to
the correct position.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
&WARNING Risk of acid burns and poison-
ing due to the anti-dazzle mirror electro-
lyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and cau-
ses irritation. It must not come into contact
with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or
clothing or be swallowed.
#If you come into contact with electrolyte,
observe the following:
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek
medical attention.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them
thoroughly with clean water and seek
medical attention.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, imme-
diately rinse your mouth out thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing
which has been contaminated with
electrolyte.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror
on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-
dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sen-
sor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits
The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RReverse gear is engaged.
RThe interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking position
function
The parking position makes parking easier.
Light and sight 239
F206 0119 02
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on
the front passenger's side when:
Rthe parking position is stored (/ page 240).
Rthe front-passenger mirror is selected.
Rreverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back
to its original position when:
Ryou shi the transmission to another transmis-
sion position.
Ryou are travelling at a speed greater than
15 km/h.
Ryou press the button for the outside mirror on
the driver's side.
Storing and calling up the parking position of the
front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
#Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
#Engage reverse gear.
#Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
Calling up
#Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
#Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror fold-
ing function
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close
#Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-
in.
240 Light and sight
F206 0119 02
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control
An interior lter in combination with the prelter
in the engine compartment must always be used
so that the air conditioning system, pollution level
monitoring and the air ltration work correctly.
Only use lters approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a
qualied specialist workshop.
Overview of the THERMATIC climate bar (single-
zone)
The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond-
ing functions are activated. 1s Increases the temperature
2Upper display area of the climate bar with the
example of j switching climate control
on/o (/ page 244)
3¬ Demists the windscreen
4g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
(/ page 248) or
G Calls up the ne particulate status dis-
play (/ page 245)
5¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
6J Increases the airow or switches on cli-
mate control (/ page 244)
7I Reduces the airow or switches o cli-
mate control(/ page 244)
8¿ Switches the A/C function on/o
(/ page 245)
9± Calls up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 245)
AÃ Sets climate control to automatic mode
(/ page 246)
Br Reduces the temperature
%The availability of individual functions is coun-
try- and equipment-dependent.
Overview of the THERMATIC climate bar (dual-
zone)
The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond-
ing functions are activated.
Climate control 241
F206 0119 02
1s Increases the temperature
2Upper display area of the climate bar with the
examples of j switching climate control
on/o (/ page 244) and 0 synchronisa-
tion function (/ page 247)
3¬ Demists the windscreen
4g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
(/ page 248) or
G Calls up the ne particulate status dis-
play (/ page 245) or
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: & Activates/deac-
tivates pre-entry climate control
5¤ Switches the rear window heater on or
o
6r Reduces the temperature
7Depending on vehicle equipment and set-
tings: temperature display, demist function
display, display for pre-entry climate control
or auxiliary heating
8¿ Switches the A/C function on/o
(/ page 246)
9± Calls up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 245)
AÃ Sets climate control to automatic mode
(/ page 246)
BJ Increases the airow or switches on cli-
mate control (/ page 244)
CI Reduces the airow or switches o cli-
mate control(/ page 244)
%The availability of individual functions is coun-
try- and equipment-dependent.
Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar
The indicator lamps indicate that the correspond-
ing functions are activated.
Front climate bar on the central display
(example)
1s Increases the temperature
20 Synchronisation function (/ page 247)
242 Climate control
F206 0119 02
j Switches o climate control
(/ page 244)
¿ Switches the A/C function on/o
(/ page 246)
3¬ Demists the windscreen
4g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
(/ page 248) or
G Calls up the ne particulate status dis-
play (/ page 245) or
Activates/deactivates residual heat utilisation
(/ page 248) or
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: & Activates/deac-
tivates pre-entry climate control
5¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
6Depending on vehicle equipment and set-
tings:
Temperature display
¬ Display for the defrost function
J Airow
& Pre-entry climate control or stationary
heater
7J Increases the airow or switches on cli-
mate control (/ page 244)
8r Reduces the temperature
9Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode,
right (/ page 246)
A± Calls up the air conditioning menu
(/ page 245)
BÃ Sets climate control to automatic mode,
le (/ page 246)
CI Reduces the airow or switches o cli-
mate control(/ page 244)
%The climate bar is visible even when the vehi-
cle is parked or the air conditioning is
switched o (/ page 244).
%The availability of individual functions depends
on country and equipment.
Overview of the rear operating unit
The rear operating unit is available only for vehi-
cles with the THERMOTRONIC air conditioning
control panel.
1Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents
in the rear passenger compartment, le
2Sets the temperature in the rear passenger
compartment, le
3Sets the airow in the rear passenger com-
partment, le, or switches climate control
on/o (/ page 244)
4Switches climate control on/o
(/ page 244)
Climate control 243
F206 0119 02
5Sets the airow in the rear passenger com-
partment, right, or switches climate control
on/o (/ page 244)
6Sets the temperature in the rear passenger
compartment, right
7Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents
in the rear passenger compartment, right
8Sets rear climate control to automatic mode,
right (/ page 246)
9Sets the air distribution to the right rear foot-
well vents
ASynchronisation is activated (/ page 247)
BSets the air distribution to the rear le foot-
well vents
CSets rear climate control to automatic mode,
le (/ page 246)
The settings for the second row of seats can be
congured via the rear operating unit or the multi-
media system (/ page 247) depending on the
vehicle's equipment.
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/o
Switching on climate control
#Set the airow to level 1 or higher via J on
the climate bar on the central display
or
#Press Ã, s, r or ±.
Switching o climate control
#Set the airow to level 0 via I on the cli-
mate bar on the central display
or
#Press j.
If climate control is switched o, the windows
may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control
o only briey.
%If you switch o climate control by pressing
j, fragrancing, if enabled, will also be
switched o automatically.
Switching climate control on/o via the rear oper-
ating unit
Switching on
#Press button 4.
or
244 Climate control
F206 0119 02
#Set the airow to level 1 or higher using but-
tons 3 and 5.
or
#Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or C.
Switching o
#Press button 4.
or
#Set the airow to level 0 using buttons 3 and
5.
%If rear climate control is switched o via but-
ton 4, OFF will be shown on the displays.
Switching the A/C function on/o using the air
conditioning control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidies
the vehicle's interior air.
#Press the ¿ button.
%Switch o the A/C function only briey; oth-
erwise, the windows may mist up more
quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This
is not indicative of a fault.
Calling up the air conditioning menu via the cli-
mate bar or the air conditioning control panel
The air conditioning menu can be called up via the
climate bar. The climate bar is always shown on
the lower edge of the central display.
#Select the Climate menu entry in the air con-
ditioning bar.
The First row of seats menu is opened.
Jumping directly to the Air quality menu
#Select the G ne particle status display.
The Air quality menu is opened. An animation
of the automatic air cleaning taking place is
shown.
%The ne particle status display is on the home
screen next to the temperature display on the
right and it informs you of the current particu-
late levels inside and outside of the vehicle.
The measurement values are shown with the
µg/m3 units (microgrammes per cubic
metre).
Strong acceleration aer longer parking periods
will lead to a detachment of the dust covering the
vehicle. This dust measured by the PM2.5 sensor
might lead to a short rise of outside values.
Defrosting the windscreen via the climate bar
Switching on
#Press ¬ on the climate bar on the central
display.
Switching o
#Press ¬, Ã or j on the climate bar
on the central display.
or
#Set the airow to 0.
%When the defrost function is activated, some
functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will
automatically be deactivated.
Climate control 245
F206 0119 02
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the
air conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5First row of seats
Depending on the external conditions, support for
improved cooling and dehumidication of the inte-
rior air will be provided when the A/C function is
activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C
function on the climate bar on the central display,
switch the function on or o in the climate menu
of the central display.
#Select A/C (A/C).
Switch o the A/C function only briey; other-
wise, the windows may mist up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the
vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not
indicative of a fault.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem-
perature is controlled automatically and main-
tained at a constant level by the air supply.
#Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central
display.
%You can increase or reduce the airow by
pressing K on the climate bar on the mul-
timedia system. The airow will automatically
be reduced in the event of an incoming call.
You will still be able to adjust the airow man-
ually by pressing J. In automatic mode,
ve levels can be set via the controller and
seven levels can be set without automatic
mode.
#To switch to manual operation: switch o
automatic mode or adjust the air distribution,
e.g. P.
Setting climate control to automatic mode via the
rear operating unit
In automatic mode, the temperature is automati-
cally regulated by the temperature of the dis-
pensed air and the airow.
#Press button 8 or C.
Overview of the air distribution settings
The symbols on the central display indicate the
vents through which the airow is being directed:
¯Demister vents
PCentre air vents
246 Climate control
F206 0119 02
OFootwell vents
Setting air distribution via the air conditioning
menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu
#Select First row of seats or Second row of
seats.
#To set air distribution: select ¯, P or
O.
#Set the airow.
%When the air conditioning system is switched
on, at least one zone is always active. How-
ever, several air distribution options can be
selected at the same time, for example to set
the climate control for the vehicle interior and
the footwells simultaneously. The ¯ cli-
mate control for the windscreen can only be
selected for the rst seat row. When auto-
matic mode is active, the buttons for setting
the air distribution are deactivated automati-
cally. If the air conditioning system is deacti-
vated, the buttons remain operable and the
last setting is saved.
Setting rear climate control using the air condi-
tioning menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu
Setting the temperature
#Select Second row of seats.
#Set the temperature.
Setting the airow
#Select Second row of seats.
#Set the air ow with s or r.
Controlling the rear climate control automatically
#Select AUTO.
%When the defrost function is activated, some
functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will
automatically be deactivated. To deactivate
the defrost function, press either ¬, Ã
or j set the air ow to level 0
(/ page 245).
Switching the synchronisation function on/o via
the air conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5First row of seats
The synchronisation function controls the climate
control centrally. The driver's settings for temper-
ature, airow and air distribution are automatically
adopted for each climate zone.
#Select SYNC (SYNC).
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside
#Press à on the climate bar on the central
display.
#If the windows remain misted up: press ¬
on the climate bar on the central display.
Climate control 247
F206 0119 02
Windows misted up on the outside
#Switch on the windscreen wipers.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o via the
multimedia system
Requirements:
RThe ne particulate status display is visible on
the climate bar.
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5First row of seats
#Press g on the upper display area of the
climate bar.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to
fresh air mode aer a while.
%If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briey.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o
#Press g on the climate bar on the central
display.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to
fresh air mode aer a while.
%If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briey.
Switching residual heat mode on/o via the cli-
mate bar
Requirements
RThe residual heat function is available.
RThe vehicle is parked.
RThe coolant temperature is suciently high.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
from the engine to continue heating the front
compartment of the vehicle for approximately
30 minutes, depending on the temperature set.
#To switch on or o: select Residual heat on
the climate bar of the central display.
The residual heat function will automatically
switch o aer a while.
%If residual heat utilisation is activated, the two
buttons for setting the temperature and air
distribution will automatically be deactivated.
Activating/deactivating ionisation
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Air quality
Only vehicles with THERMATIC (2-zone) or
THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel
have this function.
When ionisation is activated, the air in the vehicle
interior is enriched with negatively charged oxy-
gen ions. These can promote the well-being of the
occupants.
#Select Ionisation.
248 Climate control
F206 0119 02
%The function can only be performed if the
AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution
is set to the side air vent. The function is
restricted if the side air vents on the driver's
side are closed.
Fragrance system
Activating/deactivating the fragrance system
using the multimedia system
Requirements
RAutomatic climate control is activated.
RThe glove compartment will close.
RA acon is inserted.
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Air quality
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra-
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a-
con located in the glove box.
#Navigate down until the climate control bar is
active.
#Select Air freshener.
#Activate or deactivate fragrancing.
Setting the fragrance system
Requirements
RThe THERMATIC (2-zone) or THERMOTRONIC
air conditioning control panel is available.
RThe climate control system is switched on.
RThe glove compartment will close.
RA acon is inserted.
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Air quality
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra-
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a a-
con located in the glove box.
#Select Air freshener.
#Keep pressing until the desired intensity is
reached.
Inserting or removing the acon of the fra-
grance system
&WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per-
fume
If children open the acon, they could drink
the liquid perfume or it could come into con-
tact with their eyes.
#Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk.
#If liquid perfume comes into contact with
your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with
clean water.
#If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
Climate control 249
F206 0119 02
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full
acons
: Full acons may not be disposed of
with household waste.
#
Full acons must be handed in
at a pollutant collection point.
1Cap
2Flacon
#To insert: slide the acon into the holder as far
as it will go.
#To remove: aer opening the glove box, wait
for approximately seven seconds and pull out
the acon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety noti-
ces on the perfume packaging.
Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume acon when it is empty and do not rell
it.
Rellable acon
#Unscrew the cap of the empty acon.
#Fill the acon with a maximum of 15 ml.
#Screw the cap back onto the acon.
Always rell the empty rellable acon with the
same perfume. Observe the separate information
sheet with the acon.
Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is
unlocked
Function of pre-entry climate control when the
vehicle is unlocked
The seats can be briey preheated or precooled
before you get into the vehicle.
250 Climate control
F206 0119 02
%This function is available only for plug-in
hybrid vehicles.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
ing functions will be activated as needed during
precooling:
RAutomatic climate control
RBlower
RSeat ventilation
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
ing functions will be activated as needed during
preheating:
RAutomatic climate control
RBlower
RSeat heating
RSteering wheel heater
RMirror heater
RRear window heater
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
ing functions will also be adjusted during pre-
entry climate control if they have already been
switched on during regular vehicle operation:
RFragrancing
RIonisation
Setting pre-entry climate control when the vehi-
cle is unlocked in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Pre-entry climate ctrl
%This function is available only for plug-in
hybrid vehicles.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Selecting seats
#Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear
right.
The seat-specic functions of pre-entry cli-
mate control (e.g. seat heating) will be per-
formed for the selected seats.
When pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED
on the climate bar on the central display will light
up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated
vehicle.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate con-
trol when the vehicle is unlocked
Requirements
RThe high-voltage battery is charged su-
ciently.
RThe function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
#To switch on: unlock the vehicle.
The climate control functions are activated for
up to ve minutes for preheating and precool-
ing.
Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is
unlocked cannot be activated more than twice
when the vehicle is switched o.
#To switch o: press & on the climate bar
on the central display.
Climate control 251
F206 0119 02
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
ing functions will remain active once the vehicle
has been started:
RSeat heating
RSeat ventilation
RFragrancing
RIonisation
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
function
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
ding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be aected or
they may even suer burn-like injuries.
#Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated aer it has been
switched on repeatedly.
%The pre-entry climate control for departure
time function is available only for vehicles with
48 V on-board electrical systems.
The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventila-
ted or cooled to the set temperature when the
vehicle is parked.
The running time of pre-entry climate control may
be reduced in the following circumstances (vehi-
cles with a 48 V on-board electrical system):
RThe 48 V battery is not fully charged.
The running time of pre-entry climate control may
be reduced in the following circumstances (plug-in
hybrid):
RThe vehicle is not connected to power supply
equipment.
RThe high-voltage battery is not fully charged
With active pre-entry climate control, the state of
charge of the high-voltage battery may be
reduced, even if the charging cable connector is
connected.
If available, seat ventilation will be activated in the
cooling and ventilation modes.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
ing functions will be activated in heating mode, if
available:
RSeat heating
RSteering wheel heater
252 Climate control
F206 0119 02
RMirror heater
RRear window heater
When the set temperature changes, climate con-
trol mode will automatically switch:
RFrom heating mode to ventilation or cooling
mode, or
Rfrom cooling mode to ventilation or heating
mode, or
Rfrom ventilation mode to heating or cooling
mode
Setting pre-entry climate control at departure
time via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Pre-entry climate ctrl
Setting the departure time
%Plug-in hybrid: the set departure times are
used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate con-
trol and for predictions regarding the approxi-
mate state of charge and range at the time
selected. Additional information on the charg-
ing settings: (/ page 499).
#Select Edit departure time ´ .
#Select a departure time or set a new depar-
ture time.
Setting the repeat days
#Select Edit departure time ´ .
#Set the desired departure time and select the
corresponding days on which this departure
time is to apply.
#Press OK to conrm.
Selecting seats
#Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear
right.
Pre-entry climate control will take place for
the selected seats.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate con-
trol for departure time
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
ding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be aected or
they may even suer burn-like injuries.
#Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
Climate control 253
F206 0119 02
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated aer it has been
switched on repeatedly.
Requirements
RThe 48 V battery or the high-voltage battery is
charged suciently.
RThe function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
#To activate: set the departure time
(/ page 253).
Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system:
pre-entry climate control at departure time
will switch on a maximum of 5 minutes before
the selected departure time.
Plug-in hybrid: pre-entry climate control at
departure time will switch on a maximum of
55 minutes before the selected departure
time. It will remain active for another ve
minutes if departure is delayed.
#To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for
departure time early: press & on the cli-
mate bar on the central display or switch o
the preselection of the time in the climate
menu.
If present, the following functions will remain
active once the vehicle has been started:
RSeat heating
RSeat ventilation
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the follow-
ing functions will also be adjusted during pre-
entry climate control if they have already been
switched on during regular vehicle operation:
RFragrancing
RIonisation
Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry cli-
mate control
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
ding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be aected or
they may even suer burn-like injuries.
#Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated aer it has been
switched on repeatedly.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched o.
Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con-
tinue (e.g. if a journey is interrupted) for up to
50 minutes in the case of plug-in hybrids and up
254 Climate control
F206 0119 02
to 5 minutes in the case of some models with a
48 V on-board electrical system.
#Press & on the climate bar on the central
display.
The red or blue indicator lamp below & on
the climate bar on the central display will light
up or go out.
#Set the temperature using the arrows w
on the climate bar on the central display.
The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow-
ing meanings:
RBlue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
RRed: the stationary heater is switched on.
RYellow: the departure time is preselected.
Stationary heater/ventilation
Stationary heater/ventilation function
%The following function is equipment-depend-
ent.
RThe air inside the vehicle will be heated or ven-
tilated to the set temperature.
RThe air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled
down to temperatures below the outside tem-
perature.
RIf the outside temperature changes, ventilation
mode will automatically switch to heating
mode or heating mode will automatically
switch to ventilation mode.
The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet
are situated behind the right front wheel.
Switching the stationary heater/ventilation
on/o via the operating unit
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison-
ous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sucient ventila-
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if
the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
#Always switch the stationary heater o in
enclosed spaces without an air extrac-
tion system, e.g. in garages.
#Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
vehicle or the auxiliary heating is run-
ning.
#Open a door or a roof hatch on the wind-
ward side of the vehicle to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of re due to hot station-
ary heater components and exhaust gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
#When the stationary heater is switched
on, make sure that:
Rhot vehicle parts do not come into
contact with ammable materials.
Rthe exhaust gas can ow out of the
stationary heater exhaust pipe unhin-
dered.
Rthe exhaust gas does not come into
contact with ammable materials.
Climate control 255
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta-
tionary heater or stationary ventilation
operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery.
#Aer heating or ventilating the vehicle
twice, drive for a longer period of time.
Requirements
RThe vehicle has a stationary heater.
RThe outside temperature is below 15°C.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
%If the ll level of the fuel tank is too low, auxili-
ary heating mode may be restricted. #Set the temperature using the s and r
arrows on the climate bar on the central dis-
play.
#Press button 1.
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1
will light up or go out.
The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow-
ing meanings:
RBlue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
RRed: the stationary heater is switched on.
RYellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch o
automatically aer 50 minutes.
Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the
multimedia system
Requirements
RThe vehicle is tted with the stationary heater
equipment.
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Stationary heater
Selecting the departure time
#Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
Setting the departure time
#Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
#Select the pen beside the time.
256 Climate control
F206 0119 02
#Set a time.
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
&WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to
being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air
vents.
#Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sucient distance
from the air vents.
#If necessary, direct the airow to another
area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, note the following:
RAlways keep the vents and ventilation grilles in
the vehicle interior clear.
RKeep the air inlet free of residue build-up
(/ page 622).
#To open or close: hold the centre of air
vent 1 and turn it to the le (open) or right
(closed) as far as it will go.
#To set the airow direction: hold the centre of
air vent 1 and move it up or down or to the
le or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
&WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to
being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air
vents.
#Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sucient distance
from the air vents.
#If necessary, direct the airow to another
area of the vehicle interior.
#To open or close: turn controller 1 to the le
or right as far as it will go.
#To set the airow direction: hold the centre of
controller 1 and move it up or down or to the
le or right.
Climate control 257
F206 0119 02
Driving
Notes on plug-in hybrids
Notes on plug-in hybrid operation
&WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poi-
soning from damaged high-voltage battery
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has
been damaged, electrolyte and gases may
leak out.
#Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes
o with water and seek medical atten-
tion straight away.
&DANGER Risk of re and explosion from
excessive internal pressure of the high-
voltage battery
In the event of a vehicle re, ammable gas
can escape and ignite.
#Stop the charging process immediately
in case of unusual odours, smoke or
burn marks.
#Leave the danger zone immediately.
Secure the danger zone at a sucient
distance.
#Call the re service.
The hybrid system combines a combustion engine
with an electric motor.
Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill:
RThe combustion engine is generally switched
o.
RIdle speed occurs only in certain instances.
Characteristics when starting the vehicle:
RIf the high-voltage battery is suciently
charged, the vehicle can be started with the
electric drive without the combustion engine
(noiseless start).
RIf the high-voltage battery for the electric drive
is not suciently charged or the vehicle condi-
tions for a silent start are not met, the vehicle
will start with the combustion engine.
%Depending on the system, it may be that even
though the high-voltage battery is charged,
electric mode has restricted or no availability.
When the combustion engine has run for long
enough and the ambient conditions permit,
electric mode will be available without restric-
tion once more.
Characteristics with moderate power output
requests:
RThe combustion engine is switched o as
oen as possible during a journey.
RDepending on the drive program selected and
the state of charge of the high-voltage battery,
the vehicle can be accelerated electrically up
to a speed of approximately 140 km/h.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles can be accelerated
electrically up to a speed of approximately
125 km/h.
258 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Characteristics with high power output requests:
RThe electric motor supports the combustion
engine (boost eect), e.g. when pulling away
or accelerating.
RThe high-voltage battery is discharging.
Characteristics when releasing the accelerator
pedal during a journey:
RThe electric motor is operated as an alternator
when in overrun mode and during braking.
RThe high-voltage battery is charging.
Notes on electric mode:
RVehicles with hybrid systems generate signi-
cantly less noise when stationary and when
being driven than vehicles with combustion
engines.
RWhen driving in electric mode, the vehicle may
not be heard by other road users owing to the
signicantly reduced operating noise.
It is for this reason that the vehicle is equip-
ped with a sound generator, which serves as
an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS).
This safety system is prescribed by law.
The external noise produced by the sound
generator is perceptible in the vehicle interior
at low speeds and does not constitute a mal-
function.
RIf not all of the vehicle conditions for electric
mode are met, then the combustion engine is
switched on.
RPerformance restrictions in electric mode are
possible as a result of the operating tempera-
ture of the high-voltage battery and drive sys-
tem, the ambient temperature and ageing of
the high-voltage battery.
RIn electric mode, the maximum power will not
be permanently available and may drop to
continuous output.
%Vehicles with diesel particulate lters: during
regeneration of the diesel particulate lter,
drive programs may be unavailable or restric-
ted and the state of charge of the high-voltage
battery may change.
Notes on the acoustic vehicle alerting system:
RThe sound generator produces speed-depend-
ent driving noises up to a speed of approx-
imately 30 km/h when driving forwards and
reversing.
RThis helps other road users, particularly
pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle
better.
RFrom a speed of 20 km/h, the acoustic vehi-
cle alerting system gradually switches o.
RThe sound generator is o when the vehicle is
stationary.
%Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the sound generator
of the acoustic vehicle alerting system also
produces stationary noise.
Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-
board electrical system
&DANGER Risk of death and re due to
modied and/or damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical
system is under high voltage. If you modify
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage
Driving and parking 259
F206 0119 02
on-board electrical system or touch damaged
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In
addition, modied and/or damaged compo-
nents may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the
underbody, components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system may be damaged
although the damage is not visible.
#Never make any modications to the
high-voltage on-board electrical system.
#Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its
high-voltage on-board electrical system
components have been modied or dam-
aged.
#Never touch damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
#Aer an accident, do not touch any com-
ponents of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system.
#Aer an accident, have the vehicle trans-
ported away.
#Have the components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system checked at a
qualied specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary.
Requirements
Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri-
cal system manually in the following situations:
RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 lights
up in the driver display, e.g. aer an accident.
RThe vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. aer an
accident, and the restraint system compo-
nents have not been triggered.
Operating the high-voltage disconnect device
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Shi the transmission to position j.
#Apply the electric parking brake.
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Open the bonnet.
260 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Observe additional label 3 for high-voltage
disconnect device 2.
#Press release tab 1 in the direction of the
arrow and pull it out.
#Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the
direction of the arrow until it engages.
The high-voltage on-board electrical system is
switched o.
All work on the hybrid drive system–– (including
aer disconnecting the high-voltage on-board
electrical system manually) may only be carried
out in a qualied specialist workshop.
Switching on the power supply or the vehicle
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Requirements
RThe key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
RThe brake pedal is not depressed.
#To switch on the power supply: press button
1 once.
You can, for example, switch on the wind-
screen wipers.
The power supply will be switched o again if the
following conditions are met:
RYou open the driver's door.
RYou press button 1 twice more.
Driving and parking 261
F206 0119 02
#To switch on the vehicle: press button 1
twice.
Indicator and warning lamps will light up on
the driver's display.
The vehicle will be switched o again if one of the
following conditions is met:
RYou do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes
and the transmission is in position j or the
electric parking brake is applied.
RYou press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
materials in the engine compartment or
on the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite.
#Therefore, regularly check that there are
no ammable foreign materials in the
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Requirements
RThe key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
262 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Shi the transmission to position j or i.
#Depress the brake pedal and press button 1
once.
#If the vehicle does not start: switch o non-
essential consumer equipment and press but-
ton 1 once.
#If the vehicle still does not start and the Place
the key in the marked space See Owner's
Manual display message appears on the driv-
er's display: start the vehicle with the key in
the marked space (emergency operation
mode) (/ page 263).
%You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To
do this, press and hold button 1 for about
three seconds or press button 1 three times
within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
safety notes concerning this under "Driving
tips" (/ page 268).
Observe any information regarding display mes-
sages that may be shown on the driver's display.
Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked
space (emergency operation mode)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
materials in the engine compartment or
on the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite.
#Therefore, regularly check that there are
no ammable foreign materials in the
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
Driving and parking 263
F206 0119 02
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the
key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
display message appears on the driver's display,
you can start the vehicle in emergency operation
mode.
#Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
#Remove key 1 from the key ring.
#Place key 1 on the symbol in marked space
2.
The vehicle will start aer a short time.
If you remove key 1 from marked space 2,
the vehicle can still be driven. For further
engine starts, however, key 1 must be loca-
ted on the symbol in marked space 2 during
the entire journey.
#Have key 1 checked at a qualied specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle does not start:
#Place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it
there.
#Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
using the start/stop button.
%You can switch on the power supply or the
vehicle with the start/stop button.
Observe any information regarding display mes-
sages that may be shown on the driver's display.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before
starting a journey
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
RThe legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
RIt is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
RThe starter battery is suciently charged.
264 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Charging the starter battery before starting a
journey
You can receive a message on your smartphone
when the state of charge of the starter battery is
low. You can then start the vehicle with the smart-
phone to charge the battery. The vehicle is auto-
matically switched o aer ten minutes.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
RThe legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
RIt is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
materials in the engine compartment or
on the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite.
#Therefore, regularly check that there are
no ammable foreign materials in the
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
&WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment
due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during service
or maintenance work.
#Always secure the engine against unin-
tentional starting before carrying out
maintenance or repair work.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Driving and parking 265
F206 0119 02
Requirements
RPark position j is selected.
RThe anti-the alarm system is not activated.
RThe hazard warning light system is switched
o.
RThe bonnet is closed.
RThe doors are closed and locked.
RThe windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
#Start the vehicle using your smartphone.
Aer every engine start, the engine will run for
ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive
starting attempts. You must start the engine with
the key before trying to start the vehicle with your
smartphone again.
You can switch o the vehicle at any time as fol-
lows:
RVia the Mercedes me App
RBy pressing the Ü or s button on the
key
%Further information can be found in the
Mercedes me App.
Securing the engine against starting before carry-
ing out maintenance or repair work:
#Switch on the hazard warning light system or
unlock the doors.
#Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Running-in notes
To preserve the engine during the rst 1500 km:
RDrive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
RNo faster than 140 km/h.
RDrive the vehicle in drive mode A or ;.
RShi to the next higher gear at the very latest
when the needle reaches the last third before
the red area in the rev counter.
RDo not shi down manually in order to brake.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
RDo not depress the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point (kickdown).
ROnly increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed aer
1500 km.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following running-in
notes:
RIn certain handling and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer-
tain distance is being driven aer the vehicle
has been delivered or aer repairs. Full sys-
tem eectiveness is only reached when this
teaching-in process has concluded.
RBrake pads, brake disks and tyres that are
either new or have been replaced only achieve
optimum braking eect and grip aer driving
several hundred kilometres. Compensate the
reduced braking eect by applying greater
force to the brake pedal.
266 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Engine output and engine torque (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
%The actual (maximum) values that can be ach-
ieved for engine output and engine torque
may deviate from the certied values within
the country-specic guidelines for permissible
tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-
specic guidelines).
Inuencing variables include:
RLocation above sea level
RFuel quality
ROutside temperature
ROperating temperature of the engine
The p engine operating temperature warning
lamp will remain lit until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
Engine output and engine torque will be reduced.
Factor this into your driving style.
When the p engine operating temperature
warning lamp goes out, full engine output and
engine torque will be available.
Notes on optimised acceleration
If all necessary requirements and activation con-
ditions are fullled, the best possible acceleration
can be achieved from a standstill.
Do not use optimised acceleration on public
roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could
lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and/or accident.
Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa-
tion on ESP® (/ page 341).
Pulling away with optimised acceleration
&WARNING Risk of skidding and accidents
due to wheelspin
If you pull away with optimised acceleration,
individual wheels could spin and you could
lose control of the vehicle.
There is a higher risk of skidding and acci-
dents when ESP® is deactivated in particular.
#Make sure that there are no persons or
obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Requirements
Rthe vehicle is run in (/ page 266).
Rthe vehicle and tyres are in good condition.
Rthe road surface is high-grip.
Rthe engine and transmission are at normal
operating temperature.
*NOTE Increased wear due to optimised
acceleration
When pulling away with optimised accelera-
tion, all components of the drivetrain are sub-
jected to a very high load.
This can lead to increased component wear.
#Do not always pull away with optimised
acceleration.
#Engage the h drive position (/ page 294).
#Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
position.
#Select drive program C
(/ page 285, 286).
#Deactivating ESP® (/ page 345).
Driving and parking 267
F206 0119 02
#Depress and hold the brake pedal rmly with
your le foot.
#Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your
right foot.
#Aer no more than ve seconds, quickly take
your le foot o the brake, but keep the accel-
erator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceler-
ation.
#Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce-
dure is complete.
Ending optimised acceleration
#Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
#Reactivate ESP®.
%Aer you pull away with optimised accelera-
tion, components of the drivetrain may
become very hot, which means that optimised
acceleration values may be reached again
only aer a few minutes.
Notes on driving
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This will jeopardise the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Make sure that there is always sucient
clearance for the pedals.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example:
Rshoes with platform soles
Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
#Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
&WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is
switched o while driving
If you switch o the vehicle while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available.
This may aect the power steering system and
the brake force boosting, for example.
You will need to use considerably more force
to steer and brake, for example.
#Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-
ing.
268 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci-
dent due to shiing down on slippery road
surfaces
If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking eect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-
ces to increase the engine braking
eect.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison-
ous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sucient ventila-
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle
gets stuck in the snow.
#Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater is run-
ning.
#Open a window on the side of the vehicle
facing away from the wind to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when
driving, the brake system may overheat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system can even fail.
#Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
#Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while
driving.
*NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
#Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
*NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by
permanently depressing the brake pedal
#Do not permanently depress the brake
pedal while driving.
#To use braking eect of the engine, shi
to a lower gear in good time.
Driving and parking 269
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
engine when pulling away
#Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi-
ately.
#Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
*NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-
ring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter.
#Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
#Have the cause rectied immediately at
a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent
short-distance trips
The 12 V battery may not be suciently
charged when the vehicle is used only for
short-distance trips. This reduces the life of
the battery.
#Drive longer distances regularly to
charge the battery.
*NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to
observe the maximum permissible clear-
ance height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum
permissible clearance height, the roof and
other vehicle parts may be damaged.
#Please observe the indicated maximum
clearance height.
#If the vehicle exceeds the permissible
clearance height, do not drive in.
#Take the modied vehicle height in the
case of roof superstructures or other
carrier systems into account.
%Please bear in mind that all the speed values
stated in this Owner's Manual are approxi-
mate and are subject to a certain tolerance.
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load,
trailer or fully laden vehicle.
Driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer,
or with the vehicle fully loaded or occupied,
changes the handling and steering characteristics
of your vehicle.
Therefore please observe the following notes:
RDo not exceed the permissible roof load and
trailer load. Also observe the information in
the technical data in this respect.
RDistribute the roof load and vehicle load
evenly, and place heavy objects at the bottom.
Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 196) .
RDrive carefully, avoiding abrupt starting, brak-
ing and steering as well as fast cornering.
Notes on driving on roads treated with deicing salt
The braking eect is limited on road surfaces
treated with deicing salt.
270 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Therefore, observe the following notes:
RDue to salt build-up on the brake disks and
brake pads, the braking distance can increase
considerably or result in one-sided braking.
RMaintain a much greater safety distance to the
vehicle travelling ahead.
Remove salt build-up as follows:
RBrake occasionally, paying attention to the
trac conditions
RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next jour-
ney
Notes on aquaplaning
Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of
water has built up on the road surface.
Observe the following notes during heavy precipi-
tation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may
occur:
RReduce speed
RAvoid tyre ruts
RAvoid sudden steering movements
RBrake carefully
%Also observe the notes on regularly checking
wheels and tyres (/ page 35).
Notes on driving through water on the road
Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics
and transmission.
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine
and cause engine damage.
Observe the following if you need to drive through
water:
RThe water, when calm, may reach no higher
than the lower edge of the vehicle body.
RDrive at a walking pace at most, otherwise
water may enter the vehicle interior or engine
compartment.
RVehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehi-
cles, can create waves which may exceed the
maximum permissible depth of the water.
The braking eect of the brakes is reduced aer
fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the
trac conditions, until braking power has been
fully restored.
Function of rear axle steering
The rear axle steering is an electromechanical
auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts
the steering of the rear wheels according to the
position of the front wheels, depending on the
speed. This results in greater mobility and
improved driving stability for the vehicle.
Rear axle steering has the following characteris-
tics:
Rreduced steering eort and turning circle
resulting in reduced parking eort
Rmore direct steering resulting in improved
control of the vehicle
Rimproved cornering of the vehicle
Information on the AMG ceramic high-perform-
ance composite brake system
The brake system is designed for heavy loads.
This may lead to noise when braking. This eect
can also occur aer washing the vehicle.
The noise depends on the following factors:
Rspeed
Driving and parking 271
F206 0119 02
Rbrake force
Renvironmental conditions, e.g. temperature
and air humidity
%Have the brake system checked at a qualied
specialist workshop aer it has been subjec-
ted to extreme loads.
ECO start/stop function
ECO start/stop function
%Plug-in hybrid: this function is not available.
%Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop
function is not available in all drive programs.
Observe the status display on the driver's dis-
play concerning this.
The engine will be switched o automatically in
the following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
RYou brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-
mission position h or i.
RYou depress the brake pedal when travelling at
a low speed.
If the system has detected one of the following
situations, the engine will not stop:
RYou stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle
in front of you.
RThe vehicle that stopped in front of you pulls
away again.
RYou manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel
sharply or engage reverse gear.
%If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibi-
tor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop.
If you activate the HOLD function or engage
the park position j, the engine can be
switched o in spite of an intelligent stop
inhibitor.
The engine will restart automatically in the follow-
ing cases:
RYou engage transmission position h or k.
RYou depress the accelerator pedal.
RThe vehicle requires an automatic engine
start.
RYou release the brake pedal.
RYou release the brake pedal on a downhill gra-
dient and the vehicle does not roll.
RThe vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and
does not automatically enter glide mode at
20 km/h.
ECO start/stop function symbols on the driver's
display:
RThe è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was
switched o by the ECO start/stop function.
RThe ç symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi-
tions for an engine stop have been met.
RNeither the è symbol nor the ç symbol
appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an
intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has
been detected.
RThe s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop
function is deactivated or there is a malfunc-
tion.
If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning
tone will sound and the engine will not be restar-
272 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
ted. In addition, the following display message will
appear on the driver's display:
Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before
exiting
If you do not switch o the vehicle, it will automat-
ically be switched o aer three minutes.
Switching the ECO start/stop function on/o
#Press button 1.
A display will appear on the driver's display
when you switch the ECO start/stop function
on/o.
%s will be continuously shown on the driv-
er's display while the ECO start/stop function
is deactivated.
Switching the ECO start/stop function on/o
using the steering wheel button (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Observe the notes on the ECO start/stop function
in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
%Plug-in hybrid: the ECO start/stop function is
not available.
%You can also switch the ECO start/stop func-
tion on or o via the multimedia system.
#Press upper or lower 1 display button
repeatedly, until it displays the è symbol.
%If the display button does not show the sym-
bol, then it is hidden. How functions are dis-
played and the order in which they are dis-
played can be set in the multimedia system
(/ page 282).
#Press corresponding button 2.
The symbol indicates the current status of the
ECO start/stop function:
Rs (red): switched o
Rè (green): activated
Rç (yellow): inactive
Driving and parking 273
F206 0119 02
ECO display function
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driv-
ing style on the driver's display depending on the
situation. This enables you to check the eciency
of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The
ECO display menu shows a ball 2 that will roll
forwards or backwards in the direction of travel
on a stylised road according to the driving charac-
teristics.
Above and below the road, lines mark the area for
an ecient driving style 3. Ball 2 will light up in
green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the
lines, the ball will light up in orange.
The ECO display assesses the following criteria for
an economical driving style:
RCoasting at the right times
Rconsistent speed
Rmoderate acceleration
The overall assessment of your driving style "from
start" is indicated using stars 1. It starts with
ve empty stars, which you can ll one aer the
other if you drive eciently. When all ve stars are
lled, a glow will appear in the background.
%You can call up the ECO display function via
the Classic menu (/ page 436).
ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board
electrical system)
For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist informa-
tion (/ page 278).
%ECO Assist is active only in drive pro-
grams ; and A.
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec-
ted route. This allows the system to optimally
adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save
fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an
event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO
Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maxi-
mum fuel economy and recuperative energy
based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi-
ent.
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not
sucient, you must also brake with the service
brake. This will be the case particularly if, for
example, you pull away again in slow-moving traf-
c and the distance to the vehicle in front is very
short.
1"Foot o the accelerator" recommendation
2Route event ahead
274 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
If a route event or vehicle that requires an adjust-
ment of your driving style for more eciency is
detected ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and
the ý symbol (grey) will be displayed.
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý
symbol will turn green and recuperation in over-
run mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is
not sucient, also apply the service brake. If ECO
Assist intervenes for a route event ahead (not for
a vehicle in front) and you then press the acceler-
ator pedal again, you will end control by ECO
Assist.
The ECO Assist display will be hidden again in the
following cases:
RYou do not react to the ECO Assist recommen-
dation for a long time.
RYou depress the accelerator pedal while ECO
Assist is intervening for a route event ahead
(not for a vehicle in front).
RECO Assist cannot identify any further recom-
mendations from the route ahead.
In addition to a vehicle in front ¥, ECO Assist
can detect the following route events 2 depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment:
~Roundabout
¢Sharp bend
&Junction
£T-junction
¤Downhill gradient
¦Speed limit
%In drive program A, ECO Assist will react
only to the "Vehicle in front" route event.
System limits
If the calculated route is adhered to when route
guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with
greater accuracy. The basic function is also availa-
ble without active route guidance. Not all informa-
tion and trac situations can be foreseen. The
quality depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible
for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good
time.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RIf the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the
multifunction camera.
RIf the multifunction camera is misted up, dam-
aged or obscured.
RIf road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to
dirt, snow or insucient lighting, or because
they are obscured.
RIf the digital road map of the navigation sys-
tem has incorrect or outdated information.
RIf signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-
works or in adjacent lanes.
RIf the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
RWhen you drive on roads with steep gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
Driving and parking 275
F206 0119 02
Recuperative brake system (plug-in hybrid)
Function of the recuperative brake system
%The function is only available for plug-in
hybrids.
The recuperative braking system converts the
vehicle's kinetic energy into electrical energy dur-
ing overrun and braking.
Depending on the selected recuperation level, the
electric motor is operated as an alternator when
in overrun mode and during braking in order to
charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As
soon as you take your foot o the accelerator
while driving in transmission position h, recuper-
ation starts in overrun mode.
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the
vehicle is braked when coasting and the more
electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage bat-
tery.
The deceleration in overrun mode may not be suf-
cient depending on the driving situation. There is
no deceleration to a standstill. Also brake with the
service brake if necessary. Always adapt your
speed to the driving situation and keep sucient
distance.
%If you brake heavily, the mechanical brake is
also used. This means that the maximum
recuperation energy cannot be recovered. The
more proactively you accelerate and brake,
the more eciently energy can be recuper-
ated.
System limits
With recuperation in overrun mode, the braking
eect of the electric motor is only reduced or
non-existent in the following situations:
Rwhen the high-voltage battery charge level
increases
Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a nor-
mal operating temperature
Manually setting recuperative deceleration
%This function is only available for a plug-in
hybrid.
You can use the steering wheel gearshi pad-
dles to adjust the intensity of recuperation in
drive programs n, o and Î.
The following recuperation levels are available:
Rhà Intelligent and anticipatory recupera-
tion with ECO Assist (/ page 278)
Rhq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely
Rh Normal recuperation
Rh± Increased recuperation: strong deceler-
ation in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on
downhill gradients
Standard setting:
RhÃ: if the ECO Assist function is activa-
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 280).
276 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Rh: if the ECO Assist function is deactivated
in the multimedia system.
%hà is only available if the ECO Assist
function is activated in the multimedia system
and if the function of the radar sensors is not
impaired. Also observe the information on
vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 339).
#To increase recuperation: briey pull gearshi
paddle 1.
#To reduce recuperation: briey pull gearshi
paddle 2.
#Standard setting: pull and hold gearshi pad-
dle 1 or 2, or engage transmission position
h again.
%When the vehicle is started again, the stand-
ard setting is also set.
The driver's display shows the currently selected
recuperation level next to the transmission posi-
tion display.
Manually setting recuperative deceleration
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Requirements
RDrive program Î, o, A, C or
B is selected.
RESP® is activated – ESP® ON.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not acti-
vated.
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the
vehicle is braked when coasting and the more
electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage bat-
tery.
%When the vehicle is started again or transmis-
sion position h is engaged again, standard
recuperation is automatically set.
#Press display button 1.
The display button shows the d symbol
with a three-part segment display for setting
the recuperation.
%If the display is greyed out, the requirements
are not met and setting is not possible.
If the potential to charge the high-voltage bat-
tery is reduced, for example due to a high
charge level or because the high-voltage bat-
tery is not yet at operating temperature, a
recuperation level may not be able to be set
at that time. The Desired recuperation level
currently unavailable message is shown in
the Instrument Display.
When the d symbol is shown with a red !
on the display button, the regenerative brake
system is malfunctioning. Observe the infor-
mation on warning lamps and display mes-
sages which are shown in the driver's display.
#To increase recuperation: turn rotary switch
2 clockwise in the q direction.
Driving and parking 277
F206 0119 02
#To decrease recuperation: turn rotary switch
2 anti-clockwise in the ± direction.
The following recuperation levels are available and
are shown on display button 1:
Rd and no segments light up: no recupera-
tion, the vehicle rolls freely
Rd and one segment lights up: standard
recuperation
Rd and two segments light up: increased
recuperation, strong deceleration in overrun
mode, e.g. for driving on downhill gradients
Rd and three segments light up: maximum
recuperation, maximum deceleration in over-
run mode
%In drive programs Î, A and o, the
intensity of the recuperation is adjusted as
needed for downhill gradients: the steeper the
incline, the higher the recuperation. Depend-
ing on the situation, it may nevertheless be
necessary to additionally depress the brake
pedal.
If the charge potential of the high-voltage battery
has to be reduced due to an increasingly high
charge level, for example, when driving downhill
for a long time, the recuperation level is automati-
cally reduced. The Recuperative deceleration
temporarily reduced message is shown in the
Instrument Display.
ECO Assist (plug-in hybrid)
ECO Assist function
%The following function depends on the equip-
ment and the country and is available only for
plug-in hybrids.
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec-
ted route. This allows the system to help optimally
adjust your driving style for the route ahead, save
fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an
event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO
Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maxi-
mum fuel economy and recuperative energy
based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi-
ent.
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not
sucient, you must also brake with the service
brake. This will be the case particularly if, for
example, you pull away again in slow-moving traf-
c and the distance to the vehicle in front is very
short.
The function will be active in the following circum-
stances:
RThe function is activated in the multimedia
system (/ page 280).
RThe hà recuperation level is selected
(/ page 276, 277).
Rp manual gearshiing is not activated.
RDrive program C is not selected.
1"Foot o the accelerator" recommendation
2Route event ahead
278 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
If a route event that you can deal with more e-
ciently by adjusting your driving style is detected
ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý
symbol will be displayed in grey.
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý
symbol will turn green and recuperation in over-
run mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is
not sucient, also apply the service brake.
If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead
and you press the accelerator pedal, you will end
control by ECO Assist. This does not apply in the
case of a vehicle in front.
The ECO Assist display will be hidden again in the
following cases:
RYou do not react to the ECO Assist recommen-
dation for a long time.
RYou press the accelerator pedal while ECO
Assist is intervening because of a route event
ahead. This does not apply in the case of a
vehicle in front.
RECO Assist cannot identify any further recom-
mendations from the route ahead.
In addition to a vehicle in front ¥, ECO Assist
can detect the following route events 2 depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment:
~Roundabout
¢Sharp bend
&Junction
£T-junction
¤Downhill gradient
¦Speed limit
System limits
If the calculated route is adhered to when route
guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with
greater accuracy. The basic function is also availa-
ble without active route guidance. Not all informa-
tion and trac situations can be foreseen. The
quality depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible
for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good
time.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RIf the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the
multifunction camera.
RIf the multifunction camera is misted up, dam-
aged or obscured.
RIf road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to
dirt, snow or insucient lighting, or because
they are obscured.
RIf the digital road map of the navigation sys-
tem has incorrect or outdated information.
RIf signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-
works or in adjacent lanes.
RIf the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
RWhen you drive on roads with steep gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
Driving and parking 279
F206 0119 02
Activating and deactivating ECO Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Function of the route-based operating-mode strat-
egy (plug-in hybrid)
%The following function is country-dependent
and available only in conjunction with an inte-
grated navigation system.
The route-based operating-mode strategy will be
active in the following circumstances:
RDrive program n is selected .
RThe Route-based option is selected for drive
program n on the DYNAMIC SELECT
menu (/ page 287).
RRoute guidance is active.
RThe state of charge of the high-voltage battery
is sucient.
When the function is active, data on the further
course of the route will be analysed. This includes
e.g. road type, speed limits and elevation data.
The hybrid system will then adapt the operating
strategy to the further course of the route:
RUse of electrical energy and the combustion
engine will be adapted.
RThe state of charge of the high-voltage battery
will be controlled accordingly.
RElectrical energy will be reserved especially
for electric mode, e.g. urban route sections or
areas with low emission zones.
RThe vehicle will automatically select the oper-
ating mode.
Function of the haptic accelerator pedal (plug-in
hybrid)
The haptic accelerator pedal has an additional
point of resistance followed by increased pedal
resistance to help you drive in all-electric mode.
Characteristics of the additional point of resist-
ance:
RAvailable only in drive program Î
Ris used when the electric drive support power
availability display is full (POWER)
RIndicates the maximum available electric per-
formance
The subsequent increased pedal resistance
indicates that the journey is being continued
with the combustion engine.
AMG Real Performance Sound
Selecting a sound characteristic with the steer-
ing-wheel button
%You can select a comfortable (Balanced) or a
sporty (Powerful) sound characteristic using
the steering-wheel button or the multimedia
system (/ page 288).
280 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Press upper or lower display button 1
repeatedly, until it displays the ö symbol.
Plug-in hybrid: the display button 1 shows the
N symbol for the sound characteristic.
%If the display button does not show the sym-
bol, then it is hidden. How functions are dis-
played and the order in which they are dis-
played can be set in the multimedia system
(/ page 282).
#Press the corresponding button 2.
The colour of the button symbol indicates the
currently selected sound characteristic:
RBlue: Balanced – comfortable
RRed: Powerful – sporty
%Plug-in hybrid: Only in the sporty sound char-
acteristic (Powerful) does the vehicle also pro-
duce a stationary noise and speed-dependent
driving noises up to approx. 100 km/h.
Function of the AMG steering wheel buttons
The AMG steering wheel buttons are an additional
control element with two buttons on the steering
wheel.
You can assign two vehicle functions of your
choice to the control element. You can change
between the available functions for the corre-
sponding button 1 by pressing the upper or
lower part of the display buttons 2 repeatedly.
The display buttons 1 show each function selec-
ted.
The following functions are available depending on
the equipment:
åESP® (/ page 342)
äAMG RIDE CONTROL
dManual gearshiing (/ page 295)
çECO start/stop function (/ page 273)
öAMG Real Performance Sound
(/ page 280)
NPlug-in hybrid: AMG Real Performance
Sound (/ page 280)
eCamera views (/ page 400)
gAMG DYNAMICS (/ page 284)
¨Plug-in hybrid: Boost strategy
(/ page 395)
In addition all the functions you have saved as
favourites in the multimedia system are available
for selection. Information on favourites
Driving and parking 281
F206 0119 02
%Individual functions may be faded out. How
functions are displayed and the order in which
they are displayed can be set in the multime-
dia system (/ page 282).
If you have assigned a specic function to one of
the display buttons 1, you can operate this func-
tion with the corresponding button 2.
The assignment of the display buttons 1 remains
stored even aer a new engine start. But the
operating status of the respective function is
reset to the basic setting.
Setting the AMG steering wheel buttons
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Control elements
5AMG steering-wheel buttons
%The SETTINGS SELECT menu can also be
called up using the AMG button in the centre
console or by pressing and holding the
respective display button.
The le display buttons on the steering wheel can
be set in the SETTINGS SELECT menu.
#Select the upper or lower display button in the
central display and switch to editing mode by
pressing and holding it.
#Press q and select the desired function from
the list.
The selected function is assigned to the corre-
sponding display button and can now be
called up directly by simply pressing it.
Deleting button assignment
#Select the upper or lower display button and
switch to editing mode by pressing and hold-
ing it.
#Press £ to delete the selected display but-
ton assignment.
DYNAMIC SELECT
Function of DYNAMIC SELECT
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be
selected quickly according to the current driving
conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics.
You can select the following drive programs.
%Depending on the engine and equipment, the
vehicle will have dierent drive programs.
The drive program selected appears on the driv-
er's display.
= Individual
RCustom settings (/ page 287)
RCustom settings (plug-in hybrid)
B Sport+
RVery sporty driving
REmphasises the vehicle's own oversteer and
understeer characteristics for an even more
active driving style
ROnly suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
C Sport
RMaximum output is available
RSporty driving
RSporty, but with an emphasis on stability
REnables a sporty driver to adopt a more active
driving style
282 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
ROnly suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
n Hybrid (plug-in hybrid)
RComfortable and economical driving
RBalance between traction and stability
RRecommended for all road conditions
RFull development of all intelligent hybrid func-
tions
RAdjustable recuperation in overrun mode
RThe selection of the appropriate drive type by
the hybrid system depends on the driving con-
ditions and the route
A Comfort
RComfortable and economical driving
RBalance between traction and stability
RRecommended for all road conditions
Î Electric (plug-in hybrid)
RElectric mode – driving without the combus-
tion engine is possible up to approx.
140 km/h
RAdjustable recuperation in overrun mode
RAdaptation of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC for electric mode
RDepending on the equipment, the maximum
set speed for cruise control, the limiter and
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limi-
ted to the maximum speed possible in electric
mode
RActivation of the combustion engine via the
pressure point of the accelerator pedal (kick-
down)
o Battery Hold (plug-in hybrid)
RPrioritises maintaining the state of charge of
the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subsequent
journeys in the inner city/low emission zones
RThe selection of the appropriate drive type by
the hybrid system depends on the driving con-
ditions and the route
RAdjustable recuperation in overrun mode
; Eco
RParticularly economical driving
RBalance between traction and stability
RRecommended for all road conditions
%The ESP® settings in drive programs ;
and A are designed for stability. Therefore,
choose one of these drive programs espe-
cially when transporting roof loads, in trailer
operation and when the vehicle is fully laden
or fully occupied.
Plug-in hybrid: this also applies to drive pro-
grams n, Î and o.
Depending on the drive program, the following
systems will change their characteristics:
RDrive
-Engine and transmission management
-Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
-Availability of Glide mode
RESP®
RSteering
Driving and parking 283
F206 0119 02
Function of DYNAMIC SELECT (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be
selected quickly according to the current driving
conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics.
%Depending on the engine and equipment, the
vehicle will have dierent drive programs.
You can select the following drive programs:
Ro Slippery
-Optimised pulling away and driving charac-
teristics in wintry and slippery road condi-
tions
-Drive with combustion engine only (plug-in
hybrid)
Ro Battery Hold (plug-in hybrid)
-Prioritises maintaining the state of charge
of the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subse-
quent journeys in inner cities/low-emis-
sion zones
-The hybrid system will select the appropri-
ate drive type depending on the driving
conditions
RÎ Electric (plug-in hybrid)
-Electric mode: driving without the combus-
tion engine is possible up to approximately
125 km/h.
-Limits the maximum set speed for cruise
control, the limiter and Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC to the maximum speed
possible in electric mode
-Activates the combustion engine and
changes to the A drive program via the
rst point of resistance of the haptic accel-
erator pedal
RA Comfort
-Comfortable and economical driving
-The hybrid system will select the appropri-
ate drive type depending on the driving
conditions (plug-in hybrid)
R= Individual
-Customised settings for drive, suspension,
steering and ESP®
RC Sport
-Sporty driving
-Balance between stability and sportiness
-Suitable only for good road conditions, a
dry surface and a clear stretch of road
-Drive with the combustion engine and rein-
forced boost eect (plug-in hybrid)
RB Sport+
-Particularly sporty driving
-Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteer
and understeer characteristics
-Suitable only for good road conditions, a
dry surface and a clear stretch of road
-Drive with the combustion engine and rein-
forced boost eect (plug-in hybrid)
RI Race
-Maximum sportiness
-Driving characteristics suited for the race-
track with maximum or racetrack-opti-
mised boost eect (plug-in hybrid)
-Particularly rm suspension tuning
-Sporty sound from the exhaust system
284 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
%The I drive program is available only for
the Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S E Performance
model and for vehicles with the AMG
DYNAMIC PLUS package.
The I drive program oers driving characteris-
tics suited to the racetrack and must not be used
on normal roads. The I drive program may be
activated and used only on dedicated race cir-
cuits, not on public roads.
Plug-in hybrid: if the boost strategy is activated in
the I drive program, the electric drive output
will be metered in a way that is optimised for a
racetrack. It will then be possible to use the maxi-
mum boost eect only deliberately via kickdown
(/ page 395).
Mercedes-AMG recommends selecting drive pro-
gram A when in city trac or stop-and-go traf-
c.
Depending on the drive program selected, the fol-
lowing vehicle characteristics will change:
RDrive
-Energy supply for the electric drive output
(plug-in hybrid)
RAMG DYNAMICS
-The four agility functions, Basic, Advanced,
Pro and Master, will be selected automati-
cally depending on the drive program.
-The steering, shi timing point, all-wheel
drive and stabilisation functions will be
adapted to the selected drive program.
-When ESP® is activated, the Pro agility
function will be selected in drive program
I. The Master function will be selected
automatically when ESP® is switched to
SPORT Æ or is switched o ¤.
RReal Performance Sound
RSound of the drive system in the vehicle inte-
rior
RSuspension
RSteering
RAvailability of Glide mode
%You can set the drive program characteristics
using the multimedia system (/ page 288).
%You can adjust certain agility functions of
AMG DYNAMICS using the AMG steering-
wheel buttons.
Selecting the drive program
Driving and parking 285
F206 0119 02
#Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the le
or right.
The drive program selected appears in the
driver's display .
Selecting a drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Selection with right-hand steering-wheel button
#Turn the rotary switch 2.
The selected drive program will appear on dis-
play button 1 and on the driver's display.
%Individual drive programs may not be shown.
How drive programs are displayed and the
order in which they are displayed can be set
in the multimedia system (/ page 288).
#To select the = drive program directly:
press display button 1.
%Plug-in hybrid: it is not possible to directly
select the = drive program by pressing
display button 1. In a plug-in hybrid, use dis-
play button 1 to set the recuperation level
(/ page 277).
Selection via the central display (multimedia sys-
tem)
#Press button 3 and select the drive program
via the central display (/ page 288).
286 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Conguring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multimedia
system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I
#Select = Individual.
#Select and set a category.
%A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction
with a sporty suspension mode.
Setting the H drive program (plug-in hybrid)
#Select Hybrid.
#Select Route-based or Standard.
If route guidance is active and the Route-
based option has been activated, the electri-
cal energy is distributed intelligently over the
entire route. In built-up areas, electric mode is
preferred, while on the motorway the combus-
tion engine is used.
With the Standard option, the vehicle drives in
its standard drive program (Î Electric or
n Hybrid). There is no distribution of elec-
trical energy over the entire route. The high-
voltage battery is exhausted and the vehicle is
then driven by the combustion engine.
Switching the reset display on/o
#Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
%This function must be activated for each user
prole separately. Only when this function is
activated will the drive program and ECO
start/stop setting for the previous journey be
saved for the respective user prole.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a
prompt appears asking whether the last active
drive program should be restored. If the ECO
start/stop function was deactivated, an additional
prompt appears asking if the function should
remain deactivated.
%The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard set-
tings.
Function o: the next time the vehicle is started
the A drive program is set automatically. The
ECO start/stop function is activated automati-
cally.
Switching the reset display on/o (plug-in hybrid)
#Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
%This function must be activated for each user
prole separately. The drive program for the
respective user prole of the last driver is only
stored if this function is activated.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a
prompt appears asking whether the last active
drive program should be restored.
%The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard set-
tings.
Function o (plug-in hybrid): if the Î drive pro-
gram was the last one active, and all requirements
for the drive program are fullled, it will be selec-
ted automatically the next time the vehicle is star-
ted. If another drive program was active, then the
n drive program is set automatically.
Driving and parking 287
F206 0119 02
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.
%The actual maximum values that can be ach-
ieved for engine output and engine torque
may deviate from the certied values within
the country-specic guidelines for permissible
tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-
specic guidelines).
Inuencing variables include:
RSea level
RFuel quality
ROutside temperature
ROperating temperature of the engine
Adjust your driving style accordingly.
The p warning lamp in the driver display is
on until the engine has reached operating
temperature.
%The values displayed serve only as guidance.
The values for engine output and engine tor-
que shown on the central display may deviate
from the actual values.
%The p warning lamp to show the power
output limitation aer starting the vehicle is
not available in all vehicle models.
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption will
be displayed.
Setting AMG DYNAMIC SELECT in the MBUX mul-
timedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5DYNAMIC SELECT
288 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Overview of the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu
(Example of representation) Representation
and arrangement of content equipment-
dependent.
1AMG drive program settings
2Drive programs
3ESP® (/ page 342)
%Depending on the equipment, the AMG
DYNAMIC SELECT menu can also be called
up using the AMG button in the centre con-
sole.
#Select the appropriate drive program.
The settings of the drive programs can be adjus-
ted individually.
#Select the desired tab on the le and make
the relevant setting.
Setting options for the drive programs (equip-
ment-dependent):
RAMG DYNAMICS:
Basic/Advanced/Pro
RSuspension:
Comfort/Sport/Sport+
RSound:
Balanced/Sport/Powerful
RDrive (can only be set in the = drive pro-
gram):
Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect gearshiing
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi-
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand-
still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same
time.
Driving and parking 289
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when the transmission position is not
engaged
The current transmission position will be high-
lighted on the driver's display.
If the selected transmission position is not
highlighted, the vehicle may pull away in the
wrong direction or roll away.
#Aer changing the transmission position,
always check the transmission position
display on the driver's display.
If the transmission position is not highlighted
on the driver's display even aer a short time:
#Pay attention to the display messages.
#Pull away carefully and check the
engaged transmission position.
#When parking, engage the parking brake
and secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
#Have the transmission checked immedi-
ately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the trans-
mission position. The current transmission posi-
tion will be highlighted on the driver's display.
jPark position
kReverse gear
iNeutral
hDrive position
290 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Engaging reverse gear R
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect gearshiing
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi-
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand-
still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same
time.
#Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of
resistance.
Engaging neutral N
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect gearshiing
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi-
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand-
still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same
time.
Driving and parking 291
F206 0119 02
#Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of
resistance.
%To shi into neutral i with the vehicle
switched on, push the selector lever up or
down for several seconds to the rst point of
resistance.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or
tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic
transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the
vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is
opened:
#Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the vehicle is at a standstill.
#Release the brake pedal.
#Switch o the vehicle.
The message reading Risk of vehicle rolling away
N activated manually No automatic switch to P
will appear on the driver's display.
%If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in
the vehicle, the automatic transmission will
remain in neutral i.
The park position j is automatically re-engaged
as soon as one of the following conditions is met:
RYou switch to transmission position h or k.
RYou press the button j.
Engaging park position P
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
292 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage due to engaging park posi-
tion j while the vehicle is rolling
If you shi the transmission into park position
j while the vehicle is rolling, the transmis-
sion may be damaged.
#If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a
door.
#Only engage the park position j when
the vehicle is stationary.
#Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 326).
#Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
comes to a standstill.
#When the vehicle is stationary, press button
1.
When the j transmission position display is
shown, park position is engaged. If the j
transmission position display is not shown,
apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling away.
%Depending on the situation, it may take a
short time until j is engaged. Therefore,
always pay attention to the transmission posi-
tion display.
Park position j will be engaged automatically if
one of the following conditions is met:
RYou switch the stationary vehicle o in trans-
mission position h or k.
RYou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary in transmission position h or k.
RWhen the vehicle is rolling, you switch if o in
transmission position h or k and bring it to
a standstill.
RWhen the vehicle is rolling, you shi to trans-
mission position i, bring the vehicle to a
standstill and open the driver's door when the
vehicle is stationary.
REngaging park position j automatically is
required by the vehicle.
Driving and parking 293
F206 0119 02
%To manoeuvre with an open driver's door,
open the driver's door while the vehicle is sta-
tionary and engage transmission position h
or k again.
Engaging drive position D
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect gearshiing
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi-
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand-
still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same
time.
#Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the rst point of
resistance.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis-
sion position h, it will shi gears automatically.
This depends, among other things, on the follow-
ing factors:
RThe selected drive program
RThe position of the accelerator pedal
RThe driving speed
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free may help to free the vehi-
cle if it has become stuck in slush or snow.
To rock the vehicle free, move the DIRECT
SELECT lever upwards and downwards past the
point of resistance to switch between transmis-
sion positions h and k.
%The maximum design speed for switching
between h and k is approximately 9 km/h.
Manual shiing
%For plug-in hybrids, observe the information
regarding the regenerative brake system
(/ page 276).
294 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
When the automatic transmission is shied to
position h, you can shi it manually with the
steering wheel gearshi paddles. If permitted, the
automatic transmission will shi to a higher or
lower gear depending on the steering wheel gear-
shi paddle pulled.
You have two options for manually shiing the
automatic transmission:
RTemporary setting
RPermanent setting
The gears are shied automatically when manual
shiing is deactivated.
Temporary setting:
#To activate: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
dle 1 or 2.
Manual shiing will be activated for a short
time. The transmission position display will
show p and the current gear.
%How long manual shiing stays activated
depends on various factors.
Manual shiing can be deactivated automati-
cally in the following cases:
RWhen the drive program is changed
RWhen the vehicle is restarted
RWhen transmission position h is engaged
again
RDriving style
#To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
dle 2.
#To shi down: pull steering wheel gearshi
paddle 1.
#To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel
gearshi paddle 2.
The transmission position display will show
h.
%You can activate or deactivate manual shiing
permanently in the multimedia system.
Manual shiing (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
%You can also activate and deactivate manual
gearshiing via the multimedia system
(/ page 296).
#Press the upper or lower 1 display button
repeatedly, until it displays the d symbol.
Driving and parking 295
F206 0119 02
%If the display button does not show the sym-
bol, then it is hidden. How functions are dis-
played and the order in which they are dis-
played can be set in the multimedia system
(/ page 282).
#To activate/deactivate: press the correspond-
ing button 2.
The symbol indicates the currently selected
transmission position:
Rd M (red): manual gearshiing
Rd D (blue): automatic transmission
Plug-in hybrid: automatic transmission must be
selected for electric mode. If you select manual
mode in drive program Î, the drive program
will change to A and the combustion engine
will start. If you are driving in electric mode in
drive program o or A and select manual
mode, the combustion engine will start.
Shiing up and down
*NOTE Damage to the engine due to shi-
ing up too late
The automatic transmission does not shi up
in manual mode even when the engine's limit-
ing speed is reached.
The fuel supply is interrupted in order to pre-
vent the engine from overrevving.
#Shi up before the engine speed reaches
the red area in the rev counter.
#To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
dle 2.
#To shi down: pull steering wheel gearshi
paddle 1.
If the engine speed is too high or too low, you will
not be able to change gear using the steering
wheel gearshi paddles. In this case, segments
1 will light up red on the driver's display.
Permanently activating or deactivating manual
shiing
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
#Permanently activate or deactivate the func-
tion.
296 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Gearshi recommendation
The gearshi recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
#When gearshi recommendation 1 appears
on the driver's display, shi to the recommen-
ded gear.
Using kickdown
#Maximum acceleration: depress the accelera-
tor pedal beyond the point of resistance.
To protect against engine overrev, the automatic
transmission will shi up to the next gear when
maximum engine speed has been reached.
Glide mode function
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption
when you employ an anticipatory driving style.
Glide mode is characterised by the following:
RThe combustion engine is switched o
depending on the driving situation. All the
vehicle functions will remain active.
RThe transmission position display h is shown
in green.
Glide mode will be activated if the following condi-
tions are met:
RDrive program ; is selected.
RThe speed is within a suitable range.
RThe road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
inclines or tight bends.
RThere is no trailer coupled up to the trailer
hitch, and no bicycle rack tted.
RThe state of charge of the battery is sucient.
RYou do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
%Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the
drive program =.
Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the following
parameters:
RIncline
RDownhill gradient
RTemperature
RHeight
RSpeed
ROperating condition of the engine
RTrac situation
Function of glide mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption
when you employ an anticipatory driving style.
Driving and parking 297
F206 0119 02
When you drive in Glide mode, the J symbol
will appear on the driver's display and the com-
bustion engine will be switched o. All the vehicle
functions will remain active.
Glide mode will be activated if the following condi-
tions are met:
RThe ECO start/stop function is switched on.
RDrive program = is selected with the
"Moderate" or "Reduced" drive setting.
RThe speed is within a suitable range.
RThe road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
inclines or tight bends.
RThe state of charge of the battery is sucient.
RYou are no longer depressing the accelerator
or brake pedal.
Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Function of 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven.
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves
the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven
wheel spins due to insucient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account
of road, weather and trac conditions. 4MATIC is
only an aid. You are responsible in particular for
maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane.
%In wintry road conditions, the maximum eect
of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use
winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if
necessary.
Refuelling
Refuelling the vehicle
&WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly ammable.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Before refuelling, switch o the vehicle
and, if tted, the stationary heater and
keep switched o during lling.
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
298 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&WARNING Risk of re and explosion due
to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.
#Before you open the fuel ller cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic vehicle body.
#To avoid creating another electrostatic
charge, do not get into the vehicle again
during the refuelling process.
&WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
While the vehicle is running, component parts
in the exhaust system may overheat without
warning.
#Never refuel using petrol.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a petrol engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Refuel only using unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms
to European EN 228, or an equivalent
specication.
Petrol can contain up to 25 %‑ of ethanol by
volume.
#See the information label in the fuel ller
ap for compatible fuels.
Further information about compatible fuels
can be obtained at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Throughout Europe, you can nd compatibility
markings on fuel pumps or pump nozzles suit-
able for your vehicle.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RDiesel
Rregular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
Rpetrol with more than 3 % methanol by
volume‑, e. g. M15, M30
Rpetrol with metallic additives
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Driving and parking 299
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel with sulphur-free diesel fuel.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, only refuel with low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content below 50
ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RPetrol
RMarine diesel
RHeating oil
RPure biodiesel or vegetable oil
RPetroleum or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
with a petrol engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
RDo not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
*NOTE Do not refuel diesel-engined vehi-
cles with petrol
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
RDo not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
*NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to
overlling the fuel tank
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o.
If too much fuel has been added due, for
example, to a faulty lling pump:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o.
300 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RPlug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel tank
was bled before refuelling (/ page 302).
Observe the notes on service uids and fuel.
The recommended octane number for your vehi-
cle can be found on the information label in the
fuel ller ap.
1Fuel ller ap
2Bracket for the fuel ller cap
3Tyre pressure table
4QR code for rescue card
5Fuel type
%Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel ller
ap opens automatically aer the fuel tank
has been bled (/ page 302).
#Press in the centre on the back area of fuel
ller ap 1.
#Turn the fuel ller cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
#Insert fuel ller cap from above into bracket
2.
#Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel.
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches o.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: The tank ller
neck is designed for refuelling at diesel lling
pumps.
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being
lled, your vehicle is equipped with an incor-
rect fuelling protector. This function may be
deactivated in some countries due to local
conditions. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not run the
fuel tank empty.
Driving and parking 301
F206 0119 02
When the fuel tank is completely empty, top
up with at least 5 l diesel before starting the
vehicle.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a ller neck
with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel
engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the ller neck cannot slide into the
tank.
#Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#Close fuel ller ap 1.
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with
petrol engine)
#Pull switch 1 once briey.
Indicator lamp 2 will ash and the Please
wait Depressurising fuel tank message will
appear on the driver's display.
When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator
lamp 2 will light up continuously.
The Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for
refuelling message will appear on the driver's
display and the fuel ller ap will open auto-
matically.
%Depressurising the fuel tank may take several
minutes.
The fuel tank can be depressurised only if the
conditions described above are fullled. Other-
wise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat
the process.
%In the following situations, there is a malfunc-
tion:
RIndicator lamp 2 ashes initially and then
goes out.
RThe yellow ; engine diagnostics warn-
ing lamp lights up.
*NOTE Damage to the fuel ller ap when
opening it
If an attempt is made to open a fuel ller ap
that is not unlocked, the fuel ller ap or the
opening mechanism may be damaged.
302 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Only refuel when the fuel ller ap has
opened automatically.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on topping up AdBlue®
AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx
exhaust gas aertreatment of diesel engines. In
order for the exhaust gas aertreatment to func-
tion properly, only use AdBlue® in accordance
with ISO 22241.
AdBlue® is characterised by the following:
Rnon-toxic
Rcolourless and odourless
Rnon-ammable
If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of
ammonia vapour may be released. Only ll the
AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin,
eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from chil-
dren.
Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly.
Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at
once.
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
AdBlue® is available here:
RAdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a
qualied specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
RAdBlue® is available at many lling stations
from AdBlue® lling pumps.
RAlternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualied
specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz
Service Centres, and at many lling stations in
AdBlue® rell canisters or AdBlue® rell bot-
tles.
%Ensure the connection between the rell con-
tainer and vehicle ller neck does not drip.
Relling AdBlue®
*NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®
being in the fuel
#AdBlue® must not be used to ll the fuel
tank.
#Only use AdBlue® to ll the AdBlue®
tank.
#Do not overll the AdBlue® tank.
*NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte-
rior due to AdBlue® leakage
#Aer topping up, carefully close the
AdBlue® rell container.
#Avoid carrying AdBlue® rell containers
permanently in the vehicle.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
Driving and parking 303
F206 0119 02
The following messages appear in order in the
driver display when the AdBlue® tank requires
relling:
RRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The
AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve
range. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
RTop up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue® level
will lead to limited performance aer the
remaining distance displayed has been driven.
Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
RTop up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance
from the speed displayed. Aer the remaining
distance displayed has been covered, it will no
longer be possible to start the vehicle. Top up
at least the displayed quantity of AdBlue®.
RTop up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on, wait
60 sec. or engine start not possThe AdBlue®
tank is empty. You can no longer start the
vehicle. Top up at least the displayed quantity
of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait
approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the
driver display Service.
%The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly
on the driving style and operating conditions.
The actual range can therefore deviate from
the calculated range.
Opening the AdBlue® ller cap
#Press on the centre of the back area of fuel
ller ap 1.
#Turn AdBlue® ller cap 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
%You can also place the AdBlue® ller cap in
the ller cap holder in the hinge arm of the
fuel ller ap.
304 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Relling AdBlue®
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you top up
AdBlue® at a pump. If no AdBlue® pump is availa-
ble, you can also top up AdBlue® with a canister.
#Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® rell canis-
ter 4.
#Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening
of AdBlue® rell canister 4 until hand-tight.
#Screw disposable hose 3 onto the ller neck
of the vehicle until hand-tight.
#Li up and tip AdBlue® rell canister 4.
The lling process stops when the AdBlue®
container is completely full.
AdBlue® rell canister 4 can be removed
when it has been only partially emptied.
#Unscrew and close disposable hose 3 and
AdBlue® rell canister 4 in reverse order.
#Replace the AdBlue ller cap® 2 and turn it
clockwise until it audibly engages.
#Close fuel ller ap 1.
#Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
%If it was no longer possible to start the vehicle
due to the empty AdBlue® tank, it takes up to
60 seconds for topping up to be detected.
#Start the vehicle.
%Avoid storing AdBlue® rell containers perma-
nently in the vehicle.
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in
hybrid)
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery
*NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to
leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
of time
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-
discharge.
Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if
the vehicle is idle for several months. This can
damage the high-voltage battery.
#To avoid damage, please observe the fol-
lowing recommendations when handling
the high-voltage battery.
*NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-volt-
age battery due to not observing the fol-
lowing recommendations
As a result of its basic characteristics, the
storage capacity of and the amount of energy
available from the high-voltage battery decrea-
Driving and parking 305
F206 0119 02
ses over the course of its life. Due to this, both
the maximum electrical range that can be ach-
ieved by the vehicle and its maximum electri-
cal output can be impaired.
The following factors could accelerate the age-
ing of the high-voltage battery:
Ra high level of charge, especially if the
vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time
Rfrequent rapid charging with direct current
(mode 4)
Rleaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
at high ambient temperatures
#To avoid accelerated ageing, please
observe the following recommendations
when handling the high-voltage battery.
*NOTE Damage to the drive system when
charging the high-voltage battery at
extreme altitudes
The drive system may be damaged if the high-
voltage battery is charged at elevations
greater than 4,000 m above sea level.
It may then no longer be possible to continue
the journey.
#Avoid charging processes at extreme
altitudes.
Recommendations when handling the high-voltage
battery:
RRapid-charge the high-voltage battery with
direct current (Mode 4) only when required.
RIn case of longer downtimes, switch o the
vehicle with a charge status of the high-volt-
age battery between 25 % and 30 %. Do not
permanently connect the high-voltage battery
to a power supply.
RIf leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods,
avoid high outside temperatures wherever
possible.
REvery six weeks check the charge level of the
high-voltage battery (/ page 325).
RMake sure to charge the high-voltage battery if
the charge level is below 15 %.
RDo not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the
vehicle is le unused for a lengthy period. Oth-
erwise the condition of the vehicle's high-volt-
age battery cannot be monitored.
RWhen only using the high-voltage battery with
low states of charge, fully charge the high-volt-
age battery twice a year.
Depending on the equipment and national ver-
sion, your vehicle is equipped with one of the fol-
lowing vehicle sockets:
RType 1 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2/3)
RType Combo 1 for charging with alternating
current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct
current (mode 4)
RType 2 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2/3)
RType Combo 2 for charging with alternating
current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct
current (mode 4)
306 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket
1AC charging port type 1 or type 2
2Socket extension for DC charging
%When using a CCS charging cable (Combined
Charging System) for charging with direct cur-
rent at a vehicle socket type Combo, both
ports on the vehicle socket 1 and 2 are
used for charging.
Charging options for the high-voltage battery
(mode 2, 3 or 4):
RWhile the vehicle is in motion by means of
recuperation
RStationary alternating current charging:
-At a mains socket (mode 2)
-at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
RStationary DC charging (vehicles with vehicle
socket type Combo):
-At a rapid-charging station (mode 4)
Depending on the country-specic vehicle equip-
ment and your vehicle's charging cable, single
phase AC charging is also possible.
Observe the dierent grid requirements of your
current location when charging. Only use charging
cables which conform to the grid requirements.
Consult a qualied electrician or your local grid
operator if you have any questions.
It is recommended that you charge the high-volt-
age battery at a wallbox or charging station due to
the improved charging power and better charging
eciency oered.
Driving and parking 307
F206 0119 02
System limits
The power output of the high-voltage battery may
be impaired by the following:
Rhigh or low outside temperatures
RElectrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle
being switched on, e.g. operating the air con-
ditioning system
Rextended periods without charging
The charging time or the charging power of the
high-voltage battery may be increased by the fol-
lowing:
Rhigh or low outside temperatures
RA low or high charge status of the high-voltage
battery
RThe maximum available charge current of the
charging device
Stowing the charging cable
Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the
charging cable bag provided, and secure the
charging cable bag in the boot or load compart-
ment with the included retaining strap. Otherwise,
the charging cable bag with the charging cable is
not suciently secured.
Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load com-
partment
As delivered, charging cable bag 1 with retaining
strap 2 is located in the boot or load compart-
ment. To secure the charging cable bag, the
retaining strap must be attached to tie-down eye
3. Do not use bag hooks to attach the retaining
strap.
#Feed the loop end of retaining strap 2
through tie-down eye 3 in the boot or load
compartment.
#Feed the end with the snap hook through the
loop of retaining strap 2.
308 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Tighten retaining strap 2 so that the knot
around tie-down eye 3 is tight and secure.
#Hook the snap hook of retaining strap 2 in a
tie-down eye of charging cable bag 1.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a
mains socket (Mode 2)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incor-
rectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a mains
socket using incorrectly installed component
parts could cause a re or an electric shock,
for example.
#Only connect the charging cable to a
mains socket that:
RHas been properly installed and
RHas been inspected by a qualied electri-
cian
#For safety reasons, only use the charging
cable supplied with the vehicle or an
original Mercedes‑Benz charging cable.
#Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice
there.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original
charging cables for their suitability for high-
voltage charging of your vehicle.
#Never use a damaged charging cable.
#Do not use:
RExtension cables
RExtension reels
RMultiple sockets
#Never use socket adapters to connect
the charging cable to the mains socket.
The only exception being if the adapter
has been tested and approved by the
manufacturer for charging the high-volt-
age battery of an electric vehicle.
#Observe the safety notes in the operat-
ing instructions for the socket adapter.
Only the following charging cables may be used:
RThe charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
RA charging cable that has been approved for
the vehicle.
Driving and parking 309
F206 0119 02
The charging process can vary depending on the
power supply equipment. The charging times
when charging the high-voltage battery at the
mains socket are considerably longer than when
charging at a wallbox or charging station.
When doing so, always observe the local informa-
tion.
Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging
loose from a mains socket.
Do not li the controls by the following compo-
nent parts:
Rthe charging cable connector
Rthe mains plug
When charging, protect the charging cable control
element from excessive heat such as direct sun-
light. Otherwise the charging process may be
aborted.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a
wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incor-
rectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox
using incorrectly installed component parts
could cause a re or an electric shock, for
example.
#Only connect the charging cable to a
wallbox that:
RHas been properly installed and
RHas been inspected by a qualied electri-
cian
#For safety reasons, only use charging
cables that have been tested and
approved by the manufacturer for charg-
ing the high-voltage battery in an electric
vehicle.
#Never use damaged charging cables.
#Do not extend the charging cable.
#Do not use adapters.
#Observe the safety notes in the operat-
ing instructions for the wallbox.
If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed
cable, use the optionally available charging cable
for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The
charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/
luggage compartment.
Only use charging cables that have been tested
and approved by the manufacturer for charging
the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam-
aged components
Connecting the vehicle to a charging station
using damaged component parts could cause
a re or an electric shock, for example.
#Perform a visual check of the charging
station for obvious defects, for example
damage to the housing or charging cable
connection.
#Never use damaged charging cables.
310 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Do not use an extension for the charging
cable.
#Do not use adapters.
#Always observe the safety instructions
on the charging station.
Most charging stations must be activated before
the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or
via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site opera-
tor's instructions for the charging station and the
notes on Mercedes me Charge (/ page 516).
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging
process, shown by the charging station, may be
higher than the amount of energy actually absor-
bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result
of dierent levels of charging losses and is descri-
bed as recharge eciency. Charging losses occur,
for example, due to heat that builds up when the
vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers
that are switched on. Further information on
recharge eciency can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a
rapid charging station (mode 4)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam-
aged components
Connecting the vehicle to a charging station
using damaged component parts could cause
a re or an electric shock, for example.
#Perform a visual check of the charging
station for obvious defects, for example
damage to the housing or charging cable
connection.
#Never use damaged charging cables.
#Do not use an extension for the charging
cable.
#Do not use adapters.
#Always observe the safety instructions
on the charging station.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
Most charging stations must be activated before
the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or
via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site opera-
tor's instructions for the charging station and the
notes on Mercedes me Charge (/ page 516).
The charging cable for the vehicle must not be
longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in
some countries. This is to prevent the interfer-
ence of signals being received by radio communi-
cation devices in the vehicle or in close proximity
to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the
charging cable may be routed underground. If in
doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is
the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
Driving and parking 311
F206 0119 02
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging
process, shown by the charging station, may be
higher than the amount of energy actually absor-
bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result
of dierent levels of charging losses and is descri-
bed as recharge eciency. Charging losses occur,
for example, due to heat that builds up when the
vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers
that are switched on. Further information on
recharge eciency can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Maximum permissible charging current for charg-
ing at a mains socket
*NOTE Overloading the mains socket due
to excessive charging current
If the charging current is too high, the fuse
could be tripped or the external mains supply
could overheat.
#Ensure that the external mains supply
has been designed to handle the charg-
ing current provided.
#For safety reasons, only use the charging
cable supplied with the vehicle or an
original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these
original charging cables for their suitabil-
ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi-
cle.
#Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice
there.
#Check the maximum charging current
using the charging capacity shown in the
driver's display.
The charging cable supplied is set to a country-
specic maximum charging current value. When
charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed
the permitted value for that country.
#Before charging at a mains socket, have the
maximum permissible charging current for the
relevant mains socket or the building checked
by a qualied electrician.
#When abroad, observe the country-specic
laws when charging.
If you have questions concerning the charging
current or if there is a malfunction, please contact
a qualied specialist workshop.
Overview of the charging cable control panel
The charging cable control panel of the standard
charging cable described below shows the current
status of the charging process.
1Supply voltage indicator
2Charging process indicator
3Temperature monitor indicator
4Safety system indicator
312 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Supply voltage indicator 1
Display Meaning
Lights up white The supply voltage is
connected.
Charging process indicator 2
Display Meaning
Flashes green The high-voltage bat-
tery is charging.
Temperature control indicator 3
Display Meaning
Lights up red The green LED ashes
simultaneously: over-
temperature – the
charging performance
is reduced.
The green LED does
not ash: overtemper-
ature – the charging
process is stopped.
Flashes red Overtemperature at
the mains plug – the
charging process is
stopped.
Safety system indicator 4
Display Meaning
Flashes red Charging cable mal-
function – cannot
carry out the charging
process, reset the
charging cable control
panel.
Lights up red White LED is o:
power supply malfunc-
tion – cannot carry
out the charging proc-
ess, replace the mains
socket.
White LED is on: vehi-
cle malfunction – can-
not carry out the
charging process,
reset the charging
cable control panel.
When all four displays light up, the charging cable
control panel is performing a self-test.
Driving and parking 313
F206 0119 02
If the temperature monitor 3 indicates a mal-
function, it may help to protect the charging cable
from direct sunlight.
To reset the charging cable control panel: if safety
system 4 indicates a charging cable malfunction
or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the charging
cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the
charging cable from the vehicle and from the
mains socket and wait for approximately ve sec-
onds. If the malfunction persists aer the charg-
ing cable is reconnected, charging at the mains
socket is not possible. The charging cable must
be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked
at a qualied specialist workshop, depending on
the indicator.
Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehicle
socket
%Depending on the national version, your vehi-
cle is equipped with one of the following vehi-
cle sockets.
The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked
together with the vehicle.
Combo 1 vehicle socket
1Socket lamp
2Charging process indicator lamp
3Locking status indicator lamp
Combo 2 vehicle socket
1Socket lamp
2Charging process indicator lamp
3Locking status indicator lamp
The upper arch of socket lamp 1 is used for the
lighting and ashes or lights up as with indicator
lamp 3. The lower arch is used for the status
314 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
display and ashes or lights up as with indicator
lamp 2.
Overview of the locking status
Locking sta-
tus 3
Display Meaning
% Lights up
white Vehicle
socket
unlocked,
insert or
remove charg-
ing cable
% Flashes white Malfunction
during locking
or unlocking
Overview of the charging process status
Status of the
charging
process 2
Display Meaning
# Flashes
orange Connection is
being estab-
lished
# Flashes green Active energy
ow
# Lights up
orange (for
approx. 60 s)
Interruption in
charging
# Lights up
green (for
approx. 60 s)
Charging
process com-
pleted
# Flashes red
(for approx.
90 s)
Vehicle mal-
function;
charging is
not possible
Starting the alternating current charging process
(mode 2/3)
&DANGER Risk of death when charging at a
damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive
an electric shock.
#Only use an undamaged charging cable.
#Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
#Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
at a qualied specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
#Never connect the charging cable to a
damaged vehicle socket.
Driving and parking 315
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage due to overheating of
charging cable and charge port
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charge port can heat up within the
permissible limits.
The permissible limit values are inuenced by
the following factors:
Rthe power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the
charging cable have been observed
#If the charging cable or charge port
becomes too hot, have the power supply
system checked.
*NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
#Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
charging cable connected. This protects
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
#Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket
ap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket ap from
being opened again.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the
charging cable connector due to incorrect
handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N)
to fully insert the charging cable connector
into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise
damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable
connector or their contacts.
#If you feel there is increased resistance,
pull the charging cable connector out of
the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements
RThe transmission is in position j.
RThe vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked
and the distance between the key and the
vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
RThe charging cable is not taut.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment and on the
national version, your vehicle is equipped with one
of the following vehicle sockets:
RType 1 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2 or 3)
RType 1 Combo for charging with alternating
current (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode
4)
RType 2 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2 or 3)
RType 2 Combo for charging with alternating
current (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode
4)
316 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket
#Press the centre on the rear area of the
socket ap 1 and swivel the socket ap to
the front.
The % indicator lamp 3 and top status
display 4 light up white.
%The socket ap 1 can also be opened via the
multimedia system (/ page 499).
#Press catch 7 to the right and fold up socket
cover 2.
%On vehicles with a Combo vehicle socket, only
the connection 6 is required for the charg-
ing cable connector. Only open the upper part
of the socket cap 2.
#For charging at a mains socket insert the
mains plug into the mains socket of the exter-
nal power source to the stop.
#Fully insert the charging cable connector into
vehicle socket 6. If the wallbox/charging
station is not equipped with a charging cable,
fully insert the plug of the vehicle's charging
cable into the wallbox/charging station
socket.
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
when inserted.
The # indicator lamp 5 and lower status
display 4 ash orange and, as soon as the
high-voltage battery is charged, green.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
Driving and parking 317
F206 0119 02
At the start of the charging process, the charge
level display is shown in the driver display with a
charging prediction. The charging prediction is the
point in time at which the high-voltage battery will
be fully charged.
%Depending on the temperature, the fan and
battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
%If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and
connected to the mains supply, the high-volt-
age battery will be recharged automatically as
needed or when electrical consumers are
activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
%The vehicle is equipped with a fuse against
overvoltages in the mains supply. This fuse
can respond e.g. in severe storms and result
in triggering of the building fuse and charging
interruption. These functions serve to protect
the vehicle.
Aer switching the building fuse back on
again the charging process is automatically
continued. During a charge interruption with-
out triggering the building fuse it may take up
to ten minutes for the charging process to
continue automatically.
Ending the alternating current charging process
(mode 2/3)
&DANGER Risk of death when charging at a
damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive
an electric shock.
#Only use an undamaged charging cable.
#Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
#Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
at a qualied specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
#Never connect the charging cable to a
damaged vehicle socket.
*NOTE Damage due to overheating of
charging cable and charge port
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charge port can heat up within the
permissible limits.
The permissible limit values are inuenced by
the following factors:
Rthe power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the
charging cable have been observed
#If the charging cable or charge port
becomes too hot, have the power supply
system checked.
*NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
#Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
318 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
charging cable connected. This protects
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
#Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket
ap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket ap from
being opened again.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked
and the distance between the key and the
vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment and on the
national version, your vehicle is equipped with one
of the following vehicle sockets:
RType 1 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2 or 3)
RType 1 Combo for charging with alternating
current (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode
4)
RType 2 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2 or 3)
RType 2 Combo for charging with alternating
current (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode
4)
Combo 1 vehicle socket
%Vehicles equipped only with a Type 1 vehicle
socket for AC charging have no charging inter-
ruption button 3.
#Type Combo 1 vehicle socket: press the charg-
ing interruption button 3.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
%As an alternative, and only if the charging
interruption button 3 is not working, you can
unlock the vehicle using the vehicle key or
centrally from inside to end the charging proc-
ess. If the indicator lamp % 1 then lights
up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for
around 30 seconds.
%The charging process can also be ended via
the multimedia system (/ page 499).
#Type 1 vehicle socket: Unlock the vehicle with
the vehicle key or centrally from inside.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
#Press and hold button 2 on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
cable connector from the vehicle socket.
Driving and parking 319
F206 0119 02
%If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the
charging cable connector is still locked, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
#Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
#Remove the charging cable connector from
the mains socket, or from the socket on the
wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehi-
cle's charging cable safely in the vehicle
(/ page 308).
Combo 2 vehicle socket
%Vehicles equipped only with a Type 2 vehicle
socket for AC charging have no charging inter-
ruption button 2.
#Type Combo 2 vehicle socket: press the charg-
ing interruption button 2.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
%As an alternative, and only if the charging
interruption button 2 is not working, you can
unlock the vehicle using the vehicle key or
centrally from inside to end the charging proc-
ess. If the indicator lamp % 1 then lights
up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for
around 30 seconds.
%The charging process can also be ended via
the multimedia system (/ page 499).
#Type 2 vehicle socket: Unlock the vehicle with
the vehicle key or centrally from inside.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked for around 30 seconds.
%If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the
charging cable connector is still locked, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
320 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
#Remove the charging cable connector from
the mains socket, or from the socket on the
wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehi-
cle's charging cable safely in the vehicle
(/ page 308).
%The indicator lamp % 1 on the vehicle
socket remains lit for some time before
switching o.
Starting the direct current charging process
(mode 4)
&DANGER Risk of death when charging at a
damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive
an electric shock.
#Only use an undamaged charging cable.
#Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
#Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
at a qualied specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
#Never connect the charging cable to a
damaged vehicle socket.
*NOTE Damage due to overheating of
charging cable and charge port
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charge port can heat up within the
permissible limits.
The permissible limit values are inuenced by
the following factors:
Rthe power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the
charging cable have been observed
#If the charging cable or charge port
becomes too hot, have the power supply
system checked.
*NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
#Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
charging cable connected. This protects
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
#Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket
ap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket ap from
being opened again.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the
charging cable connector due to incorrect
handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N)
to fully insert the charging cable connector
into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise
damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable
connector or their contacts.
#If you feel there is increased resistance,
pull the charging cable connector out of
the socket and reinsert it.
Driving and parking 321
F206 0119 02
Requirements
RThe transmission is in position j.
RThe vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked
and the distance between the key and the
vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
RThe charging cable is not taut.
%Depending on the national version, the vehicle
is equipped with one of the following vehicle
sockets.
Combo 1 vehicle socket Combo 2 vehicle socket
#Press the centre rear of the socket ap 1
and swing the socket ap forwards.
The indicator lamp 3 % and upper status
display 4 light up white.
%The socket ap 1 can also be opened via the
multimedia system (/ page 499).
322 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Press catch 7 to the right and fold up socket
cover 2.
%Connections 6 and 8 are required for the
CCS charging cable connector. Both sections
of the socket cover must therefore be opened
2.
#Fully insert the CCS charging cable connector
into the vehicle socket .
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
when inserted.
The indicator lamp 5 # and lower status
display 4 ash orange, and green as soon as
the high-voltage battery is being charged.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge
level display is shown in the driver display with a
charging prediction. The charging prediction is the
point in time at which the high-voltage battery will
be fully charged.
%Depending on the temperature, the fan and
battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
%If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and
connected to the mains supply, the high-volt-
age battery will be recharged automatically as
needed or when electrical consumers are
activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
Ending the direct current charging process (mode
4)
&DANGER Risk of death when charging at a
damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive
an electric shock.
#Only use an undamaged charging cable.
#Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
#Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
at a qualied specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
#Never connect the charging cable to a
damaged vehicle socket.
*NOTE Damage due to overheating of
charging cable and charge port
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charge port can heat up within the
permissible limits.
The permissible limit values are inuenced by
the following factors:
Rthe power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the
charging cable have been observed
#If the charging cable or charge port
becomes too hot, have the power supply
system checked.
*NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
#Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
Driving and parking 323
F206 0119 02
charging cable connected. This protects
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
#Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket
ap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket ap from
being opened again.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked
and the distance between the key and the
vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
%Depending on the national version, the vehicle
is equipped with one of the following vehicle
sockets.
Combo 1 vehicle socket
#Press charging interruption button 3.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
%As an alternative, and only if the charging
interruption button 3 is not working, you can
unlock the vehicle using the vehicle key or
centrally from inside to end the charging proc-
ess. If the indicator lamp % 1 then lights
up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for
around 30 seconds.
%The charging process can also be ended via
the multimedia system (/ page 499).
#Press and hold button 2 on the charging
cable connector and remove the charging
cable connector from the vehicle socket.
%If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the
unlocking procedure. If the charging cable
connector is still locked, contact a qualied
specialist workshop.
#Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
324 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Combo 2 vehicle socket
#Press charging interruption button 2.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
%As an alternative, and only if the charging
interruption button 2 is not working, you can
unlock the vehicle using the vehicle key or
centrally from inside to end the charging proc-
ess. If the indicator lamp % 1 then lights
up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for
around 30 seconds.
%The charging process can also be ended via
the multimedia system (/ page 499).
#Remove the charging cable connector from
the vehicle socket.
%If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the
unlocking procedure. If the charging cable
connector is still locked, contact a qualied
specialist workshop.
#Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
%Aer the charging cable connector has been
disconnected, the le % indicator lamp 1
on the vehicle socket remains lit for some
time before switching o.
Function of the charge level display in the driver
display
1Remaining range at current charge level
2Current charge level of the high-voltage bat-
tery
3Maximum charge level (as per the setting)
4Remaining time until fully charged (up to the
selected maximum charge level)
5Dynamic charge level display
6Current charging power
%The indicated remaining range 1 may vary
due to various factors, e.g.driving style or top-
ography.
Driving and parking 325
F206 0119 02
When the vehicle is switched o and connected to
the mains supply, the driver display shows the
charge level display for approximately
two minutes.
%The value of current charging power 6 can
dier from the display on the charging station.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The remaining range
forecast 1 and the maximum charge level indica-
tion 3 are not displayed.
Parking
Parking the vehicle
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insuciently secured vehi-
cle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked su-
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way
even at a slight downhill gradient.
#On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls
towards the kerb if it starts moving.
#apply the parking brake.
#Switch the transmission to position j.
&WARNING Risk of re caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
#Park the vehicle so that no ammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
#In particular, do not park on dry grass-
land or harvested grain elds.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it roll-
ing away
#Always secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
326 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage caused by vehicle being
lowered
Vehicles with rear axle level control The vehi-
cle can be lowered due to dierences in tem-
perature or extended non-operational times.
This can cause damage to parts of the body.
#When stopping the vehicle and when
driving o, make sure that there are no
obstacles such as kerbs under or in the
immediate vicinity of the body.
#Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing
the brake pedal.
#On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front
wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the
kerb if it starts moving.
#Apply the electric parking brake.
#Engage transmission position j in a station-
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
(/ page 292).
#Switch o the vehicle by pressing button 1.
#Release the service brake slowly.
#Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
%When you park the vehicle, you can still oper-
ate the side windows and the sliding sunroof
for approximately four minutes if the driver's
door is closed.
%When you park the vehicle, you can still oper-
ate the side windows and the panoramic slid-
ing sunroof for approximately four minutes if
the driver's door is closed.
Automatic vehicle shut-o upon locking
Your vehicle is equipped with automatic engine
shut-o.
When you leave the vehicle ready to drive, the
vehicle will be turned o when locked under the
following conditions:
RThe ignition is switched on or the engine is
running.
Driving and parking 327
F206 0119 02
RTransmission position j is engaged.
RThe driver's door is closed.
RIn addition, one of the following conditions
must be fullled:
-The vehicle is locked using the vehicle key.
-Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is
locked via KEYLESS-GO on the door han-
dle of a closed door.
-Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is
locked via the locking button on the boot
lid.
%The engine will continue to run if the vehicle is
not locked as described aer you have le it.
In this case, switch o the vehicle manually.
Automatic vehicle shut-o aer a period of time
(equipment-dependent)
When the engine is running, the following display
message will appear on the driver's display when
you leave the vehicle or aer a certain holding
time in transmission position j : Vehicle is
ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or
automatically in XX mins
The vehicle will then switch o automatically aer
a total holding time of 20 minutes.
%To avoid automatic shut-o aer a period of
time, acknowledge the corresponding mes-
sage on the central display of the multimedia
system.
The engine will continue to run in the following
cases:
RIf the vehicle is not locked as described aer
you have le it
RIf automatic shut-o is not indicated by the
display message
RIf automatic shut-o aer a period of time has
been deactivated via the corresponding mes-
sage on the central display
In this case, switch o the vehicle manually.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door
with an integrated garage door opener, per-
sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
328 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move-
ment.
Before programming the garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the
vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements
RThe vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of
the door.
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle has not been started.
%The garage door opener function is always
available when the vehicle is switched on. #Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow.
%It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi-
cator lamp ashes yellow.
#Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow.
#Point remote control 5 from a distance of
1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
#Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until one of the following signals appears:
RIndicator lamp 4 lights up green continu-
ously. Programming is complete.
RIndicator lamp 4 ashes green. Program-
ming was successful. Additionally, syn-
chronisation of the rolling code with the
door system must be carried out.
#If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash
green: repeat the procedure.
#Release all of the buttons.
%The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the garage
door opener.
Synchronising the rolling code
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
Driving and parking 329
F206 0119 02
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door
with an integrated garage door opener, per-
sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
#Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move-
ment.
Before programming the garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the
vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements
RThe door system uses a rolling code.
RThe vehicle must be within range of the garage
door or door drive.
RThe vehicle as well as persons and objects are
located outside the range of movement of the
door.
%The garage door opener function is always
available when the vehicle is switched on.
#Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
#Press previously programmed button 1, 2
or 3 repeatedly until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com-
pleted.
330 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
%Please also read the operating instructions for
the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote
control
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door
with an integrated garage door opener, per-
sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
#Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move-
ment.
Before programming the garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the
vehicle is switched on but not started.
%The garage door opener is always available
when the vehicle is switched on.
#Check if the transmitter frequency of the
remote control 5 is supported.
#Replace the batteries in the remote control
5.
#Hold remote control 5 at various angles from
a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
#Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at
various distances in front of the rearview mir-
ror. You should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
#Press the button 6 on the remote control 5
again before transmission ends on remote
controls that transmit only for a limited period.
#Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener
unit towards the remote control.
%It is possible that older garage doors cannot
be operated using the remote control in the
inside rearview mirror even aer you have
successfully performed the measures descri-
bed above. If this is the case, contact the
HomeLink® Hotline.
Driving and parking 331
F206 0119 02
%Support and additional programming informa-
tion:
Rwith the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 0800
046 635 465 or +49 (0) 7132 3455 733
(chargeable)
Ron the Internet at https://
www.homelink.com
Opening or closing the garage door
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door
with an integrated garage door opener, per-
sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
#Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move-
ment.
Before programming the garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the
vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements
RThe corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
%The garage door opener function is always
available when the vehicle is switched on.
#Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the
door opens or closes.
#If the indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow aer
approx. 20 seconds: Press the previously
pressed button again and keep it pressed until
the door opens or closes.
332 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Clearing the garage door opener memory
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door
with an integrated garage door opener, per-
sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
#Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move-
ment.
Before programming the garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the
vehicle is switched on but not started.
%The garage door opener function is always
available when the vehicle is switched on.
#Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
#If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3.
The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake
Function of the electric parking brake (applying
automatically)
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
Driving and parking 333
F206 0119 02
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans-
mission is in position j and one of the following
conditions is fullled:
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RThe seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's
door is opened.
%To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake (/ page 335).
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also applied:
RThe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary.
RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill.
RIn addition, one of the following conditions
must be fullled:
-The vehicle is switched o.
-The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and
the driver's door is opened.
-There is a system malfunction.
-The power supply is insucient.
-The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driver's
display.
%The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the vehicle is switched o by the
ECO start/stop function.
Function of the electric parking brake (releas-
ing automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fullled:
RThe driver's door is closed.
RThe vehicle has been started.
RThe transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi
from transmission position j to h or k
when on level ground.
RIf the transmission is in position k, the boot
lid must be closed.
RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the
following conditions must be fullled:
-You shi from transmission position j.
or
334 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
-You have previously driven at speeds
greater than 3 km/h.
When the electric parking brake is released, the
red ! indicator lamp in the driver's display
goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake
manually
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Applying
#Push handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the
driver's display.
%The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit
continuously.
Driving and parking 335
F206 0119 02
Releasing
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Pull handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp in the driver's
display goes out.
Emergency braking
#Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the
Release parking brake message is displayed
and the red ! indicator lamp ashes.
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is applied. The
red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driv-
er's display.
Information on collision detection on a parked
vehicle
If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle
when towing protection is switched on, and the
collision detection is switched on, when the vehi-
cle is switched on, you will receive a message in
the multimedia system.
You will receive information about the following
points:
RThe area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged.
RThe force of the impact.
The following situation can lead to inadvertent
activation:
RForexample, the parked vehicle is moved to a
two-storey garage.
336 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
%Deactivate tow-away protection to prevent
accidental activation. If you deactivate tow-
away protection, collision detection will also
be deactivated.
You can permanently deactivate collision
detection via the multimedia system
(/ page 337).
System limits
Detection may be restricted in the following situa-
tions:
Rthe vehicle is damaged without impact,
forexample, if an outside mirror is torn o or
the paint is damaged by a key
Ran impact occurs at low speed
Rthe electric parking brake is not applied
%You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince
yourself that your vehicle is free of damage
and roadworthy.
Setting collision detection for a parked vehicle
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close 5Vehicle protection
#Activate or deactivate the function via Colli-
sion notification.
%A maximum of three incidents can be regis-
tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every
incident. In the event of another incident, the
photos of the rst incident will be overwritten
if they have not been deleted already.
Activating or deactivating the collision photos
function
Please note that legal restrictions regarding auto-
matic recording of the vehicle surroundings may
be in place in certain countries.
#Activate or deactivate Collision photos.
Transferring the collision photos with the
Mercedes me app
#Select Upload collision photos.
or
#Select Upload automatically.
#Scan the generated QR code on the central
display with the Mercedes me app.
The encrypted collision photos will then be
uploaded to Mercedes me.
%Any device that can scan QR codes can be
used to view the collision photos in the
Mercedes me app.
Copying the collision photos to a USB ash drive
#Connect a USB ash drive (/ page 600).
#Select Manage collision photos.
#Select Copy (USB).
All collision photos are copied to the USB
ash drive.
%Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB stor-
age devices to ensure secure operation.
Deleting collision photos
#Select Manage collision photos.
#Select Delete.
All collision photos are deleted.
Driving and parking 337
F206 0119 02
Notes on parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than
six weeks, it may suer damage through disuse.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam-
aged by heavy discharging.
%Further information can be obtained at a
qualied specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's
period out of use)
Standby mode function
%This function is not available for all models.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be
minimised during extended periods of non-opera-
tion.
Standby mode is characterised by the following:
RThe starter battery is preserved.
RThe maximum non-operational time appears in
the driver's display.
RThe connection to online services is interrup-
ted.
If the following conditions are fullled, standby
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
multimedia system:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle has not been started.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational
time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be
guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably
start the vehicle.
Charge the starter battery in the following situa-
tions:
RThe vehicle's non-operational time has to be
extended.
RThe starter battery charge level is insucient
for standby mode.
%Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the vehicle is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking
up the vehicle)
Requirements:
RThe power supply is switched on.
RThe vehicle is not switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Other functions
#Activate or deactivate Standby mode.
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu-
vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only
aids. They are not a substitute for you paying
attention to your surroundings and do not relieve
you of your responsibility pertaining to road trac
law. The driver is always responsible for maintain-
ing a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for staying
in lane. Pay attention to the trac conditions at
all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware
of the limitations regarding the safe use of these
systems.
338 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of
accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
override the laws of physics. They cannot always
take into account road, weather or trac condi-
tions.
%Some driving systems can regulate or limit the
speed to a previously set value. Draw atten-
tion to the stored speed when changing driv-
ers.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
Some driving and driving safety systems use cam-
eras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to
monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the
vehicle. 1Multifunction camera
2Cameras in the outside mirrors
3Front radar
4Front camera
5Corner radars
6Ultrasonic sensors
7Reversing camera
&WARNING Risk of accident due to restric-
ted detection performance of vehicle sen-
sors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras
is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving
and safety systems cannot function correctly.
There is a risk of an accident.
#Keep the area around vehicle sensors or
cameras clear of any obstructions and
clean.
#Have damage to the bumper, radiator
grille or stone chipping in the area of the
front and rear windows repaired at a
qualied specialist workshop.
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors
and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush
(/ page 627). The sensors and cameras must
not be covered and the detection ranges around
them must be kept free. Do not attach additional
licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers,
foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in
the detection range of the sensors and cameras.
Driving and parking 339
F206 0119 02
Make sure there are no overhanging loads pro-
truding into the detection range.
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator
grille, or aer an impact, have the function of the
sensors checked at a qualied specialist work-
shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area
of the cameras on the front and rear windows
repaired at a qualied specialist workshop.
%The reversing camera can extend and retract
automatically for the purpose of calibration,
even though there is no camera image in the
display.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety
systems
RABS (/ page 341)
RBAS (/ page 341)
RESP® (/ page 341)
RESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(/ page 342)
RESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 344)
RESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 345)
REBD (/ page 347)
RSTEER CONTROL (/ page 347)
RHOLD function (/ page 347)
RHill Start Assist (/ page 348)
RAdaptive Brake Lights (/ page 349)
RATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 349)
RCruise control (/ page 350)
RLimiter (/ page 351)
RSpeed Limit Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 375)
RTrac Sign Assist (/ page 379)
RTrac light view (/ page 384)
RDYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 391)
RRear-axle level control (/ page 391)
RRACE START (/ page 392)
RDRIFT MODE (/ page 393)
Driving Assistance Package
%The availability of some functions or partial
functions of the Driving Assistance Package
depends on the equipment or country. The
functions of your Driving Assistance Package
may dier from the functions listed here.
The functions Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, Active Blind Spot Assist, Active
Brake Assist, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Active Emergency Stop Assist are, with
restricted functions, also available without
Driving Assistance Package.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 354)
RActive Speed Limit Assist (/ page 360)
RRoute-based speed adaptation (/ page 361)
RActive Brake Assist (/ page 370)
RActive Steering Assist (/ page 363)
RActive Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 366)
RActive Lane Change Assist (/ page 367)
RActive Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 363)
RBlind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
with exit warning (/ page 384)
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 388)
RPRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 113)
340 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Parking Package
%Depending on the country, the reversing cam-
era is also available without Parking Package.
%The availability of individual functions depends
on country and equipment.
RReversing camera (/ page 396)
R360° Camera (/ page 400)
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 406)
RActive Parking Assist (/ page 410)
RMemory Parking Assist (/ page 420)
RTrailer Manoeuvering Assist (/ page 424)
Function of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the
brake pressure in critical driving situations:
RDuring braking, for instance, at maximum full-
stop braking or if there is insucient tyre trac-
tion, the wheels are prevented from locking.
RVehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road con-
ditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
System limits
RABS is active from speeds of approximately
5 km/h.
RABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yellow !
ABS warning lamp lights up continuously aer
the vehicle is started.
Function of BAS
&WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a
malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
#Depress the brake pedal with full force in
emergency braking situations. ABS pre-
vents the wheels from locking.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your
emergency braking situation with additional brake
force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
RBAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
RBAS can shorten the braking distance.
RABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release
the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Function of ESP®
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
vehicle stabilisation.
#ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
Driving and parking 341
F206 0119 02
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can moni-
tor and improve driving stability and traction in
the following situations within physical limits:
RWhen pulling away on wet or slippery carriage-
ways.
RWhen braking.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired
by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by
intervening in the following ways:
ROne or more wheels are braked.
RThe engine output is adapted according to the
situation.
When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning
lamp lights up continuously:
RDriving stability will no longer be improved.
RThe drive wheels could spin.
RETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
%When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis-
ted by ESP® when braking.
When the ÷ warning lamp ashes, one or sev-
eral wheels has reached its grip limit:
RAdapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions.
RDo not deactivate ESP®.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as is
necessary when pulling away.
Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to
improve traction:
RWhen using snow chains.
RIn deep snow.
ROn sand or gravel.
%Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously,
ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information:
Rwarning and indicator lamps (/ page 916)
RDisplay messages (/ page 821)
ETS/4ETS
ETS/4ETS traction control (Electronic Traction
System) is part of ESP® and makes it possible to
pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriage-
way.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
intervening in the following ways:
RThe drive wheels are braked individually if they
spin.
RMore drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Inuence of drive programs on ESP®
The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif-
ferent weather and road conditions as well as the
driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the
selected drive program, the appropriate
ESP(/ page 285, 286)® mode will be activated.
Function of ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between the following modes of
the Electronic Stability Program (ESP®):
RESP® ON
342 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
RESP® SPORT
RESP® OFF
Characteristics when ESP® is activated
ESP® monitors and improves driving stability and
traction, particularly in the following situations:
RWhen moving o on wet or slippery roads.
RWhen braking.
RVehicles with trailer coupling: in trailer opera-
tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/
trailer combination begins to sway from side
to side.
RWhen there is a strong crosswind and a driving
speed of approximately 80 km/h to
200 km/h.
ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in
the following ways:
ROne or more wheels are braked.
RThe engine output is adapted according to the
situation.
RThe drive system output is adapted according
to the situation.
ESP® is activated every time the engine is started,
regardless of whether ESP® SPORT or ESP® OFF
was selected.
When the ÷ warning lamp ashes, one or sev-
eral wheels has reached its grip limit:
RAdapt the driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
RDo not deactivate ESP® under any circumstan-
ces.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
Characteristics of ESP® SPORT
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT
is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an
increased risk of skidding and having an acci-
dent.
#Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circum-
stances described below.
If ESP® SPORT is selected, the warning lamps
å and Æ light up continuously.
Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's inherent
oversteering and understeering characteristics
are desired, e.g. on cordoned-o roads.
Driving with ESP® SPORT or with ESP® deactiva-
ted requires an extremely skilled and experienced
driver.
If ESP® SPORT is activated and one or more
wheels start to spin, the ÷warning lamp
ashes. ESP® then only stabilises the vehicle to a
limited degree.
ESP® SPORT also has the following characteris-
tics:
RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi-
ted degree.
RETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
RThe engine's torque is only restricted to a limi-
ted degree and the drive wheels can spin.
The power of the drive system is only slightly
limited according to the situation, and the
drive wheels can spin.
Driving and parking 343
F206 0119 02
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
RESP® continues to provide assistance when
the brakes are rmly applied.
RVehicles with trailer coupling: stabilisation of
the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer
active.
RCrosswind Assist is no longer active.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
vehicle stabilisation.
#ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
If ESP® is switched o, the å and ¤ warn-
ing lamps light up continuously.
Deactivating ESP® has the following eects:
RDriving stability will no longer be improved.
RThe drive wheels could spin.
RETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
RVehicles with trailer coupling: stabilisation of
the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer
active.
RCrosswind Assist is no longer active.
%Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still
assisted by ESP® when braking hard.
It may be best to activate ESP® SPORT or deacti-
vate ESP® in the following situations:
RWhen using snow chains.
RIn deep snow.
ROn sand or gravel.
%Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
%Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
If the warning lamp ÷ lights up continuously,
ESP® is not available owing to a malfunction.
Observe the display messages and warning and
indicator lamps which are displayed
RIndicator and warning lamps (/ page 916)
RDisplay messages (/ page 821)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
intervening in the following ways:
RThe drive wheels are braked individually if they
spin.
RMore drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle
in the lane:
RESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 80 km/h and
200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cor-
nering slightly.
344 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
RThe vehicle is stabilised by means of individual
brake application on one side.
Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation
&WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the
trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of
the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a
high centre of gravity may tip over before
ESP® detects this.
#Always adapt your driving style to suit
the current road and weather conditions.
When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise
your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from
side to side:
RESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
speeds of 65 km/h.
RSlight swerving is reduced by means of a tar-
geted, individual brake application on one
side.
RIn the event of severe swerving, the operating
energy output is also reduced and all wheels
are braked.
ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may
not function if:
RThe trailer is not connected correctly or is not
detected properly by the vehicle.
Activating / deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stabil-
ity Program)
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß 5y
#Select ESP.
#Select On or Off.
If the ESP® OFF å warning lamp lights up con-
tinuously, ESP® is deactivated.
Note the information on warning lamps and dis-
play messages that may appear in the driver dis-
play.
Setting ESP® with the steering-wheel button
%You can also adjust ESP® (/ page 346) via
the multimedia system.
#Set® ESP: press the upper or lower display
button 1 repeatedly, until it displays the
å symbol.
%If the display button does not show the sym-
bol, then it is hidden. How functions are dis-
played and the order in which they are dis-
played can be set in the multimedia system
(/ page 282).
Driving and parking 345
F206 0119 02
The lane colour of the å button symbol indi-
cates the current setting:
Rå (blue): ESP® ON
Rå (yellow): ESP® SPORT
Rå (red): ESP® OFF
#To adjust ESP® SPORT: briey press button
2 when ESP® is activated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up
yellow.
The å and Æ warning lamps appear in
the driver's display.
#To deactivate ESP® : Set ESP® SPORT, then
press the 2 button for a long time.
The road in the å button symbol lights up
red.
The å and ¤ warning lamps appear in
the driver's display.
%In the drive program I if you deactivate®
ESP ¤, AMG Dynamics automatically
shis to the Master level.
#To activate ESP® : briey press button 2
when ESP® SPORT is selected or ESP® is
deactivated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up
blue.
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps
go out.
When the ÷ symbol is shown with a red ! on
the display button, ESP® is malfunctioning.
Observe the information on warning lamps and
display messages which are shown in the driver's
display.
Setting ESP® in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5DYNAMIC SELECT
%Depending on equipment level, the AMG
DYNAMIC SELECT menu can also be
accessed via the AMG button in the centre
console.
ESP is always active when the vehicle is started.
The road in the å button symbol lights up in
blue.
#To set ESP SPORT: with ESP activated, briey
press å to change to the Sport program.
The road in the å button symbol lights up
in yellow.
#To deactivate ESP : set the ESP SPORT pro-
gram and press and hold å to deactivate
ESP.
The road in the å button symbol lights up
in red. The å and ¤ warning lamps
appear in the driver display.
#To activate ESP: briey press å in
ESP SPORT or if ESP is deactivated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up
in blue.
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps
go out.
%You can also adjust ESP via the steering-
wheel button (/ page 345).
346 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Function of EBD
Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is charac-
terised by the following:
RMonitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels.
RImproved driving stability when braking, espe-
cially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in
the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.
This steering recommendation is given in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rboth right wheels or both le wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle starts to skid
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you brake and both
right wheels or both le wheels are on a wet or
slippery road surface, you will receive a steering
recommendation. If the vehicle is skidding, you
will not receive a steering recommendation.
System limits
STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
RESP® is deactivated.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
RThe steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted fur-
ther by the power steering.
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand-
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. while waiting in trac.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil-
ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with
the driver.
System limits
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a sucient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
RThe incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being active when you
leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD
function it could, in the following situations,
roll away:
RIf there is a malfunction in the system or in
the power supply.
RIf the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
#Always secure the vehicle against rolling
away before you leave it.
Driving and parking 347
F206 0119 02
Requirements
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
RThe vehicle has been started or has been
automatically switched o by the ECO start/
stop function.
RThe electric parking brake is released.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
ted.
RThe transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function
#Depress the brake pedal, and aer a short
time quickly depress further until the ë
display appears in the driver's display.
#Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
#Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
#Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
disappears from the driver's display.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the following
situations:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
RThe transmission is shied to position j.
RThe vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
transmission position j and/or by the electric
parking brake:
RThe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened.
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RThere is a system malfunction.
RThe power supply is insucient.
In addition, the Brake immediately message may
appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may
sound at regular intervals.
#Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly
until the warning message disappears.
The HOLD function is deactivated.
#Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Function of Hill Start Assist
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to the vehicle rolling away
Aer a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle.
#Swily move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not
leave the vehicle when it is being held by
Hill Start Assist.
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time
when pulling away on a hill under the following
conditions:
RThe transmission is in position h or k.
RThe electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
348 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following trac in an
emergency braking situation with the following
actions:
Rashing the brake lamps
Ractivating the hazard warning lights
(/ page 57)
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above
50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This pro-
vides trac travelling behind you with an even
more noticeable warning.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto-
nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk
roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses
in concentration on the driver's part are detected,
the system suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in
time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res-
ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take
regular breaks in good time that allow for ade-
quate recovery.
You can choose between two settings:
RStandard: normal system sensitivity.
RSensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver
was warned earlier, and the attention level
detected by ATTENTION ASSIST has adapted
accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra-
tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
a break! warning appears on the driver's display.
You can acknowledge the message and take a
break where necessary. If you do not take a break
and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect
increasing lapses in concentration, you will be
warned again aer a minimum of 15 minutes.
The following information is displayed in the driv-
er's display:
RThe length of the journey since the last break
Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST
The more segments 1 of the circle displayed,
the higher the detected attention level. Fewer seg-
ments 1 are displayed in the circle as the atten-
tion level decreases.
If the ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot issue a warning,
the System suspended message appears.
Driving and parking 349
F206 0119 02
If the driver display shows a warning, a service
area search is oered in the MBUX multimedia
system. You can select a rest area and start navi-
gation to this rest area.
When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST
is automatically switched on. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to
200 km/h speed range.
If the system is unavailable due to a fault, the
ATTENTION ASSIST Û warning light continu-
ously illuminates the driver display.
Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION
ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and
warnings may be delayed or not occur:
RIf you have been driving for less than approx-
imately 30 minutes.
RIf the road condition is poor (uneven road sur-
face or potholes).
RIf there is a strong side wind.
RIf you adopt a sporty driving style (high corner-
ing speeds or high acceleration rates).
RIf the Steering Assist function of Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
RIf the clock is set to the incorrect time.
RIf you change lanes and vary your speed fre-
quently in active driving situations.
Rif ESP® is not available
Also, observe any information regarding display
messages that can be displayed in the driver's
display.
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness
assessment is reset and restarted when continu-
ing the journey in the following situations:
RYou switch o the vehicle.
RIf you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a
break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting the sensitivity
#Select Z next to ATTENTION ASSIST.
#Select Standard or Sensitive.
Cruise control and limiter
Function of cruise control
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
selected by the driver.
Forexample, the stored speed is not deleted if you
accelerate to overtake. If you remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal aer overtaking, cruise
control will resume speed regulation back to the
stored speed.
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
maximum design speed or up to the set winter
tyre limit.
350 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 338).
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is availa-
ble up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays in the driver's display
hGrey: cruise control is selected but not yet
active or temporarily passive.
hGreen: cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears under the h display
and is indicated in the speedometer.
System limits
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of
this when driving a laden vehicle. Doing so will
make use of the engine's braking eect. This
relieves the load on the brake system and pre-
vents the brakes from overheating and wearing
too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa-
tions:
RIn trac situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy trac, on
winding roads
R, and slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction, and the vehi-
cle could skid.
Rwhen visibility is poor
Function of the limiter
The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To
reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter
applies the brakes automatically.
You can limit the speed as follows:
RVariable: for short-term limitation of the driv-
ing speed, e.g. in built-up areas
RPermanent: for a longer-term speed restric-
tion, e.g. in winter tyre mode
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
maximum design speed or up to the set winter
tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the
vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been star-
ted.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 338).
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: The limiter is only availa-
ble up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays in the driver's display
MGrey: variable limiter is selected but not yet
activated.
MFlashing grey: variable limiter is temporarily
passive.
MGreen: variable limiter is activated.
A stored speed appears under the M display
and is indicated in the speedometer.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter
switches to passive mode. The message M
passive appears in the driver's display, and the
indicator M ashes.
Driving and parking 351
F206 0119 02
The variable limiter is reactivated in the following
situations:
RIf the vehicle speed drops below the stored
speed.
RIf the stored speed is called up.
RIf you store a new speed.
Operating cruise control or the variable limiter
&WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
decelerates.
#Take into account the trac situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements
Cruise control
RCruise control is selected.
RESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
RThe vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
RThe transmission is in position h.
Variable limiter
RThe variable limiter is selected.
Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and
variable limiter
JAdopts the stored/detected speed
±Deactivates cruise control/the vari-
able limiter
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease
speed
hSelects cruise control
MSelects the variable limiter
Operating cruise control and the variable limiter:
#Press the corresponding button with only one
nger or swipe on the control panel.
Switching between cruise control and the varia-
ble limiter
#To select cruise control: pressh.
#To select the variable limiter: pressM.
%Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by
a dierent button (/ page 357).
Activating cruise control or the variable limiter
#Press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.
The current travel speed is stored and main-
tained by the vehicle's cruise control, or is
restricted by the variable limiter.
or
352 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Press J.
The last stored speed is called up and main-
tained by the vehicle's cruise control, or is
restricted by the variable limiter.
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
%When you switch o the vehicle, the last
speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
#To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
from the bottom of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
#To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
wards from the top of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
or
#Briey press ® or ¯ on the control
panel 1.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to
the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or
60 km/h).
or
#Press and hold ® or ¯ on the control
panel 1.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to
the next increment of ten and aerwards by
increments of 10 km/h.
or
#Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#Press ® on the control panel 1.
%When the variable limiter is switched to pas-
sive mode, you cannot increase or decrease
its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h.
Adopting a detected speed
If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and
Trac Sign Assist has detected a speed restric-
tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and
this is displayed in the driver's display:
#Press J.
The maximum permissible speed shown by the
trac sign is stored and the vehicle maintains
or does not exceed this speed.
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter
#Press ±.
%If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
venes, cruise control is deactivated. The varia-
ble limiter is not deactivated.
%When you switch o the vehicle, the last
speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Information on the permanent limiter
If the vehicle should never exceed a specic
speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you
can set this speed with the permanent limiter.
You do this by limiting the speed between
160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 50).
Driving and parking 353
F206 0119 02
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it
appears on the driver's display. When you conrm
the message, display messages no longer appear
until you switch o the vehicle. The speed will
only be displayed again once the vehicle has been
restarted or if the set speed is changed.
The permanent limiter does not switch to passive
mode even during kickdown and the driven speed
remains below the set speed.
Setting the speed limit for winter tyres
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
5Winter tyre limit
#Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
Setting a speed
#Select Winter tyre limit.
#Select a speed.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
%The Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC descri-
bed for vehicles without the Driving Assis-
tance Package is an on-demand feature
(country-dependent) (/ page 87).
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
set speed on free-owing roads. If vehicles are
detected ahead the set distance is maintained, if
necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on
the distance to the vehicle in front and the set
speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in
front are set and saved using the steering wheel.
Available speed range:
RVehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
20 km/h - 160 km/h
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
20 km/h - 210 km/h
%The adjustable set speed may dier if a limit
speed (e.g. winter tyre limit) is stored
(/ page 353).
Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
RAdjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (energy-saving, com-
fortable or dynamic) (/ page 282)
RInitiates acceleration to the stored speed if the
turn signal indicator is switched on to change
to the overtaking lane
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
-Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
motorcycles)
-Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions
into account on motorways or multi-lane
roads with separate carriageways (coun-
try-dependent)
354 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
%In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, it is possible
to set the driving mode of Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on the selected
drive program, the driving behaviour is
energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic. In the
Active Distance Assist menu, the driving style
can be permanently set to comfortable or
dynamic (/ page 362).
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving
Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill,
it can automatically follow the vehicle in front
when driving o again within 30 seconds if the
system detects that the driver is touching the
steering wheel. If a critical situation is detected in
the surrounding area when driving o,such as a
person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic
warning indicates that the driver must now take
control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not acceler-
ated any further.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Display in the driver display in the menuAssistance
1Vehicle in front
2Distance indicator
3Set specied distance
The vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in
green. It may also be in the lane to the right of
your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted
to overtake on the le, for example, on UK motor-
ways.
Permanent status display
çGrey: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
selected but not yet active
çGreen speedometer, grey vehicle: Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed
set
çGreen: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
active and vehicle detected
The stored speed is shown under the permanent
status display and highlighted on the speedome-
ter. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC's status
display is greyed out when in passive mode.
If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed
adjustment is less than the stored speed due to
the route event ahead, the segments in the
speedometer light up.
The display h appears briey if you increase
or decrease the specied distance 3.
%The green vehicle symbol ç is displayed
cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull
away.
%The system is switched to passive mode if you
depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting.
The following message appears briey in the
driver display ç suspended.
Driving and parking 355
F206 0119 02
System limits
The system may be impaired or inoperative in the
following instances, forexample:
RIn snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
conditions.
RThe windscreen in the camera's area is dirty,
misted up, damaged or covered.
RIf the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
RIn multi-storey car parks or on roads with
steep uphill or downhill gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on smooth or slippery roads, one or
more wheels may lose grip due to braking or
acceleration, and the vehicle may begin skidding.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
&WARNING Risk of accident from accelera-
tion or braking by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel-
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
RIf the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
RIf the stored speed is called up and is con-
siderably faster or slower than the cur-
rently driven speed.
RIf Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
#Always carefully observe the trac con-
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#Take into account the trac situation
before calling up the stored speed.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insu-
cient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your
vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler-
ation. If this deceleration is not sucient,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you
with a visual and acoustic warning.
#Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
ble distance from the vehicle in front.
#Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
Rwhen driving on a dierent lane or when
changing lanes
356 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Rto pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
Rto complex trac conditions
Rto oncoming vehicles and crossing trac
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
may neither give warnings nor intervene in
such situations.
#Always observe the trac conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and the variable limiter
&WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
Rwhen driving on a dierent lane or when
changing lanes
Rto pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
Rto complex trac conditions
Rto oncoming vehicles and crossing trac
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
may neither give warnings nor intervene in
such situations.
#Always observe the trac conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident from accelera-
tion or braking by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel-
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
RIf the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
RIf the stored speed is called up and is con-
siderably faster or slower than the cur-
rently driven speed.
RIf Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
#Always carefully observe the trac con-
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#Take into account the trac situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Driving and parking 357
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insu-
cient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your
vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler-
ation. If this deceleration is not sucient,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you
with a visual and acoustic warning.
#Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
ble distance from the vehicle in front.
#Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ment of speed by the Active Speed Limit
Assistant
The speed adopted by the Active Speed Limit
Assistant may be too high or incorrect in indi-
vidual cases:
RFor speed limits below 20 km/h
RIn wet or foggy conditions
#Ensure that the speed driven always
complies with the trac regulations.
#Adjust the speed driven to the current
trac and weather conditions.
Requirements
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
RThe electric parking brake is released.
RESP® is activated and is not intervening.
RThe transmission is in position h.
RAll the doors are closed.
RCheck of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed.
Variable limiter:
RThe variable limiter is selected.
JAdopts the stored/detected speed
±Deactivates Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC/the variable limiter
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease
speed
358 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
KIncreases/decreases the specied
distance
ISwitches between the variable lim-
iter and Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
#To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the variable limiter: press the respective
button with only one nger or swipe on the
control panel.
Switches between the variable limiter and Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC
#Press I.
Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
#To activate without a stored speed: press
®, ¯ or J. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accel-
erator pedal.
The current driving speed is stored and main-
tained by the vehicle using Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or limited by the variable
limiter.
or
#To activate with a stored speed: press J.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The last stored speed is recalled and held by
the vehicle using Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC or limited by the variable limiter.
If the stored speed has been deleted, the cur-
rent vehicle speed is stored.
%When you switch o the vehicle, the stored
speed is deleted. When you activate Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Increasing or reducing the speed
#To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
from the bottom of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
#To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
wards from the top of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
or
#Briey press ® on the upper section or
¯ on the lower section of control panel
1.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
10 km/h.
or
#Press and hold ® on the upper section or
¯ on the lower section of control panel
1.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 10 km/h.
or
#Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#Press ® on the upper section of control
panel 1.
Adopting the speed limit shown on the driver's
display
#Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
the variable limiter: press ®, ¯ or
J.
Driving and parking 359
F206 0119 02
#Accept the displayed speed limit: press J.
The speed limit displayed on the driver's dis-
play is adopted as the stored speed. The vehi-
cle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in
front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits
its speed accordingly.
%A speed limit shown on the driver display is
only adopted while driving, not when station-
ary.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
#Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and remove your foot from the brake pedal.
#Press J.
or
#Depress the accelerator pedal briey and
rmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC remain active.
Reducing or increasing the specied distance
from the vehicle in front
#Press K.
The h display appears. The specied dis-
tance is reduced by one level.
If the lowest level is already selected, the
selection jumps to the highest level.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
the variable limiter
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
#Always deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
prevent it from rolling away before you
leave the driver's seat.
#Press ±.
%If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
deactivated. The variable limiter is not deacti-
vated.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
If a changed speed limit is detected and the auto-
matic adoption of speed limits is switched on, this
is automatically adopted as the stored speed
(/ page 362). Speed limits below 20 km/h are
not accepted.
Adjustment of travel speed is initiated no later
than when the vehicle is level with the trac sign.
For signs indicating entry into an urban zone, the
speed is adapted according to that permitted
within the built-up area. The speed restriction indi-
cator on the driver display is always refreshed
when the vehicle is level with the trac sign.
If you are driving on German motorways with no
speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for
a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set
speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a
stretch of road with no speed limit, the recom-
mended speed of 130 km/h is adopted.
360 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put
into passive mode by pressing the accelerator
pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the
set speed are adopted.
The maximum permissible speed does not con-
sider the road condition and current weather and
trac conditions. Adjust your speed accordingly
when necessary.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
System limits
The system limits of Trac Sign Assist apply to
the detection of trac signs (/ page 379).
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically
adopted by the system as the stored speed. Tem-
porary speed restrictions (e.g.for a specic time
or due to weather conditions) cannot be unequiv-
ocally detected by the system.
Adjust the speed in these situations.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ment of speed by the Active Speed Limit
Assistant
The speed adopted by the Active Speed Limit
Assistant may be too high or incorrect in indi-
vidual cases:
RFor speed limits below 20 km/h
RIn wet or foggy conditions
#Ensure that the speed driven always
complies with the trac regulations.
#Adjust the speed driven to the current
trac and weather conditions.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Function of route-based speed adaptation
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted, the vehicle speed will be adapted to the route
events ahead. Depending on the drive program
selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event
ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or
dynamic manner. When the route event has been
passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the
stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in
front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric-
tions ahead are taken into account.
Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in
the multimedia system (/ page 362).
The following route events are taken into account:
RBends
RRoundabouts
RT-junctions
RTurns and exits
RTrac jams ahead (only with Live Trac
(/ page 532))
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi-
cator is switched on and one of the following sit-
uations is detected:
RTurning o at junctions
RDriving on slowing-down lanes
RDriving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right
speed and observing other road users. This
Driving and parking 361
F206 0119 02
applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and
trac lights, as route-based speed adaptation
does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.
When route guidance is active, the rst speed
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn
signal indicator is switched on, the selected route
is conrmed and further speed adaptation is acti-
vated.
Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following
cases:
RIf the turn signal indicator is switched o
before the route event and it is presumed that
the route event is not deemed relevant by the
driver
RIf the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits
Route-based speed adaptation does not take right
of way regulations into account. The driver is
responsible for complying with road trac regula-
tions and driving at a suitable speed.
In dicult conditions, the speed selection made
by the system may not always be suitable. This
applies to the following situations, for example:
RThe road's course is not clearly visible
RRoad narrowing
RVarying maximum permissible speeds in indi-
vidual lanes, for example, at toll stations
RWet road surfaces, snow or ice
RIf transport equipment, for example a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established
In these situations the driver must intervene
accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc-
tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol-
lowing situations:
RIf the driver does not follow the calculated
route
RIf map data is not up-to-date or available
RIn the event of roadworks
RIn bad weather or road conditions
RIf the accelerator pedal is depressed
RIn the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
#Adapt the speed to the trac situation.
Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driv-
ing styles
Requirements
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
362 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving 5Active Distance Assist
Selecting a driving style
#Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic
or Comfortable.
%Further information about Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 357).
Setting speed adjustment
#Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based
speed adjustment.
When these functions are active, the vehicle
speed is adjusted depending on the route
events ahead or the speed limit.
%If one of the following systems is activated,
the detected speed can be manually adopted
as the speed limit:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RCruise control
RVariable limiter
%Further information on speed adjustment
(/ page 361).
Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist
Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you in trac
jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriage-
ways by automatically pulling away within up to
60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeu-
vres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and
lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist auto-
matically maintains a safe distance from the vehi-
cle in front and vehicles cutting in.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the
driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel
at all times so that you can intervene at any time
to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in
the lane.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 338).
If all of the following conditions are met, Active
Stop-and-Go Assist activates automatically:
RYou are in a trac jam on a motorway or
major high-speed road.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated
and active (/ page 357).
RActive Steering Assist is activated and active
(/ page 365).
RYou are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.
When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active, the
¬ status display appears in the driver's dis-
play.
System limits
The system limitations of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to
Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 363).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist
Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay
in the centre of the lane by means of moderate
steering interventions. Depending on the speed
driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles
ahead and lane markings as a reference.
Driving and parking 363
F206 0119 02
%Depending on the country, in the lower speed
range Active Steering Assist can use the sur-
rounding trac as a reference. If necessary,
Active Steering Assist can then also provide
assistance outside the centre of the lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches
to passive mode. The system provides no support
in this case.
Permanent status display in the driver's display
ØGrey: activated and passive
ØGreen: activated and active
ØRed, ashing: prompt to the driver to
actively conrm or transition from active to
passive mode, system limit detected
%During the transition from active to passive
mode, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged
and ashing. Once the system is passive, the
Ø symbol is shown as grey in the driver's
display.
Touch detection
The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter-
vene at any time to correct the course of the vehi-
cle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a
change from active to passive mode or vice versa
at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
time or has removed their hands from the steering
wheel, a visual warning is given rst. Display 1
appears in the driver's display. If the driver still
does not steer the vehicle, or gives no conrma-
tion to the system, a warning tone sounds in addi-
tion to the visual warning message.
If the driver does not react to this warning for a
considerable period, an emergency stop is initi-
ated (/ page 366).
The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as
the system detects that the driver has touched
the steering wheel.
The touch detection may be limited or without
function if there is no direct contact between the
hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing
gloves or if there is a steering wheel cover on the
steering wheel.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued
and a warning tone sounds.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 338).
System limits
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor-
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer-
ing intervention is not sucient to keep the vehi-
cle in the lane.
364 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following instances:
RThere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi-
tions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
RThere is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RInsucient road illumination.
RThe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
by a sticker.
RNo, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
ent for one lane, or the markings change
quickly, for example, in a construction area or
at junctions.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
RIf the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
RThe road is narrow and winding.
RThere are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
RIf transport equipment, for example a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
The system does not provide assistance in the fol-
lowing conditions:
ROn very tight bends and when turning.
RWhen crossing junctions.
RAt roundabouts or toll stations.
RWhen actively changing lane without switching
on the turn signal indicator.
RWhen the tyre pressure is too low.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer-
ing Assist unexpectedly stops functioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist
are reached there is no guarantee that the
system will remain active or will keep the vehi-
cle in lane.
#Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the trac carefully.
#Always steer the vehicle paying attention
to trac conditions.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer-
ing Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects
may malfunction and cause unexpected steer-
ing interventions.
#Steer according to trac conditions.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist
Requirements
RESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving
#Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.
Driving and parking 365
F206 0119 02
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
Active Emergency Stop Assist monitors the steer-
ing wheel, as well as the accelerator and brake
pedals. If the system detects a lack of driver activ-
ity or the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane, a
warning can be issued and an emergency stop ini-
tiated.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: The
system is available from a speed of approx.
60 km/h.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If
Active Steering Assist is switched o, the system
is available from a speed of approx. 60 km/h.
If the system detects that the vehicle is in danger
of leaving the lane, a warning can be issued and
an emergency stop initiated.
RThe driver has not touched the steering wheel
for a certain while, or no steering movement is
detected for a lengthy period (depending on
the vehicle equipment).
RNeither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is
depressed.
%Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: if
Active Steering Assist is switched on and
active, the system only monitors the steering
wheel. If the driver has not touched the steer-
ing wheel for a certain while, a warning may
be issued despite pedal actuation.
Observe also the instructions on the touch
detection of Active Steering Assist
(/ page 363).
Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the following
warnings in order:
RDisplay message 1 appears in the driver dis-
play.
RIn addition to display 1, a warning tone
sounds.
RThe Beginning emergency stop message
appears in the driver display, a continuous
warning tone sounds and the vehicle will no
longer accelerate. Additionally, a slight ten-
sioning of the belt will be generated as
required.
RThe vehicle speed is reduced in increments
until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Sharp
brake impulses are also eected.
%Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: If
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active
and the driver unfastens the seat belt and
opens the driver's door, an emergency stop
can be initiated immediately.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If possi-
ble, a lane change to the adjacent lane is per-
formed (country-dependent). It is possible to
change lanes across one lane and only to the out-
side lane, not to the hard shoulder.
When automatic braking is initiated, Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depend-
366 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
ing on the respective country, the hazard warning
light system is switched on.
When the vehicle has come to a standstill:
Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking
brake.
Rthe vehicle is unlocked.
Rif possible, an emergency call is made to the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
Before automatic braking is initiated, you can can-
cel Active Emergency Stop Assist by turning the
steering wheel.
You can cancel an intervention by Active Emer-
gency Stop Assist aer automatic braking is initi-
ated by performing one of the following actions:
RAccelerating or braking: the emergency stop is
cancelled, but the warning message, warning
tone and electric power steering remain active
RSteering: electric power steering is cancelled,
the warning message and warning tone remain
active, and the vehicle continues to be braked
%Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an
emergency stop a maximum of three times
within a driving cycle. Aer that, Active Steer-
ing Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist
are disabled until the vehicle has been restar-
ted.
System limits
For the detection of vehicles and other obstacles,
observe the system limits of the following func-
tions:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 354)
RActive Steering Assist (/ page 363)
RActive Lane Change Assist (/ page 367)
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 388)
RActive Brake Assist (/ page 370)
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
Active Emergency Stop Assist is inactive in the fol-
lowing cases:
RActive Lane Keeping Assist has reached a sys-
tem limit.
Rï Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched
o (white status display).
Rð Active Lane Keeping Assist is not ready
(grey status display).
Active Lane Change Assist
Function of Active Lane Change Assist
Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver in
changing lanes with the application of steering
torque, and is activated by indicating briey.
The following conditions must be met for this
function:
RYou are driving on a motorway or motorway-
like road.
RThe vehicle speed is between approximately
80 km/h and 180 km/h.
RA dashed boundary marking separates the
adjacent lane.
RNo vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja-
cent lane.
RThe sensors have detected a vehicle with su-
cient distance behind your own vehicle once
since the last vehicle start.
Driving and parking 367
F206 0119 02
RActive Lane Change Assist is selected in the
multimedia system.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active
Steering Assist are activated on the motorway.
The system is not available and must be reactiva-
ted:
RThe Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
Active Steering Assist were already activated
before the vehicle entered the motorway.
RThe system briey no longer recognises the
road being travelled on as a motorway or
motorway-like road, e.g. at a motorway junc-
tion.
As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a
suitable road, you can reactivate it with the but-
tons J, ® or ¯.
Display in the driver display in the menuAssistance
1Green arrow: lane change initiated
2Red arrow: lane change aborted
If Active Lane Change Assist is available, the indi-
cator ± with green arrows appears in the
driver display. If the system has been activated
but is not currently available, the indicator ±
with grey arrows appears in the driver display.
If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja-
cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane
change begins aer the driver indicates briey.
The lane change is indicated to the driver by a
green ashing arrow next to the steering wheel
symbol ± . In the driver display menu Assis-
tance a green arrow 1 to the respective adja-
cent lane is shown. The message Lane change to
the left, forexample, also appears.
Active Lane Change Assist can be cancelled in the
following situations, for example:
RThe environmental conditions change (e.g.
obstacle detected).
RThe driver takes his hands o the steering
wheel.
RThe driver steers too hard or in the opposite
direction.
RThe driver switches on the turn signal indica-
tor in the opposite direction.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active
Steering Assist are deactivated.
RThe lane change cannot be executed by the
vehicle as planned.
368 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
A cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis-
played as follows:
RThe arrow in the selected direction of travel
turns red.
RA corresponding message will also appear in
the driver display.
RIn certain circumstances a warning tone
sounds.
&WARNING Risk of accident when changing
lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly
detect if the adjacent lane is free.
The lane change might be initiated although
the adjacent lane is not free.
#Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighbouring lane is free and there is
no danger to other road users.
#Monitor the lane change.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change
Assist unexpectedly stops functioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change
Assist have been reached, there is no guaran-
tee that the system will remain active.
Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by
applying steering torque.
#Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on the steering wheel.
Observe the trac conditions and steer
and/or brake if necessary.
System limits
For Active Lane Change Assist, the system limits
of Active Steering Assist (/ page 363) apply.
In addition, the system may be impaired or inoper-
ative in the following situations:
RThe sensors are damaged, covered or dirty
(/ page 339).
RThe exterior lighting indicates a defect.
RThe system does not recognise a suitable
road, e.g. in narrow bends or shortly aer a
slip road.
RThe vehicle is within a construction site.
%The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust
automatically while a certain distance is being
driven aer the vehicle has been delivered.
Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable dur-
ing this teach-in process, and no arrows are
displayed next to the Active Steering Assist
symbol Ø.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Setting Active Lane Change Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving 5Active Lane Change Assist
#Select Active Lane Change Assist.
#Choose between the settings On or Off.
%If Active Steering Assist has been switched
o, Active Lane Change Assist cannot be
used.
Driving and parking 369
F206 0119 02
Active Brake Assist
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of the following func-
tions:
RDistance warning function
RCollision warning
RAutonomous braking function
RSituation-related brake force boosting
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package and
Active Steering Assist: Evasive Steering Assist
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Eva-
sive Steering Assist
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
intersection start-o function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the
risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes-
trians or to reduce the eects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis-
tance warning lamp lights up.
Display in the driver display in the menuAssistance
1Distance insucient
2Red radar waves
Assistance 1 In the menu, an insucient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If
you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in
front is also highlighted in red. When the system
detects a risk of collision, red radar waves 2
appear in front of your vehicle.
%Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the
country, an additional haptic warning is given
in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of
the driver's seat belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In particularly critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can also initiate autonomous braking
directly. In this case, the distance warning lamp
L and warning tone occur simultaneously with
the braking action.
If you apply the brakes yourself in a critical situa-
tion or apply the brakes during autonomous brak-
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi-
mum emergency braking if necessary.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
braking assistance has occurred, pop-up 1
370 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
appears in the driver display and then automati-
cally disappears aer a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situa-
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
additional preventive measures for occupant pro-
tection by PRE-SAFE® may also be initiated.
&WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex trac situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
RGive a warning or brake without reason
RNot give a warning or not brake
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a suciently safe
distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed
and for braking in good time.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces-
sary.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the func-
tions are restricted, e.g. owing to activation of
another driving system, the Active Brake Assist
warning lamp ê appears in the driver display.
If the system is unavailable owing to soiled or
damaged sensors or owing to a fault, or if the
functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist
warning lamp Ó appears in the driver display.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in the fol-
lowing speed ranges:
Distance warning function
From approximately 30 km/h, you are warned by
the distance warning function if for several sec-
onds, the safety distance to the vehicle travelling
ahead is insucient at the current speed. In this
case, the distance warning lamp L in the
driver display lights up. If the distance to the vehi-
cle in front continues to decrease at higher
speeds, the distance warning lamp L begins
to ash.
Collision warning
The collision warning function can assist you in
the following situations from approximately
7 km/h with an intermittent warning tone and the
distance warning lamp L .
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians
walking in the direction of travel and moving
cyclists ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching crossing pedestrians and
cyclists.
Rat speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
Driving and parking 371
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 120 km/h
when approaching crossing vehicles, pedes-
trians and cyclists.
Rat speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles.
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching moving cyclists ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
Autonomous braking function
From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, the
autonomous braking function can intervene in the
following situations:
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching moving cyclists ahead, pedes-
trians walking in the direction of travel and
stationary vehicles.
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching crossing pedestrians and
cyclists.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 120 km/h
when approaching crossing vehicles, pedes-
trians and cyclists.
Rat speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles.
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching moving cyclists ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
Situation-related brake force boosting
From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, situation-
related brake force boosting can intervene in the
following situations:
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching moving cyclists ahead, pedes-
trians walking in the direction of travel and
stationary vehicles.
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching crossing pedestrians and
cyclists.
Rat speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 120 km/h
when approaching crossing vehicles, pedes-
trians and cyclists.
Rat speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles.
372 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching moving cyclists ahead.
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching stationary pedestrians and
cyclists.
Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake
Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
RFully depressing the accelerator pedal or with
kickdown.
RReleasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica-
tion when one of the following conditions is full-
led:
RYou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
RThere is no longer a risk of collision.
RAn obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Reaction to oncoming road users (only vehicles
with Driving Assistance Package)
Active Brake Assist can also react to detected
oncoming road users:
RReaction up to a speed of approximately
100 km/h
RWarning of oncoming road users through
warning tone and distance warning lamp L
RAutonomous braking application in order to
reduce the severity of an accident
Intersection start-o function (only vehicles with
Driving Assistance Package)
If a risk of collision with crossing trac is detec-
ted when moving o or at walking pace, three red
arrows consecutively light up in the driver display
in the direction of the crossing road user, together
with the distance warning lamp L. If the situa-
tion is particularly critical, the arrows begin to
ash. A warning tone is also sounded. If you do
not react to the warning, acceleration can be
restricted or autonomous braking can be initiated
in critical situations. The autonomous braking can
also prevent you from moving o and keep the
vehicle stationary. In particularly critical situa-
tions, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autono-
mous braking directly. In this case, the distance
warning lamp L and warning tone occur simul-
taneously with the braking action.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
brake force boosting has occurred, a pop-up
appears in the driver display and automatically
disappears aer a short time.
If Active Brake Assist is set to Late the purely vis-
ual warning stage and restriction of acceleration
are deactivated. If the situation is particularly criti-
cal, there can still be a visual warning, a warning
tone and initiation of autonomous braking.
Driving and parking 373
F206 0119 02
Evasive Steering Assist
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva-
sive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog-
nise objects or complex trac situations
clearly.
Moreover, the steering support provided by
Evasive Steering Assist is not sucient to
avoid a collision.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces-
sary.
#End the support by actively steering in
non-critical situations.
#Drive at an appropriate speed if there
are pedestrians close to the path of your
vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac-
teristics:
RDetection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi-
cles.
RAssistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
RActivation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving manoeuvre.
RAssistance during evasive action and straight-
ening of the vehicle.
RReaction from a speed of approximately
20 km/h up to a speed of approximately
110 km/h.
The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist
can be cancelled at any time by counter steering.
System limits
Full system performance is not yet available for a
short time aer switching on the vehicle or aer
driving o. As long as the functions are restricted,
the Æ warning Active Brake Assist warning
lamp can also be shown in the driver display.
Depending on the environmental conditions, it
may take a few minutes before full system per-
formance is available.
The system may be impaired or may not function,
particularly in the following situations:
RIn snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
conditions.
RIf the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or
covered. (/ page 339)
RIf the sensors are impaired owing to interfer-
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong
radar reections in multi-storey car parks.
RIf a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
has been detected and displayed.
RIn complex trac situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identied.
RIf pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move
quickly into the sensor detection range.
RIf road users are hidden by other objects or
are located close to other objects.
RIf the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist
cannot be distinguished from the background.
374 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
RIf a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as
such, e.g. owing to special clothing or other
objects.
RIf the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
ROn bends with a tight radius.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Setting Active Brake Assist
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.
When switching o the Active Brake Assist, the
distance warning function, the collision warning,
the autonomous braking function and the Active
Evasive Steering Assist (with Driving Assistance
Package - country-dependent) are switched o.
%If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the status bar of the driver
display and when the vehicle is next started
the system is activated again.
Setting warning timing
#Select Z alongside Active Brake Assist.
#Select Early, Medium or Late.
%If the ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs
of fatigue or a microsleep, depending on the
country the system can issue a warning ear-
lier than set. Further information about
ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 350).
Speed Limit Assist
Function of Speed Limit Assist
%The Speed Limit Assist uses Open Street Map
data provided under the Open Database
Licence (ODbL) terms. For more information,
see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/
licence.
Speed Limit Assist records speed restrictions with
a multifunction camera and shows them in the
driver display.
Optionally, maximum permissible speeds can also
be shown in the Head-up display.
The camera also detects further speed restric-
tions indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet
conditions).
Stop signs are detected by the system, which pre-
vents the engine from being switched o by the
ECO start/stop function.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Notes on trailer operation
%Observe also the notes on trailer operation
(/ page 426).
If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly,
the central display shows the query concerning
the type of trailer and its maximum permissible
speed (/ page 431).
Driving and parking 375
F206 0119 02
The driver must manually adjust the maximum
permissible speed in the small or large trailer cat-
egory.
In particular, the country-specic laws must be
taken into account, e.g. on:
Rmaximum design speed or speed restriction
for which the vehicle is approved
Rpermissible gross mass with or without towing
vehicle
Rrequired number of years with a correspond-
ing driving licence
Rtype and condition of the road used
Rthe weather conditions
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the
vehicle/trailer combination can be transferred to
the manual or automatic speed transfer during the
journey (depending on the equipment).
On the system side, relevant additional signs for
speed restrictions and clear road category trac
rules can be considered for the vehicle combina-
tion (depending on the country).
No maximum permissible speed can be selected
for a bicycle rack in the multimedia system. When
using a bicycle rack, observe the specications
for the maximum permissible speed in the Own-
er's Manual.
Observe also the following information:
Rselect a speed adapted to the trac, sur-
roundings and weather conditions
Robserve actual trac signs
Robserve applicable trac rules and regula-
tions
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is
exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depend-
ing on the country, you can set how much the
maximum permissible speed may be exceeded on
the multimedia system before a warning is issued.
You can select in the settings whether the warning
should be issued optically, with the trac sign
ashing in the driver display, or as a combination
of optic and acoustic warning. Selection of the
type of warning is conrmed via an indication in
the driver display, depending on the respective
country of use.
1Optical warning only
2WARNING o
%The type, duration and activation threshold of
the speed limit warning, as well as the option
of setting the timing of the activation thresh-
old upon which the warning is issued, are sub-
ject to legislation valid for the respective
country in which the vehicle is delivered.
376 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Displays on the driver display
1Permissible speed
2Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3Additional sign with restriction
%Trac signs that aect the maximum permis-
sible speed, e.g. indicating the beginning or
end of motorways, can also be detected.
The system can show up to two trac signs on
the driver display simultaneously. The system
always prioritises displaying speed restrictions.
The head-up display shows only one trac sign
with a maximum permissible speed. If two speed
signs are shown on the driver display, forexample,
when speed limits are detected, the value of the
le-hand speed restriction 1 is always transmit-
ted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC for acceptance and is shown
on the head-up display.
Important information from other systems can
cause trac signs to be hidden for a short time.
If the Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the
current maximum permissible speed, e.g. due to a
lack of signage, the following display appears in
the driver display:
This display is shown permanently in the vehicle
when travelling in countries which do not support
Speed Limit Assist. Speed Limit Assist is not avail-
able in all countries.
If the system is temporarily or permanently
unavailable due to a technical fault or soiling of
the windscreen, a corresponding display message
appears in the driver display. Depending on the
country, the Speed Limit Assist warning lamp
ê also lights up in the driver display.
%Please also note the information on the dis-
play messages (/ page 821).
System limits
The system may be impaired or inoperative in the
following situations in particular:
RIf visibility is poor, e.g. due to insucient illu-
mination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or
heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
Rif there is soiling on the windscreen in the
vicinity of the multifunction camera, or if the
camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
RIf the trac signs are dicult to see because,
forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded,
iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned,
insuciently illuminated or askew.
RActive trac signs with LED displays may not
be detected correctly, or even at all due to
Driving and parking 377
F206 0119 02
technical factors suchas transmission fre-
quency.
RIf the signs, road markings or road layout are
ambiguous, e.g. trac signs at road works, at
exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel
roads, and pedestrian crossing markings at
trac lights.
RIf the signage or road markings do not comply
with the standard.
RIf the signage, road markings, or road guid-
ance is country-specic and deviates from the
navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or
aer road works.
RAer sharp turns and tight bends, if trac
signs are outside the camera's eld of vision.
RIf you overtake vehicles with trac signs
axed or attached to them.
RIf transport devices are used that are attached
to the trailer coupling, e.g. bicycle racks, the
system may react to restrictions for trailers.
Setting Speed Limit Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5Speed Limit Assist
Activating or deactivating the speed limit warning
%The speed limit warning is switched on by
default (depending on the country).
#Switch o Speed limit warning .
Following country-specic legislation, the
speed warning remains deactivated until the
next time the vehicle is switched on or o and
the driver's door is opened.
%The audible speed limit warning can also be
switched o and on via quick-access, by
pressing and holding the mute button on the
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in
the status line of the central display or via a
voice control command (availability of these
functions is country-dependent).
Change the type of speed limit warning
#Change the warning to Visual or Visual &
audible.
Switching the acoustic signal for a new maximum
permissible speed on or o
%The acoustic signal for a new maximum per-
missible speed is switched o at the factory.
The function determines whether a subtle, non-
intrusive sound supports each change of the dis-
played speed in the driver display.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Setting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a warn-
ing is issued when exceeded.
#Set the desired speed under Warning Thresh-
old.
Availability of the function is subject to country-
specic legislation.
If one of the following systems is activated, the
detected speed can be manually adopted as the
speed limit:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
378 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
RCruise control
RVariable limiter
%Further information about Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 357).
Trac Sign Assist
Function of Trac Sign Assist
%This function is an on-demand feature
(/ page 87).
Trac Sign Assist detects the trac signs with
the multifunction camera and compares them
with the information on the digital road map of the
navigation system. It supports you by showing
detected speed restrictions and overtaking bans
on the driver display.
Maximum permissible speeds can also be shown
on the head-up display.
The system can issue a warning when you exceed
the maximum permissible speed.
In some countries, the system can provide you
with further functions and can warn you when you
are approaching pedestrian crossings or when
you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights
unintentionally.
The camera also detects and analyses trac
signs with a restriction indicated by an additional
sign (e.g. in wet conditions).
Trac Sign Assist portrays only selected signs on
the driver display. Actual trac signs and speed
restrictions have priority over trac signs and
speed restrictions shown on the driver display.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Notes on trailer operation
%Observe also the notes on trailer operation
(/ page 426).
If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly,
the central display shows the query about the
type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed
(/ page 431).
The driver must manually adjust the maximum
permissible speed in the small or large trailer cat-
egory.
In particular, the country-specic laws must be
taken into account, e.g. on:
Rmaximum design speed or speed restriction
for which the vehicle is approved
Rpermissible gross mass with or without towing
vehicle
Rrequired number of years with a correspond-
ing driving licence
Rtype and condition of the road used
Rthe weather conditions
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the
vehicle/trailer combination can be transferred to
the manual or automatic speed transfer during the
journey (depending on the equipment).
On the system side, relevant additional signs for
speed restrictions and clear road category trac
rules can be considered for the vehicle combina-
tion (depending on the country).
No maximum permissible speed can be selected
for a bicycle rack in the multimedia system. When
using a bicycle rack, observe the specications
for the maximum permissible speed in the Own-
er's Manual.
Driving and parking 379
F206 0119 02
Observe also the following information:
Rselect a speed adapted to the trac, sur-
roundings and weather conditions
Robserve actual trac signs
Robserve applicable trac rules and regula-
tions
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Displays on the driver display
1Permissible speed
2Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3Additional sign with restriction
The system can show up to two trac signs on
the driver display simultaneously. The system
always prioritises displaying speed restrictions.
The head-up display shows only one trac sign
with a maximum permissible speed. If two speed
signs are shown on the driver display, forexample,
when speed limits are detected, the value of the
le-hand speed restriction 1 is always transmit-
ted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC for acceptance and is shown
on the head-up display.
Important information from other systems can
cause trac signs to be hidden for a short time.
Examples of trac signs which can be displayed
Trac Sign Assist can detect and display the fol-
lowing trac signs 1:
Rspeed restrictions
Rend of the speed restriction
Rovertaking restrictions
Rplay streets
380 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Rdepending on the country: signs showing the
start or end of motorways and dual carriage-
ways
Trac Sign Assist can detect the following addi-
tional signs 3 and, if necessary, analyse the rele-
vance of the restrictions using other vehicle sen-
sors:
Rin wet conditions
Rslippery road surfaces
Rin fog
Rtemporary restrictions
Rexits
Rrestrictions for car/trailer combinations
Trac Sign Assist also uses data from the digital
street map on the navigation system. When you
leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on
a motorway exit or slip road forexample, or aer
you turn at a junction, the display on the driver
display can thus be updated without a trac sign
having been detected.
%Regularly update the digital road map of the
navigation system to ensure optimum func-
tioning of Trac Sign Assist (/ page 38).
Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the
system can also display speed restrictions ahead
on the driver display and head-up display. The
driver display can also show the distance to an
upcoming reduction in speed limit. Information
from the digital road map of the navigation system
is used for this purpose. The Assistance menu
can also display a dynamic visualisation of the
speed restrictions ahead.
If Trac Sign Assist cannot determine the cur-
rently applicable maximum permissible speed
(e.g. due to a lack of signage), the following dis-
play appears in the driver display:
Trac Sign Assist is not available in all countries.
This display is shown permanently in the vehicle
when travelling in countries which do not support
Trac Sign Assist.
If the system is temporarily or permanently
unavailable due to a technical fault or soiling of
the windscreen, a corresponding display message
appears in the driver display. The Trac Sign
Assist ê warning lamp also lights up in the
driver display in certain countries.
%Please also note the information on the dis-
play messages from Trac Sign Assist
(/ page 821).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is
exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depend-
ing on the country, you can set how much the
maximum permissible speed may be exceeded on
the multimedia system before a warning is issued.
You can switch o the warning, or select in the
settings whether the warning should be issued
optically, with the trac sign ashing in the driver
display, or as a combination of optic and acoustic
warning. Selection of the type of warning is con-
rmed via an indication in the driver display,
depending on the respective country of use.
Driving and parking 381
F206 0119 02
1Optical warning only
2WARNING o
%The type, duration and deployment stages of
the speed limit warning, as well as the option
of setting the timing of the deployment stages
upon which the warning is issued, are subject
to legislation valid for the respective country
in which the vehicle is delivered.
Additional functions of Trac Sign Assist (coun-
try-specic)
Warning for no-entry signs: Trac Sign Assist can
warn you if you drive the wrong way down a sec-
tion of road, forexample, on motorway slip roads
or one-way streets.
Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach
pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians
are in the danger zone or are moving towards it,
Trac Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of
approximately 70 km/h.
Warning at stop signs: Trac Sign Assist can warn
you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if
you are about to drive past a stop sign uninten-
tionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be
clear. For example, if the system detects more
than one stop sign, a stop sign can be conrmed
using the digital navigation map. No warning can
be issued if several dierent signs are detected.
Warning at red lights: Trac Sign Assist can warn
you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if
you are about to drive through a red light uninten-
tionally.
The following conditions must be fullled:
RSeveral trac lights have been detected.
RAll trac lights detected are red.
RAt least one of the red trac lights detected is
on the front passenger side beside the vehi-
cle's lane.
RThe trac lights are in the following sequence
(from top to bottom): red, yellow, and green.
%Where available, you can turn the warnings on
and o in the Trac Sign Assist menu under
Further warnings(/ page 383).
System limits
The system may be impaired or inoperative in the
following situations in particular:
RIf visibility is poor, e.g. due to insucient illu-
mination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or
heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
Rif there is soiling on the windscreen in the
vicinity of the multifunction camera, or if the
camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
RIf the trac signs are dicult to see because,
forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded,
382 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned,
insuciently illuminated or askew.
RActive trac signs with LED displays may not
be detected correctly, or even at all due to
technical factors suchas transmission fre-
quency.
RIf the information on the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of
date.
RIf the signs, road markings or road layout are
ambiguous, e.g. trac signs at road works, at
exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel
roads, and pedestrian crossing markings at
trac lights.
RIf the signage or road markings do not comply
with the standard.
RIf the signage, road markings, or road guid-
ance is country-specic and deviates from the
navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or
aer road works.
RAer sharp turns and tight bends, if trac
signs are outside the camera's eld of vision.
RIf you overtake vehicles with trac signs
axed or attached to them.
RIf you use transport equipment secured to the
vehicle with a trailer coupling, suchas a bicy-
cle rack, restrictions for vehicle/trailer combi-
nations may be considered valid if applicable.
Setting Trac Sign Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating the speed limit warning
%The speed limit warning is switched on by
default (depending on the country).
#Switch o Speed limit warning .
Following country-specic legislation, the
speed limit warning remains deactivated until
the next time the vehicle is switched on or o.
%The audible speed limit warning can also be
switched o and on via quick-access, by
pressing and holding the mute button on the
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in
the status line of the central display or via a
voice control command (availability of func-
tions depending on respective country).
Change the type of speed limit warning
#Change the warning to Visual or Visual &
audible.
Setting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a warn-
ing is issued when exceeded.
#Set the desired speed under warning thresh-
old.
%Availability of the function is subject to coun-
try-specic legislation.
Switching the acoustic signal for a new maximum
permissible speed on or o
%The acoustic signal for a new maximum per-
missible speed is switched o at the factory.
The function determines whether a subtle, non-
intrusive sound supports each change of the dis-
played speed in the driver display.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%Availability of the function is dependent on
the country.
Driving and parking 383
F206 0119 02
Activating or deactivating further functions of Traf-
c Sign Assist
#Activate or deactivate Further warnings.
The available functions are switched on or o.
Set the type of warning for other functions
#Select Visual or Visual & audible.
Trac light view
Information about the trac light view
The trac light view supports the driver when
waiting in front of a red light by displaying the
camera image on the central display. The camera
image is displayed when the driver is the rst vehi-
cle in front of the red light and faded out when the
vehicle drives o.
Displaying trac light view
Requirements
RThe Traffic light view option is switched on.
RA trac light view is available.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5Traffic light view
%This function is not available in all countries.
If the vehicle is in rst position at a trac light,
the camera image with trac light view is shown
on the central display.
When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is
faded out.
#Activate D or deactivate E Traffic
light view.
Using other available functions
#Select Z.
#Select On request or Automatic.
If On request is set and a trac light view is
available, the Please tap here for traffic light
view. message is displayed. The camera image
is shown aer conrmation of the message.
When Automatic is set, the camera image is
automatically displayed when the trac light
view is available.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind
Spot Assist with exit warning
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use
radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m
behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.
The system can detect vehicles travelling from
speeds of approximately 12 km/h and issue a
warning if they move into the monitoring range.
Status display in the driver display
¸Grey: the system is activated but inopera-
tive.
¸Green: the system is activated and opera-
tional.
384 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Display in the driver display in the menuAssistance
1Warning lamp in the exterior mirror
2Red radar waves
If a vehicle is detected from approximately
12 km/h and immediately moves into the moni-
toring range, the warning lamp in the relevant
exterior mirror lights up in red. Assistance In the
menu, the lamp in the exterior mirror 1 also
lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is
detected is hatched out.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
and you activate the direction indicators in the
corresponding direction, a double warning tone
sounds once and the warning lamp ashes red in
the corresponding exterior mirror. Red radar
waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the
assistance graphic.
If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display
in the exterior mirror ashes for all other detected
vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If
you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.
%Vehicles with active ambient lighting : If Warn-
ing assistance is switched on, the warning is
reinforced by the ambient lighting
(/ page 233).
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 338).
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
dierent speed.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this
situation.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation and maintain a safe distance at
the side of the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Active
Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
following:
Rif you overtake a vehicle too closely so that
it is in the blind spot area
Rif vehicles travelling at a much faster
speed approach and then overtake
Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings
or intervene in such situations.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation and maintain a safe distance at
the side of the vehicle.
Exit warning
The exit warning is an additional function of Blind
Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist and can
warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a sta-
tionary vehicle about approaching vehicles.
Driving and parking 385
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of accident despite exit
warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary
objects nor to persons or road users
approaching you at a greatly diering speed.
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these
situations.
#Always pay particular attention to the
trac situation when opening the doors
and make sure there is sucient clear-
ance.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range,
the red warning lamp lights up in the correspond-
ing exterior mirror.
If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the
side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice
and the ambient lighting in the respective door
and the warning lamps in the corresponding exte-
rior mirror ash red.
%Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambi-
ent lighting: the Warning assistance of the
ambient lighting can be activated and deacti-
vated (/ page 233).
%The warning assistance can dier depending
on the equipment and may vary according to
the setting.
The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot
Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is active.
Aer the vehicle is switched o, the exit warning
continues to function for a few minutes. If a door
is opened when the vehicle is switched o, the
exit warning is active again for a few minutes.
When the exterior mirror warning lamp ashes
three times, the exit warning is no longer availa-
ble.
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi-
tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The
responsibility for opening and closing the doors
and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi-
cle occupants.
System limits
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may
be limited in the following situations, in particular:
Rif there is soiling on the sensors or the sen-
sors are obscured
Rin poor visibility, e.g. owing to fog, heavy rain
or snow
Rif there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorcycles
Rif the road has very wide or narrow lanes
Rif vehicles are not driving in the middle of their
lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane
borders. Always make sure that there is sucient
distance to the side for other trac or obstacles.
Warnings may be interrupted when driving along-
side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro-
longed time.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are
not operational when reverse gear is engaged.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are
not operational if transport equipment, for exam-
ple a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
trailer coupling and the electrical connection has
been correctly established.
386 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the
following situations:
Rwhen the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces
Rwhen people approach the vehicle
Rin the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Function of braking intervention by Active Blind
Spot Assist
%The brake application function is only availa-
ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance
Package.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
impact in the monitoring range, a course-correct-
ing brake application is carried out. This is
designed to help you avoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is availa-
ble in the speed range between approximately
30 km/h and approximately 200 km/h.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite brake
application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
#Always steer, brake or accelerate your-
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist
warns you or makes a course-correcting
brake application.
#Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Active
Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the
following situations:
RIf you overtake vehicles at a high speed.
RIf vehicles approach and overtake you at a
greatly dierent speed.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings
or intervene in such situations.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation and maintain a safe distance at
the side of the vehicle.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror
and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display
1 indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the driver display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro-
priate brake application. This brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly
in the opposite direction or accelerate.
Driving and parking 387
F206 0119 02
System limits
Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot
Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dan-
gers (/ page 384).
Either a course-correcting brake application
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all,
may occur especially in the following situations:
RVehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
RA vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
RYou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
RYou brake or accelerate signicantly.
RA driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist.
RESP® is deactivated.
RA loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
detected.
RTransport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle
rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the
electrical connection has been correctly
established.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
#Activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot
Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of a multifunction
camera, (/ page 339) and can protect you from
leaving your lane unintentionally. The system can
guide you back into your lane by course-correct-
ing steering intervention, and warn you with tangi-
ble steering wheel feedback.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the
speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
The system can intervene if the following condi-
tions are met:
RActive Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking.
ROne of your front wheels moves onto this lane
marking.
If you activate the direction indicators, there is no
steering intervention on that side.
There is no steering intervention if you leave your
lane without activating the direction indicators but
there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle
in your own lane.
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assis-
tance Package: If the system detects an obstacle,
e.g. another vehicle, in the adjacent lane, there is
steering intervention despite the direction indica-
tors.
Depending on the country, Active Lane Keeping
Assist can already react in the following situations
from a speed of approximately 45 km/h:
RIf your own vehicle is overtaken by another
road user and a risk of collision is detected,
388 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
there is course-correcting steering interven-
tion.
RIf a recognised lane marking is crossed, a
warning is given by tangible feedback from the
steering wheel.
In the following cases a warning 1 appears in
the driver display and a warning tone is sounded:
Ra steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping
Assist has a duration longer than approx-
imately ten seconds.
Rthere are two or more steering interventions
by the systems within approximately three
minutes, without steering action by the driver.
You can set the sensitivity of the system in the
Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, to determine
the level of assistance. You can also determine
whether the system is to react to interrupted lane
markings, or only to solid lane markings
(/ page 391).
If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs of
drowsiness, the most sensitive setting is automat-
ically selected (/ page 349).
Status displays of Active Lane Keeping Assist
ïWhite: Active Lane Keeping Assist is
switched o.
If ESP® is switched o or a tyre pressure
loss warning is given, Active Lane Keeping
Assist is automatically switched o.
ïYellow: There is a malfunction. Also note
any display messages.
ðGrey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is
switched on but not ready.
ðGreen: Active Lane Keeping Assist is
switched on and ready. If the system is
only ready on one side, only the lane mark-
ing on that side is shown in green.
ðRed: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui-
ded you back into your lane by course-cor-
recting steering intervention. If a tangible
warning is also given at the steering wheel,
the status display ashes. Only the lane
marking on the warning side is shown in
red.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack-
age: If both lane markings are shown in red
in the status display at the same time,
Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an
emergency stop (/ page 366).
Display in the driver display in the menu Assistance
Driving and parking 389
F206 0119 02
If one of your front wheels moves onto a recog-
nised lane marking, this is highlighted in red in the
Assistance menu in the driver display.
%Vehicles with active ambient lighting: If Warn-
ing assistance is switched on, the warning by
Active Lane Keeping Assist is reinforced by
the ambient lighting (/ page 233).
System limits
In the following situations, there may be no
course-correcting steering intervention but a
warning may be given at the steering wheel
depending on the situation:
Rif you clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate.
Rif a driving safety system is intervening, e.g.
ESP® or Active Brake Assist
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler-
ation.
Rif transport equipment, for example a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
The system may be impaired or inoperative in the
following situations in particular:
Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. owing to insu-
cient road illumination, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
Rif there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
Rif there is soiling on the windscreen in the
vicinity of the multifunction camera, or if the
camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
Rif the bumper is soiled in the area of the radar
sensors, or if these are damaged or obscured
Rif there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one
lane, e.g. around roadworks.
Rif the lane markings are worn, dark or cov-
ered.
RIf the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and the lane markings cannot therefore
be detected.
Rif the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch o, cross one another or merge.
Rif the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
potential dangers (/ page 338).
Activating or deactivating Active Lane Keeping
Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
5Active Lane Keeping Assist
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be
activated and deactivated via the vehicle quick-
access y.
%Setting aer vehicle start is country-depend-
ent.
390 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
5Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity
#Select Z.
#Select Early, Med. or Late.
The setting selected last is adopted when the
vehicle is next started.
%The standard setting of this function is coun-
try-dependent.
Switch on/o support on broken lane marking
#Select Advanced support.
The setting selected last is adopted when the
vehicle is next started.
%The standard setting of this function is coun-
try-dependent.
%This function must be activated on vehicles
without the Driving Assistance Package to
enable Emergency Stop Assist to be available
fully.
Further information on Emergency Stop Assist
(/ page 366).
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts
the characteristics of the suspension dampers to
the current operating and driving conditions.
The damping is set individually for each wheel and
is aected by the following factors:
Rthe road surface conditions
Rvehicle load
Rthe drive program selected
Rthe driving style
The drive program can be set using DYNAMIC
SELECT.
Function of the rear axle level control system
%The rear axle level control system is only avail-
able for plug-in hybrids.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due
to the vehicle lowering
Vehicles with rear axle level control system:
when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle,
the vehicle rst rises slightly and then returns
to the set level shortly aerwards.
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel
arches or the underbody could thus become
trapped.
The vehicle can also be lowered aer being
locked.
#When leaving the vehicle, make sure that
nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel
arches or the underbody.
*NOTE Damage caused by vehicle being
lowered
Vehicles with rear axle level control The vehi-
cle can be lowered due to dierences in tem-
perature or extended non-operational times.
This can cause damage to parts of the body.
#When stopping the vehicle and when
driving o, make sure that there are no
Driving and parking 391
F206 0119 02
obstacles such as kerbs under or in the
immediate vicinity of the body.
The rear axle level control system ensures a con-
stant vehicle level on the rear axle, even with a
laden vehicle.
The rear axle level control system consists of:
Rair suspension on the rear axle
Rautomatic level control system for load com-
pensation
RACE START
Information on RACE START
%RACE START is available only for
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.
RACE START enables optimal vehicle acceleration
from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road
surface is required, the tyres and vehicle must
also be in good condition.
%Use RACE START only aer the vehicle has
been run in.
%RACE START must not be used in normal road
operation. RACE START may be activated and
used only on dedicated race circuits, not on
public roads.
Read the safety notes and information on
ESP® (/ page 342).
&WARNING Risk of skidding and having an
accident from wheels spinning
If you use RACE START, depending on the
ESP® mode selected, there is an increased
risk of skidding and having an accident.
#Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Activating RACE START
&WARNING Risk of skidding and having an
accident from wheels spinning
If you use RACE START, depending on the
ESP® mode selected, there is an increased
risk of skidding and having an accident.
#Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on and the transmis-
sion and the engine are at normal operating
temperature.
RThe driver's door is closed.
RThe front wheels are in the straight-ahead
position.
RThe vehicle is on level ground.
RThe vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is
depressed (le foot) and the parking brake is
released.
RThe transmission is in position h.
ROne of the C, B or I drive pro-
grams is selected (/ page 284).
%RACE START must not be used in normal road
operation. RACE START may be activated and
used only on dedicated race circuits, not on
public roads.
Read the safety notes and information on
ESP® (/ page 342).
392 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed will increase.
%If the activation conditions are not fullled,
RACE START cannot be used. The RACE
START not possible See Owner's Manual
message will appear on the driver display.
#The RACE START Release brake to start mes-
sage will appear on the driver display.
%In this phase, you can adjust RACE START
depending on the road conditions. You can
vary the engine speed by pulling on one of the
steering wheel gearshi paddles. The seg-
ments on the driver display will icker rapidly.
%If the brake pedal is not released aer a short
while, RACE START will be cancelled. The
RACE START cancelled message will appear
on the driver display.
#Take your foot o the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceler-
ation. The RACE START active message will
appear on the driver display.
RACE START will be deactivated immediately if
you release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions is no
longer fullled. The RACE START cancelled mes-
sage will appear on the driver display.
%Aer being used several times in short suc-
cession, RACE START will be unavailable until
a certain distance has been driven.
DRIFT MODE
Functions of DRIFT MODE
%DRIFT MODE is available only for the
Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S E Performance model.
DRIFT MODE allows you to intentionally make the
vehicle unstable and induce oversteer (driing).
All activation conditions must be fullled for this
(/ page 394).
%Only a highly qualied and experienced driver
should drive in DRIFT MODE.
Read the safety notes and information on
ESP® (/ page 342).
&WARNING Risk of skidding and having an
accident from wheels spinning
When you use DRIFT MODE, ESP® is not avail-
able.
There is an increased risk of skidding and hav-
ing an accident.
#Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal
roads.
#DRIFT MODE may only be activated and
used on closed race circuits, not on pub-
lic roads.
#Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
When DRIFT MODE is active, the vehicle drive
occurs only at the rear. ESP® and 4MATIC+ will be
deactivated.
%DRIFT MODE is available only aer the vehicle
has been run in.
Driving and parking 393
F206 0119 02
Activating and deactivating DRIFT MODE
&WARNING Risk of skidding and having an
accident from wheels spinning
When you use DRIFT MODE, ESP® is not avail-
able.
There is an increased risk of skidding and hav-
ing an accident.
#Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal
roads.
#DRIFT MODE may only be activated and
used on closed race circuits, not on pub-
lic roads.
#Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Requirements
RESP® is deactivated (/ page 345).
RDrive program I is selected
(/ page 284).
RThe doors, the bonnet and the boot lid/tail-
gate are closed.
RThe vehicle is started and the transmission
and the engine are at normal operating tem-
perature.
RThe transmission is in manual mode – manual
gearshiing is activated (/ page 295).
Activating DRIFT MODE
%Only a highly qualied and experienced driver
should drive in DRIFT MODE.
Read the safety notes and information on
ESP® (/ page 342).
#Pull steering wheel gearshi paddles 1 and
2 and hold them for half a second.
If all activation conditions are fullled, the
driver display will show a message reading
DRIFT MODE Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel:
Paddle DOWN and the â warning lamp will
ash.
#To cancel: pull the steering wheel gearshi
paddle 1.
The driver display will show a message reading
DRIFT MODE cancelled and the â warning
lamp will go out.
#To conrm: pull the steering wheel gearshi
paddle 2.
The driver display will show a message reading
DRIFT MODE active and the â warning
lamp will light up.
Deactivating DRIFT MODE
#Pull steering wheel gearshi paddles 1 and
2 and hold them for half a second.
The DRIFT MODE active message and the
â warning lamp will go out.
394 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
DRIFT MODE will automatically be deactivated in
the following situations:
RESP® is activated.
RManual shiing is deactivated – the transmis-
sion is in position h.
RThe I drive program is switched o.
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RAutomatic switch-o is required by the vehi-
cle.
%Aer driing and before continuing your jour-
ney, check the wheels and tyres for damage.
In particular, check the tyre tread depth and
tyre contact surface over the entire width of
the tyres (/ page 35).
Boost strategy
Function of the boost strategy
%The boost strategy is available only for the
Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S E Performance model.
The boost strategy is used to increase perform-
ance on a race track and can be selected only in
the I drive program.
The boost strategy is part of AMG TRACK PACE
and can be activated either via the steering-wheel
button (/ page 395) or via the settings for Track
Race (/ page 498).
You can set the energy ow and thus the energy
supply of the electric drive power depending on
the race distance and track characteristics.
For long races, activate the boost strategy to use
the maximum boost eect exclusively via kick-
down as needed. Deactivate the boost strategy
for short races in order to always use the maxi-
mum electric output.
Activating/deactivating boost strategy with the
steering-wheel button
Requirements
RDrive program I is selected
(/ page 284).
RThe state of charge of the high-voltage battery
is sucient.
%You can also activate or deactivate the boost
strategy via the Track Race settings
(/ page 498).
#Press upper or lower display button 1
repeatedly, until it displays the ¨ symbol.
%If the display button does not show the sym-
bol, then it is hidden. How functions are dis-
played and the order in which they are dis-
played can be set in the multimedia system
(/ page 282).
%If the display is greyed out, the requirements
for the boost strategy are not fullled and it is
not possible to activate it.
Driving and parking 395
F206 0119 02
#Press corresponding button 2.
The symbol shows the current status:
R¨ (blue): boost strategy is activated
R¨ (yellow): boost strategy is deactiva-
ted
When the boost strategy is activated, the driv-
er's display also shows the ¨ symbol in
blue.
When a boost process is active through kick-
down, the BOOST message appears on the
driver's display and the ¨ symbols on the
driver's display and on the display button light
up yellow.
Reversing camera
Function of the reversing camera
The reversing camera serves solely as an aid. It is
not a substitute for you having to pay attention to
your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Ensure that there are no persons, animals or
objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while
manoeuvring and parking.
%The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as it would appear in the inside
rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Parking Package
The following camera perspectives are available in
the central display:
Standard view
1Guide lines at a distance of approximately
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
2Lane marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering angle (dynamic)
396 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
3Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
4Guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area
Wide-angle view
Trailer view
1Yellow guide line, locating aid
2Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
Pedestrian braking function
%This function is only available in vehicles with-
out the Parking Package. Vehicles with the
Parking Package are equipped with manoeu-
vring assistant functions (/ page 416).
The pedestrian braking function can prevent colli-
sions with pedestrians when reversing the vehicle
at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a
person in the vehicle's path, the vehicle can be
braked to a standstill.
The pedestrian braking function can intervene
under the following conditions:
RThe vehicle is reversing at a speed below
15 km/h.
RThe camera image is shown on the central dis-
play.
When automatic braking is triggered, the symbol
º appears in red in the camera image.
In addition, the message º Pedestrian!
Deact. emerg. braking: press here appears.
The driver can close or ignore this message.
Pedestrian braking then remains active. When the
driver taps the message, pedestrian braking is
momentarily deactivated.
Driving and parking 397
F206 0119 02
In the following cases, the pedestrian braking
function is activated again:
RThe vehicle is travelling forward at over
16 km/h.
RThe vehicle is switched o and on again.
%If the function is unavailable or deactivated,
the symbol º appears in grey in the cam-
era image.
The pedestrian braking function serves solely as
an aid. It is not a substitute for you having to pay
attention to your surroundings. The responsibility
for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with
you. Ensure that no persons, animals or objects
etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection of the pedestrian braking
function
The pedestrian braking function cannot always
clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not
detected by the function.
In these cases, the function may brake unnec-
essarily or not brake at all.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on the pedestrian
braking function alone.
#Be ready to brake.
In the following situations, the pedestrian braking
function is not available:
Ron inclines
Rif transport equipment, forexample a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
Rif the reversing camera is not operational
Please also note the system limits of the reversing
camera.
Vehicles with Parking Package
The following camera perspectives are available in
the central display:
Menu Camera views on the 9.5'' central display (Top
View)
398 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Menu Camera views on the 11.9" central display
(Top View)
1Menu Parking Assistance
2Reversing camera with Top View
3Wide-angle view
4Trailer view
5Activate/deactivate Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 409)
6Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 406)
7Guide lines at a distance of approximately
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
8Lane marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering angle (dynamic)
9Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
AGuide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area
%When Active Parking Assist is active, paths
8 are displayed in green (/ page 410).
Wide-angle view
6Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 406)
Driving and parking 399
F206 0119 02
Trailer view
1Yellow guide line, locating aid
2Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
System limits
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
tem inoperative message appears on the central
display.
The reversing camera will not function, or will only
partially function in the following situations:
RYou are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 16 km/h.
RThe boot lid is open.
RThe weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
RThe light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if
a light is shining into the camera.
RThe camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted
up. Observe the notes on cleaning the revers-
ing camera (/ page 627).
RThe camera or rear of your vehicle is dam-
aged. In this case, have the camera and its
position and setting checked at a qualied
specialist workshop.
%Do not use the reversing camera in these
types of situations. You could otherwise injure
others or collide with objects when parking
the vehicle.
The eld of vision and other functions of the cam-
era system may be restricted due to additional
vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or
bicycle rack).
%The contrast of the display may be impaired
by direct sunlight or by other light sources,
e.g. when driving out of a garage. Particular
attention must be aorded in this case.
%Have the display repaired or replaced if,
forexample, its use is considerably restricted
due to pixel errors.
Observe also the information on vehicle sensors
and cameras (/ page 339).
360° Camera
Function of the 360° camera
The 360° camera is a system comprising four
cameras which cover the immediate vehicle sur-
roundings. The cameras support you, for example,
when parking or when exits are dicult to see.
400 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
The 360° camera includes the following cameras
and evaluates their images:
RReversing camera
RFront camera
RTwo outside mirror cameras
The cameras serve solely as aids and may show a
distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly
or even omit them altogether. They are not a sub-
stitute for you having to pay attention to your sur-
roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring
and parking remains with you. Ensure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
The following camera perspectives are available in
the central display: Overview of menu Camera views in 9.5'' central dis-
play
Overview of menu Camera views in 11.5'' central
display
1Menu Parking Assistance
2Top view with image from the front camera
3Top view with image from the reversing cam-
era
43D view le side of the vehicle
53D view right side of the vehicle
63D auto view
Driving and parking 401
F206 0119 02
7Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 409)
8Set the GPS activation point (/ page 405)
9Switch between standard and wide-angle view
ASwitch between standard and trailer view
%The warning display of the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is shown in all views
(/ page 406).
Function of the guide lines
1Guide lines at a distance of approximately
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
2Lane marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering angle (dynamic)
3Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
4Guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area
%When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes
and guidelines are displayed in green instead
of yellow (/ page 410).
Top view with the image from the front or reversing
camera
1Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 406)
2Your vehicle from above
3Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take
at the current steering angle
&WARNING Risk of accidents due to
objects not being displayed or being dis-
played as heavily distorted
Due to the projection of the cameras, objects
in the 3D views may be heavily distorted or
not displayed at all.
402 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Ensure that there are no persons, ani-
mals or objects in the manoeuvring area
while manoeuvring and parking.
3D view, le/right-hand side of the vehicle
1Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(/ page 406)
In the 3D view, le/right-hand side of the vehicle,
the virtual camera moves to the respective side of
the vehicle. When you change the transmission
position, the view is automatically adapted.
%The area behind the vehicle is not displayed
as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.
3D auto view
1Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(/ page 406)
2Guide lines
In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to
the standard perspective, facing forward from the
rear above the roof. The view changes automati-
cally when approaching obstacles.
If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to
a 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and
zoom the views by touch.
Wide-angle view
1Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(/ page 406)
2Switch between standard and wide-angle view
If you select the trailer view and no trailer is cou-
pled to the vehicle, the following display appears:
Driving and parking 403
F206 0119 02
Trailer view
1Switch between standard and trailer view
2Yellow guide line, locating aid
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
4Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
%In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at
the level of the trailer hitch.
When the electrical connection is established
between the vehicle and the trailer, the display
changes to the side camera view.
Side view of outside mirror cameras in trailer view
1Switch to the side view of the outside mirror
cameras
System limits
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
tem inoperative message appears on the central
display.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to func-
tional limitations of the 360° camera
If the function of the 360° camera is restric-
ted, there is a risk of collision with persons or
objects.
#Do not use the 360° camera in case of
functional limitations.
#Ensure that there are no persons, ani-
mals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring
area while manoeuvring and parking.
The 360° camera will not function or will only par-
tially function in the following situations:
RYou are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 16 km/h.
RThe doors are open.
RAn outside mirror is not completely extended.
RThe boot lid is open.
RThe weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
RThe light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if
a light is shining into the camera.
RThe camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted
up. Refer to the notes on cleaning the 360°
camera (/ page 627).
RIf cameras or vehicle components in which the
cameras are tted are damaged. In this event,
404 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
have the cameras, their positions and their
setting checked at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the
vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the
guide lines and in the display of the generated
images.
The eld of vision and other functions of the cam-
era system may be restricted due to additional
vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or
bicycle rack).
%Contrast of the display may be impaired by
abrupt, direct sunlight or other light sources,
e.g. when driving out of a garage. Particular
attention must be aorded in this case.
%Have the display repaired or replaced if,
forexample, its use is considerably restricted
due to pixel errors.
Observe also the information on vehicle sensors
and cameras (/ page 339).
Calling up the 360° camera views using the
button
#Press button 1.
#Select Camera views menu.
#Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 400).
Selecting a view for the 360° camera (reverse
gear)
#Engage reverse gear.
#Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 400).
360° Camera with GPS - managing activation
positions
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Camera
Renaming an activation position
%You can determine activation positions in the
Camera views menu. (/ page 400)
#u Select for the desired activation posi-
tion.
#Select Edit.
#Enter a name and conrm.
The activation position is saved under the new
name.
Driving and parking 405
F206 0119 02
Deleting an activation position
#u Select for the desired activation posi-
tion.
#Select Delete entry.
#Conrm the prompt.
The activation position is deleted.
Opening the camera cover
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Camera
#Select Open camera cover.
%The camera cover closes automatically aer
some time, or aer the vehicle is switched on
or o.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park-
ing assistance system which monitors the area
surrounding your vehicle . The distance between
your vehicle and a detected obstacle is displayed
visually and acoustically.
The passive side impact protection also warns you
of obstacles to the side. These must be detected
beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear
bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the
direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk
of a lateral collision, a warning is issued.
Passive side impact protection can be activated
and deactivated via the multimedia system
(/ page 409).
In order that front or rear obstacles to the side
can be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a
distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the
vehicle has travelled a distance of one vehicle
length, obstacles on all sides can be shown.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC serves solely as an
aid. It is not a substitute for you having to pay
attention to your surroundings. The responsibility
for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with
you. Ensure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeu-
vring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
Displays on the central display
Vehicles with 360° camera
406 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with reversing camera
1Ready for display at the front and rear
2Ready for display all around
3Ready for display all around and obstacle
detection
As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready
for display, the respective areas 1 to 3 of the
display are shown in blue.
The colour of the display changes depending on
the distance to the detected obstacle:
RBlue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)
RYellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m
ROrange: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
RRed: < 0.4 m
Vehicles with 360° camera: the boundary line
shis dynamically depending on the position and
distance of the obstacles detected.
An intermittent warning tone also sounds depend-
ing on the distance to the obstacle detected. You
can set the timing of the warnings on the multi-
media system. In the Warn early setting, the sys-
tem warns you from a distance of 1 m. In the
standard setting, from a shorter distance of
0.4 m.
Vehicles with 360° camera
Driving and parking 407
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with reversing camera
If you are not in the Camera & parking menu and
an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, a pop-
up window 1 appears on the central display if
the following requirements are met:
RVehicles without Active Parking Assist: when
driving no faster than 12 km/h.
RVehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driv-
ing no faster than 18 km/h.
Head-up display (example)
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately
1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m at the sides 3 can
also be displayed on the head-up display.
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily
take into account the following obstacles:
RObstacles below the detection range, e.g. per-
sons, animals or objects.
RObstacles above the detection range, e.g. pro-
truding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of
lorries.
RPedestrians or animals approaching the vehi-
cle from the side.
RObjects placed next to the vehicle
Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol-
lowing situations, for example:
RYou park the vehicle and switch it o.
RYou open the doors.
Aer the vehicle is restarted, obstacles must be
detected again by driving past them before a new
warning can be issued.
Observe also the system limits of the following
systems:
RReversing camera (/ page 396)
R360° camera (/ page 400)
Observe the information on vehicle sensors and
cameras; otherwise the system cannot function
properly (/ page 339).
408 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with trailer hitch: If a transport device,
e.g. trailer or bicycle rack is attached to the trailer
hitch and the electrical connection is correctly
established, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deac-
tivated for the rear zone.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights
up red for approximately three seconds and then
goes out, and the é symbol appears on the
driver display, the system may have been deacti-
vated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle
again and check whether Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC works in a dierent location.
If a warning tone also sounds, the causes may be
as follows:
R(/ page 627)The sensors are dirty: clean the
sensors .
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deacti-
vated due to a malfunction: restart the vehi-
cle. If the problem persists, consult a qualied
specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
*NOTE Vehicle damage when parking or
manoeuvring due to nearby objects
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects in the close-up range.
#When parking or manoeuvring, pay par-
ticular attention to objects that are
under or above the sensors, e.g. ower
pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other
objects may otherwise be damaged.
Requirements
RThe camera menu is open.
ROr: the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up
window is displayed.
#Tap = on the central display.
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does
not light up or the symbol é is displayed, Park-
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.
%Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be
activated or deactivated in the quick-access
menu.
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Parking 5PARKTRONIC
Setting warning tones
#Select Set warning tones.
#Set the desired level under Volume or Tone
pitch.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
#Select Audio fadeout and activate or deacti-
vate Audio fade for warnings.
The volume of the media source currently
playing is reduced during a Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tone.
or
Driving and parking 409
F206 0119 02
#Select Audio fadeout and activate or deacti-
vate Audio fadeout in trans. position R.
The volume of the media source currently
playing is reduced when reverse gear is
engaged.
Setting the time of the warnings
#Select Time of warning.
#Set the desired warning time for Front or
Rear.
#Activate or deactivate Side warning.
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system, which uses ultrasound with
the assistance of the reversing camera and 360°
camera. When you are driving forwards up to
approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically
measures parking spaces on both sides of the
vehicle.
Active Parking Assist serves solely as an aid. It is
not a substitute for you having to pay attention to
your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Ensure that no persons, animals or objects etc.
are in the manoeuvring range.
Active Parking Assist oers the following func-
tions:
Vehicles with reversing camera
RParking in parking spaces parallel to the road-
way
RReversing into parking spaces perpendicular
to the roadway
The parking space is freely selectable. The park-
ing procedure is executed with the vehicle revers-
ing.
Vehicles with 360° camera
RParking in parking spaces parallel to the road-
way
RParking in parking spaces perpendicular to the
roadway (either forwards or reversing as
desired)
RParking in parking spaces that can only be
detected as such from markings (for example
at the roadside)
RExiting parking spaces if you have parked
using Active Parking Assist
The parking space is freely selectable. The park-
ing direction (forwards or reversing) can also be
freely selected, depending on the orientation of
the parking space.
If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç mes-
sage appears in the driver display. When the sys-
tem detects parking spaces, È appears. The
arrows show the side of the roadway on which
free parking spaces are located. These are then
shown on the central display.
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn
signal indicators are activated based on the calcu-
lated path of your vehicle. The procedure is assis-
ted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear
changes when entering or exiting a parking space.
To start the parking procedure, press the button
c (/ page 412) or (e.g. when near to the
destination), select Active Parking Assist
(/ page 465) in the navigation view.
410 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the fol-
lowing situations:
RYou press the c button again.
RYou begin steering.
RYou select park position j.
RYou engage the electric parking brake.
RESP® intervenes.
RYou open the driver's door.
System limits
If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active
Parking Assist is not available.
Observe also the system limits of the following
systems:
RReversing camera (/ page 396)
R360° camera (/ page 400)
Objects above or below the detection range of
Active Parking Assist, e.g. protruding loads, over-
hangs or loading ramps of trucks or parking space
boundaries are not detected when measuring the
parking space. These are also not subsequently
taken into account when calculating the parking
procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking
Assist may prematurely guide you into the parking
space or brake too late.
Certain environmental conditions, such as snow-
fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space
being mismeasured. Parking spaces that are parti-
ally occupied by trailer drawbars might not be
identied as such or may be measured incor-
rectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level road
surfaces with adequate grip.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
There is a danger of collision!
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable
parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which
parking is not permitted or on unsuitable surfa-
ces.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
situations:
RIn extreme weather conditions, such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
RIf the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
RWhen snow chains are tted.
RWhen a trailer or bicycle rack is attached
RDirectly aer a tyre change or when spare
tyres are tted.
RIf the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
ROn steep inclines of more than approximately
15 %.
RIf the vehicle level has been oset, e.g. mount-
ing the kerb on one side (vehicles with level
control)
Driving and parking 411
F206 0119 02
Parking with Active Parking Assist
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
There is a danger of collision!
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
#Press button1.Parking Assistance menu (example)
#Select Parking Assistance 2 menu.
Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are
shown on the central display.
412 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Parking Assistance menu (example)
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the indicated
vehicle path 4 into the currently selected park-
ing space 5 also appears.
#If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-
cle.
#If necessary, select another parking space.
#Vehicles with 360° camera: to change the
parking direction, tap the selected parking
space again.
#To start the parking procedure: press button
1 again.
or
#Depress the brake pedal and select Start
parking procedure 6 (depending on equip-
ment).
#Take your hands o the steering wheel.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
The turn signal indicator is switched on automati-
cally when the parking procedure begins. You are
responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
in accordance with the trac conditions. If neces-
sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle
swinging out while parking or pulling out
of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of
the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or
other road users.
#Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
Following completion of the parking procedure,
the Active Parking Assist finished display mes-
sage appears.
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When
necessitated by legal requirements or local
conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
%You can stop the vehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro-
cedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa-
ble, the transmission position can be changed
again, or the process can be cancelled.
Driving and parking 413
F206 0119 02
Immediate parking via the Camera views menu
#Select the Camera views menu.
#When the vehicle is stationary and in transmis-
sion position k, and symbol 7 appears in
the camera image: press button 1 again.
The parking procedure is initiated for the
detected parking space.
%The parking space and parking direction can-
not be changed in immediate parking.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking
Assist
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
There is a danger of collision!
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera.
RThe vehicle has been parked with Active Park-
ing Assist.
#Start the vehicle.
#Press button 1.
414 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Parking Assistance menu (example)
#Select Parking Assistance 2 menu.
#If necessary, change direction of exit 3.
#To initiate the unparking procedure: press but-
ton 1 again.
or
#Depress the brake pedal and select Start
unparking procedure 4 (depending on
equipment).
#If necessary, change the transmission posi-
tion. Observe any messages displayed on the
driver display and central display.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched
on when the unparking procedure is initiated, and
automatically switched o again when it is com-
pleted. You are responsible for selecting the turn
signal indicator in accordance with the trac con-
ditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica-
tor accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle
swinging out while parking or pulling out
of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of
the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or
other road users.
#Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
Aer the parking space has been exited, a warn-
ing tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist fin-
ished, take control of vehicle message prompt
you to take control of the vehicle. You have to
accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself
again.
If you do not react to the prompt to take control
of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to
a standstill.
Driving and parking 415
F206 0119 02
Pausing Active Parking Assist
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
There is a danger of collision!
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
You can interrupt the parking or unparking proce-
dure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of
the following actions, forexample:
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Open the front passenger door, a rear door,
the boot or the bonnet.
#Apply the electric parking brake or activate
the HOLD function.
#To resume the parking or unparking proce-
dure: gently depress the accelerator pedal.
%If the electric parking brake was applied
before Active Parking Assist was activated,
depress the accelerator pedal gently to start
the parking or unparking procedure.
Check the area around your vehicle again before
resuming a paused parking procedure. Ensure
that persons, animals or objects are no longer in
the manoeuvring range. Observe also the system
limits of Active Parking Assist.
Automatic braking function of Active Parking
Assist
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
There is a danger of collision!
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring
range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply
and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure.
The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. The
parking or exiting procedure is resumed if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
Check the area around your vehicle again before
resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Ensure
that persons, animals or objects are no longer in
the manoeuvring range. Also, observe the system
limitations of Active Parking Assist.
Manoeuvring assistant
Function of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
impact when pulling away. If the system detects
an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
speed is briey reduced to approximately 2 km/h.
416 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
A risk of collision may arise in the following situa-
tions, forexample:
RIf the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals.
RIf the driver engages an incorrect gear.
RIf the driver depresses the accelerator pedal
with too much force.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following
conditions:
RIf the vehicle was stationary and the transmis-
sion position was changed to k or h.
RIf the vehicle has rolled less than approx-
imately 1.0 m since being at a standstill.
RIf the detected obstacle is less than approx.
1.0 m away.
The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or acti-
vated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu
(/ page 419).
If a critical situation is detected, the symbol É
appears in red in the selected view in the menu
Camera & parking.
%If Drive Away Assist is not available, the É
symbol appears in grey. If the Camera & park-
ing menu is not open in the central display,
the symbol appears together with the Park
Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi-
tute for your attention to the surroundings. The
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
range.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection performance of Drive Away
Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and trac situations.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec-
essary, provided the trac situation per-
mits and that it is safe to take evasive
action.
System limits
The system limits of Active Park Assist apply
(/ page 410).
On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive
Away Assist is restricted.
If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier
is attached to the hitch, and the electrical con-
nection is correctly established. The drive-away
assistance is not available when reversing.
Function of cross trac warning
The cross trac warning can warn you of crossing
trac when exiting a parking space. The radar
sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adja-
cent to the vehicle.
The cross trac warning is active under the fol-
lowing conditions:
RWarning for crossing traffic behind: The vehi-
cle is driving in reverse at speed slower than
approx. 10 km/h.
RWarning for crossing traffic ahead: The vehi-
cle is driving forwards at speed slower than
approx. 10 km/h and the camera image is
shown in the central display (/ page 405).
Driving and parking 417
F206 0119 02
The Warning for crossing traffic ahead can be
deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring
assistance menu.
Depending on the country, the Warning for cross-
ing traffic behind can also be deactivated or acti-
vated (/ page 419).
If a critical situation is detected, the symbol L
appears in red in the selected view in the menu
Camera & parking.
Warning for crossing traffic behind
RThe vehicle can be braked automatically when
crossing trac is detected.
RIf the Camera & parking menu is not opened
and a critical situation is detected, a warning
appears in the central display together with
the Park Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up.
Warning for crossing traffic ahead
RIf Active Park Assist is active, the vehicle can
be braked automatically when crossing trac
is detected.
RA warning appears if Active Park Assist is not
active, but the menu Camera & parking is
open.
RIf the menu Camera & parking is not open, the
system cannot react to crossing trac.
The cross trac warning is only an aid, not a sub-
stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
range.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection performance of the cross
trac warning
The cross trac warning cannot always clearly
identify objects and trac situations.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on the cross trac
warning alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec-
essary, provided the trac situation per-
mits and that it is safe to take evasive
action.
System limits
%If the cross trac warning is not available, the
L symbol appears in grey.
The system limits of Active Park Assist apply
(/ page 410).
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or
other objects, detection is not possible.
The cross trac warning is not available in the fol-
lowing situations:
Ron inclines
RWarning for crossing traffic behind: if a trans-
port device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier is
attached to the hitch, and the electrical con-
nection is correctly established.
Function of close-range braking
Close-range braking can prevent collisions with
pedestrians when the vehicle is reversing at slow
speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person
418 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
in the vehicle's path, the vehicle can be braked to
a standstill.
Close-range braking can intervene under the fol-
lowing conditions:
RThe vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than
10 km/h.
RThe camera image is shown in the central dis-
play (/ page 405).
Depending on the country, close-range braking
can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeu-
vring assistance menu (/ page 419).
When close-range braking is triggered, the symbol
º appears in red in the selected view in the
menu Camera & parking.
%If close-range braking is not available, the
symbol º appears in grey.
Close-range braking serves solely as an aid. It is
not a substitute for you having to pay attention to
your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Ensure that no persons, animals or objects etc.
are in the manoeuvring range.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection by the manoeuvring brake
function
The manoeuvring brake function cannot
always clearly detect people. Other obstacles
are not detected by the function.
In these cases, the function may brake unnec-
essarily or not brake at all.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring
brake function alone.
#Be ready to brake.
System limits
Observe the system limits of the following func-
tions:
RActive Parking Assist (/ page 410)
R360° camera (/ page 400)
RReversing camera (/ page 396)
The close-range braking function is not available
in the following situations:
Ron inclines
RIf transport equipment, forexample a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assis-
tance
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Parking
%This function is an on-demand feature
(/ page 87).
%The Activating/deactivating Manoeuvering
assistance function is not available in all
countries.
#Select Manoeuvring assistance.
#Activate or deactivate the desired manoeu-
vring assistance.
Driving and parking 419
F206 0119 02
Memory Parking Assist
Function of Memory Parking Assist
Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle
using a previously stored parking space. You can
store parking procedures with a total distance of
up to 500 m (100 m per parking or exiting proce-
dure).
During parking or exiting, the system can travel a
previously stored path of up to approximately
100 m to or out of the desired parking space, for
example, from the driveway entrance into the
garage.
Within a radius of approx. 150 m, only one park-
ing or exiting procedure can be recorded.
Only use Memory Parking Assist on private prop-
erty. Use on public roads, e.g. in public parking
spaces, is not permitted.
Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park-
ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons,
animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
range.
System limits
Observe the system limits of Active Parking Assist
(/ page 410).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Memory Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RMemory Parking Assist may steer too
early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
This result in a collision.
#In these situations, do not use Memory
Parking Assist.
Objects located above or below the detection
range of Memory Parking Assist may not be
detected during the parking procedure.
Drawbars of parked trailers, among other objects,
that protrude into the parking space may not be
detected.
Do not use Memory Parking Assist in the following
situations, for example:
RIn extreme weather conditions, such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
RIf the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
RWhen snow chains are tted.
Recording a parking procedure using Memory
Parking Assist
Requirements
RThe entire route is, for example, within your
own property and not on public roads.
RThe system needs reference points in the sur-
roundings to orient itself, such as fences,
walls or trees. Therefore, aer starting the
vehicle, a certain distance must rst be
driven. If not enough reference points are
detected in the surrounding area, no new
route can be recorded.
420 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Press button 1.
The Camera & parking view opens in the cen-
tral display.
#Select Memory Parking Assist 2 menu.
#Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired
starting point of the assisted parking proce-
dure, e.g. a driveway entrance.
#Start recording: Tap 3.
%If not all conditions for a recording are met,
the symbol 3 is greyed out.
#Park the vehicle in the desired parking space.
Do not exceed 8 km/h.
#Stop recording: Stop the vehicle and tap 3
again.
The recording is stored.
%In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can
delete and rename stored parking proce-
dures.
Parking with Memory Parking Assist
Requirements
RA parking procedure has been recorded.
Driving and parking 421
F206 0119 02
#Press button 1.
The Camera & parking view opens on the cen-
tral display.
#Select Memory Parking Assist2 menu.
#Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting
point of the stored parking procedure.
#To start the parking procedure: press 6.
#Select the stored parking procedure from the
list.
#Follow the instructions on the central display.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
%The turn signal indicator is not switched on
automatically. You are responsible for select-
ing the turn signal indicator in accordance
with the trac conditions.
#Following completion of the parking proce-
dure, secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Exiting a parking space with Memory Parking
Assist
Requirements
RThe unparking procedure was recorded
together with the respective parking proce-
dure and stored separately within one driving
cycle.
RThe vehicle was parked using Memory Parking
Assist.
422 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Press button 1.
The Camera & parking view opens in the cen-
tral display.
#Select Memory Parking Assist2 menu.
Starting the unparking procedure
#Press 6.
#Conrm the saved unparking procedure.
#Follow the instructions on the central display.
The vehicle drives the recorded route.
%The turn signal indicator is not switched on
automatically. You are responsible for select-
ing the turn signal indicator in accordance
with the trac conditions.
#Take control of the vehicle aer the unparking
procedure has been completed.
Setting Memory Parking Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Parking 5Memory Parking Assist
Renaming a recording
#Select Memory Parking Assist.
#Select ´ next to the desired recording.
#Enter a name and conrm with OK.
Deleting a recording
#Select Memory Parking Assist.
#Select E next to the desired recording.
The selected recording will be deleted.
Deleting all recordings
#Select Memory Parking Assist.
Driving and parking 423
F206 0119 02
#Select Delete all tracks.
%Alternatively, you can delete all data in Mem-
ory Parking Assist by resetting the multimedia
system (/ page 494).
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
Function of Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
%This function is an on-demand feature
(/ page 87).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuita-
ble trailers
Trailers with a steered axle or a h wheel
cannot be used with Trailer Manoeuvring
Assist.
Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred
in the desired direction and you can cause a
collision or the trailer can overturn.
#Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with
trailers with xed drawbars and axles.
*NOTE Damage due to overhanging loads
in front or drawbar installations
The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged
during manoeuvring due to overhanging loads
at the front of the trailer or drawbar installa-
tions.
#Pay attention to overhanging loads or
drawbar installations while manoeuvring.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when
reversing with a trailer. The reversing camera
monitors the articulation angle between the vehi-
cle and the trailer and adjusts it to a specied
value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your
speed.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist serves solely as an aid.
It is not a substitute for you having to pay atten-
tion to your surroundings. The responsibility for
safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
Ensure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeu-
vring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
You can enter the articulation angle value directly
via the multimedia system, or use a straightening
or 90° manoeuvre. When carrying out a straight-
ening manoeuvre, the system calculates the artic-
ulation angle automatically and straightens the
vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current
direction.
Observe the notes regarding trailer operation
(/ page 426).
System limits
Observe the system limits of the following func-
tions:
RActive Parking Assist (/ page 410)
R360° camera (/ page 400)
RReversing camera (/ page 396)
The system may be impaired or inoperative in the
following situations:
RThe gradient is greater than approximately
15 %.
Using Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
Requirements
RThe vehicle has been started and is stationary.
424 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
RA trailer is selected in the Vehicle menu
(/ page 431).
RA trailer has been detected.
RThe gradient is less than approximately 15 %.
RThe boot lid is closed.
RThe electric parking brake is not applied.
RThe driver's seat belt is fastened.
#Engage reverse gear k.
#Press button 1.
The camera image is shown on the central dis-
play.
#Take your hands o the steering wheel.
%This image is shown as an example and is
without trailer.
You can select various manoeuvres in the Trailer
Manoeuvring Assist menu. The manoeuvres avail-
able depend on the trailer's current articulation
angle and length.
#To adjust the articulation angle: select 4. To
change the articulation angle, swipe to the le
or right in the central display in the entire area
of the camera image.
or
#To activate the straightening manoeuvre:
select 2.
The system calculates the articulation angle in
such a way that the direction of the trailer at
the time of activation is maintained. There is a
short countersteering movement of the trailer
while the vehicle is reversing to guide it back
to the desired line. This allows the vehicle to
align with the trailer, while at the same time
maintaining the trailer's direction.
or
#To activate the 90° manoeuvre:
RAlign the vehicle in the same direction
(line) as the trailer.
RSelect 3 (le or right).
The system calculates the articulation angle
so that a trailer can be manoeuvred into a
driveway at the most acute angle possible
when it is perpendicular to its own vehicle.
Driving and parking 425
F206 0119 02
Aer the manoeuvre, the vehicle is aligned
again in the trailer's direction.
#Accelerate and brake as required.
%The maximum articulation angle depends on
the length of the trailer. The system calculates
this by driving the vehicle forwards, including
cornering. Before the trailer length has been
calculated, the maximum articulation angle is
approximately 23°. The longer the trailer, the
greater the maximum articulation angle (max.
approximately 60°).
%Be aware of all surroundings and always
remain ready to brake.
Trailer hitch
Notes on trailer operation
*NOTE The operating permit may be invali-
dated due to the illegal installation of
trailer hitches
The installation – including retrotting – of a
non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that
even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited.
#Observe the applicable legal regulations
for the installation of trailer hitches.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to car/
trailer combination swerving
If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the
car/trailer combination may start to swerve.
This could cause you to lose control of the
car/trailer combination. The car/trailer com-
bination may even overturn.
#Under no circumstances should you try
to straighten the car/trailer combination
by increasing your speed.
#Reduce the speed and do not counter-
steer.
#Brake if necessary.
*NOTE Damage to the engine due to over-
heating
#If you have a trailer hitch retrotted,
modications to the engine cooling sys-
tem may be necessary depending on the
vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrotted,
observe the fastening points on the vehicle
frame.
Retrotting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a
trailer load is specied in your vehicle documents.
If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved
for trailer operation.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:
Rdo not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
falls below the permissible tongue weight
Ruse a tongue weight as close as possible to
the maximum tongue weight
426 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Do not exceed the following values:
RPermissible trailer load
RPermissible rear axle load of the towing vehi-
cle
RPermissible gross mass of the towing vehicle
RPermissible gross mass of the trailer
RMaximum permissible speed of the trailer
Ensure the following before starting a journey:
Rthe tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow-
ing vehicle is set for a maximum load
Rthe lighting of the connected trailer is opera-
tional
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/
trailer combination may not exceed a maximum
speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the
operating permit. This also applies in countries in
which the permissible maximum speed for car/
trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
%When you are reversing with a trailer, remem-
ber to use the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
function (/ page 424).
Folding the ball neck out and in
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball
neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may
come loose.
#Always engage the ball neck as descri-
bed.
&WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck
swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when
unlocking or when it has not been properly
engaged.
There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's
range of movement!
#Unlock the ball neck only when its range
of movement is unobstructed.
#Always be sure the ball neck is engaged
when folding inwards.
*NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
erty due to folded-out ball neck
#When the trailer is not coupled or the
bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
neck or, in the case of a fully electric
trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
rect use of the trailer hitch
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle,
the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be
damaged in the process.
#Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
trailer or attaching approved carrier sys-
tems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a xture for a towing
eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is
permitted.
#When towing or tow-starting with the
trailer hitch, observe the information in
the section "Fitting and removing the
towing eye."
Driving and parking 427
F206 0119 02
Folding the ball neck out
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Keep the swivel range clear.
#Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
#Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold out from under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
#Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow
until it engages audibly in a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release
switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place,
the Trailer coupling Check lock message will
appear on the driver's display.
#Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean.
Check that it is either greased or dry (grease-
free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
Folding the ball neck in
#Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
428 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Push the ball neck in the direction of the
arrow until it engages audibly behind the
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message
on the driver display will disappear.
Observe the information about indicators on the
driver display:
RIndicator and warning lamps (/ page 916)
RDisplay messages (/ page 821)
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
&WARNING Risk of injury due to a change
in vehicle level
Vehicles with rear axle level control system:
the vehicle level may be changed unintention-
ally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or
uncouple the trailer during this time, you may
become trapped. In addition, other people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the tyres or
underneath the vehicle.
Observe the following when coupling or
uncoupling:
#Do not open or close any doors or the
boot lid.
#Do not initiate the level control system
and do not operate DYNAMIC SELECT.
#Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi-
cle only if the following conditions are met:
RThe ball neck is extended and engaged in a
securely locked position.
RVehicles with rear axle level control system:
ensure that the vehicle is at the normal level
(/ page 391).
Use the normal level in trailer operation. Driv-
ing with the vehicle raised is not permitted in
trailer operation on public roads.
Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the
vehicle with the following adapters:
Radapter plug
Radapter cable
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi-
cle only if the following conditions are met:
Rthe trailer is connected correctly
Rthe trailer lighting system is in working order
Driving and parking 429
F206 0119 02
A correctly connected trailer inuences, among
other things, the functions of the following sys-
tems:
RESP® trailer stabilisation
RTrailer Manoeuvring Assist
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC
RActive Parking Assist
RBlind Spot Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDrive Away Assist
RCross trac warning
RManoeuvring brake function
RReversing camera
R360° Camera
RRear-axle level control
Coupling up a trailer
*NOTE Damage to the starter battery due
to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power
supply of the trailer can damage the starter
battery.
#Do not use the vehicle's power supply to
charge the trailer battery.
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
#Position the trailer on a level surface behind
the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.
#Open the socket cap.
#Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on
the socket.
#Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as
it will go.
#Let the cap engage.
#Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
(only if you are using an adapter cable).
#Make sure that the cable is always slack for
ease of movement during cornering.
430 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
In the following circumstances, a message may
appear on the driver's display even if the trailer
has been connected correctly:
RLEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting
system.
RThe current has fallen below the trailer lighting
system's minimum current (50 mA).
%Accessories can be connected to the perma-
nent power supply up to 180 W and to the
power supply that is switched on via the igni-
tion lock.
Uncoupling a trailer
&WARNING Risk of being crushed and
becoming trapped when uncoupling a
trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged
inertia-activated brake, your hand may
become trapped between the vehicle and the
trailer drawbar.
#Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
*NOTE Damage during uncoupling with an
engaged overrun brake
The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple
with an engaged overrun brake.
#Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
disconnecting the trailer cable
Vehicles with rear axle level control system:
the vehicle may lower when you disconnect
the trailer cable.
This could result in other people becoming
trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle
body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.
#Make sure nobody is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the
wheel arches when you disconnect the
trailer cable.
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Disconnect the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
#Uncouple the trailer.
#Place the cover on the ball head.
%Trailers with LED lighting: aer uncoupling the
trailer, switch the vehicle on and then o
again.
Selecting a trailer type
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
5Trailer type
Conguring settings for a trailer
The settings on this menu make it possible to cal-
culate a route suitable for the selected trailer and
optimise the calculated arrival time.
#Select the desired trailer type.
#Select the maximum permissible speed of the
selected trailer.
#To save changes: select Confirm.
Driving and parking 431
F206 0119 02
%When contact with the trailer socket is estab-
lished (trailer/rear bicycle rack), a menu will
automatically appear on the display.
The following options are available:
RBicycle rack
RSmall trailer
RLarge trailer
Bicycle rack function
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicy-
cle rack is used incorrectly
The bicycle rack may become detached from
the vehicle in the following cases:
Rthe permissible load capacity of the trailer
hitch is exceeded.
Rthe bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
Rthe bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck
beneath the ball head.
Observe the following for your own safety and
that of other road users:
Ralways adhere to the permissible load
capacity of the trailer hitch.
Ralways observe the permissible rear axle
load of the towing vehicle.
Ruse the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-
cles.
Ralways mount the bicycle rack properly by
attaching to the ball head and the ball
neck guide pin, if possible.
Rwhen transporting four bicycles, always
use bicycle racks that have additional sup-
port on the ball neck guide pin.
Ruse only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Ralways observe the bicycle rack operating
instructions.
*NOTE Damage to or breakage of the trailer
hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used
bicycle rack.
#Only use bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz properly as described
below.
*NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
erty due to folded-out ball neck
#When the trailer is not coupled or the
bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
neck or, in the case of a fully electric
trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
*NOTE The operating permit may be invali-
dated due to the illegal installation of
trailer hitches
The installation – including retrotting – of a
non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that
even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited.
432 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
#Observe the applicable legal regulations
for the installation of trailer hitches.
Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin)
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, dierent
numbers of bicycles can be transported.
The following bicycle rack designs are possible:
RWhen mounted by attaching to ball head 1,
the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can
transport up to three bicycles.
RWhen mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin
2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You
can transport up to four bicycles.
The maximum load capacity is calculated from the
weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack
load.
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load,
trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 268).
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure
for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle.
Further information on the tyre pressure can be
found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 660).
Notes on loading
The larger the distance between the load's centre
of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load
on the trailer hitch.
Observe the following notes:
Rmount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle
as possible
Ralways distribute the load on the bicycle rack
as evenly as possible across the vehicle's lon-
gitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detach-
able parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats,
rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto
the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerody-
namic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicy-
cle rack.
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from
moving around and check them at regular inter-
vals to ensure that they are secure.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The han-
dling and rear view may be impaired. In addition,
aerodynamic resistance and the load on the
trailer hitch will increase.
Driving and parking 433
F206 0119 02
Load distribution on the bicycle rack
1Vertical distance between centre of gravity
and ball head
2Horizontal distance between centre of gravity
and ball head
3The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre
axis.
Observe the following information when loading
the bicycle rack:
Loading the bicycle rack
3 bicycles 4 bicycles
Total weight
of bicycle
rack and load
Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg
Max. distance
1
420 mm 420 mm
Max. distance
2
300 mm 400 mm
When transporting four bicycles or a total weight
between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle
racks with additional support on both trailer hitch
guide pins.
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for at towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems may result in damage to the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys-
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-
anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle.
The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.
Observe the following information:
RPermitted towing methods (/ page 648)
RPlug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods
(/ page 648)
RMercedes-AMG E Performance: permitted
towing methods (/ page 649)
RThe notes on towing the vehicle with both
axles on the ground (/ page 64)
434 Driving and parking
F206 0119 02
Notes on the driver display
&WARNING Risk of accident if the driver's
display fails
If the driver's display fails or malfunctions, you
may not be aware of any functional limitations
to safety-critical systems. This may aect the
operating safety of the vehicle.
#Park the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble and notify a qualied specialist work-
shop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired,
park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a
qualied specialist workshop.
The driver display shows the following basic infor-
mation:
RSpeed and engine speed
RFuel level and coolant temperature
RIndicator and warning lamps
Additional functions available include the follow-
ing:
RVarious menus, such as Assistance and Navi-
gation
RStatus displays for the driving systems
RDisplay messages
RInformation on speed, Consumption and
Range
RPower meter level and state of charge of the
high-voltage battery
RIndicator and warning lamps
Additional notes for plug-in hybrid vehicles:
RFurther indicators on the driver display:
-õ Drive system is activated
-° "Foot o the accelerator"
(/ page 280)
Some menu content and settings can be changed
(/ page 437).
Operating the driver display
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving when operating
the driver display.
Driver's display 435
F206 0119 02
Scrolling on the menu bar
1Back button
2Main menu button
3Touch Control
You can manage the content of the driver display
with the controls on the le of the steering wheel.
You can navigate the content by swiping vertically
and horizontally with one nger on Touch Control
3. Press the Touch Control to conrm your
selection.
%To operate Touch Control 3 in the most
eective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos-
sible. You can also set the sensitivity of the
Touch Control on the central display
(/ page 471).
#Briey press main menu button 2.
#Select a menu by swiping to the le or right
on Touch Control 3.
#To conrm: press Touch Control 3.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Driver display menus
Notes on menus on the driver display
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving when operating
the driver display.
436 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
The following menus can be called up via the
menu bar on the driver display:
RUnderstated
RSport
RClassic
RNavigation
RAssistance
RService
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE
On some of these menus, you can choose from a
range of information for the centre display con-
tent.
On most of the menus, you can use Options to
congure further settings for the menu-specic
display content.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Calling up and operating menus on the driver dis-
play
Calling up a menu on the driver display
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
1Back button
2Main menu button
3Touch Control
#Press main menu button 2 on the steering
wheel.
The menu bar will be shown in the lower area
of the driver display.
Driver's display 437
F206 0119 02
#Swipe to the le or right on Touch Control 3
and select a menu (e.g. the Classic menu) on
the menu bar.
#To conrm: press Touch Control 3.
Calling up or exiting the Options submenu
#To call up: press Touch Control 3.
#To exit: press back button 1.
Browsing through display content or lists
#Swipe vertically or horizontally on Touch Con-
trol 3.
%On some menus, an index character will be
displayed at the right edge of the centre dis-
play content to indicate how the information
has been sorted.
Presetting displays
You can preset individually congured information
of a menu and thus determine the standard dis-
play.
#Press Touch Control 3 until the bar is com-
pletely lled.
Answer the Set direct entry? query as follows.
#Swipe to the le on Touch Control 3 and
select Yes.
#To conrm: press Touch Control 3.
#To call up presettings: press back button 1
on the upper level of a menu.
%Pressing back button 1 on the standard dis-
play will open the previous menu.
Resetting values
#To call up the Options submenu: press Touch
Control 3.
#Select Yes .
#To conrm: press Touch Control 3.
Classic or Understated menu
Driver display:
4Classic
Selecting the centre display content
The Classic menu shows the driver display sepa-
rated into speedometer and rev counter. The area
in between can be lled with various types of
information.
438 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
1Speedometer
2Rev counter or clock
3Transmission position
4Coolant temperature display
5Outside temperature
6Centre display content (example: trip dis-
tance)
7Time
8Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator
#Call up the Classic menu via the driver display
menu bar.
#To select display content: Swipe upwards or
downwards on the Touch Control and select
the display content.
The following information can be shown in the
centre display content 6:
RTrip and total distance
RTrip computer From start and From reset
RECO display
RConsumption
RATTENTION ASSIST
RAudio
RNavigation
Trip computer (example)
1Proportion of driving done in electric mode
(distance travelled under electric power per
total distance travelled)
Information about range
RThe actual range achieved may dier from the
range displayed. Your previous driving style
will be taken into account when the range is
being calculated.
RFactors such as outside temperature or cli-
mate control settings have a direct inuence
on the achievable range.
Driver's display 439
F206 0119 02
RWhile the navigation system or commuter
route is active, additional information about
the route ahead can be included in the range
calculation.
Information on electric energy consumption
RThe From start and From reset consumption
gures take into account all active consumer
equipment when it comes to the drive sys-
tem's operational readiness õ.
Information on the proportion of driving done in
electric mode
RWhen the proportion of driving done in electric
mode is determined, only distances driven
under the following conditions will be taken
into account:
-The combustion engine is switched o.
-The Electric or Hybrid drive program is
active.
-The high-voltage battery is charged.
Distances travelled under electric power in the
Battery Level drive program or with an empty
high-voltage battery will not be taken into account
in the proportion of driving done in electric mode.
%To increase the proportion of driving done in
electric mode, charge the high-voltage battery
as frequently as possible at a suitable charg-
ing facility.
Selecting the radio station or track on the station
or track list
You can change radio stations or tracks on the
station or track list in the centre display content
with audio information.
The following will be adjusted in the MBUX multi-
media system:
RConguring the station or track list
RSwitching between media sources
RSetting the frequency band
1Track list in the centre display content (exam-
ple)
#To change radio stations or tracks: swipe le
or right on the Touch Control and select a
radio station or track on the station or track
list 1.
440 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
%If you do not select something immediately
aer opening the station or track list 1, the
view will return to the radio station or track
selected.
%The radio station or track displayed when the
vehicle is restarted depends on the user pro-
le used for the previous trip.
Calling up or exiting the Options submenu
Depending on the information in the centre dis-
play content, you can congure various settings
on the Options submenu.
#To call up the Options submenu: press the
Touch Control.
#To exit the Options submenu: press the back
button G.
The following functions may be available on the
Options submenu, for example:
RNavigation: selecting and adjusting zoom,
route guidance and map settings
RResetting the trip odometer
RResetting the trip computer From start
RResetting the trip computer From reset
RResetting the ECO display values
Changing colour settings on the Understated
menu
#Call up the Understated menu via the driver
display menu bar.
#To call up the colour list: press the Touch Con-
trol.
The colour list on the Understated menu will
be displayed.
#To select colour settings: swipe upwards or
downwards on the le-hand Touch Control and
select the desired colour setting.
%If you do not select anything within a limited
time aer opening the colour list, the view will
switch back to the default view of the Under-
stated menu.
#To exit the colour list: press the back button
G.
%Depending on the equipment, the selected
colour setting will be adopted for the ambient
lighting and the MBUX multimedia system. If
you select the Understated menu on the
driver display, the content in the MBUX multi-
media system will also be made smaller.
Classic or Understated menu (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Driver display:
4Classic
Selecting the centre display content
The Classic menu shows the driver display sepa-
rated into speedometer and rev counter. The area
in between can be lled with various types of
information.
Driver's display 441
F206 0119 02
Illustration of plug-in hybrid vehicles (example)
1Speedometer
2Rev counter
3Gear display
4State of charge of the high-voltage battery
5Outside temperature
6Recuperation display and electric drive sup-
port display
7Centre display content (example: tempera-
ture)
8Time
9Fuel level and fuel ller ap location indicator
#Call up the Classic menu via the driver display
menu bar.
#To select display content: swipe upwards or
downwards on the le-hand Touch Control and
select the display content.
The following information can be shown in the
centre display content:
RTrip and total distance
RTrip computer From start and From reset
RECO display
RConsumption
RATTENTION ASSIST
RAudio
RNavigation
RPlug-in hybrid vehicles: temperature (transmis-
sion oil, engine oil, coolant, high-voltage bat-
tery and high-voltage motor)
RVehicles with combustion engines: tempera-
ture display (transmission oil, engine oil, cool-
ant)
RSet-up (drive, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension
and sound)
REngine data (current power output and current
torque)
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, AMG-
specic content regarding temperature, set-
up and engine data will be displayed. You can
set the display content either using the but-
tons on the multifunction steering wheel or via
the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 288).
Changing the radio station or track on the station
or track list
You can change radio stations or tracks on the
station or track list in the centre display content
with audio information.
The following will be adjusted in the MBUX multi-
media system:
RConguring the station or track list
RSwitching between media sources
442 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
RSetting the frequency band
1Radio stations in the centre display content
(example)
#To change radio stations or tracks: swipe le
or right on the Touch Control and select a
radio station or track on the station or track
list.
%If you do not select something immediately
aer opening the station or track list, the view
will return to the radio station or track selec-
ted.
%The radio station or track displayed when the
vehicle is restarted depends on the user pro-
le used for the previous trip.
The following functions may be available on the
Options submenu, for example:
RNavigation: selecting and adjusting zoom,
route guidance and map settings
RResetting the trip odometer
RResetting the trip computer From start
RResetting the trip computer From reset
RResetting the ECO display values
Changing colour settings on the Understated
menu
#Call up the Understated menu via the driver
display menu bar.
#To call up the colour list: press the Touch Con-
trol.
The colour list on the Understated menu will
be displayed.
#To select colour settings: swipe upwards or
downwards on the le-hand Touch Control and
change the colour setting.
%If you do not select something immediately
aer opening the colour list, the view will
switch back to the default view for the Under-
stated menu.
#To exit the colour list: press the back button
G.
%Depending on the equipment, the selected
colour setting will also be adopted for the
ambient lighting and the MBUX multimedia
system. If you select the Understated menu
on the driver display, the content in the MBUX
multimedia system will also be made smaller.
Service menu
Driver display:
4Service
The current status of the vehicle is shown on the
Service menu.
#To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
Driver's display 443
F206 0119 02
The following display content is available on the
Service menu (equipment-dependent):
RInformation about how many messages are in
the message memory
RAdBlue: AdBlue® range and ll level
RTyre pressure:
-Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre
pressure monitoring system (/ page 661)
-Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
system (/ page 662)
RASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date
(/ page 612)
REngine oil level: checking the engine oil level
(/ page 33)
RCoolant indicator
RTemperature display (transmission oil, engine
oil, coolant, high-voltage battery and high-volt-
age motor)
The following functions are available on the
Options submenu:
RTyre pressure (/ page 661)
RMessage memory (/ page 821)
Assistance menu
Driver display:
4Assistance
The Assistance menu displays various driver assis-
tance systems and navigation instructions.
#To call up the display: select Assistance on
the driver display.
#Press the Touch Control.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC indicator on
the assistant display (example)
In vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package,
the following displays may vary depending on the
driving situation:
RThe navigation instructions in the le-hand
display section
RThe trac light view in the right-hand display
section
RThe display of the driver assistance systems
RThe level of detail on the assistant display
In vehicles without the Driving Assistance Pack-
age, your lane and the vehicle in front will be dis-
played.
The following status displays are available on the
assistant display:
RY Green: pedestrian detection active
RY Grey: pedestrian detection enabled
R¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind
Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena-
bled and ready for operation
R¸ Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind
Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena-
bled but not ready for operation
444 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
The content on the assistant display will adapt to
the following situations:
RNumber of lanes detected
RChange of direction, e.g. lane change
RCurrent road conditions
RRoad users detected
%The assistant display will not display other
detected obstacles with the exception of road
users.
The following functions are available on the
Options submenu:
RStarting route guidance
RWith active route guidance: end route guid-
ance
RCall up previous destinations and favourites
RStart new route guidance to a recent destina-
tion
RStart new route guidance to a favourite
Sport menu
Requirements
RFor Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.
Driver display:
4Sport
The Sport menu displays information about the
engine data, the setup and the temperature of the
vehicle.
#To call up the menu: swipe to the le or right
on the Touch Control.
#To conrm: press Touch Control.
1Current torque
2Temperature (transmission oil temperature,
engine oil temperature, coolant temperature)
3Current power output
4Set-up (drive position, transmission position,
AMG DYNAMICS, suspension tuning, exhaust
system, ESP®)
5Engine speed
Driver's display 445
F206 0119 02
%Depending on the equipment, AMG-specic
content regarding temperature, setup and
engine data will be displayed. You can set the
setup display content using the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel or via the
MBUX multimedia system (/ page 288). You
can also activate or deactivate ESP® using the
steering wheel button or via the MBUX multi-
media system (/ page 345).
Sport menu (plug-in hybrid)
Driver display:
4Sport
The Sport menu provides additional information
about the operating energy as well as the recuper-
ated power of the vehicle.
%When you call up the Sport menu on the
menu bar of the driver display, the menu col-
our setting will automatically be applied to the
MBUX multimedia system.
#To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
1Display area for recuperated power (recupera-
tion)
2Display area for output
3Additional display area for output
Supersport menu
Requirements
RFor Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.
Driver display:
4Supersport
Selecting the centre display content
1Current torque and recuperation display
2Centre display content (example: selected
gear and electric drive support display)
3Current power and recuperation display
#Press the main menu button ò on the
steering wheel.
#Swipe to the le or right on the Touch Control
to call up the Supersport menu on the menu
bar of the driver display.
446 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
#To select display content: swipe upwards or
downwards on the Touch Control.
%Displays 1 and 3 vary depending on the
centre display content.
The centre display content shows the following
information:
RTransmission position display
RPlug-in hybrid vehicles: temperature display
(transmission oil, engine oil, coolant, high-volt-
age battery and high-voltage motor)
RVehicles with combustion engines: tempera-
ture display (transmission oil, engine oil, cool-
ant)
RVehicles with combustion engines: engine
data
RSet-up (drive, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension
and sound)
RG-force
RTrip and total distance
RDistance From start and From reset
RConsumption
RAudio
RNavigation
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, AMG-
specic content regarding temperature, set-
up and engine data will be displayed. You can
congure the set-up display content either
using the buttons on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system
(/ page 288).
Track Pace menu
Requirements
RFor Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.
Driver display:
4TRACK PACE
The Track Pace function is intended only for
closed race tracks. Do not use this function on
public roads, and adapt your driving style to your
personal capabilities and the ambient conditions.
The following options will be displayed on the
TRACK PACE menu:
RG-meter
RRace track selected
RBraking and acceleration procedure
RGear currently selected
Indicators on the Track Pace menu (example)
1G-meter
2Centre display content (example: gear display)
3Telemetry display (example: selected race
track)
#To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
The content of the TRACK PACE menu will adapt
to the selected settings on the central display:
RGear display
Driver's display 447
F206 0119 02
RBraking points
RAcceleration
RQuarter-miles
RRace track selected on the central display
RCurrent race
RRecord route
While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter will
show the forces that are exerted on the vehicle
occupants both laterally and in the direction of
travel. The maximum values will be shown in red
in the coordinate system.
Navigation menu
Driver display:
4Navigation
The Navigation menu shows the relevant map
with navigation instructions.
#To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
Changing the scale of the selected map view
1Distance to the change of direction
2Road to which the change of direction leads
3Trac incident indicator
4Currently selected route
5Indicator showing vehicle's current position
6Change-of-direction symbol
7Recommended lane (white)
8Lane not recommended (grey)
9Current lane
%The level of detail in the navigation instruc-
tions in the le-hand display section may vary.
#To zoom in and out on the map directly: swipe
upwards or downwards on the Touch Control.
%If you do not operate anything in Autozoom,
the system will reset the scale of the map
view already selected aer a short time.
You can set the map scale permanently in the
MBUX multimedia system (/ page 540).
The following functions are available on the
Options submenu:
RWith active route guidance: end route guid-
ance
RSelect route guidance
RMap settings
%If the current route guidance is ended on the
Navigation menu of the driver display, it will
also be ended in the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem.
On the Options submenu, you can use other func-
tions in the Destinations and Map settings cate-
gories.
You can use the following functions in the Desti-
nations category:
RCall up previous destinations and favourites
RStart new route guidance to a favourite
448 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
%The two options Work and Home will be dis-
played in Favourites even if no address is
stored.
You can use the following functions in the Map
settings category:
RActivate auto zoom
RSet the map view, satellite view and route
overview.
The following map views are available on the Navi-
gation menu:
REntire route
R2D direction of travel
R2D north-up
Head-up display
Function of the head-up display
The head-up display projects various content into
the driver's eld of vision, for example.
You can use the head-up display menu bar to
select dierent contexts, e.g.:
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: RACE START
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: Race
RMinimal
RSport
RStandard
RSettings
RHead-up display on/o
Head-up display content with navigation (9x3°)
1Navigation instructions
2Navigation instructions (distance to the next
route event)
3Steer Assist status
4Current speed
5Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise
control)
6Detected trac signs (Trac Sign Assist)
When you receive a call, the 6 Call waiting
message will appear on the head-up display and
the driver display.
Driver's display 449
F206 0119 02
System limits
Visibility is inuenced by the following conditions
in particular:
RSeat position
RImage position setting
RLight conditions
RWet road surfaces
RObjects on the display cover
RPolarisation in sunglasses
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Operating the head-up display
Selecting display content of the head-up display
via the menu bar of the driver display
#Press the main menu button ò.
#To select the menu bar of the head-up dis-
play: swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
Switching between display content on the head-
up display
#Swipe to the le or right on the Touch Control.
A preview of the selected display content will
appear on the head-up display.
#To conrm: press the a button.
Switching back to the driver display
#Press the G or ò button.
Setting the position and brightness
#Swipe to the le or right on the Touch Control
and select Settings on the menu bar of the
head-up display.
#Press the Touch Control.
The current position and brightness settings
will be displayed as graphics on the head-up
display as well as on the driver display.
#To adjust the position: swipe upwards or
downwards on the Touch Control.
#To adjust the brightness: swipe to the le or
right on the Touch Control.
The settings congured for position and
brightness will be saved automatically.
#Press the G or a button to exit the set-
tings.
Switching the head-up display on/o
Driver display:
4©
Switching on
#Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
#Press Touch Control a.
Switching o
#Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
450 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
#Swipe on the Touch Control and select Head-
up display.
#Press Touch Control a.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
1Electric drive support
2Recuperation behaviour of the electric motor
%Due to various system limits, the values dis-
played may temporarily dier slightly from the
actual value.
Function of the power meter
1Beginning of the electrical drive support dis-
play range
2End of the electrical drive support display
range
3Current state of charge of the high-voltage
battery
4Maximum recuperated energy
5Start of the display range of recuperated
energy
%The Electric drive program is not available if
the state of charge of the high-voltage battery
falls below the minimum value of 25% 3.
Electric mode is still possible when power out-
put requests are low or when at a standstill.
The power meter has the following functions:
RIn electric mode, the area 12 shows
what percentage of the electrical drive is cur-
rently being used. The combustion engine is
switched on at 100%. In boost mode, the elec-
trical power assistance of the drive is dis-
played.
RThe area 45 shows the recuperation and
charging behaviour using the combustion
engine.
%Due to various system limits, the displayed
value 4 may temporarily dier slightly from
the actual value.
Overview of status indicators on the driver dis-
play
The status indicators for the driving and driving
safety systems are shown in the 1 and 4
areas.
Driver's display 451
F206 0119 02
YPedestrian detection (on assistant display
only) (/ page 225)
ÇActive Parking Assist is available
(/ page 412)
ÈActive Parking Assist has detected a park-
ing space (/ page 412)
éParking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 409)
hCruise control (/ page 350)
ÈLimiter (/ page 351)
çActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 354)
ÒSpecied distance for Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 354)
æActive Brake Assist switched o
(/ page 375)
ÄActive Brake Assist impaired or not func-
tioning (/ page 375)
ØActive Steering Assist (/ page 363)
±Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 367)
ðActive Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 388)
ZActive Blind Spot Assist (on assistant dis-
play only) (/ page 387)
ZBlind Spot Assist (on assistant display only)
(/ page 387)
õPlug‑in hybrid operation activated
°Haptic accelerator pedal
(/ page 278, 280, 274)
èECO start/stop function (/ page 272)
ëHOLD function (/ page 347)
_Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 228)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(/ page 230)
ðMaximum permissible speed exceeded (for
certain countries only)
¬Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 363)
ÒSlippery road surface warning
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected
instructions and trac signs (/ page 375)
Vehicles with Trac Sign Assist: detected instruc-
tions and trac signs (/ page 379)
Important information from other driving systems
may briey appear in front of the displayed trac
signs.
Overview of status indicators on the driver dis-
play (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The status indicators for the driving and driving
safety systems are shown in the 1 and 6
areas.
452 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
Vehicle with plug-in hybrid (example) Vehicle with combustion engine (example)
%The number, position and presentation of the
status indicators on the driver display depend
on which systems are activated or deactiva-
ted.
Depending on the equipment, Mercedes-AMG
vehicles have the following status displays:
YPedestrian detection (on assistant display
only) (/ page 225)
ÇActive Parking Assist is available
(/ page 412)
ÈActive Parking Assist has detected a park-
ing space (/ page 412)
éParking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 409)
hCruise control (/ page 350)
ÈLimiter (/ page 351)
çActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 354)
ÒSpecied distance for Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 354)
æActive Brake Assist switched o
(/ page 375)
ÄActive Brake Assist impaired or not func-
tioning (/ page 375)
ØActive Steering Assist (/ page 363)
Driver's display 453
F206 0119 02
±Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 367)
ðActive Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 388)
ZActive Blind Spot Assist (on assistant dis-
play only) (/ page 387)
õPlug‑in hybrid operation activated
°Haptic accelerator pedal
(/ page 278, 280, 274)
èECO start/stop function (/ page 272)
ëHOLD function (/ page 347)
_Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 228)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(/ page 230)
ðMaximum permissible speed exceeded (for
certain countries only)
¬Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 363)
ÒSlippery road surface warning
pEngine operating temperature warning
lamp (/ page 267)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected
instructions and trac signs (/ page 375)
Vehicles with Trac Sign Assist: detected instruc-
tions and trac signs (/ page 379)
Important information from other driving systems
may briey appear in front of the displayed trac
signs.
454 Driver's display
F206 0119 02
Notes on operating safety
For your own safety, always observe the following
points when operating mobile communications
equipment and especially your voice control sys-
tem:
RObserve the legal requirements for the coun-
try in which you are driving.
RIf you use the voice control system in an emer-
gency your voice can change and your tele-
phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can
thereby be delayed.
RFamiliarise yourself with the voice control sys-
tem functions before starting the journey.
%The voice control system does not replace
the Owner's Manual.
The answers from the voice control system do
not provide the complete scope of informa-
tion contained in the Owner's Manual. The
voice control system also does not give
detailed warning or damage information.
Therefore read the Owner's Manual so that
you are fully informed about the functions and
the safe operation of the vehicle.
Operation
Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func-
tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia
system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navi-
gation or Telephone. The MBUX Voice Assistant is
operational about half a minute aer switching on
the vehicle and can be operated from all seats
(depending on the special equipment).
Conducting a dialogue
Requirements
RVoice activation is activated in the multimedia
system (/ page 456).
RFor corrections during output, the Voice
barge-in option must be activated in the multi-
media system (/ page 456).
Starting a dialogue
#Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX
Voice Assistant.
or
#Press the £ button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
A wave appears in the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem. The dialogue can be started.
For the dialogue with the MBUX Voice Assistant,
you can use complete sentences of colloquial lan-
guage as voice commands. Voice activation can
also be combined directly with a voice command,
e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it outside?
Interrupting the dialogue
#During the dialogue say Pause.
The dialogue is interrupted.
#Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.
Correcting an entry
#During the dialogue say Correction.
or
#Interrupt the system's voice output.
MBUX Voice Assistant 455
F206 0119 02
Changing dialogue level
#During the dialogue, say Back.
The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps back to the
previous dialogue step.
#During the dialogue, say From the beginning
again.
The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps to the high-
est dialogue level.
Navigating in the selection list
If a voice command does not achieve a clear
result, a selection list is shown.
#Say the line number or the content to select
an entry or to have further details shown.
#Say Next page or Previous page to browse
the selection list.
Calling up help
#For information about the MBUX Voice Assis-
tant: say Hey Mercedes, what can you do?
#Current application: say Help.
You will receive suggestions and information
about operation of MBUX Voice Assistant for
the current application.
#Specic function: call up the voice command
for the required function, for example with
Hey Mercedes, I need help with the radio.
#Digital Owner's Manual: say Show me the
Owner's Manual.
The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is
available on the central display when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Overview of the operable functions of the MBUX
Voice Assistant
You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to operate
the following functions depending on the vehicle
equipment:
RTelephone
RText message and e-mail
RNavigation
RRadio and media
RVehicle functions
ROnline functions
Full functionality of the voice control system is
only available for you with activation of online
voice control (/ page 456).
Information on the language setting
You can change the language of the MBUX Voice
Assistant via the system language settings
(/ page 490). If the set system language is not
supported by the MBUX Voice Assistant, English
will be selected.
Setting functions of MBUX Voice Assistant using
the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Voice assistant
Switching voice activation of MBUX Voice Assis-
tant on or o
#Select Hey Mercedes.
When the function is active, the Hey
Mercedes voice command can activate the
dialogue.
456 MBUX Voice Assistant
F206 0119 02
Switching direct commands on or o
#Select Z.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
If the function is active, some commands can
be used without Hey Mercedes, for example
Next track.
Switching voice activation for individual seats on
or o
#Select Z.
#Switch the function for the desired seats on or
o.
Switching voice interruption on or o
#Select Further settings.
#Select Voice barge-in.
If the function is active, a command can be
interjected during voice output of the system.
Switching proactivity on or o
#Select Further settings.
#Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate
your profile or Don't forget your phone.
When the function is active, the voice assis-
tant proactively provides information in spe-
cic situations.
Activating or deactivating online voice control
%Online voice control is activated at the fac-
tory.
#Select Online recognition.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
If the function is activated and a Mercedes me
user account is linked to the vehicle, addi-
tional results are available through the provi-
sion of external information, e.g. information
on POIs. By clicking the symbol in the wave,
more information about the online voice con-
trol can be displayed.
Activating or deactivating contacts for online use
#Select Contact upload for online recognition.
When the function is active, contacts will be
found more easily and accurately using voice
input.
Using MBUX Voice Assistant eectively
Notes on optimum use of the MBUX Voice Assis-
tant
RThe MBUX Voice Assistant is operational half a
minute aer switching on the vehicle and can
be operated from all seats, depending on the
equipment installed. The system recognises
from which seat the command was spoken
and performs actions according to the seat
position.
RWhen a dialogue is ended, the MBUX Voice
Assistant continues to be active for as long as
the wave is displayed in the multimedia sys-
tem. You can say another voice command
without saying Hey Mercedes.
RUsing the direct command Change language
to English, the system language can be
changed to English without Hey Mercedes.
Direct commands must be activated for this.
RIf a user prole has been stored and is active,
the MBUX Voice Assistant can make sugges-
tions based on the habits of the user. If the
voice commands are not clear, the system
MBUX Voice Assistant 457
F206 0119 02
selects an action. The action can be corrected
with a new voice command.
Say Hey Mercedes, load my personal profile,
to activate the prole. The user's voice must
rst be taught in by the system and assigned
to a prole.
Further information on user proles
(/ page 474).
RWith the MBUX Voice Assistant, incoming calls
can be accepted or rejected without the key-
word Hey Mercedes.
Information on the MBUX online voice assistant
The online voice control facilitates recognition
and thanks to external information makes addi-
tional results available.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
activate online voice control (/ page 456).
You will need a Mercedes me user account for
this. If you do not yet have a user account you
must create one and connect it with your vehicle
(/ page 578).
Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The
Mercedes me services are shown and can be acti-
vated (/ page 578).
By clicking on the symbols displayed in the wave,
further information on the online status is dis-
played.
When online voice control is active, additional
functions are available such as:
RWeather
RGeneral knowledge
RPublic holidays and school holidays
RSmarthome
RMessages
RTime, date and time zones
RPocket and currency calculator
RFootball results and xture lists
RShare prices
RCalendar
RChitChat
RHoroscope
RGeo Quiz
%The availability of these functions is country
and equipment-dependent.
%Text content is taken from Wikipedia in
accordance with the CC BY-SA 3.0 licence.
Essential voice commands
Notes on voice commands
It is not necessary to use exact voice commands
to call up a specic function. The MBUX Voice
Assistant also understands you when you use your
colloquial speech. Some examples are listed
below. For some languages however these exam-
ples are only available to a limited extent.
Examples of voice commands:
RNavigation (/ page 459)
RTelephone (/ page 459)
RRadio and TV (/ page 459)
RMedia player (/ page 459)
RMessages (/ page 460)
RVehicle functions (/ page 460)
ROnline functions (/ page 461)
458 MBUX Voice Assistant
F206 0119 02
Examples of navigation voice commands
You can operate the navigation system using the
MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list oers
just a small selection of the possible navigation
commands. You will receive additional sugges-
tions if you say Help for navigation.
RDrive me home.
RWhere is the nearest service station?
RIs there a service area along the route?
RSet Covent Garden as intermediate destina-
tion.
RCancel the route guidance.
RShow my last destination.
RI want to buy juice.
RSearch for an Asian restaurant, but not Japa-
nese, in South London.
Examples of telephone voice commands
You can operate phones connected with the
MBUX multimedia system using the MBUX Voice
Assistant. The following list oers just a small
selection of the possible telephone commands.
You will receive additional suggestions if you say
Help for phone.
RCall Peter Miller on the mobile phone.
RDial 0711 17 0.
RCall my father.
RAccept call
RReject call
RSearch for the contact Peter Miller.
RSwitch to address book
RShow me the incoming calls.
RSwitch phone
Examples of radio and TV voice commands
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
operate the radio and TV using the MBUX Voice
Assistant. The following list oers just a small
selection of the possible radio or TV voice com-
mands. You will receive additional suggestions if
you say Help for radio or Help for TV.
RPlay the radio station Heart FM.
RNext station.
RPrevious station.
RShow me the list of radio stations
RSave the station
RWhat am I listening to?
Examples of media voice commands
You can operate connected media sources and
online music using the MBUX Voice Assistant. The
following list oers just a small selection of the
possible media voice commands. You will receive
additional suggestions if you say Help for media
or Help for player.
RPlay Michael Jackson.
RPlay "Yellow Submarine' by the Beatles.
RNext track.
RPrevious track.
RPlay similar track.
RRepeat this track.
RSwitch on random playback.
RMute the music.
MBUX Voice Assistant 459
F206 0119 02
RSwitch to USB.
Examples of message voice commands
Messages can be created, edited and listened to
using the MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list
oers just a small selection of the possible mes-
sage voice commands. You will receive additional
suggestions if you say Help for messaging.
RWrite a text message to Jane Doe: When will
the next meeting take place?
RShow me my new e-mails.
RWrite an e-mail to Jane Doe.
RRead me my new text messages.
RShow all new text messages.
RWrite an e-mail to John Doe in English
Examples of vehicle voice commands
You can operate vehicle settings and vehicle func-
tions using the MBUX Voice Assistant. The follow-
ing list oers just a small selection of the possible
vehicle voice commands.
%If no seat is mentioned for commands, the
action is carried out automatically for the seat
from which the command was spoken or for
the function which is closest to that seat.
RSwitch the seat heating to level 2.
RMy feet are cold.
RStart the Refresh programme.
RSwitch the massage function on.
RI would like to set the ambient light to blue
RSwitch on the reading lamp.
RTurn off the rear light.
ROpen all the windows.
RSwitch the driver display to 3D.
RHow fast can I drive here?
RTell me my next service appointment
RHow warm is it outside?
Information about the vehicle can also be reques-
ted:
RInformation about individual items of the vehi-
cle equipment
-Hey Mercedes, which massage pro-
grammes do you have?
-Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot
Assist?
-Hey Mercedes, where is the warning tri-
angle?
RInformation about functioning of the systems
and components installed in the vehicle
-Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?
-Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?
-Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX?
RInformation about operating the systems and
components installed in the vehicle
-Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my
smartphone?
-Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the
main beam headlamps?
-Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ioniza-
tion function?
You can also use the vehicle voice commands to
directly call up the menus for the plug-in hybrid
460 MBUX Voice Assistant
F206 0119 02
settings and operate the corresponding vehicle
functions.
R"Display the energy flow."
R"Switch to charging settings."
R"Activate pre-entry climate control."
R"Where is the nearest charging station?"
R"How far can I still drive?"
R"Set the departure time to tomorrow morn-
ing at 8 am."
Examples of online functions
Depending on the country, language and vehicle
equipment, additional functions are available
when online voice control is active. The system
accesses external information and can, as a
result, answer general knowledge questions and
make calculations, for example.
RIs the sun shining in Manchester?
RIs it raining at my destination?
RWhat are the skiing conditions on the Zugspi-
tze?
RWhat's the time in Sydney now?
RIn which country do you pay with dollars?
RHow many Swiss franks make 25 euros?
RHow long now until the holidays?
RWhat day is it tomorrow?
RWhat is 20 % of 29?
RWhat does my horoscope say?
RWhat is the price of Mercedes-Benz Group
shares?
RLet's play Geo Quiz.
RI'm bored.
RWho is the current prime minister?
RWhat do you know about the Globe Theatre
in London?
RWho painted the picture "The Scream"?
RWhat's the status in the Premier League?
RCreate a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am.
RWhat's my next task?
RTell me a joke.
RHow many languages do you speak?
RWhat is your favourite animal?
RAre there any updates?
RIs the light still on in the kitchen?
RSwitch off all the devices in my house.
RPlease set the temperature in the living
room to 24 degrees.
Direct command examples
With direct commands, some functions can be
operated without rst saying the voice command
Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the
function must be activated in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 456).
RNext TV channel
RPrevious TV channel
RNext radio station
RPrevious radio station
RNext station
RPrevious station
RNext track
RPrevious track
RStart dashcam recording
MBUX Voice Assistant 461
F206 0119 02
RStop dashcam recording
RShow the map
R3D map
R2D map
RAlign map to north
RAlign map in direction of travel
RShow all routes
RShow traffic
RNavigate to work
RNavigate home
RRepeat driving instruction
RCancelling route guidance
RChange language to English
462 MBUX Voice Assistant
F206 0119 02
Overview and operation
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
*NOTE Increased surface temperature due
to direct sunlight on the central display
The surface of the central display is very dark.
If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the
surface can become very hot.
#If the central display has been exposed
to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down
before touching it for a long time.
1Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX
multimedia system
MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experi-
ence.
• Operates Touch Control (/ page 470)
2Central display with touch functionality
• Home screen overview (/ page 469)
• Operates the touchscreen (/ page 471)
3Switch panel with:
ú Fingerprint sensor
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
on or o, switches the central display o
a Switches sound on or o
ø Adjusts the volume
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
1Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX
multimedia system
MBUX multimedia system 463
F206 0119 02
MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experi-
ence.
• Operates Touch Control (/ page 470)
2Central display with touch functionality
• Home screen overview (/ page 469)
• Operates the touchscreen (/ page 471)
3Switch panel with:
ú Fingerprint sensor
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
on or o, switches the central display o
a Switches sound on or o
ø Adjusts the volume
%Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows
voice dialogue. Operation with natural speech
starts aer the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes"
(/ page 455). You can start voice navigation,
for example, with the input of a three-word
address from what3words.
Numerous application, online services, services
and apps are available for you. These can be
called up via the home screen.
You can conveniently call up your favourites using
the ß button on the steering wheel. Quick-
access in the home screen and in the applications
serve to select functions more quickly.
If you use the learning function of the multimedia
system, you will receive suggestions during opera-
tion of the most probable navigation destinations,
media sources, radio stations and contacts. The
conguration of the suggestions is completed in
the system settings. You can compile your user
prole from various vehicle settings and settings
of the multimedia system. Some functions and
services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in
biometric procedures to identify yourself with
these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN.
The Notications Centre collects incoming noti-
cations, e.g. about an available soware update.
Depending on the type of notication it oers var-
ious actions. The call is made via the Control
Centre.
With the global search, you can search on the
home screen via categories, e.g. in the navigation,
and on the internet.
Anti-the protection
This device is equipped with technical provisions
to protect it against the. More detailed informa-
tion about anti-the protection can be obtained at
a qualied specialist workshop.
Zero layer
Function of the zero layer
%Your soware can be upgraded to a more cur-
rent version at a later date.
The zero layer provides you with dynamic content
from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to
quickly access and control the applications you
use. When you select © on the central display,
the digital map with the applications appears in
the lower display area. Compared to the home
screen with a classic menu, the steps required to
call up the applications are reduced. You can
switch between the zero layer and the home
screen with a classic menu.
The applications can be hidden from the display
area and shown again.
The zero layer provides the following modules and
applications:
RNavigation module
464 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
In the expanded view you can, for example,
display the route overview, switch on the dis-
play of trac information and make settings
for View (map), Messages & tones, Route.
REntertainment (media, radio) and telephone
When the lower display area is shown, the
entertainment sources are always displayed.
A mobile phone must be connected to the
MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be
displayed.
RActive applications
The lower display area shows an active mas-
sage programme, for example.
RSuggestions
Suggestions are displayed on the lower display
area based on context and your user behav-
iour. Here are a few examples:
-Latest calls
-Active massage programs
-Vehicle functions
-Online voice applications
The applications are rst displayed in a reduced
view. By tapping on them, you can operate them
or open the associated menu (expanded view).
A long press on a suggestion opens a context
menu in which further functions are available.
The learning function can be switched on and o
for the options (/ page 490).
Overview of the zero layer
Digital map and user-specic applications (exam-
ple)
1Navigation module (reduced view)
2Enters a destination (/ page 38)
Searching for a parking space, in the vicinity
for example
MBUX multimedia system 465
F206 0119 02
3Calls up the Control Centre (pull the bar
down)
4Status line
5Calls up user prole settings
6Content sharing menu (if available)
7Telephone
Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is
connected to the MBUX multimedia system.
8Entertainment sources (media, radio)
9©
Press briey: shows all applications
(/ page 467)
Press and hold: calls up the home screen with
classic menu (/ page 469)
ARoute monitor
e.g. route list, lane recommendations, 3D
image of the upcoming driving manoeuvre
The zero layer shows the digital map and the user-
specic applications.
The following user-specic applications are dis-
played in the lower display area:
RSuggestions
Requirement: suggestions are activated
(/ page 490).
RActive applications
e.g. a massage programme
e.g. Active Parking Assist
RTelephone 7
REntertainment sources 8
ROnline voice applications
The lower display area can be hidden and shown
(/ page 467).
Information about entertainment sources
You can operate the applications in the reduced
view or in the menu (expanded view)
(/ page 467).
Examples:
RControl a media source, e.g. pause/play, next
track, set a station
RSelect tracks from the current playlist or sta-
tions from the station list
RSelect a media source
The media source must be connected to the
MBUX multimedia system.
Information about the telephone
To use the functions, the mobile phones must be
connected to the MBUX multimedia system.
Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & mes-
sages option is activated in the suggestions.
Examples:
RAnswer a call and call a missed call
The missed calls are displayed for the mobile
phones connected to the MBUX multimedia
system.
RDisplay contacts and call list and call a con-
tact
RUse voice functions
RSuggest contacts
The contacts are suggested for the mobile
phones connected to the MBUX multimedia
system. No contacts are suggested for the
mobile phones that are linked to another user
prole.
RWrite messages to contacts (suggestion)
466 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
RConnect a device via the device manager (sug-
gestion)
Information about active applications
The following functions are available:
ROperating a massage programme
Suggestions for comfort and vehicle functions as
well as navigation
Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Naviga-
tion options are activated in the suggestions.
ROperating a massage programme
For example, the multimedia system suggests
a programme at a certain time.
ROpening the boot lid
Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with
boot lid convenience closing.
RMaking heating settings
RActivating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
RSelecting previous destinations and destina-
tions from favourites
Suggestions for online voice applications
Requirement: the Online voice services option is
activated in the suggestions.
The suggested voice applications are made availa-
ble online and are based on your previous voice
inputs.
Examples:
RWhat will the weather be like tomorrow?
RPlay the messages.
RStart geoquiz.
ROpen the garage door.
Calling up and operating the zero layer
Calling up the zero layer
When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero
layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation
is active.
#From another application: press the © but-
ton on the right side of the steering wheel.
or
#Tap on ©.
Operating applications in the reduced view (exam-
ples)
#Media: to play the previous or next track, tap
û or ü.
#To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on
the contact.
Aer the connection has been established,
the call functions are available.
#To end a call: tap on the contact again.
#To reply to a message: tap on a message and
dictate the message via the MBUX Voice
Assistant.
#To start a relaxation programme: tap on the
application and start the relaxation pro-
gramme.
#To select a previous destination: tap on the
application and select one of the previous
destinations.
#To select a destination from the favourites: tap
on the application and select the destination.
MBUX multimedia system 467
F206 0119 02
Hiding and showing the display area with applica-
tions
#To hide: pull the applications down.
#To show: pull the bar above © upwards.
or
#Select ©.
or
#Press the © button on the steering wheel
on the right.
Navigation module (expanded view)
Example: route guidance is active
1Trac incident on the route
Distance from current vehicle position and
remaining driving time
2Destination
3Searches for a lling station
4Switches trac information display on or o
#Tap on the navigation module (/ page 465).
#Select Route in the lower menu bar.
Operating a menu in the lower display area (exam-
ple: active relaxation programme)
1Selects a relaxation programme
2Starts/stops a relaxation programme for the
driver
3Starts/stops a relaxation programme for the
front passenger
4Sets the relaxation intensity for the driver's or
front passenger seat
468 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Tap on the application.
The expanded view of the application is dis-
played.
#To close the menu: select G.
Opening and closing the context menu for a sug-
gestion
#Press and hold on a suggestion.
The context menu opens and shows the No
longer suggest option, for example.
#To close: swipe downwards.
Removing a suggestion from the display area
#Swipe the suggestion upwards.
Showing all applications
#Briey press ©.
Available applications are displayed. The
global search is available.
#To hide applications: briey press © again.
Switching between the zero layer and home
screen with classic menu
#Press and hold on ©.
The home screen with classic menu is shown.
#To return to the zero layer: press and hold on
©.
Home screen overview
1Status line
2Calls up user prole settings and switches
user
3Uses the global search
4Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
5Calls up favourites
6Displays in the status line
MBUX multimedia system 469
F206 0119 02
7Calls up applications
8Quick-access to application
9Global menu
G Calls up previous menu
© Press and hold: switches between home
screen and zero layer
û Previous track or previous radio station
ü Next track or next radio station
%During a telephone call, the call duration is
displayed in global menu 9.
Alternatively, to switch between the home screen
and the zero layer, press and hold the © but-
ton on the right-hand side of the steering wheel.
The following functions are called up in the Con-
trol Centre:
RNotications Centre
RFavourites
RVehicle quick-access
Touch Control
Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimedia
system)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
1© Shows zero layer/home screen
2Touch Control
=9Ì: Swipe in the direction
of the arrow (navigate)
a Press (conrm)
3G Returns to the previous display
46 Makes or accepts a call
5~ Rejects or ends a call
6To increase volume: swipe upwards
To reduce volume: swipe down
8 To switch o the sound: press
470 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
7ß Calls up favourites
8£ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
%To operate Touch Control 2 in the most
eective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos-
sible.
You can navigate through menus and lists via the
touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 using
a single-nger swipe, for example:
#To enter a character: select a character using
the keyboard and press on Touch Control 2.
#To select a menu option: scroll in a list and
press Touch Control 2.
#To move the digital map: swipe in any direc-
tion.
Setting the sensitivity for Touch Control
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Control elements
5Touch Control sensitivity
#Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
Setting acoustic operational feedback for all
control elements
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Control elements 5Acoustic feedback
The function is supported by the selection in a
list.
#Set Off, Unleaded or Loud.
If the function is activated you will hear a click-
ing sound when selecting control elements or
when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or
end of the list is reached you will hear another
clicking sound.
Touchscreen
Operating the touchscreen
Tapping
#To select a menu item or entry: tap on a sym-
bol or an entry.
#To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly
with one nger.
#To reduce the map scale: tap with two ngers.
#To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a
button.
Single-nger swipe
#To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, le or
right.
#To move the digital map: swipe in any direc-
tion.
#To use handwriting to enter characters: write
the character with one nger on the
touchscreen.
Two-nger swipe
#To zoom in and out of the map: move two n-
gers together or apart.
#To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a
website: move two ngers together or apart.
#To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clock-
wise using two ngers.
Three-nger swipe
#To call up the home screen: swipe up with
three ngers in an application.
MBUX multimedia system 471
F206 0119 02
Touching, holding and moving
#To move the map: touch the touchscreen and
move your nger in any direction.
#To set the volume on a scale: touch the
touchscreen and move the nger to the le or
right.
Touching and holding
#To save the destination in the map: touch the
touchscreen and hold until a message is
shown.
#To call up a global menu in the applications:
touch the touchscreen and hold until the
Options menu appears.
Setting haptic operation for the touchscreen
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Control elements 5Touch & feel disp.
#Set Off, Unleaded or High.
If the function is switched o, all you need to
do is tap the display to make an entry.
If the function is switched on, the entry is
made by pressing the display. The system sup-
ports you with discreet tactile aids and pres-
sure resistances.
Overview of the ngerprint sensor
Fingerprint sensor 1 allows you to conveniently
access protected MBUX multimedia system func-
tions and services. Compared to protection provi-
ded by the Mercedes me PIN, the entry of a four-
digit number is not required to activate services
and functions with personal content.
The ngerprint sensor must be set up before use
(/ page 474).
%The ngerprint sensor stores only a data
model and no image of the ngerprint. The
data model is only processed in the vehicle
and is not transmitted from the vehicle.
User
Notes on user proles
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the driver's seat aer
calling up a driver prole
Selecting a user prole may trigger an adjust-
ment of the driver's seat to the position saved
under the user prole. You or other vehicle
occupants could be injured in the process.
#Make sure that when the position of driv-
er's seat is being adjusted using the mul-
timedia system, no people or body parts
are in the seat's range of movement.
472 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
ped, immediately stop the adjustment process
by:
#a) Pressing the warning message on the
central display.
or
#b) Pressing a position button of the
memory function or a seat adjustment
switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped.
The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrap-
ment feature.
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will
not be set aer calling up the driver's prole.
Overview of user proles
Requirements for use
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RYou have a Mercedes me PIN.
RYou have agreed to the terms of use.
RThe vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user
account.
%If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or
if no user prole has been selected, the data
described in the following section will be
saved in the vehicle as the standard setting.
Standard settings can be changed by all vehi-
cle users.
User proles save personal settings. If the vehicle
is used by several people, a person can change
their prole settings without changing the settings
of other users.
You can individualise a user prole in the vehicle
using the set-up assistant or using the settings in
your user prole. Some settings, e.g. the
Mercedes me PIN and a prole photo are made in
the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Por-
tal.
%If the user prole is downloaded while travel-
ling, user proles are not set up using the set-
up assistant.
User-specic content and applications with per-
sonal data are protected by dierent levels of
security (/ page 474).
To access protected content, the Mercedes me
PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment,
biometric sensors are used.
%The security level is set by the multimedia sys-
tem and calculated from the combination of
all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot
be turned o.
%When a user prole is activated, the following
personalised comfort systems, for example,
can be adjusted or their settings loaded:
RSeat
RAmbient light
ROutside mirrors
RRoller blinds
RClimate control settings
If the user prole is activated when driving
then the driver's seat position will not be
adjusted.
MBUX multimedia system 473
F206 0119 02
User-specic content
Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as
a user, save the following settings, for example:
RDriver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set-
tings
RClimate control
RAmbient light
RRadio (including station list)
RSuggestions and favourites
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Adding a user
Requirements
RThe vehicle is stationary.
Multimedia system:
4© 5f 5Select user
#Select f Add user.
A QR code is loaded.
#Scan the displayed QR code with the
Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on
a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is
not yet installed on your mobile device, you
will be directed to the store of your mobile
device.
#Follow the steps in the Mercedes me App.
The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes
me user account. This automatically creates
your user prole in the vehicle.
You will be informed when your user prole is
available.
When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up
assistant starts automatically aer user selec-
tion.
%When the user has been added, they can be
selected (/ page 476).
Selecting user options
Multimedia system:
4© 5f 5Settings
Protecting user-specic content and applications
If you add a new user, access protection is
already activated for the user prole. The
Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle
equipment, biometric sensors are available for
access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be
taught in. The authentication process then takes
all taught-in and available sensors into account.
The following user-specic content and applica-
tions are protected, for example:
RUser selection and user prole settings
RBiometric sensors
The teaching-in of biometric sensors
For teaching in and editing biometric recogni-
tion see the following section.
RSuggestions
The data and determination of the most prob-
able navigation destinations, media sources,
radio stations, contacts and messages.
RENERGIZING COACH
The recorded health data and its evaluation.
RIn-Car Oce
The calendar, the tasks and the e-mails.
RParking service
The payment transactions.
RMercedes me Store
474 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
The purchase of services.
RSystem activations of paid vehicle functions
In the following cases you will be prompted for
authentication or re-authentication using a sensor
or the Mercedes me PIN:
RWhen selecting a protected user prole
RWhen calling up a function requiring special
protection
RIf biometric sensors provide insucient or
contradictory information
RIf the multimedia system no longer trusts a
sensor
RIf the seat belt buckle and the door are
opened at the same seat and a function
requiring special protection is called up
RWhen the vehicle is locked from outside
#Select Protect content.
#Switch Access protection on or o.
%When access protection is switched o, your
user prole can be viewed from any seat and
changes can be made.
%Access protection is switched on or o on a
vehicle-specic basis.
%Please note that authentication is necessary
for several functions such as In-Car Oce and
cannot therefore be completely switched o.
Setting up and editing biometric recognition
The biometric data models are saved in the sen-
sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been set up,
this sensor serves as a contributory factor for
authentication on the multimedia system.
#Select Protect content.
#Select Fingerprint recognition or Voice recog-
nition.
%If necessary, authenticate yourself on the mul-
timedia system.
Setting up ngerprint recognition
#Place and li your nger several times on the
ngerprint sensor under the touchscreen
(/ page 472).
The nger is scanned. If the scanning proce-
dure is successful, a message appears on the
central display. You can unlock your user pro-
le and protected applications with your n-
gerprint.
Setting up voice recognition
#Speak the sentence shown on the central dis-
play and follow the voice assistant's instruc-
tions.
If the voice recognition was successful, a mes-
sage appears on the central display. You can
unlock your user prole.
%Avoid background or disturbing noises during
voice recognition.
Deleting biometric data
#Tap on E , for example, behind Fingerprint
recognition.
#Select Yes.
Calling up the set-up assistant
#Select Profile.
#Select Set-up assistant.
#Follow the directions from the set-up assis-
tant.
MBUX multimedia system 475
F206 0119 02
Changing a user name or prole photo
#Select Profile.
#Select Change user name.
or
#Select Profile picture.
#Enter the user name or select a user image.
#Select Finished.
%You can store your photo in the Mercedes me
user account using the app or in the portal.
The photo will then be shown in the vehicle. In
the vehicle itself, you can select other sample
images instead of the photo.
Deleting a user prole
#Select Profile.
#Select Remove.
#Select Remove user profile.
%Your Mercedes me user account and your per-
sonal data will remain within the Mercedes
me ecosystem.
Resetting the user prole to factory settings
#Select Profile.
#Select Reset.
#Select Yes.
%This resets the contents of the user prole to
factory settings, but not the vehicle.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Selecting a user
Multimedia system:
4© 5f
%When you call up your driver prole, the driv-
er's seat and the steering wheel can be set.
You can cancel the setting process with the
following actions:
RPress Tap here to cancel. message on the
central display.
RPress one of the seat operating buttons in
the driver's door.
#Select Select user.
#Select a user.
#When requested to do so, authenticate with
the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric
characteristic.
The user prole is loaded and activated.
%If you select Continue without selecting user,
no specic settings for the user prole are
loaded.
Synchronising user proles
Requirements
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RThe vehicle is connected with your Mercedes
me user account.
Multimedia system:
4© 5f 5Settings
5Synchronisation
#Synchronise automatically .
When the vehicle is switched on or o, the
data stored in the vehicle is automatically
synchronised with the Mercedes me user
accounts. This synchronization is done for all
user proles and is not prole-specic.
or
476 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Select Synchronise now.
Aer selecting this option, the data stored in
the vehicle is synchronised with the Mercedes
me user accounts.
%Not all user prole functions are available dur-
ing synchronization.
%If the personalisation service in the vehicle is
deactivated, only the following user prole
master data is synchronised:
RProle name
RProle image
RMercedes me PIN
Favourites
Overview of favourites
Favourites oer you quick access to frequently
used applications. 100 favourites are available in
total.
You can select favourites from categories or you
add favourites directly from an application.
Calling up favourites
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß
#Alternatively, in the home screen pull down
bar 4 in the centre of the status line
(/ page 469).
#Select ß in the Control Center.
Adding favourites
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß
Selecting favourites from categories
#Select r.
#Select W Create new favourite.
#Select the category.
#Select a favourite.
The favourite is stored at the next available
position.
#If all positions in the favourites are taken, con-
rm the message shown.
A list shows all the favourites.
#Select a favourite to be overwritten.
Adding a favourite from an application
You can, for example, save a contact (example), or
add an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.
#Select a contact (/ page 559).
#Press on a telephone number until a menu is
shown.
#Select Save as favourite.
The contact is added as a favourite.
Renaming favourites
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß
#Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
#Select Rename.
#Enter the name.
#Save the names.
Moving favourites
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß
#Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
#Select Move.
MBUX multimedia system 477
F206 0119 02
#Move the favourite to the new position.
#Tap on ø.
Deleting favourites
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß
#Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
#Select Delete.
#Select Yes.
Resetting favourites
#In the menu, select Reset all favourites .
#Select Yes.
Notications Centre
Overview of the Notications Centre
The following communications are collected in the
Notications Centre:
RCommunications which are generated by the
vehicle or from the multimedia system.
RCommunications which are received through
the use of services.
The following notication types are available for
you:
RNavigable destinations and routes
RMessages (text messages)
RCalendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-
Car Oce
This function is not available in all countries.
RSystem information, e.g. Important software
update available. Confirm to start the
update.
ROther notications, e.g. from additional online
services that can be subscribed to or emer-
gency reports (e.g. tornado)
The Notications Centre is in the Control Centre.
Depending on the style set, newly received noti-
cations are shown using a coloured dot.
Notications are normally briey shown as they
are received. If you take no action, these are
stored for future access in the Notications
Centre.
The notications are sorted chronologically. The
most recent notications are at the top.
Example of a message
1Calls up the Notications Centre
2Symbol for a pinned notication
3Time message received
4Calls up the settings
5Deletes notications
6Display for available actions
478 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
7Description of the notication and the issuing
service
8Symbol for notications
9Date of the received notications
Depending on the type of notication, up to four
dierent actions are available.
Examples of actions include:
RReading aloud
RPlacing a call
RReplying
RCalling up a web page
RNavigation
Some notications, e.g. a navigation destination,
are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary to
carry out available actions directly upon receipt of
the notications. A route guidance can be started
at a later time.
You can pin a notication so that this is not
deleted automatically aer a certain time. The
notication is then denoted by symbol 2.
Calling up notications
Opening the Notications Centre
#In the zero layer pull down bar 3 in the
centre of the status line (/ page 465).
or
#In the home screen pull down bar 4 in the
centre of the status line (/ page 469).
The Control Centre opens.
#Select 3 in the Control Center.
Selecting a notication
#If several messages are available swipe up or
down.
#Select an action.
Closing the Notications Centre
#Select G.
Selecting actions for a notication
The following options are available:
RSelect the action directly aer a notication is
received and shown.
RSelect the action later aer calling up in the
Notications Centre.
#Up to two actions available: select the action.
#More than two actions available: select q.
#Select the action.
The notication is still available.
#Close the actions with r.
Editing notications
#Call up the Notications Centre
(/ page 479).
Conguring settings
#Select Z Settings .
#Select the service.
#Switch the options on or o.
The following options are available depending
on the service:
RAllow notifications
RDisplay in notification centre
RShow notifications
RSwitching Acoustic signals on or o
MBUX multimedia system 479
F206 0119 02
RExternal access
The option allows an external service
access to specic data, e.g. the current
vehicle position. The detailed, approved
information is shown with Õ.
If Allow notifications is switched o, the
options cannot be selected with the exception
of External access.
Pinning a notication
#Drag a notication to the right on the
touchscreen.
A pin appears.
#Tap on the pin.
The notication is marked with a pin.
Deleting notications
#Drag a notication to the le on the
touchscreen.
or
#Select E.
#Select Yes.
All messages are deleted.
Global search
Global search overview
You can call up the global search on the home
screen. You can input characters using the key-
board or the handwriting recognition. Alterna-
tively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice
input.
The global search provides search results for the
following categories:
RNavigation
REntertainment
RPhone, In-Car Oce
In-Car Oce is not available in all countries.
RDigital Owner's Manual
RInternet
The global search enables you to search for
towns, roads and tourist attractions in the naviga-
tion category, for example.
The global search makes it possible to enter a
three-word address (/ page 513).
If the search eld is empty, you will rst see smart
suggestions in the Suggestions category.
The prerequisite for this is that the smart sugges-
tions are activated in the user options
(/ page 474).
As soon as a letter is entered, you will be shown
the best hits in the All category. You will nd fur-
ther search results in the individual categories.
Next to the category is the number of results.
Aer selecting a category you can select the
search results within the category. When you
select a search result, a detailed view is opened
depending on the category.
Using the global search
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª Search
In the Suggestions category up to six smart sug-
gestions are displayed, even if no search entry
has been entered yet.
#Enter the search term into the search eld.
As soon as a character is entered the All cate-
gory is marked. Up to ten search results per
category are displayed there.
480 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
In the other categories suitable search results
for the entered search item are displayed.
%Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows
voice input using p or you switch to the
handwriting recognition v (/ page 484).
#To end the search: select a.
#To show search results for a category: select a
category.
#To accept the search result: select the search
result.
An action starts, e.g. a radio station is set or a
detailed view is displayed, e.g. for a contact.
Switching the sound for the MBUX multimedia
system on or o
On the steering wheel
On the central display control panel
#To switch o: press button 1.
The current audio source is muted.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line of
the central display.
If you are listening to a radio station, for example,
and switch o the sound then all media sources
will be muted.
MBUX multimedia system 481
F206 0119 02
Trac and navigation announcements can still be
heard in this case. The MBUX voice assistant and
telephony are also not aected.
Switching on
#Press button 1 again.
or
#Set the volume.
or
#The media source changes.
Setting the volume of the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem
Setting with the button
On the steering wheel
On the central display control panel
#Press ± or q 1.
or
#Swipe across button 1.
The volume of the current audio source in the
foreground is set.
482 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Using the controller, the volume is adjusted for
the following groups:
REntertainment
RRingtone
RCalls, for example phone calls
RVoice output, for example MBUX voice assis-
tant
RNavigation announcements
%If you set the volume of the voice output to
"0", for example, a minimum volume is auto-
matically set when the MBUX voice assistant
is next called up. The entertainment volume is
automatically adjusted aer the multimedia
system is restarted.
Setting in the menu
#Press and hold the © button on the right of
the steering wheel.
or
#Press and hold © on the touchscreen.
The home screen appears.
#Select Settings.
#Select System.
#Select Audio.
#Select a volume setting.
%The volume can be set for all groups except
the entertainment volume.
#Set the volume.
The following settings are also available in the
Assistance menu:
RSwitching the navigation announcements on
or o during a phone call.
RReducing the entertainment volume while a
navigation announcement is being issued.
Entering characters
Using the character input function
Requirements:
RFor the handwriting recognition read-aloud
function: the MBUX multimedia system is
equipped with the MBUX voice assistant.
RThe read-aloud function is available for the
selected system language.
RThe handwriting recognition read-aloud func-
tion is activated.
Enter the characters on the Touch Control or on
the touchscreen. Character input can be started
with a control element and resumed with another.
#When the keypad is shown, enter the charac-
ters by swiping and pressing on the Touch
Control or by tapping on the touchscreen.
or
#If handwriting recognition has been selected,
write the characters on the touchscreen.
Examples for character input include the global
search, entering a navigation destination or the
renaming of a favourite, for example.
The touchscreen supports character input with
the following functions:
RHandwriting recognition oers character sug-
gestions.
RIf the read aloud function is activated for
handwriting recognition then the entered char-
acters are read aloud.
MBUX multimedia system 483
F206 0119 02
Entering characters on the touchscreen
Requirements
RIf you wish to have the character input read
aloud: the read aloud function of the handwrit-
ing recognition is switched on (/ page 485).
RAn online connection is required for some
functions.
Example: character input with the keypad
1Input line with current entry
2Search result
3Selects destination input, displays further
destination inputs with double arrow
4Deletes an entry
5Adopts the search result in the input line and
continues the search
6Deletes the last character entered
7Hides the keypad
8Switches to handwriting recognition
9Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
(/ page 455)
ASets the written language
BSwitches to digits and special characters
CSwitches to upper-case or lower-case letters
#Example: call up the navigation and enter a
destination address (/ page 38).
#Briey press on a character.
The character is entered in input line 1.
#Resume character input.
%The available editing functions depend on the
editing task, the language set and the charac-
ter level.
Entering alternative characters
#Press and hold on a character.
#Select the character.
Ending character input
#Hide keypad 7.
484 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Example: entering characters with handwrit-
ing recognition
1Input line
2Shows suggestions during input
3Deletes an entry
4Last character entered
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
5Switches to input using the keyboard
6Enters a space
7Accepts an entry
8Writing area
If available, the p symbol allows you to change
to voice input.
#When the keyboard is displayed, select v.
#Write the character with one nger on the
touchscreen. The letters can be written next
to each other or above each other.
The character is entered in input line 1. Sug-
gestions are shown in 2.
#Select one of the suggestions.
#If available, display additional suggestions with
q or r.
#To end character entry: press briey on G.
Setting the keyboard and handwriting recogni-
tion for character entry
Requirements:
RThe read-aloud function is available for the
selected system language.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Keyboards and handwriting
Setting the keyboard language
#Select Keyboard languages.
#Select one or more keyboard languages.
Setting the writing speed
#Select Handwriting recognition.
#Select an option, e.g. Medium.
Activating the read-aloud function
#Select Handwriting recognition.
#Activate D Read out.
The letter that your write on the touchscreen
is read aloud.
Activating handwriting recognition on the key-
board
#Select Handwriting recognition.
#Activate D Handwriting recognition.
You can write characters directly on the key-
board.
MBUX multimedia system 485
F206 0119 02
Deleting the user dictionary
The user dictionary learns from your inputs and
oers suggestions during character input. You can
reset the user dictionary.
#Select Reset my dictionary.
#Select Yes.
System settings
Display
Conguring display settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Display
Adjusting the brightness
#Select Display brightness.
#Vehicles with a driver's display and central dis-
play: Adjust the display brightness of the driv-
er's display or central display.
Time and date
Setting the time zone
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Time and date
#Select Time zone.
The list of countries is displayed.
%If there are several time zones available in a
country, these will be shown aer the country
is selected.
#Select a country and, if required, a time zone.
The time zone set is displayed aer Time
zone.
or
#Select the Automatic time zone entry from
the country list.
The time zone will be set automatically
according to the vehicle location.
%The Automatic time zone option is available
for vehicles with satellite reception.
Setting the time and date format
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Time and date 5Set format
#Select a time and date format.
Setting the time and date manually
Requirements:
RThe vehicle does not have satellite reception.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Time and date
Setting the time
#Select Set time.
#Set a time.
#Press OK to conrm.
Setting the date
#Select Set date.
#Select a date.
#Press OK to conrm.
486 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
%On vehicles with satellite reception, the time
and date settings are determined automati-
cally based on the vehicle location and cannot
be set manually.
Adjusting the time
#Select Adjust time.
#Set a value.
#Press OK to conrm.
%The function is only available in vehicles with
satellite reception.
Vehicle position
Switching transmission of the vehicle position
on or o
Requirements:
RA Mercedes me user account is available.
RAt least one service is activated in the
Mercedes me user account which has access
to the transmitted position data.
%The function is country-dependent. For more
information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Data protection
#Activate or deactivate theTransmit veh. posi-
tion function.
%Alternatively, you can also switch the function
on or o in the status line via Ô.
Setting permissions
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Data protection 5Permissions
In the Permissions menu, you can set access
authorisations for various data points (such as
microphone, camera) used in an application. You
can change permissions that have already been
granted here. You can set permissions either for
individual data points or for certain applications or
websites.
#Select Requests or Apps/websites.
#Make the required settings for the permis-
sions.
Bluetooth®
Information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transfer up to approximately
10 m.
You can use Bluetooth® to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system and use the fol-
lowing functions, for example:
RHands-free system with access to the follow-
ing options:
-Contacts (/ page 558)
-Call lists (/ page 560)
-Text messages (/ page 561)
RInternet connection (/ page 588)
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth
Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
MBUX multimedia system 487
F206 0119 02
%Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
#Activate or deactivate Bluetooth.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview
You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the
Internet or to external network devices.
%The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Generally, two types of Wi-Fi connection are avail-
able:
RUsing the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot-
spot (/ page 488)
The vehicle's multimedia system serves as a
Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communication devi-
ces, such as smartphones or tablet PCs, for
example.
RUsing a mobile communication device as a Wi-
Fi hotspot (tethering) (/ page 590)
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the
Internet connection of the vehicle's multime-
dia system.
Switching Wi-Fi on or o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
#Select Wi-Fi.
The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched
on.
When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the
multimedia system with external hotspots or make
it available as a hotspot for external devices.
When Wi-Fi is switched o, it is not possible to
establish a hotspot connection.
%The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements
RThe device to be connected supports at least
one of the types of connection described.
The connection types shown depend on the
device to be connected. The function must be
supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of con-
nection must be selected on the multimedia
system and on the device to be connected.
%The data volume of the vehicle or an already
connected tethering device is used for the
data connection.
488 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Vehicle data volumes: depending on the vehi-
cle equipment, you can purchase a data pack-
age directly from a mobile phone network pro-
vider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able
to use the data package, you conclude a sep-
arate contract with a mobile phone network
provider via the Mercedes me Store, which
can be terminated at any time and for which
there are no costs. This contract is a prereq-
uisite for using the services from the previ-
ously purchased package. The availability of
this option is dependent on the country.
If the data package option is not available or
can be upgraded, you can purchase data vol-
ume directly from the mobile phone network
provider for a fee.
%Some functions may rst need to be activated
on the device being connected. More detailed
information can be found in the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
%The use of the vehicle data tari by external
devices is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
#Select MBUX hotspot.
#Select one of the following connection
options.
Connecting using a QR code
Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is
installed on the device being connected.
Alternatively: the device being connected has an
integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's
operating instructions).
#Scan the QR code shown.
The Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting using a security key
#Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
MBUX XXXXX network name.
#Enter the security key which is shown in the
central display on the device to be connected.
#Conrm the entry.
Generating a new security key
#Select the Generate new security key option
in the MBUX hotspot menu.
#Conrm the prompt with Yes.
A new security key is generated.
A connection will be established with the newly
created security key.
%When a new security key is generated, all
existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon-
nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are re-estab-
lished, the new security key must be entered.
System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows you to determine the lan-
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language aects
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all languages.
If a language is not available, the navigation
announcements will be in English.
MBUX multimedia system 489
F206 0119 02
Setting the language
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Language
Setting the system language
A list of the available system languages is shown.
#Select a language.
The system language is switched to the selec-
ted language.
Setting the distance unit
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Display
%This function is not available in all countries.
#Select a unit for the distance.
#Activate Additional speedometer for an addi-
tional display in the driver's display.
Activating/deactivating system PIN protection
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Data protection 5PIN protection
Setting the system PIN
#Select Set PIN.
#Enter a four-digit system PIN.
#Enter the four-digit system PIN again.
If both system PINs match, then the system
PIN protection is active.
Changing the system PIN
#Select Change settings.
#Enter the current system PIN.
#Select Change PIN.
#Set a new system PIN.
Activating system PIN protection for soware
updates
#Select Protect software updates.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Conguring suggestions
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Suggestions
#Select Z.
#Switch the options on or o individually.
If an option is switched on and sucient data
has been gathered, personalised suggestions
based on your user behaviour will be oered
to you. These are, for example, navigation des-
tinations visited, phone numbers dialled as
well as suggestions based on your music pref-
erences.
Navigation
When Allow destination suggestions is
switched on, the vehicle makes suggestions
based on your visited navigation destinations.
If Commuter route is switched on, the naviga-
tion automatically detects that the vehicle is
on a commuter route.
Calls & messages
490 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Suggestions are oered for numbers dialled
and messages sent.
Comfort
The vehicle makes suggestions based on the
use of your comfort functions, e.g. which mas-
sage programme should be started at what
time.
Entertainment
Suggestions are oered for the currently
played media source. Suggestions are also
made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify,
TuneIn Radio and streaming services, and for
categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood.
Vehicle
The suggestions for vehicle functions are dis-
played on the zero layer, e.g. for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC.
The zero layer is your own personalised user
interface with the digital map in the fore-
ground and the applications that you use the
most. You can switch between the zero layer
and the home screen with a classic menu.
Online voice services
The suggestions are made available online
based on your voice input and are oered on
the zero layer.
%The suggestions oered depend on the equip-
ment.
Deleting collected suggestions
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Suggestions
#Select Î.
#Select Yes.
The suggestions are reset.
Soware update
Information on soware updates
Soware updates keep your vehicle and the rela-
ted systems up-to-date and prevent security aws.
Soware updates are available online for vehicle
components such as control units, convenience
systems, locking and safety systems, driver assis-
tance systems, suspension and drive systems as
well as for the MBUX multimedia system. So-
ware updates are available via the communication
module or a Wi-Fi connection to an external hot-
spot.
The navigation maps are also updated via updates
from external storage media (e.g. USB ash drive).
Install available soware updates regularly. Other-
wise the security of your MBUX multimedia sys-
tem and individual vehicle components cannot be
ensured.
%Soware updates can be protected with a sys-
tem PIN. Further information about the sys-
tem PIN (/ page 490).
Further information about soware updates can
be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-
benz.com.
Carrying out soware updates
Requirements
For soware updates via the communication mod-
ule and Wi-Fi:
RYour vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user
account (/ page 578).
MBUX multimedia system 491
F206 0119 02
RSoware updates without Mercedes me user
account: The Allow software updates option
is activated in the Software update menu.
RFor soware updates via the communication
module: an Internet connection exists via the
communication module (/ page 589).
RFor soware updates via Wi-Fi: a connection
to an external Wi-Fi hotspot exists
(/ page 590).
%Depending on the soware update, this is
started via the z communication module,
ö Wi-Fi or an 4 external storage
medium.
%Online soware updates cannot be performed
via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted
via TKIP.
%If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the
browser, once the connection is successfully
established the browser will open in order to
start the update. To start the download follow
the instructions in the browser.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Software update 5Z
Starting a map update from an external storage
medium
#Connect the storage medium with the vehicle
via a media interface.
A message about an available map update
appears on the central display.
#Select the message.
#Select Start.
The map update is started.
Starting the soware update via the communica-
tion module
If the Automatic online update option is active,
available soware updates are downloaded and
installed automatically. Activate the option in
order to always keep your vehicle up-to-date and
avoid security aws.
#Select Automatic online update.
The soware update is downloaded and instal-
led automatically.
If the option is deactivated, you will be informed
of new soware updates once. The updates are
available for downloading for a limited period of
time.
#Select an update from the list of available
updates.
#Start the update.
The soware update is downloaded and instal-
led automatically.
Starting a soware update via Wi-Fi
Some soware updates require an additional con-
nection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The connection to an
external hotspot can be established when the
soware update is started.
#Select an update from the list of available
updates.
#Start the update.
#Establish the connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot.
The update is downloaded and installed auto-
matically.
For soware updates requiring a safe vehicle sta-
tus: when the last installation step is reached, a
message appears on the central display aer the
492 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
vehicle is switched o. Follow the step-by-step
instructions on the central display to complete the
installation.
There are soware updates that can only be
installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there
are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle
is locked.
Installing soware updates
Soware updates are installed automatically aer
they are downloaded. As soon as the soware
update has been completed, a message appears
in the central display. It may be necessary to
restart the MBUX multimedia system.
Some soware updates require a safe vehicle sta-
tus for the installation to be completed. They can
only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with
the vehicle switched o. If this is necessary, a
message appears on the central display aer the
vehicle is switched o.
#Follow the instructions on the central display.
For some soware updates, you can set a time for
installation. The installation is carried out auto-
matically at the scheduled time. You do not need
to be in the vehicle during installation. Note that
the planned installation is cancelled as soon as
the vehicle door is opened.
If an installation is available where you can set the
time, a message appears on the central display
aer the vehicle is switched o.
#Follow the instructions on the central display.
The vehicle cannot be used while these soware
updates are being installed. Make sure that no
persons or animals are in the path of your vehicle.
Events stored in the vehicle's control units can be
overwritten.
Availability of the driver and central display
During the installation of soware updates, it is
not possible to use the vehicle, driver display and
central display. You may receive the following dis-
play messages when an installation is running:
%The display message does not appear every
time a soware update is installed.
In rare cases, an error can occur during the instal-
lation. The multimedia system automatically
attempts to restore the previous version.
If it is not possible to restore the previous version,
the display message shown above appears every
time the vehicle is started.
Failure of the driver display:
If the driver display fails or there is a malfunction,
you may not recognise limitations in the functions
of systems relevant to safety or the speed display,
for example. This may impair the operating safety
of the vehicle. Park the vehicle safely as soon as
MBUX multimedia system 493
F206 0119 02
possible and notify a qualied specialist work-
shop. (/ page 855)
Further information about soware updates can
be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-
benz.com
Failure of the central display:
If the central display fails or the display message
shown above is shown continuously, several sys-
tems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer
available. Drive on carefully and consult a special-
ist workshop as soon as possible.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)
&WARNING Risk of accident due to failure
of central display functions
While the multimedia system is reset, its func-
tions, such as the reversing camera, are not
available.
#Only reset the multimedia system when
the vehicle is stationary.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle is stationary.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Reset
When resetting the system, personal data and set-
tings are deleted, for example:
RConnected devices
RIndividual user proles
RBiometric data
%The data used and saved in the multimedia
system by the driver assistance systems is
deleted.
#Select Reset.
A query appears asking if the system should
really be reset.
#Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings. The multimedia system is restarted
aer the system reset.
%Due to data protection, as well as the function
of individual driving systems and driving safety
systems, it is a requirement to carry out a
complete system reset before selling the vehi-
cle or transferring it to a third party, or aer
use as a hire car.
AMG TRACK PACE
Function of AMG TRACK PACE
%This function is an on-demand feature
(/ page 87).
With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteris-
tics on race tracks can be analysed and opti-
mised. You can drive previously saved race tracks
(e.g. Hockenheimring), or record and save new
tracks. The driven lap times are stored for every
track. These can be analysed and compared to
other lap times to achieve the best possible race
results. Additionally, acceleration and braking pro-
cedures can be measured and stored.
Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-o
routes outside the public trac area. Adapt your
driving style to your personal performance and
494 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
environmental conditions. As the driver, you are
solely responsible for driving your vehicle. Park
your vehicle safely before operating the applica-
tion.
Setting Track Race
Multimedia system:
4TRACK PACE 5Track Race
Recording a new track
#Select Ü New track .
#At the desired starting point, select Ì
Start recording.
The track recording starts at this point.
During track recording, sectors can be set to sub-
divide the track.
#Select ö Set sector.
#To end track recording, select É Stop
recording or cross the starting line again.
#Conrm the prompt with Yes.
#Select the weather.
%The temperature is determined automatically.
#Enter a name.
#Press a to conrm.
The track is saved under the name you
entered.
Searching by track name
#Select ª Search .
#Enter the track name you want.
Tracks with the searched name are displayed.
Measuring the time on the saved track
#Select ß All tracks.
#Select the desired track.
#Select u.
#If you are already at the starting line, select
Start timing.
or
#Select Navigate to to be navigated to the
starting line.
Timekeeping begins automatically when the start-
ing line has been crossed.
%Selecting ¨ enables you to switch to the
AR view of the track. Selecting ò also
allows you to switch to the telemetrics dis-
play.
#To end the time recording, select ð End
timing.
#Conrm the prompt with OK.
#Select the weather.
#Select Yes to save the times recorded for this
track.
Superimposing displays during Track Race
The following displays can be superimposed:
RTyre temperature
RMiniature map
RSector overview
RG-force display
RLap overview
#Select ï Start timing .
#Select à.
MBUX multimedia system 495
F206 0119 02
#Drag the desired display from the grid to the
le or right edge of the central display.
The displays are shown during Track Race.
Selecting ¨ on the active display deactivates
it.
Displaying the analysis
#Select ß All tracks.
An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
#Select a track.
#Select a session.
The following data is displayed:
Rlap and sector times
Raverage and maximum permissible speed
Rdriver
Rvehicle
Rdate
Rweather
#Select Add recording to use another session
for comparison.
#Select % to return to the overview.
#Select Diagram.
#Set the desired parameters.
The analysis is displayed.
1Lap overview
2Parameter overview
3Editing parameters
4Deleting parameters
5Adding a new parameter
%The following values can be set for parame-
ters, for example:
Rspeed
Rlongitudinal/lateral acceleration
Rsteering angle
Rengine speed
Rengine oil/tyre temperature
Based on the analysis you can check and optimise
driving characteristics for any position on the
track.
Exporting tracks (USB)
#Select ß Tracks .
An overview of all saved tracks appears.
#Select the desired track.
#Select options u for the desired track.
#Select Export track to….
The selected track can be exported to a USB
memory device connected to the vehicle.
Editing tracks and recordings
#Select ß Tracks .
496 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Select the desired track.
#Select options u for the desired track.
#Select Rename or Delete.
or
#Select a track.
#Highlight the desired recording.
#Select u options.
#Select Exporting to… or Delete.
Setting Drag Race
Multimedia system:
4TRACK PACE 5Drag Race
Measuring acceleration
#Select Z Drag race options.
#Select Acceleration.
#Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
Measurement begins as soon as the specied
starting speed has been reached.
#Set a target speed.
Measurement stops as soon as the specied
target speed has been reached.
#Start o and begin the measurement.
Measurement begins when the vehicle accel-
erates.
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupt-
ing the acceleration procedure.
Quarter mile race
#Select Z Drag race options.
#Select Quarter-mile.
#Set a target distance.
Measurement stops as soon as the specied
target distance has been reached.
#Start o and begin the measurement.
Measurement begins when the vehicle accel-
erates. Timing runs until the target distance or
a maximum of one mile has been travelled.
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupt-
ing the acceleration procedure.
Measuring braking
#Select Z Drag race options.
#Select Braking.
#Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
#Start o and begin the measurement.
#Brake to a stop.
Measurement is incremental, in steps of
10 km/h to a stop. If the braking procedure is
started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, meas-
urement starts as soon as 150 km/h has
been reached
Storing and calling up measured values
If measurement is completed or cancelled, a
prompt appears asking whether the measurement
should be saved.
#Conrm the prompt with OK to save.
Calling up saved measurements
#± Select History.
#Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking.
MBUX multimedia system 497
F206 0119 02
#Select a measurement.
The desired measurement is displayed in
detail.
or
#Delete a measurement.
Calling up the telemetry display
Multimedia system:
4TRACK PACE 5Telemetry
The telemetry display shows current vehicle data
as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four
parameters can be selected to be shown on the
display.
For example:
REngine speed
RWheel angle
Rspeed
RSteering angle
#Set the desired parameters.
#Set the time.
The set parameters are evaluated in the dia-
gram for the selected time.
Conguring AMG TRACK PACE
Requirements
To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE
app:
Rthe TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile
device.
RThe mobile end device is connected to the
multimedia system via Wi-Fi (/ page 488).
Multimedia system:
4TRACK PACE 5Z
Connecting a mobile device via the TRACK PACE
app
The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record
videos and to synchronise them with stored
tracks.
#Select TRACK PACE App.
#Select Authorise new device.
#Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be
connected.
#Select Continue and conrm the authorisation
query.
A four-digit code is shown in the central dis-
play.
#Enter the code in the smartphone.
The device is authorised.
De-authorising the mobile device
#Select TRACK PACE App.
#Select a device.
#Conrm the prompt with Yes.
The device is de-authorised.
Setting the TRACK PACE display in the head-up
display and driver display
#Select IC and HUD contents.
#Activate or deactivate the desired contents.
The content in the head-up display and driver
display is adjusted.
%Further information on the display of the
head-up display (/ page 449).
498 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
%Further information on the driver's display
(/ page 435).
Setting acoustic feedback
#Select Acoustic feedback.
A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.
#Select a setting.
Show statistics
#Select TRACK PACE statistics.
A statistic for the current user prole is
shown.
The following data is displayed:
Rdriving time
Rtrack driven
Rtracks recorded
Rtrack races recorded
Rlaps recorded
Rdrag races recorded
Rtop speed
Activating the ambient light
If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit
red or green depending on Delta Time.
#Select Ambient light.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Setting a dashcam
If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, this can
be used in AMG TRACK PACE.
#Select Dashcam.
#Select Track Race or Drag Race and Activate
recording.
#Under Video overlay contents you can specify
which overlay is to be used in the recorded
video.
Activating Boost Strategy
The purpose of this function is to increase per-
formance on a racetrack, and it is only available in
driving mode I.
#Select Boost Strategy.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%The function is not available for all vehicle
models.
Plug-in hybrid settings
Congures the charging settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Hybrid 5Charging
Setting the charging program
#Select Home, Work or Standard.
%The standard charging program is automati-
cally activated when the vehicle is switched
on or o.
Opens the socket ap
#Press Open socket flap.
The socket ap opens and can be closed
again by hand. When the socket ap is open
and a vehicle plug is inserted and locked in
place, charging can be stopped by pressing
the End charging and unlock button, which
will be available at that time.
%The availability of this function is equipment-
dependent.
MBUX multimedia system 499
F206 0119 02
Unlocking the charging cable (mode 3 or 4)
When the function is active, the charging cable is
unlocked when the maximum charge level is
reached.
#Select Home or Work.
#Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
Activating or deactivating location-based charging
#Select Charging program, home or Charging
program, work.
#Activate or deactivate Select based on loca-
tion.
When the function is activated, the vehicle's cur-
rent position is saved as one of the selected
options. When the address is reached again, a
brief query appears as to whether the respective
charging program should be selected.
Activating or deactivating rapid charging
#Activate or deactivate the Quick charge func-
tion.
The Quick charge function increases the maxi-
mum possible charging capacity at charging sta-
tions up to 60 kW in order to charge the vehicle's
high-voltage battery faster. Aer the charging
process is complete, the charging capacity in the
"Standard" charging program is again limited to
20 kW in order to protect the high-voltage battery.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Quick charge func-
tion is not available for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
%The availability of this function is equipment-
dependent.
Sets the departure time
The set departure times are used for the vehicle's
pre-entry climate control and for predictions
regarding the approximate state of charge and
range at the time selected. When rapid charging is
deactivated, the charging process start time is
optimised for the next departure time. When rapid
charging is activated, the charging process starts
immediately, irrespective of the next departure
time.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the prediction for the
remaining range and the maximum charge level
are not displayed.
#Select Next departure time.
The following charging times can be selected:
Rindividual charging times
Ra Week profile
Setting an individual departure time
#Select Add new time and set the desired
departure time.
or
#Select ´ and adapt an existing departure
time.
Setting repeat days
#Select Add new time and set the desired
departure time.
#Mark the relevant weekdays for which the
departure time will apply and conrm with
a.
or
#Select ´ and edit existing repeat days.
500 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Setting a break in the charging process (when
charging with AC)
Up to four breaks in the charging process can be
set during which the vehicle is not charged, even
if it is connected to a charging station.
#Select Charging interruptions.
#Select Add new time and then set and save
the times for the beginning and end of the
break.
#Activate or deactivate the charging breaks that
have been set.
Set charging breaks can be edited with the ´
button or deleted with the E button.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: you cannot set charging
breaks for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
Setting the maximum charge level
#Select Maximum charge state.
#Set the desired percentage.
The high-voltage battery is charged up to the
set percentage as a maximum.
%The percentage can be set in increments of
10 %.
%As soon as the full charge level is reached, a
notication is shown in the central display
that the charging process is completed and
the journey may be continued. The maximum
charge level can be saved in the Home and
Work charging programs. In the Standard
charging program, the setting is automatically
reset to a charge level of 100 % aer the vehi-
cle is switched on or o.
Overview of the energy ow display in the multi-
media system
The active components of the hybrid system are
highlighted on the energy ow display. The energy
ow between the individual components is shown
in colour.
The components displayed are:
RState of charge of the high-voltage battery
RCombustion engine
REnergy ow
RHigh-voltage battery
The energy ow is shown in dierent colours
depending on the operating status:
RWhite: constant energy ow
RRed: high energy ow (boost eect)
RGreen: low-emission energy ow in the case of
recuperation, electric mode and charging the
high-voltage battery
Calling up the energy ow display
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Energy flow.
The energy ow in the vehicle will be dis-
played.
Information on the status of the hybrid system
and the current state of charge of the high-voltage
battery will be displayed in addition to the energy
ow.
MBUX multimedia system 501
F206 0119 02
O-road menu
Overview of the Oroad menu in the MBUX multi-
media system
The Offroad menu provides an overview of the
most important, relevant data for o-road driving,
as well as functions to assist driving o-road and
the possibility to record tracks for subsequent re-
use or for sharing with other drivers.
Cockpit
This tab provides an overview of the most impor-
tant data. Content is displayed in dierent tiles
that can be changed using directional arrows or
swipes. In addition, this menu contains buttons
for quick-access to certain vehicle functions rele-
vant to o-road operation.
Displayed data are, for example:
RArticial horizon
RCompass
RAltitude
RSteering angle of the front and rear wheels
RTorque and power
RTyre pressure and temperature
RTransparent bonnet
Further information on the Cockpit tab
(/ page 502).
Setting the o-road menu in the multimedia sys-
tem
Multimedia system:
4© 5Offroad 5Cockpit
Setting displays in the central display
#Press ,, . or on the display itself to
jump to the next display.
Quick-access: activating or deactivating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
#Press = to switch the function on or o.
%Further information on Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 406).
Quick-access: activating or deactivating ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
#Press å to switch the function on or o.
%Further information on ESP (/ page 341).
Quick-access: activating or deactivating manual
shiing
#Press p to switch the function on or o.
%Additional information on manual gearshiing
(/ page 294).
Fit & Healthy
Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics
Requirements
%These functions are available only for fully
electric seats with a memory function.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
#Select Seat kinetics.
ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back
health by changing the seat position during a jour-
ney. This involves repeatedly stressing and reliev-
ing the muscles and joints by means of minor
movements of the cushion and backrest.
502 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Starting seat kinetics
#Select ; for the desired seat.
The programme will run for the set duration.
Conguring seat kinetics
#Select Z for the desired seat.
#Select Backrest, Backrest & seat surface or
Seat surface.
#Select the desired duration for the selected
seat.
Vehicles with a multicontour seat:
In addition to the seat backrest and seat cushion,
the lumbar support can be activated for the func-
tion.
#Activate or deactivate Including lumbar.
ENERGIZING COMFORT
Overview of ENERGIZING COMFORT pro-
grammes
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
%Note that the available programmes and the
associated functions depend on your vehicle
equipment. Depending on your equipment,
fewer functions may be available.
Programme overview
RRefresh: Can have a refreshing eect with
short, cool pus of air. The seat is ventilated,
the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool col-
ours and the programme is completed with
appropriate sound. In addition, the vibration
massage in the cushions can loosen your mus-
cles.
RWarmth: Can increase the comfort level of the
vehicle occupants. Seat and steering wheel
heating provide soothing warmth. The pro-
gramme is completed with unobtrusive sound
and warm colours.
RVitality: Can counteract diminishing attentive-
ness in monotonous driving situations. The
activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants
is carried out with invigorating sound, activat-
ing light and a vitalising massage.
RPleasure: Can promote a positive mood in the
vehicle occupants as well as mental regenera-
tion. This results from the activation of a mas-
sage programme, friendly sound and illumina-
tion with suitable colours.
RComfort: Can help relax the vehicle occu-
pants. This is achieved through a relaxing mas-
sage, friendly light and calming sound.
RForest Glade: Can have a calming and sooth-
ing eect on the vehicle occupants thanks to
the acoustics of the forest. The ambience is
supported by a suitable animation, colours
and sound.
RSounds of the Sea: Can contribute to calming
the vehicle occupants. The acoustics of wave
sounds and seagulls in combination with other
vehicle functions create a relaxing seashore
atmosphere.
RSummer Rain: Can help relax the vehicle occu-
pants. The relaxing eect of a rain shower can
be experienced via acoustics and other vehicle
functions inside the vehicle.
RPower Nap: The programme consists of three
phases.
MBUX multimedia system 503
F206 0119 02
-Falling asleep phase: here relaxing music
is played and the air is puried by ionisa-
tion.
-Sleeping phase: the active functions are
deactivated or restricted as much as possi-
ble.
-Waking phase: slightly stimulating music is
played and the air is puried by ionisation.
Additionally, functions such as fragrancing,
seat ventilation and a massage programme
are activated.
RTraining: Can counteract the onset of muscle
tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with tar-
geted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The
exercises are demonstrated in short videos.
The training consists of audio content and a
brief animation. The audio content is con-
ceived so that it can also be played back when
you are driving. Animations are only shown
when the vehicle is stationary. Always observe
the trac conditions if you are training when
driving.
RTips: The system gives auditory tips for possi-
ble exercises or measures for improving the
comfort level of the vehicle occupants. By
selecting the desired area of the body you can
receive targeted tips for the comfort level of
this area.
Most programmes that have been started for one
seat can also be transferred simultaneously to
another seat.
Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro-
gramme
&WARNING Increased risk of accidents
when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT
programmes Tips and Training
The Tips and Training ENERGIZING COMFORT
programmes can distract you when driving.
#Only carry out exercises if the trac sit-
uation permits.
#When listening to the tips, make sure you
are aware of the trac around you at all
times.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when using
the ENERGIZING COMFORT programme
Power Nap
With the Power Nap ENERGIZING COMFORT
programme the following systems are moved
automatically if required:
RSeats
RSide windows
RSliding sunroof
RRoller sunblinds
This can cause you or another vehicle occu-
pant to be trapped.
#Make sure that there is sucient space
behind the front seats.
#Make sure that no body parts are in the
areas of movement.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
For the start of Power Nap:
ROnly the power supply is on.
504 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
RThe doors are closed.
RThe vehicle is secured against rolling away.
RThe state of charge of the high-voltage battery
is sucient for the use of the auxiliary climate
control.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort
5ENERGIZING COMFORT
Starting and stopping a programme
#Select a programme.
#Select ; for the desired seat.
#Select É to stop the programme.
%If, during an active programme, a function
requirement is no longer met, a correspond-
ing message appears. The active programme
is cancelled.
Conguring a programme
#Select a programme.
#Select Settings.
#Switch the functions included in the pro-
gramme on or o.
Setting the duration
#Select a programme.
#Select Settings.
#Select the desired duration.
Starting a Power Nap
#Select Power Nap.
#Select ; for the desired seat.
When the vehicle is stationary, the following
actions are carried out when Power Nap is star-
ted:
RThe roller sunblinds are extended.
RThe doors are locked.
RThe windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
RThe seats are moved into the fully reclined
position.
RThe parking brake is applied.
#Select É to stop the programme.
%The programme is available for the rear seats
while the vehicle is in motion. The above-men-
tioned functions may only have limited availa-
bility.
Starting the training programme
#Select Training.
#Select Ì a programme.
#To activate fragrancing for training: select Air
freshener.
#Select É to stop the training programme.
%The animations demonstrating the exercises
are faded out when the vehicle is in motion
and you only hear the instructions.
Starting tips
#Select Tips.
#Select Ì an area of the body.
#Select É to stop playback of the tip.
MBUX multimedia system 505
F206 0119 02
ENERGIZING COACH
Function of the ENERGIZING COACH
Requirements
RThe ENERGIZING COACH service is activated
in the Mercedes me portal or the Mercedes
me App.
RThe Mercedes me ENERGIZING app is instal-
led on the mobile phone to use the service.
With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the
driving and driver situation. Depending on the sit-
uation, it oers recommendations for the start of
an appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT pro-
gramme.
The following programs could be suggested:
RVitality
As an activating programme in monotonous
driving situations or for long journey times, for
example
Information on the vitality program see
(/ page 503).
RJoy
As a balancing programme in demanding driv-
ing situations
Information on the Enjoyment program see
(/ page 503).
RRefresh
As a refreshing programme when tempera-
tures rise
Information on the Refresh programme; see
(/ page 503).
RWarmth
As a warming programme when temperatures
drop
Information on the Warmth programme; see
(/ page 503).
By connecting a Garmin tness tracker, for exam-
ple the Garmin vívoactive® 3, additional informa-
tion can be entered into the evaluation for the
recommendation of an ENERGIZING COMFORT
programme. The additional information includes
the stress level, that is calculated by the tness
tracker. The stress level is based primarily on the
pulse rate.
Requirements for the integration of additional
information via a Garmin tness tracker:
RYour tness tracker is connected with your
Garmin account.
RYour Garmin account is connected with your
Mercedes me user account.
If you wear your Garmin tness tracker at night
also, the sleep data is included in the evaluation
of the ENERGIZING COACH.
Requirement for the integration of the sleep data:
RThe Garmin tness tracker is synchronised
with the Garmin account before the beginning
of the journey.
%If ATTENTION ASSIST determines an exces-
sive lack of attention, ENERGIZING COACH
makes no further suggestions. Further infor-
mation about ATTENTION ASSIST
(/ page 350).
Calling up the ENERGIZING COACH display
Requirements:
RThe tness tracker is connected with your Gar-
min account.
506 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
RYour Garmin account is connected with your
Mercedes me user account in the Mercedes
me ENERGIZING app.
RThe mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system (/ page 553).
RYou are logged in with your Mercedes me pro-
le both in the vehicle and in the Mercedes
me ENERGIZING app.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5ENERGIZING COACH
#Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of
your pulse for the last 30 minutes driving time
are shown.
A corresponding fault message is shown if
there is no mobile phone connected or no
pulse can be sent to the system for an exten-
ded period.
%Only pulse values in the range of 30 ‑ 140
(possibly 150) bpm are shown on the central
display. The pulse values have no medical val-
idity but are only informative in nature and are
therefore also not required to be accurate.
Navigation and trac
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4©
#Alternatively, press the © button on the
steering wheel on the right (/ page 470).
The zero layer with the digital map is dis-
played.
Calling up the navigation module in the expanded
view
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation
%Navigation means: navigation module 1 is
selected in the zero layer (/ page 508).
The navigation module is called up in the expan-
ded view and shows the route overview.
#Select one of the functions (/ page 521).
The following functions are available:
RSwitch the trac information display on or
o.
RSelect Previous dest..
RSearch for Filling stations.
RSearch for Parking spaces.
RSelect Other routes.
REnter a destination with ª.
RMake settings for View, Messages & tones
and Route with Z.
MBUX multimedia system 507
F206 0119 02
Navigation overview
Digital map
1Navigation module (reduced view)
Route guidance active:
The navigation module shows the information
relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view,
e.g. the destination or a trac delay
£ Ends the current route guidance
Tapping opens the navigation module in the
expanded view with the Route (/ page 521)
2Destination entry
3Searches for a parking space
4Map orientation Ä and set map type
5Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or
arrow)
6Display area with entertainment sources,
phone, active applications and suggestions
7Navigation window shows the next driving
manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route
monitor (zoomed in view)
Route guidance active: route monitor shows,
e.g. route sections, upcoming driving
manoeuvres with lane recommendations, des-
tination, trac delays, 3D images at motor-
way exits, online content
. Switches o navigation announcements
Ì Switches on navigation announcements
Pressing 4 several times changes the map orien-
tation in this order:
R2D and to the north
R2D and direction of travel
R3D and direction of travel
RMap with complete route
%If the map is moved, the map switches
between 3D direction of travel and 2D north
orientation.
The following map types 4 are available:
RDaytime display
RNight-time display
RSatellite map
%If you notice a problem with the digital map
you can report this under https://
mapfeedback.here.com/#/report.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
508 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Destination entry
Notes on destination entry
&WARNING Risk of distraction from operat-
ing integrated communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment inte-
grated in the vehicle when driving, you could
be distracted from the trac situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Entering a POI or address
Requirements:
RFor the online search:
-There is an Internet connection.
-Mercedes me connect is available.
-You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal.
-The vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the terms
of use.
-Further information can be found at:
https://www.mercedes.me
-The service is available and has been acti-
vated.
%If Online Search is not available, the search is
performed using the data of the digital map.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
Example: entering a POI or address
1Input line with current entry
2Search result
3Selects destination search, displays further
destination searches with double arrow
4Deletes an entry
MBUX multimedia system 509
F206 0119 02
5Adopts the search result in the input line and
continues the search
6Deletes the last character entered
7Hides the keypad
8Switches to handwriting recognition
(/ page 484)
9Starts the MBUX voice assistant
(/ page 455)
ASets the written language
BSwitches to digits and special characters
CSwitches to upper-case or lower-case letters
#Enter a destination. The entries can be made
in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
%Online search results for POIs may contain
additional information, for example opening
times and ratings. The information is provided
by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all
countries.
The following entries can be made, for example in
1:
RTown, street, house number or street, town
RPostcode
RPOI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
RTown, POI name
RContact name
RGeo-coordinates (/ page 512)
RThree-word addresses from what3words
(/ page 513)
Entering three-word addresses is possible in
the online search .
#Hide the keyboard with a.
#Select the destination in the list.
The following menu shows the selected desti-
nation with the address information and a cor-
responding map section.
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
Selecting a destination suggestion
Requirements:
RThe Allow destination suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 490).
RThe multimedia system has gathered sucient
data in order to show destination suggestions.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Select Suggestions.
or
#Select a destination suggestion directly on the
Zero Layer (/ page 464).
The route is calculated in the following menu.
%If Suggestions has been selected, a menu is
available via Ä. The menu oers settings
for the suggestions and memory functions.
%Managing destination suggestions
(/ page 532).
510 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Selecting previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Select Previous destinations.
#Select the destination.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
%You can save a destination as a favourite
(/ page 532).
Selecting a POI
Requirements:
RFor use of personal POIs: a USB device is con-
nected with the multimedia system.
RPersonal POIs with the GPS Exchange format
(.gpx) have been saved in the PersonalPOI
folder on the USB device.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Select POIs.
#Select one of the displayed quick access cate-
gories, e.g. j .
#Select the POI.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
or
#Select All categories or Personal POIs (see
requirements).
#Select the category.
#Select the POI.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
Setting a search lter aer selecting a POI cate-
gory
The preset search position depends on the status
of the route guidance:
RIf route guidance is not active, In the vicinity
is searched.
RIf route guidance is active, Along the route is
searched.
#When the search results are displayed, select
Filter.
#Select the search position, e.g. In the vicinity.
#If a route with intermediate destinations
already exists and Near destination has been
selected in the search lters, the destination
is selected for the search.
or
#Select the desired travelling time to the point
of interest.
#Select Search results.
Conguring categories for quick access
The categories are displayed:
RAs symbols aer calling up the destination
entry via ª
RAs a list aer calling up All categories
These categories are shown as symbols aer the
destination entry is called up using ª.
#In the POI menu, select All categories.
#Select f or ß for a category.
Tapping on f adds the category.
Tapping on ß removes the category.
MBUX multimedia system 511
F206 0119 02
#Use G to change back.
The new categories are shown aer the desti-
nation entry is called up the next time.
%If all available quick-access positions are full,
select the category to be replaced.
Changing the order of quick-access categories
#In the POI menu, press and hold a category for
quick access.
#Tap on the arrows next to the selected cate-
gory.
The arrows for the other categories are greyed
out.
#Drag the category up or down.
#Select ø.
Deleting quick-access categories
#In the POI menu, press and hold a category for
quick access.
#Select ß for the chosen category.
#Select Delete.
#Select ø.
Changing categories for personal POIs
#Select Personal POIs.
#Press on a category as long as is necessary
until a menu appears.
#Select Change name and enter a name.
#Select Change icon and select a symbol.
#Select Delete and conrm the prompt with
Yes.
Selecting a contact for destination entry
Requirements:
RA mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system (/ page 553).
RThe contacts from the mobile phone have
been downloaded .
RThe contact has a navigable address.
RThe address data can be located on the digital
map.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Enter a contact in the entry line.
#Select the address.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
%Alternatively, aer calling up the destination
entry, you can enter the name of a contact in
the search eld.
Entering geo-coordinates
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Enter the geo-coordinates as latitude and lon-
gitude.
Examples of input formats:
R47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes and
seconds)
R47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
#Conrm the entry.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
512 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Entering the destination as a three-word
address
Requirements:
RAn active Internet connection is indicated in
the status line on the central display with the
Q symbol.
RThe online search is active.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Enter the destination as a three-word address
from what3words. The entry can be made with
spaces between the words instead of dots.
The search results are displayed.
#Select the destination in the list.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
The Brandenburg Gate has this language depend-
ent three-word address:
RGerman: tapfer.gebäude.verliehen
REnglish: that.lands.winning
RFrench: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant
%Searching for a destination using three-word
addresses is not possible in all countries and
in all languages.
Alternatively, use the following entry options:
REntry in the global search (/ page 480)
RVoice navigation (/ page 455)
Example: during a telephone call you are given
a 3-word address. Aer activating the MBUX
voice assistant, say one of the following two
voice commands:
-Navigate to tapfer gebäude verliehen
-Navigate to tapfer Punkt gebäude Punkt
verliehen
Three-word addresses from what3words are an
alternative addressing system for multilingual
georeferencing of global locations with a resolu-
tion of three metres. Using this grid, locations on
the Earth's surface are included which do not
have a building address such as a street and
house number, for example.
%Three-word addresses are unique, easy to
remember and suce for most routine appli-
cations.
You can convert addresses to three-word
addresses and back again:
RAt the website https://what3words.com
RIn the what3words apps
Selecting a destination on the map
Multimedia system:
4©
#If necessary, move the map (/ page 539).
#Press and hold on the map.
Available destinations are displayed.
or
MBUX multimedia system 513
F206 0119 02
#Briey press on a POI symbol.
The POI is selected. If there are several POIs
at this map position, a list appears.
#Select the destination in the Selected objects
list.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
Selecting a destination from favourites
Requirements
RDestinations are saved as favourites.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#If required, a previous destination or a sugges-
ted destination can be stored as a favourite
(/ page 532).
#Select Favourites.
#Select a favourite.
The following menu enables the route to be
calculated.
Addresses for home and work are already set
#Select Home or Work.
The route is calculated in the following menu.
Addresses for home and work are not yet set
#Select Home or Work.
The prompt No "Home" address available.
Set address now? appears, for example.
#Select Yes.
#Search for or select the address.
#Select Save.
Deleting favourites
#Select Ä for a favourite.
#Select Delete.
or
#Select Delete all.
#Conrm the prompt.
When all the favourites have been deleted,
Add favourite is available, for example.
Selecting received destinations
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection for receiving
external destinations.
RA destination has been sent to the vehicle.
RDestinations have been shared from another
seat in the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
The vehicle can receive destinations from services
or apps. You will be informed when a destination
is received.
#Select Received destinations.
#Select a destination.
The route is calculated in the following menu.
%You can save a received destination in the
favourites (/ page 532).
Deleting received addresses
#Delete a destination with E.
or
#Select Delete all.
514 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Route
Calculating a route
Example: detailed display
1Calls up alternative routes
2Calculates the route and starts route guid-
ance
3Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the
destination
4Three-word address from what3words
%If the destination is located in a multi-storey
car park, for example, and corresponding data
is available, the parking levels are displayed.
Aer selection of 2 the route is recalculated.
#Select one of the options.
Calling up alternative routes
#Select Routes.
#Select an alternative route.
Starting route guidance
#Select ¥ Let's go!.
Calling up the detailed display with destination
address
#Pull the bar above 2 upwards.
Depending on the destination selection and
availability, online content, for example rat-
ings, prices and weather information, is
shown.
If the destination is in a dierent time zone, a
message is displayed.
#To share a destination: select Ç Share.
This option allows you to scan the displayed
QR code.
#To save a destination as a favourite: select
ß Favourite and then an option.
#To call up an Internet address: if a web
address is available, select www.
#To call the destination: if a telephone number
is available, select Call.
Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destina-
tion shown
#Select In the vicinity.
#Search using categories, enter a search entry
or search for a personal POI (/ page 511).
Adding an intermediate destination to the existing
route or starting a new route guidance
#Select ¦ Add.
The selected destination address is set as the
next intermediate destination. Route guidance
begins.
MBUX multimedia system 515
F206 0119 02
#There are already four intermediate destina-
tions: conrm the prompt with Yes and select
an intermediate destinations in the route over-
view (/ page 521), that should be overwrit-
ten with the new intermediate destination.
or
#Select Í Replace.
The selected destination address is set as a
new destination. Route guidance begins.
%If you call up the menu during route guidance,
more options are available:
RTo change the order of destinations, select
Move (/ page 522).
RTo delete the destination, select Delete
(/ page 522).
RTo cancel route guidance, select Cancel
route guidance.
Paying for the charging process on a route with
Mercedes me Charge (plug-in hybrid)
Requirements:
RThe Mercedes me Charge service is available
and subscribed to in the Mercedes me Portal.
RThe services "Navigation with Electric Intelli-
gence", "Display of charging stations" and
"Mercedes me Charge" are activated.
RTo select a charging station: the Schedule
charging stops option is switched on in the
multimedia system.
RFor authentication at the charging station:
aer activation in the Mercedes me Portal,
you have concluded a charging contract with
your payment details with the respective con-
tractual partners.
RFor authentication using the app: the
Mercedes me App is installed on the external
device, e.g. tablet or smartphone.
RFor charging stations without remote access,
you have purchased an RFID card for the con-
tracting partner.
%This function is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation
%Observe the following information:
RRead the notes on charging the high-volt-
age battery (/ page 305).
RRead the notes on charging the high-volt-
age battery at the charging station
(/ page 310) and (/ page 311).
RBefore selection of a charging station: the
data for the charging stations is based on
the online content available from the
respective third-party provider.
RObserve the local information and condi-
tions.
%With the Plug & Charge charging function of
Mercedes me Charge, you can charge the
vehicle at public Plug & Charge-enabled
charging stations. The charging process starts
immediately when the charging cable is plug-
ged into the charging station. No further
authentication is required. Communication
between the vehicle and the charging station
takes place directly via the charging cable.
516 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
This charging function is not available in all
countries.
#To select a charging station: tap on a symbol
on the map for a charging station or on a
group of symbols for several charging stations.
#If a group of symbols is selected, select the
charging station from the list.
The following information is displayed (if availa-
ble):
RName of the charging station operator
RAddress of the charging station
RPlug with availability and information about
charging power
ROpening times
RName of the charging station
RTravel time and distance of the charging sta-
tion from the vehicle
RAuthentication method
RContact information of the charging station
operator
RGeneral costs and charging costs
REstimated charging costs and your available
energy volumes, if available
RDisplay of available reviews and the ability to
review with up to ve stars
RAvailability prognosis
RInformation on green charging
Mercedes-Benz provides high-quality certi-
cates of origin to ensure that an equivalent
amount of electricity from renewable sources
is fed into the grid for charging processes car-
ried out via Mercedes me Charge.
#Calculate the route (/ page 515).
%If the function is available, the start/stop of
the charging process can be selected.
#To access a charging station remotely (start/
stop): select a charging station in the map
menu of the app or the MBUX multimedia sys-
tem.
#Show the details using the widget (programme
symbol).
#Select Start charging process.
The charging process starts. In addition, the
payment agreement saved with the third-party
provider is authorised.
%Remote access is not available for some
charging stations. In this case use your RFID
card to activate the charging process (if avail-
able).
#If required, enter the PIN for personalisation.
#Conrm the action.
#If required, select the connector ID from the
list shown.
The selected charging cable connector is
unlocked.
#Start the charging process.
The start of the charging process is shown.
#Select the Stop charging process display but-
ton in the app.
The charging process is ended.
Payment is processed automatically.
MBUX multimedia system 517
F206 0119 02
If data for third-party providers is available,
you will receive this information:
ROverview of the charging process
REstimated cost
%There may be dierences between the costs
listed and the costs billed.
Switching low emission zones for the route on
or o
Requirements
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a Mercedes me connect user
account and the vehicle is connected with the
account.
RThe chargeable "Trac Restriction Zones"
service is available and activated in the
Mercedes me Portal.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5View
#Activate Traffic restrictions.
The low emission zones along the route are
shown on the digital map and in the route
overview.
Before you enter a low emission zone, you will
be shown a notication in the central display.
Plug-in hybrid: the vehicle takes zones with
trac restrictions into account and drives
electrically in these zones. These are low
emission zones and in future also zero emis-
sion zones.
Route guidance is active:
RWhen the vehicle enters a low emission
zone, it switches to the Electric drive pro-
gram. Electrical energy is reserved for low
emission zones ahead. Thus the vehicle
can switch to the Hybrid drive program
when it exits a zone.
Route guidance is not active:
RWhen the vehicle enters a low emission
zone, it switches to the Electric drive pro-
gram.
%The Traffic restrictions function is switched
o:
RNo low emission zones are shown on the
map.
RPlug-in hybrid: when the vehicle enters a
low emission zone, there is no switch to
another drive program.
Overview of the Range on Map service (plug-in
hybrid)
Requirements:
RThe "Range on Map" service, which is subject
to a charge, is available and activated in the
Mercedes me Portal.
RThe Range option is switched on
(/ page 544).
The fuel range (purple) and the electric range
(white) are shown on the map as a closed line
around the current vehicle position.
518 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
In the following cases, there is no display on the
map:
RThe overall range is very large.
RIf the fuel level is less than 10 %.
RIf the electric range of the vehicle is less than
6 km.
Selecting a route type
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5Route
Using trailer mode and online routes
The route is calculated as a fast route with a short
journey time.
Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been cou-
pled with the vehicle. If available, you can select
online routes.
%Trailer mode and online routes are not availa-
ble in all countries and for all vehicles.
#Select Trailer mode.
A prompt is shown in the multimedia system.
#Conrm the prompt.
The arrival time at the destination takes into
account a reduced driving speed with trailer.
#To use online routes: switch on the option.
Taking trac information for the route into
account
#Select Dynamic route guidance r.
#Select one of the options.
Explanation of the options:
RAutomatic
Trac reports via Live Trac Information are
taken into account (/ page 532).
Live Trac Information and FM home screen
are not available in all countries.
RAfter asking
A prompt appears when a new route is detec-
ted with a shorter journey time based on traf-
c reports. You can continue to use the cur-
rent route or use the dynamic route instead
(/ page 519).
ROff
No trac reports are taken into account for
the route.
Calculating alternative routes
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5View
#Switch on Overview of route after start.
Alternative routes are calculated for every
route.
Accepting a detour recommendation aer a
prompt
Requirements:
RAfter asking is switched on (/ page 519) in
the Dynamic route guidance menu.
RRoute guidance is active.
RThere are trac reports for the current route.
If a new route with a shorter driving time is deter-
mined, the current and new routes will be shown.
If another application is active, a notication is
hidden.
#Conrm the notication.
MBUX multimedia system 519
F206 0119 02
#To accept the new route: select Accept.
#To maintain the current route: select Keep to
current route.
Selecting route options
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5Route
5Avoid options
Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. motorways
or ferries
#Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids
motorways, for example.
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes
motorways into consideration, for example.
%The selected route options cannot always be
taken into account. Therefore, a route may
include a ferry, for instance, even though the
Avoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A mes-
sage then appears and you will hear a corre-
sponding message.
Avoiding or using toll roads
The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll).
#Select Toll roads r.
#Activate or deactivate Avoid all.
If the option is activated, the route avoids toll
roads.
If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll
roads into account.
or
#Select an option for Payment by cash or card
or Electronic billing.
Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the
selected method of payment.
Use: the route takes into account roads that
require a toll corresponding with the payment
type selected.
Avoiding or using roads requiring a special toll
sticker
A vignette allows for the use of a route network
for a limited time period.
#Select Avoid vignette roads r.
#Activate or deactivate Avoid all.
or
#Switch individual countries on or o in the list.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids
roads requiring a special toll sticker in the
selected countries.
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes
into account roads in the selected country
which require you to pay a time-based fee
(vignette).
%These route options are not available in every
country.
Avoiding or using areas with low emission zones
%The function is available when there is an
active internet connection.
#Activate or deactivate Area with low emission
zones.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids
all low emission zones restricted for the vehi-
cle. These are displayed in red on the map.
Use: the option is deactivated. The restricted
low emission zones for the vehicle are passed
through on the route. A warning is displayed
before you drive into a low emission zone.
520 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Avoiding areas
#Select Avoid areas r (/ page 540).
Selecting notications for the route
Requirements:
RFor an audible indication when approaching a
personal POI: the USB device contains per-
sonal POIs.
RThe USB device is connected with the multi-
media system.
RThe category in which the personal POI
belongs is activated.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
5Messages & tones
Switching navigation announcements on or o
#Activate Reduced messages.
If a driving instruction is available for a simple
change in direction, you hear a brief
announcement, e.g. "turn right in 200 m". The
number of driving instructions along the route
is minimised.
#Activate Detailed messages.
If a driving instruction is available and there is
a complex driving situation, you hear supple-
mentary information, e.g. "In 200 m turn right
and continue to follow the major road". Addi-
tional driving instructions are issued for the
route, for example on turning major roads.
#Activate Announce street names.
The name of the street into which the vehicle
should turn is announced.
%This option is not available in all countries and
languages.
Switching trac announcements on or o
#Activate or deactivate Announce traffic warn-
ings.
If available, trac warnings are announced,
e.g. before the end of trac jams that pose a
risk.
Audible indication when approaching a personal
POI
#Select Personal POIs.
#Activate a category.
When approaching a personal POI in the
selected category an audible indication will be
issued.
Displaying a route overview
Requirements:
RA destination is entered.
MBUX multimedia system 521
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation
Example: route guidance is active
1Trac event on the route
Distance from current vehicle position and
remaining driving time
2Destination
3Searches for a lling station
4Switches trac information display on or o
When route guidance is active, the destination
and entered intermediate destinations are shown.
Depending on the route, trac situation and avail-
able data, further information is displayed:
RName, destination address
RSymbols for intermediate destination and des-
tination
RPhone number (if available)
RWeb address (if available)
RTrac information
The route can include up to four intermediate des-
tinations.
Planning routes
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5ª
#Enter the intermediate destination
(/ page 38).
Aer entering the destination and new calcu-
lation of the route, the route overview is
shown again. The route contains a new inter-
mediate destination.
%If there are already four intermediate destina-
tions, delete an intermediate destination
(/ page 522).
Editing a route with intermediate destinations
Requirements:
RThe destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation
Changing the order of the destinations
#In the route overview, press and hold on a
destination.
#Move the destination with = or Ì.
#Tap on ø.
The editing mode is ended.
Deleting a destination
#In the route overview, press and hold on a
destination.
522 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Tap on E.
The editing mode is ended.
Displaying the route list
Multimedia system:
4©
#Tap on the navigation window 7
(/ page 508).
Example: route list
1Upcoming manoeuvre with turning arrow, dis-
tance to manoeuvre, street number, street
name
. Switches o navigation announcements
Ì Switches on navigation announcements
Including the following route sections on the
route to the destination
2Current vehicle position
The route sections are displayed in the navigation
window. The route list is updated during the jour-
ney.
%Motorway information shows the available
service facilities. Aer selecting symbols, e.g.
for car parks, service areas or motorway exits,
the POI is adopted as an intermediate destina-
tion or destination.
#Swipe up or down.
#Select a route section.
The map section is displayed.
#To return to vehicle position: select Current
position.
Selecting an alternative route
Requirements
RA route has already been created.
RThe Overview of route after start option is
switched on (/ page 519).
MBUX multimedia system 523
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Other routes
Example: alternative routes
1Original route is highlighted
2Alternative routes with indication of the dier-
ence in driving time
%In 2 a faster route may also be shown that is
considerably longer.
The following route information is displayed:
RDriving time
RTime of arrival
RDistance to the destination
RAvoid options based on the set route options
RDriving time saved or lost compared with the
original route
#When the alternative routes have been calcu-
lated, display the route in the navigation win-
dow by swiping to the right or le.
Changing route type
#Select Filter.
#Switching the route type on or o.
Avoiding or using route options
#Select Filter.
#Switch the route options on or o
(/ page 520).
#Conrm the settings with Finished.
#To start route guidance to the alternative
route: select Start.
#To select an alternative route on the map:
touch any point on the alternative route.
The alternative route is highlighted.
Activating a commuter route
Requirements:
RYou have created a prole (/ page 474).
RThe Allow destination suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 474).
RThe Commuter route option is switched on .
RThe multimedia system has gathered sucient
data in order to show destination suggestions.
RRoutes have been learned for these destina-
tion suggestions.
RRoute guidance is not active.
%This commuter route is not available in all
countries.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5Route
#Activate Commuter route.
The navigation system automatically detects
that the vehicle is on a commuter route.
524 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
For the daily commuter route, trac incidents
on the route are also reported when driving
without active route guidance.
#To select commuter route: select Start.
Route guidance begins without spoken driving
instructions.
%A commuter route is suggested even with
delays on the route.
#To delete a commuter route: select ¨.
Adjusting the route on the map
Requirements:
RA route has already been created.
You can change the course of the original route
on the map. A new intermediate destination is set
in the process.
%If the maximum number of intermediate desti-
nations is reached, the function is not suppor-
ted. Press the OK button to conrm the mes-
sage.
#Press and hold lightly on the route.
A symbol appears. The route can be changed.
#Drag and hold the route with your nger to a
desired map position.
The new route is displayed. The route is recal-
culated.
When the route is calculated, the journey time
and distance are compared with the original
route.
When the nger is pulled away from the dis-
play, the intermediate destination is shown on
the map.
#Accept the route with Confirm or reject it with
Cancel and return to the original route.
Switching the automatic lling station search
on or o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
#Select Driving.
#Activate or deactivate Automatic filling sta-
tion search.
If Automatic filling station search is switched
on, a notication appears in which the search
for lling stations is started.
Starting an automatic lling station search
Requirements
RThe automatic lling station search is activa-
ted (/ page 525).
Driving situation
The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve
fuel level.
The following notication is shown on the central
display: Fuel reserve Tap here to search for fill-
ing stations..
#Conrm the notication.
The automatic lling station search begins.
The available lling stations along the route or
in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position
are displayed.
#Select a lling station.
#Calculate the route with the lling station as
an ¦ intermediate destination or as a
¥ destination (/ page 515).
MBUX multimedia system 525
F206 0119 02
#If there are already four intermediate destina-
tions: select Yes in the prompt.
The selected lling station is entered in the
route overview at position 1. Intermediate des-
tination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.
Starting the automatic service station search
Requirements
RATTENTION ASSIST is activated
(/ page 350).
RYou are driving on a motorway.
RThere are service stations along the route sec-
tion ahead.
Driving situation
The following notication is shown on the central
display ATTENTION ASSIST Tap here to search
for rest areas..
#Conrm the notication.
The service station search starts. The availa-
ble service stations along the route or in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position are
displayed.
#Select a service station.
#Calculate the route with the service station as
an ¦ intermediate destination or as a
¥ destination (/ page 515).
#If there are already four intermediate destina-
tions: select Yes in the prompt.
The selected service station is entered in the
route overview at position 1. Intermediate des-
tination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.
Starting and editing a stored route
Requirements:
RA USB device with stored routes is connected
with the multimedia system (/ page 600).
RThe route is stored in the "Routes" folder with
the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Press the double arrow in the destination
input line until Stored routes is displayed.
#Select Stored routes.
Starting a saved route
#Select a route.
#Select Start: route guidance at start or Start:
current location.
Route guidance begins.
Renaming a route
#Press on a route until a menu is shown.
#Select Rename.
#Enter the name.
#Select OK.
Recording and storing a route
Requirements:
RA USB device is connected with the multime-
dia system (/ page 600).
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Press the double arrow in the destination
input line until Stored routes is displayed.
#Select Stored routes.
Starting recording
#Select Start recording.
A white rectangle is displayed.
526 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
The route is stored on the USB device.
Stopping recording
#Press the white rectangle.
#Select End recording.
Route guidance
Notes on route guidance
&WARNING Risk of distraction from operat-
ing integrated communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment inte-
grated in the vehicle when driving, you could
be distracted from the trac situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been cal-
culated. The road and trac rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system driv-
ing instructions. Driving instructions are, for
example navigation announcements, changes in
direction and lane recommendations.
Changes in direction and lane recommendations
are shown in the navigation window.
The following displays and functions are also avail-
able in the navigation window, for example:
RRoute list
RDestination information
RTrac information, e.g. length of trac jam,
delay
RMotorway facilities
RCar park search
REmergency corridors
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if
you leave the calculated route, a new route is cal-
culated automatically.
If, for example, the route is diverted or the direc-
tion of a one-way road has been reversed, driving
instructions may deviate from the actual trac
situation.
Alternatives may be oered during route guid-
ance, e.g. before passing a motorway exit road.
The additional driving time for the journey along
the motorway exit is shown.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and trac rules and regulations during your jour-
ney as well as the prevailing trac conditions.
The route can dier from the ideal route, for
example in the event of roadworks or incomplete
digital map data.
Notes on satellite reception
The correct function of the navigation system
depends amongst other things on reception of the
satellite system used. In certain situations satel-
lite reception can be impaired, malfunction or
even not be possible, e.g. in tunnels or in multi-
storey car parks.
MBUX multimedia system 527
F206 0119 02
Changing direction overview
Changes of direction are shown in the following
displays:
RDetailed image of the junction
The display appears when you drive into a
junction.
R3D image
The display appears when driving on junction-
free, multi-lane roads, for example at motor-
way exits and motorway interchanges.
Example: detailed image of the crossing with
upcoming changes of direction
1Name of the street to turn into
2Change of direction arrow (also on the map)
3Current distance to the change of direction
Example: 3D image of the upcoming change
of direction
1Manoeuvre point
2Change of direction arrow (also on the map)
Larger map scales show change of direction
points instead of change of direction arrows.
3Current vehicle position
4Current distance to the change of direction
528 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
There are three phases when changing direction:
RPreparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes
of direction, the multimedia system prepares
you for the upcoming change of direction. A
navigation announcement is issued, e.g. "Pre-
pare to turn right".
The navigation window shows: the direction
information or the name of the road which is
to be turned into as well as the distance to the
change of direction.
RAnnouncement phase
The multimedia system announces the upcom-
ing change of direction, e.g. by announcing
"Turn right in 300 m".
When the Auto zoom map orientation is
switched o (/ page 543), a detailed repre-
sentation of the junction or a 3D image of the
upcoming change in direction appears in the
navigation window.
RChange-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immi-
nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing
"Now turn right".
Example of 3D image: when the distance to
manoeuvre point 1 is shown with 0 m and
the symbol for current vehicle position 3 has
reached manoeuvre point 1 the change in
direction is carried out.
%Changes in direction are also displayed on the
driver's display and head-up display.
Lane recommendations overview
Example: lane recommendations
1Lane not recommended (grey arrow)
2Possible lane (white arrow)
3Recommended lane (white arrow, blue back-
ground)
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
MBUX multimedia system 529
F206 0119 02
If the digital map contains the relevant data, lane
recommendations are displayed in the navigation
window.
Explanation of the displayed lanes:
RRecommended lane
In this lane, you will be able to complete both
the next change of direction and the one aer
that.
RPossible lane
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction.
RNon-recommended lane
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without changing
lane.
During the change of direction, new lanes may be
added. Bus lanes are also shown.
%Lane recommendations are also displayed on
the driver's display and head-up display.
Using motorway information
When driving on the motorway, upcoming motor-
way facilities and available service facilities are
shown in the route list. These include car parks,
service stations or motorway exits with service
POIs, for example.
The entries are sorted according to increasing dis-
tance from the current vehicle position.
#Select an entry.
#If several service facilities are available, select
a service facility from the list.
The destination address and the map position
are shown.
#Calculate the route (/ page 515).
or
#Search for a POI in the vicinity.
or
#Use other functions, e.g. store the destination
address of the service facility.
Destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
Í chequered ag. Route guidance will now be
complete. The navigation menu is shown.
When an intermediate destination has been
reached, you will see the intermediate destination
ag with the number of your Î intermediate
destination. Route guidance is continued.
Switching navigation announcements on or o
Switching o
#Press the Ì button on the steering wheel
or on the MBUX multimedia system during a
navigation announcement (/ page 481).
The Spoken driving recommendations have
been deactivated. message appears.
or
#Show the navigation menu (/ page 507).
#Select ..
The symbol changes to Ì.
Switching on
#In the navigation window, select Ì for an
upcoming driving manoeuvre.
The current navigation announcement is
played.
The symbol changes to ..
530 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Switching navigation announcements on or o
during a phone call
#Press the © button on the steering wheel
on the right.
or
#Tap © on the central display.
#Select Settings.
#Select System.
#Select Audio.
#Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
#Activate or deactivate Driving recommenda-
tions during call.
#To leave the menu: select G.
Adjusting the volume of navigation announce-
ments
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Audio
5Navigation & traffic announcements
#Select Driving recommendation vol..
#Set the volume.
#To leave the menu: select G.
Route guidance is active
#Set the volume during a navigation announce-
ment on the steering wheel or under the
touchscreen (/ page 482).
Switching audio fadeout on or o during naviga-
tion announcements
#Press the © button on the steering wheel
on the right.
or
#Tap © on the central display.
#Select Settings.
#Select System.
#Select Audio.
#Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
#Activate or deactivate Audio fadeout during
navigation announcements.
#To leave the menu: select G.
Repeating navigation announcements
Requirements:
RA route has already been created.
RRoute guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4©
#In the navigation window, select . for an
upcoming driving manoeuvre.
#Select Ì.
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.
Cancelling route guidance
Requirements:
RA route has already been created.
RRoute guidance is active.
#Select ¤ in the navigation module
(/ page 508).
Overview of o-road status during route guid-
ance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif-
ferences between the data on the digital map and
the actual course of the road. In such cases, the
multimedia system will temporarily be unable to
locate the vehicle's current position on the digital
MBUX multimedia system 531
F206 0119 02
map. The vehicle is o-road. Road not mapped
will be shown. Route guidance may be restricted.
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Destination
Saving the current vehicle position
Multimedia system:
4©
#When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ cur-
rent vehicle position.
#Select Store position.
#To save as a favourite: select Save as favour-
ite .
#To save as "Home" address: select Home .
#To save as "Work" address: select Work .
Managing previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Select Previous destinations.
Saving the last destination as a favourite
#Select Ä for the last destination.
A menu appears.
#To save as a favourite: select Save as favour-
ite .
#To save as "Home" address: select Home .
#To save as "Work" address: select Work .
Deleting a previous destination
#Select Ä for the last destination.
#Select Delete.
or
#Select Delete all.
#Conrm the prompt.
When all the favourites have been deleted,
Add favourite is available, for example.
Editing destination suggestions
Requirements:
RThe Allow destination suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 490).
RFor the display of destination suggestions: the
multimedia system has gathered sucient
data.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
#Press and hold on a destination suggestion.
A menu appears.
#To cancel a destination suggestion: select Do
not suggest now or No longer suggest.
#To save a destination suggestion: select Save
as favourite, Home or Work.
%Delete a destination suggestion from the
favourites (/ page 514).
Route guidance with current trac reports
Trac information overview
Current trac reports are received with the Live
Trac Information subscription service.
If the subscription has expired, then FM RDS-TMC
is available in selected countries.
%Live Trac Information is not available in all
countries.
532 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
The service must be registered in the Mercedes
me user account (/ page 533). This secures the
free-of-charge period of three years.
The service updates the trac situation via the
Internet connection at short, regular intervals.
Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
sent to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is immedi-
ately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG
and forwarded to the trac data provider. Using
this data, trac reports relevant to the vehicle's
position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts
as a sensor for the ow of trac and helps to
improve the quality of the trac reports.
%There may be dierences between the trac
reports received and the actual road and traf-
c conditions.
If you do not want to transmit the vehicle position,
you have the following options:
RYou deactivate the service in the Mercedes
me user account.
RYou have the service deactivated at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
%Further hazard warnings are received using
the Car-to-X service (/ page 536).
Showing information from the service provider
for Live Trac Information
Requirements
RThe vehicle is equipped with Live Trac Infor-
mation.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Mercedes me
5My services
#Select Live Traffic.
When the subscription for Live Trac Information
has expired then in selected countries FM RDS-
TMC is available.
Registering Live Trac Information
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is equipped with Live Trac Infor-
mation.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
#Create a Mercedes me user account at:
https://www.mercedes.me. A valid email
address is required for this.
#Register the vehicle using the vehicle identi-
cation number (VIN).
#Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me
user account.
A code is sent to the multimedia system.
#Enter the code into the multimedia system.
#Accept the general and specic terms of use.
%Alternatively, you can have the connection
completed at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
Extending a Live Trac Information subscrip-
tion
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is equipped with Live Trac Infor-
mation.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
#Call up the Mercedes me website.
#Call up the Mercedes me user account.
MBUX multimedia system 533
F206 0119 02
#Switch to the Mercedes me Store via the
linked vehicle.
#Select Live Trac Information.
#Select the renewal period.
#Add the product to the shopping basket.
#Accept the general and specic terms of use.
Live Trac Information remains activated for
the selected extension period. Activation
begins on the date of extension.
Displaying trac information on the map
Requirements:
RTraffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic are
switched on (/ page 535).
Multimedia system:
4©
#If necessary, move the map (/ page 539).
The map shows the following trac information
depending on the activated settings:
RTrac incidents
These are roadworks, road blocks and warning
messages, for example.
When route guidance is active, the symbols for
trac incidents will be shown in colour on the
route. O the route they are grey.
RWarning messages
Warning messages are shown as the d
symbol.
Trac safety information can be shown, e.g. if
there are people on the carriageway.
If the vehicle approaches a danger area, for
example the end of a trac jam in a danger-
ous position, the Ë symbol is shown on
the map. If Announce traffic warnings is
switched on and a message has been issued,
an additional announcement is made.
RTrac ow information:
-Trac jam (red line)
-Slow-moving trac (orange line)
-Heavy trac (yellow line)
-Free-owing trac (green line)
RDisplay for trac delays on the current route
The smallest value for the display for trac
delays is a minute.
Showing trac incidents on the route
Requirements:
RThe Traffic incidents display is switched on
(/ page 535).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation
If there are trac incidents on the route, these
are shown on the map and in the route overview.
%With the MBUX Voice Assistant you can
inform yourself about trac incidents on your
route. Ask, for example How is the traffic on
my route? or How is the traffic at home?. A
voice output is given.
534 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Example: trac incidents on the route
1Delay
2Trac incident symbol (e.g. roadworks)
3Colour display of trac ow information,
delay and length, road name or road number
4Switches trac information display on or o
%During active route guidance, the total delay
on the route is displayed:
Rin the navigation system in the navigation
window
Rin other applications in the status line at
the top
A trac incident symbol is, for example Ò
for roadworks.
In the map several trac incidents may be
shown on top of each other. The trac inci-
dent symbol shows a plus sign.
If available, the street number can be
replaced by a street name or both the name
and number.
%If a message about forming an emergency
corridor has been issued, Emergency corridor
is shown in the navigation window.
#To see all of the trac incidents on the route,
swipe to the right or le.
The route section is highlighted on the map.
#To show detailed information in the route over-
view: tap on a display in the route overview.
The detailed information is shown, for example
the road section and the direction.
Calling up detailed information on the map
#Tap on trac ow information on the map,
e.g. a red line for a trac jam section.
The detail information is displayed.
#If several lines are shown on top of the other,
then select an item of trac ow information
from the list.
Showing trac incidents on the map
#Tap on a trac incident symbol.
The detail information is displayed.
#Several trac incidents are in the immediate
vicinity: tap on the top trac incident symbol
and select from the list of trac incidents.
Switching the trac information display on
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
MBUX multimedia system 535
F206 0119 02
#Traffic .
#Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing
traffic.
Trac incidents, for example roadworks, local
area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages,
are shown on the route.
Car-to-X-Communication
Car-to-X-Communication overview
The following requirements apply for the Car-to-X-
Communication service:
RThe vehicle is equipped with an MBUX multi-
media system with navigation function.
RThere is a subscription for the Live Trac
Information service.
RThe Car-to-X-Communication service is activa-
ted in your Mercedes me user account.
%Car-to-X-Communication is available in selec-
ted countries.
The communication module automatically estab-
lishes an Internet connection once the vehicle is
switched on. If there are any hazard warnings,
they will be provided shortly thereaer. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone connection, provision
takes place from within a second up to about a
minute.
Benets of Car-to-X-Communication:
RDangers are automatically detected by the
vehicle or can be reported by the driver. These
are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-Com-
munication in the immediate vicinity.
RIf available, current details relating to hazard
spots near the vehicle's current position are
received.
This gives you sucient time to adapt your
driving style to the trac conditions.
The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the
regular transmission of vehicle data to Mercedes-
Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudony-
mised by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehicle data is
deleted aer an appropriate amount of time has
elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored perma-
nently.
%Data which serves as identication is
replaced during the pseudonymisation proc-
ess. In this way, your identity is protected
against access by unauthorised third parties.
Displaying hazard warnings
Multimedia system:
4©
If hazard warnings are available these can be
shown as symbols on the map. The display
depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents
option.
#Set the option via Z (/ page 535).
If the option is activated, all of the symbols are
shown.
If the option is deactivated, the symbols are
only shown when there is a hazard warning.
The following hazards may be shown on the map:
RAccidents and breakdowns
RSlippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
RHazards reported manually
RVehicle with active hazard warning light
RRoadworks
RAdditional hazards (if available)
536 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
%If Announce traffic warnings is switched o
(/ page 521), voice output can indicate a
danger area.
Sending hazard warnings
Reporting hazards manually
%Automatically detected hazard warnings are
sent by the vehicle.
#When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ cur-
rent vehicle position.
The Position menu is shown.
#Select Report traffic incident.
The Thank you for supporting accident pre-
vention! message appears.
Route guidance with augmented reality
Overview of route guidance with augmented
reality
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a
result of distraction, incorrect depiction or
wrong interpretation of the display
The camera image of the augmented reality
display is not suitable as a guide for driving.
#Always keep an eye on the actual trac
situation.
#Avoid extended observation of the cam-
era image.
During route guidance with augmented reality a
camera image with the real trac scene is shown
on the central display before a turning manoeu-
vre. The camera image includes additional infor-
mation, for example arrows indicating a change of
direction.
If the options are switched on and this additional
information is available, road names and house
numbers are displayed (/ page 538).
1House number
2Street name
3Change of direction arrow
Route guidance with augmented reality will not be
available in some situations, e.g. in the event of
poor satellite reception or roads that have not
been digitised.
Route guidance with augmented reality is not
available in all countries.
MBUX multimedia system 537
F206 0119 02
Activating route guidance with augmented real-
ity
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to imprecise positioning of additional
information
The additional information from the augmen-
ted reality display may be inaccurate and is
not a substitute for observing and assessing
the actual driving situation.
#Always keep an eye on the actual trac
situation when carrying out all driving
manoeuvres.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Select Augmented reality video.
#Activate or deactivate Augmented reality
video.
The camera's video image is shown on the
central display before a turning manoeuvre.
The video image includes additional informa-
tion.
Showing property information for route guid-
ance with augmented reality
Requirements:
RAugmented reality is activated (/ page 538).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Select Augmented reality video.
#Activate Street names and House numbers.
During route guidance, the activated options
are shown as additional information in the
camera image.
Map and compass
Setting the map scale
Multimedia system:
4©
Zooming in
#When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with
one nger on the central display.
or
#Move two ngers apart on the central display.
Zooming out
#Tap with two ngers on the central display.
or
#Move two ngers together on the central dis-
play.
%You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page 490).
538 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Moving the map
Multimedia system:
4©
#When the map is displayed, swipe in any direc-
tion with one nger on the central display.
#To reset the map to the current vehicle posi-
tion: select \ Centre .
Switching the route overview aer start on or
o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Activate D or deactivate E Overview
of route after start.
If the option is enabled, the map shows the full
route aer route guidance is started and, if
available, all alternative routes.
Selecting POI symbols for the map display
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
POIs include restaurants and hotels, for example.
These are displayed as symbols on the map. Not
all POIs are available in all countries.
Personal POIs are destinations which you have
saved on a USB device, for example.
%The display of POI symbols on the map can be
activated or deactivated as a favourite.
#Select View.
#Select POI symbols on map r.
#Switch on Hide all points of interest.
When the option is switched on, the POI sym-
bols for all categories are shown on the map
according to the settings in the POI catego-
ries.
%If the conditions are fullled, the POI symbols
are shown with current online information
(/ page 544).
Switching display of categories for quick-access
on or o
#Switch a category on or o in the menu.
Selecting categories
#In the menu, select Other categories r.
#Activate or deactivate Show all.
When the option is switched on, the POI sym-
bols for all categories are shown on the map.
or
#Select r the categories.
#Activate or deactivate the categories.
The POI symbols for the selected categories
are shown on the map.
Selecting personal POI categories
#In the menu, select Personal POIs r .
#Select r a category.
#Activate or deactivate Display on the map.
#To issue a signal when approaching: activate
Visual warning and Acoustic notification.
MBUX multimedia system 539
F206 0119 02
Resetting the POI symbol display
#In the menu, select Reset POIs.
The settings are reset to the standard set-
tings.
Selecting the display of additional information
on the map
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Select Show additional information.
#Switch the options on or o.
The following options are available:
RCurrent street
If the option is enabled, it will be displayed in
the navigation window.
RScale
If the option is switched o, the map scale is
only displayed on the map when zooming.
If the option is enabled, the map scale is per-
manently displayed on the map.
The option also inuences the display on the
driver's display.
RAltitude
RNext junction
If the option is switched on and the journey
continues without route guidance, the name of
the next intersecting street will be displayed in
the navigation window.
Displaying the map version
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Select Map data version.
The detail information is displayed.
%The online map update service from
Mercedes me connect can be used to update
the map data (/ page 38).
A message is shown on the central display
when a new map version is available.
%Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
Overview of area avoidance on the route
You can dene areas along a route that you would
like to avoid.
Motorways or multi-lane expressways that pass
through an area to be avoided may be included in
the route despite being blocked.
Avoiding a new area for the route
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5Route
5Avoid areas
#Select Avoid new area.
Starting using the map
#Select Using map.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided.
#Move the map (/ page 539).
#Set the map scale (/ page 538).
#Select a.
The area is entered into the list.
540 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Starting using destination search
#Select Via address entry.
#Enter the address (/ page 38).
#Select the destination in the list.
The map appears. The area is saved.
Changing an area to be avoided
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5Route
5Avoid areas
#Select an area in the list.
#Select Edit.
#To move an area on the map: swipe in any
direction on the central display.
Changing the size of the area
#Move two ngers apart or together on the cen-
tral display.
#Select a.
The area is entered into the list.
Taking the area for the route into account
#Select the area in the list.
#Activate Avoid area.
If route guidance is active, a new route is cal-
culated.
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried
over to the next route guidance.
The route can include an area that is to be
avoided in the following cases:
RThe destination is located in an area that is
to be avoided.
RThe route includes motorways or multi-
lane expressways which pass through an
area to be avoided.
RThere is no practical alternative route.
Deleting an area to be avoided
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z 5Route
5Avoid areas
Deleting an area to be avoided
#Select an area in the list.
#Select Delete.
#Conrm the prompt with Yes.
Deleting all areas to be avoided
#If at least two areas to be avoided are set,
select Delete all.
#Conrm the prompt with Yes.
Map data update overview
As the content of a digital road map has a short
life, outdated data may have a negative eect on
all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navi-
gation experience, you should install all of the
map updates oered by Mercedes-Benz.
The following options are available for the update
of map data:
ROnline map update
RUpdates from the Mercedes me Portal
RUpdate at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
Additional costs can be incurred in this proc-
ess.
Online map update
Requirements:
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
MBUX multimedia system 541
F206 0119 02
RThe Online Map Update service is available for
your region.
RThe service has been activated.
%The Online Map Update service is only availa-
ble in certain countries.
Installation takes place in the background as an
automatic map update.
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the
available map updates for the European regions in
which the vehicle is located or is moved.
The online map update is activated at the latest
aer the next time the vehicle is switched on.
Updates from the Mercedes me Portal
The map data for several regions can also be
updated manually. Log in with your Mercedes me
user account at: https://www.mercedes-
benz.de/
Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account
> My vehicles > Selection of car > Online Map
Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a
storage medium.
Aer the map data has been copied, connect the
storage medium with your vehicle. Select the noti-
cation with information about a new version of
the map data and start the installation. Aer the
MBUX multimedia system has been restarted, the
updated map data is used.
Overview of map data
If map data is reinstalled in a vehicle, no activa-
tion code needs to be entered.
For map data purchased as data media, the
enclosed activation code must be entered aer
starting the installation.
Activation codes are only ever valid for one vehi-
cle.
In the event of the following problems, please
contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre:
RThe multimedia system does not accept the
activation code.
RYou have lost the activation code.
Displaying the compass
Multimedia system:
4©
#When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ cur-
rent vehicle position until the Position menu is
shown.
#Select Compass.
The compass display shows the following
information:
RThe current direction of travel with bearing
(360° format) and compass direction
RLongitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
RNumber of satellites from which a signal
can be received
The information is not available in every country.
542 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Displaying Qibla
Multimedia system:
4©
#When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ cur-
rent vehicle position until the Position menu is
shown.
#Select Alerts.
The arrow on the compass shows the direc-
tion to Mecca in relation to the current direc-
tion of travel.
The number of satellites received is shown.
%This function is not available in all countries.
Sharing the vehicle position with a contact
Requirements
RA mobile phone is connected to the MBUX
multimedia system.
RThe connected mobile phone supports send-
ing text messages from the vehicle
(/ page 561).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Route
The current vehicle position can be shared with a
contact.
#In the Route menu, select Share journey.
The display changes to Stop sharing journey.
#Select the contact (/ page 559).
The text message is sent. The display changes
back to the digital map. A symbol is displayed
in the status line. When the message has been
sent, a notication is displayed.
Setting the map scale automatically
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Activate D Auto zoom.
When the option is switched on, the map scale
is set automatically depending on your driving
speed and the type of road.
%The automatically selected map scale can be
changed manually. Aer a few seconds, this is
automatically reset.
When the option is activated, no detailed dis-
play of the junction or a 3D image is shown in
the navigation window during an upcoming
driving manoeuvre.
Displaying the satellite map
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
#Activate or deactivate Satellite map.
When Satellite map is selected, they are dis-
played at the following map scales:
ROn-board maps
The satellite maps are displayed in map
scales from 2 km.
ROnline maps
The satellite maps are displayed in high-
resolution map scales from 10 m.
When Satellite map is not selected, no satel-
lite maps are displayed.
%The satellite maps for these map scales are
not available in all countries.
MBUX multimedia system 543
F206 0119 02
Displaying the range
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection.
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RThe vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the Mercedes
me connect terms of use.
Further information can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me
RThe service is available and has been activa-
ted.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
1Display of the total range
#Select View.
#Range .
The range is shown on the map with the following
displays:
RFor petrol and diesel vehicles: green display
RFor hybrid vehicles:
Total range: green display 1
Electrical range: blue display
When the lower reserve capacity is reached then
the range display on the map is switched o.
%The range display on the map is not available
in all countries.
Displaying online map contents
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection.
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RThe vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the Mercedes
me connect terms of use.
Further information can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me
RThe service is available and has been activa-
ted.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Select View.
544 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud
cover.
The service information is not shown in all
map scales, e.g. weather symbols.
%The display of online map content is not avail-
able in all countries.
Parking service
Notes on the parking service
*NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to
observe the maximum permissible clear-
ance height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum
permissible clearance height, the roof and
other vehicle parts may be damaged.
#Please observe the indicated maximum
clearance height.
#If the vehicle exceeds the permissible
clearance height, do not drive in.
#Take the modied vehicle height in the
case of roof superstructures or other
carrier systems into account.
%This service is not available in all countries.
Displaying parking options on the map
Requirements:
RNavigation Services is activated in your
Mercedes me user account.
RThe parking service is part of the scope of the
Navigation Services.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Navigation 5Z
#Switch on Parking.
The parking options within the vicinity of the
current vehicle position are shown.
Selecting parking options
*NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to
observe local information and parking
conditions
The data is based on the information provided
by the respective service providers.
Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accu-
racy of the information provided in relation to
the car park or parking area.
#Always observe the local information and
conditions.
Requirements
RNavigation Services is activated in your
Mercedes me user account.
RThe parking service is part of the scope of the
Navigation Services.
RParking is activated (/ page 545).
Multimedia system:
4©
#Tap on j on the map.
MBUX multimedia system 545
F206 0119 02
or
#In the route overview, select j Parking
spaces (/ page 521).
#Select the search position and search lter,
e.g. Near destination and Multi-storey car
parks.
The map shows car parks suited to the selec-
ted settings.
#Select a parking option.
The following information is displayed (if avail-
able):
RDestination address, distance from current
vehicle position and arrival time
RInformation on the car park, e.g.
-Opening times
-Parking charges
-Current occupancy
-Maximum parking time
-Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by
the parking service does not replace
the need for observation of the actual
circumstances.
RAvailable payment options (Mercedes pay,
coins, bank notes, cards)
RDetails on parking taris
RNumber of available parking spaces
RPayment method (e.g. at parking meters)
RServices/facilities at the parking option
RTelephone number
#Calculate the route (/ page 515).
The following functions can be used (if availa-
ble):
RSearching for POIs in the vicinity.
RSaving the destination.
RPlacing a call at the destination.
RSharing the destination via the QR code.
RCalling up the web address.
RShowing the destination on the map.
Prior booking of a parking space
Requirements:
RNavigation Services is activated in your
Mercedes me user account.
RThe parking service is part of the scope of the
Navigation Services.
RYou have registered with your payment details
for the payment of parking in the Mercedes
me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respec-
tive contract partner.
RParking is activated (/ page 545).
%This option is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4©
#Select a parking option on the map.
#If a parking space available to book has been
selected, select Book parking space.
#Select the desired booking period. Take note
of the cancellation conditions.
If the parking space is available for the selec-
ted period, the price will be shown.
546 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Press a to conrm.
#In the booking overview, conrm with Book.
#If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN.
The parking space will be booked in the back-
ground.
A booking conrmation including a car park
ticket will be sent to your registered e-mail
address.
Making use of or cancelling the booking
#Start the Mercedes me App on your smart-
phone.
#Open Menu.
#Select My transactions.
#Select Parking transactions.
#Select the desired booking.
#To make use of the booking: select Show car
park ticket.
or
#To cancel the booking: select Cancel booking.
%If possible, a parking space booking can be
cancelled up to the stated time. If a booking
cannot be cancelled, this will already be
shown to you during the booking procedure.
Paying parking charges
Requirements:
RNavigation Services is activated in your
Mercedes me user account.
RThe parking service is part of the scope of the
Navigation Services.
RYou have registered with your payment details
for the payment of parking in the Mercedes
me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respec-
tive contract partner.
RParking is activated (/ page 545).
%This option is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4©
#Select a parking option on the map.
#If a car park that can be paid for has been
selected, scroll down in the parking details.
#Select Payment.
Once the vehicle has reached a parking posi-
tion with payment function and the vehicle is
switched o, a message appears. Using this
message you can pay from the vehicle and
start the payment process.
Starting a payment procedure
#Acknowledge the message.
#Please note the maximum parking period dis-
played and any existing additional limitations.
If required, a message will inform you about
the necessity of displaying information con-
rming the online payment for the parking
space.
#Select Start the payment process.
#If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN.
#Press a to conrm.
The successful start of your parking transac-
tion is shown.
#Complete the booking with OK.
#To cancel a parking transaction: aer receiv-
ing the conrmation request, select Cancel.
Minimum charges may be incurred.
MBUX multimedia system 547
F206 0119 02
Ending a parking transaction
#Stop the active transaction using the
Mercedes me app.
You receive a summary of the procedure and
the costs.
If an uncompleted parking transaction is
detected for your vehicle as you continue your
journey, a message will appear asking whether
you would like to end it.
#Acknowledge the message.
When the parking transaction is stopped suc-
cessfully, another message appears with the
details about your completed parking.
Dashcam
Notes on the dashcam
*NOTE Risk of legal consequences due to
violation of legal regulations and data pro-
tection provisions
You are legally responsible for operation and
use of the dashcam functions.
The legal requirements relating to operation
and use of the dashcam can vary depending
on the country in which the dashcam is oper-
ated.
This function is not permitted in all countries.
#Before using the dashcam, read up on
the content of the legal regulations, in
particular the data protection require-
ments in the respective country of use.
#Observe the legal regulations, in particu-
lar the data protection requirements.
%Observe the following instructions for safe
operation:
ROnly use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB
storage devices.
RUse USB-IF certied USB storage devices.
USB-IF is a non-prot corporation and
stands for USB Implementers Forum.
Based on the USB specication, USB-IF
certies, for example, USB versions, cor-
responding cables and plugs as well as
energy supply processes via the USB
interface.
RUSB storage devices may be damaged if
oen or permanently overwritten at high
speed. Mercedes-Benz recommends a
high-quality external SSD drive.
The abbreviation SSD stands for Solid
State Drive.
%The le size and therefore the duration of sin-
gle recording is limited by the limitations of
the USB ash drive format. So FAT32 format-
ted USB ash drives do not allow les larger
than 4 GB, for example.
When the le size is reached, the recording
stops and you receive a notication.
%The following functions are available in the
Gallery app:
RSwitching write protection on or o
RDeleting video les
Additional information about the Gallery app
(/ page 579).
548 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Selecting a USB device for a video recording
with the dashcam
Requirements:
RAt least one USB device is connected with the
multimedia system (/ page 600).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Dashcam
#Select the USB symbol.
#Select the USB device.
%When USB devices contain multiple partitions,
recorded video les are not always displayed
in the recording list.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
USB devices with one partition.
Starting or stopping a loop recording with the
dashcam
Requirements:
RFor recording and saving a video le: a USB
device is connected with the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 600).
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Dashcam
#If several USB devices are connected with the
multimedia system, select a USB device
(/ page 549).
If no USB device is selected, a selection is
made automatically when recording starts.
#To select recording mode: select Loop record-
ing.
Loop recording continuously records short
video les. When the memory is full, recording
is continued automatically. In doing so, the
oldest video le is written over.
#To start: select Start recording.
The length of the recording is shown. The Do
not remove the storage medium during
recording. Before removing the storage
medium, eject it first. message appears. The
video le is stored on the USB device.
#To end: select End recording.
%In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude
and latitude) are shown in the video image.
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates
may show greater inaccuracies.
A message may appear in the following cases:
RThe camera is not functional, the Camera
unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
RIf the country border indication has been
switched on (/ page 550).
RIf an outdoor recording is started with the
camera app during a dashcam recording, the
dashcam recording pauses and resumes auto-
matically aer the camera recording is n-
ished. A notication to this eect is displayed.
Starting or stopping individual recordings with
the dashcam
Requirements
RFor recording and saving a video le: a USB
device is connected with the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 600).
RThe vehicle is switched on.
MBUX multimedia system 549
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Dashcam
#If several USB devices are connected with the
multimedia system, select a USB device
(/ page 549).
If no USB device is selected, a selection is
made automatically when recording starts.
#To select recording mode: select Individual
recording.
Individual recording stops recording when the
memory limit is reached. An individual record-
ing is automatically protected against being
overwritten.
#To start: select Start recording.
The length of the recording is shown. The Do
not remove the storage medium during
recording. Before removing the storage
medium, eject it first. message appears. The
video le is stored on the USB device.
#To end: select End recording.
%In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude
and latitude) are shown in the video image.
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates
may show greater inaccuracies.
A report may appear in the following cases:
RIndividual recording: the memory is full or
there are only a few minutes recording time
available. The video recording stops or will be
stopped imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video le.
RThe camera is not functional, the Camera
unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
RIf the country border indication has been
switched on (/ page 550).
RIf an outdoor recording is started with the
camera app during a dashcam recording, the
dashcam recording pauses and resumes auto-
matically aer the camera recording is n-
ished. A notication to this eect is displayed.
Conguring dashcam settings
Requirements:
RA USB device is connected with the multime-
dia system (/ page 600).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Dashcam
#Select Z.
Receiving notications aer passing a border
crossing
#Switch on National border alert .
A message is shown if video is being recorded
and the vehicle passes a border.
%This function is not available in all countries.
Starting automatic video recording
#Select Automatic loop recording.
#Switch on Automatic loop recording.
When the vehicle is started, video recording
starts automatically.
%This function is not available in all countries.
550 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
&WARNING Risk of distraction from operat-
ing integrated communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment inte-
grated in the vehicle when driving, you could
be distracted from the trac situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&WARNING Risk of accident from operating
mobile communication equipment while
the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communication devices distract the
driver from the trac situation. This can also
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
#As a driver, only operate mobile commu-
nication devices when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
#As a vehicle occupant, use mobile com-
munication devices only in the designa-
ted area, e.g. in the rear passenger com-
partment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system and mobile com-
munication equipment in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone receptacles cannot always retain all
objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects so that they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the additional information on stowing
mobile communications devices correctly:
RLoading the vehicle (/ page 196)
MBUX multimedia system 551
F206 0119 02
Further information can be obtained from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Telephone menu overview
1Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
(two phone mode)
3Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5Options
6Messages
7Calls up devices
8Numerical pad
9Starts contact search
Bluetooth® prole overview
Bluetooth® prole of
the mobile phone
Function
PBAP (Phone Book
Access Prole) Contacts are automat-
ically displayed in the
multimedia system
MAP (Message Access
Prole) Message functions
can be used
552 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Bluetooth® prole of
the mobile phone
Function
HFP (Hands Free
Prole) Wireless telephony is
available
SAP (SIM Access
Prole) The car telephone has
access to the SIM
card data and dials
into the mobile phone
network via the exte-
rior aerial
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following tel-
ephony operating modes are available:
RA mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 553).
RTwo mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone
mode) (/ page 554).
-You can use all the functions of the multi-
media system with both mobile phones.
%Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio func-
tionality can by used with any mobile phone
(/ page 600).
Information on telephony
The following situations can lead to the call being
disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:
RThere is insucient network coverage in the
area
RYou move from one transmission/reception
station to another and no communication
channels are free
RThe SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
RA mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
the network with the second SIM card at the
same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice® for improved speech quality. A require-
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person you
are calling support HD Voice® .
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may uctuate.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements:
RBluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
RBluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 488).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
5Devices
Searching for a mobile phone
#Select Connect new device.
Authorising a mobile phone
#Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
#If the codes match: conrm the code on the
mobile phone.
MBUX multimedia system 553
F206 0119 02
%For older mobile phone models, enter a 1 to
16-digit number code on the mobile phone
and on the multimedia system for authorisa-
tion.
%Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on
the multimedia system.
Authorised mobile phones are reconnected
automatically.
%The connected mobile phone can also be
used as Bluetooth® audio equipment
(/ page 600).
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone
mode)
Requirements
RAt least one mobile phone is already connec-
ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
5Devices
#Select Connect new device.
#Select the mobile phone.
#In some cases, if the query appears, conrm
the selection of the mobile phone pair with the
Device name 1 + Device name 2 option.
The selected mobile phone is connected to
the multimedia system.
Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode)
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone
Both mobile phones are shown individually in sep-
arate tabs.
#Select the tab with the desired mobile phone.
Selecting the tab of a specic mobile phone
displays the associated telephone contents.
Selecting the other tab switches the view to
the other telephone.
The submenus in the telephone menu (e.g.
contacts, call lists, messages) relate to the
currently selected mobile phone with the
exception of the telephone settings. In the
telephone settings, settings can be made for
both mobile phones.
Changing the function of a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
5Devices
Activating a function
#Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile
phone.
The corresponding function is activated.
Deactivating a function
#One function is active: select the coloured
symbol in the line of a mobile phone.
The mobile phone is disconnected from the
multimedia system.
#Several functions are active: de-select an
active function in the line of one of the mobile
phones.
The corresponding function is deactivated.
554 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Replacing mobile phones
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
5Devices
No authorised mobile phone available:
#Select Connect new device.
#Select a mobile phone.
#Newly authorised mobile phone: conrm the
numerical code on the mobile phone.
Using in single telephone mode
#Select Device name.
A newly authorised mobile phone is connected
in single telephone mode.
If the mobile phone has already been author-
ised and connected in single telephone mode,
it is connected again in single telephone
mode.
If a mobile phone is already authorised and
has been connected in two phone mode with
another mobile phone, a query may come,
whether the mobile phone should in future be
operated in single telephone mode or connec-
ted with another mobile phone in two phone
mode.
#If required, conrm the query about operating
mode (single telephone or two phone mode)
by conrming the Device name option.
Using in two phone mode
#Select Device name 1 + Device name 2.
A newly authorised mobile phone is connected
with the selected mobile phone in two phone
mode.
If the mobile phone has already been author-
ised and connected in single telephone mode,
it will be connected in future with the selected
mobile phone in two phone mode.
If the mobile phone was previously connected
with another mobile phone, this connection is
cancelled.
Disconnecting or deleting a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
Disconnecting a mobile phone
#Select Disconnect.
If applicable, the mobile phone will be auto-
matically reconnected when the vehicle is next
started.
Deleting a mobile phone
#Select Devices.
#Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
#Select Delete device.
The mobile phone is deleted from the system.
Setting the reception and transmission volume
Requirements:
RA mobile phone is connected (/ page 553).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
5Devices
This function ensures optimal language quality.
MBUX multimedia system 555
F206 0119 02
%Please note that the respective mobile phone
must be selected for adjustment of the recep-
tion and transmission volume.
#Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
#Select Volume.
#Set the reception and transmission volume
using Reception volume and Transmission
volume.
Further information on the recommended recep-
tion and transmission volume: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Setting the ringtone
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Ringtones
#Set the ringtone.
%If the mobile phone supports the transfer of
the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of the
mobile phone instead of that of the vehicle
audio system.
Starting or stopping mobile phone voice recog-
nition
Requirements
RAt least one mobile phone is connected to the
multimedia system (/ page 553).
RThe tab with the mobile phone for which voice
recognition should be started is selected
(/ page 554).
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
#Press and hold the £ button on the multi-
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
Voice recognition is started for the currently
selected mobile phone.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition
#Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
%If a mobile phone is connected via Smart-
phone Integration, the voice recognition of
this mobile phone is always started or stop-
ped.
Note about contact suggestions
The multimedia system can show contact sugges-
tions based on frequently used contacts, outgoing
calls and text messages. For this, the Allow con-
tact suggestions option must be switched on
(/ page 490).
When you open the call list or the message menu,
contacts which you can call or write to will be sug-
gested to you. Suggestions will be shown in the
Suggestionstab.
%The multimedia system does not use the con-
tent of messages for suggestions.
Selecting options for contact suggestions
Requirements
RThe Allow contact suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 490).
RThe multimedia system has gathered sucient
data in order to show contact suggestions.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone
#Select Call list or Contacts.
556 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Select Suggestions.
#Select Ä in the line of the suggested con-
tact.
The following option is available for selection:
RDo not suggest now
Calls
Telephone operation
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone
Making a call by entering numbers
#Select _.
#Enter a number.
#Select R.
The call is made.
Accepting a call
#Select R Accept .
Rejecting a call
#Select k Reject .
Answering a call with a message
#Select s Answer w SMS.
Ending a call
#Select k.
Putting a call on In-Car Oce's to-do list
#Select À Put call on In-Car Office's to-do
list.
Activating functions during a call
The following functions are available during a call:
Rk End call
Rm Micro. off
R_ Keypad (show to send DTMF tones)
RÁ Add call
RHands-free
Transfer the call, e.g. to Front, Rear or All
seats.
RPrivate mode
Transfer the call to the telephone or head-
phones, for example.
#Select a function.
%Observe that the functions and symbols can
vary depending on the vehicle equipment.
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements
RThere is an active call (/ page 557).
RAnother call is being made.
Switching between calls
#Select the contact.
The selected call is active. The other call is on
hold.
Activating a call on hold
#Select the contact of the call on hold.
Conducting a conference call
#Select  Conference.
The new participant is included in the confer-
ence call.
Ending an active call
#Select k End call.
MBUX multimedia system 557
F206 0119 02
%On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Accepting or rejecting a waiting call
Requirements
RThere is an active call (/ page 557).
If you receive a call while already in a call, a mes-
sage is displayed.
Depending on the mobile phone and mobile
phone network provider you will hear a call wait-
ing signal.
Alternatively, in two phone mode you will hear an
acoustic signal when the call goes through to the
other (not yet active) mobile phone.
#Select R Accept.
The incoming call is active.
If only one mobile phone is connected with
the multimedia system, the previous call will
be put on hold.
If during a call you accept a call with the other
mobile phone when in two phone mode then
the existing call is ended.
or
#Select Answer w SMS.
The incoming call is not accepted.
You answer with a message.
or
#Select k Reject.
%The function and the behaviour depend on
your mobile phone network provider as well
as on the mobile phone (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
Using the international dialling code
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5_
#Press and "0" until a "+" appears in the selec-
tion eld.
#Enter the numbers of the country code,
regional code and the telephone number.
#Select R.
The call is made.
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu
The contacts menu contains all contacts from
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or data
storage medium.
Depending on the data source, it is possible to
save/load the following number of contacts:
RPermanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
RContacts loaded from the mobile phone:
5,000 entries per mobile phone
From the contacts menu, you can perform the fol-
lowing actions:
RMake a call, for example call a contact
(/ page 560)
RNavigation (/ page 512)
RCompose messages (/ page 561)
RAdditional options (/ page 560)
Mobile phone contacts are automatically dis-
played when a mobile phone is connected to the
multimedia system (/ page 553).
558 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Downloading mobile phone favourite contacts
If the mobile phone supports the function, the
favourites of the mobile phone are automatically
loaded and appear in the overview of the phone
menu.
Calling up contacts
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Contacts
The following options can be used to search for
contacts:
RSearching by initials
RSearching by name
RSearching by phone number
#Enter characters into the search eld.
#Select the contact.
A contact can contain the following details:
RPhone numbers
RNavigation addresses
RInternet address
REmail addresses
RRelationship (if set)
Managing the format of a contact's name
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z
#Select Contacts.
#Select Name format.
#Select an option.
Overview of importing contacts
Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Source Requirements
° USB device The USB device is
connected with the
USB port.
Mobile phone A mobile phone is
connected to the mul-
timedia system via
Bluetooth®.
Contacts are availa-
ble.
%Note that the imported contacts remain in the
vehicle and can be accessed at any time
regardless of the connected mobile phones.
Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Contacts
5Import contacts
#Select a mobile phone <device name>, from
which the contacts should be imported.
#Select an option.
Saving a mobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Contacts
#Select r in the line of the mobile phone
contact.
#Select Ä.
#Select Save.
#Select Yes.
The contact saved in the multimedia system is
identied by the MBUX symbol.
MBUX multimedia system 559
F206 0119 02
Calling a contact
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Contacts
#Select ª Search contacts.
#Enter characters into the search eld.
#Select the contact.
#Select the telephone number.
The number is dialled.
Selecting further options in the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Contacts
#Select r in the line of the contact.
#Select Ä.
#Select an option.
Deleting contacts
Requirements
RThe contacts are saved in the vehicle.
RTo delete an individual contact, this has been
imported manually into the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone
Deleting all contacts
#Select Z.
#Select Contacts.
#Select Delete all MBUX contacts.
#Select an option.
Deleting a contact
#Select Contacts.
#Select r in the line of the contact.
#Select Ä.
#Select Delete contact.
#Select Yes.
Call list
Overview of the call list
Depending on whether your mobile phone sup-
ports the PBAP Bluetooth® prole or not, this can
have dierent eects on the presentation and
functions of the call list.
If the PBAP Bluetooth® prole is supported, the
eects are as follows:
RThe call lists from the mobile phone are dis-
played in the multimedia system.
RWhen connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to conrm the connection for the PBAP
Bluetooth® prole.
If the PBAP Bluetooth® prole is not supported,
the eects are as follows:
RThe multimedia system generates a call list
independently as soon as calls are made in
the vehicle.
RThe call list is not synchronised with the call
lists in the mobile phone.
Making a call from the call list
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone
#Select ª Call list.
#Select an entry.
The call is made.
560 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Selecting additional options in the call list
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone
#Select ª Call list.
#For contacts that are in the address book:
select options.
The contact details are called up.
#For contacts where only one number is shown
(not in the address book): select ç.
Deleting the call list
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5Z 5Devices
#Select Delete call list.
#Select Yes.
%This function is only available if your mobile
does not support the PBAP Bluetooth® prole.
Text messages
Overview of message functions
In the message menu you can receive text mes-
sages and create and send them with the help of
the MBUX voice assistant.
If the connected mobile phone supports the Blue-
tooth® MAP prole, the message functions can be
used on the multimedia system.
You can obtain further information about settings
and supported functions of Bluetooth®-capable
mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Some mobile phones require further settings aer
being connected to the multimedia system to acti-
vate the messaging functionality (see manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
Setting message displays
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5Z 5Devices
#Select Message display.
#Select On or Off.
Reading messages
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
Using the read-aloud function
A message list is shown.
#To read aloud, select the ¬ symbol at a
conversation.
The message is read aloud.
Creating and sending a new message
Requirements
RThere is an Internet connection.
RAt least one mobile phone with reception is
connected.
RIf applicable, the message function must be
activated on the mobile phone.
MBUX multimedia system 561
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
#Using the MBUX voice assistant, speak the
voice command Send a message to, and
name the desired contact (/ page 455).
Dictating text
#Say the message.
You are guided by the voice dialogue.
Replying to a message in the messaging history
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
A message list is shown.
#Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown. You will be guided through the steps
with the help of a voice dialogue.
#Say the message.
Forwarding messages
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
A message list is shown.
#Speak the voice command Forward message.
You are guided by the voice dialogue.
Calling a message sender
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
A message list is shown.
#Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown.
#Select Ä.
#Select Call.
Using telephone numbers, URLs or email
addresses from a text message
Requirements
RAn Internet connection is available to call up a
URL.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
A message list is shown.
#Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is
shown.
#Select a telephone number or a URL in the
message.
If a URL is selected the web browser opens.
If a telephone number is selected the following
options are available:
RCall
RNew message
or
562 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#If In-Car Oce and the email function are
available: select an email address.
In-Car Oce opens.
%The availability of In-Car Oce is country-
dependent.
#Select an option.
Deleting a message
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5<Device name>
5ç
A message list is shown.
#Select a contact.
#Press and hold on a message.
#To delete the message: select Delete.
In-Car Oce
In-Car Oce functions
Using In-Car Oce, you can connect your online
services to the multimedia system.
The following functions are available:
RCalendar
Showing appointments and triggering actions,
e.g. reading aloud, placing a call, navigating
RE-mail
Reading, reading aloud, creating, answering
and forwarding e-mails
RTasks and calls
Managing tasks and pre-booked calls
RVoice input
Creating appointments/reminders and tasks
%Alternatively, you can record text contents via
the MBUX voice assistant or via the dictation
function.
Further information on the MBUX Voice Assis-
tant (/ page 456).
%The zero layer displays notications or
reminders from In-Car Oce, such as birth-
days or calls due (/ page 464).
%Please note that certain functions are only
available when the vehicle is stationary.
Calling up In-Car Oce
Requirements:
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RThe In-Car Oce service is activated in your
Mercedes me user account.
RYou have a user account with an online
service, for example Oce 365 or Gmail.
In this way, appointments, e-mails and tasks
can be synchronised and facilitated.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps
#Select In-Car Office.
Individual functions from In-Car Oce can be
called up.
Linking a user account
#Select the desired online service.
#Scan the QR code.
#Follow the instructions on the device.
MBUX multimedia system 563
F206 0119 02
Selecting calendar functions in In-Car Oce
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office
5Calendar
#Select an appointment.
The following functions are available:
R. Read aloud
RR Call
RZ Navigate
RE Delete
#Select a function.
%Functions are available if corresponding
appointment information is saved.
Examples of this are:
RIf a telephone number has been saved for
the appointment, Call is available.
RIf a navigable address has been saved in
the Online Account for the appointment,
Navigate is available.
Selecting functions of Tasks & Calls in "In-Car
Oce"
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office
5Tasks & calls
#Select a function for an entry.
The following functions are available:
RReading aloud .
RPlacing a call R
This task function requires a telephone num-
ber.
RMarking as completed O
In the current edit, an entry that has been
marked as completed can be marked as open
again by removing the tick.
RDeleting E
RDisplaying details r
Marking an entry as completed in Tasks & Calls
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office
5Tasks & calls
#Select Tasks & calls.
An overview appears.
#Select O.
Reading and managing e-mails
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office 5E-mail
#Select an e-mail.
The e-mail is opened.
Additional functions are available:
R. Reading e-mails
Re Answering e-mails (/ page 565)
R¥ Forwarding e-mails (/ page 565)
RE Deleting e-mails
564 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Creating new e-mails
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office 5E-mail
#Select W Create e-mail .
#Select f.
#Enter an e-mail address directly via the key-
board.
or
#Select an e-mail address from the contacts.
%Contacts can be used from the contacts
menu or from linked online services such as
Oce 365 or Gmail. Further information
about the contacts menu (/ page 558).
%Please note that e-mails can only be written
when the vehicle is stationary.
#Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the
corresponding elds with the keypad.
#Select Send.
Answering e-mails
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office 5E-mail
#Select an e-mail.
#Select Reply.
#Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding eld
using the keypad.
#Select Send.
%Please note that e-mails can only be written
when the vehicle is stationary.
Forwarding e-mails
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office 5E-mail
#Select an e-mail.
#Select Forward.
#To forward with attachment: select Forward
with attachment.
%Contacts can be used from the contacts
menu or from linked online services such as
Oce 365 or Gmail. Further information
about the contacts menu (/ page 558).
%Forwarding with an attachment is only possi-
ble if an attachment is available.
#To forward without attachment: select
Forward without attachment.
#Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding eld
using the keypad.
#Select Send.
Operating In-Car Oce using the MBUX Voice
Assistant and dictation function
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5In-Car Office 5E-mail
Operating In-Car Oce using the dictation func-
tion
The dictation function allows you to dictate text
content, such as the subject or text of an e-mail,
instead of typing the content using the keyboard.
%The dictation function is not available every-
where with the full range of functions. For the
rst-time activation of the function it may be
necessary to accept the Mercedes me con-
nect terms of use in your Mercedes me user
account.
MBUX multimedia system 565
F206 0119 02
The following is an example of how you can dic-
tate the subject and text of an e-mail.
#Select W Create e-mail .
#Add recipients using f.
#Select p.
The dictation function is started.
#Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail.
Aer the voice input has been processed, it is
shown as text.
#Select Send.
Operating In-Car Oce using the MBUX Voice
Assistant
With the voice control of the MBUX Voice Assis-
tant you can operate various functions of In-Car
Oce and speak in text contents.
%Further information on operating the MBUX
Voice Assistant (/ page 455).
The following are examples of some voice com-
mands that you can use to operate In-Car Oce.
#To write new e-mail: say the voice command I
want to send an e-mail to John Doe.
You are guided by the dialogue.
#To reply to an e-mail: say the voice command
Reply to e-mail.
You are guided by the dialogue.
#To forward an e-mail: say the voice command
Forward e-mail.
Dictate the text of the e-mail.
#To show tasks: say the voice command Show
my tasks.
The tasks are shown.
#To create a calendar entry: say the voice com-
mand Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9
a.m..
You are guided by the dialogue.
Apple CarPlay®
Overview of Apple CarPlay®
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
iPhone® functions can be used via the multimedia
system using Apple CarPlay®. They are operated
using the touchscreen, Touch Control or Siri®
voice control. You can activate voice control by
pressing and holding the £ button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
%By briey pressing the £ button on the
multifunction steering wheel you can continue
to operate the multimedia system using the
MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 455).
566 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Only one iPhone® at a time can be connected via
Apple CarPlay® with the multimedia system.
Also for use of Apple CarPlay® with two phone
mode, only one additional mobile phone can be
connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia
system.
As access to the iPhone® is restricted by MBUX
when an Apple CarPlay® session is active, not all
MBUX functions (e.g. dialling from the address
book) can be fully provided for the connected
device. In this case use Apple CarPlay®.
The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay® is
only available with an Internet connection.
The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary
according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli-
cation and the services and content connected to
it.
Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Information on Apple CarPlay®
The Apple CarPlay® symbol in the status line
switches within Apple CarPlay® to the last active
display.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys-
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay®
(wired)
Requirements:
RThe current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
%For safety reasons, the rst activation of
Apple CarPlay® on the multimedia system
must be carried out when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the parking brake applied.
#Connect the iPhone® to a USB port on the
multimedia system using a suitable cable
(/ page 600).
When the application is connected for the rst
time, a message about data protection regula-
tions appears.
#Select Accept & start if the application should
be started.
or
#Open the device manager (/ page 554).
#Start Apple CarPlay® using the relevant sym-
bol next to the device name.
%If applicable, a message about data protection
regulations appears.
#If required conrm the use of Apple CarPlay®
on your iPhone®.
Exiting Apple CarPlay®
#Select ©.
or
#Press the © button on the multifunction
steering wheel (MBUX multimedia system).
MBUX multimedia system 567
F206 0119 02
%If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the applica-
tion starts in the background when reconnec-
ted. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the
Apple CarPlay® symbol in the status line.
Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay®
(wireless)
Requirements
RThe current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
RBluetooth® is activated on the device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
RThe device is "visible" for other devices.
%For safety reasons, the rst activation of
Apple CarPlay® on the multimedia system
must be carried out when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the parking brake applied.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
#Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth®
(/ page 553).
When the application is connected for the rst
time, a message about data protection regula-
tions appears.
#Select OK, start Apple CarPlay if the applica-
tion should be started.
#If required conrm the use of Apple CarPlay®
on your iPhone®.
%It is possible at any time to switch between
connection via Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay®
(wireless) in the device list.
%If you have already connected a mobile phone
via Bluetooth®, you can connect another
iPhone® via Bluetooth® to use Apple CarPlay®
via the device manager.
Exiting Apple CarPlay®
#Select ©.
or
#Press the © button on the Touch Control
(MBUX multimedia system).
%If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the applica-
tion starts in the background when reconnec-
ted. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the
Apple CarPlay® symbol in the status line.
Calling up Apple CarPlay® sound settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Audio
#Select the sound settings.
Ending Apple CarPlay®
#Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the
device manager (telephone, media) that is
next to the device name of the iPhone®.
%Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the
device manager in the telephone or media
applications if Apple CarPlay® should be
restarted.
568 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
%If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the applica-
tion starts in the background the next time it
is started automatically. You can call up Apple
CarPlay® using the relevant symbol in the sta-
tus line.
Android Auto
Android Auto overview
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Mobile phone functions can be used with Android
Auto using the Android operating system on the
multimedia system. They are operated using the
touchscreen, Touch Control or voice control. You
can activate the voice control system by pressing
and holding the £ button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
%By briey pressing the £ button on the
multifunction steering wheel you can continue
to operate the multimedia system using the
MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 455).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec-
ted via Android Auto with the multimedia system.
Also for use of Android Auto with two phone
mode, only one additional mobile phone can be
connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia
system.
The full range of functions for Android Auto is only
possible with an Internet connection.
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto
apps may vary according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli-
cation and the services and content connected to
it.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
Information on Android Auto
The Android Auto symbol in the status line
switches within Android Auto to the last active
display.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys-
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
(wired)
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone supports Android Auto from
Android 5.0.
MBUX multimedia system 569
F206 0119 02
RThe current version of the Android Auto app is
installed on the mobile phone.
RIn order to use the telephone functions, the
mobile phone must be connected to the multi-
media system via Bluetooth® (/ page 553).
If there was no prior Internet connection, this
is established with the use of the mobile
phone with Android Auto.
%For safety reasons, the rst activation of
Android Auto on the multimedia system must
be carried out when the vehicle is stationary
with the parking brake.
#Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on
the multimedia system using a suitable cable
(/ page 600).
When the application is connected for the rst
time, a message about data protection regula-
tions appears.
#Select Accept & start if the application should
be started.
or
#Open the device manager (/ page 554).
#Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol
next to the device name.
Exiting Android Auto
#Select ©.
or
#Press the © button on the Touch Control
(MBUX multimedia system).
%If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore-
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background when reconnected.
You can call up Android Auto using the
Android Auto symbol in the status line.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
(wireless)
Requirements
RThe current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
RThe device supports the Android Auto function
(wireless).
RBluetooth® is activated on the device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
RThe device is "visible" for other devices.
RBluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 488)
%For safety reasons, the rst activation of
Android Auto on the multimedia system must
be carried out when the vehicle is stationary
with the parking brake.
%The Android Auto function (wireless) is not
available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
#Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth®
(/ page 553).
%Depending on the device conguration, the
query whether Android Auto should be started
may appear aer connecting the mobile
phone via Bluetooth®. In this case, the query
must be answered with Yes.
#Select Start Android Auto.
When the application is connected for the rst
time, a message about data protection regula-
tions appears.
570 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Select Accept & start.
%It is possible at any time to switch between
connection via Bluetooth® or Android Auto
(wireless) in the device list.
%If you have already connected a mobile phone
via Bluetooth®, you can connect another
mobile phone via Bluetooth® to use Android
Auto via the device manager.
Exiting Android Auto
#Select ©.
or
#Press the © button on the Touch Control
(MBUX multimedia system).
%If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore-
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background when reconnected.
You can call up Android Auto using the
Android Auto symbol in the status line.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Audio
#Select the sound settings.
Ending Android Auto
#Select the Android Auto symbol in the device
manager (telephone, media) that is next to the
device name of the mobile phone.
%Select the Android Auto symbol in the device
manager if Android Auto should be restarted.
%If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore-
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background the next time it is
started automatically. You can call up Android
Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the
status line.
Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and
Apple CarPlay®
Overview of transferred vehicle data
When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehi-
cle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This
enables you to get the best out of selected mobile
phone services. Vehicle data is not directly acces-
sible.
The following system information is transmitted:
RSoware release of the multimedia system
RSystem ID (anonymised)
The transfer of this data is used to optimise com-
munication between the vehicle and the mobile
phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identier is randomly gen-
erated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identica-
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi-
media system is reset (/ page 494).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
RTransmission position engaged
RDistinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
RDay/night mode of the driver display
RDrive type
The transfer of this data is used to alter how con-
tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit-
uation.
The following position data is transmitted:
RCoordinates
MBUX multimedia system 571
F206 0119 02
RSpeed
RCompass direction
RAcceleration direction
This data is used by the mobile phone to improve
the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuity
in a tunnel).
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
%Mercedes me calls are not possible in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre if these functions are available in your
country.
1me button for service or information calls
2SOS button cover
3SOS button (emergency call system)
Making a Mercedes me call
#Press me button 1.
Making an emergency call
#To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it
briey.
#Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one
second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call
can still be triggered. This has priority over all
other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call using
the me button
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has
been initiated via the me button in the overhead
control panel or the multimedia system
(/ page 572).
Using the voice dialogue system you access the
desired service:
RAccident and Breakdown Management
RMercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general
information about the vehicle
You can nd information on the following topics:
RActivation of Mercedes me connect
572 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
ROperating the vehicle
RNearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
ROther products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 575).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
using the multimedia system
Requirements
RAccess to a GSM network is available.
RThe contract partner's GSM network coverage
is available in the respective region.
RThe vehicle must be switched on so that vehi-
cle data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5©
#Call Mercedes me connect.
Aer conrmation, the multimedia system
sends the required vehicle data. The data
transfer is shown in the display.
Then you can select a service and be connected
to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
aer automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has detected an accident or break-
down situation (/ page 336).
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe hazard warning lights are switched on.
%This function is not available in all countries.
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit-
uations under certain circumstances.
Requirements for collision detection in the con-
text of accident recovery:
RThe vehicle is equipped with an anti-the
alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
RThe vehicle is equipped with the interior pro-
tection (code 882).
RThe vehicle is equipped with the Anti-The
Protection Package (code P54).
RThe collision detection service with the noti-
cation has been activated on Mercedes me
connect.
If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro-
tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will
receive a notication in the multimedia system
when you switch the vehicle on.
The message informs you about the potentially
aected area of the vehicle and the strength of
the collision.
In the event an accident or breakdown is detec-
ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in
the multimedia system display. This may take a
few seconds.
%The availability of collision detection depends
on the vehicle.
Aer quitting the emergency guide display on the
multimedia system, a prompt appears asking
whether you would like to get support from the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
#Select Call.
RAer your agreement, or if the Mercedes
me connect service "Accident and Break-
MBUX multimedia system 573
F206 0119 02
down Management" is active, the vehicle
data is transferred automatically
(/ page 577).
RThe Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
takes your call and organises the break-
down and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services.
%Depending on the severity of the accident, an
automatic emergency call can be initiated.
This has priority over all other active calls
(/ page 583).
%In addition, if the Mercedes me connect
service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar
prompt can appear aer a delay in the event
of a breakdown. If you are already in contact
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or
have already received support, this prompt
can be ignored or declined.
%If you answer the prompt for support from the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call
later, the message will be hidden and appear
again later.
The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me
connect service "Telediagnostics", can either
be conrmed or declined. Aer being
declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a
Mercedes me call
If you have activated the maintenance manage-
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre. You will then receive individual recom-
mendations regarding the maintenance of your
vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the
maintenance management service, the multime-
dia system reminds you aer a certain amount of
time that a service is due. A prompt appears ask-
ing if you would like to make an appointment.
#To arrange a service appointment: select Call.
Aer your consent, the vehicle data is trans-
ferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer
centre takes your preferred appointment date.
The information is then sent to your desired
service outlet.
This will contact you to conrm the appoint-
ment and if necessary consult about the
details.
%If you select Call later aer the service mes-
sage appears, the message is hidden and
reappears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer during a
Mercedes me call
Requirements
RThere is an active Mercedes me call via the
multimedia system or the me button in the
overhead control panel (/ page 572).
%The prompt to conrm data transfer does not
appear in all countries.
If the Accident and Breakdown Management serv-
ices are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do
you want to transfer your vehicle data and the
vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Centre to improve the processing of your
request? message is shown.
%The exact phrase may dier depending on the
multimedia system installed.
#Select Yes.
RThe relevant vehicle data is sent automati-
cally (/ page 575).
574 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
or
#Select No and conrm.
ROnly call control data is transmitted
(/ page 575).
More information on Mercedes me: https://
www.mercedes.me
Data transferred during a Mercedes me call
If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me,
data is transferred to enable targeted advice and
an ecient service.
The following requirements must be fullled for
the transfer of the data:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe required data transfer technology is sup-
ported by the mobile phone network provider.
RThe quality of the mobile connection is su-
cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following fac-
tors:
RReason for the initiation of the call
RThe available mobile phone transmission tech-
nology
RThe activated Mercedes me connect services
RThe service selected in the voice control sys-
tem
%A prompt for consent to the data transfer only
occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me
connect service is not activated.
%The scope of the data transmitted depends on
the vehicle model and vehicle equipment. For
technical reasons, not all data is available at
all times.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services
are not activated
If no Mercedes me connect services are activated
and the data protection prompt has been con-
rmed the following data is transmitted:
RVehicle identication number
RTime of the call
RReason for the initiation of the call
RConrmation of the data protection prompt
RCountry indicator of the vehicle
RSet language for the multimedia system
RTelephone number of the communication plat-
form installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the
service reminder, the following data is also trans-
mitted:
RCurrent mileage and maintenance data
If a call is made aer automatic accident or break-
down detection using the multimedia system, the
following data is also transmitted:
RCurrent mileage and maintenance data
RCurrent vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called
via the voice control system and no service has
been activated, but the data protection query has
been conrmed, the following data can also be
called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre:
RCurrent vehicle location
MBUX multimedia system 575
F206 0119 02
If the data protection prompt has been rejected,
the following data is transmitted to enable targe-
ted advice and an ecient service:
RReason for the initiation of the call
RRejection of the data protection prompt
RCountry indicator of the vehicle
RSet language for the multimedia system
RTelephone number of the communication plat-
form installed in the vehicle
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services
are activated
Only if the respective service is activated will
additional incident-specic data be transmitted in
the second stage to enable an optimal service.
An overview of the data transferred is contained
in the data protection information for the
Mercedes me connect services. You can nd
these in your Mercedes me user account.
Data processing
The data transmitted within the scope of the call
is deleted from the processing system aer the
call is nished, in so far as this data is not being
used for other activated Mercedes me connect
services.
The incident-specic data is processed and stored
in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if
required to process the incident, forwarded to the
service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre. Take note of the data protec-
tion information on the Mercedes me Internet
page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recor-
ded message immediately aer calling the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
%The recorded message is not available in
every country.
Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect
%Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes
me connect services are not available in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre if these functions are available in your
country.
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv-
ices.
You can use the following services via the multi-
media system and the overhead control panel, for
example:
RAccident and Breakdown Management (me
button or situation-dependent display in the
multimedia system)
RMercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (auto-
matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break-
down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre are available to you around the
clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found
on the vehicle's overhead control panel
(/ page 572).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre using the multimedia system
(/ page 573).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call
the national emergency services using the stand-
ard national emergency service telephone num-
bers. In emergencies, you can also use the
576 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 69).
Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of
use and the data protection information for
Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your
Mercedes me user account.
Information on Mercedes me connect Accident
and Breakdown Management
%Accident and Breakdown Management is not
available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to nd out
whether this function is available in your coun-
try.
The Accident and Breakdown Management can
include the following functions:
RSupplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system (/ page 69)
If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for-
wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci-
dent and Breakdown Management. Forward-
ing the call is however not possible in all coun-
tries.
RBreakdown assistance by a technician on
location and/or the towing away of the vehicle
to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
You may be charged for these services.
RAddition to the emergency guide aer auto-
matic accident or breakdown detection
(/ page 573)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur-
ther vehicle data is sent which enables optimal
support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre and the authorised service partner or
breakdown assistance.
RAddition to the Mercedes me connect service
Telediagnostics
With the Telediagnostics function, specic
wear and failure reports are recorded by the
service provider, in so far as these can be
clearly interpreted and are available through
the monitoring of components that are subject
to diagnostics.
If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat
of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the
multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Centre for further help. This
prompt in the multimedia system only appears
when the vehicle is stationary.
%These services are subject to technical
restrictions such as the mobile phone cover-
age, mobile network quality and the ability of
the processing systems to interpret the trans-
ferred data. In some circumstances, this can
result in delays or the failure of the informa-
tion to appear in the multimedia system.
Please note that the service and breakdown call is
a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be
sure to contact the usual national emergency
number rst or use the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system (/ page 580).
More information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por-
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me connect
call services
The data transferred during a Mercedes me con-
nect call depends on:
RThe reason for initiation of the call
MBUX multimedia system 577
F206 0119 02
RThe service that is selected in the voice con-
trol system
RThe activated Mercedes me connect services
You can nd out which data is transferred when
using the services in the currently valid Mercedes
me connect terms of use and the data protection
information for Mercedes me connect. You can
nd these in your Mercedes me user account.
Mercedes me Apps
Information about Mercedes me
With a Mercedes me user account you have
access to Mercedes-Benz services and oers.
Availability is dependent both on the country and
equipment.
You can obtain further information at a Mercedes-
Benz service centre or in the Mercedes me Portal:
https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Further information about on-demand features via
Mercedes me can be found in the "General notes"
section (/ page 87).
%Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me
Apps updated.
Calling up the Mercedes me user account
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Mercedes me
Vehicle is linked to user account and Mercedes
me is available
#Select Mercedes me ID.
Information about the linked user account
appears.
Your vehicle is not linked to the user account
%If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user
account, you can create one at: https://
www.mercedes.me or in the Mercedes me
App. A valid email address or phone number
is required for this.
#Select ©.
#Select Apps.
#Select Mercedes me.
#Follow the instructions on the display to link
the user account with the vehicle.
%If the Mercedes me App is available on a
mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be
accomplished using the QR code shown.
Calling up the Mercedes me services
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is connected with the user
account.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Mercedes me
#Select My services.
The Mercedes me connect services for which
you have a valid licence are displayed in alpha-
betical order.
Ordering or extending Mercedes me connect
services
To order or renew Mercedes me connect services,
use the Store.
#Select ©.
#Select Store.
578 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Deleting a connection between a user account
and the vehicle
Requirements
RThe user prole of the user account that was
rst linked to the vehicle is selected.
RThe user prole is synchronised
(/ page 476).
RA Mercedes me PIN has been set.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Mercedes me
#Select Mercedes me ID.
#Select Delete vehicle connection.
%Only the user, whose user account was rst
connected with the vehicle can delete the
connection between all user accounts and the
vehicle.
Selecting apps
Requirements:
RDepending on the app, the general terms and
conditions are conrmed.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps
#Select an app.
The following apps are available, for example:
RWeather
RBrowser
RAdditional apps, which are purchased or
installed subsequently
%You can also access both of the rst two apps
via the quick access at Apps.
%The available features are country-dependent.
Licence fees may be applicable.
The following functions are available for apps, for
example:
RSearch function
RFilter function, for displaying search results at
the current vehicle position or at the destina-
tion
RDisplay of detailed information
RRead-aloud function
RSetting functions
Using the Gallery app
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps
#Select Gallery.
Images and video recordings are displayed
from the following sources, for example:
RDashcam video recordings
RCollision detection images
RVideo recordings and images from other
available sources
RFavourites
#Select a tab.
Filtering displays
#Select Z.
#Select an option.
All les, all images or all video recordings are
displayed.
Playing back a video recording
#Select 6.
Playback starts.
MBUX multimedia system 579
F206 0119 02
#To continue playback in full screen mode: tap
on the display.
#To pause playback: select 8.
#To continue playback from the desired posi-
tion: move the · position on the timeline
by sliding it.
#To select the previous or next video record-
ing: swipe to the right or le.
Scrolling and zooming images
#To scroll: swipe on the image in one direction.
#To zoom: tap twice in quick succession on an
image.
#To select the previous or next image: swipe to
the right or le.
Adding or removing a le from the favourites
#Press and hold on a le.
#Select Add to favourites/Remove from
favourites.
A corresponding message appears.
Switching write protection on or o
%Active write protection is not supported by
every app.
#Press and hold on a le.
#Activate D or deactivate E Write pro-
tection.
Deleting les
#Select ´.
#To delete a single le: tap on a le.
ø will appear.
#To delete all les: tap on /.
#To delete: select E.
A prompt appears.
#Select Yes.
%A single le can be deleted even aer a long
press on the le.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Information on available emergency call sys-
tems
Two types of emergency call system are available
to you in the vehicle:
RMercedes-Benz emergency call system
R112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not
available in all countries. You can nd more infor-
mation on the regional availability of the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/
ecall/
The following applies for both emergency call sys-
tems:
RThe transfer of specic data is required for the
intended function of both emergency call sys-
tems. This will be explained in the "Data trans-
fer" section (/ page 584).
RBoth emergency call systems are included as
standard equipment in your vehicle and are
activated at the factory.
580 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
RThe use of both emergency call systems is
exempt from charges.
RBoth emergency call systems only function in
areas in which the mobile phone network pro-
viders oer mobile phone coverage.
For both systems, insucient network cover-
age from the mobile phone network providers
can result in an emergency call not being
transmitted.
Dierences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
RThe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to
the mobile phone network.
RAutomatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted
to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network cov-
erage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.
RIf you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the
system only logs in to the mobile phone network aer the triggering of a
manual or automatic emergency call.
RThe 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and
manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.
%The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in
your vehicle meets the delegated regulation
EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of
the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
depends on circumstances beyond the inu-
ence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes
mobile network coverage and the technical
infrastructure of the public reception centres
in the respective countries.
%Please observe that in the event of a repair
genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be
used which have been certied pursuant to
the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appen-
dix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted
provided their batteries are certied accord-
ing to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.
There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system and using only the
MBUX multimedia system 581
F206 0119 02
112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact
address for carrying out deactivation of the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the
local dealers.
Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the fol-
lowing reasons:
RIn emergency situations when abroad, you can
also get support in a language you speak.
RSeveral transmission technologies are used to
accelerate the transfer of the accident data
and improve reliability of the transmission.
RThe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
permanently logged in to the mobile phone
network, which ensures faster placement of
the emergency call and faster transfer of the
accident data.
Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away
can then be initiated in quickly.
RWith a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the
accident data is only transferred to the public
coordination centre with the approval of the
customer.
In the event of an automatically triggered
emergency call in which there is no voice con-
tact, the accident data is transmitted immedi-
ately to the public emergency call centre.
RIf the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is
not available, the 112 emergency call is car-
ried out automatically.
Overview of emergency call systems
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) can help to reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services at
the site of the accident. They help locate an acci-
dent site in places that are dicult to access.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emer-
gency call automatically (/ page 583) or man-
ually (/ page 583).
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in
the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Indicators in the displays
The following messages appear on the central dis-
play or the media display of both emergency call
systems:
RSOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched
on or the emergency call system is malfunc-
tioning. This does not necessarily indicate
complete failure of the emergency call system.
Emergency calls can still be transmitted.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does
not take account of the availability of mobile
phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre.
The functional readiness of the emergency call
system on the vehicle can be seen when the
SOS NOT READY display disappears once the
vehicle is switched on.
RG: the icon appears in the display during
an active emergency call.
%If there is a malfunction of the emergency call
system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag
or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.
582 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
You can recognise a fault in the emergency
call system by the following displays:
RA corresponding message will also appear
in the driver display.
RThe SOS button lights up red continuously.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe starter battery is suciently charged.
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call:
RAer activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or seat belt tensioners aer an
accident
RAer an automatically initiated emergency
stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist
The emergency call has been made:
RA voice connection is established with the
emergency call centre.
RA message with accident data is transmitted
to the emergency call centre.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel
ashes until the emergency call is nished.
If no connection can be made to the public emer-
gency services, a corresponding message
appears in the display.
#Dial the emergency number 112 or the appro-
priate local emergency call number on your
mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
RRemain in the vehicle if the road and trac
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emergency
call centre.
ROn the basis of the call, the emergency call
centre decides whether it is necessary to call
rescue teams and/or the police to the acci-
dent site.
RIf no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance
is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
#To use the SOS button in the overhead con-
trol panel: press the SOS button at least one
second long (/ page 572).
or
#To use voice control: use the voice commands
of the MBUX voice assistant (/ page 459).
The emergency call has been made:
RA voice connection is established with an
emergency call centre.
RRemain in the vehicle if the road and trac
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emergency
call centre.
ROn the basis of the call, the emergency call
centre decides whether it is necessary to call
rescue teams and the police to the accident
site.
RA message with accident data is transmitted
to the emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emer-
gency services, a corresponding message
appears in the display.
MBUX multimedia system 583
F206 0119 02
#Dial the emergency number 112 or the appro-
priate local emergency call number on your
mobile phone.
Emergency call system data transfer
For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
tem as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre or the public emergency
services call centre.
Depending on the emergency call system
(/ page 580) activated dierent data is transmit-
ted to the appropriate emergency call centre.
584 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:
Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call
RPosition data of the vehicle
RPosition data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
RDirection of travel
RVehicle identication number
RDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydro-
gen)
RNumber of people detected in the vehicle
RWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
RTime of the accident
RLanguage setting on the multimedia system
RWhether Mercedes me connect is available or not
This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.
RPosition data of the vehicle
RPosition data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
RDirection of travel
RVehicle identication number
RDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydro-
gen)
RNumber of people detected in the vehicle
RWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
RTime of the accident
%If only the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident
data is transmitted directly to the public
emergency call centre.
MBUX multimedia system 585
F206 0119 02
For accident clarication purposes, the following
measures can be taken up to an hour aer the
emergency call has been initiated:
RThe current vehicle position can be deter-
mined.
RA voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established.
REmergency call data can be called up.
%For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving
trac information, cannot be performed for
up to two hours aer sending an emergency
call.
Self-diagnosis function of the emergency call
system
Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emer-
gency call system every time the vehicle is
switched on. During this time, the SOS button
lights up red continuously for ve seconds. In the
event of a system failure, you will be informed via
a text message on the driver's display and the red
SOS NOT READY indicator on the central display
or media display.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds aer
switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT
READY in the upper right corner of display is
switched OFF, this means the emergency call sys-
tem passed diagnostics successfully.
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
Requirements
RThe starter battery is suciently charged.
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
%The test mode is currently available in the fol-
lowing countries, for example:
RRussia
RBelarus
RKazakhstan
RArmenia
RKyrgyzstan
#To start the test mode: press and hold the
~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel for at least ve seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically
ends aer the language test has been per-
formed.
#To stop manual test mode: switch o the vehi-
cle.
The test mode is ended.
Information on data processing
Processing of personal data via the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system
All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system corresponds with the
specications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on
the protection of natural entities with regard to
the processing of personal data (GDPR)".
The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system for rescue and recovery in
the event of an accident.
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition
to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has
586 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
the right to use the 112 emergency call system
instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
tem.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are
the local dealers.
Processing of personal data via the 112 emer-
gency call system (EU eCall)
All processing of personal data via the 112 emer-
gency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the
specications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on
the protection of natural entities with regard to
the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is
based particularly on the necessity of upholding
the vital interests of the aected person in
accordance with article 6, paragraph1, letter d of
the GDPR.
The processing of this type of data is strictly limi-
ted to the purpose of operating the emergency
calls to the standard European emergency call
number 112.
Data recipient
The recipients of data that is processed by the
112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the rel-
evant emergency call inquiry terminals. These are
congured by the appropriate authorities of the
respective country in which they are located to
rst accept and subsequently process emergency
calls to the standard European emergency call
number 112.
Arrangements for data processing
Both emergency call systems are designed so that
the following requirements are fullled:
RThe data contained in the system memory is
not accessible outside the system prior to the
initiation of an emergency call.
RBoth emergency call systems cannot be
traced and there is no continuous tracking in
normal operation.
RThe data in the system's internal memory is
automatically and continuously deleted.
RThe location data of the vehicle is continu-
ously overwritten in the system's internal
memory, so that no more than the last three
current locations required for the normal func-
tion of the system are available.
RThe record of the activity data of both emer-
gency call systems is only kept for as long as
is required to full the purpose of handling the
emergency call, and under no circumstances
for more than 13 hours aer the time that an
emergency call is initiated.
Rights of persons aected by the data processing
The person aected by the data processing (the
vehicle owner) has the right to access the data
and if applicable can demand the correction, dele-
tion or barring of data that aects him or her and
that the processing of which does not correspond
with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, dele-
tion or barring carried out according to this regu-
lation must be shared with the third party to
which the data has been transmitted, provided
this does not prove to be infeasible and does not
incur disproportionate expenditure.
The person aected by the data processing has
the right to complain to the appropriate data pro-
tection authority should they be of the opinion
that their rights have been infringed by the pro-
cessing of their personal data.
MBUX multimedia system 587
F206 0119 02
Responsible contact point for the processing of
access rights: Konzernbeauragter für den Daten-
schutz, Mercedes-Benz Group AG, HPC E600,
D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection
Information on connecting to the Internet
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
&WARNING Risk of accident from operating
mobile communication equipment while
the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communication devices distract the
driver from the trac situation. This can also
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
#As a driver, only operate mobile commu-
nication devices when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
#As a vehicle occupant, use mobile com-
munication devices only in the designa-
ted area, e.g. in the rear passenger com-
partment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment and availa-
bility in the country, you can establish an Internet
connection in the following ways:
RVehicles with a communication module:
-Using the communication module includ-
ing data roaming (/ page 589)
-Using Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with a data-ena-
bled mobile phone
RVehicles without a communication module:
-Using Bluetooth® with a data-enabled
mobile phone
-Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile
phone
The Internet functions can only be used to a limi-
ted degree whilst driving.
588 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Setting up an Internet connection using the
communication module
Requirements
RThe vehicle is equipped with a permanently
installed communication module.
RA Mercedes me user account is available.
RThe vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user
account.
RThe Entertainment Package is active.
RThe Comfort Data Volume service is active.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
5Manage Internet access
#Select Acquired data package.
For most Mercedes me connect services, data
volume is available when purchasing the services.
Additional data volume is required to use some
functions, e.g. web browser or Wi-Fi hotspot.
If the data volume limit is reached, the availability
of Mercedes me connect services is limited.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can pur-
chase a data package directly from a mobile
phone network provider via the Mercedes me
Store. To be able to use the data package, you
conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone
network provider via the Mercedes me Store,
which can be terminated at any time and for
which there are no costs. This contract is a pre-
requisite for using the services from the previ-
ously purchased package. The availability of this
option is dependent on the country.
If the data package option is not available or can
be upgraded, you can purchase data volume
directly from the mobile phone network provider
for a fee.
%Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to nd
out whether it is possible to purchase data
volume in your country directly from a mobile
phone network provider.
%Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise
the tethering function of a mobile phone via
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® to use the web browser or
Wi-Fi hotspot.
%With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are
encrypted via TKIP, online soware updates
cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi
hotspot.
Disconnecting the automatic Internet connec-
tion via communication module
Requirements:
RWi-Fi or Bluetooth® tethering are available in
the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
5Manage Internet access
#Select the Ä settings in the line of
Acquired data package.
#To disconnect the automatic connection:
select the Delete entry option.
%The communication module is removed from
the list of known hotspots, but can be recon-
nected manually at any time (/ page 589).
The Delete entry option permits the use of pur-
chased data volume to be limited. The system is
MBUX multimedia system 589
F206 0119 02
prevented from automatically establishing a con-
nection to the communication module aer this
option has been activated.
Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
Requirements:
RThe Wi-Fi function is activated on the multime-
dia system (/ page 488).
RThe Wi-Fi hotspot function is activated on the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions).
RInternet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
5Manage Internet access
%This function is country-dependent.
The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device
manager
#Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi
symbol.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet
device manager
#Select Search for access.
#Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi
symbol.
It may take a few seconds until the device is
found by the Wi-Fi search.
#Log in to the Wi-Fi network (/ page 488).
The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or
does not function in the following cases:
RThe mobile phone is switched o
RMobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
phone
RThe Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi-
media system
RThe Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the
mobile phone
RInternet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the
mobile phone
Setting up an internet connection via Blue-
tooth®
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone supports the Bluetooth®
prole PAN (Personal Area Network).
RThe mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system via Bluetooth® (/ page 553).
RInternet access via Bluetooth® is activated
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
5Manage Internet access
%This function is country-dependent.
The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device
manager
#Select the mobile phone with the \ Blue-
tooth® symbol.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet
device manager
590 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Select Search for access.
In the list displayed, all mobile phones already
known to the multimedia system are shown.
New devices can be set up using the phone
application.
#Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth®
(/ page 553).
%If a new mobile phone is connected using
Bluetooth®, this is also used for the telephone
application.
The Internet connection via Bluetooth® is restric-
ted or does not function in the following cases:
RThe mobile phone is switched o
RThe mobile phone network coverage is insu-
cient
RMobile data use is deactivated on the mobile
phone
RThe Bluetooth® function on the multimedia
system is switched o and the mobile phone
is to be connected via Bluetooth®
RThe Bluetooth® function is switched o on the
mobile phone and the mobile phone is to be
connected via Bluetooth®
RNeither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
telephone and an Internet connection
RThe mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access via Bluetooth®
Cancelling Internet access permission for a
mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
5Manage Internet access
#Select options Ä next to the name of the
mobile phone.
#Select Delete configuration.
#Select Yes.
Establishing an Internet connection
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps
#For example, select z Browser.
If you select a function that requires an Internet
connection and the system is currently oine, a
menu opens with a selection of possible Internet
accesses as well as all tethering devices that are
within range.
#Select an Internet access from the list.
The Internet connection is established.
%The list of possible Internet connections can
also be displayed using the extended status
line.
%Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country availability, you can establish an Inter-
net connection via the communication mod-
ule or connected mobile phones.
%The availability of the web browser depends
on the country.
MBUX multimedia system 591
F206 0119 02
Connection status
Connection status overview
Depending on the connection status, the following
symbols can appear on the central display in the
status line:
Rö: a Wi-Fi device is selected as Internet
access.
R\: a Bluetooth® device is selected as Inter-
net access.
RMobile communications standard (e.g. 4G +
double arrow symbol): the communication
module is selected as the hotspot.
Displaying the connection status
Multimedia system:
4©
#Briey press the status line.
The extended status line is displayed.
#Briey press the Internet symbol in the symbol
overview.
The current connection status is displayed.
Notes on displaying the connection status
RWhen connecting via Wi-Fi, the connection
status and device name are displayed.
RWhen connecting via a Bluetooth® device, the
connection status, device name, and network
type are displayed.
RIn the case of a connection via the communi-
cation module the following status information
can be shown:
-Type of network
-Status (online, oine, data volumes availa-
ble or used, limited service)
RFor vehicles with a communication module,
the connection data of non-user paid services
can be displayed via Mercedes me connect.
Web browsers
Calling up a web page
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
592 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
Calling up a new web page
#Select Search.
#Entering a web address.
#Select OK.
%The function is country-dependent.
%No web pages can be displayed on the multi-
media system while driving.
Calling up a website from the browser history
#To call up the previous page from the history:
select q.
Web browser overview
1Previous website
2Next website
3Update
4URL
5Adds/removes bookmarks
6Options
7Settings
%Under Ä you have the following options:
RTabs
RBookmarks & history
RReading mode
RShare link
RShare content
RRequest mobile website
Calling up web browser options
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
5Ä 5Bookmarks & history
The following functions are available:
RBookmarks
RBrowsing history
REntered URLs
#Select an option.
#Change the settings.
MBUX multimedia system 593
F206 0119 02
Calling up the web browser settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
5Z 5Settings
The following functions are available:
RBlock popups
REnable cookies
REnable Javascript
#Switch a function on D or o E.
Deleting browser data
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
5Z 5Browser data
The following specic browser data can be
deleted:
RCache
RCookies
RForm data
#Select one of the options shown.
Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
5Ä
#Select Bookmarks & history.
#Select Ä aer the bookmark.
A menu with options opens.
The following options are available:
RDelete entry
RDelete all
REdit
RShare
#Select one of the options shown.
Managing tabs
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
5Ä 5Tabs
Opening a new tab
#Select New tab.
Changing tab
#Select the icon for the desired tab.
Closing a tab
#Press and hold the icon of the tab to be
closed until a menu appears.
#Select Close.
The tab is closed.
Private mode
#Switch private mode on D or o E.
If the private mode is switched on, an icon
appears in the input line of the web browser.
%In private mode, neither the history nor cook-
ies are saved.
Bookmarks can also be created in private
mode.
Sharing URLs from the web browser
Requirements:
RTo share via QR code: an app for scanning the
QR code is installed on the mobile device.
594 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
5Ä
Sharing URLs via QR code
#Select Share link.
A QR code appears.
#Scan the displayed QR code with a mobile
device.
Sharing URLs with another display
#Select Share content.
#In the menu drag and drop a display to
another display.
The displayed web page opens on the other
display.
Setting the web browser in the background
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5z Browser
#Press ©.
Audio playback continues.
TuneIn Radio
Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements:
RThere is a user account at https://
www.mercedes.me.
RThe vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
account.
RThe TuneIn radio service is activated.
RThe data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
RA fast Internet connection for data transmis-
sion free of interference.
%The functions and services are country-
dependent. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select TuneIn Radio.
The TuneIn Radio menu appears. The last sta-
tion set starts playing.
%The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.
Overview of TuneIn Radio
1Internet Radio provider
2Additional information on the current station
3Controls playback
4Settings
MBUX multimedia system 595
F206 0119 02
5Additional options
6Favourites
7Station list
8Search
Selecting and connecting to TuneIn radio sta-
tions
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5TuneIn Radio
#Select =.
#Select a category.
#Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
or
#Select the search eld.
#Enter a station name.
%A relatively large volume of data can be trans-
mitted when using Internet Radio.
Saving/deleting a TuneIn radio station as a
favourite
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5TuneIn Radio
Saving favourites
#Select a station.
#Press the symbol next to the station name.
Deleting favourites
#Select a station.
#Press the symbol next to the station name.
Setting Internet Radio options
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5TuneIn Radio
5Z 5TuneIn
The following options are available:
RSelect Stream: select the stream quality
RLogin to TuneIn Account: log in to your TuneIn
user account
RLog Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn
user account
#Select an option.
Media
Information about media mode
Information about supported formats and data
storage media
&WARNING Risk of distraction when han-
dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the
trac conditions. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
596 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Supported formats and data storage media:
Permissible
le systems FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Permissible
data storage
media
USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®,
MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio
devices
Supported
audio formats MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC,
ALAC
Supported
video formats MPEG, AVI, MKV, MP4, M4V,
WMV
%Observe the following notes:
RThe multimedia system supports a total of
up to 50,000 les.
RData storage media up to 2 TB are suppor-
ted (32‑bit address space).
RDue to the large variety of available music
and video les regarding encoders, sam-
pling frequency and data transfer rates,
playback cannot be guaranteed.
RDue to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all USB devices.
RVideos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are sup-
ported.
RCopy-protected music and video les or
DRM (Digital Rights Management) encryp-
ted les cannot be played back.
RMP3 players must support Media Transfer
Protocol (MTP).
Information on copyright protection and trade-
marks
Audio les which you create yourself (e.g. copies
of data storage media you make yourself) are gen-
erally subject to copyright protection. In many
countries, reproductions are not permitted with-
out the prior consent of the copyright holder, even
for private use. Make sure that you know about
the applicable copyright regulations and that you
comply with these.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laborato-
ries. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
MBUX multimedia system 597
F206 0119 02
For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing
Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS Tru-
Volume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.©. DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
DTS® Connected Radio™
For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing
Limited. DTS, DTS Connected Radio, and the DTS
logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of
DTS, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
© 2020 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Lyrics
licensed and provided by Lyric Find™. Content
licensed and sourced from Radioplayer™.
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries.
This product incorporates Spotify soware which
is subject to 3rd party licences found here:
https://www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-
licenses
598 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of
Aspiro AB in the European Union and other coun-
tries.
Overview of the media menu
1Album cover
2Active media source
3Track and artist
4Active data storage medium and current track
number/track in playback list
5Random playback
6Repeat
7Settings
8Additional options
9Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast
forward
AAdditional categories
BPlaylists and categories
CMedia search
DControls playback
ETimeline
When the control menu is called up on the zero
layer, the following functions are available:
RControlling media playback
RSelecting tracks from the current playlist
RSelecting a playback list
RMedia search
RSelect a media source
RCreating favourites
RConguring settings
%Further information on:
ROverview of the zero layer (/ page 465).
ROperating the zero layer (/ page 467).
MBUX multimedia system 599
F206 0119 02
Connecting the data storage medium to the multi-
media system
Connecting USB devices
*NOTE Damage caused by high tempera-
tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
#Remove the USB device aer use and
take it out of the vehicle.
Example: vehicles with cup holders
The multimedia connection unit is found in the
centre console storage compartment and has one
type C USB port 1. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, there are two more USB ports in the
stowage compartment under the armrest and
another in the storage compartment in the centre
console.
The charging power of the USB ports is at least
5 V (3 A) and, depending on the vehicle equip-
ment, a maximum of 20 V (5 A).
#Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth®
audio device
Requirements:
RBluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem and audio equipment.
RThe audio equipment supports the Bluetooth®
audio proles A2DP and AVRCP.
RThe audio equipment is "visible" for other devi-
ces.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Bluetooth
Authorising a new Bluetooth® audio device
#Select Connect device.
Detected equipment is displayed in the device
list.
600 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Select an audio device.
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
phone.
#If the codes are identical, conrm on the
audio equipment.
#Select No, only music.
The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected
with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth®
audio equipment
#Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list.
The connection is being established.
Starting media playback
Requirements:
RA data storage medium is connected to the
multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media
#Select a media source.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media
#To pause playback: select 8.
#To continue playback: select 6.
#To repeat a track: select :.
For the repeat function there are the following
settings:
RSelect once: the active playlist is repeated.
RSelect twice: the current track is repeated.
RSelect three times: the repeat function is
deactivated.
#To play back tracks in random order: select
9.
#To rewind or fast-forward a track: tap on the
desired point on the timeline.
#To select the next track: select ü.
#To select the previous track: select û.
#To scroll through tracks quickly: press and
hold û or ü.
#To show the current track list: select 5.
%You can also control media playback on the
zero layer using the control menu displayed
(/ page 465).
Additional options for setting media playback
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media
Calling up additional options
#Select Ä.
The additional options are shown.
#Select an option.
Media search
Notes about the search function in categories
Under 5 you can search through all available
media les. There are several categories available
for selection. The categories shown depend on
the connected device and data format.
MBUX multimedia system 601
F206 0119 02
%The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read in and
analysed.
Availability of the media search with Android
devices may be limited.
Starting a search in categories
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 55
#Select a category.
Using the keyword search
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media
You can look for content using the keyword
search with free text input.
#Select ª.
A keyboard for character entry appears.
#Enter the term searched for.
%The search begins with the rst character
entered. The more characters entered the
more concrete the search results become.
#Select the desired entry from the result list.
If a list with several tracks is selected, then
this is opened in the search.
To playback all of the tracks in the list, select
Ä and then Play now.
Music online
Requirements
RThere is an account for the music streaming
service.
RA subscription for the music streaming service
has been obtained.
RThe data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
RA fast Internet connection for data transmis-
sion free of interference.
%The functions and services are country-
dependent. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media
Adding a streaming provider the rst time you
start the application
#Select Online music.
The overview of all supported streaming pro-
viders appears.
#Select a streaming provider.
A QR code is shown on the display.
#Scan the QR code with the mobile phone.
#Conrm the connection request on the mobile
phone.
Adding more streaming providers
#Select Online music.
The last active streaming provider is active.
#Select Z.
#Select Music services.
The overview of all supported streaming pro-
viders appears.
#Select a streaming provider.
A QR code is shown on the display.
602 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
#Scan the QR code with the mobile phone.
#Conrm the connection request on the mobile
phone.
Logging out from a streaming provider
#Select Online music.
The last active streaming provider is active.
#Select Z.
#Select Music services.
The overview of all supported streaming pro-
viders appears.
#Z next to the streaming provider.
#Tap on Log out.
Calling up music online
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media
#Select Online music.
Music playback can be controlled with the Touch
Control or by using the media application.
Searching for music in online music
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Online music
Searching for categories in online music
The media content of the streaming provider can
be scanned through in the category search. The
available categories and the symbol for the cate-
gory search depend on the streaming provider.
#Start the category search.
The list of available categories appears.
#Select a category.
Keyword search in online music
You can look for content using the keyword
search with free text input.
#Select ª.
A keyboard for character entry appears.
#Enter the term searched for.
%The more characters entered when using the
keyword search, the more concrete the
search results are.
#Select the desired entry from the result list.
Depending on the selected hit, playback is
started or a lower level in the search is
opened.
Calling up online music settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Online music
#Select Z.
#Select Music services.
#Select Z next to a streaming provider.
#Select a setting.
%Information about the linked accounts can be
displayed using the Z gear icon next to
the congured streaming provider. The availa-
ble information depends on what is oered by
the provider of the streaming service.
MBUX multimedia system 603
F206 0119 02
Radio
Switching on the radio
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Start the application on the multimedia sys-
tem home screen.
The radio menu appears. You will hear the last
station played on the last frequency band
selected.
Radio overview
1Preview image
2Active frequency band
3Station name or set frequency
4Settings
5Additional options
6Switches on trac reports
With DAB equipment: switches on radio
announcements
7Station list
8Search
%The availability of the frequency bands is
dependent on the equipment.
When the control menu is called up on the zero
layer, the following functions are available:
RSelecting a radio station
RSetting radio stations from the station list
RStoring radio stations
RFrequency band
RSearch function
RCreating favourites
RConguring settings
%Further information on:
ROverview of the zero layer (/ page 465).
ROperating the zero layer (/ page 467).
You can watch an animation on this topic via the
following link:
604 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Setting the frequency band
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select a frequency band or a favourite.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Swipe to the le or right on the control ele-
ment or select a radio station.
%You can also set the previous/next radio sta-
tion on the zero layer using the control menu
displayed (/ page 465).
Calling up the radio station list
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select 4.
The station list appears.
#Swipe the station list up or down.
#Select a station.
Searching for radio stations using station names
or frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select è.
#Enter a station name or frequency.
#Select a station.
Selecting a recommended radio station
Requirements:
RThe Allow music suggestions option is
switched on (/ page 474).
RThe multimedia system has gathered sucient
data in order to show station suggestions.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select è.
The recommended stations are shown.
#Select a suggested station.
The selected station is played.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select a radio station.
#Select f.
Managing favourites
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Favourites
Moving stations
#Press ·.
The list of favourites appears.
#Press Ä to the far right of the station
name.
#Select Move.
#Move the station to the new position.
MBUX multimedia system 605
F206 0119 02
Setting station tracking via Internet radio
Requirements
RA fast Internet connection for data transmis-
sion free of interference.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Select Z.
#Select Internet radio.
#Activate or deactivate the Service Following
function.
When the function is on, the station is
searched for via Internet Radio.
If you are driving out of the station's coverage
area and the station is available via Internet
radio, the Poor reception. Tap here to switch
to Internet radio. message appears on the
central display.
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
The slide show displays additional information
provided by the station as an image. This can
include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro-
grammes, news or service information, for exam-
ple.
%The slide show is available for DAB+ channels
that broadcast additional information.
#Press the station picture on the central dis-
play.
The image is enlarged.
Switching a slideshow on or o (FM/DAB radio
mode)
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Z
#Switch DAB Slideshow or Expanded Radio Sli-
deshow on D or o E.
When both slideshows are switched on, the
contents of both slideshows alternate.
Activating/deactivating the frequency x function
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Z
5Active frequency band
#Activate or deactivate Frequency fix.
If the function is activated, the set frequency
is kept even if the reception is poor.
Activating/deactivating trac announcements
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Z
#Select Radio announcements.
The trac information service is switched on
or o.
Activating/deactivating radio announcements
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio
#Switch on Radio announcements.
The selected radio announcements are played.
606 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
When Radio announcements are rst
switched on, Traffic information service (TA),
Travel and Warning are preset.
or
#Switch o Radio announcements.
No radio announcements are played.
Selecting radio announcements
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Z
5Radio announcements
#Switch an announcement on O or o.
For example, Traffic information service (TA),
Travel or Warning can be selected.
%The radio announcements are not station-
dependent.
Setting the trac information service volume
increase
Multimedia system:
4© 5Z 5System 5Audio
#Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
#Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.
Displaying radio text
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Z
5Active frequency band
#Activate or deactivate Radio text information.
Showing or hiding lyrics
%The function is equipment-dependent.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Þ Radio 5Ä
Showing lyrics
#Select Show lyrics.
The lyrics, album cover, title and artist of the
song currently playing on the radio are dis-
played.
Swipe up or down to go to the bottom or top
section of the lyrics.
If no lyrics are available for the song currently
playing on the radio, Show lyrics is greyed
out.
Hiding lyrics
#Select the cross at the top of the lyrics dis-
play.
or
#Select G.
The radio menu appears.
MBUX multimedia system 607
F206 0119 02
Sound
Sound settings
Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 125 W and
is equipped with ve speakers. It is available for
all functions in the radio and media modes.
%The call can also be made from other audio
sources. Replace Media with, for example,
Radio in the menu path.
Calling up the sound menu
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
#Select one of the functions shown to make
settings.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
#Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
Switching loudness normalisation on or o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
5Loudness normalisation
The function compensates for diering loudness
when changing between audio sources and within
an audio source. Several levels are available for
this purpose. The currently set level is displayed.
The loudness normalisation can also be switched
o.
#Switch on one level.
or
#Switch o the loudness normalisation.
Setting the balance and fader
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
5Balance and Fader
Adjusting the balance
#In the grid shown, move the volume distribu-
tion between the right and le speakers in the
vehicle.
The volume is distributed between the right
and le-hand speakers.
Adjusting the fader
#In the grid shown, move the volume distribu-
tion between the front and rear speakers in
the vehicle.
The volume is distributed between the front
and rear speakers.
608 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
Information about the Burmester® 3D-surround
sound system
The Burmester® 3D-surround sound system has a
total output of 710 W and is equipped with 15
speakers. It is available for all functions in the
radio and media modes.
%The call can also be made from other audio
sources. Replace Media with, for example,
Radio in the menu path.
Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester®
3D-surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
#Select one of the functions shown to make
settings.
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on
the Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z 5Equaliser
#Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
Switching loudness normalisation in the
Burmester® 3D-surround sound system on or o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z 5Equaliser
5Loudness normalisation
The function compensates for diering loudness
when changing between audio sources and within
an audio source. Several levels are available for
this purpose. The currently set level is displayed.
Switch o loudness normalisation as follows:
#Switch on one level.
or
#Switch o the loudness normalisation.
Adjusting the balance and fader in the
Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
5Balance and Fader
Adjusting the balance
#Move the volume distribution between the
right and le sides of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak-
ers on the le and right sides in the vehicle.
Adjusting the fader
#Move the volume distribution between the
front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak-
ers in the front and rear of the vehicle.
%Setting 0 is recommended for high quality
music and voice reproduction.
MBUX multimedia system 609
F206 0119 02
Selecting a sound prole in the Burmester® 3D-
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
Setting an existing sound prole
#Select a sound prole.
Setting up a personal sound prole
#Select Personal sound profile and Z.
#Select Reconfigure.
#Restart the set-up assistant.
Setting up a personal sound prole for the rst
time:
#Select Personal sound profile.
#Open the set-up assistant with Start.
#Observe the messages on the display and
select the preferred settings.
The personal sound prole is created with the
selected settings and can be selected in the
Sound profiles menu.
Changing individual settings of the personal sound
prole at a later date:
#Select Personal sound profile and Z.
#Make the required adjustments.
%The availability of a Personal sound profile is
dependent on the equipment.
The set-up assistant is available when the
vehicle is stationary.
Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester®
3D-surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z 5Sound focus
#Select a seat or row of seats for the sound
focus.
The sound focus is activated.
or
#Select the seat or row of seats again.
The sound focus is deactivated.
Advanced sound system
Information about the Advanced sound system
The Advanced sound system has a total output of
225 W and is equipped with nine speakers. It is
available for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
%The call can also be made from other audio
sources. Replace Media with, for example,
Radio in the menu path.
Calling up the sound menu in the Advanced
sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
Adjusting sound settings
#Select one of the functions shown.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings in
the Advanced sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
#Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
610 MBUX multimedia system
F206 0119 02
Switching loudness normalisation in the
Advanced sound system on or o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z 5Equaliser
5Loudness normalisation
Switching o loudness normalisation
#Switch on one level.
or
#Switch o loudness normalisation.
Setting the balance/fader in the Advanced
sound system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Media 5Z
5Balance and Fader
Adjusting the balance
#Move the volume distribution between the
right and le sides of the vehicle in the grid
shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak-
ers on the le and right sides in the vehicle.
Adjusting the fader
#Move the volume distribution between the
front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown.
The volume is distributed between the speak-
ers in the front and rear of the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system 611
F206 0119 02
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
driver's display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back
button G on the steering wheel.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten
the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:
RMainly short-distance driving
RWhen the engine is oen le idling for long
periods
RIn the event of frequent cold start phases
RVehicles with diesel particulate lters: in the
event of frequently interrupted regeneration of
the diesel particulate lter
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such oper-
ating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the servic-
ing of your vehicle from a qualied specialist
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Displaying the service due date
Driver display:
4Service
The next service due date is displayed.
#To exit the display: press the back button
G on the steering wheel.
Information on regular maintenance work
*NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at
the right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
#Adhere to the prescribed service inter-
vals.
#Always have the prescribed maintenance
work carried out at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Notes on special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor-
mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte-
nance work carried out more oen than prescri-
bed if operating conditions are dicult or the
vehicle is subject to increased stress.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the
vehicle to have maintenance work carried out
more oen than prescribed due to actual operat-
ing conditions and/or stresses.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
RRegular city driving with frequent intermediate
stops
RMainly short-distance driving
RFrequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
612 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
RWhen the engine is oen le idling for long
periods
ROperation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter,
for example, changed more frequently. Check the
tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated
under increased stress. Further information can
be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal-
culate the service due date only when the battery
is connected.
#Display and note down the service due date
on the driver display before disconnecting the
battery (/ page 612).
Maintenance Management
Notes about Maintenance Management
If the Maintenance Management service is activa-
ted, relevant data is automatically transferred to
the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.
The customer centre transmits the data to the
service partner that you have entered on the
Mercedes me website at: http://
www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individ-
ual recommendations regarding the maintenance
of your vehicle.
%The calculation of the optimal transmission
time of the maintenance request to the
service partner is subject to technical limita-
tions that may cause the maintenance recom-
mendation to be perceived as too early or too
late or not to be made at all. In this case, you
can conveniently arrange a maintenance
appointment with the customer centre via the
maintenance reminder in the multimedia sys-
tem.
%Maintenance Management and the mainte-
nance reminder in the multimedia system are
not available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to nd out
whether this function is available in your coun-
try.
Data transferred when using Maintenance Man-
agement
When the service is activated, relevant data is
automatically transferred to determine the
required scope of maintenance as well as fault
detection and fault rectication.
Details on data transfer can be found in the data
protection information for the Mercedes me con-
nect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me
account", "Terms of use".
%Maintenance Management and the mainte-
nance reminder in the multimedia system are
not available in every country.
Telediagnostics
Notes about Telediagnostics
%This service is not available in all countries.
Maintenance and care 613
F206 0119 02
The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need
to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in
vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is
activated, relevant data is automatically transmit-
ted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are
detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the
system transmits recommendations for action to
the Mercedes-Benz customer centre depending
on the fault detected. The customer centre trans-
mits the data to the service partner that you have
entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://
www.mercedes.me.
For selected faults, the notication that a mal-
function has been detected may appear in the
multimedia system with a request to contact the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. From this mes-
sage, a call can be made directly to the customer
centre for assistance.
%The transmission of a notication to the multi-
media system depends on the country, vehi-
cle model and equipment and requires a fast
data connection, over which the service pro-
vider has no inuence.
%Reliable fault detection is subject to technical
limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection
of faults can be detected and recommenda-
tions for action transmitted to the customer
centre and the service partners. Mercedes-
Benz AG is continuously working on the
expansion of this service. The fault detection
depends on the country, vehicle model and
equipment.
Data transferred when using Telediagnostics
When the service is activated, relevant data is
automatically transferred to determine the
required scope of maintenance as well as fault
detection and fault rectication.
Details on data transfer can be found in the data
protection information for the Mercedes me con-
nect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me
account", "Terms of use".
%The scope of the transmitted data depends on
the vehicle model and its equipment. For
technical reasons, not all data is available at
all times.
Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian pro-
tection)
In certain accident situations, the actuation of the
active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedes-
trians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by
approximately 75 mm.
Aer being triggered, the active bonnet remains in
the raised position. Limited visibility due to the
raised bonnet cannot be ruled out.
Aer the active bonnet has been actuated, pedes-
trian protection may be limited.
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet
restored immediately in a qualied specialist
workshop.
If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive
carefully to a qualied specialist workshop. If a
safe continued journey is not possible, contact a
qualied specialist workshop.
614 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
Opening and closing the bonnet
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to driving
with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
#Never release the bonnet when driving.
#Before every trip, ensure that the engine
bonnet is locked.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end
position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine bonnet's range of movement.
#Do not open or close the bonnet if there
is a person in the bonnet's range of
movement.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&WARNING Risk of injury from touching
components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem operate at high voltage. You could receive
an electric shock.
Maintenance and care 615
F206 0119 02
#Never touch ignition system or fuel injec-
tion system components when the vehi-
cle is switched on.
The live components include the following, for
example:
RIgnition coils
RFuel injectors
RElectric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel
injectors
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windscreen wipers when the bonnet is
open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by
the wiper linkage.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle rst if you need to open
the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
#To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.
616 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
#Push handle 2 of the bonnet catch upwards
and li the bonnet until it opens automatically.
Closing the bonnet
*NOTE Damage to the bonnet due to man-
ual closing
If the bonnet is closed manually, there is a risk
of dents.
#Do not close the bonnet manually.
#Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm
and then allow it to fall, applying a little force
as you let it go.
#If the bonnet can still be lied slightly, open
the bonnet again and close it with a little more
force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the driver's
display
Requirements
RThe engine has been warmed up.
RThe vehicle is parked on a level surface.
RThe engine is running at idle speed.
RThe bonnet is closed.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to
30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
longer with an active driving style.
Driver's display:
4Service
The engine oil level is shown.
One of the following messages will appear on the
driver's display:
REngine oil level Measuring now…: the engine
oil level cannot be determined yet.
#Repeat the request aer a maximum of
30 minutes' driving.
REngine oil level OK and the bar display for
indicating the engine oil level on the driver's
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the engine oil level is correct.
REngine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar dis-
play for indicating the engine oil level on the
driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
#Add 1 l of engine oil.
REngine oil level Reduce and the bar display for
indicating the engine oil level on the driver's
display is yellow and is above "max":
Maintenance and care 617
F206 0119 02
#Drain o any excess engine oil that has been
added. To do so, consult a qualied specialist
workshop.
RFor engine oil level, switch on vehicle
#Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil
level.
REngine oil level System inoperative: The oil
level sensor is defective or not connected.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
REngine oil level System currently inoperative
#Close the bonnet.
Topping up engine oil
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING Risk of re and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
618 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
#Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the ller opening.
#Allow the engine to cool o and thor-
oughly clean the engine oil from compo-
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
#Do not use engine oils or oil lters which
do not correspond to the specications
explicitly prescribed for the service inter-
vals.
#Follow the instructions on the service
interval display for changing the engine
oil and observe the prescribed change
intervals.
#Do not use additives.
*NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
much engine oil
Excess engine oil can damage the engine or
catalytic converter.
#Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualied specialist workshop.
%Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The
oil consumption may also be higher than this
when the vehicle is new or if you frequently
drive at high engine speeds.
#Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
#Top up the engine oil.
#Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
#Check the oil level again (/ page 33).
Checking the coolant level
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
Maintenance and care 619
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool-
ant
If you open the cap, you could scald yourself.
#Allow the engine to cool down before
opening the cap.
#When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses.
#Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
#Park the vehicle on a level surface.
620 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
#Check the coolant temperature display on the
driver's display.
The coolant temperature must be below 70°C.
#Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release
overpressure.
#Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following cases:
RIf the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2.
RIf the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
1.5 cm over the marker bar 2.
#If necessary, top up with coolant that has
been approved for Mercedes-Benz.
Topping up the windscreen washer system
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
Maintenance and care 621
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
#Open cap 1 by the tab.
#Top up the washer uid.
Keeping the air/water duct free
#Keep the area between the bonnet and the
windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or
leaves.
Cleaning and care
Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
reduced braking power aer washing the
vehicle
Braking eciency is reduced aer washing the
vehicle.
#Aer the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the
trac conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
*NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is activated,
the vehicle will brake automatically in certain
situations:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RHOLD function
RActive Parking Assist
622 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate
these systems e.g. during towing or in the car
wash.
*NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
#Before driving into a car wash make sure
that the car wash is suitable for the vehi-
cle dimensions.
#Ensure there is sucient ground clear-
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sucient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car
wash, ensure the following beforehand:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
ted.
Rthe HOLD function is switched o.
Rthe 360° camera or the reversing camera is
switched o.
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are com-
pletely closed.
Rthe outside mirrors are folded in.
Rthe blower for the ventilation and heating is
switched o.
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
Rthe key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could
open unintentionally.
Rfor car washes with a conveyor system:
-neutral i is engaged.
-If you would like to leave the vehicle while
it is being washed, make sure the key is
located in the vehicle. The park position
j is otherwise automatically engaged.
%If, aer the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Car wash mode
In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driv-
ing into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode
can be activated up to a speed of 20 km/h
(/ page 624).
When car wash mode is activated, the Car wash
mode active message will appear on the driver
display. The following adjustments will be made:
RThe outside mirrors will be folded in.
RTo prevent the windscreen washer system
from starting up automatically, the rain sensor
will be deactivated.
RAir-recirculation mode will be activated.
RThe windows and the sliding sunroof will be
closed.
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactiva-
ted.
RActive Brake Assist will be deactivated, if
applicable.
RVehicles with 360° camera: the front image
will be activated aer approximately eight sec-
onds.
RVehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick
detection will be deactivated.
Maintenance and care 623
F206 0119 02
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will
be indicated by a % aer the respective set-
ting.
Pressing Switch off will cancel car wash mode.
Car wash mode will automatically be deactivated
above a speed of 20 km/h.
You can also switch o car wash mode via the
MBUX multimedia system (/ page 624).
The following settings will be reset when car wash
mode is deactivated:
RThe outside mirrors will be folded out.
RThe rain sensor will be activated.
RAir-recirculation mode will be deactivated.
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to
the previously selected setting.
RActive Brake Assist will be activated, if applica-
ble.
RThe windows and the sliding sunroof will
remain closed.
RVehicles with 360° camera: the front image
will be deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
RVehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick
detection will be activated.
Switching Car Wash mode on/o
Requirements
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
Activating car wash mode
#Select Car wash mode.
#Select Activate.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will
be shown by a % next to the respective set-
ting.
%For an overview of the settings congured
when you activate car wash mode
(/ page 623).
Deactivating car wash mode
#Select Switch off.
The settings of car wash mode will be reset.
%Car wash mode will automatically be deactiva-
ted as soon as your speed exceeds 20 km/h.
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
&WARNING Risk of an accident when using
high-pressure cleaners with round-spray
nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible
damage.
Components damaged in this way may unex-
pectedly fail.
#Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with
round-spray nozzles.
#Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
624 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol-
lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:
Rthe key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the boot lid could
open unintentionally.
RMaintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the
vehicle.
RVehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between
the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner around
while cleaning. The water temperature of the
high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
RObserve the information on the correct dis-
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
RDo not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure
cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres,
gaps, electrical components, batteries, illumi-
nants or louvres.
Washing the vehicle by hand
*NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
#Take care not to point the water jet
directly towards the air inlet grille below
the bonnet.
Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in
some countries, washing by hand is permitted
only in specially designated wash bays).
#Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
#Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
#Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a
so car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
#Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and
dry using a chamois.
%Observe the notes on the care of car parts
(/ page 627).
Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care
To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering
with the driving assistance systems, please
observe the following notes:
Paint
RInsect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse o the treated areas aerwards.
RBird droppings: soak with water and rinse o
aerwards.
RTree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
leum ether or lighter uid.
RCoolant and brake uid: remove with a damp
cloth and clean water.
RTar stains: use tar remover.
RWax: use silicone remover.
RDo not attach stickers, foil or similar materials.
Only have foil attached to the bumper at a
qualied specialist workshop.
RRemove dirt immediately, where possible. Do
not use acid solutions and acidic cleaners.
Maintenance and care 625
F206 0119 02
Matt nish
ROnly use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not attach stickers, foils or similar materi-
als. Only have foil attached to the bumper at a
qualied specialist workshop.
RDo not polish the vehicle and light-alloy
wheels.
ROnly use car washes that correspond to the
latest engineering standards.
RDo not use car wash programmes with a nal
hot wax treatment.
RDo not use paint cleaners, bung or polishing
products, gloss preservers, e.g.wax.
In the event of paintwork damage:
RAlways have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualied specialist workshop.
RMake sure the radar sensors are working
(/ page 339).
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the "Notes on paintwork / matt nish
paintwork care" (/ page 625). They also apply to
matt decorative lms.
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative lms to
avoid damage.
Cleaning
RWhen cleaning with the high-pressure cleaner,
maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between
the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner.
RFor cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive
substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for
Mercedes-Benz).
RDo not use acidic cleaning agents.
RRemove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rub-
bing too hard in order not to damage the dec-
orative lm irreparably.
RIf there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative
lm is dull: use the paint cleaner recommen-
ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
RInsect remains: Soak with insect remover and
rinse o the treated areas aerwards.
RBird droppings: Soak with water and rinse o
aerwards.
RTo prevent water stains, dry a lm-wrapped
vehicle with a so, absorbent cloth aer every
car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative lm
RThe service life and colouring of decorative
lms are impaired by:
-Sunlight
-Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)
-Weather conditions
-Stone chippings and dirt
-Chemical cleaning agents
-Oily products
RDo not use polish on matt decorative lm. Pol-
ishing will have the eect of shining the lm-
wrapped surface.
RDo not treat matt or structured decorative
lms with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
626 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas aected by
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
cannot always be completely repaired. In this
case, contact a qualied specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and
cleaning agents from the manufacturer.
In the case of lm-wrapped surfaces, visual dier-
ences may occur between the surfaces that were
not protected by a decorative lm aer a decora-
tive lm has been removed.
%Have work or repairs to decorative lms car-
ried out at a qualied specialist workshop
(e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).
Notes on cleaning and care of car parts
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-
screen wipers are switched on while the
windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper
arm.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle before cleaning the wind-
screen or wiper blades.
*NOTE Damage due to use of acidic clean-
ing agents
#Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Oth-
erwise, the surfaces could be damaged.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes
on cleaning and care of the following car parts:
Wheels and rims
RUse water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
RDo not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
remove brake dust. This could damage wheel
bolts and brake components.
RTo avoid corrosion of the brake discs and
pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes aer
cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and
pads will warm up and dry out.
Windows
*NOTE Damage to electronic components
due to excess uids
When cleaning the windows from the inside,
uids such as cleaning agents or water may
run down and get behind trim parts of the
vehicle interior and cause damage to elec-
tronic components.
#Use cleaning agents as sparingly as pos-
sible.
#Immediately absorb any excess uids.
RClean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-
based cleaning agents to clean the insides of
windows.
Maintenance and care 627
F206 0119 02
%Aer changing the wiper blades or treating
the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen
thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the
application instructions may result in damage,
smear marks or dazzling spots.
%Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind-
screen in front of the multifunction camera.
Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety
systems may be impaired or unavailable
(/ page 339).
Wiper blades
RMove the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 31).
RWith the wiper arms folded out, clean the
wiper blades with a damp cloth.
%Note that the wiper blades are coated. The
coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not
rub the wiper blades excessively or clean
them too oen.
Exterior lighting
RClean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
RUse only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery)
RUse clean water and a so cloth to clean the
vehicle socket.
RDo not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning
agents, such as soap.
Sensors
RClean the sensors in the front and rear part of
the vehicle with car shampoo, plenty of water
and a so cloth (/ page 339).
RWhen using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain
a minimum distance of 30 cm.
Cameras
ROpen the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 406).
RUse clean water and a so cloth to clean the
camera lenses.
RDo not use a high-pressure cleaner.
%Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind-
screen in front of the multifunction camera.
Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety
systems may be impaired or unavailable
(/ page 339).
Trailer hitch
RObserve the notes on care in the trailer hitch
manufacturer's owner's manual.
RDo not clean the ball neck with a high-pres-
sure cleaner or solvent.
RRemove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. with a
wire brush).
RRemove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
RAer cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
head.
%Before using trailers with anti-swerve cou-
pling, note the manufacturer's owner's man-
ual.
628 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
Notes on care of the interior
&WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts
breaking o aer the use of solvent-based
care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol-
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. When the airbags are
deployed, plastic parts may break away.
#Do not use any care or cleaning products
containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear
or fail in an accident.
#Never bleach or dye seat belts.
*NOTE Property damage due to disinfec-
tants
The interior includes a number of sensitive
surfaces such as displays, plastics and
leather.
Disinfectants can contain alcohol and other
substances that penetrate and damage surfa-
ces. Technology behind buttons and displays
can also be damaged.
#Do not use disinfectant on interior surfa-
ces.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol-
lowing notes on cleaning and care:
Seat belts
RClean with lukewarm and soapy water.
RDo not use chemical cleaning agents.
RDo not dry by heating them to over 80°C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display
RSwitch o the display and let it cool down.
RClean the surface carefully with a microbre
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-
LCD).
RDo not use any other agents.
Head-up display
RClean with a so, non-static, lint-free cloth.
RDo not use cleaning agents.
Plastic trim
RClean with a damp microbre cloth.
RFor heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
als.
RDo not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sun cream to come in contact with the plastic
trim.
Real wood and trim elements
RClean with a microbre cloth.
RBlack piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water.
Maintenance and care 629
F206 0119 02
RFor heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-
ishes or waxes.
Roof lining
RClean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet
RUse a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
Imitation leather steering wheel
RClean the entire steering wheel with a damp
cotton cloth and a 1% soap solution. Do not
spot clean.
RUse cleaning and care products recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA-
MICA
*NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners
#Do not use solvent-based cleaning
agents such as tar remover or wheel
cleaner; neither should you use polishes
or waxes. Otherwise you may damage
the nish.
RClean with a damp cloth and a 1% soap solu-
tion and then wipe with a dry cloth.
RFor heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RLeather care: Use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not allow the leather to become too damp.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
%Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural
surface properties, such as dierences in
structure, marks caused by growth and injury
or subtle colour dierences. These surface
properties are special features of leather and
not material defects. Furthermore, leather is
subject to a natural ageing process in which
the surface properties change.
Genuine leather seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton
cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regu-
larly clean the seat covers.
RFor heavy soiling: use a leather care agent rec-
ommended for Mercedes-Benz aercare.
RLeather care: Use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
RDo not allow the leather to become too damp.
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
630 Maintenance and care
F206 0119 02
%Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural
surface properties, such as dierences in
structure, marks caused by growth and injury
or subtle colour dierences. These surface
properties are special features of leather and
not material defects. Furthermore, leather is
subject to a natural ageing process in which
the surface properties change.
Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may
occur due to the stress on the seat; this is
caused by the natural leather material.
Regular cleaning and care of the leather
reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing dam-
age and thus signicantly extends its life
span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g.
jeans) may discolour the leather.
DINAMICA seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then use a damp cloth to clean.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap
solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not
spot clean.
RUse cleaning and care products recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
Cloth seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then use a damp microbre cloth and a 1%
soap solution to clean the entire seat cover.
Do not spot clean.
RUse cleaning and care products recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
Maintenance and care 631
F206 0119 02
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
There is a high-visibility waistcoat compartment
on the door shelves of all doors for storing a high-
visibility waistcoat.
#To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by loop
2.
#Open the safety vest bag 1 and pull out the
safety vest.
#Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and
place it in the safety vest 1.
#Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the lower
edge of the armrest into the safety vest com-
partment. Ensure that the loop 2 hangs out
so that it is easy to reach.
%Remove the packaging lm before sliding it
into the safety vest compartment for a new
safety vest. Otherwise, it may cause uninten-
tional slipping or make removing dicult.
Observe the legal requirements in the individ-
ual countries.
1Maximum number of washes
2Maximum wash temperature
3Do not bleach
4Do not iron
5Do not tumble dry
6Do not dry clean
7Class 2 safety vest
The requirements dened by the legal standard
are only fullled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
RThe reective strips are damaged or dirty
632 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
RThe maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
RThe uorescence property decreases, e.g. due
to permanent exposure to sunlight.
Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally
friendly way:
RPlease contact your local waste disposal com-
pany.
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
#Push both sides of the warning triangle holder
1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.
#Remove the warning triangle 2.
The warning triangle is located in the boot lid.
Setting up the warning triangle
#Fold the side reectors upwards to form a tri-
angle and attach at the top using the upper
press-stud.
#Fold the legs down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (so-sided) overview
The rst-aid kit (so-sided) 1 is located on the
le or right side of the boot, depending on the
vehicle version.
Breakdown assistance 633
F206 0119 02
Removing the re extinguisher
&WARNING Risk of accident due to an
incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the
driver's footwell
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or
block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and
injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
#Always store and secure the re extin-
guisher in the bracket.
#Do not remove the re extinguisher while
driving.
#Pull the tab 1 upwards.
#Fold tab 1 down.
#Remove re extinguisher 2.
Flat tyre
Notes on at tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident due to a at
tyre
A at tyre severely aects the driving charac-
teristics as well as steering and braking.
tyres that do not feature run-at characteris-
tics:
#Do not drive on with a at tyre.
#Change the at tyre immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Alternatively, consult a qualied special-
ist workshop.
Run-at tyres:
#Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-at
tyres).
In the event of a at tyre, the following options are
available depending on your vehicle's equipment:
RVehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible
to continue the journey for a short period of
time. Make sure you observe the notes on
MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres)
(/ page 635).
RVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the
tyre so that it is possible to continue the jour-
ney for a short period of time. To do this, use
the TIREFIT kit (/ page 636).
634 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
R(/ page 572)Vehicles with Mercedes me
connect: you can make a call for breakdown
assistance via the overhead control panel in
the case of a breakdown .
RAll vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 667).
%(/ page 673)The emergency spare wheel is
only available in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres)
&WARNING Risk of accident when driving in
limp-home mode
Driving in emergency mode impairs the han-
dling characteristics of the vehicle.
#Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of the MOExtended tyres.
#Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
manoeuvres as well as driving over
obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
#Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:
Rbanging noise
Rvehicle vibration
Rsmoke which smells like rubber
Rcontinuous ESP® intervention
Rcracks in the tyre sidewalls
#Aer driving in emergency mode, have
the rims checked by a qualied specialist
workshop with regard to their further
use.
#The defective tyre must be replaced in
every case.
With MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How-
ever, the tyre aected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system:
MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an activated tyre pressure monitoring
system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the
driver's display, proceed as follows:
RCheck the tyre for damage.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode
aer the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance possi-
ble in emergency mode
Partially laden 80 km
Fully laden 30 km
The driving distance possible in emergency mode
may vary depending on the driving style. Observe
the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with
an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre
as a temporary measure.
Breakdown assistance 635
F206 0119 02
TIREFIT kit storage location
Plug-in hybrid
The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the le-hand side
of the boot when delivered.
Not plug-in hybrid
The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the le-hand side
of the boot when delivered.
Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit
may be in a dierent position in the boot.
%Depending on the power category (LK), the
tyre ination compressor weighs as follows:
RLK1 – 12 V/10 A, 120 W, 0.8 kg
RLK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.9 kg
You can nd information on the power cate-
gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back
of the tyre ination compressor.
The tyre ination compressor is maintenance-
free. If there is a malfunction, please contact
a qualied specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements
RTyre sealant bottle and tyre inator compres-
sor are ready for use (/ page 64).
RTIREFIT sticker is present.
RGloves are present.
TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 64)
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora-
tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly damage
in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in
outside temperatures down to -20 °C.
&WARNING Risk of accident when using
tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the
tyre properly, especially in the following cases:
636 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
Rthere are large cuts or punctures in the
tyre (larger than damage previously men-
tioned)
Rthe wheel rims have been damaged
Raer journeys with very low tyre pressure
or with at tyres
#Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tyre sealant
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes
irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact
with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep
the tyre sealant away from children.
Observe the following if you come into contact
with the tyre sealant:
#Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin
using water immediately.
#If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
oughly rinse them using clean water
immediately.
#If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thor-
oughly rinse out your mouth immediately
and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting and seek medical attention
immediately.
#Change out of clothing which has come
into contact with tyre sealant immedi-
ately.
#If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
*NOTE Overheating due to the tyre ination
compressor running too long
#Do not run the tyre ination compressor
for longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tyre ination compressor.
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualied
specialist workshop every ve years.
#Do not remove any foreign objects which have
entered the tyre.
#Ax section 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster in a location where it will be
easily seen by the driver.
#Ax section 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
Breakdown assistance 637
F206 0119 02
#Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out
of the tyre ination compressor housing.
#Push the plug of hose 5 into ange 6 of
tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
#Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards
into recess 2 of the tyre ination compres-
sor.
#Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the
defective tyre.
#Screw lling hose 8 onto valve 7.
#Insert plug 4 into a 12‑V‑socket in your vehi-
cle.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press on and o switch 3 on the tyre ina-
tion compressor.
The tyre ination compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inated. First, tyre sealant is pum-
ped into the tyre. The pressure may briey rise
to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch o the tyre ination compressor
during this phase!
#Let the tyre ination compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pres-
sure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
aected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera-
ble to use clean water.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy-
lene.
If, aer ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:
#Switch o the tyre ination compressor.
#Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the lling hose.
#Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
approximately 10 m.
638 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
#Pump up the tyre again.
Aer a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specied tyre pressure not being attained
If the specied tyre pressure is not attained
aer the specied time, the tyre is too badly
damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the
tyre in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be
greatly impaired.
#Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
If, aer ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
&WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the handling characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds.
#Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#Do not exceed the maximum speed limit
with a tyre that has been repaired using
tyre sealant.
#Observe the maximum permissible speed of
80 km/h for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant.
#Ax the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker
to the instrument cluster in a location where it
will be easily seen by the driver.
*NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
Aer use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
from the lling hose.
#Therefore, place the lling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre-
sponsible disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants.
#Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
#Switch o the tyre ination compressor.
#Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
#Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre ina-
tion compressor.
#Pull away immediately.
#Stop driving aer approximately ten minutes
and check the tyre pressure using the tyre
ination compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specied tyre pressure not being attained
If the specied tyre pressure is not reached,
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre seal-
ant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be
greatly impaired.
Breakdown assistance 639
F206 0119 02
#Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h:
you will nd a sticker with the telephone number,
e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
#Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres-
sure table on the fuel ller ap for values.
#To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the
tyre ination compressor.
#To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure
release button 1 next to manometer 2.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew
the lling hose from the valve of the sealed
tyre.
#Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
sealed tyre.
#Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre ina-
tion compressor. Press the locking tabs on the
yellow cap together to do this.
The lling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot-
tle.
#Drive to the nearest qualied specialist work-
shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and
lling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to work
carried out incorrectly on the battery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can restrict functions relevant for safety sys-
tems and impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rwhen braking
Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualied specialist
workshop immediately.
#Do not drive on.
#Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
640 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
RFurther information on ABS (/ page 341)
RFurther information on ESP® (/ page 342)
(/ page 341)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion bat-
tery
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec-
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly
explosive gas mixture in the battery.
#To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the battery.
The highly ammable gas mixture is created while
the battery is charging and during starting assis-
tance.
&WARNING Danger of chemical burns from
the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
#Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#Do not lean over the battery.
#Do not inhale battery gases.
#Keep children away from the battery.
#Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.
All vehicles
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal
to dispose of them with the household rub-
bish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualied
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is
used improperly.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are pro-
hibited when handling the battery. Avoid
creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
ing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in
particular gloves, an apron and a face
mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
Breakdown assistance 641
F206 0119 02
acid splashes o with clean water. Consult
a doctor immediately.
Do not place heavy objects on the surface
of the battery or use the battery to sup-
port a person in any way.
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use
the vehicle over an extended period of time:
RIf available: activate standby mode
(/ page 338).
RAlternatively: connect the battery to a battery
charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or con-
sult a qualied specialist workshop to discon-
nect the battery.
Notes on the 48 V battery
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to work
carried out incorrectly on the battery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can restrict functions relevant for safety sys-
tems and impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rwhen braking
Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualied specialist
workshop immediately.
#Do not drive on.
#Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
RFurther information on ABS (/ page 341)
RFurther information on ESP® (/ page 342)
(/ page 341)
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal
to dispose of them with the household rub-
bish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environ-
mentally responsible manner. Take dis-
charged batteries to a qualied specialist
workshop or to a collection point for
used batteries.
Only have work on the 48 V battery carried out at
a qualied specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
642 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is
used improperly.
The surface of the 48 V battery may be
hot.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are pro-
hibited when handling the battery. Avoid
creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
ing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in
particular gloves, an apron and a face
mask. Immediately rinse o splashes of
electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean
water. Consult a doctor immediately.
Do not place heavy objects on the surface
of the battery or use the battery to sup-
port a person in any way.
Do not perform any work on the battery.
Always have any work on the battery car-
ried out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Do not disconnect the battery yourself.
Do not remove the battery yourself. Do
not attempt to open the battery.
Keep children away.
Wear safety glasses.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use
the vehicle over an extended period of time:
RIf available: activate standby mode
(/ page 338).
Notes on the high-voltage battery
&DANGER Risk of re and explosion from
excessive internal pressure of the high-
voltage battery
In the event of a vehicle re, ammable gas
can escape and ignite.
#Stop the charging process immediately
in case of unusual odours, smoke or
burn marks.
#Leave the danger zone immediately.
Secure the danger zone at a sucient
distance.
#Call the re service.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage
battery (/ page 305).
Risk of explosion.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are pro-
hibited when handling the battery. Avoid
creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
ing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in
particular gloves, an apron and a face
mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes o with clean water. Consult
a doctor immediately.
Breakdown assistance 643
F206 0119 02
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12
V battery
All vehicles
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connection
point in the engine compartment.
*NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-
voltage
When charging using a battery charger without
a maximum charging voltage, the battery or
the on-board electronics may be damaged.
#Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to the
ignition of hydrogen gas
If there is a short circuit or sparks are created,
there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting
when you charge the battery.
#Take care that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
#Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
#When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, always observe the sequence of
battery terminals described.
#During starting assistance, always take
care to connect only battery terminals of
identical polarity.
#During starting assistance, observe the
sequence described for connecting and
disconnecting the jump leads.
#Do not connect or disconnect the bat-
tery terminals with the engine running.
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to explo-
sive mixture of gases
An explosive mixture of gases can escape
from the battery during charging and starting
assistance.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
#Do not stand over the battery.
&WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen
battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera-
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charging,
battery gas can be released.
#Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis-
tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has frozen.
644 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
In this case you may neither jump-start the vehi-
cle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been thawed
may be reduced drastically. The starting behaviour
may deteriorate, particularly at low temperatures.
It is recommended that you have a thawed battery
checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid
If your vehicle has been started with starting
assistance, it may not be possible to use the elec-
tric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
Starting assistance is not considered to be a nor-
mal operating condition.
All vehicles
*NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
#Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assis-
tance and when charging the battery:
ROnly use undamaged jump leads/charging
cables with a sucient cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jump leads/charging cables
are connected to the battery/jump-start con-
nection point.
RThe jump leads/charging cables must not
come into contact with any parts which may
move when the engine is running.
RAlways make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged.
RKeep away from re and naked ames.
RDo not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when
charging the battery:
ROnly use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
RRead the battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
RStarting assistance may only be provided
using vehicles, batteries or other jump start
devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
RThe vehicles must not touch each other.
RVehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the
vehicle only when the engine and exhaust sys-
tem are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12‑V‑ bat-
tery
Preparing starting assistance/charging
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle.
#Shi the transmission to position j.
#Switch o the vehicle and all electrical con-
sumers.
#Open the bonnet.
Breakdown assistance 645
F206 0119 02
Illustrations exemplary
#Open the cover 1 of the jump-starting con-
nection point.
#Open the cover 2 of the positive clamp 3
on the jump-starting connection point.
Starting assistance
#Connect positive clamp 3 on your vehicle to
the positive pole of the donor battery using
the jump lead. Always begin with positive
clamp 3 on your own vehicle rst.
#On the assisting vehicle leave the engine run-
ning at idling speed.
#Connect negative terminal on the second bat-
tery and the earth point 4 on your vehicle to
the jump lead. Begin with the donor battery
rst.
#Start the engine of your own vehicle.
#Let the engines run for several minutes.
#Before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on
an electrical consumer in your own vehicle,
e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance process is complete:
#First, remove the jump lead from earth point
4 and negative pole of the donor battery,
then from positive clamp 3 and positive pole
of the donor battery. Begin each time with the
contacts on your own vehicle rst.
#Aer removing the jump lead, close cover 2
of positive clamp 3.
#Close the cover 1.
646 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
If your vehicle has been started with starting
assistance, it may not be possible to use the elec-
tric drive for approximately 30 minutes.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Charging
#Connect the positive clamp 3 on the vehicle
and the positive pole of the charger with the
charging cable. Always begin with positive
clamp 3 on the vehicle rst.
#Connect the negative terminal of the charger
and the earth point 4 on the vehicle with the
charging cable. Start with the charger.
#Start the charging process.
When the charging process is complete:
#First remove the charging cable from the earth
point 4 and negative terminal of the charger,
then from the positive clamp 3 and positive
pole of the charger. Begin each time with the
contacts on the vehicle rst.
#Aer removing the charging cable, close cover
2 of positive clamp 3.
#Close the cover 1.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
#Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 640).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
12 V battery replaced at a qualied specialist
workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Observe the following notes if you want to replace
the battery yourself:
RAlways replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specic vehicle require-
ments.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM (Absorb-
ent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-
ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only
guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion
battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use batteries which
have been tested and approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz.
RUse detachable parts such as vent hoses,
elbow ttings or terminal covers from the bat-
tery which is to be replaced.
RMake sure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the original opening on the side of
the battery.
Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
escape.
RMake sure that detachable parts are recon-
nected in the same way.
Breakdown assistance 647
F206 0119 02
Tow-starting or towing away
Permitted towing methods (not plug-in hybrid)
*NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is activated,
the vehicle will brake automatically in certain
situations:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RHOLD function
RActive Parking Assist
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate
these systems e.g. during towing or in the car
wash.
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing with both axles on the ground, use a
tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow-
ing away incorrectly
#Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on
the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km
at 50 km/h
Front axle
raised No
Rear axle
raised Yes, if the steering wheel is
xed in the centre position
with a steering wheel lock
4MATIC vehicles
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on
the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km
at 50 km/h
Front axle
raised No
Rear axle
raised No
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be per-
formed by a towing company.
Permitted towing methods (plug-in hybrid)
%The following information does not apply to
Mercedes-AMG E Performance vehicles.
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
648 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
In the event of a breakdown, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you have the vehicle transported
instead of towed.
Use a tow rope or a tow bar when towing with
both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys-
tems.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow-
ing away incorrectly
#Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
In the following cases, only transport is permissi-
ble:
Rthe driver display is not working
RThe display message á Towing not per-
mitted See Owner's Manual appears in the
driver display.
Exception: if the vehicle is located in a danger
zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone
despite the display message á Towing not
permitted See Owner's Manual or the display not
working. It must not be towed further than 50 m
with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of
10 km/h must not be exceeded. Beyond these
limits, only transporting is permitted.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the
ground Yes, for a maximum of
50 km at 50 km/h,
only forward travel
with the driver in the
vehicle
Front axle raised No
Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering
wheel is xed in the
centre position with a
steering wheel lock
4MATIC vehicles
Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the
ground Yes, for a maximum of
50 km at 50 km/h,
only forward travel
with the driver in the
vehicle
Front axle raised No
Rear axle raised No
Permitted towing methods (Mercedes-AMG E Per-
formance)
*NOTE Damage caused by towing
Towing can damage the hybrid drive system.
#Have the vehicle loaded and transported
rather than towed.
Breakdown assistance 649
F206 0119 02
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
#Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods.
#Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is
discharged:
RThe vehicle cannot be started.
RThe electric parking brake cannot be released
or applied.
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission cannot be shied to position i
or j.
%Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the
transmission cannot be shied to position i
or if the display does not show anything,
transport the vehicle (/ page 651). A towing
vehicle with liing equipment is required for
vehicle transportation.
*NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis-
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing
at excessively high speeds or over long distan-
ces.
#A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be
exceeded.
#A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded.
&WARNING Risk of accident when towing a
vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away
is heavier than the permissible gross mass of
your vehicle, the following situations can
occur:
Rthe towing eye may become detached.
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or overturn.
#Before tow-starting or towing away,
check if the vehicle to be tow-started or
towed away exceeds the permissible
gross mass.
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away,
its permissible gross mass must not exceed the
permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
#Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi-
cation plate (/ page 797).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door; the transmission otherwise automati-
cally shis to position j.
#Fit the towing eye (/ page 652).
#Fasten the towing device.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec-
tion of the tow bar
#Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
#Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/ page 155).
650 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
#Do not activate the HOLD function.
#Deactivate tow-away protection
(/ page 172).
#Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 375).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi to
position i.
#Release the electric parking brake.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to limited
safety-related functions during the towing
process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon-
ger available in the following situations:
Rthe vehicle is switched o.
Rthe brake system or power steering system
is malfunctioning.
Rthe energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is towed away, signicantly
more eort may be required to steer and
brake than is normally required.
#Use a tow bar.
#Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle
away.
*NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
#Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
Plug-in hybrid: transportation of vehicles should
only be carried out by professional recovery com-
panies.
#Please observe the notes on towing
(/ page 64).
#Connect the towing device to the towing eye
in order to load the vehicle.
%You can also secure the towing device to the
trailer hitch.
#Shi the automatic transmission to position
i.
%The automatic transmission may be locked in
position j in the event of damage to the
electrics. To shi to i, provide the on-board
electrical system with power (/ page 60).
#Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
#Shi the automatic transmission to position
j.
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
#Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Breakdown assistance 651
F206 0119 02
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic trans-
mission
#Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the drive train due to
incorrect positioning of the vehicle
#Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi-
cle.
Towing eye storage location
Plug-in hybrid
The towing eye 1 is located in a holder in the
boot on the le.
Not plug-in hybrid
The towing eye 1 is located under the boot oor
in the loading sill.
%Depending on the vehicle version, the towing
eye is located in a dierent position in the
boot.
Fitting and removing the towing eye
652 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
#Press the mark on the cover 1 inwards and
remove.
#Depending on the vehicle version, use a tool
(suchas a screwdriver) to prise the cover out
of recess 2.
#Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing
eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
#Aer removing the towing eye, engage the
cover 1 in the bumper.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to
recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged
in the process.
#Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to
tow away or tow start the vehicle.
#Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch
to tow the vehicle during recovery.
Tow-starting the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic transmission
#Observe the following note on material dam-
age:
*NOTE Damage to the automatic transmis-
sion due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow-starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started.
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric line could be overloaded.
This could result in a re.
#Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
ed new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to
electrical components or systems or their
functions being considerably restricted.
Breakdown assistance 653
F206 0119 02
#Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-
Benz with the respective specied fuse
rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognise by the col-
our and the label. The fuse ratings and further
information to be observed can be found in the
fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the
boot (/ page 656).
*NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by
moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
#When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor-
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectied at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
RThe vehicle is secured against rolling away.
RAll electrical consumers are switched o.
RThe vehicle is switched o.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side (/ page 654)
RFuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(/ page 656)
RFuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 656)
RFuse box in the boot (/ page 656)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine
compartment
Requirements
RA dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 61).
Opening
&WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windscreen wipers when the bonnet is
open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by
the wiper linkage.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle rst if you need to open
the bonnet.
#Open the bonnet (/ page 615).
654 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
#Turn both retaining clips 2 on cover 1 on
the driver's side a quarter-turn clockwise.
#Fold cover 1 upwards.
#Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
box using a dry cloth.
#Loosen screws 3 and remove fuse box lid 4
from the top.
Closing
#Check whether the seal is positioned correctly
in lid 4.
#Insert lid 4 into the bracket at the rear of the
fuse box.
#Fold down lid 4 of the fuse box and tighten
screws 3.
Breakdown assistance 655
F206 0119 02
#Fold down cover 1.
#Turn both retaining clips 2 on cover 1 a
quarter-turn anti-clockwise.
#Close the bonnet.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit
Requirements
RObserve the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 61).
The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of
the cockpit under a cover.
#To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
#To close: reinsert cover 1.
Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse
box opened at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
passenger footwell
Requirements
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 61).
#To open: fold out and remove cover 1.
#To close: reinsert cover 1.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot
Requirements
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 61).
656 Breakdown assistance
F206 0119 02
#To open: fold out and remove cover 1.
#To close: reinsert cover 1.
Breakdown assistance 657
F206 0119 02
Notes on noise or unusual handling characteris-
tics
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or
unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle
is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or
tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could
also be causing the unusual handling characteris-
tics.
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your
speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels
checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
&WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged
tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
#Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres
immediately.
&WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insucient tyre tread
Insucient tyre tread will result in reduced
tyre grip.
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi-
cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
#Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the
tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for:
RSummer tyres: 3 mm
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
#For safety reasons, replace the tyres
before the legally-prescribed limit for the
minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu-
larly, at least once a month or as required, for
example, prior to a long journey or driving o-
road:
RCheck the tyre pressure (/ page 659).
RVisually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
RCheck the valve caps.
RVisual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Notes on snow chains
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rectly tted snow chains
If you have tted snow chains to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components.
#Never t snow chains to the front
wheels.
#Only t snow chains on the rear wheels
in pairs.
658 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to components of the vehi-
cle body or chassis due to tted snow
chains
If you t snow chains to the front wheels of
4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo-
nents of the vehicle body or chassis.
#Only t snow chains to the rear wheels
of 4MATIC vehicles.
Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
RSnow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
RFor safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specically approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with
the same quality standard.
RComply with the installation instructions of the
snow chain manufacturer.
RIf snow chains are tted, the maximum per-
missible speed is 50 km/h.
RVehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use
Active Parking Assist when snow chains are
tted.
%You can permanently limit the speed for driv-
ing with winter tyres (/ page 353).
%You can deactivate ESP® to pull away
(/ page 345). This allows the wheels to spin,
achieving increased tractive power.
Tyre pressure
Notes on tyre pressure
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insu-
cient or excessive tyre pressure
Underinated or overinated tyres pose in par-
ticular the following risks:
RThe tyres can burst.
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or
unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the
steering and braking characteristics may
be greatly impaired.
#Comply with the recommended tyre
pressure and check the tyre pressure of
all tyres, including the spare wheel, regu-
larly:
Rmonthly
Rwhen the load changes
Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
Rif operating conditions change, e.g. o-
road driving
#Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:
RShorten the service life of the tyres.
RCause increased tyre damage.
RAdversely aect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
Wheels and tyres 659
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of accident due to repea-
ted pressure drop in the tyres
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.
Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres
bursting.
#Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
#Check whether the tyre has a puncture
or the valve has a leak.
#If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualied specialist workshop.
Information on the recommended tyre pressure
for the vehicle's factory-tted tyres can be found
on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel
ller ap (/ page 660).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre
pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not
permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pres-
sure.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
RThe vehicle has been parked with the tyres out
of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
RThe vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the
temperature of the tyres increases, so too does
the tyre pressure.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system:
you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's
display (/ page 661).
Notes on trailer operation
Always inate the rear axle tyres to the recom-
mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table
for increased load.
Tyre pressure table
The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
ller ap. The tyre pressure table shows the recommended
tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi-
cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for
cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e.
loading and/or speed of the vehicle.
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure,
the following tyre pressure information is only
valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load
condition.
660 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by
the + symbol, the tyre pressure information
following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel
consumption may then increase slightly.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are dened in the table for dierent num-
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may dier from this.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem
The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre
temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by
means of the tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature are
displayed in the driver display.
In the event of signicant pressure loss or exces-
sive temperature of the tyres, you are warned via
display messages (/ page 905) or the warning
lamp h in the driver display (/ page 936).
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
suitable for the operating situation.
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem will automatically update the new reference
values aer you have changed the tyre pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val-
ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
system manually (/ page 662).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in the following situations:
Rincorrect reference values were taught in.
Rsudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tyre, for example.
Rthere is a fault from another radio signal
source.
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pres-
sure monitoring system
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Driver display:
4© 5Service
#Press a to conrm.
One of the following displays appears:
RCurrent tyre pressure of each wheel:
RTyre pressures will be displayed after a few
minutes of driving: current values are not yet
known to the system. The pressure/tempera-
ture values of each tyre are displayed as soon
as they are known to the system.
RTyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete. The
tyre pressures are already being monitored.
Wheels and tyres 661
F206 0119 02
#Compare the current tyre pressure with the
recommended tyre pressure for the current
operating condition (/ page 660). Addition-
ally, observe the notes on cold tyres
(/ page 659).
%The values displayed in the driver display may
deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge
as they refer to sea level. At high elevations,
the tyre pressure values indicated by a pres-
sure gauge are higher than those shown by
the driver display.
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system
Requirements
RThe recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating condition on
each of the four wheels (/ page 659).
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the
following situations:
RThe tyre pressure has changed.
RThe wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly tted.
Driver display:
4© 5Service
#Press a to display the tyre pressure.
#Press a again to display the options.
#Select Tyre pressure and conrm with a.
The driver display shows the message Use
current tyre pressures as new reference val-
ues?.
#Select Yes and conrm the restart with a.
The driver display shows the message Tyre
pressure monitor restarted.
Current warning messages are deleted and
the h yellow warning lamp goes out.
Aer you have driven for a few minutes, the
system checks whether the current tyre pres-
sures are within the specied range. The cur-
rent tyre pressures are then accepted as refer-
ence values and monitored.
If the tyre pressure values are not within the
prescribed range, the message Please cor-
rect tyre pressure appears.
Wheel change
Notes on selecting, tting and replacing tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect wheel and tyre dimensions
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted,
the service brakes or components in the brake
system and in the wheel suspension may be
damaged.
#Always replace wheels and tyres with
those that full the specications of the
original part.
For wheels, pay attention to the following:
RDesignation
RType
For tyres, pay attention to the following:
RDesignation
RManufacturer
RType
662 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of injury through exceed-
ing the specied tyre load-bearing capa-
city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the
tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause
the tyres to explode.
#Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for your
vehicle.
*NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage caused by
non-approved tyre types and sizes
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and
accessories which have been specially
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tyres are specially adapted to the active
safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-at tyres only for certain wheels)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)
Otherwise, certain properties, such as driving
characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, con-
sumption, etc. could be adversely aected.
Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in
the tyres rubbing against the body and axle
components when loaded. This could result in
damage to the tyre or the vehicle.
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that
have been checked and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea-
ded tyres
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be detected on retrea-
ded tyres.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar-
anteed.
#Do not use used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage.
*NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage
when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a smaller section width. As
the section width decreases, the risk of
wheels and tyres being damaged when driving
over obstacles increases.
#Avoid obstacles or drive especially care-
fully.
#Reduce your speed when driving over
kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers
and potholes.
#Avoid particularly high kerbs.
*NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage
when parking on kerbs or in potholes
Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage
the wheels and tyres.
#Only park on level surfaces if possible.
#Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.
Wheels and tyres 663
F206 0119 02
*NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts due to the use of tyre-tting tools
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: there are electronic component parts in
the wheel.
If tyre-tting tools are positioned in the area of
the valve, the electronic components could be
damaged.
#Tyre-tting tools should not be applied in
the area of the valve.
#Always have tyres changed at a qualied
specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low
ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form
when driving with summer tyres, causing per-
manent damage to the tyre.
#At temperatures below 7 °C use i
M+S tyres.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used
correctly, can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved acces-
sories, visit a qualied specialist workshop and
enquire about:
RSuitability
RLegal stipulations
RFactory recommendations
&WARNING Risk of accident with sport
tyres
The special tyre tread in combination with the
optimised tyre compound means that the risk
of skidding or aquaplaning on wet roads is
increased.
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tyre running
temperature.
#Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driv-
ing style accordingly.
#Use i M+S tyres at outside tempera-
tures of less than 7 °C.
#Only use tyres suitable for the intended
use.
Observe the following when selecting, tting and
replacing tyres:
RCountry-specic requirements for tyre
approval that dene a specic tyre type for
your vehicle.
RThe use of certain tyre types in certain regions
and areas of operation can be advisable.
ROnly use tyres and wheels of the same type
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended
tyres) and the same make.
ROnly t wheels of the same size on one axle
(le and right).
It is only permissible to t a dierent wheel
size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive
to the specialist workshop.
RDo not make any modications to the brake
system, the wheels or the tyres.
664 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not
permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit.
RVehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: all tted wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors for the tyre pressure mon-
itoring system.
RAt temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres
or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all
wheels.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in
wintry road conditions.
RFor M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same
tread.
RObserve the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tyres tted.
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of
the vehicle, this must be indicated by an
appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision.
RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
rst 100 km.
RReplace the tyres aer six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
RWhen replacing with tyres that do not feature
run-at characteristics: Vehicles with
MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a
TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit aer replacing with tyres
that do not feature run-at characteristics,
e.g. winter tyres.
%You can permanently limit the speed for driv-
ing with winter tyres (/ page 353).
For more information on wheels and tyres, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
Vehicles with an AMG Driver's Package
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by
non-approved tyre types
If you use tyre types that have not been adap-
ted to changes made to the factory speed
limit, this can have the following consequen-
ces:
RThe tyres are not suitable for high speeds
and the corresponding driving dynamics.
RThe tyres wear unevenly and aect the
roadworthiness of the vehicle.
RABS, ESP® and cruise control operation
are restricted.
This can jeopardise road safety.
#Only use tyre types that have been
approved for the maximum permissible
speed set and the vehicle.
Notes on changing wheels
&WARNING Risk of injury through dierent
wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can
severely impair the driving characteristics.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo-
nents may also be damaged.
#Only interchange the front and rear
wheels if the wheels and tyres have the
same dimensions.
Wheels and tyres 665
F206 0119 02
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tyres have dierent dimensions can
render the general operating permit invalid.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Changing a wheel" (/ page 662).
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
dier:
Rfront wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
Rrear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread
depth. This signicantly reduces traction on wet
roads (aquaplaning).
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel
size, you can interchange the wheels every
5000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear.
Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for
the wheels.
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following notes:
RAer removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
RProtect the tyres from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
Other than some country-specic variants, vehi-
cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
Consult a qualied specialist workshop to nd out
which tyre-change tool kit is necessary and
approved for a wheel change on your vehicle.
You require the following tools, forexample, to
change a wheel:
RJack
RChock
RWheel wrench
RCentring pin
%The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
The maximum load capacity of the jack can
be found on the sticker axed to the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of
a malfunction, please contact a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag
1 in the boot.
%When stowing the tool bag, ensure that it is
adequately secured.
The tool bag contains:
RJack
RGloves
RWheel wrench
666 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
RCentring pin
RFolding chock
RRatchet for jack
Plug-in hybrid
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1
on the boot oor.
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is not on a slope.
RThe vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
RThe required tyre-change tool kit is available.
%If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-
change tool kit, consult a qualied specialist
workshop to nd out about suitable tools.
#Apply the electric parking brake manually.
#Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
#Shi the transmission to position j.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
#Place chocks or other suitable items under the
front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally
opposite the wheel you wish to change.
#Unload the vehicle.
Removing and tting wheel trim/hub caps
Requirements
RThe vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 667).
Plastic hub cap
Removal:
#Turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-
clockwise and remove the hub cap.
Fitting:
#Make sure that the centre cover of the hub
cap has been turned anti-clockwise.
#Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover
clockwise until the hub cap is felt and heard to
engage.
Aluminium hub cap
Removal:
Wheels and tyres 667
F206 0119 02
#Position socket 2 from the tyre-change tool
kit on the hub cap 1.
#Position the wheel wrench 3 on the socket
2.
#Using wheel wrench 3, turn the hub cap 1
anti-clockwise and remove it.
Fitting:
#Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
%Specied tightening torque: 25 Nm.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements
RThere are no persons in the vehicle.
RThe vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 667).
Important notes on using the jack:
RUse only a vehicle-specic jack that has been
approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehi-
cle.
RThe jack is only designed for raising and hold-
ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed and not for maintenance
work under the vehicle.
RThe jack must be placed on a rm, at and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at,
load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
RThe foot of the jack must be positioned verti-
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
RNever place your hands or feet under the vehi-
cle.
RNever lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the vehicle and do not release the
electric parking brake.
RDo not open or close any doors or the boot
lid.
668 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
#Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
Position of the jack support points
&WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
#Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of
the jack must be positioned vertically
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the
jack
If you do not position the jack at the jack sup-
port points provided for this purpose, you
could damage your vehicle.
#Only position the jack at the jack sup-
port points provided for this purpose.
#Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit
and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so
that the letters "AUF" are visible.
Wheels and tyres 669
F206 0119 02
#Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup-
port point 1.
#Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2
sits completely on jack support point 1 and
the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
#Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maxi-
mum of 3 cm from the ground.
#Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 670).
Removing a wheel
Requirements
RThe vehicle is raised (/ page 668).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of
comfort when braking.
*NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic ele-
ments when changing a wheel
Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged
when removing and repositioning the wheel.
#Do not raise the wheels by the plastic
elements when removing and reposition-
ing.
*NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface.
#Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
#Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead
of the wheel bolt.
#Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com-
pletely.
#Remove the wheel.
#Fit the new wheel (/ page 670).
Fitting a new wheel
Requirements
RThe wheel to be changed is removed and the
centring pin is screwed in (/ page 670).
670 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the
wheel bolts to come loose, as too can dam-
aged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
#Never oil or grease the threads.
#In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualied specialist workshop
immediately.
#Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam-
aged hub threads replaced.
#Do not continue driving.
#Observe the information on the choice of tyres
(/ page 662).
For tyres with a specied direction of rotation, an
arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc-
tion of rotation when tting.
Note on AMG vehicles:
*NOTE Damage to the ceramic brake disc
when changing a wheel
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake
discs: during removal and repositioning of the
wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-
brake disc and damage it.
#Take particular care.
#Ask another person for assistance or use
a second centring pin.
*NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic ele-
ments when changing a wheel
Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged
when removing and repositioning the wheel.
#Do not raise the wheels by the plastic
elements when removing and reposition-
ing.
#Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen-
tring pin and push it on.
&WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
#Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
#Be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 662).
#For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and
for the wheel in question.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated until they are
nger-tight.
Wheels and tyres 671
F206 0119 02
#Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
#Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-
tight.
#Lower the vehicle (/ page 672).
Lowering the vehicle aer a wheel change
Requirements
RThe new wheel has been tted (/ page 670).
#To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto
the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
"AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
the specied tightening torque of 150 Nm.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed torque.
#Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
#If you are not sure, do not move the vehi-
cle. Contact a qualied specialist work-
shop and have the tightening torque
checked immediately.
#Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
%The following does not apply if the new wheel
is an emergency spare wheel.
#Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: restart the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem (/ page 662).
672 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and
the wheel to be replaced may dier. The emer-
gency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi-
cantly impair driving characteristics of the
vehicle.
To prevent hazardous situations:
#Drive carefully.
#Never t more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that diers
in size.
#Only use an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel briey.
#Do not deactivate ESP®.
#Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a dierent size replaced
at the nearest qualied specialist work-
shop. The new wheel must have the cor-
rect dimensions.
%The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.
Observe the following notes on tting an emer-
gency spare wheel:
RThe maximum permissible speed with an
emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h.
RDo not t the emergency spare wheel with
snow chains.
RReplace the emergency spare wheel aer six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
RUse the included wheel bolts for the emer-
gency spare wheel.
RCheck the tyre pressure of the emergency
spare wheel when tted. Correct the pressure
as necessary.
%The specied tyre pressure is stated on the
label of the emergency spare wheel.
%Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the
tyre pressure monitoring system cannot func-
tion reliably. For a few minutes aer an emer-
gency spare wheel is tted, the system may
still display the tyre pressure of the removed
wheel. Only restart the system when the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced
with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 659)
RTyre pressure table (/ page 660)
RNotes on tting tyres (/ page 662)
RFitting an emergency spare wheel
(/ page 667)
Inating the emergency spare wheel
*NOTE Overheating due to the tyre ination
compressor running too long
#Do not run the tyre ination compressor
for longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption.
Wheels and tyres 673
F206 0119 02
Requirements:
RThe emergency spare wheel has been tted
correctly. (/ page 667)
%Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes
on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel
and on the tyre ination compressor.
#Remove the sticker with the inscription
80 km/h from the tyre ination compressor
and ax it to the instrument cluster within the
driver's eld of vision.
#Remove the tyre ination compressor from the
stowage space under the boot oor.
(/ page 64)
#Pull ller hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tyre
ination compressor housing.
#Insert plug 7 of ller hose 1 in the socket
on the tyre ination compressor and then turn
it until plug 7 engages.
#Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer-
gency spare wheel.
#Screw union nut 2 of ller hose 1 onto the
valve.
#Make sure on and o switch 4 of the tyre
ination compressor is set to 0.
#Insert plug 3 in a socket in your vehicle.
RCigarette lighter socket
R12 V socket (/ page 215)
RObserve the notes on the cigarette lighter in
the Digital Owner's Manual
RObserve the notes on sockets (/ page 215).
#Press the start/stop button once to switch on
the power supply (/ page 261).
#Press on/o switch 4 on the tyre ination
compressor to I.
The tyre ination compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inated. The tyre pressure is shown
on manometer 5.
#Pump the tyre to the specied tyre pressure.
%The specied tyre pressure is stated on the
label of the emergency spare wheel.
#When the specied tyre pressure has been
reached, press on/o switch 4 on the tyre
ination compressor to 0.
The tyre ination compressor is switched o.
#Press the start/stop button to switch o the
power supply.
#If the tyre pressure is higher than the specied
pressure, press pressure release valve button
6 until the correct tyre pressure has been
reached.
#Unscrew union nut 2 of ller hose 1 from
the valve.
#Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare
wheel onto the valve again.
674 Wheels and tyres
F206 0119 02
#Stow ller hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower
section of the tyre ination compressor hous-
ing.
#Stow the tyre ination compressor in the vehi-
cle.
Wheels and tyres 675
F206 0119 02
Notes on technical data
The technical data was determined in accordance
with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to
vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain
further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Only for certain countries: you can nd vehicle-
specic vehicle data in the COC documents (CER-
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents
are supplied when the vehicle is delivered.
On-board electronics
Notes on tampering with the engine electronics
*NOTE Premature wear through improper
maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle
components to wear more quickly and the
vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.
#Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Two-way radios
Notes on tting two-way radios
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrot-
ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation
from the two-way radios can interfere with the
vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operat-
ing safety of the vehicle.
#You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle
improperly, their electromagnetic radiation
can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is
the case in the following situations, in particu-
lar:
RThe two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior aerial.
RThe exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is
not a low-reection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
the vehicle.
#Have the low-reection exterior aerial t-
ted at a qualied specialist workshop.
#When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the low-
reection exterior aerial.
*NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit
due to failure to comply with the instruc-
tions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the
instructions for installation and use of two-way
radios are not observed.
#Only use approved frequency bands.
#Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands.
#Only use approved aerial positions.
676 Technical data
F206 0119 02
1Rear roof area
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, t-
ting an aerial to the roof area is not permitted.
Use Technical Specication ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
retrotting two-way radios. Comply with the legal
requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has ttings for two-way radio equip-
ment, use the power supply and aerial connectors
provided in the pre-installation. Observe the man-
ufacturer's supplements when tting.
Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
the following table.
Frequency band and maximum transmission out-
put
Frequency band Maximum transmis-
sion output
2‑m‑ frequency band
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Terrestrial Trunked
Radio (TETRA)
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
Frequency band Maximum transmis-
sion output
Two-way radio
2G
2 W
Two-way radio
3G/4G/5G
0.5 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
Rtwo-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
Rtwo-way radios with transmitter frequencies in
the 380 -410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(TETRA)
Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow-
ing frequency bands:
RTerrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
R2G/3G/4G/5G
Technical data 677
F206 0119 02
Regulatory radio information
Specic information on wireless applications in
accordance with 2014/53/EU
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com-
munication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of
the following automotive radio applications.
Type of wireless applications and specications in accordance with 2014/53/EU
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld
strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119
kHz
Near-eld communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire
Pressure Monitoring 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
678 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door
Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door
Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz
EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Compensator ECE DE003 and ECE DE004 GSM (E-GSM 900)
GSM (E-GSM 1800)
< +33 dBm
< +30 dBm
UMTS (I, III, VIII) < +23 dBm
LTE (B1, B3, B7, B8, B20) < +23 dBm
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobi-
lity & Emergency Services) WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz)
WLAN (5736-5833 MHz)
< 20 dBm
< 14 dBm
Technical data 679
F206 0119 02
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4)
GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1)
GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2)
< +33 dBm (±2 dB)
< +30 dBm (±2 dB)
< +27 dBm (±3 dB)
< +26 dBm (± 3 dB/-4 dB)
UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4)
< +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
< +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class
3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18,
B19, B21, B28, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only
680 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Further information and updates are available at
the following web address:
https://
regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
Regulatory radio identiers and specic notes
The tables and sections contain the following reg-
ulatory radio information:
RManufacturer information
RRequired regulatory radio identiers, listed by
country/region:
-Manufacturer's specications
-Model designations
-Radio equipment approval numbers
RSpecic information on wireless vehicle com-
ponents
Further information and updates are available at
the following web address:
https://
regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
Overview of manufacturers
Manufacturer Manufacturer informa-
tion
ADC ADC Automotive Dis-
tance Control Systems
GmbH, Peter-Dornier-
Straße 10, 88131 Lin-
dau, Germany
Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH,
Daimlerstraße 6,
71229 Leonberg, Ger-
many
Manufacturer Manufacturer informa-
tion
Continental Antenna Continental Advanced
Antenna GmbH,
Römerring 1, 31137
Hildesheim, Germany
Continental Automo-
tive Continental Automo-
tive GmbH, Siemens-
straße 12, 93055
Regensburg, Germany
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies Continental Automo-
tive Technologies
GmbH, VDO-Straße 1,
64832 Babenhausen,
Germany
Gentex Gentex Corporation,
600 North Centennial
Street, Zeeland MI
49464, USA
Technical data 681
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Manufacturer informa-
tion
Harman Becker Harman Becker Auto-
motive Systems
GmbH, Becker-Goehr-
ing-Straße 18, 76307
Karlsbad, Germany
HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck &
Co., Rixbecker Straße
75, 59552 Lippstadt,
Germany
Hirschmann Hirschmann Car Com-
munication GmbH,
Stuttgarter Straße
45-51, 72654 Neckar-
tenzlingen, Germany
Huf Baolong Huf Baolong Electron-
ics Bretten GmbH,
Gewerbestraße 40,
75015 Bretten, Ger-
many
Manufacturer Manufacturer informa-
tion
HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst
GmbH & Co. KG,
Steeger Straße 17,
42551 Velbert, Ger-
many
KATHREIN
Id
KATHREIN Automotive
GmbH & Co. KG,
Römerring 1, 31137
Hildesheim, Germany
LEOPOLD KOSTAL LEOPOLD KOSTAL
GmbH & Co. KG,
Hauert 11, 44227
Dortmund, Germany
MARQUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH,
Schloßstraße 16,
78604 Rietheim-Weil-
heim, Germany
Manufacturer Manufacturer informa-
tion
Meta System Meta System S.P.A.,
Via T. Galimberti 5,
42124 Reggio Emilia,
Italy
Molex Molex CVS Dabendorf
GmbH, Märkische
Straße 72, 15806 Zos-
sen, Germany
Panasonic Panasonic Automotive
Systems Europe
GmbH, Robert-Bosch-
Straße 27, 63225
Langen, Germany
Schrader Schrader Electronics
Ltd., 11 Technology
Park, Belfast Road,
Antrim BT41 1QS,
Northern Ireland, Uni-
ted Kingdom
682 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Manufacturer informa-
tion
Sennheiser Sennheiser electronic
GmbH & Co. KG, Am
Labor 1, 30900 Wede-
mark, Germany
Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB,
Wallentinsvägen 22,
44737 Vårgårda, Swe-
den
WITTE-Velbert WITTE-Velbert GmbH
& Co. KG, Hoeferstr.
3-15, 42551 Velbert,
Germany
Algeria Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223GNS
(locking sys-
tem)
71/H/ANF/
2021
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) 122/H/ANF/
2021
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) 123/H/ANF/
2023
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
122/H/ANF/
2021
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) 123/H/ANF/
2021
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
106/H/ANF/
2020
Technical data 683
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
107/H/ANF/
2020
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
133/H/ANF/
2022
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
105/H/ANF/
2022
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) 172/H/ANF/
2021
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) 188/H/ANF/
2021
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) 189/H/ANF/
2021
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) 190/H/ANF/
2021
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) 195/H/ANF/
2021
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) 193/H/ANF/
2021
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) 194/H/ANF/
2021
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
186/H/ANF/
2021
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
3681/1-73.O
A
1639/DT/DG
/ARPT/15
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
652/1/DT/D
G/ARPCE/
2020
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
56/H/ANF/
2021
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
3994/1.69-
DA/
2098/DT/DG
/ARPT/17
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
2695/1-
NO.431396/
DT/DG/
ARPT/17
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
2695/1-
NO.431396/
DT/DG/
ARPT/17
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
32/H/ANF/
2021
684 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Argentina
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS441DP10
(radar sensor) C-2377
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
H-26206
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
H-24637
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) H-24376
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) H-28998
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
H-17929
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2020A
(control unit) H-23974
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) H-17845
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
H-15694
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
H-15695
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
H-28310
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
H-20027
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
H-28067
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
H-15541
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
H-11545
Technical data 685
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) H-16874
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) H-17689
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) H-21034
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) H-21035
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) H-17598
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) H-23101
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) H-24933
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) H-17213
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) H-17212
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
H-23166
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
H-4788
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
H-23292
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
H-25586
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
H-20495
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
H-20959
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
H-24664
686 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Australia
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar
sensor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen-
sor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar
sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen-
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head
unit)
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2
(head unit)
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2
(head unit)
Manufacturer Model designation
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-
tem)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
Technical data 687
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar
sensor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen-
sor)
Manufacturer Model designation
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar
sensor)
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)
Bahamas
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) URCA_TA_20
14_082
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) URCA_TA_20
19_167
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) URCA_TA/
2017_184
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) URCA_TA/
2017_157
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) URCA_TA_20
19_195
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) URCA_TA/
2020_068
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) URCA_TA/
2023_028
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2017_119
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
UCRA_TA/
2016_009
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
UCRA_TA/
2020_032
688 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) URCA_TA/
2017_078
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2019_053
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2019_052
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2022_043
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA_20
22_057
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2015_087
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2015_087
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
URCA_TA/
2017_094
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) URCA_TA/
2015_081
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) URCA_TA_20
17_042
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) URCA_TA_20
19_128
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) URCA_TA_20
19_129
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) URCA_TA/
2017_021
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) URCA_TA_20
19_141
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) URCA_TA_20
20_141,
URCA_TA_20
22_228
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) URCA_TA/
2015_031
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) URCA_TA/
2015_033
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA/
2019_250
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
URCA_TA_TA
/2015_009
Technical data 689
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
URCA_TA_20
19_101
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
URCA_TA_20
21_001
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
URCA_TA_20
20_046
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
URCA_TA_20
19_247
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) URCA_TA_20
19_169
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) URCA_TA_20
19_168
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) URCA_TA_20
21_027
Veoneer MMRV1
(radar sensor) URCA_TA/
2015_063
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
URCA_TA_20
20_056
Belarus
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Manufacturer Model designation
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen-
sor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar
sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen-
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
690 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (commu-
nication module)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar
sensor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen-
sor)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar
sensor)
Manufacturer Model designation
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking
system)
Botswana
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2018/2026
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2020/5186
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4674
Technical data 691
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4975
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2017/3788
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/4387
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/5050
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/5075
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) BOCRA/TA/
2023/8144
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/4661
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4662
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/4724
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/4723
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2022/7099
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
HUF13145
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/4664
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4593
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4389
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4388
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4390
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/5135
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4758
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2020/5473
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4359
692 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4360
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2019/4687
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4975
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2019/4980
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/
2021/6191
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
BOCRA/TA/
2020/5342
Brazil
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
These systems are not protected against harmful
interference and must not cause interference in
properly approved systems.
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS441DP10
(radar sensor) 06783-19-02
496
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
03691-15-05
298
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
07359-21-12
817
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
3691-15-529
8
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) 00325-20-02
149
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) 01334-23-02
149
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
03189-17-02
856
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
04336-23-02
149
Technical data 693
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
04338-23-02
149
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
04337-23-02
149
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) 04689-17-05
364
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
1855-12-576
2
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
1787-12-805
8
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
HUF13145
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
03627-15-06
643
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
00053-13-06
643
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) 02712-15-03
366
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) 01333-17-02
930
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) 01395-11-02
930
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) 01392-11-02
930
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) 00616-17-02
930
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) 06218-19-02
930
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) 11149-20-02
930
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
03149-19-02
930
694 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) 03756-15-02
930
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) 03757-15-02
930
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
03034-20-07
018
Further specic information
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
This system is not protected against harmful inter-
ference and must not cause interference in prop-
erly approved systems.
This product is approved by ANATEL in accord-
ance with the procedures set out in Resolution
242/2000 and complies with the relevant techni-
cal requirements. Further information can be
found on the https://www.anatel.gov.br
Brunei Darussalam
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) DTA-004005
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) DTA-004222
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) DTA-011039
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) DTA-006601
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) DTA-006678
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
DTA-006665
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
DTA-004998
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) DTA-005043
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) DTA-023993
Technical data 695
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-017264
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) DTA-020187
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-001661
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-000794
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-018051
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
DTA-000310
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
DTA-003757
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-017926
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-006138
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-000615
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) DTA-007245
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) DTA-019403
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) DTA-000068
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) DTA-000066
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) LPD-38890
696 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) DTA-003525
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) DTA-005850
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) DTA-011312
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) DTA-011313
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-003662
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
LPD-29665
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
LPD-29665
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
DRQ-D-
JATI-07-2000-
109000
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
DTA-001514
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader MFR (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
DTA No.
003893
Schrader MFR3 (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
DRQ-D-
MAJU-02-201
1-111083
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) DTA-004000
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) DTA-003999
Technical data 697
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) DTA-010423
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
DTA-006216
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
DTA-005628
Eurasian Economic Union
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar
sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen-
sor)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen-
sor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar
sensor)
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-
tem)
698 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-
tem)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking
system)
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys-
tem)
HUF HUF14632 (locking
system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
Manufacturer Model designation
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar
sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar
sensor)
Technical data 699
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen-
sor)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar
sensor)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking
system)
Ghana
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
NCA
APPROVED
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-
152
ADC ARS441DP10
(radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-
152
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) ZRO-
M8-7E3-230
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
ZRO-M8-7E3-
X53
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
ZRO-
M8-7E3-225
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) ZRO-
M8-7E3-277
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) 7M-7E7-X25-
DSR
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
BR3-1M-
GE2-16A
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
7M-7E7-X09-
DSR
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
7M-7E7-X05-
DSR
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
7M-7E7-X03-
DSR
700 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) BR3-1M-
GE2-157
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
ZRO-M8-7E3-
X45
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
ZRO-M8-7E3-
X47
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
7E6-M1-X14-
SRD
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
EX6-6M-
GE2-16C
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) ZRO-M8-7E3-
X49
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) ZRO-M8-7E3-
X50
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) ZRO-M8-7E3-
X51
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) ZRO-M8-7E3-
X52
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) BR3-1M-
GE-129
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) ZRO-1H-7E3-
26E
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) SRO-1M-7E4-
11B
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) ZRO-M8-7E3-
X4A
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) ZRO-M8-7E3-
X4C
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
ZRO-M8-7E3-
X3C
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-
142
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) ZRO-
M8-7E3-230
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) 7E5-7M-X72-
RDR
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
SRO-1M-7E4-
X59
Technical data 701
F206 0119 02
Indonesia
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) 68676/
SDPPI/2020
7163
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) 70266/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS441DP10
(radar sensor) 89748/
SDPPI/2023
7163
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) 74264/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) 74267/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Bosch MRRevo14F
(radar sensor) 74265/
SDPPI/2021
7163
702 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) 74266/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) 67882/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 703
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
76621/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
86957/
SDPPI/ 2022
10325
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
704 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) 87836/
SDPPI/2023
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 705
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) 88721/
SDPPI/2023
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
69379/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
706 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2020A
(control unit) 66678/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 707
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive NTG7 MID
(Headunit)
70732/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive NTG7 HIGH
(Headunit)
70733/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
708 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive NTG7 PRE-
MIUM
(Headunit)
70731/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 709
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive NTG7 PRE-
MIUM PLUS
(Headunit)
70734/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG6N
ENTRY/MID
(Headunit)
Production:
Germany
64019/
SDPPI/2019
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
710 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG6N HIGH
(Headunit)
Production:
Germany
64018/
SDPPI/2019
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 711
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG6N
ENTRY/MID
(Headunit)
Production:
Hungary
63775/
SDPPI/2019
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG6N HIGH
(Headunit)
Production:
Hungary
63774/
SDPPI/2019
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
712 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG7 MID
(Headunit)
65544/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 713
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG7 HIGH
(Headunit)
70513/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG7 PRE-
MIUM
(Headunit)
65543/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
714 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG7 PRE-
MIUM PLUS
(Headunit)
70512/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 715
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker NTG7 RSU
(control unit) 66387/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) 69378/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
716 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
72438/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
71369 /
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 717
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
72974 /
SDPPI/2021
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
82675/
SDPPI/2022
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
718 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
78368/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 719
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
26742/
SDPPI/2015
3533
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF13145
(NFC reader) 83988/
SDPPI/2022
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
720 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) 41121/
SDPPI/2018
5125
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) 67373/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 721
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) 80676/
SDPPI/2022
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) 80621/
SDPPI/2022
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
722 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) 67372/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 723
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) 64126/
SDPPI/2019
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) 69077/
SDPPI/2020
7163
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
724 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) 75282/
SDPPI/ 2021
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 725
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) 75285/
SDPPI/ 2021
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
82980/
SDPPI/2022
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
726 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Molex WCH-302b
(control unit) 71668/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Technical data 727
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Molex WCH-302d
(control unit) 71220/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Molex WCH-302e
(control unit) 71669/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
728 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Panasonic DAIRSE (con-
trol unit) 63550/
SDPPI/2019
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
72023/
SDPPI/2020
9338
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
75465/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Technical data 729
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
72765/
SDPP/2021
7163
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
57058/
SDPPI/2018
3612
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
25626/
SDPPI/2015
3612
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
62396/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
72023/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
74749/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) 66830/
SDPPI/2020
7163
730 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) 78366/
SDPPI/2021
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) 66792/
SDPPI/2020
7163
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
67233/
SDPPI/2020
10325
Dilarang mel-
akukan peru-
bahan spesi-
kasi yang
dapat menim-
bulkan gang-
guan sik
dan/atau
elektromag-
netik terha-
dap lingkun-
gan sekitar-
nya
Technical data 731
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Israel
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Approval
number of the
Ministry of
Communica-
tions:
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) 55-09697
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) 55-07525
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) 55-08783
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) 55-08334
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) 55-08333
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) 55-08395
Bosch MBCI2LS3PR
1 (head unit) 51-91228
Bosch MBCI2LS4PR
1 (head unit) 51-91226
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
55-13929
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2017B
(control unit) 51-75654
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2017A
(control unit) 51-75367
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2016A
(control unit) 55-08177
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2020A
(control unit) 55-08179
Continental
Automotive RKE213E1
(Antennenver-
stärker)
55-13929
Continental
Automotive RKE223E1GNS
(Antennenver-
stärker)
51-70799
732 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG1
(Schließsys-
tem)
51-87871
Continental
Automotive CMKG2
(Schließsys-
tem)
51-92059
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(Schließsys-
tem)
55-13749
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
51-90718
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
51-90717
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
51-90719
Harman
Becker NTG7 HIGH-IL
(Headunit)
51-89476
Harman
Becker NTG7 PRE-
MIUMPLUS-IL
(Headunit)
51-89475
HELLA DM4
(Schließsys-
tem)
55-14271
Hirschmann 920287A
(Schließsys-
tem)
51-62759
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287B
(Schließsys-
tem)
51-49357
Hirschmann 920702A
(Schließsys-
tem)
55-12320
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
63-63571
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
63-66757
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
55-14153
Technical data 733
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) 51-87872
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) 55-13847
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) 55-12215
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) 55-12214
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) 51-85192
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) 51-86840
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
55-14331
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
51-78338
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
51-73152
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
51-77898
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
51-64111
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
55-09441
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
51-29611
Schrader MFR (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
55-06040
Schrader MFR3 (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
51-79817
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) 55-08176
734 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) 55-08301
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
55-12216
Jamaica
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automo-
tive RKE223E1GNS (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-
tem)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
HUF HUF13145 (locking
system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking sys-
tem)
Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking
system)
Technical data 735
F206 0119 02
Japan
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) TMWK221100
4648KR
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
003-230113
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
003-230112
Sennheiser M3IETW2R
(Earbud) 201-190814
(R)
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Sennheiser M3IETW2L
(Earbud) 201-190815
(L)
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
020-180077
Canada
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) IC: 7812D-
CMKG2
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
IC:
NTG7QMIDLF
2
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
IC:
NTG7QHIGLF
2
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
IC:
NTG7QPREF2
Sennheiser M3IETW2R
(Earbud) IC:2099A-
M3IETW2R
Sennheiser M3IETW2L
(Earbud) IC:2099A-
M3IETW2L
736 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
IC:2099A-
BTT100
Sennheiser M3IETW2 C
(Charging
Case)
CAN
ICS-3(B)/
NMB-3(B)
Kuwait
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) Ref. 6716
Sennheiser M3IETW2
(Momentum
True Wireless
2)
Ref. 4870
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
Ref. 4871
Malaysia
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) HIDF1500015
3
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) CIDF1500049
0
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) CIDF1500049
0
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) CIDF1500049
0
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) CIDF1500049
0
Technical data 737
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRevo14F
(radar sensor) CIDF1500049
0
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
HIDF1500015
3
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
HIDF1600013
6
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) HIDF1500015
3
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) HIDF1500015
3
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
CIDF1500057
8
Continental
Automotive UWBTRX1
(locking sys-
tem)
HIDF1500015
3
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2020A
(control unit) RGEZ/12A/
1019/
S(19-4128)
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
RCCT/92G/
0423/
S(23-0350)
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
CCT/91G/
0323/
S(23-1291)
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
RGQB/05A/
0323/
S(23-1293)
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) CIDF1500057
8
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
RAUU/63A/
0311/
S(11-0432)
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
RAUU/22C/
0615/
S(15-1864)
738 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
HIDF1500015
3
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
CIDF1700018
4
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
RFBY/09A/
0422/
S(22-1843)
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
RAYN/25A/
0715/
S(15-2385)
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
RAAU/16B/
1112/
S(12-2053)
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) HIDF1500015
3
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) RDDK/33A/
0317/
S(17-0669)
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) RAUU/62A/
0311/
S(11-0263)
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) RAUU/62A/
0311/
S(11-0264)
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) RDDK/31A/
0217/
S(17-0405)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) RDDK/25B/
1019/
S(19-0943)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) RGLO/02A/
0720/
S(20-2580)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) CIDF1900002
9
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) CIDF1900002
9
Technical data 739
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
CIDF1900002
9
Meta System ITS/TPS (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
RAVG/18Q/
0212/
S(11-2068)
Meta System MUW II (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
RAVG/17Q/
0212/
S(11-2067)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
RCDD/03A/
0615/
S(19-2094)
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
RBEF/28A/
0419/S/
(19-1542)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
RBEF/51A/
0121/S/
(20-5642)
Schrader MFR (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
RAQP/62A/
0419/
S(19-1694)
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader MFR3 (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
RAQP/62A/
0419/
S(19-1694)
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
HIDF1500015
3
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) HIDF1500015
3
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) HIDF1500015
3
740 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) HIDF1500015
3
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
RDDK/43B/
0420/
S(20-1749)
Morocco
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
AGREE PAR
LANRT
MAROC
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) MR 9490
ANTR
2014-07-23
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) MR 20231
ANRT
2019-06-27
ADC ARS441DP10
(radar sensor) MR 20231
ANRT
2019-06-27
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) MR 20575
ANRT
2019-07-29
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) MR 5371
ANRT 2010
2019-12-05
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) MR 9186
ANTR
2014-04-22
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) MR 13900
ANTR
2017-05-04
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
MR 10631
ANTR
2015-07-16
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
MR 21174
ANTR
2019-10-14
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) MR 21701
ANTR
2019-12-05
Technical data 741
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) MR 36542
ANRT
2023-02-01
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 13681
ANTR
2017-04-04
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) MR 14426
ANTR
2017-07-28
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 6700
ANTR
2011-11-16
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 7260
ANTR
2012-06-13
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 32214
ANTR
2022-03-08
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
MR 14320
ANTR
2017-07-07
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
MR 19561
ANTR
2019-04-26
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 32395
ANRT
2022-03-24
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 10506
ANTR
2015-06-22
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 7829
ANTR
2013-02-14
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) MR 10697
ANTR
2015-08-05
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) MR 13429
ANTR
2017-03-03
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) MR 6698
ANTR
2021-11-04
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) MR 6699
ANTR
2021-11-04
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) MR 13300
ANTR
2017-02-15
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) MR 19199
ANTR
2019-03-25
742 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) MR 23805
ANRT
2020-04-22
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) MR 10645
ANTR
2015-07-21
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) MR 10987
ANTR
2015-10-22
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 18817
ANTR
2019-02-12
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
MR 10216
ANRT 2015
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
MR 19241
ANRT 2019
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
MR00026829
ANRT2020
Schrader MFR (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
MR 19527
ANRT
2019-04-30
Schrader MFR3 (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
MR 19527
ANRT 2019
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
MR 14777
ANRT
2017-09-20
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
MR 16355
ANRT
2018-04-19
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
MR 6706
ANRT
2011-11-17
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
MR 10436
ANRT
2015-05-25
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) MR 20097
ANRT
2019-06-14
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) MR 20149
ANRT
2019-06-19
Technical data 743
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) MR 27966
ANRT
2021-03-29
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
MR 23310
ANRT
2020-03-10
Mexico
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) IFETEL:
RCPCOAR14-
1191
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) IFETEL:
RLVCOR19-1
062
ADC ARS441DP10
(radar sensor) IFETEL:
RLVCOR19-1
062
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) IFETEL:
RCPBOLR09-
0828
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) IFETEL:
RCPBOMR14-
0922
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) IFETEL:
RCPBOMR17-
0598
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
IFETEL:
RLVKARK15-1
741
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
IFETEL:
RLVCORK19-
2174
744 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) IFETEL:
RCPCOCM19-
2315
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) IFETEL:
COCOCM22-
31003
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RLVDAMA18-
1827
Continental
Automotive UWBTRX1
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
MECOCM22-
17609
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
IFETEL:
MEMENT23 -
12200
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
IFETEL:
MEMENT23 -
11923
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
IFETEL:
MEMENT23 -
12204
Gentex MUAHL 5
(convenience
system)
IFETEL:
RCPGEMU15-
0448
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVHEDM17-
10
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RLVHI9211-0
472
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RLVHI9212-0
608
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RLVHI9222-2
674
Technical data 745
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
IFETEL:
RLVHUTS17-0
806
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RCPHUHU22-
2505
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RLVHUHU15-
1204
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RLVHUHU12-
1587
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVKOKK15-0
891
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) IFETEL:
RLVMEDC17-
0348
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) IFETEL:
RLVMADC11-
0446
MARQUARDT DC12K (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
IFETEL:
RLVMADC11-
0446
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVMAMS17-
0222
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVMAMS19-
0449
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVMEMS20-
0957
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVMAMK15-
1042
746 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) IFETEL:
RLVMAMK15-
1043
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RCPMA3319-
0530
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
IFETEL:
RCPSCAG15-
0627
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
IFETEL:
RLVSCAG19-0
705
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
IFETEL:
RLVSCBG21-0
750
Schrader MFR (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
IFETEL:
RLVSCMF15-
0959
Schrader MFR3 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
IFETEL:
RLVSCMF19-
0777
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
IFETEL:
RLVSCGG17-
1665
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
IFETEL:
RLVSCDG18-
04
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
IFETEL:
RCPSCMR14-
062
Sennheiser M3IETW2R
(Earbud) IFETEL:
RCPSEM320-
0435-A1
Sennheiser M3IETW2L
(Earbud) IFETEL:
RCPSEM320-
0435
Technical data 747
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
IFETEL:
RCPSEBT18-1
407
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
IFETEL:
RCPWISD20-
0943
Mongolia
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) A19000633
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) A23000900
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
A18000328
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) A18000329
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
A22000649
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
A22000674
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) A19000400
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) A19000371
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) A19000372
748 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) A18000289
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) A19000516
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) A20000085
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) A19000374
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) A19000374
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
A19000401
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
A20000067
Niger
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
029/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
083/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) 082/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
097/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
098/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
Technical data 749
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
053/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) 037/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) 010/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) 008/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) 009/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) 014/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) HOMO-0096/
ARCEP/DG/
2019
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) 034/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) 035/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
015/
ARCEP/DG/1
9
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking
system) HOMO-0095/
ARCEP/DG/
2019
Nigeria
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sen-
sor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen-
sor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar
sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
750 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-
tem)
HUF HUF13145 (locking
system)
HUF HUF14632 (locking
system)
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys-
tem)
Manufacturer Model designation
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Manufacturer Model designation
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader MFR3 (control unit)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar
sensor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sen-
sor)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar
sensor)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking
system)
Technical data 751
F206 0119 02
Oman
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) TRA/TA-R/
2016/14
D080134
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
7769/19
D172338
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
7983/19
D172338
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) TRA/TA-R/
1049/09
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
1849/14
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
4353/17
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
TRA/TA-R/
2715/15
D090258
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
TRA/TA-R/
8337/19
D172338
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) TRA/TA-R/
8642/19
D172338
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) TRA/TA-R/
15164/23
D100428
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
4158/17
D080134
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
4548/17
D080134
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
0210/11
D080353
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
0655/12
D080353
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
13300/22
D172338
752 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TRA/TA-R/
4516/17
D100428
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TTRA/TA-R/
7506/19
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
13465/22
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
2665/15
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
0920/12
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
3129/16
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) TRA/TA-RD/
4056/17
D100428
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) TRA/TA-R/
0227/11
D080353
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) TRA/TA-R/
0228/11
D080353
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
4136/17
D080134
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
7316/19
D172249
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
9324/20
D100428
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
2848/15
D080353
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) TRA/TA-R/
2900/15
D080353
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
7051/19
D172249
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TTRA R/
2380/15
D080134
Technical data 753
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA R/
7287/19
D172338
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA/TA-R/
10694/20
D172338
Schrader MFR (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
TRA/TA-R/
7464/19
D090258
Schrader MFR3 (tyre
pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
TRA/TA-R/
7467/19
D090258
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA/TA-R/
4686/17
D080134
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TRA/TA-R/
5511/18
D172249
Sennheiser M3IETW2R
(Earbud) TRA/TA-R/
10988/21
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
TRA/TA-R/
10976/21
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
TRA/TA-R/
2706/15
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
7706/19
D172338
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
7707/19
D172338
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/
11335/21
D172338
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA/TA-R/
9150/20
754 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Pakistan
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) TAC NO:
9.9014/2019
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) TAC NO:
9.9389/2019
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) TAC NO:
9.198/2020
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
TAC NO:
9.142/2016
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
TAC NO:
9.100169/20
19
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) TAC
NO:9.100175
/2019
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) TAC NO:
9.153/2023
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO:
9.213/2017
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2020A
(control unit) TAC NO:
9.9836/2019
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) TAC NO:
9.409/2017
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO:
9.845/2013
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO:
9.846/2013
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO.
9.412/2022
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TAC NO:
9.620/2017
Technical data 755
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO:
9.598/2015
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO:
9.790/2013
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) TAC NO:
9.118/2016
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) TAC NO:
9.131/2017
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) TAC NO:
9.829/2013
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) TAC NO:
9.830/2013
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) TAC NO:
9.133/2017
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) TAC NO:
9.100171/20
19
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) TAC.NO:
9.774/2020
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) TAC NO:
9.486/2015
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) TAC NO:
9.497/2015
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TAC
NO:9.039/20
16
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TAC
NO:9.9167/2
019
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TAC
NO:9.68/202
1
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TAC
NO:9.538/20
17
756 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TAC NO:
9.789/2018
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
TAC NO:
9.9284/2019
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) TAC NO:
9.9391/2019
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) TAC NO:
9.9391/2019
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) TAC NO:
9.477/2021
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
TAC NO:
9.527/2020
Paraguay
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor)
2019-05-
I-0271
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor)
2019-11-
I-0602
Technical data 757
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor)
2019-11-
I-0602
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor)
2019-09-
I-0508
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor)
2017-06-
I-0000162
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor)
2019-05-
I-000236
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
2021-02-
I-00101 y
2016-02-
I-0000038
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
2019-12-
I-0656
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system)
2020-02-
I-0110
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system)
2023-03-
I-0153
758 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
2017-05-
I-0000136 y
HELLA DM4 (locking
system)
2022-06-
I-0388 y
2017-08-
I-0000261
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
2016-5-
I-000134 y
2011-06-
I-0059
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
2017-04-
I-0000119 y
2012-05-
I-0096
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
2022-03-
I-0149
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
2017-09-
I-0000328
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
2022-04-
I-0235
Technical data 759
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
2020-06-
I-0284 y
2015-08-
I-0000226
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
2017-12-
I-0000409 y
2012-10-
I-0178
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system)
2015-06-
I-0000181
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system)
2020-12-
I-0898 y
2015-06-
I-0000181
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system)
2021-05-
I-0304;
2016-5-
I-000144 y
2011-06-
I-0067
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system)
2021-05-
I-0305;
2016-5-
I-000143 y
2011-06-
I-0068
760 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system)
2017-04-
I-0000101
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system)
2019-10-
I-0581
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system)
2020-08-
I-0604
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system)
2020-07-
I-0390 y
2015-07-
I-0000200
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system)
2020-07-
I-0391 y
2015-07-
I-0000201
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
2019-04-
I-000216
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
2015-04-
I-0000150
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
2019-05-1-00
0261
Technical data 761
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
2021-02-
I-0063
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
2020-02-1-00
44
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
2019-11-1-06
32
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
2020-07-
I-0510
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor)
2019-07-
I-0399
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor)
2019-07-
I-0398
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor)
2021-04-
I-0188
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
2020-06-
I-0326
Further specic information
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile
devices (WMI):
D-WMI2020A:
This vehicle is equipped with the following radio
frequency component approved by CONATEL -
Paraguay: Wireless interface for mobile devices,
762 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Continental brand, model D-WMI2020A, manufac-
tured by Continental Automotive GmbH.
Radio equipment approval number: 2019-11-
I-0600
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
DAIRSE:
Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gor-
ostiaga 315 y Guaraníes, Asunción, Paraguay,
(595 21) 569 7000, sac@condor.com.py
Philippines
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) ESD-1409466
C
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) ESD-1920226
C
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) ESD-1920531
C
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) ESD-1408917
C
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) ESD-1716172
C
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
ESD-1511856
C
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
ESD-1921015
C
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) ESD-2021556
C
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) ESD-
RCE-2332806
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-1714865
C
Technical data 763
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) ESD-1715539
C
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-1105246
C
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-1206044
C
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-
RCE-2229632
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
ESD-1715393
C
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-
RCE-2229722
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-1511236
C
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-1206521
C
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) ESD-1510698
C
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) ESD-1714489
C
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) ESD-1105216
C
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) ESD-1105215
C
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) ESD-1715652
C
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) ESD-1919133
C
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) ESD-2022426
C
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) ESD-1510644
C
764 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) ESD-1510645
C
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-1919198
C
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
ESD-1715393
C
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
ESD-1919585
C
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
ESD-
RCE-2124846
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
ESD-1715977
C
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
ESD-1817081
C
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
ESD-1510921
C
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
ESD-2022599
C
Zambia
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/11
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/3
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/4
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/7/12
Technical data 765
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/7/11
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2018/12/18
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/48
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/5/16
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/5/17
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/5/18
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2018/9/30
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/7/123
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/20
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/21
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/3/6
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking
system) ZMB/
ZICTA/TA/
2019/7/124
766 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Serbia
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) И011 20
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) И011 19
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) И011 19
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) И011 19
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) И011 17
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) И005 17
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
И005 21
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
И005 22
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) И005 20
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) И005 23
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 20
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
И005 23
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
И005 23
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
И005 23
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) И005 20
Technical data 767
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 18
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 18
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 22
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
И005 20
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 22
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 21
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 21
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) И005 18
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) И005 20
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) И005 20
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) И005 20
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) И011 17
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) И005 19
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) И005 20
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) И005 21
768 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) И005 21
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 22
Meta System MUW II (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
И011 19
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
И005 15
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
И005 15
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
И005 20
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
И005 17
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
И005 18
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
И011 11
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
И011 18
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) И011 19
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) И011 19
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) И038 21
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
И005 20
Technical data 769
F206 0119 02
Singapore
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Complies with
IMDA Stand-
ards
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) DA103365
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) DA103365
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) DA103365
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) DA103365
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) DA103365
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) DA103365
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
DA105282
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
DA107248
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) DA103365
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) DB106440
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
DA105282
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive UWBTRX1
(locking sys-
tem)
DB107091
Continental
Automotive D-WMI2020A
(control unit) DA103365
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
DA105282
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
DA105282
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
DA105282
Harman
Becker HERMES 3.0
(communica-
tion module)
DB107091
770 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) DA103365
N3308-22
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
DA103365
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
DA103365
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
DA105282
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
DA30668
HUF Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
sensor)
DA28467
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
DA105282
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
DA103365
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) DA103787
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) DA103365
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) DA103365
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) DA103787
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) DA103787
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) DB107091
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) DA103365
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) DA103365
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
DA103787
Meta System ITS/TPS (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
DA103365
Meta System MUW II (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
DA103365
Technical data 771
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
DA103787
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
DA107968
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
DA103365
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
DA105282
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
DA105282
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
DA103365
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) DA103365
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) DA103365
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) DA103365
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
DA107248
South Africa
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) TA-2014/163
7
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) TA-2019/159
5
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) TA-2019/120
0
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) TA-2014/212
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) TA-2017/201
3
772 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch LRR3 (radar
sensor) TA-2009/464
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
TA-2015/143
8
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
TA-2020/043
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) TA-2019/540
5
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) TA-2022/361
1_CMKG2
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2016/350
0
Continental
Automotive UWBTRX1
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2021/346
0
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
TA-2023/009
1
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
TA-2023/011
1
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
TA-2023/009
0
Gentex MUAHL 5
(convenience
system)
TA-2015/138
6
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) TA-2017/251
8
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2011/374
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2013/126
2
Technical data 773
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2022/016
2
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TA-2017/139
3
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TA-2019/144
0
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2022/037
5
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2015/107
7
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2012/154
3
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) TA-2015/595
Meta System ITS Master
(interior pro-
tection)
TA-2011/163
6
Meta System ITS Sensor
(interior pro-
tection)
TA-2011/122
7
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Meta System MUW II (inte-
rior protec-
tion)
TA-2019/261
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) TA-2017/312
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) TA-2011/370
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) TA-2012/154
2
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) TA-2016/331
4
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) TA-2019/843
774 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) TA-2020/576
5
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) TA-2015/179
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) TA-2015/180
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2018/398
5
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TA-2015/072
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TA-2019-133
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TA-2020/773
Schrader MFR (control
unit) TA-2019/273
Schrader MFR3 (control
unit) TA-2019-273
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TA-2017/388
4
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TA-2017/293
3
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
TA-2011/137
0
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
TA-2015/208
7
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) TA-2019/138
0
Technical data 775
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) TA-2019/138
2
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) TA-2021/015
0
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
TA-2020/055
South Korea
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
R-C-Ca3-
RKE223E1
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) R-R-TeH-
CMKG2
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q LF2
(head unit) R-R-TeH-
NTG7QLF2
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
R-C-Ca3-
RKE223E1
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
MSIP-CRM-
HHF-
HUF-14632
Schrader MFR (control
unit) MSIP-REM-
SRD-MFR
Schrader MFR3 (control
unit) KCC R-R-SRD-
MFR3A
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
KCC-REM-
SRD-
MRXMC34MA
4
776 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
MSIP-CRM-
SRD-AG5SP4
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
R-C-SRD-
AG3PF4
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
R-C-SRD-
BG3FP4
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
MSIP-CRM-
SRD-GG4T
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
R-CRM-SRD-
DG6W2D4
Togo
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
No. 024/19
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
No. 040/19
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) No. 039/19
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
No. 089/19
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
No. 088/19
Technical data 777
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
No. 041/19
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) No. 060/19
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) No. 055/19
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) No. 057/19
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) No. 056/19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) No. 008/19
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) No. 101/19
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) No. 021/19
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) No. 022/19
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
No. 016/20
Ukraine
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
UKR.355-123
/19
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
UA.R.TR.052.
682-19
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) UA1.001.021
175-20-TE
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) UA.032.CT.01
05-23
778 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
RTS.UKR.355-
34/18
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
UA.TR.052
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
UA.TR.052
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
UA.TR.052
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) UA.TR.109
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
UKR.355-7/2
0
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
UKR.355-8/2
0
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
UA
1.001.01856
8-19-TE
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
UA
1.001.01928
9-19-TE
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
UKR.355-113
/19
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
UKR.355-113
/19
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
UA1.001.018
653-19-TE
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) 1O094.00668
2-19
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) UA.R.TR.052.
307-19
Technical data 779
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) UA.R.TR.052.
308-19
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) UA.R.TR.052.
309-19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) UA1.001.019
129-19-TE
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) UA.R.TR.052.
528-19
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) 632.16-CET
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) UA1.001.019
233-19-TE
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) UA1.001.019
234-19-TE
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
UA1.001.018
888-19-TE
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
UA.TR. 032
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
UA-TR-001
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
UA-TR-109
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
UA.TR. 028
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
UA.TR. 028
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
UA.R.TR.052.
120-20
780 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Uzbekistan
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automo-
tive RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive RKE223E1GNS (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-
tem)
HUF HUF13145 (locking
system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-
tem)
Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking
system)
Technical data 781
F206 0119 02
United Arab Emirates Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) TA RTTE:
Er558296/17
,
DA40068/15
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) TA RTTE:
ER77062/19,
DA40068/15
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) TA RTTE:
ER74533/19,
DA36758/14
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
TRA
ER64693/18,
DA65993/17
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
TRA
ER76442/19,
DA65993/17
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) TRA
ER77964/20,
DA0018994/
09
782 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) TRA
ER17713/23,
DA36975/14
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER56005/17,
DA44932/15
Continental
Automotive UWBTRX1
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER11321/22,
DA36975/14
Gentex MUAHL 5
(convenience
system)
TRA
ER41849/15,
DA35176/14
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Harman
Becker HERMES 3.0
(communica-
tion module)
TRA
ER03601/21,
DA0028019/
10
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) TRA
ER56616/17,
DA44932/15
Hirschmann 920287A
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER52213/17,
DA35219/14
Hirschmann 920287B
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER42011/15,
DA35219/14
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER10723/22,
DA35219/14
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TRA
ER57806/17,
DA36976/14
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
TRA
ER7307/19,
DA0086237/
12
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER08607/22,
DA36976/14
Technical data 783
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF14632
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER63716/18,
DA36976/14
HUF HUF4761
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER55496/17,
DA36976/14
HUF HUF13145
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER08607/22
DA36976/14
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) TRA
ER62622/18,
DA0105247/
13
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) TRA
ER53465/17,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) TRA
ER0067828/
11,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) TRA
ER0067829/
11,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) TRA
ER52668/17,
DA0018994/
09
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) TRA
ER71616/19,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) TRA
ER80720/20,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) TRA
ER64145/18,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) TRA
ER64146/18,
DA0018994/
09
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER69280/19,
0018994/09
784 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA
ER37156/15,
DA0047074/
10
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA
ER70533/19,
DA0047074/
10
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA
ER96175/21,
DA0047074/
10
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
TRA
ER57985/17,
DA0047074/
10
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
TRA
ER960528/1
8,
DA0047074/
10
Schrader MC34MA4
(tyre pressure
monitoring
system con-
trol unit)
TRA
ER37066/15,
DA0047074/
10
Sennheiser M3IETW2L
(Earbud) ER78231/20
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
ER64728/18
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
TA RTTE:
ER96352/21;
0020858/10
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) TA RTTE:
ER72324/19;
0020858/10
Technical data 785
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) TA RTTE:
ER72323/19;
0020858/10
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) TA RTTE:
ER95775/21;
0020858/10
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
TRA
ER79695/20,
DA0018994/
09
United Kingdom
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial
amplier)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial
amplier)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG1 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive CMKG2 (locking sys-
tem)
Continental Automo-
tive MARS Keyless (lock-
ing system)
786 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automo-
tive UWBTRX1 (locking
system)
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head
unit)
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2
(head unit)
Continental Automo-
tive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2
(head unit)
HUF HUF13145 (locking
system)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
Hirschmann 920287A (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking sys-
tem)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking sys-
tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking sys-
tem)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys-
tem)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure
sensor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure
sensor)
Technical data 787
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model designation
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres-
sure sensor)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking
system)
Further specic information
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile
devices (WMI):
D-WMI2016A, D-WMI2017A, D-WMI2017B:
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separa-
tion distance of at least 10 cm between all per-
sons and the device must be provided at all times.
The Device must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
D-WMI2020A:
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separa-
tion distance of at least 0 cm between all persons
and the device must be provided at all times. The
Device must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
United States
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) FCC ID:
KR5CMKG2
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q MID
LF2 (head
unit)
FCC ID:
NTG7QMIDLF
2
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q HIGH
LF2 (head
unit)
FCC ID:
NTG7QHIGLF
2
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive
Technologies
NTG7Q PRE-
MIUM LF2
(head unit)
FCC ID:
NTG7QPRELF
2
Sennheiser M3IETW2R
(Earbud) FCC ID:
DMOM3IETW
2R
Sennheiser M3IETW2L
(Earbud) FCC ID:
DMOM3IETW
2L
Sennheiser BTT100 (Blue-
tooth Audio
Transmitter)
FCC ID:
DMOBTT100
Information on installation clearances
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile
devices (WMI):
The charging unit for wireless charging of mobile
devices (WMI) complies with FCC and IC radiation
788 Technical data
F206 0119 02
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm (in
contact) between the source of radiation and your
body. This transmitter must not be placed in the
same location as or used at the same time as
another transmitter or antenna.
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
USA: "This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device must not
cause any harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
This device must be installed and used at a dis-
tance of at least 6 cm from the body."
Canada: "This device complies with ISED Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device must not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This equipment complies with ISED radiation
exposure limits established for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment must be installed
and operated with a minimum distance of 5 cm
between the radiation source and your body."
Radar sensors:
ARS4-C (ADC), ARS4-B (ADC), ARS4-A (ADC),
FR5CPCCF (Bosch), MRR1REAR (Bosch),
MRREVO14F (Bosch), LRR3 (Bosch), 77V12BSM
(Veoneer), 77V12CRN (Veoneer), MMRV1 (Veon-
eer)
USA only: Information on exposure to high-fre-
quency radiation:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation expo-
sure limits established for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment must be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiation source and your body.
This transmitter must not be placed in the same
location as or used at the same time as another
antenna or transmitter.
Canada only: This equipment should be installed
and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiation source and your body.
BT Audio Transmitter (BTT100):
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radia-
tion exposure limits established for an uncontrol-
led environment. This equipment must be instal-
led and operated with a minimum distance of
9 cm between the radiation source and your body.
This transmitter must not be placed in the same
location as or used at the same time as another
antenna or transmitter.
Technical data 789
F206 0119 02
Vietnam
Regulatory radio identication
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar
sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
ADC ARS4-C
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Bosch FR5CPCCF
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Bosch MRR1Rear
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Bosch MRRe14FCR
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Continental
Antenna RKE213E1
(aerial ampli-
er)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C027415111
8AF04A2
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Antenna RKE223E1GN
S (aerial
amplier)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
B152201112
1AF04A3
Continental
Automotive CMKG1 (lock-
ing system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C000107012
0AF04A2
790 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Continental
Automotive CMKG2 (lock-
ing system) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
B00172019
Continental
Automotive MARS Keyless
(locking sys-
tem)
Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
B074824041
9AF04A2
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HELLA DM4 (locking
system) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
CO20403032
1AF04A3
Hirschmann 920702A
(locking sys-
tem)
Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
B042407042
2AF04A3
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A
(tyre pressure
sensor)
C011220071
7AF04A2
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
HUF HUF13145
(tyre pressure
sensor)
C107105092
2AF04A3
LEOPOLD
KOSTAL KK1 (locking
system) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
C031314042
1AF0403
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock-
ing system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C020803032
1AF04A3
Technical data 791
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock-
ing system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C007621012
1AF04A3
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock-
ing system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C007721012
1AF04A3
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking
system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C007521012
1AF04A3
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking
system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C091311082
1AF04A3
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking
system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C014114052
0AF04A2
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking
system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C004915012
1AF04A3
792 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking
system) Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C005015012
1AF04A3
MARQUARDT 3350.38
(locking sys-
tem)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C013103022
1AF04A3
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C000205011
9AF042A
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C012022051
9AF04A2
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Schrader GG4T (tyre
pressure sen-
sor)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C017019101
7AF04A2
Schrader DG6W2D4
(tyre pressure
sensor)
Suntech Viet-
nam Technol-
ogy Company
Limited
C007807051
8AF04A2
Technical data 793
F206 0119 02
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77GHz
MMRV1
(radar sensor)
Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Veoneer 77V12BSM
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Veoneer 77V12CRN
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
Manufacturer Model desig-
nation Radio equip-
ment approval
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN
(radar sensor) Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC
(locking sys-
tem)
Mercedes-
Benz Vietnam
Company
Limited
A084713082
0AF04A3
Information about the specic absorption rate
(SAR)
Information about the specic absorption rate
The values have been determined and tested in
accordance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guide-
line regarding the indication of the specic
absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle compo-
nents.
Further information and updates are available at
the following web address:
https://
regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
794 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Information about the specic absorption rate
Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 compensators < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
D-WMI2020A 0.018 W/kg 4 W/kg
HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
Gen20x.i2 LS3+ 2,2 W/kg 4 W/kg
Gen20x.i2 LS4+ 2,5 W/kg 4 W/kg
SM-T230NZ tablet PC 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg
Technical data 795
F206 0119 02
Importer information for regulatory radio compo-
nents
For Moldova only:
Importer
S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova
mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2
For Turkey only:
Importer
Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler
A.Ş. Genel Merkez
Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1
34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul
For Ukraine only:
Importer
PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL
Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2
01004 Kyiv
Ukraine
For the United Kingdom only:
Importer
Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
England
Importer of Mercedes-Benz vans
Mercedes-Benz Vans UK Limited
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
England
Further information and updates are available at
the following web address:
https://
regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
796 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Vehicle identication plate, VIN and engine num-
ber overview
Vehicle identication plate
Vehicle identication plate (example: Kuwait)
1Vehicle manufacturer
2Place of manufacture
3Manufacturing date
4Vehicle model
5VIN (vehicle identication number)
Vehicle identication plate (example: all other
countries)
1Vehicle manufacturer
2EU general operating permit number (only for
certain countries)
3VIN (vehicle identication number)
4Permissible gross mass (kg)
5Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina-
tion (kg) (only for certain countries)
Technical data 797
F206 0119 02
6Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
8Paint code
%The data in the illustration is shown as an
example.
VIN below the right front seat
1Imprinted VIN (vehicle identication number)
2Floor covering
VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen
1VIN (vehicle identication number) as a label
The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind-
screen is only available in some countries.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the crank-
case. Further information can be obtained at a
qualied specialist workshop.
798 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Operating uids
Notes on operating uids
&WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful
operating uids
Operating uids can be toxic.
#When using, storing and disposing of
operating uids, observe the imprints on
the respective original containers.
#Always keep operating uids in the
sealed original container.
#Always keep children away from operat-
ing uids.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the
environment due to irresponsible disposal
of operating uids
Incorrect disposal of operating uids can
cause considerable damage to the environ-
ment.
#Dispose of operating uids in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Operating uids include the following:
Rfuels
RDeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas aer-
treatment
Rlubricants
RCoolant
RBrake uid
Rwindscreen washer uid
Rclimate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz
can be identied by the following inscriptions on
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating uids:
Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specications for Oper-
ating Fluids by entering the designation
-At https://operatinguids.mercedes-
benz.com
RAt a qualied specialist workshop
&WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly ammable.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Before and during refuelling, switch o
the vehicle and, if tted, the stationary
heater.
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
Technical data 799
F206 0119 02
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the fol-
lowing fuel types:
Runleaded petrol
RE85 fuel
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identied by the
Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel
ller ap.
Depending on the country, the fuels you can use
in your vehicle may dier from the information in
the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been
approved for your vehicle can be found on the
instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap.
Fuel
Information on fuel quality for vehicles with pet-
rol engines
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel.
Spark‑ignition engine fuel can contain up to
25% ethanol by volume.
#See the information label in fuel ller ap
for compatible fuels.
Further information about compatible fuels
can be obtained at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Throughout Europe you can also nd the com-
patibility labels on the fuel pump or pump noz-
zle suitable for your vehicle.
Never refuel with any of the following fuels:
RDiesel
RRegular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
Rpetrol with more than 3% methanol by vol-
ume, e.g. M15, M30
RPetrol with metallic additives
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
800 Technical data
F206 0119 02
The following compatibility marks for fuel may
apply to your vehicle:
Compatibility marks for fuel:
1For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by
volume
2For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by
volume
2For petrol with a maximum of 25% ethanol by
volume (not suitable for plug-in hybrid)
If the available fuel is not suciently low in sul-
phur, it may produce unpleasant odours.
The recommended octane number can be found
on the information label on the fuel ller ap
(/ page 24).
If the recommended fuel is not available, you may
also temporarily use regular unleaded petrol with
an octane number of at least 91 RON.
This may reduce engine output and increase fuel
consumption.
Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
lling station or a qualied specialist workshop.
Information on fuel quality for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel.
Spark‑ignition engine fuel can contain up to
25% ethanol by volume.
#See the information label in fuel ller ap
for compatible fuels.
Further information about compatible fuels
can be obtained at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Throughout Europe you can also nd the com-
patibility labels on the fuel pump or pump noz-
zle suitable for your vehicle.
Never refuel with any of the following fuels:
RDiesel
RRegular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
Rpetrol with more than 3% methanol by vol-
ume, e.g. M15, M30
RPetrol with metallic additives
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
Technical data 801
F206 0119 02
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
The following compatibility marks for fuel may
apply to your vehicle:
1For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by
volume
2For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by
volume
3For petrol with a maximum of 25% ethanol by
volume (not suitable for plug-in hybrid)
If the available fuel is not suciently low in sul-
phur, it may produce unpleasant odours.
The recommended octane number can be found
on the information label on the fuel ller ap
(/ page 24).
For maximum engine output: refuel only with
super unleaded petrol that has an octane number
of at least 98 RON. Alternatively, you can also
refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol with
an octane number of at least 95 RON.
In exceptional cases, if the recommended fuel is
not available, you may also use regular unleaded
petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON.
This may reduce engine output and increase fuel
consumption.
Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
lling station or a qualied specialist workshop.
Information on additives in petrol (vehicles with
petrol engine)
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
*NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may
lead to malfunctions occurring.
#Only add cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-
name fuels with additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not have
sucient additives. Deposits could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in
consultation with a qualied specialist workshop
(e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre), mix the
fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing
ratios indicated on the tank.
Information on fuel quality for vehicles with die-
sel engines
General notes
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
802 Technical data
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
#Never refuel using petrol in diesel
engines.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
Vehicles with diesel particulate lter:
#Refuel using only sulphur-free diesel fuel.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content of less than
50 ppm.
Vehicles without diesel particulate lter:
#Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sul-
phur content of less than 500 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RPetrol
RMarine diesel
RHeating oil
RPure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable
oil
RParan or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
The following compatibility marks for fuel may
apply to your vehicle:
1For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty
acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
2For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty
acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
3For diesel fuel with a maximum of 20% fatty
acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
4For paranic diesel fuel
According to European standard EN 16942, you
can nd the compatibility marks at the following
locations:
ROn the vehicle, on the information label on the
fuel ller ap (/ page 24)
Technical data 803
F206 0119 02
ROn the fuel dispensers or pump nozzles suita-
ble for your vehicle throughout Europe
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
lling station or a qualied specialist workshop.
Tank content and fuel reserve
Not for plug-in hybrid:
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary
depending on the vehicle equipment.
Total fuel tank capacity
Model
C 180
C 200 d
C 220 d
C 220 d 4MATIC
40.0 litres or
66.0 litres
All other models 50.0 litres or
66.0 litres
Fuel tank reserve
Model
All models 7.0 litres
Plug-in hybrid:
Total fuel tank capacity (plug-in hybrid)
Model
C 300 de
C 300 de 4MATIC
40.0 litres or
50.0 litres
All other models 50.0 litres
Fuel tank reserve (plug-in hybrid)
Model
All models 7.0 litres
Tank content and fuel reserve (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
depending on the vehicle equipment.
Not for Mercedes-AMG E Performance:
Total fuel tank capacity
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC 50.0 litres or
66.0 litres
Fuel tank reserve
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC 7.0 litres
Total fuel tank capacity (Mercedes-AMG E Per-
formance)
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance 60.0 litres
804 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Fuel tank reserve (Mercedes-AMG E Perform-
ance)
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance 10.0 litres
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on AdBlue®
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx
exhaust gas aertreatment of diesel engines.
It may be improper or punishable in some coun-
tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or
one that does not comply with the specications
of this Owner's Manual.
*NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of
AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced
AdBlue®
The function of the NOx exhaust gas aer-
treatment can be impaired by the use of
unsuitable denoxication agents.
#Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
ISO 22241.
#Do not dilute AdBlue® with water.
#Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
*NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to
impurities in AdBlue®
Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:
Rincreased emission values
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
RNOx exhaust gas aertreatment malfunc-
tions
#Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.
AdBlue® residues crystallise aer a period of
time, and contaminate the surfaces with which
they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces
with water as soon as possible.
When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts
of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale
any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only
ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
AdBlue® lling capacity and consumption
Total capacity of AdBlue® tank
Model Total capacity
All models 23.0 litres
AdBlue® consumption
The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1%
and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consump-
tion, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent
upon driving style and operating conditions. For
this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption g-
ures in day-to-day operating conditions may dier
from the average consumption gures calculated.
The frequency at which you will have to top up
Technical data 805
F206 0119 02
AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply
checked at a qualied specialist workshop before
making journeys outside Europe. Before a longer
stay outside Europe, consult a qualied specialist
workshop.
AdBlue® ll level and range
You can have the AdBlue® range and level dis-
played on the driver's display.
%The AdBlue® range shown is highly dependent
upon driving style and operating conditions.
The actual range may therefore dier from the
range currently displayed on the driver's dis-
play.
The information supplied in the Owner's Manual
regarding the reserve quantity at the rst warning
on the driver's display and the minimum top-up
quantity when the AdBlue® tank is empty is also
to be understood as guide values.
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
*NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
#Do not use engine oils or oil lters other
than those which meet the specications
necessary for the prescribed service
intervals.
#Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#Do not use additives.
#Have the engine oil changed aer the
prescribed intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil
changed at a qualied specialist workshop.
Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz.
Engine oil quality and lling quantity
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Engine oil specication (petrol engines)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 229.71, 229.72*
Engine oil specication (diesel engines)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 229.52, 229.61,
229.71, 229.72*
* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel con-
sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each
case; observe possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes).
806 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Vehicles with petrol engines: use only engine oils
of viscosity class SAE 0W‑20.
%If the engine oils listed in the table are not
available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre
of the following engine oils once only.
Vehicles with petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or
ACEA C5
Vehicles with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3
Observe any possible restrictions of the
SAE‑viscosity classes.
Plug-in hybrid:
Engine oil specication (plug-in hybrid with a pet-
rol engine)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 229.51, 229.52*
Engine oil specication (plug-in hybrid with a die-
sel engine)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
C 300 de
C 300 de 4MATIC
229.52*
* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel con-
sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each
case; observe possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes).
Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: use only engine
oils of viscosity class SAE 0W‑40.
%If the engine oils listed in the table are not
available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre
of the following engine oils once only.
Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: ACEA C5
Plug-in hybrid with diesel engine: MB-Freigabe
or MB-Approval 229.51 or ACEA C3
Observe any possible restrictions of the
SAE‑viscosity classes.
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Engine oil lling quantity
Model Quantity
All models 6.0 litres
Plug-in hybrid:
Engine oil lling quantity (plug-in hybrid)
Model Quantity
C 300 de
C 300 de 4MATIC
6.0 litres
All other models 5.3 litres
The specied lling quantity refers to an oil
change with the oil lter.
Engine oil quality and lling quantity (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
Not for Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE:
Technical data 807
F206 0119 02
Engine oil specication
Saloon and Estate MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC 229.71*
Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE:
Engine oil specication (Mercedes-AMG E PER-
FORMANCE)
Saloon and Estate MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance 229.71*
* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel con-
sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each
case; observe possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes).
Use only engine oils of viscosity class SAE 0W‑20.
%If the engine oils listed in the table are not
available, you may top up with a maximum of
1.0 l of engine oil with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or ACEA C5
once only.
Not for Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE:
Engine oil lling quantity
Saloon and Estate Quantity
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC 6.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE:
Engine oil lling quantity
Saloon and Estate Quantity
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance 6.0 litres
The specied lling quantity refers to an oil
change with the oil lter.
Notes on brake uid
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapour pockets forming in the brake sys-
tem
The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low,
vapour pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard.
This impairs the braking eect.
#Have the brake uid renewed at the
specied intervals.
Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Only use a brake uid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
331.0.
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
808 Technical data
F206 0119 02
&WARNING Risk of re‑ and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
#Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze.
#Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the ller opening.
#Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
component parts before starting the
vehicle.
*NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool-
ant
#Only use coolant that has been premixed
with the required antifreeze protection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol-
lowing locations:
RIn the Mercedes-Benz Specication for
Operating Fluids 320.1
-At https://operatinguids.mercedes-
benz.com
RAt a qualied specialist workshop
*NOTE Overheating at high outside temper-
atures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling
system is not suciently protected against
overheating and corrosion at high outside
temperatures.
#Only use coolant approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
#Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specications for Oper-
ating Fluids 320.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cool-
ing system:
RA minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
to about -37°C)
RA maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45°C)
Notes on windscreen washer uid
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 799).
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
*NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due
to unsuitable windscreen washer uid
Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may
damage the plastic surface of the exterior
lighting.
Technical data 809
F206 0119 02
#Only use windscreen washer uids which
are also suitable for use on plastic surfa-
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
*NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windscreen washer uids
#Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win-
terFit with other windscreen washer u-
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other-
wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone-
ously.
Recommended windscreen washer uid:
Rabove freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
Rbelow freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa-
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all
year round.
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specied may vary as a result of the
following factors:
RTyres
RLoad
RCondition of the suspension
RSpecial equipment
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Vehicle dimensions
All models Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length 4751 mm
Vehicle width includ-
ing exterior mirrors 2033 mm
Vehicle width exclud-
ing exterior mirrors 1820 mm
All models Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle height 1438 mm
Wheelbase 2865 mm
Plug-in hybrid:
Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybrid)
All models Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length 4751 mm
Vehicle width includ-
ing exterior mirrors 2033 mm
Vehicle width exclud-
ing exterior mirrors 1820 mm
Vehicle height 1442 mm
Wheelbase 2865 mm
810 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The heights specied may vary as a result of the
following factors:
RTyres
RLoad
RCondition of the suspension
RSpecial equipment
Estate model only
1Height when open
2Headroom
Not for Mercedes-AMG E Performance:
Height when open and headroom
Estate 1 Height
when open
2 Headroom
Mercedes-
AMG C 43
4MATIC
1944 mm 1821 mm
Vehicle height
Model Vehicle height
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC (Saloon) 1450 mm
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC (Estate) 1466 mm
Vehicle dimensions
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length 4791 mm
Vehicle width includ-
ing exterior mirrors 2033 mm
Vehicle width exclud-
ing exterior mirrors 1824 mm
Wheelbase 2865 mm
Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE:
Height when open and headroom (Mercedes-AMG
E PERFORMANCE)
Estate 1 Height
when open
2 Headroom
Mercedes-
AMG C 63 S E
Performance
1952 mm 1829 mm
Technical data 811
F206 0119 02
Vehicle height (Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE)
Model Vehicle height
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance
(Saloon)
1458 mm
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance
(Estate)
1474 mm
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG E PERFORM-
ANCE)
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length 4842 mm
Vehicle width includ-
ing exterior mirrors 2033 mm
Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle width exclud-
ing exterior mirrors 1900 mm
Wheelbase 2875 mm
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci-
ed vehicle data:
RItems of optional equipment increase the unla-
den weight and reduce the payload.
RVehicle-specic weight information can be
found on the vehicle identication plate.
Roof load
Model Maximum roof load
All models 100 kg
Weights and loads (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Please observe the following notes for the speci-
ed vehicle data:
RItems of special equipment increase the unla-
den weight and reduce the payload.
RYou will nd vehicle-specic weight informa-
tion on the vehicle identication plate
(/ page 797).
Roof load
Saloon and Estate Maximum roof load
All models 100 kg
Maximum design speeds
Not for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The maximum design speed can dier from the
stated gures in practice. It depends on the oper-
ating conditions, the optional equipment and the
size of the tyres.
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
812 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Maximum design speed
Model
All models
Maximum design speeds
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
The following values only apply to vehicles with
the AMG Driver's package.
The maximum design speed can dier from the
stated gures in practice. It depends on the oper-
ating conditions, the optional equipment and the
size of the tyres.
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Maximum design speed
Saloon and Estate
All models
High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)
Notes on the power supply for vehicles with high-
voltage battery
In accordance with European standard
EN 17186:2019, vehicle identiers are located on
the vehicle in the following places:
ROn the inside of the socket ap
ROn the charging cable connector
In addition, charging stations in European coun-
tries are equipped with energy supply identiers.
You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations
whose charging station identier corresponds to
the vehicle identier.
For further information on charging the high-volt-
age battery, refer to the "Charging the high-volt-
age battery" section(/ page 305).
1Supply type: AC
Standard: EN 62196-2
Design: type 2
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
2Supply type: DC
Standard: EN 62196-3
Style: FF
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
3Supply type: DC
Technical data 813
F206 0119 02
Standard: EN 62196-3
Style: FF
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
You can nd information on the range in electric-
only mode in the driver display (/ page 435).
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Energy content and charging times (C 350 e)
C 350 e
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy con-
tent 25.4 kWh
Range in all-electric
mode
C 350 e
Charging time – Mode
4
with maximum 55 kW
charging power
Approx. 20 min
Charging time – Mode
3
with 11 kW charging
power
Approx. 2 h
Charging time – mode
2
with 1.8 kW charging
power
Approx. 13 h
Energy content and charging times (all other mod-
els)
All other models
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy con-
tent 25.4 kWh
All other models
Range in all-electric
mode
Charging time – Mode
4
with maximum 55 kW
charging power
Approx. 20 min
Charging time – Mode
3
with 11 kW charging
power
Approx. 2 h
Charging time – mode
2
with 3.7 kW charging
power
Approx. 3 h
Charging time – mode
2
with 1.8 kW charging
power
Approx. 13 h
814 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Charging times – modes 2 and 3 apply to AC
charging from 0 % to 100 % of the usable energy
content. Charging time –Mode 4 applies to DC
charging from 10 % to 80 % of the usable energy
content.
The time taken to charge the battery depends on
the state of charge of the battery, the ambient
temperature and the charging power of the bat-
tery. The charging power, in turn, depends on the
supply voltage, the current and the type of power
supply.
The rated voltage range for your vehicle can be
found on the information label in the socket ap
(/ page 305).
High-voltage battery (Mercedes-AMG E PER-
FORMANCE)
Notes on the power supply for vehicles with high-
voltage battery
In accordance with European standard
EN 17186:2019, vehicle identiers are located on
the vehicle in the following places:
ROn the inside of the socket ap
ROn the charging cable connector
In addition, charging stations in European coun-
tries are equipped with energy supply identiers.
You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations
whose charging station identier corresponds to
the vehicle identier.
For further information on charging the high-volt-
age battery, refer to the "Charging the high-volt-
age battery" section (/ page 305).
1Supply type: AC
Standard: EN 62196-2
Design: type 2
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
You can nd information on the range in electric-
only mode in the driver display (/ page 435).
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Energy content and charging times (Mercedes-
AMG C 63 S E PERFORMANCE)
Saloon and Estate
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy con-
tent 6.1 kW
Range in all-electric
mode
Charging time – mode
2
with 1.8 kW charging
power
Approx. 2 h 45 min
Technical data 815
F206 0119 02
–Mode 2 charging time applies to AC charging
from 25 % to 100 % of the usable energy content.
The time taken to charge the battery depends on
the state of charge of the battery, the ambient
temperature and the charging power of the bat-
tery. The charging power, in turn, depends on the
supply voltage, the current and the type of power
supply.
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be
found on the information label in the socket ap.
Trailer hitch
General notes on the trailer hitch
Modications to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle model. The ret-
rotting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a
trailer load is specied in the vehicle documents.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch
1Fastening points
2Overhang dimension
3Rear axle centre line
Attachment points (not plug-in hybrid)
Attachment points (plug-in hybrid)
816 Technical data
F206 0119 02
The overhang dimension and fastening points are
valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.
Overhang dimension length
Model 2 Overhang dimen-
sion
All models 1203 mm
Trailer load
%The tongue weight is not included in the trailer
load.
The values for the trailer load, braked apply
with a minimum start-o gradeability of 12 %.
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Trailer load, braked
Model
All models 1800 kg
Trailer load, unbraked
Model
All models 750 kg
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Plug-in hybrid:
Trailer load, braked (plug-in hybrid)
Model
C 350 e
All other models 1800 kg
Trailer load, unbraked (plug-in hybrid)
Model
C 350 e
All other models 750 kg
Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
%The drawbar load is not included in the towing
capacity.
The values for the trailer load, braked trailer
apply with a minimum start-o climbing ability
of 12 %.
Towing capacity, braked
Saloon and Estate
All models 1800 kg
Towing capacity, unbraked
Saloon and Estate
All models 750 kg
Technical data 817
F206 0119 02
Maximum trailer hitch tongue weight‑ and load
capacity
*NOTE Damage caused by the trailer com-
ing loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer
may come loose.
#The tongue weight must not be below
50 kg.
#Use a tongue weight that is as close as
possible to the maximum permissible
tongue weight.
*NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack
coming loose
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal
tongue weight and the maximal load capacity
should be observed.
#Do not exceed the permissible load
capacity.
Observe the additional notes on load capacity
(/ page 432).
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Tongue weight
Model Maximum tongue
weight
All models 75 kg
Load capacity
All models Maximum load
When attaching the
bicycle rack to the ball
head
75 kg
When attaching the
bicycle rack to the ball
head and additionally
to the guide pin
100 kg
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Plug-in hybrid:
Tongue weight (plug-in hybrid)
Model Maximum tongue
weight
C 350 e
All other models 75 kg
Load capacity (plug-in hybrid)
All models Maximum load
When attaching the
bicycle rack to the ball
head
75 kg
When attaching the
bicycle rack to the ball
head and additionally
to the guide pin
100 kg
818 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Maximum tongue‑ weight and load capacity
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
%Observe the information:
ROn the maximum tongue weight and load
capacity (/ page 818).
On the maximum tongue weight and load
capacity.
ROn the maximum load capacity in the vehi-
cle's Owner's Manual (in "Function of the
bicycle rack" section) (/ page 432).
Tongue weight
Saloon and Estate Maximum tongue
weight
All models 75 kg
Load capacity
All models Maximum load capa-
city
When attaching the
bicycle rack to the ball
head
75 kg
When attaching the
bicycle rack to the ball
head and additionally
to the guide pin
100 kg
Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Trailer operation axle load
Model Axle load
C 180 1335 kg
C 200 d
C 220 d 4MATIC
1375 kg
Model Axle load
C 220 d 1385 kg
C 300 d
C 300 d 4MATIC
1390 kg
C 300 4MATIC 1355 kg
All other models 1345 kg
Plug-in hybrid:
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Trailer operation axle load (plug-in hybrid)
Model Axle load
C 350 e
All other models 1655 kg
Permissible axle load, rear axle (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Not for Mercedes-AMG E Performance:
Technical data 819
F206 0119 02
Trailer operation axle load
Model Axle load
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC (Saloon) 1310 kg
Mercedes-AMG C 43
4MATIC (Estate) 1365 kg
Mercedes-AMG E PERFORMANCE:
Axle load in trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG E
PERFORMANCE)
Model Axle load
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance
(Saloon)
1570 kg
Mercedes-AMG C 63
S E Performance
(Estate)
1600 kg
820 Technical data
F206 0119 02
Display messages
Introduction
Information about display messages
Display messages appear on the driver display.
Display messages with graphical symbols are sim-
plied in the Owner's Manual and may dier from
the symbols on the driver display. The driver dis-
play shows high-priority display messages in red.
Certain display messages will be accompanied by
a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display mes-
sages and follow the additional notes in the Own-
er's Manual.
For some display messages, symbols will also be
shown:
RÕ Further information
R¨ Hide display message
You can select the respective symbol by swiping
le or right on the le-hand Touch Control. Press
Õ to display further information on the central
display. Press ¨ to hide the display message.
You can hide display messages to be acknowl-
edged by pressing the back button G or with
the le-hand Touch Control. The display messages
will then be stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly
as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The driver display will show these display mes-
sages continuously until the cause of the display
message has been rectied.
Calling up saved display messages
Driver's display:
4Service
The Message memory: XXmessage appears on
the driver's display.
#Scroll through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on the le-hand
Touch Control.
#To exit the display: press the G back but-
ton.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 821
F206 0119 02
Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Restraint system malfunc-
tion Consult workshop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Recognition of a restraint system fault:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
822 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front left malfunction Con-
sult workshop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Recognition of a restraint system fault:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 823
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front right malfunction
Consult workshop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Recognition of a restraint system fault:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
824 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
6
Second row of seats, left
Malfunction Consult work-
shop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Recognition of a restraint system fault:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 825
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
6
Second row of seats, right
Malfunction Consult work-
shop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Recognition of a restraint system fault:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
826 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left window airbag mal-
function Consult workshop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
#Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
6
Right window airbag mal-
function Consult workshop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
#Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Front passenger airbag dis-
abled See Owner's Manual
* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger
seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 827
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
#Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
#Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 109).
#If necessary, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Front passenger airbag ena-
bled See Owner's Manual
*The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:
Reven when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front
passenger seat
Reven when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
828 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
#Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 109).
#If necessary, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Occupant presence
reminder inoperative
* The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 829
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
æ
Do not leave persons or
animals in the vehicle
* The occupant presence reminder suspects that there are persons or animals in the rear of the vehicle.
#Do not leave any persons or animals behind when leaving the vehicle.
Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
®
Replace key
* Have the key replaced.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
®
Change key batteries
* The key battery is discharged.
#Replace the battery (/ page 150).
830 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
®
Key not detected (white dis-
play message)
* The key is currently undetected.
#Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
#Try to start the vehicle.
#If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 263).
#Start the vehicle.
®
Key not detected (red dis-
play message)
* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.
If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle:
RYou can no longer start the vehicle.
RYou cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
#Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.
If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 263).
The key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 148).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 150).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 831
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
®
Key being taught in Please
wait
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.
#Wait until processing is complete.
Place the key in the
marked space See Owner's
Manual
* Key detection is malfunctioning.
#Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
#Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 263).
Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Malfunction See Owner's
Manual
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 61).
832 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Automatic driving lights
inoperative
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Switch on headlamps
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
#Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
:
Switch off lights
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
#Turn the light switch to the à position.
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions
limited
* The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of
the DIGITAL LIGHT system.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Check low beam setting
(left/right-side traffic)
* The type of trac has been selected manually.
#Check the setting and change it manually if necessary (/ page 232).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 833
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Low beam setting (left/
right-side traffic) Manual
adjustment only
* The automatic headlamp conversion for le-hand/right-hand trac has malfunctioned.
#Change the headlamps over manually (/ page 232).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 228).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist available again display message will appear.
#Drive on
#Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 230).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus available again display message will appear.
834 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive on
#Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Hazard warning lamp sys-
tem Malfunction
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Front left parking lights
* The front le parking light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Front right parking lights
* The front right parking light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 835
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Left low beam
* The le low beam is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right low beam
* The right low beam is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Left main beam
* The le high beam is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right main beam
* The right high beam is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
836 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Left daytime running lights
* The le daytime running lights are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right daytime running lights
* The right-hand daytime running lights are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Left cornering light
* The le cornering light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right cornering light
* The right cornering light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 837
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Front left turn signal
* The front le turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Rear left turn signal
* The rear le turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Front right turn signal
* The front right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Rear right turn signal
* The rear right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
838 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Left mirror turn signal
* The turn signal lamp on the le mirror is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right mirror turn signal
* The turn signal lamp on the right mirror is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Left brake lamp
* The le brake light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right brake lamp
* The right brake light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 839
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Third brake lamp
* The third brake light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Left tail light
* The le tail light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Right tail light
* The right tail light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Reversing light
* The reversing light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
840 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Rear fog light
* The rear fog light is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Number plate lamp
* The number plate lamp is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Trailer left turn signal
* The le turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Trailer right turn signal
* The right turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 841
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Trailer brake lamp
* The brake light on the trailer is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Trailer tail light
* A tail light on the trailer is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Inoperative indicator lamp
in driver display. Consult
workshop
* An indicator lamp on the driver's display is defective.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
842 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Climate control
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&
inoperative See Owner's
Man. (stationary heater)
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
#When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to
switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
#If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
%The stationary heater cannot be activated if the outside temperature is above 15°C.
&
Currently unavailable Bat-
tery low
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched itself o.
#Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sucient charge level again.
&
Currently unavailable Refuel
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
#Refuel the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 843
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&
Currently unavailable High-
voltage battery charging
incomplete.
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
#Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.
&
Currently unavailable
Charge high-voltage battery
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
#Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 305).
&
Pre-entry climate control
via key available again
after starting vehicle
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched o.
#Start the vehicle for ten seconds.
Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
844 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&
Pre-entry climate control
via key currently unavaila-
ble. High-voltage battery
low
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
#Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 305).
When the high-voltage battery is suciently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.
Drive system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
u
Towing not permitted See
Owner's Manual
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Have the vehicle transported using only a transporter or trailer (/ page 648).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 845
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ò
Acoustic presence indica-
tor inoperative
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The
vehicle may not be heard by other road users.
#Drive with particular care.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
è
Charger cable connected
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.
#Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
Not possible to unlock
charging cable See Own-
er's Manual
* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehicle socket.
#If the charging cable is under strain, relieve the strain on the charging cable connector by carefully pulling on the
charging cable.
#Press the charging interruption button (/ page 318).
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed aer that:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Vehicle not currently being
charged Charging station
fault
* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
#Start the charging process at a dierent charging station.
or
846 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.
Charging fault Please
change charging method
See Owner's Manual
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
#Wait until the malfunction has passed.
or
#Start the charging process at a dierent charging station.
or
#Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.
AC charging inoperative
Consult workshop
* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
DC charging inoperative
Consult workshop
* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Login failed Change authen-
tication method or charg-
ing station
* Plug-and-Charge is not expected to be available at this charging station.
#Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.
or
#Start the charging process at a dierent charging station.
Only electric drive availa-
ble Power limited
* The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched o. The output of your vehicle is limited because you
are driving in electric mode.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 847
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Refuel immediately.
Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a distance of 50 km.
If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
"Electric" drive program
currently unavailable
* The state of charge of the high-voltage battery or the environmental conditions are not sucient for the Electric drive
program.
#Continue driving and observe the notes on plug-in hybrid operation (/ page 258).
or
#Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 305).
Reduced drive system per-
formance See Owner's
Manual
* The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Preparing drive system… * The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.
848 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Û
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if
possible
*Plug-in hybrid: the high-voltage battery is overheated. There is a risk of re.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
%Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
#Do not continue driving.
#If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.
Û
Malfunction
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Û
Malfunction Visit workshop
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 849
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Û
Have high-voltage system
checked See Owner's Man-
ual
* A function restriction has occurred in the drive system.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without
changing the transmission
position
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
#If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualied specialist workshop and do not change the transmission
position.
#For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without
starting the vehicle again
* It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
#Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualied specialist workshop.
Û
Output and range reduced
See Owner's Manual
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
Output and range will be severely restricted.
#Switch the vehicle o and lock it.
#Aer waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.
If the display message appears again:
850 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive on carefully.
#Fully charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 305).
If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Cannot start vehicle See
Owner's Manual
* It is not possible to start the vehicle.
A malfunction has occurred in the drive system.
#Switch the vehicle o and lock it.
#Aer waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.
#If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Achieva-
ble speed limited Stop soon
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
The maximum vehicle speed is restricted. The drive system will shut o within a few kilometres.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not con-
tinue driving.
#Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 851
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Drive malfunction Achieva-
ble speed severely limited
See Owner's Manual
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
The maximum vehicle speed is restricted.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
d
Malfunction
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
d
Stop Switch off the vehicle
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not con-
tinue driving.
#Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
d
Performance severely limi-
ted
* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temper-
atures.
The output is severely restricted.
Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The dis-
play message will disappear.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.
852 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery mal-
function. No start in
approx. XXX km Consult
workshop (yellow display
message)
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system aer the distance displayed has been covered.
It is still possible to start the combustion engine.
#Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a qualied specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery mal-
function. No start in
approx. XXX km Consult
workshop(red display mes-
sage)
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system aer the distance displayed has been covered.
It is still possible to start the combustion engine.
#Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a qualied specialist
workshop.
High-voltage battery mal-
function. Consult work-
shop without starting the
vehicle again
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
It will no longer be possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched o.
#Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 853
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Please wait Depressurising
fuel tank
*Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel ller ap is opened. This pressure
reduction can take up to 15 minutes.
6
Fuel tank is depressurised
Ready for refuelling
*Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel ller ap opens.
854 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed soware update.
The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.
&WARNING Risk of accident if the driver's display fails
If the driver's display fails or malfunctions, you may not be aware of any functional limitations to safety-critical
systems. This may aect the operating safety of the vehicle.
#Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualied specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualied special-
ist workshop.
If the driver display fails, you may not recognise function restrictions aecting systems relevant to safety or the speed
display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 493).
#Have the vehicle checked by a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Cannot start vehicle See
Owner's Manual
* The vehicle cannot be started.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer
start the vehicle.
#Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 855
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sucient charge output to the jump-start connection
point of the 12 V battery (/ page 60).
The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
*Mercedes-AMG vehicles with plug-in hybrid: the charging cable is inserted.
#Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
*Mercedes-AMG vehicles with plug-in hybrid: the charging cable is not inserted.
#Switch o the vehicle for ve to ten minutes.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Vehicle is ready to drive
Shutdown occurs when
locked or automatically in
a few minutes
* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
#Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.
#If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Vehicle is ready to drive
Shutdown occurs when
locked or automatically in
XX mins
* You are about to leave the vehicle and the engine is running.
The vehicle will switch o automatically in 20 minutes.
#To prevent the vehicle from switching o automatically, acknowledge the message on the central display of the
multimedia system.
* You are in the vehicle. Park position j is engaged and the engine is running.
856 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Aer a certain holding time, this display message will appear on the driver display. The vehicle will then switch o
automatically aer a total of 20 minutes of holding time.
#To prevent the vehicle from switching o automatically, acknowledge the message on the central display of the
multimedia system.
ï
Trailer coupling Check
lock (white display message)
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
#Stop immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the vehicle.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 45).
#When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 857
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
#Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 45).
#Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
#If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 45).
#Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
ï
Trailer coupling Check
lock(red display message)
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
858 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Stop immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the vehicle.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 45).
#When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
#Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 45).
#Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
#If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 45).
#Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 859
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Head-up display currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
*The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:
Rmalfunctions in the power supply
Rsignal interference
#Stop in accordance with the trac conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Head-up display Brightness
currently reduced See Own-
er's Manual
*The brightness of the head-up display is reduced. Possible causes:
RDirt on the windscreen in the camera's eld of vision
RFaulty exterior brightness signals
#Switch on the windscreen wipers.
#Clean the windscreen if necessary.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
860 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ù
Steering malfunction Drive
carefully Visit workshop
* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Ù
Steering malfunction
Increased physical effort
See Owner's Manual
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
#If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#Visit or consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
#If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#Visit or consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Steering malfunction Stop
immediately See Owner's
Manual
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signicantly impaired.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 861
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Ù
Rear axle steering cur-
rently malfunctioning
* The rear-axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Ù
Rear axle steering Malfunc-
tion Visit workshop
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line.
#Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
862 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ù
Rear axle steering Malfunc-
tion Stop immediately
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Electronic rear axle differ-
ential lock inoperative
* The electronic locking dierential has failed.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Electronic rear axle differ-
ential lock currently
unavailable
* The electronic locking dierential is overheated.
#Let the electronic locking dierential cool down by driving defensively.
Active bonnet malfunction
See Owner's Manual
* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative aer having already been triggered.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 863
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ambient light warning sup-
port inoperative
* The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support.
#Lock the vehicle and unlock it again aer a few minutes.
#If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualied specialist workshop.
C* At least one door is open.
#Close all doors.
M* The bonnet is open.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
#Never release the bonnet when driving.
#Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Close the bonnet.
N* The boot lid is open.
864 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#Always switch o the engine before opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
#Close the boot lid.
Function blocked as centre
backrest is folded down
* You cannot electrically unlock the le seat backrest.
#Fold the centre seat backrest back until it engages.
_
Rear left seat backrest not
locked
* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
#Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
_
Rear right seat backrest
not locked
* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
#Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 865
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¥
Top up washer fluid
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
#Top up the washer uid (/ page 29).
Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.
#Restart the vehicle.
If the display message still appears:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
4matic currently unavaila-
ble
* 4MATIC is currently unavailable.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
4matic inoperative * 4MATIC is inoperative.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
866 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To switch off the vehicle,
press the Start/Stop but-
ton for at least 3 seconds
or 3 times
* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
#Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 262).
+
Top up coolant See Own-
er’s Manual
* The coolant level is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage due to insucient coolant
#Avoid long journeys with insucient coolant.
#Add coolant (/ page 619).
#Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
ÿ
Coolant Stop Switch off
the vehicle
* The coolant is too hot.
#Stop immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 867
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
#Wait until the engine has cooled down.
#Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
!
Clean the fuel filter
*Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel lter is dirty or the water in the fuel lter needs to be drained.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
868 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ý
Replace air filter
*Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air lter is dirty and must be replaced.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Reserve fuel * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#Refuel.
Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only select P when vehicle
is stationary
* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
#Depress the brake pedal to stop.
#Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect P
position
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
Apply brake and start vehi-
cle to shift out of P or N
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission posi-
tion.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 869
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Start the vehicle.
#Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to engage D or
R
* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Select transmission position h or k.
Apply brake to engage R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Select transmission position k.
Apply parking brake to
park Visit workshop
* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.
#Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling away
Driver's door open Trans-
mission not in P
* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
The vehicle may roll away.
#Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.
870 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Risk of vehicle rolling away
Apply parking brake to park
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
#Park the vehicle safely.
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Risk of vehicle rolling away
N activated manually No
automatic switch to P
* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running or
the vehicle switched on.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away
When the vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deac-
tivated.
The vehicle may roll away.
#Be ready to brake.
#Do not leave the vehicle unattended.
#Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
#Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
#To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 871
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
N automatically activated
Please engage transmis-
sion position again
* Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.
%When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically.
#Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
#To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.
To shift to N, hold selector
lever longer in position N
* Selector lever not held for long enough in position i.
The change from parking position j to neutral i is possible only if the selector lever is held in i for a longer
period of time.
If the selector lever is not held for long enough, parking position j remains engaged.
#When changing from parking position j to neutral i, hold the selector lever in position i for longer.
Reversing not poss. Con-
sult workshop
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction
Stop
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shis to neutral i automatically.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Engage park position j.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
872 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Consult workshop without
changing the transmission
position
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
#If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualied specialist workshop and do not change the transmission
position.
#For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Stop
Restart vehicle
* The transmission is malfunctioning.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Restart the vehicle.
If the display message still appears:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Stop
Consult workshop
* The transmission is malfunctioning.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Drive overheated. Drive on
with care
* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be tem-
porarily impaired.
#Drive at low engine speed.
#Avoid sporty driving.
#Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 873
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Auxiliary battery malfunc-
tion (white display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.
#Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Auxiliary battery malfunc-
tion (red display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.
#Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Brakes
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
Parking brake See Owner's
Manual
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 335).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
874 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 335).
or
#Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 334).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#Do not continue driving. Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunc-
tioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
To apply:
#Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 335).
To release:
#Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 875
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash:
#Do not continue driving. Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds aer the
electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is mal-
functioning.
If the state of charge is too low:
#Charge the 12 V battery (/ page 60).
To apply:
#Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release:
#If the conditions for automatic release are fullled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 335).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
876 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Do not continue driving. Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
!
Release parking brake
* The red ! indicator lamp is ashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
RA condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fullled (/ page 334).
RYou are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 336).
#Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
#Release the electric parking brake manually.
!
Parking brake Switch on
vehicle to release
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o.
#Switch on the vehicle.
J
Brake immediately
* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
A horn may also sound at regular intervals.
You cannot start the vehicle system.
#Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly until the display message disappears.
You cannot start the vehicle system again.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 877
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J
Malfunction See Owner's
Manual
* The brake force boosting function is impaired.
The hill start assist may be impaired.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
J
Malfunction Stop vehicle
* The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be aected.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
#Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
878 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J
Check brake fluid level
* There is insucient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
If the brake uid level is too low, the braking eect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Do not top up the brake uid.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Do not top up the brake uid.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Check brake pads See
Owner's Manual
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 879
F206 0119 02
Driving and driving safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
÷
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual (ABS and
ESP®)
*ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
#Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
880 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual (ABS and ESP®)
*ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
÷
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual (ESP®)
*ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 881
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
#Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual (ESP®)
*ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP® checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
882 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T
!
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual (EBD, ABS and
ESP®)
*EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
ë
Off
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fullled.
#Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 347).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 883
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break!
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 349).
#If necessary, take a break.
h
- - - km/h
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fullled.
#Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 352).
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Cruise control and Limiter
inoperative
* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 350).
884 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
È
- - - km/h
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be
available again.
È
passive
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive
mode (/ page 351).
Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Speed Limit Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.
#Drive on
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inopera-
tive
* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 885
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Speed limit (winter tyres)
XXX km/h
* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
ð
Maximum speed exceeded
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).
#Drive more slowly.
Traffic Sign Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
*Trac Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Continue driving in compliance with the trac regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inopera-
tive
*Trac Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
#Continue driving in compliance with the trac regulations.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
886 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80
km/h
* DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be aected.
#Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80
km/h
*Plug-in hybrid: The rear axle level control is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be aected.
#Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
RACE START not possible
See Owner's Manual
*Possible causes:
RThe activation conditions have not been fullled (/ page 392).
RACE START cancelled *Possible causes:
Ryou released the accelerator pedal during RACE START.
Ryou depressed the brake pedal during RACE START.
#You can try RACE START again at the next start.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 887
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DRIFT MODE currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
*Possible causes:
RThe activation conditions have not been fullled (/ page 394).
Driver assistance systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ç
- - - km/h
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fullled.
#Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 357).
ç
suspended
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to
passive mode (/ page 354).
ç
Off
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
has deactivated automatically (/ page 357).
888 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Distance Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 354).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on carefully.
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inop-
erative
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
#Drive on carefully.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist
available again
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
#Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 357).
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions currently limited See
Owner's Manual
*For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
ally available:
RActive Brake Assist with cross-trac function
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 889
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
REvasive Steering Assist
RPRE‑SAFE® PLUS
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 370).
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
#Drive on carefully.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions limited See Owner's
Manual
*For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
ally available:
RActive Brake Assist with cross-trac function
REvasive Steering Assist
RPRE‑SAFE® PLUS
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially availa-
ble.
#Drive on carefully.
890 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 363).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
#Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inop-
erative
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Ø* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 363).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
#Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the trac conditions.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 891
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Steering Assist cur-
rently unavailable due to
multiple emergency stops
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
#Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Ø
Beginning emergency stop
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 363).
#Put your hands on the steering wheel.
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 366).
Active Emergency Stop
Assist currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual
* Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 366).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
*Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multi-
ple emergency stops.
#Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the trac conditions.
892 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Active Emergency Stop Assist is available once more.
Active Emergency Stop
Assist inoperative
* Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Lane Change Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 367).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Lane Change Assist
inoperative
* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 893
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Stop-and-Go Assist
currently unavailable see
Owner's Manual
* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are
still available.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 354).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
Active Stop-and-Go Assist
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still
available.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 384).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Drive on
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
894 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind Spot Assist inopera-
tive
* Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist unavaila-
ble when towing a trailer
See Owner's Manual
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 384).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Drive on
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist
inoperative
* Active Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 895
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist
unavailable when towing a
trailer See Owner's Manual
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 388).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist
inoperative
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
functions restricted See
Owner's Manual
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
896 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ø
Beginning emergency stop
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Lane Keeping Assist will initiate an emergency stop
(/ page 388).
#Put your hands on the steering wheel.
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 366).
¸
ð
ç
Ó
temporarily unavailable
Sensors dirty
*Front and corner radar sensors (hereaer "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:
RThe sensors are dirty
RHeavy rain or snow
RExtended country driving without other trac, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-
ing and drive system will continue to function normally.
#Drive on carefully.
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Clean all sensor covers from the outside (/ page 339).
#Restart the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 897
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ê
ð
Ó
¬
ç
Ô
Camera view restricted
See Owner's Manual
*The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:
RDirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera
RHeavy rain, snow or fog
RMist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside or outside of the
windscreen during cold times of year in particular.
%This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restric-
tion is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-
ing and drive system will continue to function normally.
#Drive on carefully.
#To remove mist from the outside, wipe once (/ page 234).
#To remove mist from the inside, press ¬ (/ page 247).
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o.
If the display message does not disappear even aer a longer driving time of about 15 minutes:
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 339).
#Restart the vehicle.
898 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ð
¸
±
Restricted during trailer
operation
* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.
#Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See
Owner's Manual
*The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE impulse side
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative aer having already been triggered.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE PLUS inopera-
tive See Owner's Manual
*The PRE‑SAFE® system is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 899
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Parking assistance systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PARKTRONIC inoperative
See Owner's Manual
* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC and manoeu-
vring assistant unavailable
at rear when towing a
trailer
* If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is
correctly established, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not available at the rear when reversing. The rear manoeuvring
assistant is also unavailable in this situation.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative
See Owner's Manual
* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
900 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Limited availability of
Active Parking Assist
manoeuvring assistant See
Owner's Manual
* Active Parking Assist’s manoeuvring assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
#Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 627).
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G
Inoperative
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction-
ing.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 901
F206 0119 02
Battery
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
12 V on-board electrical
system Visit workshop
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's
Manual
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.
*NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
902 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
Start the vehicle to charge
the 12 V battery
* The vehicle is o and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
#Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.
#Drive for 30–60 mins.
or
#Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 60).
#Plug-in hybrid: Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 305).
#
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle
on to charge the 12 V bat-
tery
* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Leave the vehicle running
#If the display message disappears: drive on.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Û
Stop vehicle See Owner's
Manual
* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 903
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Û
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if
possible
* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of re.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
%Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
#Do not continue driving.
#If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.
Û
48 V battery See Owner's
Manual
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.
Comfort functions, such as the air conditioning system, may be available only to a limited extent.
It is possible to drive on.
#If the display message remains active permanently, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Ý
Please wait 48 V battery
charging
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a
suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.
The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. Aer a few minutes, the Possible to
start the vehicle again display message will be shown on the driver's display.
#Start the vehicle.
904 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery aer disconnecting the charger from
the vehicle.
If the Possible to start the vehicle again display message does not appear aer a few minutes:
#Try to start the vehicle.
#If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Possible to start the vehi-
cle again
* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.
#Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.
Tyre pressure monitor
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre press. monitor cur-
rently unavailable
* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are
being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectied.
#Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoper-
ative
* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 905
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insucient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
#Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitor inop-
erative No tyre pressure
sensors
* The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
#Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
é
Wheel sensor(s) missing
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the aected
tyre.
#Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualied specialist workshop.
é
Check tyre(s)
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signicantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insucient tyre pressure
RThe tyres can burst.
906 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure (/ page 659) and the tyres.
é
Rectify tyre pressure
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the dierence in tyre pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
#Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (/ page 662).
é
Warning tyre malfunction
* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre
RThe tyres can overheat and be damaged.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 907
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Do not drive with a at tyre.
#Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible
speed with a at MOExtended tyre.
#Observe the notes on at tyres.
Notes on at tyres (/ page 62).
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the tyres.
é
Tyre(s) overheated
* At least one tyre is overheating. The aected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
#Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
#Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
é
Reduce speed
* At least one tyre is overheating. The aected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
908 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
#Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
#Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
Exhaust gas aertreatment
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ø
Refill AdBlue See Owner’s
Manual
*The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range.
#Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 27).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 909
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ø
Top up AdBlue Emergency
op. in XXX km See Owner's
Manual
*The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction aer the remaining distance displayed has been covered.
#Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 27).
Ø
Top up AdBlue XX,X l
Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in
XXX km
*The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction from the speed displayed.
Aer the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.
#Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® indicated (/ page 27).
Ø
Top up XX,X l AdBlue
Switch vehicle on, wait 60
sec. or engine start not
poss
*The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.
#Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® indicated (/ page 27).
#Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
#Start the vehicle.
910 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¯
AdBlue system fault See
Owner's Manual
*The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system malfunction
Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual
*The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been
covered.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system malfunction
Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in
XXX km
*Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. Aer the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be
possible to start the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 911
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¯
AdBlue system fault Engine
start not possible
*The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Ø
Top up AdBlue In XXX km
Electric only. See Owner's
Manual
*Plug-in hybrid:
The low AdBlue® level will result in the combustion engine being switched o aer the displayed remaining distance
has been driven.
From this point on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-
voltage battery.
#Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 27).
Ø
Top up XX,X l AdBlue Only
"Electric" available See
Owner's Manual
*Plug-in hybrid:
The AdBlue® tank is empty. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the
high-voltage battery.
#Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (/ page 27).
#Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
#Start the vehicle.
912 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¯
AdBlue system fault In XXX
km Electric only. See Own-
er's Manual
*Plug-in hybrid:
The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. The combustion engine will switch o aer the remaining distance displayed.
From this point on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-
voltage battery.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system fault Only
"Electric" drive program
available
*Plug-in hybrid:
The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of
charge of the high-voltage battery.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 913
F206 0119 02
Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
5
Add 1 litre engine oil when
next refuelling
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insucient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insucient engine oil.
#When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 618).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 806).
5
Engine oil level Reduce oil
level
* The engine oil level is too high.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
5
Engine oil level Stop
Switch off the vehicle
* The engine oil level is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insucient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insucient engine oil.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
914 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 618).
#Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 806).
5
Engine oil pressure Stop
Switch off the vehicle
* The oil pressure is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insucient oil pressure
#Avoid driving with insucient oil pressure.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
5
Engine oil level cannot be
measured
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 915
F206 0119 02
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
5
Engine oil Quality loss Oil
change required
*Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine oil quality is no longer sucient.
#Visit a qualied specialist workshop and have the oil changed.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn-
ing lamps may briey light up or ash. This behav-
iour is non-critical. These indicator and warning
lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up
or ash aer the vehicle has been started or dur-
ing a journey.
The indicator and warning lamps are located in
the highlighted display sections.
Driver display
Indicator and warning lamps
Occupant safety
6Restraint system (/ page 918)
üSeat belt (/ page 918)
pOccupant presence reminder (white)
(/ page 918)
pOccupant presence reminder (yellow)
(/ page 918)
Drive system
_Reduced power (/ page 920)
ÚSystem error (/ page 920)
#Electrical fault (/ page 920)
vehicle
ïTrailer hitch (/ page 921)
ÙPower steering (yellow) (/ page 921)
916 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
ÙPower steering (red) (/ page 921)
ÙRear-axle steering (yellow) (/ page 921)
ÙRear-axle steering (red) (/ page 921)
Engine
ÿCoolant temperature (/ page 923)
;Engine diagnostics (/ page 923)
pVehicles with petrol engine: engine operat-
ing temperature (/ page 923)
pEngine operating temperature (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles) (/ page 923)
%Vehicles with diesel engine: preglow
#Electrical fault (/ page 923)
8Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location
indicator (/ page 923)
Brakes
!Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 927)
!Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 927)
JBrakes (yellow) (/ page 927)
JBrakes (red) (/ page 927)
Driving and driving safety systems
!ABS (/ page 929)
÷ESP® (/ page 929)
åESP® OFF (/ page 929)
åESP® OFF (/ page 929)
¤ESP® OFF (/ page 929)
ÆESP® SPORT (/ page 929)
âDRIFT MODE (/ page 929)
ÛATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 929)
êTrac Sign Assist (/ page 929)
êSpeed Limit Assist (/ page 929)
LDistance warning (/ page 929)
ÓActive Brake Assist (/ page 929)
êActive Brake Assist (/ page 929)
ÆActive Brake Assist (/ page 929)
äRear-axle level control(/ page 929)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
HMercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 935)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
hTyre pressure monitoring system
(/ page 936)
Exterior lighting
TSide lights (/ page 220)
LLow beam (/ page 220)
KHigh beam (/ page 222)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 222)
RRear fog light (/ page 220)
Symbols on the central display
ÉDrive Away Assist (/ page 416)
LRear cross trac warning (/ page 417)
ºManoeuvring brake function (/ page 418)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 917
F206 0119 02
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 107).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
#Drive on carefully.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
918 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
ü
Seat belt warning lamp
ashes
* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
#Fasten your seat belt (/ page 107).
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
#Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
ü
Seat belt warning lamp
lights up
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.
In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.
The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#Fasten your seat belt (/ page 107).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
p
Occupant presence
reminder warning lamp
(white)
* The white occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.
The occupant presence reminder is deactivated.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 919
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
p
Occupant presence
reminder warning lamp (yel-
low)
* The yellow occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.
The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Drive system
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
_
Reduced-power warning
lamp
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Ú
System error warning lamp
*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.
There is a malfunction in the drive system.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
920 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault with the electrics.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ï
Trailer hitch warning lamp
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 921
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ù
Power steering warning
lamp (yellow)
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Ù
Power steering warning
lamp (red)
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Ù
Rear axle steering warning
lamp (yellow)
* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
922 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (red)
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
RThe temperature sensor is malfunctioning
RThe coolant level is too low
RThe air supply to the radiator is obstructed
RThe radiator fan is faulty
RThe engine coolant pump is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 923
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Stop immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:
#Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
#Check the coolant level (/ page 619).
#Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (yel-
low)
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
RThe temperature sensor is malfunctioning
RThe charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
RThe radiator shutters are blocked or defective
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop.
924 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
Engine diagnostics warning
lamp
* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
#Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualied specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.
#Start the engine three to four times aer refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
be checked.
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
p
Engine operating tempera-
ture warning lamp
*The blue warning lamp for engine operating temperature will remain lit until the engine operating temperature has been
reached.
The engine output and engine torque will remain reduced until then.
#Take this into consideration in your driving style.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 925
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
p
Engine operating tempera-
ture warning lamp
*Vehicles with a petrol engine: aer a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on.
Engine output and engine torque are reduced.
#Take this into consideration in your driving style.
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
lights up
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#Refuel.
926 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
Electric parking brake indi-
cator lamp (red)
!
Electric parking brake indi-
cator lamp (yellow)
*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit.
The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
J
Brakes warning lamp (yel-
low)
* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning.
#Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 927
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
J
Brakes warning lamp (red)
* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
Possible causes:
RThe brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be aected.
RThere is insucient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
#Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
If the brake uid level is too low, the braking eect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
928 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Do not top up the brake uid.
Driving and driving safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
ABS warning lamp
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
&WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 929
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
÷
ESP® warning lamp ashes
*The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion.
One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 341).
One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 342).
#Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
*The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP® checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
930 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
å
ESP® OFF warning lamp
*The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
&WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
#Drive on carefully.
#Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
#Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 341).
å
¤
*The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
&WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 931
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive on carefully.
#Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
#Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 342).
å
Æ
*ESP® SPORT is activated while the vehicle is running.
When ESP® SPORT is activated, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
#Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.
#Observe the notes on activating ESP® SPORT(/ page 342).
Û
ATTENTION ASSIST warning
lamp
* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.
ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
932 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ê
Trac Sign Assist warning
lamp
* The Trac Sign Assist warning lamp is lit.
Trac Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
ê
Speed Limit Assist warning
lamp
* The Speed Limit Assist warning lamp is lit.
Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
L
Warning lamp for distance
warning
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
#Be prepared to brake immediately.
#Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 370).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 933
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ó
Active Brake Assist warning
lamp
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
ê
Active Brake Assist warning
lamp
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.
This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.
#Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 370).
Æ
Active Brake Assist warning
lamp
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Aer you drive o, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process.
Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes.
#Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 370).
â
DRIFT MODE warning lamp
* DRIFT MODE is activated while the engine is running.
&WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use DRIFT MODE, ESP® is not available.
934 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
There is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
#Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal roads.
#DRIFT MODE may only be activated and used on closed race circuits, not on public roads.
#Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
#Observe the notes on activating DRIFT MODE (/ page 393).
ä
Suspension warning lamp
(yellow)
*Plug-in hybrid: The yellow rear axle level control warning lamp is on.
There is a fault with the rear axle level control.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
H
Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system warning lamp
*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 935
F206 0119 02
Tyre pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp ashes
*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and
then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insucient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
#Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
h
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up
*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insucient tyre pressure
RThe tyres can burst.
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
936 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
F206 0119 02
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 937
F206 0119 02
1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC........................................................ 298
48 V on-board electrical system
Displays in the driver's display................ 451
Operating safety...................................... 88
A
A/C function
Activating/deactivating (operating
unit)....................................................... 245
Switching on/o (MBUX)....................... 246
ABS............................................................. 341
Acceleration
Kickdown............................................... 297
Optimised acceleration.......................... 267
Accelerator pedal......................................... 280
Access data
Setting (Bluetooth®)............................... 590
Accident
ERA-GLONASS test mode...................... 586
Accident prevention..................................... 416
Accident, emergency call....................... 69, 582
Activating/deactivating the acoustic lock-
ing verication signal.................................... 149
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 388
Brake application................................... 387
Exit warning........................................... 384
Function................................................ 384
Trailer operation..................................... 387
Active bonnet............................................... 614
Active Brake Assist
Function................................................ 370
Setting................................................... 375
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Activate/deactivate variable limiter........ 357
Activating/deactivating.......................... 357
Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 366
Active Lane Change Assist..................... 367
Active Speed Limit Assist....................... 360
Calling up a speed................................. 357
Function................................................ 354
Increases/decreases the speed............. 357
Route-based speed adaptation............... 361
Storing a speed...................................... 357
Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... 366
Active headlamps......................................... 223
Active Lane Change Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 369
Function................................................ 367
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 390
Function................................................ 388
Setting the sensitivity............................. 391
Trailer operation..................................... 388
Active light function..................................... 223
Active Parking Assist
Automatic braking function.................... 416
Cross trac warning.............................. 417
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Exiting a parking space.......................... 414
Function................................................ 410
Manoeuvering brake function................. 418
Memory Parking Assist.......................... 420
Parking.................................................. 412
Pausing.................................................. 416
Active Service System PLUS......................... 612
Active Speed Limit Assist............................. 360
Active Steering Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 365
938 Index
F206 0119 02
Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 366
Active Lane Change Assist..................... 367
Function................................................ 363
Active Stop-and-Go Assist............................ 363
Adaptive brake lights.................................... 349
Adaptive cruise control................................. 361
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 229
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Switching on/o.................................... 231
AdBlue®
Additives................................................ 805
Capacity................................................ 805
Fill level................................................. 443
Notes..................................................... 303
Purity..................................................... 805
Range.................................................... 443
Topping up....................................... 27, 303
Additional door lock..................................... 152
Additives
AdBlue®................................... 27, 303, 805
Engine oil............................................... 806
Fuel....................................................... 802
Adjusting bass, mid-range and treble set-
tings
Advanced sound system......................... 610
Adjusting mid-range, treble and bass set-
tings
Advanced sound system......................... 610
Adjusting the balance/fader
Advanced sound system......................... 611
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 609
Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 609
Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 609
Adjusting the sound focus
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 610
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set-
tings
Advanced sound system......................... 610
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 609
Advanced sound system
Adjusting the balance/fader.................. 611
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings.................................................. 610
Calling up the sound menu..................... 610
Information............................................ 610
Switching loudness normalisation
on/o................................................... 611
Aer-sales service........................................ 612
Air conditioning menu
Air distribution....................................... 247
Calling up.............................................. 245
Climate control...................................... 246
Fragrance system.................................. 249
Front air conditioning............................. 245
Ionisation............................................... 248
Rear compartment climate control......... 247
Stationary heater/ventilation................. 256
Air distribution
Overview................................................ 246
Setting................................... 241, 242, 247
Air freshener system.................................... 249
Index 939
F206 0119 02
Air inlet........................................................ 622
Air pressure................................................. 659
Air vents
Setting................................................... 257
Air/water duct............................................. 622
Airbag
Inating................................................. 115
Overview................................................ 121
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps.... 109
Warning lamp......................................... 107
Airow
Setting........................................... 241, 242
Alarm system............................................... 171
All-wheel drive.............................................. 298
Alternative route.................................. 515, 523
Ambient lighting........................................... 233
AMG ceramic high-performance compo-
site brake system......................................... 271
AMG DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive programs........................... 288
AMG Performance
Information.............................................. 22
AMG Real Performance Sound..................... 280
AMG steering wheel buttons
Setting................................................... 282
AMG steering-wheel buttons
Function................................................ 281
AMG TRACK PACE
Boost strategy........................................ 395
Conguring............................................ 498
Drag Race.............................................. 497
Function................................................ 494
Telemetry display................................... 498
Track Race............................................. 495
Android Auto
Connecting a mobile phone (wired)........ 569
Connecting a mobile phone (wireless).... 570
Ending................................................... 571
Information............................................ 569
Sound settings....................................... 571
Transferred vehicle data......................... 571
Android smartphone.................................... 569
Animals........................................................ 116
Anti-lock braking system.............................. 341
Anti-the alarm system................................ 171
Anti-the protection
Additional door lock............................... 152
Immobiliser............................................ 171
Anticipatory operating-mode strategy,
Route-based................................................. 280
Apple CarPlay®, Smartphone
Connecting an iPhone® (cable)............... 567
Connecting an iPhone® (wireless).......... 568
Ending................................................... 568
Notes..................................................... 567
Overview................................................ 566
Sound settings....................................... 568
Transferred vehicle data......................... 571
Apps, Mercedes me
Mercedes me calls................................. 572
Mercedes me connect........................... 576
Selecting (MBUX multimedia system)..... 579
Ashtray
Using..................................................... 214
Assembly licence plate, front.......................... 91
Assistance system....................................... 340
Assistant display
Menu (driver display).............................. 444
940 Index
F206 0119 02
ASSYST PLUS
Battery disconnection periods................ 613
Service interval display.......................... 612
Service requirements............................. 612
ATA Deactivating the alarm........................... 172
Function................................................ 171
Interior protection.................................. 173
Interior protection function..................... 173
Tow-away protection.............................. 172
Tow-away protection function................. 172
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function................................................ 349
Setting................................................... 350
Attention assistant....................................... 349
Augmented reality
MBUX route guidance............................ 537
Authorisations
Setting................................................... 487
Authorised workshop...................................... 97
Automatic car wash................................ 34, 622
Automatic car wash mode............................ 624
Automatic climate control............................ 246
Automatic co-driver airbag shuto
Function................................................ 111
Automatic distance control........................... 354
Automatic driving lights................................ 221
Automatic emergency call............................ 583
Automatic engine start/stop........................ 272
Automatic front passenger airbag shuto
Information (child restraint system on
the front passenger seat)....................... 127
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps.... 109
Automatic measures aer an accident.......... 114
Automatic mirror folding function................. 240
Automatic seat adjustment........................... 186
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 289
Drive programs.............................. 282, 284
DYNAMIC SELECT button............... 282, 284
Engages neutral..................................... 291
Engaging drive position.......................... 294
Engaging reverse gear............................ 291
Gear shi............................................... 289
Kickdown............................................... 297
Manual shiing.............................. 294, 295
Oil temperature (driver's display).... 445, 446
Selecting park position........................... 292
Steering wheel gearshi paddles.... 294, 295
Transmission position display................. 289
Transmission positions........................... 289
Autonomous braking.................................... 370
Axle load
Trailer operation..................................... 819
Trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)................................................ 819
B
Bad weather light......................................... 225
Bag hook..................................................... 206
Ball neck
Folding out/in.................................. 45, 427
Trailer coupling...................................... 429
BAS............................................................. 341
Basic information......................................... 104
Battery
High-voltage battery............................... 643
Battery (12 V battery)
Charging.......................................... 60, 645
Index 941
F206 0119 02
Notes..................................................... 640
Notes (starting assistance and charg-
ing)........................................................ 644
Replacing............................................... 647
Starting assistance.......................... 60, 645
Battery (48 V)
Notes..................................................... 642
Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical
system)................................................ 813, 815
Battery (key)................................................ 150
Battery (starter battery)
Charging via Remote Online................... 265
Battery operation......................................... 258
BeltAdjusting the height............................... 107
Fastening............................................... 107
Notes on wearing correctly.................... 106
Releasing............................................... 120
Bicycle rack
Load capacity........................................ 818
Load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 819
Trailer operation..................................... 432
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 388
Function................................................ 384
BlueTec
AdBlue®................................................. 303
Bluetooth®
Connecting a mobile phone.............. 12, 553
Information............................................ 487
Setting up an Internet connection.......... 590
Switching on/o.................................... 488
Bonnet
Active bonnet......................................... 614
Opening/closing.................................... 615
Boost pressure, current (driver's display)
............................................................ 445, 446
Boost strategy
activating/deactivating (steering
wheel button)......................................... 395
Function................................................ 395
Boot oor
Opening........................................... 45, 207
Boot lid
Closing.................................................. 158
HANDS-FREE ACCESS........................... 160
Limiter................................................... 162
Opening................................................. 157
Power closing function........................... 158
Switching the separate locking fea-
ture on/o............................................ 162
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist................................. 370
Brake Assist System............................... 341
Brake Assist System..................................... 341
Brake disks.................................................. 266
Brake uid.................................................... 808
Brake force distribution................................ 347
Brake lamps
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 349
Brake pads................................................... 266
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 341
Active Brake Assist................................. 370
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 349
AMG ceramic high-performance com-
posite brake system............................... 271
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 341
942 Index
F206 0119 02
Driving tips............................................ 268
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-
tion)....................................................... 347
Electric parking brake............................ 333
Handbrake............................................. 333
HOLD function....................................... 347
Limited braking eect (salt-treated
roads).................................................... 268
New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 266
Parking brake......................................... 333
Post-collision brake................................ 114
Recuperation......................................... 276
Running-in notes.................................... 266
Braking assistance
Active Brake Assist................................. 370
Brake Assist System............................... 341
Breakdown
Flat tyre........................................... 62, 634
Overview of aids...................................... 82
Tow-starting........................................... 653
Towing methods............................... 64, 650
Transporting the vehicle......................... 651
Wheel change........................................ 667
Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
Adjusting the balance/fader.................. 609
Adjusting the sound focus...................... 610
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings.................................................. 609
Automatic loudness normalisation.......... 609
Calling up the sound menu..................... 609
Information............................................ 609
Selecting the sound prole..................... 610
C
Call list
Deleting................................................. 561
Making a call......................................... 560
Overview................................................ 560
Selecting options................................... 561
Calling the customer centre for
Mercedes-Benz............................................ 573
Calling up a web page.................................. 592
Calling up the sound menu
Advanced sound system......................... 610
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 609
Calls, Telephone operation
Accepting.............................................. 557
Activating functions during a call............ 557
Calls with several participants................ 557
Declining............................................... 557
Ending a call.......................................... 557
Incoming call during an existing call....... 558
Making.................................................. 557
Mercedes me......................................... 572
Telephone.............................................. 557
Using overhead control panel................. 572
Using the international dialling code....... 558
Camera
360° camera......................................... 400
Activating using GPS (reversing cam-
era)........................................................ 405
Button................................................... 405
Care...................................................... 627
Cleaning................................................ 627
Function................................................ 400
Information............................................ 339
Manage activation points....................... 405
Opening the camera cover (reversing
camera)................................................. 406
Reversing camera.................................. 396
Select view............................................ 405
Car key........................................................ 148
Index 943
F206 0119 02
Car wash
Automatic car wash.......................... 34, 622
Car wash mode...................................... 623
High-pressure cleaner............................ 624
Washing by hand.................................... 625
Car-to-X-Communication
Display on map...................................... 536
Overview................................................ 536
Sending hazard warnings....................... 537
Care
Air/water duct....................................... 622
Automatic car wash.......................... 34, 622
Camera.................................................. 627
Car parts............................................... 627
Car wash mode...................................... 623
Decorative foil........................................ 626
Display................................................... 629
Exterior lighting...................................... 627
Genuine wood/trim elements................ 629
Head-up display..................................... 629
High-pressure cleaner............................ 624
Paint...................................................... 625
Plastic trim............................................ 629
Roof lining............................................. 629
Seat belt................................................ 629
Steering wheel....................................... 629
Trailer hitch............................................ 627
Vehicle interior....................................... 629
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage
battery................................................... 627
Washing by hand.................................... 625
Wheels/rims.......................................... 627
Care of the plastic trim................................. 629
Care of the roof lining.................................. 629
Care of the steering wheel............................ 629
Caring for rims............................................. 627
Central display
Operating.............................................. 471
Central locking system
Button................................................... 153
Key........................................................ 149
Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest)
Inating................................................. 115
Information............................................ 121
Charge level display..................................... 325
Charge level/charge display......................... 325
Charging
12 V battery..................................... 60, 645
At time of departure............................... 499
Charge level display............................... 325
Charging cable control panel.................. 312
Charging station, mode 3....................... 310
Conguring weekly prole...................... 499
Ending the charging process (alternat-
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 318
Ending the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 323
Flexible charging system Pro.................. 312
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 314
Mains socket, mode 2............................ 309
Maximum charging current (mains
socket).................................................. 312
Notes on charging the high-voltage
battery................................................... 305
Notes on the high-voltage battery........... 643
Rapid charging station, mode 4.............. 311
Recuperation......................................... 276
Starting the charging process (alter-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 315
Starting the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 321
Stowing the charging cable.................... 308
USB port.................................. 48, 198, 216
Wallbox, mode 3.................................... 310
944 Index
F206 0119 02
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone........ 216
Charging cable
Control panel......................................... 312
Flexible charging system Pro.................. 312
Stowing................................................. 308
Charging process
Paying.................................................... 516
Charging settings......................................... 499
Charging system.......................................... 312
Checking the coolant level........................... 619
Checking tyre
pressure................................................ 661
Child safety lock
Rear door............................................... 144
Side window (rear)................................. 145
Child seat
Adjusting the vehicle seat...................... 139
Approval categories............................... 129
Basic instructions.................................. 123
Brief overview of most important
points.................................................... 122
Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size.............................. 140
Front passenger seat............................. 127
Overview of warning stickers.................. 126
Rearward-facing..................................... 129
Recommendations for child restraint
systems................................................. 131
Risks/dangers....................................... 124
Seats suitable for belt-secured child
restraint systems................................... 136
Seats suitable for i‑Size child restraint
systems................................................. 136
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child
restraint systems................................... 134
Securing to the front passenger seat
with the seat belt................................... 143
Securing to the rear seat with the
seatbelt................................................. 143
Top Tether.............................................. 142
Without automatic co-driver airbag sh
uto....................................................... 129
Children
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle.............. 124
Basic instructions.................................. 123
Chock............................................ 63, 666, 667
City lighting.................................................. 225
Classic menu display content
Selecting....................................... 438, 441
Clean varnish............................................... 625
Cleaning
Air/water duct....................................... 622
Automatic car wash.......................... 34, 622
Camera.................................................. 627
Car parts............................................... 627
Car wash mode...................................... 623
Decorative foil........................................ 626
Genuine wood/trim elements................ 629
High-pressure cleaner............................ 624
Paint...................................................... 625
Sensors................................................. 627
Vehicle interior....................................... 629
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage
battery................................................... 627
Washing by hand.................................... 625
Cleaning carpet............................................ 629
Cleaning the seat cover................................ 629
Climate control, Air conditioning system
Activating/deactivating.......................... 244
Activating/deactivating (rear operat-
ing unit)................................................. 244
Index 945
F206 0119 02
Activating/deactivating the A/C func-
tion (control panel)................................. 245
Air conditioning menu............................ 245
Air distribution............................... 241, 242
Air distribution settings.......................... 246
Air vents (front)...................................... 257
Air vents (rear)....................................... 257
Airow........................................... 241, 242
Automatic control.................................. 246
Automatically controlling (rear operat-
ing unit)................................................. 246
Closing/opening the windows (air-
recirculation button)................................. 66
Defrosting the windscreen..................... 245
Demisting the windscreen.............. 241, 242
Demisting windows................................ 247
Fine particle status display..................... 245
Fragrance system.................................. 249
Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 254
Inserting/removing the acon (fra-
grance system)...................................... 249
Ionisation............................................... 248
Notes..................................................... 241
Operating unit................................ 241, 242
Pre-entry climate control for depar-
ture time................................................ 252
Pre-entry climate control when the
vehicle is unlocked................................. 250
Rear operating unit................................ 243
Rear window heater....................... 241, 242
Resetting the climate control settings....... 67
Residual heat......................................... 248
Setting................................................... 245
Stationary heater/ventilation................. 255
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/o................................................... 248
Switching the A/C function on/o
(MBUX).................................................. 246
Synchronisation function........................ 247
Temperature.................................. 241, 242
Ventilation with comfort opening............ 164
Climate control settings
Resetting................................................. 67
Co-driver airbag shuto, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF...................................................... 111
COC papers, Certicate of conformity.......... 676
Cockpit
Dashboard......................................... 72, 74
Coee cup symbol....................................... 349
Collision detection (parked vehicle)
Setting........................................... 336, 337
Combination switch
Lights.................................................... 222
Windscreen wipers................................. 234
Comfort
Information.............................................. 21
Communication module
Disconnecting automatically from the
Internet.................................................. 589
Setting up an Internet connection.......... 589
Commuter route................................... 515, 524
Compass..................................................... 542
Components subject to radio regulations
Declaration of conformity......................... 92
Connection status
Displaying.............................................. 592
Overview................................................ 592
Contacts, Address book, Phone book
Calling up.............................................. 559
Deleting................................................. 560
Importing............................................... 559
Importing (overview).............................. 559
946 Index
F206 0119 02
Information............................................ 558
Making a call......................................... 560
Name format......................................... 559
Note about suggestions.......................... 556
Options.................................................. 560
Selecting options for suggestions........... 556
Storing................................................... 559
Control element (MBUX multimedia sys-
tem)
Setting acoustic feedback...................... 471
Control elements:.......................................... 87
Convenience closing.................................... 165
Convenience feature
Closing/opening the windows (air-
recirculation button)................................. 66
Convenience opening................................... 164
Coolant
Notes..................................................... 808
Cooling................................................ 241, 242
Copyright..................................................... 103
Cornering light............................................. 224
Correct use.................................................... 98
Cover........................................................... 166
Cross trac (warning).................................. 417
Crosswind Assist.......................................... 344
Cruise control
activating/deactivating.......................... 352
Calling up a speed................................. 352
Function................................................ 350
Requirements:....................................... 352
Setting a speed...................................... 352
Storing a speed...................................... 352
Cup holder
Rear....................................................... 213
D
Damage
Limited protection.................................. 116
Dashboard
Cockpit.............................................. 72, 74
Dashcam
Conguring settings............................... 550
Selecting a USB device.......................... 549
Starting/stopping individual record-
ings....................................................... 549
Starting/stopping loop recording........... 549
Data processing in the vehicle........................ 99
Data protection
Granting authorisations.......................... 487
Data protection rights.................................. 102
Data storage
Data protection rights............................ 102
Electronic control units............................ 99
Online services...................................... 102
Deactivating the alarm................................. 172
Dealership..................................................... 97
Declaration of conformity
Components subject to radio regula-
tions........................................................ 92
Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 92
TIREFIT kit................................................ 94
Decorative foil.............................................. 626
Defrost function........................................... 245
DeNOx agent
AdBlue®................................................. 303
Deployed components
Limited protection.................................. 116
Deployment situations.................................. 115
Index 947
F206 0119 02
Destination
Editing a suggestion............................... 532
Editing intermediate destinations........... 522
Editing the previous destinations............ 532
Saving as a favourite.............................. 532
Destination entry
Accepting a destination suggestion........ 510
Entering a 3 word address...................... 513
Entering an intermediate destination...... 522
Entering geo-coordinates....................... 512
Selecting a contact................................ 512
Selecting a received destination............. 514
Selecting from favourites........................ 514
Selecting from the map.......................... 513
Selecting previous destinations.............. 511
Destination entry (multimedia system)
Notes..................................................... 509
Selecting a POI...................................... 511
Detecting inattentiveness............................. 349
Diagnostics connection.................................. 96
Diesel
Notes..................................................... 802
DIGITAL LIGHT
Activating/deactivating.......................... 228
Active headlamps................................... 223
Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 228
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 230
Assistance functions.............................. 225
Bad weather light................................... 225
City lighting............................................ 225
Cornering light....................................... 224
Dynamic low beam................................. 223
Enhanced fog light function.................... 224
Motorway mode..................................... 224
Overview................................................ 223
Topographical compensation.................. 225
Digital Owner's Manual.................................. 84
Direct commands
Voice commands for MBUX voice
assistant................................................ 461
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission.......................... 289
Engages neutral..................................... 291
Engaging drive position.......................... 294
Engaging park position automatically...... 292
Engaging reverse gear............................ 291
Function................................................ 289
Gearshi recommendation..................... 297
Manual gearshiing........................ 294, 295
Selecting park position........................... 292
Display
Care...................................................... 629
Display (driver's display)
Overview of displays....................... 451, 452
Display (MBUX multimedia system)
Settings................................................. 486
Display message
Calling up on driver display..................... 821
Notes..................................................... 821
Display messages
ç - - - km/h.................................... 888
È - - - km/h.................................... 885
h - - - km/h.................................... 884
# 12 V on-board electrical sys-
tem Visit workshop................................ 902
Û 48 V battery See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 904
ò Acoustic presence indicator
inoperative............................................. 846
948 Index
F206 0119 02
¯ AdBlue system fault Engine
start not possible................................... 912
¯ AdBlue system fault In XXX km
Electric only. See Owner's Manual.......... 913
¯ AdBlue system fault Only "Elec-
tric" drive program available................... 913
¯ AdBlue system fault See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 911
¯ AdBlue system malfunction
Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not
poss. in XXX km..................................... 911
¯ AdBlue system malfunction
Emergency op. in XXX km See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 911
5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next
refuelling............................................... 914
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break!.................................................... 884
: Automatic driving lights inoper-
ative...................................................... 833
Û Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if possible
...................................................... 849, 904
Ø Beginning emergency stop... 892, 897
J Brake immediately....................... 877
ê Camera view restricted See
Owner's Manual..................................... 898
® Change key batteries................... 830
è Charger cable connected............. 846
J Check brake uid level................. 879
é Check tyre(s)............................... 906
! Clean the fuel lter...................... 868
ÿ Coolant Stop Switch o the
vehicle................................................... 867
& Currently unavailable Battery
low........................................................ 843
& Currently unavailable Charge
high-voltage battery............................... 844
& Currently unavailable High-volt-
age battery charging incomplete............ 844
& Currently unavailable Refuel......... 843
! currently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual (ABS and ESP®)................. 880
÷ currently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual (ESP®)............................... 881
æ Do not leave persons or ani-
mals in the vehicle................................. 830
5 Engine oil level cannot be
measured.............................................. 915
5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level.... 914
5 Engine oil level Stop Switch o
the vehicle............................................. 914
5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch
o the vehicle........................................ 915
5 Engine oil Quality loss Oil
change required..................................... 916
ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h........ 887
6 Front le malfunction Consult
workshop............................................... 823
: Front le parking lights................ 835
Index 949
F206 0119 02
: Front le turn signal..................... 838
6 Front right malfunction Consult
workshop............................................... 824
: Front right parking lights.............. 835
: Front right turn signal................... 838
6 Fuel tank is depressurised
Ready for refuelling................................ 854
Û Have high-voltage system
checked See Owner's Manual................ 850
! inoperative See Owner's Man-
ual (ABS and ESP®)............................... 881
T inoperative See Owner's Man-
ual (EBD, ABS and ESP®)....................... 883
÷ inoperative See Owner's Man-
ual (ESP®)............................................. 882
G Inoperative.................................. 901
® Key being taught in Please wait.... 832
® Key not detected (red display
message)............................................... 831
® Key not detected (white dis-
play message)........................................ 831
: Le brake lamp............................ 839
: Le cornering light....................... 837
: Le daytime running lights........... 837
: Le low beam.............................. 836
: Le main beam............................ 836
: Le mirror turn signal.................. 839
: Le tail light................................. 840
6 Le window airbag malfunction
Consult workshop.................................. 827
: Malfunction See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 832
J Malfunction See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 878
J Malfunction Stop vehicle.............. 878
Û Malfunction Visit workshop.......... 849
d Malfunction................................. 852
Û Malfunction................................. 849
ð Maximum speed exceeded........... 886
: Number plate lamp...................... 841
ç O............................................... 888
ë O............................................... 883
Û Output and range reduced See
Owner's Manual..................................... 850
! Parking brake See Owner's
Manual.................................................. 874
! Parking brake Switch on vehi-
cle to release......................................... 877
È passive........................................ 885
d Performance severely limited....... 852
Ý Please wait 48 V battery charg-
ing......................................................... 904
6 Please wait Depressurising fuel
tank....................................................... 854
& Pre-entry climate control via
key available again aer starting vehi-
cle......................................................... 844
950 Index
F206 0119 02
& Pre-entry climate control via
key currently unavailable. High-volt-
age battery low...................................... 845
Ù Rear axle steering currently
malfunctioning....................................... 862
Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction
Stop immediately................................... 863
Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction
Visit workshop....................................... 862
: Rear fog light............................... 841
_ Rear le seat backrest not
locked.................................................... 865
: Rear le turn signal...................... 838
_ Rear right seat backrest not
locked.................................................... 865
: Rear right turn signal.................... 838
é Rectify tyre pressure.................... 907
é Reduce speed.............................. 908
Ø Rell AdBlue See Owner’s Man-
ual......................................................... 909
! Release parking brake.................. 877
ý Replace air lter........................... 869
® Replace key................................. 830
6 Restraint system malfunction
Consult workshop.................................. 822
ð Restricted during trailer opera-
tion........................................................ 899
: Reversing light............................. 840
: Right brake lamp.......................... 839
: Right cornering light..................... 837
: Right daytime running lights......... 837
: Right low beam............................ 836
: Right main beam.......................... 836
: Right mirror turn signal................ 839
: Right tail light............................... 840
6 Right window airbag malfunc-
tion Consult workshop........................... 827
6 Second row of seats, le Mal-
function Consult workshop..................... 825
6 Second row of seats, right Mal-
function Consult workshop..................... 826
# Start the vehicle to charge the
12 V battery........................................... 903
Ù Steering malfunction Drive
carefully Visit workshop......................... 861
Ù Steering malfunction Increased
physical eort See Owner's Manual....... 861
Ù Steering malfunction Stop
immediately See Owner's Manual........... 861
d Stop Switch o the vehicle........... 852
# Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on
to charge the 12 V battery..................... 903
# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 902
Û Stop vehicle See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 903
ç suspended................................... 888
: Switch o lights........................... 833
: Switch on headlamps................... 833
Index 951
F206 0119 02
¸ temporarily unavailable Sen-
sors dirty............................................... 897
: Third brake lamp.......................... 840
Ø Top up AdBlue Emergency op.
in XXX km See Owner's Manual.............. 910
Ø Top up AdBlue In XXX km Elec-
tric only. See Owner's Manual................ 912
Ø Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg.
op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss.
in XXX km.............................................. 910
+ Top up coolant See Owner’s
Manual.................................................. 867
¥ Top up washer uid...................... 866
Ø Top up XX,X l AdBlue Only
"Electric" available See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 912
Ø Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch
vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine
start not poss........................................ 910
u Towing not permitted See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 845
: Trailer brake lamp........................ 842
ï Trailer coupling Check lock
(white display message)........................ 857
ï Trailer coupling Check lock (red
display message).................................... 858
: Trailer le turn signal................... 841
: Trailer right turn signal................. 841
: Trailer tail light............................. 842
é Tyre(s) overheated....................... 908
é Warning tyre malfunction............. 907
é Wheel sensor(s) missing............... 906
"Electric" drive program currently
unavailable............................................. 848
4matic currently unavailable................... 866
4matic inoperative................................. 866
AC charging inoperative Consult work-
shop...................................................... 847
Active Blind Spot Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 895
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 895
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable
when towing a trailer See Owner's
Manual.................................................. 896
Active bonnet malfunction See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 863
Active Brake Assist Functions cur-
rently limited See Owner's Manual......... 889
Active Brake Assist Functions limited
See Owner's Manual.............................. 890
Active Distance Assist available again..... 889
Active Distance Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 889
Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... 889
Active Emergency Stop Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 892
Active Emergency Stop Assist inoper-
ative...................................................... 893
952 Index
F206 0119 02
Active Lane Change Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 893
Active Lane Change Assist inoperative... 893
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 896
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions
restricted See Owner's Manual.............. 896
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 896
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 900
Active Steering Assist currently
unavailable due to multiple emer-
gency stops........................................... 892
Active Steering Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 891
Active Steering Assist inoperative........... 891
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently
unavailable see Owner's Manual............. 894
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative
See Owner's Manual.............................. 894
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 834
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 834
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur-
rently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 834
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop-
erative................................................... 835
Ambient light warning support inoper-
ative...................................................... 864
Apply brake and start vehicle to shi
out of P or N.......................................... 869
Apply brake to deselect P position.......... 869
Apply brake to engage D or R................. 870
Apply brake to engage R......................... 870
Apply parking brake to park Visit
workshop............................................... 870
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red dis-
play message)........................................ 874
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white
display message).................................... 874
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 894
Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 895
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual...... 895
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's
Manual.......................................... 851, 855
Charging fault Please change charging
method See Owner's Manual................. 847
Check brake pads See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 879
Check low beam setting (le/right-
side trac)............................................ 833
Consult workshop without changing
the transmission position............... 850, 873
Consult workshop without starting the
vehicle again.......................................... 850
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 884
Index 953
F206 0119 02
Cruise control inoperative...................... 884
Cruise control o................................... 884
DC charging inoperative Consult
workshop............................................... 847
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited............ 833
DRIFT MODE currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 888
Drive malfunction Achievable speed
limited Stop soon................................... 851
Drive malfunction Achievable speed
severely limited See Owner's Manual...... 852
Drive malfunction Stop Consult work-
shop...................................................... 873
Drive malfunction Stop Restart vehicle... 873
Drive overheated. Drive on with care...... 873
Electronic rear axle dierential lock
currently unavailable.............................. 863
Electronic rear axle dierential
lock inoperative..................................... 863
Front passenger airbag disabled See
Owner's Manual..................................... 827
Front passenger airbag enabled See
Owner's Manual..................................... 828
Function blocked as centre backrest
is folded down....................................... 865
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunc-
tion........................................................ 835
Head-up display Brightness currently
reduced See Owner's Manual................. 860
Head-up display currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 860
Head-up display inoperative................... 860
High-voltage battery malfunction.
Consult workshop without starting the
vehicle again.......................................... 853
High-voltage battery malfunction. No
start in approx. XXX km Consult work-
shop  (red display message).................... 853
High-voltage battery malfunction. No
start in approx. XXX km Consult work-
shop  (yellow display message)............... 853
Inoperative indicator lamp in driver
display. Consult workshop...................... 842
Limited availability of Active Parking
Assist manoeuvring assistant See
Owner's Manual..................................... 901
Limiter inoperative................................. 885
Login failed Change authentication
method or charging station.................... 847
Low beam setting (le/right-side traf-
c) Manual adjustment only................... 834
N automatically activated Please
engage transmission position again........ 872
Not possible to unlock charging cable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 846
Occupant presence reminder inopera-
tive........................................................ 829
954 Index
F206 0119 02
Only electric drive available Power
limited................................................... 847
Only select P when vehicle is station-
ary......................................................... 869
PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assis-
tant unavailable at rear when towing a
trailer..................................................... 900
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 900
Place the key in the marked space
See Owner's Manual.............................. 832
Possible to start the vehicle again.......... 905
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative
See Owner's Manual.............................. 899
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's
Manual.................................................. 899
PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 899
Preparing drive system…........................ 848
RACE START cancelled........................... 887
RACE START not possible See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 887
Reduced drive system performance
See Owner's Manual.............................. 848
Reserve fuel........................................... 869
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 872
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply
parking brake to park............................. 871
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's
door open Transmission not in P............. 870
Risk of vehicle rolling away N activa-
ted manually No automatic switch to P... 871
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 886
Speed Limit Assist currently unavaila-
ble See Owner's Manual........................ 885
Speed Limit Assist inoperative................ 885
To shi to N, hold selector lever lon-
ger in position N.................................... 872
To switch o the vehicle, press the
Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec-
onds or 3 times...................................... 867
Trac Sign Assist currently unavaila-
ble See Owner's Manual........................ 886
Trac Sign Assist inoperative................. 886
Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 872
Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila-
ble......................................................... 905
Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. 905
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No
tyre pressure sensors............................. 906
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown
occurs when locked or automatically
in a few minutes..................................... 856
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown
occurs when locked or automatically
in XX mins............................................. 856
Vehicle not currently being charged
Charging station fault............................. 846
Index 955
F206 0119 02
Wiper Malfunction.................................. 866
Displaying road names/house numbers....... 538
Distance control.......................................... 354
Distance warning......................................... 370
DISTRONIC.................................................. 354
Door
Additional door lock............................... 152
Child safety lock (rear door)................... 144
Emergency key....................................... 156
Opening (from the inside)....................... 153
Unlocking (inside).................................. 153
Door control panel
Seat operation......................................... 80
Drag Race, Drag race................................... 497
DRIFT MODE
Activating............................................... 394
Activation conditions.............................. 394
Deactivating........................................... 394
Function................................................ 393
Drinks holder............................................... 209
Drive Away Assist......................................... 416
Drive position............................................... 294
Drive program display........................... 285, 286
Drive programs
AMG DYNAMIC SELECT......................... 288
Selecting....................................... 285, 286
Driver display
Track Pace menu................................... 447
Driver's display, Instrument cluster
48 V on-board electrical system............. 451
Assistant display.................................... 444
Classic menu................................. 438, 441
Head-up display..................................... 449
Menus................................................... 436
Navigation menu.................................... 448
Notes..................................................... 435
Operating.............................................. 435
Service due date.................................... 612
Service menu......................................... 443
Status displays............................... 451, 452
Supersport menu................................... 446
Understated menu......................... 438, 441
Warning/indicator lamps.................. 76, 916
Driver's seat
Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 177
Adjusting electrically.............................. 179
Easy entry and exit feature..................... 192
Manually adjusting................................. 175
Seat heating.......................................... 187
Driving abroad
Light adjustment low beam.............. 35, 220
Driving safety system
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 341
Active Brake Assist................................. 370
Active Lane Change Assist..................... 367
Active Steering Assist............................. 363
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 349
ATTENTION ASSIST................................ 349
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 341
Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot
Assist.................................................... 384
Cameras................................................ 339
Cruise control........................................ 350
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-
tion)....................................................... 347
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
...................................................... 341, 342
Hill Start Assist...................................... 348
HOLD function....................................... 347
Overview................................................ 340
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 339
956 Index
F206 0119 02
Speed Limit Assist................................. 375
STEER CONTROL................................... 347
Trac Sign Assist................................... 379
Trailer Manoeuvering Assist.................... 424
Your responsibility.................................. 338
Driving system............................................. 340
Driving tips
AMG ceramic high-performance com-
posite brake system............................... 271
General driving tips................................ 268
Light adjustment when driving abroad
........................................................ 35, 220
Optimised acceleration.......................... 267
Rear axle steering.................................. 271
Recuperation......................................... 276
Running-in notes.................................... 266
Drowsiness detection................................... 349
Duplicate key............................................... 152
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL
Suspension............................................ 391
Dynamic handling control system................. 341
Dynamic low beam
Overview................................................ 223
DYNAMIC SELECT
Calling up the fuel consumption indi-
cator...................................................... 288
Conguring drive program I.................... 287
Displaying engine data........................... 288
Displaying vehicle data........................... 288
Drive program display.................... 285, 286
Drive programs.............................. 282, 284
Function........................................ 282, 284
Selecting the drive program........... 285, 286
E
E-mails......................................................... 460
E10...................................................... 800, 801
E25...................................................... 800, 801
Easy entry feature
Function................................................ 192
Setting................................................... 193
Easy exit feature
Function................................................ 192
Setting................................................... 193
EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution........ 347
ECO Assist
48 V on-board electrical system............. 274
Activating/deactivating.......................... 280
Plug-in hybrid......................................... 278
ECO display................................................. 274
ECO start/stop button
Automatic engine start/stop.................. 273
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start........................... 272
Automatic engine stop........................... 272
Conditions (automatic engine stop/
start)....................................................... 68
Function................................................ 272
Switching o/on.................................... 273
Electric drive................................................ 258
Electric parking brake
Applying automatically........................... 333
Emergency braking................................ 336
Manually applying/releasing.................. 335
Releasing automatically.......................... 334
Electrical fuses....................................... 61, 653
Electromagnetic compatibility
Declaration of conformity......................... 92
Electronic Stability Program................. 341, 342
Index 957
F206 0119 02
Electronics compartment
Rear centre console............................... 201
Emergency
Emergency guide..................................... 70
Fire extinguisher.............................. 57, 634
First-aid kit (so sided)............... 37, 59, 633
Overview of aids...................................... 82
Safety vest................................. 36, 58, 632
Warning triangle..................................... 633
Emergency braking
Active Brake Assist................................. 370
Brake Assist System............................... 341
Carrying out........................................... 336
Electric parking brake/handbrake.......... 333
Emergency call
Automatic.............................................. 583
Manual.................................................. 583
Emergency call system
Mercedes me connect..................... 69, 582
Emergency key
Door...................................................... 156
Inserting/removing................................ 150
Emergency operation mode
Start the vehicle..................................... 263
Emergency shuto (high-voltage on-board
electrical system)......................................... 259
Emergency spare wheel
Inating................................................. 673
Emergency stop assistant............................. 366
ENERGIZING Coach
Calling up.............................................. 506
Function................................................ 506
ENERGIZING COMFORT
Overview of programmes....................... 503
Starting the programme......................... 504
Energy ow display
Function/notes...................................... 501
Engine
Emergency operation mode.................... 263
Engine number....................................... 797
Starting assistance................................ 644
switching o (start/stop button)............ 326
Tow-starting........................................... 653
Engine data
Displaying.............................................. 288
DYNAMIC SELECT.................................. 288
Engine electronics........................................ 676
Engine number............................................. 797
Engine oil, Oil
Additives................................................ 806
Capacity................................................ 806
Capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)........ 807
Checking the oil level using the driver
display............................................. 33, 617
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.................. 806
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...................... 807
Quality................................................... 806
Quality (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)........... 807
Temperature (driver's display)......... 445, 446
Topping up............................................. 618
Engine oil temperature (driver's display)
............................................................ 445, 446
Engine operating temperature
Warning lamp......................................... 267
Engine output............................................... 267
Engine output, current (driver's display)
............................................................ 445, 446
Engine sound............................................... 280
Engine starting
Remote Online....................................... 265
958 Index
F206 0119 02
Start/stop button.................................. 262
Engine torque............................................... 267
Entering characters
Function/notes...................................... 483
Handwriting recognition......................... 485
On the touchscreen............................... 484
Selecting the writing speed.................... 485
Setting the keyboard language............... 485
Environmentally friendly driving...................... 85
ERA-GLONASS test mode............................. 586
ESC, Electronic Stability Control................... 341
ESP®
Activating/deactivating.................. 345, 346
Adjusting (steering-wheel button)........... 345
Crosswind Assist.................................... 344
ESP® SPORT.......................................... 342
Function........................................ 341, 342
Trailer stabilisation................................. 345
EU type approval number............................. 797
Exhaust gas aertreatment, diesel engine.... 805
Exit warning
Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot
Assist.................................................... 384
Exiting a parking space
Active Parking Assist.............................. 410
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
PARKTRONIC......................................... 406
Exterior lighting
Care...................................................... 627
Light adjustment when driving abroad
........................................................ 35, 220
F
Factory settings
MBUX reset function.............................. 494
Fault message
Driver's display...................................... 821
Favourites
Adding a destination.............................. 514
Calling up.............................................. 477
Deleting................................................. 478
Home address....................................... 514
Moving................................................... 477
Overview................................................ 477
Renaming.............................................. 477
Work address......................................... 514
Fill level
AdBlue®................................................. 443
Filling station search
Starting automatic search...................... 525
Switching the automatic search on/o... 525
Fine particle status display........................... 245
Fingerprint sensor
MBUX multimedia system....................... 472
Fire extinguisher..................................... 57, 634
First aid
First-aid kit (so sided)............... 37, 59, 633
Fitting
Snow chains.................................... 50, 658
Tyres/wheels......................................... 670
Fitting accessories
Limited protection.................................. 116
Fitting the licence plate (front)........................ 91
Flacon.......................................................... 249
Flat towing
Pulling/towing....................................... 434
Flat tyre
MOExtended.......................................... 635
Index 959
F206 0119 02
Notes............................................... 62, 634
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 636
Wheel change........................................ 667
Flexible charging system Pro........................ 312
Floor mats................................................... 219
Fog light (extended range)............................ 224
Foil covering
On camera/sensors............................... 339
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 339
Fragrance.................................................... 249
Fragrance system
Activating/deactivating.......................... 249
Inserting/removing the acon................ 249
Perfume vial........................................... 249
Setting................................................... 249
Free soware............................................... 103
Frequencies
Mobile phone......................................... 677
Two-way radio........................................ 677
Front airbag
Inating................................................. 115
Front headlamps.......................................... 220
Front passenger airbag
Disabling/enabling................................ 110
Front passenger airbag shuto
Information (child restraint system on
the front passenger seat)....................... 127
Front passenger seat
Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 177
Adjusting electrically.............................. 179
Manually adjusting................................. 175
FuelAdditives................................................ 802
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in
hybrid with petrol engine)....................... 302
Diesel.................................................... 802
Diesel quality......................................... 802
E10................................................ 800, 801
E25................................................ 800, 801
Fuel reserve (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)... 804
Petrol............................................. 800, 801
Petrol quality.................................. 800, 801
Relling............................................ 24, 298
Reserve................................................. 804
Sulphur content............................. 800, 801
Tank content.......................................... 804
Tank content (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 804
Fuel consumption indicator.......................... 288
Fuel reserve................................................. 804
Function in the event of an accident............. 115
Function seat................................................. 80
Fuses
Boot...................................................... 656
Cockpit.................................................. 656
Engine compartment.............................. 654
Front passenger footwell........................ 656
Fuse assignment diagram................. 61, 653
Notes............................................... 61, 653
G
G-meter, Accelerometer....................... 445, 446
Gallery app
Operating.............................................. 579
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory.............................. 333
Open/close gate.................................... 332
Problem................................................. 331
960 Index
F206 0119 02
Garage door openers
Programming buttons............................. 328
Synchronising the rolling code................ 329
Gearshi
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 289
Manual.......................................... 294, 295
Gearshi paddles
Steering wheel gearshi paddles.... 294, 295
General driving tips...................................... 268
Genuine parts................................................ 86
Glide mode.................................................. 297
Global search
Function................................................ 480
Overview................................................ 480
Glove compartment
Locking/unlocking........................... 49, 200
Grab handles............................................... 174
Gross mass.................................................. 797
H
Handbrake................................................... 333
Handling characteristics
Unusual................................................. 658
HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................. 160
Hands-free system....................................... 551
Handwriting recognition............................... 485
Haptic accelerator pedal, Pressure point...... 280
Hazard warning lights............................. 57, 223
Hazard warnings
Car-to-X-Communication........................ 536
Head restraint
Adjusting (rear)...................................... 184
Adjusting manually (front, 2-way)............ 182
adjusting manually (front, 4-way)............ 183
Removing/tting (rear)........................... 185
Head-up display
Care...................................................... 629
Function................................................ 449
Memory function................................... 195
Operating.............................................. 450
Switching on/o.................................... 450
Headlamp ashing........................................ 222
Headlamp range control............................... 225
Headlamps................................................... 220
Heating
Activating/deactivating.......................... 244
Centre console...................................... 243
Climate control.............................. 241, 242
Rear window.......................................... 242
Seat....................................................... 187
Stationary heater............................. 56, 255
Steering wheel....................................... 192
Help call
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
tem.................................................. 69, 582
High beam................................................... 222
High-pressure cleaner.................................. 624
High-voltage battery
Charge level display............................... 325
Charging at time of departure................ 499
Charging cable control panel.................. 312
Charging duration.......................... 813, 815
Charging station, mode 3....................... 310
Conguring weekly prole...................... 499
Connection types........................... 813, 815
Ending the charging process (alternat-
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 318
Index 961
F206 0119 02
Ending the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 323
Energy ow display................................. 501
Flexible charging system Pro.................. 312
General notes on charging..................... 305
Mains socket, mode 2............................ 309
Maximum charging current (mains
socket).................................................. 312
Notes..................................................... 643
Range............................................ 813, 815
Rapid charging station, mode 4.............. 311
Recuperation......................................... 276
Starting the charging process (alter-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 315
Starting the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 321
Stowing the charging cable.................... 308
Type............................................... 813, 815
Voltage types................................. 813, 815
Wallbox, mode 3.................................... 310
High-voltage on-board electrical system
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 314
Manual switch-o................................... 259
Operating safety...................................... 88
Hill Start Assist............................................ 348
HOLD function
Function................................................ 347
Switching on/o.................................... 347
Home screen
Central display....................................... 469
I
i-Size child restraint system
Fitting.................................................... 140
Suitable seats........................................ 136
Identication plate
Engine................................................... 797
Vehicle.................................................. 797
Immediate pre-entry climate control............. 254
Immobiliser.................................................. 171
Implied warranty............................................ 99
Importer information
Regulatory radio information.................. 796
In-Car Oce
Answering e-mail................................... 565
Calling up.............................................. 563
Creating an e-mail.................................. 565
Forwarding e-mail.................................. 565
Managing e-mails................................... 564
Marking a task as completed.................. 564
Selecting functions (calendar entry)....... 564
Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls)......... 564
Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occupants
Limited protection.................................. 116
Increase in trac information volume
Setting................................................... 607
Indicator lamps/warning lamps
Driver's display...................................... 916
PASSENGER AIR BAG............................. 109
Individual drive program
Conguring............................................ 287
Inside rearview mirror.................................. 239
Intelligent Light System
Activating/deactivating.......................... 228
Interior lighting
Ambient lighting..................................... 233
Setting................................................... 232
Switch-o delay time.............................. 234
Interior protection........................................ 173
Intermediate destination
Editing................................................... 522
962 Index
F206 0119 02
Starting an automatic lling
station search........................................ 525
Starting the automatic service station
search................................................... 526
Internet
Calling up a web page............................ 592
Calling up the web browser settings....... 594
Calling up web browser options.............. 593
Deleting a bookmark.............................. 594
Deleting browser data............................ 594
Managing bookmarks............................. 594
Mercedes me connect........................... 576
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot...................... 488
Smartphone integration........................... 22
Web browser in the background............. 595
Web browsers........................................ 593
Internet connection
Cancelling permission (mobile phone).... 591
Disconnecting automatically (commu-
nication module).................................... 589
Displaying the connection status............ 592
Establishing........................................... 591
Information............................................ 588
Overview of connection status............... 592
Restrictions........................................... 588
Setting access data (Bluetooth®)............ 590
Setting up (communication module)....... 589
Setting up (Wi-Fi)................................... 590
Setup (Bluetooth®)................................. 590
Ionisation..................................................... 248
iPhone®
Smartphone integration......................... 566
ISOFIX child restraint system
Fitting.................................................... 140
Suitable seats........................................ 134
J
JackStorage location....................... 63, 666, 667
Jump-start connection............................ 60, 645
K
Key acoustic locking verication signal......... 149
Battery.................................................. 150
Deactivating a function.................... 69, 149
Emergency key....................................... 150
Energy consumption......................... 69, 149
Function................................................ 148
Key ring attachment............................... 150
Problem................................................. 152
Replacement key................................... 152
Unlocking setting................................... 149
KEYLESS-GO
Deactivating..................................... 69, 149
Locking/unlocking the vehicle............... 154
Problem................................................. 155
Unlocking setting................................... 149
Kickdown..................................................... 297
Knee airbag.................................................. 121
L
Lane Change Assistant................................. 367
Lane Keeping Assist..................................... 388
Lane recognition
Active Lane Change Assist..................... 367
Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 388
Language
Notes..................................................... 489
Setting................................................... 490
Last destinations
Selecting............................................... 511
Index 963
F206 0119 02
Level regulation
Suspension............................................ 391
Light adjustment
Driving abroad................................. 35, 220
Light switch................................................. 220
Lighting
Dynamic low beam................................. 223
Interior lighting....................................... 232
Lights
Active headlamps................................... 223
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 349
Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 228
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 230
Assistance functions.............................. 225
Automatic driving lights.......................... 221
Bad weather light................................... 225
City lighting............................................ 225
Combination switch............................... 222
Cornering light....................................... 224
DIGITAL LIGHT....................................... 223
Dynamic low beam................................. 223
Fog light (extended range)...................... 224
Hazard warning lights....................... 57, 223
High beam............................................. 222
Interior lighting....................................... 232
Light adjustment when driving abroad
........................................................ 35, 220
Locator lighting...................................... 232
Motorway mode..................................... 224
Reading lamp......................................... 232
Rear fog light......................................... 221
Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 220
Setting low beam................................... 232
Switch-o delay time.............................. 232
Switching the Intelligent Light System
on/o................................................... 228
Topographical compensation.................. 225
Turn signal light...................................... 222
Limiter
Activating/deactivating.................. 352, 357
Buttons.................................................. 352
Calling up a speed................................. 352
Function................................................ 351
Passive mode......................................... 351
Permanent setting.................................. 353
Requirements:....................................... 352
Selecting............................................... 352
Setting a speed...................................... 352
Storing a speed...................................... 352
Live Trac Information
Displaying the trac map....................... 534
Displaying trac incidents..................... 534
Extending a subscription........................ 533
Information from the service provider..... 533
Registering on Mercedes me.................. 533
Load capacity
Bicycle rack........................................... 818
Loading
Bag hook............................................... 206
Notes..................................................... 196
Roof luggage rack............................ 40, 208
Stowage space under the boot oor
........................................................ 45, 207
Tie-down eyes.................................. 48, 206
Loading guidelines....................................... 196
Loads........................................................... 196
Locator lighting............................................ 232
Locking/unlocking
Additional door lock............................... 152
Automatic locking (MMS)....................... 155
Doors (from the inside).......................... 153
Emergency key....................................... 156
KEYLESS-GO.......................................... 154
964 Index
F206 0119 02
Mercedes me connect........................... 152
Loud sound
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................. 112
Low beam
Activating/deactivating.......................... 220
Le-hand/right-hand trac................... 232
Light adjustment when driving abroad
........................................................ 35, 220
Setting................................................... 232
Low emission zone
Avoiding/exiting.................................... 518
Drive program change (plug-in hybrid).... 518
lubricants..................................................... 799
Luggage....................................................... 196
Luggage rack............................................... 196
Lumbar support........................................... 182
M
Maintaining safe distance
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 357
Maintenance................................................ 612
Maintenance Management
Notes..................................................... 613
Transferred data..................................... 613
Malfunction
Restraint system.................................... 107
Manoeuvering brake function....................... 418
Manoeuvring
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Manoeuvering brake function................. 418
Manoeuvring assistant
Activating/deactivating.......................... 419
Cross trac warning.............................. 417
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Manoeuvering brake function................. 418
Manual gearshiing
Activating/deactivating.......................... 296
Map, Trac map
Avoiding an area.................................... 540
Avoiding an area (overview).................... 540
Changing an area................................... 541
Deleting an area..................................... 541
Displaying online map contents.............. 544
Displaying Qibla..................................... 543
Displaying the compass......................... 542
Displaying the map version..................... 540
Displaying the range............................... 544
Displaying the satellite map.................... 543
Displaying the trac map....................... 534
Displaying weather information.............. 544
Map data............................................... 542
Moving................................................... 539
Route overview aer start...................... 539
Selecting additional information............. 540
Selecting POI symbols............................ 539
Setting the map scale............................ 538
Setting the map scale automatically....... 543
Updating.......................................... 38, 541
Map functions.............................................. 538
Massage programmes.................................. 187
Maximum full-stop braking........................... 341
Maximum permissible gross vehicle mass..... 797
Maximum speeds................................. 812, 813
MBUX
Dashcam............................................... 548
MBUX multimedia system
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 338
Adjusting the volume.............................. 482
Air conditioning menu............................ 245
Authorisations........................................ 487
Calling up the zero layer......................... 467
Index 965
F206 0119 02
Display settings...................................... 486
Drive programs...................................... 287
ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes
(overview).............................................. 503
ENERGIZING seat kinetics...................... 502
Factory setting....................................... 494
Fingerprint sensor.................................. 472
Global search......................................... 480
Home screen......................................... 469
Language settings.................................. 455
Memory Park Assist............................... 423
Mercedes me & Apps....................... 23, 578
Operating the zero layer......................... 467
Overview................................................ 463
Set collision detection.................... 336, 337
Setting keyboard and handwriting rec-
ognition................................................. 485
Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 362
Standby mode function.......................... 338
Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT
programme............................................ 504
Steering wheel heater/seat heating....... 192
Switching the sound on/o.................... 481
Touchscreen.......................................... 471
Zero layer.............................................. 464
MBUX Voice Assistant
E-mails................................................... 460
Function................................................ 455
Language setting.................................... 456
Media voice commands......................... 459
Online voice commands......................... 461
Online voice control............................... 458
Operable functions................................. 456
Operating safety.................................... 455
Setting................................................... 456
Speech quality....................................... 457
Voice commands................................... 458
Voice prompting..................................... 455
Mecca......................................................... 543
Media
General information................................. 21
Media mode
Adding a favourite song.......................... 601
Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip-
ment...................................................... 600
Connecting USB devices........................ 600
Controlling media playback.................... 601
Copyright and trademarks...................... 597
Information about the search function
in categories.......................................... 601
Overview of the media menu.................. 599
Playing back similar music tracks........... 601
Removing a favourite song..................... 601
Starting a search in categories............... 602
Starting media playback......................... 601
Supported formats and data storage
media.................................................... 596
Surprise mix.......................................... 601
Using the keyword search...................... 602
Medical aids................................................... 98
Memory function
Head-up display..................................... 195
Outside mirrors...................................... 195
Seat....................................................... 195
Steering wheel....................................... 195
Memory Parking Assist
Exiting a parking space.......................... 422
Function................................................ 420
Parking.................................................. 421
Recording.............................................. 420
Setting................................................... 423
Menus (driver display)
Track Pace............................................. 447
966 Index
F206 0119 02
Menus (driver's display), Steering-wheel
buttons
Assistant display.................................... 444
Classic menu................................. 438, 441
Navigation............................................. 448
Notes..................................................... 436
Operating.............................................. 437
Service.................................................. 443
Sport............................................. 445, 446
Supersport............................................ 446
Understated menu......................... 438, 441
Mercedes me App
Activating on-demand features................. 87
Calling up services................................. 578
Calling up your user account.................. 578
Unlinking the user account..................... 579
Mercedes me Apps................................ 23, 578
Mercedes me calls
Arranging a service appointment............ 574
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre aer automatic accident/
breakdown detection............................. 573
Calls via the overhead control panel....... 572
Consenting to the transfer of data.......... 574
Information............................................ 572
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre........... 573
Transferred data..................................... 575
Mercedes me Charge, Paying
Charging station display......................... 516
Mercedes me connect
Accident/Breakdown Management........ 577
Information............................................ 576
Transferred data..................................... 577
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Automatic emergency call...................... 583
Data processing..................................... 586
Data transfer......................................... 584
ERA-GLONASS test mode...................... 586
Information............................................ 580
Manual emergency call.......................... 583
Overview.......................................... 69, 582
Self-diagnosis........................................ 586
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts......................... 86
Mercedes-Benz service centre....................... 97
Message memory......................................... 821
Messages, Short messages
Calling a message sender....................... 562
Deleting................................................. 563
Dictating................................................ 561
Forwarding............................................ 562
MBUX voice commands......................... 460
Overview................................................ 561
Read-aloud function............................... 561
Reading................................................. 561
Replying................................................. 562
Sending................................................. 561
Setting the displayed text messages....... 561
Using a phone number or URL................ 562
Mirror heater................................................ 250
Mirrors
Mirror folding function............................ 240
Outside mirrors...................................... 238
Rear-view mirror..................................... 239
Mobile phone, Mobile phone holder
Cancelling permission for Internet
connection............................................ 591
Frequencies........................................... 677
Holder (rear armrest)............................. 213
Maximum transmission output............... 677
Notes on wireless charging.................... 216
Smartphone integration........................... 22
Telephone................................................ 22
Wireless charging (front)........................ 217
Index 967
F206 0119 02
Model type................................................... 797
Modication
Limited protection.................................. 116
MOExtended tyres, Run-at tyres................. 635
Motorway mode........................................... 224
Multimedia system....................................... 463
Music online
Adding providers.................................... 602
Calling up.............................................. 603
Calling up the settings............................ 603
Requirements:....................................... 602
Search function..................................... 603
N
Navigation
Activating............................................... 507
Destination entry............................. 38, 509
Displaying/hiding the menu................... 507
Information.............................................. 18
MBUX voice commands......................... 459
Menu (driver display).............................. 448
Overview................................................ 508
Updating the map data..................... 38, 541
Navigation announcements
Activating/deactivating.......................... 530
Adjusting the volume.............................. 531
Repeating.............................................. 531
Switching audio fadeout on/o.............. 531
Neutral........................................................ 291
Notications Centre
Calling up a notication.......................... 479
Editing a notication.............................. 479
Message types....................................... 478
Overview................................................ 478
Selecting actions................................... 479
O
Objects in the vehicle interior
Limited protection.................................. 116
Occupant presence reminder
Activating/deactivating.......................... 147
Function................................................ 146
Occupant safety
Airbag.................................................... 121
Basic information................................... 104
Child seat.............................................. 123
Information on the child restraint sys-
tem........................................................ 111
Information on the correct seat posi-
tion........................................................ 105
Occupant presence reminder................. 146
Pets in the vehicle.................................. 116
PRE-SAFE®............................................ 112
O-road menu
Overview................................................ 502
Setting................................................... 502
On-board diagnostics interface....................... 96
On-board electronics
Engine electronics................................. 676
Two-way radios...................................... 676
On-demand feature........................................ 87
Online services............................................ 102
Open Source Soware................................. 103
Open/close garage door.............................. 332
Open/close gate.......................................... 332
Opening the boot lid using your foot
HANDS-FREE ACCESS........................... 160
968 Index
F206 0119 02
Operating uids
AdBlue®................................................. 805
Additives................................................ 802
Brake uid............................................. 808
Coolant.................................................. 808
Diesel.................................................... 802
Engine oil............................................... 806
Notes..................................................... 799
Petrol............................................. 800, 801
Windscreen washer uid.................. 51, 809
Operating safety
48 V on-board electrical system............... 88
High-voltage on-board electrical system... 88
Outside mirrors
Automatic anti-dazzle mode................... 239
Automatic mirror folding function........... 240
Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot
Assist.................................................... 384
Folding in/out........................................ 238
Memory function................................... 195
Parking position..................................... 239
Setting................................................... 238
Warning lamp......................................... 384
Overhead control panel.................................. 78
P
Paint code................................................... 797
Park position
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 289
Parking
Active Parking Assist.............................. 410
PARKTRONIC......................................... 406
Prior booking......................................... 546
Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist.............................. 410
Memory Parking Assist.......................... 420
PARKTRONIC......................................... 406
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Activating/deactivating.......................... 409
Adjusting warning tones......................... 409
Function................................................ 406
Parking assistance systems
Active Parking Assist.............................. 410
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Manoeuvering brake function................. 418
Memory Parking Assist.......................... 420
PARKTRONIC......................................... 406
Parking brake............................................... 333
Parking charges
Paying.................................................... 547
Parking lights............................................... 220
Parking option
Displaying on the map............................ 545
Parking position
Outside mirrors...................................... 239
Storing the front-passenger outside
mirror using the memory button............... 67
Storing the position of the passenger
outside mirror using reverse gear........... 240
Parking service
Displaying a parking option on the map.. 545
Paying parking charges.......................... 547
Prior booking of a parking space............ 546
Selecting parking options....................... 545
Parking space
Finding.................................................. 545
Parking up................................................... 338
PARKTRONIC............................................... 406
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Status display, front passenger airbag.... 109
Pedestrian protection................................... 614
Index 969
F206 0119 02
Period out of use
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 338
Permissible axle load.................................... 797
Permitted towing methods
Overview........................................ 648, 649
Petrol................................................... 800, 801
Pets in the vehicle........................................ 116
Photos
Gallery app............................................ 579
PIN protection
System PIN protection........................... 490
Plug-in hybrid operation
Charging cable control panel.................. 312
Charging the high-voltage battery at a
rapid charging station (mode 4).............. 311
Ending the charging process (alternat-
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 318
Ending the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 323
Function of the recuperative brake
system................................................... 276
Functions of the energy ow display....... 501
Haptic accelerator pedal........................ 280
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 314
Manually disconnecting the high-volt-
age on-board electrical system............... 259
Maximum charging current (mains
socket).................................................. 312
Notes on charging (charging station,
mode 3)................................................. 310
Notes on charging (mains socket,
mode 2)................................................. 309
Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 310
Notes on plug-in hybrid operation........... 258
Operating safety...................................... 88
Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 280
Sets recuperation.......................... 276, 277
Starting the charging process (alter-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 315
Starting the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 321
Stowing the charging cable.................... 308
POI Selecting............................................... 511
POI symbols
Selecting............................................... 539
Post-collision brake...................................... 114
Power closing function
Boot lid.................................................. 158
Power meter, Output
Function/note....................................... 451
Power supply
Start/stop button.................................. 261
Switching on (start/stop button)............ 261
Pre-entry climate control
activating/deactivating for departure
time....................................................... 253
At departure time................................... 253
At time of departure............................... 252
immediate.............................................. 254
When the vehicle is unlocked................. 251
When vehicle is unlocked............... 250, 251
Pre-heating.................................................. 250
PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection
Function................................................ 112
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................. 112
Reversing measures............................... 113
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Function................................................ 113
Inating................................................. 115
970 Index
F206 0119 02
PRE-SAFE® PLUS
Function................................................ 113
Reversing measures............................... 113
Preventative occupant protection system
............................................................ 112, 113
Programme.......................................... 282, 284
Protection
Limited.................................................. 116
Protection against collision
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Manoeuvering brake function................. 418
Protection of the environment
Driving style............................................. 85
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 85
Pulling away
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Hill Start Assist...................................... 348
Optimised acceleration.......................... 267
Q
Qibla............................................................ 543
QR code rescue card................................ 59, 99
Qualied specialist workshop......................... 97
R
RACE START
Activating............................................... 392
Activation conditions.............................. 392
Information............................................ 392
Racetrack mode
AMG ceramic high-performance com-
posite brake system............................... 271
AMG steering-wheel buttons.................. 281
Radar and ultrasonic sensors....................... 339
Radio
Activating............................................... 604
Activating/deactivating radio text.......... 607
Calling up a slide show........................... 606
Calling up the station list........................ 605
Deleting stations.................................... 605
Displaying radio text............................... 607
Editing station presets............................ 605
Entering a frequency directly............ 40, 605
Frequency x......................................... 606
Managing favourites............................... 605
MBUX voice commands......................... 459
Menu....................................................... 20
Moving stations..................................... 605
Overview................................................ 604
Searching for a channel.................... 40, 605
Setting a channel................................... 605
Setting station tracking.......................... 606
Setting station tracking (Internet
Radio).................................................... 606
Setting the frequency band.................... 605
Setting the trac information service
volume increase..................................... 607
Showing/hiding lyrics............................ 607
Station suggestion................................. 605
Storing radio stations............................. 605
Switching a slide show o/on................ 606
Radio (audio system)
Switching trac announcements
on/o............................................. 67, 606
Radio announcements
Activating or deactivating....................... 606
Selecting............................................... 607
Radio regulations
Importer information.............................. 796
Regulatory radio identication................ 681
Specic absorption rate......................... 794
Wireless applications............................. 678
Index 971
F206 0119 02
Rain closing function
Side windows......................................... 164
Sliding sunroof....................................... 168
Rain sensor
Side windows......................................... 164
Sliding sunroof....................................... 168
Windscreen wipers................................. 234
Range
AdBlue®................................................. 443
REACH regulation........................................... 98
Reading lamp
Interior lighting....................................... 232
Rear axle level control.................................. 391
Rear axle steering........................................ 271
Rear compartment climate control............... 247
Rear door (child safety lock)
Securing................................................ 144
Rear fog lamp............................................... 221
Rear fog light............................................... 221
Rear seat belt
Status display........................................ 108
Rear window
Roller sunblind....................................... 171
Rear window heater.............................. 241, 242
Rear-view mirror
Automatic anti-dazzle mode................... 239
Rearward-facing child seat
Information............................................ 129
Recuperation
Function................................................ 276
Setting........................................... 276, 277
Recycling....................................................... 85
Reducing agent
AdBlue®........................................... 27, 303
Refuelling
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in
hybrid with petrol engine)....................... 302
Fuel................................................. 24, 298
Refuelling the vehicle....................... 24, 298
Topping up AdBlue®......................... 27, 303
Registration................................................... 97
Remote Online
Charging the starter battery................... 265
Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 264
Starting the vehicle................................ 265
Replacement key.......................................... 152
Reserve
Fuel....................................................... 804
Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)............... 804
Resetting
MBUX reset function.............................. 494
Residual heat............................................... 248
Responsibility
Driving safety systems........................... 338
Restraint system
Basic information................................... 104
Basic instructions for children................ 123
Deployment situations........................... 115
Functionality.......................................... 107
Information on function.......................... 115
Information on the correct seat posi-
tion........................................................ 105
Limited protection.................................. 116
Malfunction........................................... 107
Protection.............................................. 105
Self-test................................................. 107
Warning lamp......................................... 107
972 Index
F206 0119 02
Reverse gear
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 289
Reversing camera
360° Camera......................................... 396
Activate via GPS..................................... 405
Function................................................ 396
Manage activation points....................... 405
Opening the camera cover..................... 406
Rocking free................................................. 294
Roll away protection..................................... 347
Roller sunblind
Rear window.......................................... 171
Side windows......................................... 170
Sliding sunroof....................................... 166
Roof load..................................................... 812
Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)............. 812
Roof luggage rack
Loading............................................ 40, 208
Securing.......................................... 40, 208
Route
Accepting a detour recommendation...... 519
Adjusting on the map............................. 525
Alternative route............................ 515, 523
Calculating............................................. 515
Calculating alternative routes................. 519
Commuter route............................. 515, 524
Displaying destination information.......... 521
Displaying the route list.......................... 523
Editing a stored route............................. 526
Low emission zone................................. 518
Navigation............................................. 508
Planning................................................. 522
Range on Map service............................ 518
Recording.............................................. 526
Saving a recorded route......................... 526
Selecting a type..................................... 519
Selecting notications............................ 521
Selecting options................................... 520
Starting a saved route............................ 526
Starting the automatic service station
search................................................... 526
Switching the automatic lling station
search on/o........................................ 525
Route guidance
Cancelling.............................................. 531
Changing direction................................. 528
Destination reached............................... 530
Lane recommendations.......................... 529
Motorway information............................ 530
Notes..................................................... 527
O-road................................................. 531
Route guidance with augmented reality
Activating............................................... 538
Activating/deactivating the trac
light view............................................... 384
Displaying road names/house num-
bers....................................................... 538
Overview................................................ 537
Route-based operating-mode strategy
Function................................................ 280
Route-based speed adaptation
Function................................................ 361
Setting................................................... 362
Run-at characteristics................................ 635
Running-in notes.......................................... 266
S
Safety system.............................................. 340
Safety vest....................................... 36, 58, 632
Satellite map................................................ 543
Index 973
F206 0119 02
Saving a destination suggestion as a
favourite...................................................... 532
Searching for a channel.......................... 40, 605
Seat, Front seat, Through-loading feature
Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 177
Adjusting electrically.............................. 179
Automatic adjustment............................ 186
Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest)..... 121
Conguring settings............................... 186
Correct driver's seat position................. 174
ENERGIZING seat kinetics...................... 502
Folding back the backrest (rear)....... 44, 204
Folding the backrest forwards (rear)
........................................................ 42, 202
Locking the backrest (rear).................... 205
Lumbar support..................................... 182
Manually adjusting................................. 175
Massage programmes............................ 187
Memory function................................... 195
Resetting settings (massage pro-
gramme)................................................ 187
Settings................................................... 80
Side airbag............................................ 121
Workout programmes............................. 187
Seat belt
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment............................................ 114
Adjusting the height............................... 107
Automatic tightening.............................. 114
Care...................................................... 629
Fastening............................................... 107
Notes on wearing correctly.................... 106
Rear seat belt status display................... 108
Releasing............................................... 120
Warning lamp......................................... 108
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating.......................... 114
Function................................................ 114
Seat belt tensioners
Inating................................................. 115
Seat belt warning......................................... 108
Seat heating
Activating/deactivating.......................... 187
Seat kinetics
Setting................................................... 502
Seat ventilation
Activating/deactivating.......................... 188
Second telephone
Connecting............................................ 554
Selecting a gear................................... 294, 295
Selecting a sound characteristic (steering-
wheel button)............................................... 280
Selecting the sound prole
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 610
Selector lever............................................... 289
Self-test
Automatic front passenger airbag shut
o.......................................................... 109
Restraint system.................................... 107
Sensors
Cleaning................................................ 627
Information............................................ 339
Service
Menu (driver's display)........................... 443
Service centre............................................... 97
Service due date.......................................... 612
Service interval display................................. 612
974 Index
F206 0119 02
Service station search
Starting automatic search...................... 526
Setting the date format................................ 486
Setting the distance unit.............................. 490
Settings
Information.............................................. 23
Shiing
Automatic transmission.................. 294, 295
Gearshi recommendation..................... 297
Manual.......................................... 294, 295
Steering wheel gearshi paddles.... 294, 295
Shortening the braking distance
Brake Assist System............................... 341
Shunting assistant........................................ 424
Shunting support......................................... 417
Side airbag................................................... 121
Side window
Close with key........................................ 165
Convenience closing.............................. 165
Convenience opening............................. 164
Opening with the key.............................. 164
Side windows
Automatic function................................. 164
Child safety lock (rear)........................... 145
Opening/closing.................................... 163
Problem................................................. 165
Rain closing function.............................. 164
Roller sunblind....................................... 170
Skid chains............................................ 50, 658
Sliding roof
Close with key........................................ 165
Opening with the key.............................. 164
Sliding sunroof, Panorama sliding sunroof
Automatic functions............................... 168
Opening/closing.................................... 166
Problem................................................. 169
Rain closing function.............................. 168
Smartphone integration
Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto.................. 22
Snow chains.......................................... 50, 658
Socket
12 V...................................................... 215
Trailer operation..................................... 429
Socket ap................................................... 305
SOS button.................................................. 572
Sound
AMG Real Performance Sound............... 280
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................. 112
Wheels/tyres......................................... 658
Sound settings
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings.................................................. 608
Automatic loudness normalisation.......... 608
Calling up the sound menu..................... 608
Setting the balance and fader................. 608
Spare parts.................................................... 86
Spare wheel................................................. 673
Specialist workshop....................................... 97
Specic absorption rate (SAR)...................... 794
Speed
Limit, Limiter.......................................... 351
Save, cruise control............................... 357
Save, DISTRONIC................................... 357
Save, Limiter.......................................... 357
Speed adjustment, route-based.................... 361
Speed control
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 354
Cruise control........................................ 350
Index 975
F206 0119 02
Limiter................................................... 351
Speed limit
Winter tyres..................................... 50, 354
Speed Limit Assist
Setting................................................... 378
System limits......................................... 375
Standing lights............................................. 220
Start-o assist
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Hill Start Assist...................................... 348
Optimised acceleration.......................... 267
Start/stop button
Parking the vehicle................................. 326
Starting the vehicle................................ 262
Switching on the power supply / vehi-
cle......................................................... 261
Start/stop function...................................... 272
Starter battery
Charging via Remote Online................... 265
Starting assistance................................. 60, 645
Starting the engine
Emergency operation mode.................... 263
Remote Online....................................... 265
Start/stop button.................................. 262
Starting-o aid
Drive Away Assist................................... 416
Hill Start Assist...................................... 348
Optimised acceleration.......................... 267
Station
Deleting................................................. 605
Entering a frequency directly............ 40, 605
Frequency x......................................... 606
Managing favourites............................... 605
Moving................................................... 605
Setting................................................... 605
Storing................................................... 605
Station list
Calling up.............................................. 605
Station presets
Editing................................................... 605
Station suggestion
Radio..................................................... 605
Station tracking
Setting................................................... 606
Setting (Internet Radio).......................... 606
Stationary heater/ventilation
Activating/deactivating.................... 56, 255
Operating.............................................. 256
Status display
Front passenger airbag........................... 109
Rear seat belt........................................ 108
Steer Assist
Active Steering Assist............................. 363
STEER CONTROL................................... 347
STEER CONTROL......................................... 347
Steering
Rear axle steering.................................. 271
Steering wheel
Adjusting electrically.............................. 190
Driver's airbag....................................... 121
Manually adjusting................................. 189
Memory function................................... 195
Steering wheel heater............................ 191
Steering wheel adjustment........................... 190
Steering wheel gearshi paddles.......... 294, 295
Steering wheel heater
Decoupling from the seat heating........... 192
Stop/start
ECO start/stop function........................ 273
976 Index
F206 0119 02
Stopping
Parking the vehicle................................. 326
Stowage areas....................................... 48, 198
Stowage space
Rear centre console............................... 201
Stowage space under the boot oor....... 45, 207
Stowage spaces
Armrest (front)......................... 48, 198, 199
Centre console (front).............. 48, 198, 199
Door................................................ 48, 198
Glove compartment......................... 48, 198
Streaming online music................................ 603
Suggestions
Conguring............................................ 490
Deleting................................................. 491
Sulphur content................................... 800, 801
Supersport menu display content
Selecting............................................... 446
Suspension
Air suspension....................................... 391
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL.................... 391
Level regulation...................................... 391
SVHC
Substances of very high concern.............. 98
Switch-o delay time
Exterior.................................................. 232
Interior................................................... 234
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o....... 248
Switching loudness normalisation on/o
Advanced sound system......................... 611
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys-
tem........................................................ 609
System PIN protection
Activating/deactivating.......................... 490
System settings
Activating/deactivating system PIN
protection.............................................. 490
MBUX reset function.............................. 494
Setting the distance unit........................ 490
Setting the time zone............................. 486
Setting the time/date format................. 486
Transmission of the vehicle position....... 487
T
Tabs
managing............................................... 594
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles..................... 85
Tank content
AdBlue®................................................. 805
Fuel....................................................... 804
Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)............... 804
Reserve................................................. 804
Reserve (fuel), (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 804
Tank ller cap / ap............................... 24, 298
Technical data
Axle load (trailer operation).................... 819
Axle load (trailer operation),
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...................... 819
Fastening points of the trailer hitch........ 816
High-voltage battery....................... 813, 815
Information............................................ 676
Maximum speeds........................... 812, 813
Mounting dimensions of a trailer hitch.... 816
Overhang dimension of the trailer hitch.. 816
Radio frequencies.................................. 677
Radio regulations................................... 681
Roof load............................................... 812
Specic absorption rate (SAR)................ 794
Tongue weight........................................ 818
Index 977
F206 0119 02
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 819
Towing capacity..................................... 817
Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 817
Vehicle dimensions................................ 810
Telediagnosis
Diagnostic data...................................... 613
Telediagnostics
Transferred data..................................... 614
Telemetry display......................................... 498
Telephone, Smartphone
Activating functions during a call............ 557
Calls with several participants................ 557
Changing a function............................... 554
Connecting a mobile phone.............. 12, 553
Disconnecting a mobile phone............... 555
Emergency call................................. 69, 582
Importing contacts................................. 559
Importing contacts (overview)................ 559
Incoming call during an existing call....... 558
Information...................................... 16, 553
Interchanging mobile phones................. 554
MBUX voice commands......................... 459
Notes..................................................... 551
Notes on wireless charging (mobile
phone)................................................... 216
Operating modes................................... 553
Reception and transmission volume....... 555
Secure Simple Pairing...................... 12, 553
Setting the ringtone............................... 556
Smartphone integration........................... 22
Telephone menu overview...................... 552
Telephone operation.............................. 557
Voice recognition................................... 556
Wirelessly charging a(mobile phone,
front)..................................................... 217
Telephone (audio system)
Replacing a mobile phone...................... 555
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth® telephony............................. 553
Television, Digital TV
MBUX voice commands......................... 459
Temperature
Setting........................................... 241, 242
Text messages............................................. 460
THERMATIC
Air conditioning control panel................. 241
THERMOTRONIC
Air conditioning control panel................. 242
Tie-down eyes........................................ 48, 206
Time
Manual time setting............................... 486
Setting the time zone............................. 486
Setting the time/date format................. 486
TIREFIT kit, Tyre ination compressor
Declaration of conformity......................... 94
Storage location............................... 64, 636
Tone settings
Information............................................ 608
Tongue weight.............................................. 818
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)...... 819
Top Tether.................................................... 142
Topographical compensation, Predictive
headlamp range control............................... 225
Torque (driver's display)........................ 445, 446
Touch Control
Driver's display...................................... 435
MBUX.................................................... 470
Setting the sensitivity............................. 471
978 Index
F206 0119 02
Touch-sensitive controls................................. 87
Touchscreen
Entering characters................................ 484
Switching haptic operation on and o.... 472
Tow bar system
Towing away.......................................... 434
Tow-away protection.................................... 172
Tow-starting................................................. 653
Towing
Pulling/towing....................................... 434
Towing methods............................. 648, 649
Towing eye
Storage location..................................... 652
Towing methods
Both axles on the ground.................. 64, 650
Overview........................................ 648, 649
Track Pace
Menu (driver display).............................. 447
Track Race................................................... 495
Trac announcements (audio system)
Switching on/o.............................. 67, 606
Trac information
Car-to-X-Communication........................ 536
Displaying the trac map....................... 534
Displaying trac incidents..................... 534
Extending a Live Trac Information
subscription........................................... 533
Information on Live Trac Information... 533
Overview................................................ 532
Registering Live Trac Information......... 533
Trac Jam Assistant..................................... 363
Trac light view
Activating/deactivating.......................... 384
Information............................................ 384
Trac light warning/display......................... 379
Trac restrictions
Activating/deactivating.......................... 518
Service.................................................. 518
Trac Sign Assist
Function................................................ 379
Setting................................................... 383
Trailer coupling....................................... 45, 427
Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing..................... 434
Trailer hitch
Axle load................................................ 819
Axle load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....... 819
Bicycle rack........................................... 432
Care...................................................... 627
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 429
Fastening points.................................... 816
Folding the ball neck out/in............. 45, 427
General notes........................................ 816
Mounting dimensions............................. 816
Overhang dimension.............................. 816
Socket................................................... 429
Tongue weight........................................ 818
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 819
Towing capacity..................................... 817
Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 817
Trailer Manoeuvering Assist.................... 424
Trailer Manoeuvering Assist
Function................................................ 424
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist, Manoeuvring
assistant
Operation.............................................. 424
Trailer operation
Active Blind Spot Assist.......................... 387
Index 979
F206 0119 02
Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 388
Axle load................................................ 819
Bicycle rack........................................... 432
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 429
Folding the ball neck out/in............. 45, 427
Making settings..................................... 431
Notes..................................................... 426
Socket................................................... 429
Trailer stabilisation....................................... 345
Transferred vehicle data
Android Auto.......................................... 571
Apple CarPlay®...................................... 571
Transmission position display....................... 289
Transmission positions
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 289
Transporting
Vehicle.................................................. 651
TuneIn
Deleting stations.................................... 596
Logging out............................................ 596
Overview................................................ 595
Registering............................................. 596
Saving stations...................................... 596
Selecting and connecting a station......... 596
Selecting stream.................................... 596
Setting options...................................... 596
Turn signal indicator..................................... 222
Turn signal light............................................ 222
TV MBUX voice commands......................... 459
Two-way radios
Frequencies........................................... 677
Installation............................................. 676
Transmission output............................... 677
Type approval number EG............................. 797
Tyre pressure
Notes..................................................... 659
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 636
Tyre pressure table................................. 660
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function................................................ 661
Restarting.............................................. 662
Tyre pressure table....................................... 660
Tyre sealant................................................. 636
Tyre tread......................................... 35, 50, 658
Tyre-change tool............................. 63, 666, 667
Tyre-change tool kit........................ 63, 666, 667
Tyres
Breakdown....................................... 62, 634
Checking................................... 35, 50, 658
Checking temperature............................ 661
Fitting.................................................... 670
Interchanging......................................... 665
MOExtended.......................................... 635
Noise..................................................... 658
Notes on tting...................................... 662
Removing............................................... 670
Removing/tting hub cap....................... 667
Replacing....................................... 662, 667
Selection............................................... 662
Snow chains.................................... 50, 658
Storing................................................... 666
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 636
Tyre pressure table................................. 660
Unusual handling characteristics............ 658
U
Understated menu display content
Selecting....................................... 438, 441
Unfastening................................................. 120
980 Index
F206 0119 02
Units of measurement
Setting................................................... 490
Unlocking setting......................................... 149
Updating soware, System update,
Update
Error message........................................ 493
Information............................................ 491
Performing............................................. 491
URLSharing.................................................. 594
USB port
Rear....................................................... 216
Stowage compartments (front)......... 48, 198
USB port (multimedia system)
Connecting devices................................ 600
User proles, Personalisation
Adding a user......................................... 474
Notes..................................................... 472
Overview................................................ 473
Requirements for use............................. 473
Selecting a user..................................... 476
Selecting options................................... 474
Synchronising........................................ 476
User-specic content............................. 473
V
Variable limiter............................................. 351
Vehicle, Switching on the ignition
48 V on-board electrical system............... 88
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 338
Additional door lock............................... 152
Correct use.............................................. 98
Data storage............................................ 99
Diagnostics connection............................ 96
Emergency key....................................... 156
enabling, Remote Online........................ 265
High-voltage on-board electrical system... 88
Implied warranty...................................... 99
Information.............................................. 22
KEYLESS-GO.......................................... 154
lock automatically (MMS)....................... 155
Lock/unlock (emergency key)................ 156
Locking/unlocking (from inside)............. 153
Lowering................................................ 672
Medical aids............................................ 98
Parking up............................................. 338
QR code rescue card......................... 59, 99
Raising................................................... 668
REACH regulation.................................... 98
Registration............................................. 97
Rocking free.......................................... 294
Set collision detection.................... 336, 337
Standby mode function.......................... 338
Starting (start/stop button)................... 262
starting, emergency operation mode...... 263
Stopping................................................ 326
SVHC/substances of very high concern... 98
Switching o.......................................... 326
switching o (start/stop button)............ 326
Switching on (start/stop button)............ 261
Towing................................................... 434
Towing away................................... 648, 649
Transporting.......................................... 651
ventilate / comfort opening................... 164
Voice commands for MBUX voice
assistant................................................ 460
Vehicle cameras........................................... 339
Vehicle data
Display, MBUX....................................... 288
Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT................ 288
Maximum speeds........................... 812, 813
Roof load............................................... 812
Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)....... 812
Transferring to Android Auto................... 571
Transferring to Apple CarPlay®............... 571
Index 981
F206 0119 02
Vehicle height........................................ 810
Vehicle height (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 811
Vehicle length........................................ 810
Vehicle length (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)...................................................... 811
Vehicle width......................................... 810
Vehicle width (Mercedes-AMG vehicle)... 811
Wheelbase............................................. 810
Wheelbase (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)..... 811
Vehicle dimensions...................................... 810
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)............................................................ 811
Vehicle emergency start............................... 653
Vehicle identication number....................... 797
Vehicle identication plate
Axle load................................................ 797
EU type approval number....................... 797
Gross mass............................................ 797
Model type............................................ 797
Paint code............................................. 797
VIN........................................................ 797
Vehicle interior
Cooling/heating (Remote Online)........... 264
Vehicle key................................................... 148
Vehicle location
Switching transmission on/o............... 487
Vehicle position
Sharing with a contact........................... 543
Storing................................................... 532
Vehicle sensors............................................ 339
Vehicle socket
Care...................................................... 627
Indicator lamps...................................... 314
Vehicle start
Emergency operation mode.................... 263
Remote Online....................................... 265
Start/stop button.................................. 262
Vehicle tool kit
TIREFIT kit........................................ 64, 636
Towing eye............................................. 652
Ventilation............................................ 164, 257
Vents
Air vents................................................ 257
Video recordings
Gallery app............................................ 579
VIN Engine compartment.............................. 797
Identication plate................................. 797
Seat....................................................... 797
Vision
Demisting windows................................ 247
Voice assistant
Voice prompting..................................... 455
Voice recognition......................................... 556
W
Warning system............................................ 171
Warning triangle............................... 37, 59, 633
Warning/indicator lamp
! ABS warning lamp........................ 929
Ó Active Brake Assist warning
lamp...................................................... 934
Û ATTENTION ASSIST warning
lamp...................................................... 932
J Brakes warning lamp (red)............ 928
J Brakes warning lamp (yellow)....... 927
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 923
982 Index
F206 0119 02
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)...... 924
â DRIFT MODE warning lamp.......... 934
! Electric parking brake indicator
lamp (red).............................................. 927
! Electric parking brake indicator
lamp (yellow).......................................... 927
# Electrical fault warning lamp
...................................................... 921, 925
; Engine diagnostics warning
lamp...................................................... 925
p Engine operating temperature
warning lamp................................. 925, 926
å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... 931
÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes.......... 930
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 930
8 Fuel reserve warning lamp
lights up................................................. 926
H Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system warning lamp............................. 935
p Occupant presence reminder
warning lamp (white).............................. 919
p Occupant presence reminder
warning lamp (yellow)............................. 920
Ù Power steering warning lamp
(red)...................................................... 922
Ù Power steering warning lamp
(yellow).................................................. 922
Ù Rear axle steering warning
lamp (yellow).......................................... 922
_ Reduced-power warning lamp...... 920
6 Restraint system warning lamp..... 918
ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes..... 919
ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 919
ê Speed Limit Assist warning
lamp...................................................... 933
ä Suspension warning lamp (yel-
low)....................................................... 935
Ú System error warning lamp.......... 920
ê Trac Sign Assist warning lamp... 933
ï Trailer hitch warning lamp............ 921
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem warning lamp ashes....................... 936
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem warning lamp lights up.................... 936
L Warning lamp for distance
warning.................................................. 933
Warning/indicator lamps
Driver's display...................................... 916
PASSENGER AIR BAG............................. 109
Washer uid
Topping up................................. 29, 52, 621
Windscreen washer uid.................. 51, 809
Washing by hand.......................................... 625
Water tank................................................... 622
Wear
Limited protection.................................. 116
Weather information..................................... 544
Web browser
Calls up options..................................... 593
Deleting browser data............................ 594
Index 983
F206 0119 02
Web browsers
Calling up a web page............................ 592
Calling up the settings............................ 594
Deleting a bookmark.............................. 594
Managing bookmarks............................. 594
Setting in the background...................... 595
Sharing URLs......................................... 594
Tabs....................................................... 594
Weight information....................................... 797
What3words
Destination entry with a 3 word
address................................................. 513
Wheel change
Fitting a new wheel................................ 670
Lowering the vehicle.............................. 672
Preparation............................................ 667
Raising the vehicle................................. 668
Removing a wheel.................................. 670
Removing/tting hub caps..................... 667
Wheel rotation............................................. 665
Wheels
Breakdown....................................... 62, 634
Care...................................................... 627
Checking................................... 35, 50, 658
Checking tyre temperature..................... 661
Fitting.................................................... 670
Interchanging......................................... 665
MOExtended.......................................... 635
Noise..................................................... 658
Notes on tting...................................... 662
Removing............................................... 670
Removing/tting hub cap....................... 667
Replacing....................................... 662, 667
Selection............................................... 662
Snow chains.................................... 50, 658
Storing................................................... 666
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 636
Tyre pressure......................................... 659
Tyre pressure monitoring system............ 661
Unusual handling characteristics............ 658
Wi-Fi
Activating/deactivating.......................... 488
Information on connection..................... 488
Setting up a hotspot............................... 488
Setting up an Internet connection.......... 590
Window airbag............................................. 121
Windows
Care...................................................... 627
Convenience opening............................. 164
De-icing................................................. 245
Opening with the key.............................. 164
Opening/closing.................................... 163
Opening/closing (air recirculation
button)..................................................... 66
Rear window.......................................... 171
Removing mist....................................... 247
Roller sunblind....................................... 171
Windscreen
De-icing................................................. 245
Demisting...................................... 241, 242
Windscreen washer uid......................... 51, 809
Windscreen washer system.............. 29, 52, 621
Windscreen wipers
Activating/deactivating.......................... 234
Replacing the wiper blades......... 31, 53, 235
Replacing the wiper blades (wind-
screen)...................................... 31, 53, 235
Winter operation
Snow chains.................................... 50, 658
Winter tyres
Limiter............................................. 50, 354
Setting the permanent speed limit.... 50, 354
984 Index
F206 0119 02
Wiper blades
Care...................................................... 627
Replacing (windscreen).............. 31, 53, 235
Wipers......................................................... 234
Wireless applications.................................... 678
Wireless charging
Mobile phone (front).............................. 217
Notes..................................................... 216
Workout programmes................................... 187
Workshop....................................................... 97
Z
Zero layer
Function................................................ 464
Overview................................................ 465
Index 985
F206 0119 02
F206 0119 02
F206 0119 02
F206 0119 02
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found
on the following websites:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com
https://group.mercedes-benz.com
Documentation team
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Owner's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Mercedes‑Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla-
ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from
Mercedes‑Benz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart
Germany
As at 12.04.23
F206 0119 02
Digital – in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital – on the Internet Digital – as an App
Discover the Operator's Manual in
the multimedia system under
"Vehicle". Begin with quick start,
discover highlights and useful tips.
Here you can nd comprehensive
information about operating your
vehicle and about services and
guarantees in printed form.
You can nd the Operator's Man-
ual on the Mercedes-Benz home-
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is
available free-of-charge in familiar
App stores.
Apple® iOS AndroidTM
Order no. F206 0119 02
Edition ÄJ2023-2a
F206 0119 02
983

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2023 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2023 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 48.79 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2023

Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2023 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 1012 pagina's

Mercedes C-Klasse Limousine 2023 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 1012 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info